The Collecting net

ras.
inte tst.o. 25

a tard ioe b

Xs.

pets
= ;
secatettneterts ste?
Perera: ee
+-* 07
sere
staat
Peers
ssgseane toprantgeetemeetE
Se

ara
nheatess

re

Sp aetan erates:
ser ees
“a
ere base rs

pats
itatetels

ae
SO a Bas,
Pee ie
sae ees

Sarat
ate ta’
rece ears.

or
Liss
ote
arure.

seh gate
a
re
>.
tet

tet yteearetete?
Sas

Rete te
Stet

rt

Meebo dese reses
slate lente

Sede ie See ae

te aoe n
rete nate tote:
ris tee ot
cores
eteietelatabelets eB MTR sete telat
oe ree tats * oe
= etatatetstatatetstrtetsta!

ott,

Pe

Soares
Doe e ae Tees ere le

/
t
H

yy,

Teter

*

SERN ARRAS
sieteteitets®,
water eit tate

1
Stecstett one
spestasgteterserecretcs
ensreeoe

* p23 if te!
a i i
sfentitt eh ite
| : ie te os

Tht ssgngsensaontas bot
Meet at at sielet tanta
ree he
GIFT
78)

re +
th Ce bs ae a
behest teh :
Tetptert i ‘} et
Sea 3s che te
te :
gf i ‘ ig neat :

*

sTiTatatel
Bite ! atte
aot ti ree cf

ee ait
petrtiatettte ne

752i

ae ie
Tint

t His :

acess

3

ia oe ae
te

.
.

eh ete’ te at pt 7%
Petree HH :

y,

he

Vol. VI. No. 1

SATURDAY, JUNE 27, 1931

ANNUAL SupscripTION, $2.00
SincLE Copies 25 Crs.

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT COLD THE HEME PIGMENTS AS OXYGEN CAR-
RIERS AND AS OXIDATION CATALYSTS

SPRING HARBOR
Dr. Recrnatp G. Harris
Director of the Laboratory
The Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring
Harbor of 1931, is in many ways, a different in-
stitution from that of 1928 when I last had the

opportunity of writing about
it for THe CotrectinG NEt.
This is due, not to a change in
aims, but to a realization of
some of them, and to a partial
fulfilment of certain of the
prophecies which were made
at that time.

One of the most significant
of these changes is the forma-
tion of a small permanent staff
of investigators who carry on
their work at the Laboratory
throughout the year.

The development of biology
in the last generation has
necessitated marked changes
in biological laboratories, and
seaside laboratories have been
found to move along in the
procession. There was a time

when nearly all the summer laboratory had to
supply was a building in which to work and a
place to sleep. The Marine Biological Laboratory
at Wocds Hole and the (Continued on Page 3)

The Biological Laboratory at

Harbor,
Dr. Reeinald G. Harris

The Heme Pigments as Oxygen Carriers and

as Oxidation Catalysts,
Dr. Leonor Michaelis

The Course in Physiology at the Marine Bio-

logical Laboratory,
Professor W. R. Amberson

Evening Seminar.

Evening Lecture.

Cold Spring

M. B. L. Calendar

TUESDAY, JUNE 30, 8:00 P. M.

Dr. G. S. Dodds,
“Oseoelasts and Chondroclasts”.
Dr. A. W. Pollister, “The Archi-
teeture of the Liver Cells of
Amphiuma”.

Dr. G. H. Parker, “Passage of
Sperms and Eggs through the
Mammalian Oviduet”.

FRIDAY, JULY 3, 8:00 P. M.

Professor E. B.
Wilson, DaCosta professor emeri-
tus, Columbia University, “The
Central Bodies”.

Dr. LEonor MICHAELIS
Member, Rockefeller Institute
Hemoglobin consists of globin, a protein, and
heme, a compound of iron with a porphyrin mole-
cule, which in its turn is a complicated ring made

up by the linkage of four
pytrhol rings. | Hemoglobin
can be oxidized in two dif-
ferent ways. Either it com-
bines reversibly with molecu-
lar oxygen without the iron
atom being oxidized from the
ferro state to the ferri. This
is called oxygenation. Or the
ferro state is oxidized to the
ferri, a true oxidation, and the
oxidized hemoglobin is called
methemoglobin. Many iron-
porphyrin compounds are
found in all cells and tissues.
They belong to the family of
the hemin compounds, namely
the various forms of cyto-
chrome as found by Keilin
and Warburg's respiration
ferment.

The oxidation of hemoglobin to methemoglobin
can be performed by various oxidants, but does
not take place with any appreciable rate when
molecular oxygen is used as oxidant, oxygenation

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Course in Embryology at the Marine Bio-

logical Laboratory,

1 IPnotessoi ewe GOOdrT Ch tae tennant 7
Directory for 1931 8
1 Editorial Page , 14
Items of Interest 15
Woods Hole Log 30
6 Currents in the Hole 39

$n t

[ Vor. VI. No: 41

D Lt ECOLERCRING NED

taking place instead. Hemoglobin is, therefore,
not autoxidizable. This, of course, is the condi-
tion necessary for its ability of acting as oxygen
carrier. Most of the other heme compounds, in
their ferro state, in contrast herewith, are
autoxidizable and can be oxidized directly by
molecular oxygen to the ferri state. This is the
condition necessary for an iron compound to act
as an oxidation catalyst, i. e., a catalyst which
enables the otherwise inert oxygen to act as
oxidant for organic foodstuffs.

The problem of this lecture is to correlate the
chemical constitution of an iron compound with
its property either as oxygen carrier or as oxygen
catalyst. We have to consider as an introduction
to this problem the general properties of ordinary
complex iron compounds.

A complex compound arises when the e'ectron
pair which represents the chemical bond is fur-
nished by only one of the two atoms which are
to combine. The accepting atom (Fe) utilizes
the electron pair furnished by the donator (say,
the cyanide-ion) to fill up its electron shells to
that complete state which is found in the noble
gas krypton. Taking into account the number of
electrons already present in the ferro ion, just
six cyanide ions turn out to be necessary to fill
up the electron shells to the krypton model. A
main valence, in contrast herewith, is a shared
electron pair of which one electron is furnished
by one, and the other electron by the other of
the two atoms which are to combine.

In the heme compounds, the four nitrogen
atoms of the four pyrrhol groups are attached
to the iron. Two of them are present as NH,
and the H atom must be replaced by the Fe atom.
They may be said to be attached to Fe by main
valences. The other two are present as N without
H. They may be said to be attached to the iron
by coordinative or residual valences. For spacial
reasons only one molecule of the porphyrin can
combine with iron, although it occupies only four
of the six available coordination places of the iron
atom. Thus, two places are free which can com-
bine on the one side with such molecules as globin
or pyridine or nicotine, etc., and on the other hand
with such molecules as Os, or CO, or the cyanide
ion, etc. R

In order that a ferro compound be oxidized to
a ferri compound, the iron atom has to eject one
electron from its kernel and to deliver it to the
oxidant which thus is reduced. It is easier for
the iron atom to throw off this electron when the
iron atom is in an electro-neutral state than when
it is positively charged, on account of the electro-
static attraction. Therefore all iron compounds

in which the iron atom is present in the neutral
state should be expected to be autoxidizable and
all iron compounds in which the iron atom carries
its ionic positive charges should be difficult or
not at all autoxidizable. This has been experi-
mentally proved by C. VY. Smythe in my labora-
tory. The majority of the iron complexes are
easily autoxidizable, e. g., the complex with tar-
taric, oxalic, phyrophosphoric acid. Here the
positive charges of the ferro ion are abolished
by neutralization due to the negative charges of

the acidic ions which combine with the iron
through main valences. On the other hand, the

ferrous ion itself as it is present in an acid solu-
toin of ferrous sulphate, or in the iron complex
compound of alpha-alpha’-dipyridyl, or of phe-
nanthrolin, is not autoxidizable. In these cases
the ferrous ion remains positively charged even
in the complex compound because it is held only
by residual valences. The N-atoms of the two
just mentioned compounds contain no H-atoms
attached which could he replaced by the iron and
thus could establish a main valence. All six val-
ences of the complex consisting of one ferro ion
and three molecules of dipyridyl are residual val-
ences, and the ferrous ion remains doubly positive-
ly charged. Theretore it is not autoxidizable.

As hemoglobin is not autoxidizable the hy-
pothesis is offered that those two nitrogen atoms
which in ordinary porphyrin compounds are pre-
sent in the form of NH, are present in the por-
phyrin which is part of hemoglobin without a
hydrogen atom attached. As porphyrin contains
several unsaturated linkages and unsaturated side
chains, it is not difficult to imagine that the two
hydrogen atoms are shifted to such unsaturated
places. This shift is supposed io be intrinsically
connected with the attachment of globin. Details
cannot be offered, however, as yet. Such an
hypothesis would explain why hemoglobin is not
autoxidizable, and it may serve as a working
hypothesis and leading idea for the chemical re-
search of hemoglobin, the constitution of which
is not known in any detail at all.

Most of those other heme compounds which
are derivatives of the ordinary porphyrin com-
pounds are .expected and are proved 1o be
autoxidizable.

The problem as to under what condition a
compound can act as reversible oxygen carrier
can be answered in this way. It is more than
likely that any ferro-comp.ex which is auto-
xidizable can form an oxygenated ferro com-
pound as a very transient intermediary state
between the ferro and the ferri state. One of

June 27, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET _ 3

the various evidences for this assertion is the fact
that such ferro compounds can form molecular
compounds with carbon monoxide or with the
cyanide ion, which are always competitive with
moleculat oxygen in complex formation. So
our problem is reduced to the question: When is
such an oxygenated ferro compound stable instead
of being a transient state between ferro and ferri?

The answer is this. First of all, the ferro com-
pound must not be autoxidizable. Otherwise, the
oxygenated compound would not be stable. In
the second place, at least one of the six coordina-
tion places must be available for the oxygen mole-
cule to combine with. The first condition is ful-
filled for a compound such as the tri-dipyridyl
complex of ferrous iron. But the second condi-

tion is not fulfilled because all six coordination
places are exceedingly tightly occupied by the six
N-atoms of the three dipyridyl motecules. But
in hemoglobin, two coordination places are free
and available for other molecules. One of them
may be thought of as occupied by globin, and
the second is available for oxygen or carbon
monoxide or cyanide, which are competitive with
each other in their combining power to hemo-
globin.

So it has been shown that the constitution of
the porphyrin is in an ideal way adapted to the
physiological purpose to work in combination with
iron, either as oxygen catalyst, or by a slight
modification of the structure, as an oxygen
carrier.

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT COLD SPRING HARBOR
(Continued from Page 1)

Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor
were direct descendants of Agassiz’s mental
child “Study Nature not Books,” and in the
early days of both institutions field trips and
general biological and ecological observations
were the chief activities of the biologists and
students for whom the laboratories were formed.
A microscope and a little glassware were nearly
all that were needed even by the most exacting.
For some time the biologist could easily bring
with him all of the apparatus he would need
during the summer, and this could be set up
without loss of time.

_ While it is unquestionably still possible to make
important discoveries when one is armed only
with a microscope, a few chemicals, a modest
supply of glassware, and some unsuspecting ma-
rine animals, or eggs, the group of biologists
which limits itself to such needs is relatively
small. The researches of many others seem to
demand intricate and delicate apparatus, and
equipment that appears to be far from modest.

_ To deny such biologists the privilege of work-
ing at a seaside laboratory would be unfortunate
hoth for the biologist and for the laboratory, and
biology would suffer by reducing the scope of its
most active, and probably its most valuable, clear-
ing houses.

The result is that seaside laboratories, dedi-
cated primarily to research and to the advance-
ment of biology in the most fundamental sense,
have found it necessary to equip themselves with
apparatus and other facilities of considerable
value. In order to house properly such appara-
tus suitable buildings must be provided, and al-
most before we know it the plant of a modern
summer laboratory for biological research comes
to represent an investment of several hundreds

of thousands of dollars rather than a few thou-
sand dollars, as it did formerly.

Unquestionably such an investment is eminent-
ly worth while. The results, both visible and in-
visible, of the functioning of summer laboratories
in this country for the last forty years have been
so great as to warrant much larger expenditures.
But it is equally true that to have such valuable
establishments for research used actively for only
a very few months each year, is unfortunate.

The more the plant can be put to productive
use throughout the year the greater becomes the
return upon the investment, and in general, para-
doxically enough, the longer the life of the
equipment. Anything desirable which may be
adopted to bring this about is an obvious good.

All these are factors which entered very
strongly into the mental attitude which has led
to the formation of a small permanent staff at
the Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor.

At the same time we believe that the active
promotion of research throughout the year
gives an atmosphere to the whole laboratory
which the summer investigator and the student
find agreeable and stimulating.

The permanent work has been arranged with
a view to its value to the summer work as well
as to its intrinsic value.

The biophysical laboratory should serve ad-
mirably to illustrate this point. The research in
biophysics is of a very broad and fundamental
nature. It is concerned with, (1) the chemical
action of X-rays, with a view to carrying these
studies to the point where cells and tissues may
profitably be employed as experimental material ;
(2) soft X-ray photography is being intensively
studied with the hope of developing its applica-
tions to biological research; (3) the electrical

q THE COLLECTING NET |

[ Vot. VI. No. 41

capacity of biological cells and systems, and their
resistance to electric currents of high frequency
are subjects of major research at the laboratory
for biophysics because of the value which, in all
probability, will accrue to biology from additional
discoveries concerning them.

The equipment entailed by these studies, a
high voltage transformer, X-ray dosimeter, soft
X-ray outfits, vacuum pumps, high temperature
electric ovens, glassblower’s shop, machine shop,
special apparatus for gas analysis and for titra-
t'on, modified wheatstone bridge, all this is being
supplemented by other phy sical equipment w hich
may be used to advantage in biological problems.

Indeed for certain experimental work in biol-
ogy Agassiz’s motto might well be extended now
to include apparatus. Thus the location of a bio-
physical unit at a summer laboratory becomes a
matter of considerable importance as a source of
new tools for biological research. It provides an
unusual opportunity for the many biologists, both
students and investigators, who are interested in
the possibilities of applying physical methods to
biological problems, to become acquainted with
such methods, and with machines, their construc-
tion, and uses.

In this connection it is significant that we have
appointed a physicist in charge of the biophysical
laboratory here. Biophysics is clearly an applied
science. It involves the application of physics to
biological research. It would seem axiomatic
then ‘that a physicist should be in charge of the
laboratory which is to construct machines and
work out methods by which physics may be fur-
ther applied to biological research. The value
of such a man, and of such a laboratory, to the
summer work of the Biological Laboratory, is
obvious.

The all year staff is envisioned as having un-
usual flexibility, in respect to the number of its
members, and the nature of its works. The Bio-
logical Laboratory dees not wish to be perma-
nently committed to any division of biological re-
search. Its summer visitors represent nearly
every branch of biology, and it is desired that any
further dev elopment of the all year staff be broad
in its basis and fundamental in its conception. No
appointments are permanent, The continuance
of any work depends upon its apparent value to
biology and upon the ability of the Laboratory to
sponsor it. At the present time five different
types of work are being supported by the Lab-
oratory throughout the year. In addition to bio-
physics, researches are being conducted in phar-
macology, in physiology of reproduction, and in
certain aspects of bacter iology, and the publica-
tion of a series of monographs on the Bryo-

phytes, is being accomplished. During the last
two years the Laboratory has helped support,
throughout the year, the researches of Drs. W.
W. Swingle and J. J. Pliffner on the adrenal cor-
tex, but aid from other sources makes this no
longer necessary.

The research in pharmacology is concerned
with the action of drugs and factors modifying
such action, notably the relative amount of cal-
cium in the blood stream, the relative acidity of
the blood and, in the case of isolated organs, of
surrounding fluids, and the effect of diet.

The research concerning the physiology of re-
production is based upon factors regulating preg-
nancy, more especially the corpora lutea.

Two of the laboratory buildings are in use
thrcughout the year, and several ‘houses are kept
open for staff members, their associates and as-
sistants.

A second significant change in the Laboratory
during the last three years may be seen in a fur-
ther increase in the number of those carrying on
research there. During the summer of 1928 there
were, at the Laboratory, twenty-four people en-
gaged in sereach. This summer there are about
fifty. The number of students remains relatively
constant at about thi:ty-five. All of the courses
now give marked attention to individual re-
search. Indeed the course in Field Zoology,
which at one time wes known as the course in
High School Biology, has advanced to the point
where each student engages in an_ individual
problem of research as half of his work in course.

The courses given include, in addition to Field
Zoology, Field “Botany and Plant Ecology, Gen-
eral Phy siology, and Surgical Methods ain Ex-
perimental Biology. while. a series of lectures are
offered in Endocrinology.

A staggering of courses, somewhat similar to
that which was inaugurated at Woods Hole two
years ago, is now entering its second summer at
Cold Spring Harbor. This system has been applied
to the courses in Field Zoology and in Field Bot-
any, Zoology being given from about the middle
of June to the end of July, while botany is of-
fered durirg August and the first part of Sep-
tember. This has appeared to bring forth sey-
eral benefits, of which the use of student labora-
tories and living quarters for twelve weeks, rath-
er than six, with its consequent saving of space is
one of the most important. At the present time
only about one-fifth of the total laboratory space
is given over to students during the summer.
The research carried on during the summer coy-
ers, as would be expected, a wide variety of sub-
jects. Investigators at seaside laboratories have

June 27, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET Si

long since ceased limiting themselves to marine
material. Yet Cold Spring Harbor is probably
unique in the high percentage of investigators
who make use of mammals for experimental pur-
oses, At the same time, good advantage is
taken of the abundant marine material ‘at hand.
Three of the five laboratory buildings are
equipped with running sea-water, and a number
of students and workers make use of the facili-
ties thus available.

The management of the Laboratory continues
to rest ultimately with the Board of Directors,
which is composed of about equal numbers of
biologists and laymen. Among the members of
of the Corporation there is likewise a relatively
high percentage of laymen. Even the Executive
Committee contains members of each group, ard
it is particularly interesting to note that the
President of the Long Island Biological Associa-
tion, which maintains and controls the Labora-
tory, is not a biologist.

In mary ways this representation of laymen
among the officers and on the governing board
has been highly beneficial, Much needless dis-
cussion and delay are obviated in board meetings,
since legal and financial, as well as biological,
questions can receive immediate expert evalua-
tion, The varied experience in legal and finan-
cial enterprises, in the workings of large indus-
tral research laboratories, in the management of
hospitals, universities, colleges and medical
schools, which these laymen bring to delibera-
tions of the Board are very valuable.

At the same time the points of view of those
who regularly work at the Laboratory are ably
represented by the biologists who are members
of the Board, while every biologist of attainment
intimately associated with the Laboratory is a
member of the Scientific Advisory Committee,
whose recommendations play a very important
part in the development of policy and the conduct
of affairs.

Sub-committees of the Scientific Advisory
Committee take up special problems, while an Ex-
ecutive Committee of seven members takes ac-
tion on pressing matters in intervals between
meetings of the Board of Directors. The Direc-
tor of the Laboratory is in residence throughout
the year. There is an active Women’s Auxiliary
and a membership of about two hundred and
fifty in the corporation.

Quite beyond the benefits im management
which the Laboratory enjoys as a result of having
lay members in its Corporation and on its Board,
there can be no question but that the interest in
biological research which is aroused by such an
organization as the Long Island Biological Asso-

ciation can be made of enormous value to biology
in this country. It is probably safe to say that
since the transfer of the Biological Laboratory
from the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences
to the Long Island Biological Association in
1924, over a quarter of a million dollars, which
would probably never have found its. way into
funds for the advancement of biology, has been
contributed to the Biological Laboratory alone.
It is also true that the Department of Genetics
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, locat-
ed at Cold Spring Harbor, has also benefitted
{financially from the interest in biological research
evoked among wealthy laymen of this region by
the Long Island Biological Association. It would
not be surprising if many other biological insti-
tutions should also benefit directly, in the course
of time. Indeed biologists and biological labora-
tories, for the sake of the maintenance and
growth of biological research of the future should
not only increase the basis of fact and observa-
tion upon which it may stand, but should insure
its financial well-being by interesting in its value
and possibilities those in a _ position to
give to its support. The more rapidly this can be
accomplished, the more rapid will be the increase
in biological knowledge. Its accomplishment will
place almost unlimited potential funds with-
in the reach of the science which biologists are
attempting to serve, and the understanding of
life and the philosophy of living which their
work advances. It will likewise give pleasure to
the laymen who become interested.

It is significant to note, by way of parenthesis
in this connection, that the recently reorganized
station at Bermuda has adopted this policy in re-
spect to the formation of its Board of Directors,
and, indeed, has czrried it a step further in elect-
ing laymen of more than one nationality.

The measurable advantages which have come
to the Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor since
it has been under the management of the Long
Island Biological Associaticn are many. Three
laboratory buildings have been erected, including
the George Lane Nichols Memorial, and the Doc-
tor Walter B. James Memorial Laboratory. A
fourth laboratory building has been made avail-
able by remodeling the old lecture hall. Three
dwelling houses have been procured and remod-
eled to provide small suites for investigators and
their families. Over thirty acres of land have
been purchased to provide sites for buildings,
and opportunities for biologists to erect homes
near the Laboratory. The grounds and _ build-
ings have been greatly improved in appearance
and usefulness. Finally, the scientific and admin-
istrative equipment of the Laboratory has been

6 DENTE )LLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

increased many hundred fold. All of this repre-
sents a marked increase in the assets of the Lab-
oratory which are now evaluated at over $400,-
ooo. At the same time the annual budget for
operating has increased from about $7,000 to
about $78,000, and the Laboratory seems to be
holding its own during the present period of seri-
ous financial depression.

Unfortunately the Laboratory is not yet pro-
vided with anything like an adequate endowment
fund. Likewise the library is unimposing. But
a beginning has been made in the formation of
a library and headway is being mairtained. The
library of the adjoining Department of Genetics,
Carnegie Institution of Washington of 12,000 or
more volumes, largely serials, is available for the
use of investigators at the Laboratory.

Evening lectures are given during the summer,
and estates and gardens nearby are visited on Sat-
urday and Sunday afternoons. The sccial life of
the Laboratory is quiet and informal.

Contrary to usual custom, I have held a short
historical sketch of the Laboratory until the end,
in the belief that those already acquainted with
the history should have an opportunity of becom-
ing informed of recent developments at Cold
Spring Harbor without the necessity of being
subjected to a recitation of their historical back-
ground. For those not familiar with that back-
ground the following may be of interest. I wish,
however, to accept this opportunity of express-
ing to the officers, members and students of the
Marine Biological Laboratory, through THE
Cottectinc Net, my best wishes for an agrec-
able and profitable summer.

In its founding at Cold Spring Harbor
in 1890, as a branch of the Brooklyn In-
stitute of Arts and Sciences, the Biologi-
cal Laboratory was endowed with ideals and
policies which were to control, almost completely,
its development for nearly thirty-five years, and,
to some extent at least, to the present time. One
of the founders, Professor Franklin W. Hooper,
Director of the Brooklyn Institute, had, through
his personal acquaintance with Prof. Agassiz’s
station at Penikese, acquired the marine biologi-
cal enthusiasm whch two years previously had

led to the establishment of the Marine Biological
Laboratory at Woods Hole. Another founder,
Mr. Eugere G. Blackford, fish commissioner of
New York, who brought in his interest in fish-
eries and the utilitarian point of view so pro-
nounced in certain European marine laboratories ; ”
while a third founder, Mr. John D. Jones gave to
the newly established laboratory the aid and at-
titude of a wealthy layman interested in biologi-
cal instruction and research.

The Laboratory. was early provided by Mr.
Jones and his brother with about three acres of
land and four buildings, including a newly erect-
ed laboratory. This property was, tovether with
certain moneys, placed in the hands of the Wawe-
pex Society. This Society continues generously
to place this »roperty at the disposal of the Lab-
oratory, and to contribute to its support Dr.
3ashford Dean, the first director of the Labora-
tory, was of considerable help im interesting Mr.

Jones in this action, which took place during Dr.

Herbert W. Conn’s directorship.

In 1898 Dr. Charles B. Davenport became di-
rector of the Laboratory and brought with him
a stimulating group of young biologists, thereby
notably increasing the extent of the scientific out-
put of the Laboratory. A valuable addition to
the physical equipment was made in 1904 by the
erection of Blackford Memorial Hall, the gift of
Mrs. Eugene Blackford. Other than this, how-
ever, growth of physical equipment was not great,
for gradually the program of the Brooklyn In-
stitute became so vast, and its immediate inter-
ests so localized, in Brooklyn, that finally, with
Professor Hooper’s death in 1914, interest in the
3iological Laboratory fell off considerably. It
became apparent that the Laboratory should look
elsewhere for a fostering institution or group.
The realization of this need was indicated in the
raising, in 1917, from residents of the vicin-
ity, of an Endowment Fund of $25,000, the in-
come from which was expected to meet the an-
nual deficit. But this program, though accom-
plished, was fourd to be too modest, and in 1924
the Laboratory was transferred from the Brook-
lyn Institute to the Long Island Biological Asso-
ciaion, with the results which have been noted.

THE COURSE IN PHYSIOLOGY AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Dr. W. R. AMBERSON

Professor of Physiology

, University of Tennessee

Director of the Course

Dr. Laurence Irving of the University of
Toronto and Dr. Margaret Sumwalt of the
University of Pennsylvania come to the Physi-
ology Course as new members of the teaching
staff. Dr. Irving is lecturing on the physies
and chemistry of sea-water, and its biological

applications, and is supervising a group of stu-
dents in a physico-chemical study of sea-
water. He is also introducing laboratory
work on the salt and H-ion concentration of
the body fluids and tissues of fish and inver-
tebrates. Dr. Sumwalt will direct work on cell

June 27, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET i

permeability and ion balance largely on ma-
rine eggs, together with a special section of
work on electrical methods in permeability
studies.

The system of student election of laboratory

= . . la al

work has been continued this year. The lab-
oratory schedule includes eighteen projects, of

which each student attempts six or seven
only, according to his own _ selection. The
needs and desires of each student are thus

taken into account in planning the work.

For the first week, daily lectures are sched-
uled. In the following three weeks daily lec-
tures will be given, except on Saturday. <A
series of special lectures is being arranged for
the last two weeks in July.

The following lectures have already been
given: “The Acid-Base Equilibrium in Sea-
Water,’ Dr. Laurence Irving; “The Funda-
mentals of Potentiometry as Applied in Physi-
ological Work,” Dr. Leonor Michaelis; ‘The
Acid-Base Equilibrium in Sea-Water,’ and
“The Composition of Sea-Water,’ Dr. Lau-
rence Irving; “Respiratory Pigments,” Dr. Al-
fred Redfield.

Next week the following lectures will be
given: June 29: “General Organization of
Central Nervous Systems,” Dr. Philip Bard;
June 30 and July 1: “The Role Played by the

Central Nervous System in Posture, Move-
ment, and the Maintenance of Equilibrium,”
Dr. Philip Bard; July 2: ‘The Permeability
of the Living Cell to Water,’ Dr. Baldwin
Lucke; and July 3: “Cytological Problems of
Cell Cleavage,” Dr. Henry Fry.

The requirements for admission are an in-
troductory course in biology or zoology and
the usual half year course or its equivalent in
the embryology of the frog and chick. As
the enrollment is limited, admission is of ne-
cessity competitive but the primary basis of
selection is the ability of the student to profit
by the experience of the course and his pro-

spective ability as an investigator. Preference
is not necessarily given to those most ad-

vanced. It is felt that the most favorable pe-
riod for attendance often comes after the end
of the junior year of the undergraduate and
before the close of the second or third year of
graduate study, but obviously no arbitrary
rule is desirable.

A limited numbér of students who are well
qualified and who propose a satisfactory pro-
gram of research are allowed to continue after
the close of the course without payment of
further fees. It also may in some cases be
possible to arrange for positions for students
as research assistants to some older investiga-
tor during the remainder of the summer.

THE COURSE IN EMBRYOLOGY AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Dr. H. B. Goopricn
Professor of Biology, Wesleyan University
Director of the Course in Embryology

The course in Embryology at the Marine
Biological Laboratory aims to provide oppor-
tunities for the study of living materials
which for the most part are not attainable at
universities or colleges. The student is able
to see the actual living processes of develop-
ment usually known to him only from the
printed description or from fixed material. This
ineludes such events as the fertilization of the
egg, polar body formation, mitosis, cleavage,
gastrulation, and many later phases of em-
bryology. He may become familiar with the
technique of artificial parthenogenesis, isola-
tion of blastomeres, shifting the cytoplasm by
centrifuging, interspecific hybridization, sub-
jecting the egg to varied environments, etc. or
may try other experiments that he or the in-
structor may devise. Twenty to thirty diverse
species are available for these varied pur-
poses. The student obtains from these obser-
yalions a stimulating contact with vital pro-

cesses that is not otherwise possible and these
experiences provide him with a_ valuable
foundation for research and for teaching. This
training is most immediately useful in the field
of embryology or in those phases of general
physiology which utilize embryological mate-
rial or which deal with isolated living cells,
but the general background provided is likely
to be of value in almost any realm of biologi-
cal inquiry. The lectures, in addition to pro-
viding the necessary introduction to the ob-
servations of the laboratory, are also intended
to outline various fields of embryological re-
search. In attaining this purpose great as-
sistance is rendered by those investigators
who present to the class the methods and re-
sults of their own studies, Many students
come from institutions where there is little op-
portunity for contact with actual investiga-
tions or participation in the enthusiasms of
the research worker,

8 _THE CCLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

DIRECTORY FOR 1931

KEY
Laboratories Residence

Botany Building Bot Apartment A
Brick Building Br Dormitory D
Fisheries Laboratory . FL Drew House Dr
Lecture Hall L_ Fisheries Residence F
Main Room in Fisheries Homestead To

Laboratory M~ Hubbard H
Old Main Building OM Kidder K
Rockefeller Building, Rock Whitman W

case of those individuals not living on
laboratory property, the name of the landlord and
the street are given. In the case of individuals living
outside ef Woods Hole, the place of residence is in
parentheses.

In the

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
THE STAFF

Allen, C. E. prof. bot. Wisconsin.

Amberson, W. R. prof. phys. Tennessee.

Bard, P. asst. prof. phys. Princeton.

Bissonette, T. H. prof. biol. Trinity.

Bowling, Rachel instr. zool. Columbia.

Bradley, H. C. prof. phys. chem. Wisconsin.

Brooks, S. C. prof. zoo]. California.

Calkins, G. N. prof. proto. Columbia.

Cohn, E. J. assoc. prof. physical chem, THarvard.

Cole, E. C. assoc. prof. biol. Williams.

Conklin, E. G. prof. zool. Princeton.

Cocnfield, B. R. prof. biol. Southwestern.

Croasdale, Hannah T. “Biological Abstiacts”.
vania.

Davis, H. asst. prof. phys. Harvard.

Dawson, J. A. asst. prof. biol. Col. City N. Y.

Duggar, B. M. prof. bot. Wisconsin.

Fry, H. J. prof. biol. New York.

Garrey, W. E. prof. phys. Vanderbilt.

Gerard, R. W. asst. prof. phys. Chicago.

Grave, B. H. prof. biol. DePauw.

Grave, C. prof. zool. Washington.

Goodrich, H. B. prof. biol. Wesleyan.

Hansen, I. B. grad. Chicago.

Harvey, E. N. prof. phys. Princeton.

Hecht, S. prof. biophysics. Columbia.

Hoadley, L. prof. zool. Harvard.

Irving, L. instr. phys. Toronto,

Jacobs, M. H. prof. gen. phys. Pennsylvania.

Jennings, H. S. prof. zool. Hopkins.

Lewis, I. F. prof. biol. Virginia.

Lillie, F. R. prof. zool, Chicago.

Lillie, R. S. prof. gen. phys. Chicago.

Lucke, B. assoc. prof. pathol. Pennsylvania.

McClung, C. E. prof. zool. Pennsylvania.

Mast, S. O. prof. zool. Hopkins.

Mathews, A. P. prof. biochem, Cincinnati.

Michaelis, L. member Rockefeller Inst.

Morgan, T. H. dir. biol. lab. Cal. Inst. Tech.

Nelsen, O. E. instr. zool. Pennsylvania.

Packard, C. asst. prof. zool. Columbia Inst. Cancer,

Parker, G. H. prof. zool. Harvard.

Pollister, A. W. instr. zool. Columbia.

Poole, J. P. prof. evolution. Dartmouth.

Robbins, W. J. prof. bot. Missouri.

Sayles, L. P. instr. biol. Col. City N. Y.

Severinghaus, A. FE. asst. prof. anat. Columbia Med.

Pennsyl-

Sumwalt, Margaret asst. prof. phys. Woman’s Med. (Pa).

Taylor, W. R. prof. bot. Michigan.

Twitty, V. C. instr. biol. Yale.

Unger, W. B. asst. prof. zool. Dartmouth.

Wilson, E. B. prof. zool. Columbia.

Woodruff, L. L. prof. proto. Yale.

INVESTIGATORS

Adams, E. M. grad. asst. biol. Cincinnati Med. Br 342.
Dire.

Addison, W. H. F. prof. histol. and emb. Pennsylvania.

Allee, W. C. prof. zool. Chicago. Br 332. A 106.

Amberson, W. R. prof. phys. Tennessee. Br
Quissett.

Anderson, Stel’a stenographer. “Industrial & Engineer-
Chemistry.” Br 203. Young, West.

309.

Apgar, Grace M. grad. Pennsylvania. Rock 6. D 211.

A:met-ong, P. B. asst. prof. anat. Cornell Med. Br 318.
A 105.

Astrom, Il. Elizabeth asst. bot. Toronto. Bot. H 4.

Austin, Mary L. instr. zool. Weliesley. Br 217B.
Bailey, P. L. instr. phys. Col. City N. Y. L 28.

Bailey, Sara W. res. asst. biol. Radeliffe. Br 312.
Thompsen, Main.

Bakwin, H. asst. prof. path. New York. OM 4.

Ball, E. G. instr. phys. chem. Hopkins Med. Br 110,

Baitsell, G. A. prof. biol. Yale. Br 323. Brooks,

Ballard, W. W. instr. zool. Dartmonth. Br 217K. Dr, 1.

Bard, P. asst. prof. phys. Princeton. Br 109. A 301.

Barth, L. G. Nat. Res. fel. Ir 111.

Barron, E. S. G. asst. prof. biochem. Chicago. Br 313.
D 210.

Beams, H. W. asst. prof. zool. Iowa State. Br 9. Dr 1.

Belkin, M. instr. biol. New York. Br 328. Dr 5.

Benkert, J. M. grad. zool. Pittsburgh.
East.

Benkert, Lysbeth H. grad. zool. Pittsburgh.
Taylor, East.

Bissonette, T. H. prof. biol. Trinity. OM 26. D 108-109.

Bodansky, O. instr. pediatrics. Bellevue Med. OM 4.
Broderick, North.

Rock 7. Taylor,
Rock 7.

Bostian, C. H. instr. geneties. North Carolina State.
Rock 2. D 102.

Bowling, Rachel instr. zool. Columbia. OM 21. A 307.

Boyd, M. J. grad. biochem. Cincinnati. Br 342. |

Tashiro, Park.

Boyden, Louise E. edit. sec. “Biol. Bull.’ Harvard Med.
Br 305. Young, West.

Bradley, H. C. prof. phys. chem. Wisconsin. Br
Juniper Point.

Bradway, Winnefred E. asst. biol. New York. OM 1.
Cowey, Depot.

Bridges, C. res. asst. genetics. Carnegie Inst.
Br 324. McLeish, Millfield.

Brinley, F. J. asst. prof. zool.
OM 39. Grinnell, West.

Bronfenbrenner, J. J. prof. bact. Washington Med. (St.
Louis) Br 2. Quissett.

Budington, R. A. prof. zool. Oberlin.

Butt, C. res. asst. Princeton. Br 116.

122A.

(Wash.)

North Dakota State.

Br 218. Orchard.

Calkins, G. N. prof. proto. Columbia. Br 331. Buz-
zards Bay.
Cannan, R. K. prof. chem. Bellevue Med. Br 3810.
Gardiner.
Castle, W. A. instr. biol. Brown. Br 233,
Cattell W. res. worker. New York. Br 328. (Cherry

Valley).

June 27, 1931 | THE COLLECTING NET 9
Chambers, R. prof. biol. New York. Br 828. Gosnold. French, C. S. asst. phys. Harvard. Br 111. Eldridge,

Cheever, C. A. retired physician. Bot h.
zards Bay.

Cheney, R. H. prof. biol. Long Island. OM 45. D 208.

Chidester, F. E. prof. zool. West Virginia. Br 306, D
318.

Christie, J. R. assoc. nematol. U.S. Dept. Agr.
Cahoon, Woods Hole.

Lewis, Buz-

Roek 3.

Clark, Eleanor L. res. asst. anat. Pennsylvania Med.
Br 117. East. :

Clark, E. R. prof. anat. Pennsylvania Med. Br 117.
Fast.

Cline, Elsie grad. Hopkins. Br 127. W d.
Clowes, G. H. A. dir. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 328. Shore.

Cobb, N. A. principal nematol. U. S. Dept. Agr. Rock
3. F 43.

Cohen, B. M. asst. zool. Hopkins. Br 126. Nickerson,
Millfield.

Cole, K. S. asst. prof. phys. Columbia Med. OM 5.
D 216.

Cole, R. Oberlin. Br 315. D 216,

Cconfield, B. R. instr. zool. Brooklyn. OM. D 306.

334. Gardiner.
Rock 6. Dr

Copeland, M. prof. biol. Bowdoin. Br
Corson, S. A. grad. phys. Pennsylvania.
attic.

Costello, D. P. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 217J.
Elliot, Center.
Cowdry, E. V. prof. cytol. Washington (St. Louis)

Br 223. Millfield.

Croasdale, Hannah T. grad.
Hilton, Main.

Culemann, H. W. assoc. prof. biol. Amherst. OM 33.

Curwen, Alice O. instr. histol. Woman’s Med. (Pa.)
Brey; K 12:

Dan, K. grad. Pennsylvania. Br 217. D 217.

Danks, W. B. C. res. officer Dept. Agr. govt. Kenya
Colony. Br 224,

Darrah, W. C. paleobot. Carnegie Mus.
Rock 7. Hilton, Millfield.

Daugherty, Kathryn res. asst. phys. Pennsylvania. Br
217. D211.

Davis, J. E. asst. med. Chicago. Br 313. Hilton, Main.

Davis, J. F. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. OM Base. Dr 6.

Dawson, A. B. assoc. prof. zool. Harvard. Br 312. D
112.

Dedds, G. S. prot. emb. West raed Med. Br 222.
D 306.

Dolley, W. L. prof. biol. Buffalo. Br 339. A 203.

Denaldson, H. H. member Wistar Inst. Br 115.
zards Bay.

Dubois, Anne M. res. asst. emb, Carnegie Inst. (Balti-
mare) Br 343. D 110.

Pennsylvania. Bot. 22.

(Pittsburgh)

Buz-

Dubois, *E. F. prof. med. Cornell Med. Br 340. Pen-
zance Point.

Dunbar, F. F. grad. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 333.

Eastlick, H. L. grad. asst. Washington (St. Louis)
OM Base. Dr 7.

Edwards, D. J. assoc. prof. phys. Cornell Med. Br 214.
Gosnold.

Erlanger, Margaret Harvard Med. Br 108. Young,
West.

Failla, G. physicist. Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.) Br 306.
Danchakoff, Minot.

Field, Madeline E. res. fel. phys. Harvard. OM Base.

H 8.

Fogg, L. C. instr. biol. New York. OM Base. Me-
Kenzie, Middle.

Fogg, Mildred C. instr. biol. Hunter. OM Base.
Kenzie, Middle.

Fowler, J. R. res. asst. zool. Chicago. Br 332.
Main.

Francis, Dorothy res.
Br 329,

Me-
Erskine,

asst. Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.)

Woods Hole.
Furth, J. assoc. pathol. Phipps Inst. L 24.

Fry, H. J. prof. biol. New York. OM Base.
Woods Hole.

Garrey, W. E.

Purdum,

prof. phys. Vanderbilt Med. Br 215,
Gardiner,
Geiman, Q. M. grad. proto. Pennsylvania. Rock 6.

Cowey, Depot.
Gelfan, S. asst. prof. phys. Alberta. Br 333.
Millfield.

Gerard, R. W. assoc. prof. phys. Chicago. Br 309, D 213.
Gilmore, Kathryn grad. zool. Pittsburgh. Rock7. Eld-
ridge, East.
Gilson, L. E. instr.
Tashiro, Park.
Godfrey, A. H. grad. West Virginia.

West.

Sylvan,

biochem. Cincinnati. Br 341.

Br 3806. Wilde,

Goldforb, A. J. prof. zool. Col. City N. Y. Br 1220,
Schramm, Gardiner.
Goodrich, H. B. prof. biol. Wesleyan. Br 210. D 316,

Gordon, Gladys secretary. “Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry”. Br 203. Nickerson, Millfield.
Graham, C. H. Nat. Res. fel. Pennsylvania. Br 231.
Grave, B. H. prof. zool. De Pauw. Br 234. Grave, High.
Grave, C. prof. zool. Washington (St. Louis) Br 327, High

Graubard, M. A. asst. zool. Columbia. OM Base. Me-
Innis, Millfield.

Gray, Nina E. asst. zool. Wisconsin. L 22. Broderick,
North.

Green, Arda A. res. fel. phys. Harvard Med, Br 108,

Grundfest, H. Nat. Res. fel. phys. Pennsylvania. Br
232. D 301.

Hall, S. R. ves. fel. Harvard Med. IL 26.

Hahnert, W. F. Nat. Res. fel. zool. Hopkins. Br 11].

Ham, A. W. instr. cytol. Washington Med. (St. Louis)

Br 224, D 101a.
Hamburgh, M. Jr. Hopkins Med. Br 3813. Glaser,
Gosnold.

Hamburger, R. J. asst. med. clinic. Groningen (Holland)
OM 40. Johlin, Park.

Harnly, M. H. asst. prof. biol. New York. Br 1. )D 101.

Harnly, Marie L. asst. biol. New York. Br 1. D 101.

Harryman, Ilene res. asst. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 319.
D 103.

Hartline, H. K. fel. med. physics. Pennsylvania, Br 231,

Harvey, Ethel B. asst. biol. New York. Br 116. Gosnold.

Harvey, E. N. prof. phys. Princeton. Br 116. Gosnold.

Hayden, Margaret A. assoc. prof. zool. Wellesley. Br
217A. Nickerson, Quissett.

Haywood, Charlotte assoc. prof. phys. Mt. Holyoke,
Br 315. A 207.

Heilbrunn, L. V. assoc. prof. zool. Pennsylvania. Br
Zeal. D3.

Henshaw, P. S. biophysicist. Memorial Hosp. (N, Y.)
Br 329. D 206.

Hill, E. S. grad. biochem, Cincinnati.

Hill, S. E. asst. phys. Rockefeller Inst.
West.

Hilsman, Helen M. grad. asst. zool. Pittsburgh.
7. Hilton, Millfield.

Hoadley, L. prof. zool. Harvard. Br 312. A 302,
Holbrook, Lucile A. grad. zool. Washington (St. Louis)
Br 313. Sylvan, Millfield.
Holt, Helen asst. biol. New York.

Gosnold.
Homes, M. N. asst. bot. Brussels. Br 122A, D 203.
Hook, Sabra J. instr. biol. Rochester. Br 314. K 2.
Hoppe, Ella N. res. asst. biol. N. Y. State Dept. Health.
Br 122B. A 305.
Horning, E. S. Sidney.
Howard, Evelyn grad.
Veeder, West.

Br 342. Dr attic.
Br 209. Veeder,

Rock

Br 328. Chambers,

Br 223. D 203.
phys. Pennsylvania. Br 110.

10 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

Howe, H. E. editor “Industrial and Engineering Chem-
istry.” Br 203. West.

Howe, Mary “Industrial & Engineering Chemistry.” Br
203. West.

Huettner, A. F. prof. biol. New York. Br 1. Gansett.

Imai, T. asst. biol. Imperial (Sendai, Japan) L 34.

Irving, L. instr. phys. Toronto. Br 109. D 312.

Ishii, K. instr. biochem. Jikei-kai Med. (Tokyo) Br
122. Tashiro, Park.

Jacobs, M. H. prof. gen. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 102.

Minot.
Jchlin, J. M. assoc. prof. biochem. Vanderbilt Med.
Br 336, Park.

Johnson, D. S. prof. bot. Hopkins. Br 118. A 10le.
Johnson, H. H. Col. City N. Y. Br 315.

Katz, J. grad. biol. New York.
Keil, Elsa M. instr. zool. N. J. Col. Women. Br 8. W e.

Keltch, Anna K. res. asst. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 319.
Duffus, Millfield.
Kidder, G. W. grad. zool. Columbia. Br 314. D 307.

Kille, F. R. assoc. prof. biol. Birmingham

OM 1. D 307.
Kindred, J. E. assoc. prof. emb. Virginia Med. Br 106.
D 202.

Kinney, Elizabeth T. lect. zool. Barnard. Br 21°.
Knower, H. M. assoc. prof. anat. Albany. Br 334. Buz-
zards Bay.

Knowlton, F. P. prof. phys. Syracuse Med. Br 226.
Gardiner.
Lackey, J. B. prof. biol. Southwestern. Br 8 A 108.

Lambert, Elizabeth F. tech. Harvard Med. Br 107.
Young, West.

Larrabee, M. G. Harvard. Br 231. Beal, Bay View.

Lillie, F. R. prof. zool. Chicaro. Br 101. Gardiner.

Lillie, R. S. prof. gen. phys. Chicago. Br 326, Gardiner,

Liljestrand, P. H. Ohio Wesleyan. Br 216. Dr 3.

Lucas, A. M. asst. prof. cytol. Washington Med. (St.

Louis) Br 224. Mast, Minot.

Lucas, Miriam S. instr. cytol. Washington Med. (St.
Louis) Br 224. Mast, Minot.

Lucke, B. assoc. prof. path. Pennsylvania. Br 311.
Minot.

Lund, E. J. prof. phys. Texas. Br 206. A 208.

Lynch, Ruth S. instr. geneties. Hopkins. Br 127. D 201.

McClung, C. E. prof. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 219. A 201.

McGoun, R. C. instr. biol. Amherst. Br 204. Dr 6,

McGregor, J. H. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 301. Elliot,
Center.

Mann, D. R. grad. asst. Duke. OM Base. Hall, High.

Marsland, D. A. asst. prof. biol. New York. Br 315.
D 106,

Mathews, A. P. prof.
Buzzards Bay.
Mavor, J. W. prof. biol. Union. Br 3094. Bar Neck.

Medaris, D. De Pauw. Br 2171. K 7.
Meltzer, A. Cornell Med. Br 217L Dr 1,
Metz, C. W. prof. cytol. Carnegie Inst.
Hopkins. Br 348. Hyatt.
Michaelis, L. member Rockefeller
Danchakoff, Gansett. :
Miller, Helen M. Nat. Res. fel. Hopkins. Br 126. D 105,
Mitchell. P. H. prof. phys. Brown. Br 233. Orchard.
Morgan, F, H. prof, biol. Cal. Inst. Tech. Br 320.
Morgan, Lillian V. Cal. Inst. Tech. Br 320.
Morgulis, S. prof. biochem. Nebraska Med. Br 313.
D 308.

Morrill, C. V. assoe. prof. anat. Cornell Med. L 27.
Country Club Inn, (West Falmouth).

Morris, S. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. Rock 6. D 310.

Nabrit, S. M. prof. biol. Morehouse. L 33. <A 104.

Navez, A. E. lect. gen. phys. Harvard. Br 122A,

Newton, Helen ms. editor “Industrial & Engineering
Chemistry.” Br 203. Young, West.

biochem, Cincinnati. Br 342.

Wash. and

Inst. Bre 207s

OM Base. Avery, Main.

Southern.

K 3.

Nicholas, W. W. physicist. Bureau Standards.
Nicoll, P. A. grad. asst. biol. Washington (St. Louis)
OM Base. Dr 7.

Nenidez, J. F. assoc. prof. anat. Cornell Med. Br 318.
Whitman.

Packard, C. asst. prof. zool. Columbia Inst. Cancer.
OM 2. North.

Papenfuss, G. F. grad. bot. Hopkins. Bot 4. Frawley.
Main.

Parker, G. Elliot,
Center.

Parkinson, Nellie A. asst. ed. “Industrial & Engineer-
ing Chemistry.” Br 203. Young, West.

Parks, M. E. asst. instr. biol. New York.
Avery, Main.

Parmenter, C. L. assoc. prof. zool. Pennsylvania. Br

H. prof. zool. Harvard. Br 213.

OM Base.

220. D 204,

Parpart, A. K. instr. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 205. D
302.

Parpart, Ethel R. asst. biol. Long Island. Br 205. D
302.

Patch, Esther M. asst.
Googins, Quissett.

Payne, F. prof. zool. Indiana. Br 122D. A 202,

Peebles, Florence prof. biol. California Christian. LL
30.

Pierce, Madelene E.
Neck.

Plough, H. H. prof. biol. Amherst.

Pollister, A. W. instr. zool. Columbia.

Pollister, Priscilla F. instr. zool. Brooklyn.
D 314.

Pond, S. E. asst. prof. phys. Pennsylvania. Med. Br
216. Gansett.

Poole, J. P. prof. evolution.
305.

Raffe!, D. Nat. Res. fel. Hopkins. Br 125. D 201,

Redfield, Helen Cal. Inst. Tech. Br 320. D 301.

Recse, A. M. prof. zool. West Virginia. Br 222. D 206.

Rempe, A. E. tech. Washington. Br 224. Cowey, Depot.

de Renyi, G. S. assoc. prof. anat. Pennsylvania. Br
114, D215.

Reznikoff, P. instr. med. Cornell Med. Br 340.

Richards, O. W. instr. biol. Yale. Br & D 317.

Rijlant, P. B. L. prof. phys. Brussels. Br 225.

Risley, P. L. instr. zool. Michigan. L 21.

Robinson, E. J. grad. asst. New York. OM Base. Avery,
Main.

Reot, C. W. asst. biochem. Princeton.
Devot.

Root, W. S. asst. prof. phys. Syracuse Med. Br
Spaeth, Whitman. -

Rosensteel, Eva G., secretary. Br 2238. A 306.

Rugh, R. instr. zool. Hunter. Br 217M.

Sayles, L. P. instr. biol. Col. City N. Y. OM 25. D 214.

anat. Long Island. OM 1.

Radcliffe. Br 217E. Kittila, Bar

Br 204, Agassiz.

OM 44. D 314.
OM 44.

Dartmouth. Bot 25. D

PD. 212.

Br 110. Cowey,

226.

Schauffler, W. G. physician. Princeton. L 23,
Schechter, V. asst. zool. Col. City N. Y. Br 122C. Dr 2.
Schluger, J. res. asst. biol. New York. Br 1. MeLeish,

Millfield.
Schmidt, L. H. res. fel. biochem.
341. Tashiro, Park.
Schrader, F. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 330. (Gansett).
Schrader, Sally H. res. worker cytol. Columbia. Br
330. (Gansett).
Schultz, J. Carnegie Inst. (Wash.) Br 232.
Schweitzer, M. D. grad. asst. zool. Columbia.
MeLeish, Millfield.
Scott, A. C. grad. asst. zool. Pittsburgh. OM 43. K ‘10.
Scott, Florence M. asst. prof. biol. Seton Hill. Br 217D.
Shapiro, H. grad. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 314. Dr 10.
Shaw, C. Ruth Pittsburgh. Rock 7. H 9.
Sichel, F. J. M. grad. asst. biol. New York. Br 337, Dr 2,

Cincinnati Med. Br

D 301.
Br 314.

June 27, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET i ul

Sickles, Grace asst. bacteriol. N. Y. State Dept. Health.
Br 122.

Slifer, Eleanor H. Nat. Res. fel. zool. Iowa.
Kittila, Bar Neck.

Smith, Helen B. grad. res.
Gray, Buzzards Bay.

Smith, M. Doreen res. asst. prev. dentistry. Toronto.
i 32. H 2,

Snook, T. instr. histol. and emb. Cornell. L 29.

Sonneborn, T. M. res. assoc. genetics. Hopkins.
DT.

Br 217G.
zool. Hopkins. Br 343.

Dr 2.
Brey.

Southwick, W. E. grad. emb. Harvard. OM Base.
Lyons, Woods Hole.
Speidel, C. C. prof. anat. Virginia. Br 106. D 104,

Stancati, M. F. grad. asst. zool. Pittsburgh.
Hilton, Millfield.

Stockard, C. R. prof. anat. Cornell Med.
zards Bay.

Street, Sibyl asst. zool. Vassar. Br 8.
field.

Rock 2.
Br 317. Buz-

MeLeish, Mill-

Strong, O. S. prof. neur. and neurohistol. Columbia
Med. Br 8. Elliot, Center.

Sturdivant, H. P. instr. zool. Columbia. Br 314. D 207.

Sumwalt, Margaret asst. prof. phys. Woman’s Med.
(Pa.) OM 3. D 209.

Tang, P. S. res. fel. phys. Harvard. Br 309. D 107.

Tashiro, S. prof. biochem. Cincinnati. Br 341, Park.

Taylor, W. R. prof. bot. Michigan. Bot 24. Whitman.

Tittler, I. A. grad. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 314. Dr 10,

Titus, C. P. director. Sch. of Microscopy (N. Y.) OM
Base. Avery, Main.

Torvik-Greb, Magnhild grad. asst. biol. Pittsburgh.

Rock 7. Hi 9.

Turner, J. P. instr. zool. Minnesota. Br 217N.

Twyeffort, L. H. grad. Princeton. Br 111, Lyons, Woods
Hole.

Unger, W. B. asst. prof. zool. Dartmouth.
218.

Van Alstyne, Margaret res. asst. med. Harvard. Br 213.
Grinnell, Bar Neck.

Van Slyke, E. instr. zool. Pittsburgh. Rock 7. K 10.

Wade, Lucille W. De Pauw. Br. 319. Robinson, School.

Wald, G. grad. asst. biophysies. Columbia. OM Base.
McLeish, Millfield.

Walker, Ruth I. instr. bot. Wisconsin.
derick, North.

Warren, H. C. prof. psychol. Princeton,
Neck.

Weelans, Anna A. secretary. Princeton. Br 303. A 205.

Weisman, M. N. tutor. Col. City N. Y. OM 34. K 15.

Welty, C. asst. prof. biol. Parsons. Br 332. Taylor, East.

Whitaker, D. M. asst. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 333.
Morgan, Buzzards Bay.

Whiting, Anna R. prof. biol. Pennsylvania Col. Women,

A OM 46. Whitman.

OM 22. D

Bot 5. Bro-

Br 303. Bar

Whiting, P. W. assoc. prof. zool. Pittsburgh. OM 46.
Whitman.
Wilde, Mary H. grad. asst. bot. N. J. Col. Women.

Bot. Prentiss, Millfield.

Wilson, E. B. DaCosta prof. emeritus zool. Columbia.
Br 322. Buzzards Bay.

Wilson, Hildegard N. grad. asst. biochem. New York
Med. Br 310. Buzzards Bay.

Winsor, Agnes A. assoc. biol. Hopkins. L 25. (Catau-
met).

Winsor, C. P. assoc. biol. Hopkins. L 25. (Cataumet).

Witschi, E. prof. zool. Iowa. Br 9. A 201.

Wolf, E. A. asst. prof. zool. Pittsburgh. OM 43.

Woodward, A. E. asst. prof. zool. Michigan. L 21. K 3.

Young, Roger A. asst. prof. zool. Howard. Br 228.
A 304.

STUDENTS

Adell, J. C. grad. Columbia. proto. Nickerson, Millfield.
Alderman, Evangeline grad. asst. Wellesley. emb, W a.
Alexander, L. E. grad. Michigan. emb. K 14.
Alexanderson, Amelie M. Bryn Mawr. emb. K 2.
Altland, Clair S. grad. asst. biol. American. bot. K 7.
Andrew, Barbara L. grad. asst. bot. Alabama. bot. K 8,
Auringer, J. grad. Detroit City. proto. Dr 15.
Barney, R. L. prof. biol. Middlebury. phys.
Ransom (Quissett).

Glover.

Beck, L_ V. grad. asst. phys. New York. phys. Me-
Leish, Millfield.

Boone, Eleanor S. grad. asst. zool. Stanford. emb.
Nickerson, Millfield.

Brown, Rebecca R. grad. Columbia. proto. K 12.

Bryan, Hilah F. grad. Smith. bot. Robinson, Quissett.

Buchheit, J. R. grad. asst. biol. Ilinois.

Buck, M. Anna Maine. emb. K 8.

Burr, Edith R. grad. Columbia. proto. Gray, Buzzards
Bay.

Cable, R. M. grad. fel. New York. emb. Cowey, Depot.

Carlson, J. G. instr. biol. Bryn Mawr. emb. K 7.

Carpenter, Helena J. fel. biol. Ohio Wesleyan. proto.
We.

Chase, H. grad. Howard. emb.

Chen, H. T. Harvard. emb. Dr 9.

Coulter, Edith A. Goucher. emb. W b.

Dee, M. Barbara grad. zool. Boston. proto. Eldridze,
Woods Hole.

Denny, Martha grad. Radcliffe. emb. Kittila,

Derrickson, Mary B. Syracuse. emb. W e.

Dick, G. A. prof. vet. med. Pennsylvania. emb.

Ericson, Alma L. grad. biol. Columbia.

Eskridge, Lydia C. tech. asst. Hopkins.

Fenton, Frances E. Connecticut. proto.

Fisher, K. C. asst. biol. Acadia. phys.
field.

Gaetjens, Laura C. Elmira. phys. White, Millfield.

Green, D. E. asst. zool. New York. phys. McLeish,
Millfield.

Heiss, Elizabeth M. grad. asst. biol. Purdue. phys. W g.

Henderson, Lillian O. instr. biol. H. Sophie Newcom).

proto. Erskine, Woods Hole.

Hunt, W. L. Southwestern. bot. Berg, School.

Hutchings, Lois M. teacher biol. Barringer H. S. proto.
H 8.

Ickes, Marguerite teacher biol. Lincoln Il. S.
land). proto.

Jackson, J. R. grad. asst. Missouri. bot. Dr 2.

James, Miriam E. teacher biol. Gloucester H. S. (Mass.)
proto. Grinnell, West.

Kaston, B. J. grad. asst. biol. Yale.
Vineyard).

Lundstrom, Helen M.
Pennsylvania.

emb. Dr 6.

Bar Neck.

D 204.
proto. H 7.
proto. W e.
18U ha
MeLeish, Miil-

(Cleve-

emb. (Martha’s

grad. res. fel. dental

surgery
phys. H 3.

McQuesten, Barbara grad. Radcliffe. phys. Nickerson,
Millfield.

Magruder, S. R. grad. Cincinnati. emb. Kittila, Bar
Neck.

Michaelis, Eva M. grad. chem. Barnard. phys. Danch-
akoff, Gansett.

Moore, Caroline Pennsylvania. bot. H 6.
Moore, Elinor grad. Pennsylvania. phys. H 6.
Morgan, Isabel M. Radcliffe. phys. Buzzards Bay.

Newcomer, A. Virginia grad. Radcliffe.
Bar Neck.

Noll, C. I. grad. asst.
Depot.

Oppenheimer, Jane M. Bryn Mawr. emb. H 7.

Ormsby, A. A. grad. Detroit City. proto. Dr 15.

Perry, Lily M. grad. Shaw Sch. of Bot. Washington.
bot. Young, West.

Plyler, Phyllis V. asst. biol. Goucher. emb.

emb. Kittila,

chem. Trinity. phys. Cowey,

W bz

V2. _THE COLLECTING NET

| Vor. VI. No. 41

Price, J. B. asst. biol. Stanford. emb. Dr 14.

Prosser, C. L. grad. asst. phys. Hopkins. phys. Dr 5.

Reid, Marion A. instr. phys. Boston Med. phys. Robin-
son, Quissett.

Sawyer, Elizabeth L. instr. zool. Maine. emb. Avery,
Main.

Scherp, H. W. grad. chem. Harvard. phys. Robinson,
Quissett.

Sell, J. P. Oberlin. emb. K 5,
Shea, Margaret M. grad. Wellesley. emb. W a.
Smith, W. F. Jr. Cornell Med. emb. MeInnis, Millfield.
Sperry, Helen A. instr. biol. Cathedral Sch. of St. Mary
(N. Y.) proto. Robinson, Woods Hole.
Stewart, P. A. Rochester. proto. K 6.
Sweetman, H. L. asst. prof. ent. Mass.
Higgins, Depot.
Townsend, Grace instr. biol. Joliet Jr. emb, H 4.
Walker, P. A. grad. Bowdoin. emb. Thompson, Main.
Watkins, Evelyn G. Vassar. proto. Eldridge, East.
Weed, M. R. grad. asst. biol. Wesleyan. emb. K 5,
Willard, W. R. Yale Med. phys. Dr 2.
Woodruff, Beth H. grad. asst. biol. Western
emb. W a.
Woodside, G. L.

State. phys.

Reserve.

asst. biol. DePauw. emb. K 7.

ADMINISTRATION

Billings, Edith secretary. Millfield.

Crowell, Polly L. asst. to the business manager.
Dillinger, Bessie R. secretary. W i.

Finch, Kathleen secretary. H 2.

MacNaught, F. M. business manager. School & Millfield.

LIBRARY

Blanchard, Hazel assistant. W g.

Bradbury, Hester A. assistant. W h.

Lawrence, Deborah secretary. Locust (Falmouth).
Montgomery, Priscilla B. librarian. Whitman.
Rohan, Mary A. assistant. Millfield.

CHEMICAL ROOM

Deitrick, J. E. grad. Hopkins Dr 5.
Frew, Pauline Bates. W f.

Geib, Dorothy grad. Hopkins.

Hale, J. B. grad. Illinois. Grave, High.
Johlin, Sally Oberlin. Gardiner.

Main.

Keil, Elsa M. instr. zool. N. J. Col. for Women. W e.
Lackey, J. B. prof. biol. Southwestern. A 108.
Richards, O. W. (in charge chem. room) instr. biol.

Yale. D 317.
Street, Sybil asst. zool. Vassar. MeLeish, Millfield.
Strong, O. S. (director chem. room) prof. neur,
neurohist. Columbia. Elhot, Center.

and

APPARATUS ROOM

Apgar, A. R. photographer. D 110.

Boss, L. F. mechanician. Middle.

Graham, J. D. glass-blowing service.

Liljestrand; P. H. Ohio Wesleyan. assistant.

Pond, S. E. asst. prof. phys. Pennsylvania.
Gansett.

Veeder, Millfield.
Drs:
custodian.

SUPPLY DEPARTMENT

Clarkson, W. deckhand. Water.

Crowell, Ruth S. secretary. Main.

Crowell, P. S. Harvard. collector and chauffeur,
Erlanger, H. Wisconsin. collector. Dr 3.
Gray, G. M. curator research museum. Buzzards Bay.
Gray, M. collector. (Teaticket).

Hilton, A. M. collector. Millfield.

Kahler, W. collector. Bast.

Leathers, A. W. head shipping dept. Minot.

Lehy, J. collector and chauffeur. Millfield.

School,

Lewis, E. M. engineer Cayadetta. Buzzards Bay.

Lillie, W. collector. Gardiner.

McInnis, J. resident manager. Millfield.

Nielsen, Anna M. secretary. Glendon.

Poole, Marjery G. bot. collector. D 304.

Smith, C. B. Hamilton. collector. Dr 3.

Staples, S. Harvard. collector. Dr 3.

Thornley, W. Dartmouth. collector.

Veeder, J. J. captain Cayadetta. Millfield.

Wamsley, F. W. supervisor of schools,
special preparator,

Wilcox, G. G. collector. Dr 3.

Wixon, R. fireman. (Falmouth).

BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS

Callahan, J. janitor. OM N wing. Dr 4.

Cornish, G. janitor. Br Ist floor. Dr 4.

Goffin, R. T. Jr. iceman. Millfield.

Googins, H. janitor. Quissett.

Hemenway, W. carpenter. carpenter shop.
(Falmouth Heights).

Hilton, H. A. superintendent of buildings and grounds.
carpenter shop. Thompson, Water.

Keltch,R. janitor. Br 8rd floor. Millfield.

Look, G. janitor. OM S wing. Quissett.

McInnis, F. M. janitor. Bot & L. Millfield.

McManus, J. janitor. Br 2nd floor. Dr 4.

Rock, J. F. N. emergency man. Dr 4.

Russell, R. L. gardener.

Russell, M. R. night watchman

Swain, G. Jr. janitor. Br 3rd floor. Main (Quissett).

Tawell, T. E. storekeeper and head janitor. basement
Br. Thompson, Water.

MECHANICAL DEPARTMENT

night mechanic. Br 7. K 7.
assistant. Br 7. Macbeth, Kast.
superintendent. Br 7. Woods Hole.

DOMESTIC HELP

Ashe, Helen K. Bates. Ho 202.

Birkitt, Dorothy K. N. J. Normal (Glassboro). Ilo 204.
Brown, Bertha C. Ho 111.

Buckley, Katherine Ho 101.

Colby, Anna Ho 203.

Collins, Mary C. Ho 21".

Coombs, L. Ho 2.

Coombs, Nellie in general charge. Ho 12.
Duest, Virginia Ho 203.

Downing, Florence E. Ho 205.

Downing, Isabelle L. in charge dining room.
Fischer, L. Boston. Ho 106.

Green, Angie B. N. J. Normal (Glassboro). Ho 202.
Hookstra, Ruth U. N. J. Normal (Glassboro). Ho 204.
McDougall, Mary Ho 207.

McGrath, Mary Broderick, West. ¢
Mulford, Kathryn H. N. J. Normal (Glassboro). Ho 204,
Nordstrom, K. chef. Ho 6.

Pease, Annie Ho 211.

Percival, Mina N. Ho 102.

Pereira, J. R. Suffolk Law (Boston). Ho 107.

Pond, Luella Dr,

Porteous, W. Ho 108.

Russell, Helen E. Ho 212.

Shea, Katie Ho 112.

Steele, N. Dr.

Temple, I. Ho 7.

Tuttle, P. School of Fine Arts (Boston). Ho 106.
Welch, Hattie Ho 105.

Welch, Hattie Ho 105.

Wester, Gertrude Ho 203.

Weymouth, D. N. School of Fine Arts (Boston). Ho 2
Young, Grace West.

Young, Virginia Maine. Ho 202.

Charleston,

Hawthorne,

Carty, F.
Kahler, R.
Larkin, T.

Ho 201,

June 27, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ws)

U. S. BUREAU OF FISHERIES
INVESTIGATORS

Bailey, E. W. jr. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge)
Oceanographic Inst. 108. F 49,

Bateman, C. B. lab. mechanic. U. S. Dept. Agr. (Wash.)
F 55.
Bearse, H. M. jr. aquatic biol.
138. Wiles, Gardiner.
Bigelow, R. P. prof. zool. Mass. Inst. Tech. M 2 Gar-
diner.

Brown, F. A. Jr. Austin
123. F 50.

Buhrer, Edna M. jr.
M. Lehy, Millfield.

Cable, Louella E. jr. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F. (Beau-
fort, N. C.) Hatchery and M. 31. F 31.

Chesley, L. C. grad. fel. phys. Duke. 151. F. 41.

Cobb, N. A. prin. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr. M.
F 43.

Conger, P. diatomist. U. S. Nat. Museum (Wash.) 141.
F 47.

U.S. B. FF. (Cambridge)

teaching fel. zool. Harvard.

nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Cooper, Corinne jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr. M.
Sydell, Glendon.

Crossman M. Louise jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.
M. Sydell, Glendon.

Danforth, Josephine F. illustrator. U. S. Dept. Agr. M.
Lehy, Millfield.

Foster, K. W. instr. biol. Tufts. M. F 54.

Galtsoff, Eugenia assoc. zool. George Washington. 122.
F 26.

Galtsoff, P. S. in charge oyster investigations. U. 8.

B. F. (Wash.) 122. F 26.
Goffin, Catherine E. Brown. 119. Millfield.
Goffin, R. biol. U. S. B. F. 115. Millfield.

Hall, F. G. prof. zool. Duke. 149. Hamblin, High.

Herrington, W. C. haddock invest. U. S. B. F. (Cain-
bridge) 140. F 45.

Imlah, Helen W. grad. Radcliffe. M. Kavanagh, High.

Jaffe, Ernestine grad. Wellesley. 139. Goffin, Millfield.

Jenkins, G. B. prof. anat. George Washington Med. 1.
Clough, Millfield.

Kumin, H. grad. Antioch. 146. F 50.

Linton, E. fel. Pennsylvania. M 5. West.

Lynn, W. G. instr. comp. anat. Hopkins. 123. F 48.

Milch, Erna L. secretary. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge) 118.

Moses, Mildred S. asst. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge) 146.
Agassiz.

Nesbit, R. A. asst. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge)
M 6. F 47.

Neville, W. C. asst. U. S. B. F. 119. Greene, Millfield.

Sandground, J. H. curator of helminthology. Harvard.
M 3. F 44.

Sette, O. E. the director. in charge North Atlantic
Fishery Investigation. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge)
118. F.

Smith, R. O. asst. aquatie biol. oyster investigations.
U. 8. B. F. (Wash.) 122.

Swanger, Helen H. jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.
M. Lehy, Millfield.

Taylor, G. W. grad. Princeton. M. F 48.

Tipton, S. R. fel. phys. Duke. 149. F 41.

Turner, J. P. instr. zcol. Minnesota. 217n.
West.

Webster, J. R. jr. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F. (Cambridge)
140. F 49,

Wilson, C. B. lead science dept. Mass. State Normal
Sch. (Westfield) M 4. F 44,

prerisy L. G. Austin teaching fel. zool. Harvard, M.

54,

Grinnell,

RUILDINGS AND GROUNDS

Armstrong, J. S. engineer. “Phalarope”. Glendon.
Bosworth, Edith C. secretary. 117. Millfield.
Bosworth, W. R. V. fisherman. “Phalarope”. Millfield.
Brown, S. 3rd. muscum attendant. FL 136,
Cassidy, H. L. carpenter. Woods Hole.
Conklin, P. S. fireman. machine shop. Hirth.
Hamblin, R. P. apprentice fish culturist.

Nye (Falmouth)
Hoffses, G. R. superintendent 117. F.
Hosmer, H. Jr. museum attendant. FL 136.
Howes, E. S. cockswain. hatchery. Water.
Howes, W. L. fish culturist. 116. Millfield.
Lowey, J. E. engineer. machine shop. Glendon.
Morrison, D. cook. “Phalarope”. “Phalarope”.
Radil, A. H. apprentice fish culturist. Hatchery. PL 134.
Reynolds, J. seaman. “Phalarope”. “Phalarope”.
Snow, C. B. fireman. machine shop. FIL 135.
Veeder, R. N. master “Phalarope”. West.
Webster, H. M. fireman. machine shop. FL 137.

OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION

Allan, K. B. grad. Clark. 213.
Beach, E. F. Brown. 110. Hilton, Water.

hatchery.

Beale, Alice grad. emb. Radcliffe. 108. Thompson,
Main.
Bigelow, H. B. the director. curator oceanography.

Museum Comp. Zool (Cambridge), 114.
Main.

Borodin, N. A. Museum Comp. Zool. (Cambridge) 107.

Brooks, C. I. prof. Clark. 213.

Burbank, C. B. Harvard. “Asterias”.

Church, P. E. grad. Clark. 213.

Clarke, G. L. Museum Comp. Zool. (Cambridge). 212.
“Atlantis”.

Emmons, G. grad. Harvard. 207. (Monument Beach).

Ingalls, Elizabeth Harvard Med. 102.

Iselin, C. 2nd asst. curator oceanography.
Comp. Zool. (Cambridge) 208. “Atlantis”.

Montgomery, R. Harvard. “Atlantis”.

Mosby, O. U. S. Coast Guard Ice Patrol Base 5.

Rakestraw, N. W. asst. prof. chem. Brown. 110, Wilson,
Woods Hole.

Reuszer, H. W. grad. Rutgers. 201.

Rossby, C. G. A. assoc. prof. Mass. Inst. Tech. 207.
Wilde, Gardiner.

Sears, Mary grad. zool. Radcliffe, 108. F 32.
Seiwell, Gladys E. Brown. 211. Larkin, Woods Hole.
Seiwell, H. R. curator oceanography. Buffalo Museum
Science. 211. Larkin, Woods Hole.
Stetson, H. C. asst. curator paleontology.
Comp. Zool. (Cambridge) 105. “Neva”,

Waksman, S. A. microbiologist N. J. Agr. Experiment
Station (New Brunswick) 201.

Walker, Virginia B. secretary to director. Museum
Comp. Zool. (Cambridge) 112. Howes, Millfield.

Warbasse, E. Antioch. 201. Penzance.

Warner, W. S. Jr. Harvard. “Asterias”.

Weed, R. H. Harvard. “Asterias”.

Welsh, J. H. Museum Comp. Zool. (Cambridge) 207,
215. Clough, Millfield. F

Wolfe, Mary F. lab. technician zool. Harvard. 105.
Kittila, Bar Neck.

Ziegler, Virginia asst. to William Beebe, New York.
106. White, Millfield.

Zucker, J. M. Brown. 110.

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL

Barnum, Susie G. assistant. Br 120. H 1,

Johnson, D. S. chairman diy. biol. and agr. Br 120.
A 10i.

McGraw, Miss Br 120. H 1,

Luscombe,

Museum

Museun

14 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vo. VI. No. 41

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the seientifie work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Ware Cattell Editor
Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Cattell

The Collecting Net in 1931

The purpose of THE COLLECTING Net is to
assemble material which is of especial interest to
the workers in the biological institutions at Woods
Hole. We want to record as fully as we can the
research work and other activities of the members
of the Marine Biological Laboratory, the United
States Bureau of Fisheries and the Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution. But we also want to
seek relevant material outside of Woods Hole
and to record local events of interest. The pro-
jected editorial contents of our magazine can be
divided fairly well into the four parts:

(1) Results of scientific work reported dur-
ing the summer at Woods Hole, together with
critical reviews of such reports.

(2) Items reporting the activities of members
of the scientific institutions in Woods Hole.

(3) World-wide news of the activities of
individuals working in the field of biology.

(4) The more important local news.

Tur Cortectine Net is an independent publi-
cation, Its contents are based primarily on the
three scientific institutions in Woods Hole, but
it has no official connection with any one of them.

We helieve that there is not only a place but a
real need for an informal magazine of biology
which is prepared to include constructive dis-
cussion on any topic of interest to those persons
working in the field of the biological sciences.

The fact that Tur Coxtectinc NeT is
responsible to no organization gives it a peculiar
advantage over many other publications in the
field of science. It can include material that they
would hesitate to print. Editors often have an
article that they would like to print, but cannot
because some editorial board or organization
would have to assume responsibility for it.

We therefore wish to make it known that we
welcome material of this kind and that we are
ready to reproduce in black and white many
things pertaining to the administration of
universities and scientific institutions which one
often hears but rarely reads.

Beach Restrictions

Two recent cases of the assertion of property
rights, the limitation of the bathing space on the
bayside beach and the courteously formulated
request of the Trustees of the Forbes estate, call
the attention of the scientific institutions in
Woods Hole to the need of safeguarding and
developing recreational facilities.

It is natural and desirable that laboratory
workers should hope to profit from the physical
advantages of their environment. It is certainly
true that some investigators, even among those
who have acquired property, are beginning to
feel that Woods Hole is likely to become less
desirable for themselves and their families unless
recreational facilities can be retained and ex-
panded. Is there, for example, any surety that
the bathing beach frontage may not be limited to
that of a single lot or even lost entirely if efforts
are not made to place the bathing beach under
public or institutional control? The Marine
Biological Laboratory has shown foresight in
providing real estate for the summer homes of
investigators and it now seems desirable that
attention should be paid to these recreational
needs before it is too late.

The regular meetings of the Penzance Sunday
Forum will be held on Sunday afternoon at four
o'clock at Gladheim on Penzance Point, begin-
ning July 5th. These meetings are an established
institution and have been held for the past twenty
years. All teachers and students at the labora-
tories. as well as other interested persons, are
invited. Social, economic and_ scientific matters
of current interest are discussed in an informal
way. At the first meeting on Sunday, July 5th,
Mr. Roger Baldwin will speak about our civil
liberties.

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

July 2 6:38 6:47
ialyeeon ee 7:23 7235
July 4 8 :09 8:21
July 5 YE OC IS ENS:
July 6. 9:45 10:10
July 7 LORSZ5 Mae OS

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay. It must be remembered that the schedule
printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro-
longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the
current to oceur a half an hour earlier or later
than the times given above.

June 27, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET 15

ITEMS OF INTEREST

_Dr. C. G. Rogers, professor of comparative
physiology at Oberlin College, who has been
located in the Oberlin Room in the Laboratory
for many years, resigned from the staff of the
embryology course of the Marine Biological
Laboratory. After spending the summer at
Oberlin, he sails early in September for Europe
where he will spend his sabbatical yar.

Dr. Hope Hibbard, associate professor of
zoology at Oberlin, has gone to Europe for the
summer. She will spend most of her time in
Russia, Austria, France and Germany.

Dr. V. C. Twitty of Yale, who was on the
staff of the embryology course last year, is now
holding a National Research Fellowship at the
Kaiser-Wilhelm Institute at Berlin.

Henry B. Bigelow, Jr., sailed from Montreal
on June 26th, for England. He will return about
September 1 as an able-bodied seaman, on the
Atlantis.

Dr. and Mrs. Frank Knowlton have gone to
Syracuse, New York, to see their daughter, Miss
Katherine Knowlton, who has just returned
from a trip to California. They will return to
Woods Hole at the end of next week.

Dr. Hans Spemann of the University of
Freiburg, a prominent European embryologist,
will visit Woods Hole during the latter part of
this summer.

Dr. and Mrs. J. M. Johlin and daughters, Ruth
Ann and Sally, of Nashville, have deserted the
Laboratory Apartments this year for their new
home off Gardiner Road. Miss Sally Johlin
will work in the chemical room of the laboratory
for the summer.

Dr. S. Tashiro and family are living in their
new house on Park Street, off Gardiner Road.

Mr. J. A. Gilmore, collector in the Supply
Department two years ago, made a short visit
to Woods Hole during the week of June 8th
before returning to Dartmouth to be graduated.
He will attend the Iowa Law School this sum-
mer.

During the last few years the Bureau of
Fisheries has released thousands of drift bottles
off the North Atlantic coast of the United States.
An extremely interesting return has just come

in from the 1929 release, from a_ bottle
picked up at Fairfield Crooked Island, the
Bahamas. Judging from ptevious distant drifts

this bottle was carried eastward across the North
Atlantic and southerly on the eastern Altantic
and then again to the westward, being cast up

in the Bahamas after floating about two years.

Dr. Paul Galtsoff, in charge of oyster investi-
gations at the Bureau of Fisheries, attended the
Pacific meetings of The American Association
for the Advancement of Science, which were held
in Pasadena, California, from June 15th to June
20th. He read a paper at the symposium on
oceanography, entitled “The Life in the Ocean
from a Biochemical Point of View.” Among the
many ,interesting symposiums were those of
genetics and photosynthesis. Over twelve hun-
dred registered members of the association were
present.

Dr. O. E. Sette, director of the Bureau of
Fisheries, left in the Albatross on June 12th for
the Virginia capes. The trip covered about
fifteen hundred miles. Dr. Sette was in charge
of the scientific work ,and William O. Neville
and Frank E. Firth assisted. The object of the
trip was to look for the early stages of mackerel
eggs and larvae in the various plankton forms.
The party returned on June 18th. Temperatures
and water samples were taken, in order to deter-
mine the oceanic conditions that influence the
development of the various pelagic plants and
animals. An abundance of the late mackerel
larvae was found in the southern half of the
region covered. In the northern half of the
region, earlier stages were found, as well as a
great abundance of Calanus, one of the most

important food members of the plankton.
Collections have been brought back to the
Fisheries laboratory for detailed examination.

Along the western edge of the continental shelf,
forty or fifty miles off shore, a Portuguese man-
of-war was spotted—the first to be seen this
spring.

The M. B. L. Club again invites your attention
to the facilities of its club house. You will find
there an opportunity for quiet relaxation, for
reading current periodicals, for playing cards, for
meeting old friends and for making new ones, etc.

The opening dance was held on Saturday.
As heretofore, there will be a dance every Satur-
day evening. The radio amplified phonograph
which used to provide music for dancing has been
improved since last year, and it is hoped it may
again be used for repeating some of the splendid
concerts of last year.

A new raft has been built and is ready for those
who enjoy water sports.

Every member of the laboratory is invited to
join the club and to give it their support.

16 ent a THE COLLECTING NET |) | Wor Vip Nawal

NEW

Designed and developed by Durably made of heavy tan

Dr. Leon A. Hausman, Head : ae a ees Fs
{Te 4. Srausman, EC canvas with double seams and
of Department of Zoology, AGB ae go :

reinforced. shoulder strap.

New Jersey State College for ia 3 ;

Women, New Brunswick, New 4 a eh) ote + Twelve pockets for jars 114 inches
Jersey. Now manufactured in diameter; four pockets for
and sold exclusively by the jars of pint or half-pint size.
General 3iological Supply

Size 17 by 11% inches. Weight
6% pounds equipped with jars.
The weight is so distributed that
the bag may be carried for hours
without tiring the collector.

House. This sack has been
used for many years by the
students in Dr. Hausman’s
field courses. It is particular-
ly useful to the collector of
aquatic forms.

Price complete with 16 specimen jars (as illustrated) {Each $3.25)Dozen $37.50
Price for sack only (w:thout jars)................ {Each $2.25|Dozen $25.50

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

S& Incorporated
TiheiSan of dhe Tugazons 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction CHICAGO

GLASS ELECTRODE
APPARATUS

The glass electrode method of hydrogen-ion
determination of liquids is particularly adapt-
able to measurements on physiological media.

Advantages
(a) Accuracy within 0.02 pH is
obtainable.
(b) Medium under test is not con-
taminated.
(c) Less than lec. of the sample is
sufficient.

(d) About 5 minutes to each test.

(e) Clear, colored or turbed solu-
tions can be tested.

(f) A null method is employed.

A copy of List 108-C will be sent on
voquest.

Pioneer Manufacturers ( AM BRIDGE 3732 Grand Centr-1
of Precision Instruments INSTRUMENT Co [Nc vc Terminal, New York

JUNE 27, 1931 | THE Cl ILLECTING NET 17

SPENCER

OVER

1800

Universities and Laboratories

fone VAC RO TOME

oe Spencer Precision Rotary Microtome No. 820 is used
in practically every important educational hospital or research
laboratory in America. ‘There is scarcely a country in the
world to which it has not been shipped.

The microtome has gained this worldwide approval because of
several distinctive features, one of which is as follows:

It completely overcomes the inaccuracies usually encountered
in rotary microtomes, due to an up-and-down movement of
the object. It does this by using an inelined-plane feed, an
advantage possessed by no other similar instrument. In this
inclined-plane feed the up-and- down movement and the feed
work independently of each other.

SPENCER

BUFFALG
a

The many other advantageous features manifest themselves in
its perfection of accuracy.

Catalog T-8 completely describes
this Spencer Precision Rotary Mi-
crotome. Write for it today!
Products: Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Visual Aids,
Optical Measuring Instruments.

Branches: New York, Boston, Washington, Chicago, Minneapolis, Los
Angeles, San Francisco.

BUFFALO

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

RESEARCH MICROSCOPE

GCE-10
Magnifications: 30 - 1800x. Large
mechanical stage, Abbe illuminating
apparatus. Aplanatic condenser n.
a. 1.4 Quadruple revolving nosepiece.
Apochromatic ‘cbjectives:

10 n.a. 0.30

20 n.a. 0.65

40 n.a. 0.95

90 n.a. 1.30 (oil imm.)

K oculars 3x, 5x, 10x, 15x, 20x, 7x
micrometer.

Price, complete in case, $447.50
fou: IN] Ye

BITUKNI FOR USE
WITH GCE 10 MICROSCOPE
Binocular attachment Bi-
tukni including one pair
of compensating eyepieces
(7x, 10x or 15x) $86.00
f.o.b. New York. Addi-
tional compensating eye-

pieces $18.00 a pair.

CARL ZEISS, Inc.

485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill St., Los Angeles, Calif.

eis

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

a — 2 r fF

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 1%-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof c ver for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EAC#i
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE

Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Env’ronment

Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_ avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign
postage: 20 cents.

GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Sc‘ence

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part af
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman ‘Taylor,
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27. text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927, Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

nnn ee UEEEEEEEEEe

a,

ea

June 27, 1931 ]_ THE COLLECTING NET 19

—

Again B&L
Advances
Microscope
Design

When BAUSCH & LOMB first announced
the Drum Nosepiece for Wide Field
Binocular Microscopes an event was
marked in the history of microscopy
comparable in importance to
the invention of the first re-
volving nosepiece. Now
comes the first radical im-
provement in the Drum
Nosepiece. ..another histor-
ical milestone.

Formerly the Drum Nosepiece contained three pairs of matched objectives,
which were non-removable. The New 1082 Drum Nosepiece contains only one
pair of objectives (the 0.7X) permanently mounted. The other two pairs can

be readily removed by simply sliding out the objective mount. Other ob-
jectives similarly mounted can be quickly substituted. In all other respects

the well-known KW series of wide-field microscopes remains the same.

Write for complete information

“BAUSCH &@ LOMB OPTICAL COMPANY (/@@@
6715t. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York Lis

GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
@LOMB .

BAUSCH éELOMB.

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

20) ed THE C JLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI, No. 41

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate

Spalteholz amiiaits)
Transparent E
Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- . ;
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum nee Cneee
and = ; ae
Zoological Cray-ApAmMs Cc MPANY

= 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW
Model of Iiu_as1 Heart W oe

Living and Preserved
BIOLOGICAL SPECIMENS

Representing all types, for the Laboratory, Museum or Special Research.
In addition to all of the widely used forms, we specialize in important
southern species not obtainable elsewhere. Also headquarters for Micro-
scopic Slides, Life Histories, Demonstrations, Insect Collections, Skeletons.
Catalogs Free.

The best service on living material such as giant southern Bullfrogs,
Amphiuma, Alligators, Turtles, Crayfish, Clams, Protozoa and Aquarium

Animals and Plants.

SOUTHERN BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY CO., Inc.

517 DECATUR St. NEW ORLEANS LA.

June 27, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET

AN
BAOEL TONAL DISPEAY

of

MIGK@OSCOPES- and
Pe ESoORIES

We are pleased to announce that through the codperation of the
MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY, we have been granted the privi-
lege of holding an exhibit from JUNE 28 to JULY 4 in the OLD LECTURE
HALL at WOODS HOLE, Massachusetts.

This exhibit will include a number of new and important developments
as pertain to various fields of scientific endeavor. Certain specialized equip-
ments will be shown in actual use with specimens and working material ob-
tained at Woods Hole, for example, the Chambers’ Micro-Manipulator with
micro-injection and dissection devices; the Capillary Microscope with illu-
minant and camera for studies of blood circulation, etc. The new model of
the Leitz Research Microscope “JURM” with Apochromatic objectives and
inclined prism body, will be in actual use.

The LEICA Camera now utilized at practically every institution of
learning, will be displayed with its complete line of lenses, accessories and
illustrative material. Photographs will be taken of specimens submitted to
our representative and recommendations advanced indicating how this
camera can serve your individual studies and requirements.

You are cordially invited to visit our exhibit at the OLD LECTURE
HALL, JUNE 28 to JULY 4, MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.

Pre Z “tne:

60 E 10TH STREET ‘ NEW YORK, N. Y.

22 __ THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

range of

INTERNATIONAL
CEN ERIBUIGES

Many types offering a large variety
of equipment of tubes and a wide
speed and
relative centrifugal force.

consequent

International Equipment Co.
852 WESTERN AVENUE
BOSTON, MASS.

A TRIPLE BEAM TRIP SCALE

1,010 grams
Sensibility 0.05 g.
Capacity with extra weight

Greater
Accuracy
Greater Capacity

No. 4040 Triple Beam Balance, Harvard Trip Scale construction.

No, 4040 (Patent Pending)

sensibility 0.05 gram. Complete with sliding weights on the heams, each

In lots of 6 ro more, each

No. 4040W Extra Weight, to increase capacity to 1,010 grams Lease

This balance has three times
the beam capacity of double
beam trip scales.

Specifications

Front beam weighs from 0-10
grams by 0.1 gram

Center beam weighs from 0-
300 grams by 100 grams
Third beam weighs irom 0-
100 grams by 10 grams
Total capacity on beams 610
grams

Tota! capacity with extra
weight 1,010 grams
Sensibility 0.05 gram

Honed knife edges rest on
agate planes

Pan made of molded Bakelite

Capacity 610 grams,

$12.00
$9.00
15

W. M. WELCH MANUFACTURING COMPANY

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of Scientific Apparatus, Furniture and School Supplies

General Offices: 1515 Sedgwick St., Chicago, Ill., U. S. A.

Scievtifie Anparatus Pactory and Warehouse:
1516 Orleans Street, Chicago, Illinois Branch Offices:
842 Madison Ave 1916 West End Ave. 84th & Broadway
New York City, N. Y. Nashville, Tenn. Kansas City, Mo.
Braun-Knecht-Heimann Co., Ltd.
_576-584 Mission Street Pacific Coast Distributors
San Francisco, California

Labatory Furniture Factory:
Manitowoe, Wisconsin
2220 Guadalupe St.
Austin, Texas

The Braun Corporation, Ltd.
363-371 New High Street
Los Angeles, California

me

eke ate es

June 27, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET : 23

WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE
ESTABLISHMENT, Inc.

Announcement of Re-organization

The Directors of Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, Inc.,
take pleasure in announcing that the University of Rochester has
decided to continue the operation of this establishment in the inter-
est of science.

To carry out the desire of the University to render the great-
est possible service, we have secured the services of Dr. Dean L.
Gamble, who has now assumed the active management of the estab-
lishment. Dr. Gamble taught for eight years in the Department of
Zoology at Correll University, and for the past seven years he has
been in charge of the Zoology Division of the General Biological
Supply House in Chicago. Because of his experience in teaching, as
well as in business, he is very well fitted to maintain the highest sci-
entific standards of Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, Inc. We
have also rented a large four-story building, having over 40,000
square feet of floor space, where, for the first time in many years,
our enormous collections will be properly housed.

We wish to take this occasion to thank our many patrons and
friends for the patience they have shown in putting up with the de-
lays necessitated by the confusion caused by our fire of last Sep-
tember, and to assure them of prompt, careful and efficient service
in the future.

Send for Circular No. 330, which contains a revised list of our
Catalogs of Natural Science Material.

WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, Inc.
P. O. BOX 24, BEECHWOOD STATION,
ROCHESTER, N. Y.

THE COLLECTING NET

Biological
Specimen
Dishes

Now in Two Sizes

The very satisfact-ry demand for Bioiogica
Specimen Dishes has led to the introductior.
of a larger size.

The small Dish has a capacity to the brim 0°
350 cc., inside height 45 mm., inside diameter
100 mm., height overall 50 mm. The large Dis!
has a capacity of 1750 cc., inside height 7(
mm., inside diameter 175 mm., height overall
80 mm., Both Dishes are made from clear
heavy glass. The bottoms are flat and the
Dishes will stack perfectly.

This type of bowl has been in use for a
number cf years at the Marine Biological
Laboratory at Woods Hole, Dartmouth Col-
lege, DePauw University, Ohio University,
Louisiana State University, George Washing-
ton University, and elsewhere.

It is applicable to work in embryology, espe-
cially with chick embrycs; to small aquatic
organisms, living or preserved; to the develop-
ment of Echinoderms and other eggs. Further
uses will be readily apparent to the biologist.
The small dish fits conveniently under a
microscope. The rounded inside permits easy
cleaning. When stacked or nested, the dishes
can be easily transported and stored.

6734—Biological Specimen Dishes.

Small Large
No. in original barrel 168 36
Each $.25 $1.00

10% discount in dozen lots, 20% dis-

count in original barrels.

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER, N.Y.

[ Vou. VI. No. 41

GM 1. ‘the Pea.

. .
Genetics Preparations

These preparations demonstrate classic examples
of Mendelian inheritance. The results of eross-
ings of individuals with contrasting characters
in the Ist and 2nd generations are clearly and
vividly shown in the first three preparations by
actual specimens, supplemented by diagrams and
explanatory notes. The Plaques with col yred
figures and diagrams are also very instructive
and are excellent preparation for courses in
Genetics.

GM 1. The Pea. Actual specimens illustrating
Mendelian principles, showing resu ts ot crossings
smooth yellow and wrinkled green peas, mounted in
vlass top, wood exhibition case . .. $6.75

: 2 The Snail. Actual specimens o shells
ing Mendelian principles, showing result of
crossing banded red and bandless ye'low snails,
mounted in wood exhibition case ............5. $6.70

GM 3. The Snail. Same as above mount showing
results of crossing bandless yellow and _ five-banded
yellow snails.

GM 5. Mendelian Diagrams. On plaques 9144” x
13” in size, with cellophane covering to protect
colored figures and diagrams prepared in meta
frames for durability.

a) Mirabilis Flower. Effect of crossing red and

white individuals.
b) Fowl. Effect of crossing white and black
individuals.

(ec) Snail. Effeet of crossing bandless and_ five-
banded individua's.

‘d) Human Eyes. Effect of crossing brown anid
blue-eyed individuals.

(e) Snails. Effect of crossing red banded and yel-
low bandless individual

(tf) Mice. Effect of crossing grey and brown
individuals.

(gz) Mice, Effect of crossing grey and = albino
individuals.

(h) Corn. Effect of crossing yellow starchy corn
and blue sugar corn.

(i) Fruit-fly. Sex-linked inheritance.

‘J) Human Eye. Intererossing with parent forms,

(k) Co'orado Potato Beetle, Non-transmissable
variations caused by temperature and humidity.

dQ) Colorado Potato Beetle. Inheritable influences
of temperature and humidity.

Por’ BISQU Gy s)stewiay-scine ec aotelactoteratoe ta neiviarsiatatas eee $2.25
Set of 12 Plaques, with 76 page de dtive

DOOKIE ss. actrees eenciters rctnierercinfelorete ene $24.00
Prompt

Prices Within Reason Guaranteed

Service Quality

New York Biological Supply Co.
General Supplies for the Biological Sciences
34 Union Square New York, N. Y.

June 27, 1931 |

Kewaunee Laboratory Furniture
Correct in Every Detail

Our full line of Biology Laboratory Furniture,
scientifically, technically and pedagogically correct,
is now available at surprisingly low prices

We show here just a few of the many Kewaunee pieces that are designed
especially for the study of Biology. The Kewaunee catalog pictures many
more pieces of Biology Furniture and gives complete details about each
piece. In this great book of modern laboratory furniture you will find
almost every type of furniture you may require. In case you do not find
exactly what you need among the standard pieces, Kewaunee Engineers will
gladly co-operate with you in designing and building special equipment to
meet your needs.

Museum or Exhibition

Kewaunee Furniture is Most Practical and Usable Case No. G-1503

Kewaunee Laboratory Furniture is not made by rule of
thumb methods. A staff of nationally prominent labora-
tory consultants, scientists, analysts and_ research
authorities is employed by Kewaunee to insure Kewaunee
Laboratory Furniture being technically, pedagogically
and scientificially correct in every detail. Kewaunee also
maintains a complete department of Laboratory Furniture
Engineers, Plan Men and Designers, Craftsmen and
Mechanics. These specialists design and _ construct
laboratory furniture in strict accordance with the various
laboratory requirements and natures of work and their
technology.

Germinating and Aquarium
Table No. C-412

Write for the Kewaunee Book

If you are interested in buying new laboratory furimi-
ture, by all means get the Kewaunee Catalog. It is the
most comprehensive book of the industry and is sent
without charge and postpaid to any buyer of laboratory
furniture requesting a copy on the letterhead of his
institution. If you do not have the Kewaunee Book, write

for it today. Trapezoidal Microscope
/ : Table No. C-354
Kewaunee also builds a full line of — a i n |

Library, Vocational and Domestic
Science Furniture.

LABORATORY FURNITURE G ‘ EXPERTS

Cc. G. Campbell, Pres. and Gen. Mgr.
231 Lincoln St., Kewaunee, Wis.
Offices in Princpal Cities

Chicago Office: New York Office:
14 KE. Jackson Blvd. 70 Fifth Avenue

Combination Science Table No. D-580

Chemical and Apparatus Storage Case No. G-1452 Combination Science Table No. D-671

26 : THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

Scientific Instruments
Research Apparatus

New

Principle in a

MICROMANIPULATOR

The new Emerson Micromanipulator con-
trols the needles and
pipettes under a by two simple
levers. One of these levers produces vertical mo-

movements of micro

microscope

tion in a straight line, and the other provides
all horizontal motions. The control is so co-ordi-
nated that the apparent horizontal motions of the
operating needle seen through the microscope are
identical with the actual motions of the control-
ling lever.

The device is precise and smooth in opera-
tion under any magnification of a microscope.

The amount of motion of the needle across
the visible field in relation to the actual motion
Conse-
quently it is possible to work fast or slowly, in

of the hand is adjustable, very simply.

a wide or narrow range, under whatever magnifi-
cation is needed.

PRICE, MOUNTED PAIR OF MACHINES,
$160.00

Micro injection appcratus, moist chambers, micro
needles, and other accessories can
also be supplied.

OTHER DEVICES MANUFACTURED INCLUDE

IMPROVED BARCROFT-WARBURG AP-
PARATUS as used in the determination of
lactic acid content in cancer tissue or for
studying other types of cell metabolism.

HIGH SPEED CENTRIFUGE of small ca-
pacity operating at ten thousand r. p. m.

SHAKING DEVICES for Clark Hydrogen
Electrode Vessels and for shaking 30-125
c. c. Erlenmyer flasks in constant tempera-
ture bath.

DIALYSIS APPARATUS as described in
the March 1931 issue of “The Journal of
General Physiology.”

CONSTANT TEMPERATURE equipment
and water baths, special tanks built to
order.

HEART LEVERS improved type with re-
movable lever arm.

LABORATORY DRIVES, PULLEYS and

ENDLESS RUBBER BELTS. SPECIAL
WORK and GLASSWARE to ORDER.

J. H. EMERSON

i> BRATILE STREE®

CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS

June 27, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET

Now

Biology

Ready

especially

a fresh survey of modern
designed for

those who do not plan to specialize

in Botany or Zoology.”

CONTENTS
Introduction
A Vertebrate Animal
A Flowering Plant
The Cell and Metabolism
The Cell and Behavior
The Cell and Reproduction
Heredity and the Gene
Ecology and the Community
The Evoluticn of the Species
The Plant Kingdom
The Animal Kingdom
Applied Biology
Appendix
(a Glossary of Technical
Terms
(b) Classification of Organ-
isms
Index

Textbook of
General Biology

By WALDO SHUMWAY
Professor of Zoology, University of Illinois

From the wealth of illustrative material offered in the fields of
Botany and Zcology the author has selected such facts and
theories as have a general significance. The book is designed
for a course of one semester or two terms, and presents an
outline of biological principles arranged in logical series.

The student is introduced to the subject by an account of
the structure and activities cf a vertebrate—the frog, because
of the ease with which it may be compared with the human
body. Following this, an account of a flowering plant is pro-
vided—the familiar wheat, an example of a highly organized
and common plant, After describing the form, functions, and
life history of this plant and comparing them with those of the
frog, the student is ready to embark upon the study of bio-
logical principles.

After a discussion of these principles a brief survey of the
major plant and animal groups is intended to give some idca
cf the evolution of these kingdoms. The book is concluded
with a short account of some of the ways in which the study
of Biology is applied to the improvement of human life.

Because this book is written principally for those to whom
lab-ratory facilities are not available, illustrations have been
freely used to take the place of demonstration material. These
are carefully labeled and the use of abbreviations has been
avoided. *

Price $3.00

361 pages. 6 by 9.

John Wiley & Sons, Ine.

New York City

440 Fourth Avente

28 __ THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

Just published -

Second Edition
Revised and Enlarged

Invertebrate
Zoology

By HARLEY JONES VAN CLEAVE
Professor of Zeclogy, University of Illinois

McGRAW-HILL PUBLICATIONS
IN THE ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES

282 pages, 6x9, 120 illustrations, $3.00.

This is a thorough textbook of the structure, devel-
opment, and relationships of invertebrate animals.
More material has been included than could ordi-
narily be covered in a single semester, offering the
instructor greater selection in organizing his work
than is possible when only materials for a specific
course are presented.

Outstanding Features of This Revision Are:

—considerable reorganization to relieve overem-
phasis on morphology and taxonomy. Specific
sections on the orders have been omitted from
most of the chapters. Instead, a summary of
classification has been inserted at the close cf
the discussion on each phylum, giving a terse
characterization of all classes, subclasses, and
orders generally recognized for each phylum

-—most cf the have been entirely re-

written.

chapters

-_many new illustrations have been added

—the chapters on Protozoa and Pcrifera have been
wholly recast and material brought into line with
most recent advances in these fields

—much of the newer knowledge on the parasitic
worms and other organisms of economic impor-
tance has been added

—interesting and significant biological facts have
been added throughout

SEND FOR A COPY ON APPROVAL

McGRAW HILL BOOK CoO., Inc.

370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK

P. BLAKISTON’S SON
& CO., Inc.

PUBLISHERS PHILADELPHIA

“A Second Digest
of Investigations
In Teaching of Science”

3y Francis D. Curtis, Pu. D.
University of Michigan
Edited By S. R. Powers, Pu. D.
Columbia University

This digest is a study of the problems, the
method used, and the findings as a result of
a penetrating analysis into science teaching
from 1925 to 1931. It follows Volume I
which covers the same field prior to 1925.

424 Pages Cloth $3.00 Postpaid

By WILLIAM E. CASTLE

“A book which will be of interest to the
geneticist and of practical use to the
breeder of rabbits and the fur farmer.”—
Science News Letter.

“In these pages will be found information
relative to the rabbit that has previously
been scattered through a large number of
scientific journals and textbooks, making
it possible for the reader to understand at
a glance the composition of almost all our
present day breeds. .. .. .. Both the fancy
and the commercial rabbit breeder owe him
a great deal for having placed in their
hands a book that will settle once and for
all so many vexed questions, thus placing
the breeding of the rabbit on a sure and
certain foundation.”” — Reliable Rabbit
Journal,

$1.25 a copy postpaid

Harvard University Press
51 RANDALL HALL,
Cambridge, Mass.

The
Genetics of Domestic Rabbits

June 27, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET 29

Oxidation-
Reduction
Potentials ...

Member Rockefeller Institute

A first step towards a solution, in the metabolism of the living cell.
view that provides a clearer and a thermodyramically correct approach to cell
The result of the author’s intensive work on
Invaluable, concise, the evidence of profound re-

getics.
its application to biological problems.
search. Order your copy now!

PART | Physico-Chemical Considera-
tions. Definition of oxidation and reduction.
The force of oxidation and reduction. His-
torical and critical remarks on redox poten-
tials and the mechanism of their establish-
ment. Evaluation of a redox pctential. The-
ory of mixtures of different redox systems.
The poise of a reversible redox system. The
neutral point of the redox scale. Inorganic
redox systems. The influence of complex for-
mation. Reversible organic redox systems.
Atomistics of reversible redox processes. Re-
lation between color and oxidation potential.
The activity theory applied to organic

Transl ated from the German by Louis B.

by L. Michaelis, M. D.

Flexner
A new point of
ener-
“Hydrogen Ion Concentration” and

16 Illustrations. 197 Pages. $3.00
systems. General formulation of the potentials
of the organic redox systems with respect to
the concentration of Hydrogen ions. Various
scales of the redex potential. Influence of
tautomerism. Irreversible oxidations and re-
ductions.

PART Il Physiclogical Applications.
The physiologically important redox systems.
Sulphydril systems. True reversible redox sys-
tems of importance in physiology. Reviews
cf the physiologically important redox sys-
tems. Measurement of reduction potentials
ir. physiological systems.

MONOGRAPHS ON EXPERIMENTAL BIOLOGY

Fectors Affecting the Distribu‘ion of Electro-
lytcs, Water and Gascs in the Animal Body

Bu D. D. Van Slyke, Ph.D., Sc.D
Rockefeller Institute
1&4 Diagrams. 70 Pages. $2.50.

Chemical Basis of Growth and Senescence

By T. B. Robertson

University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South
Australia
45 Illustrations. 376 Pages. $3.00.

Chemic21 Dynamics of Life Phenomena

By Professor Otto Meyerhof

Awarded the Nobel Prize 1923, for the
Researches Published in this Book
8 Diagrams. 110 Pages. $3.00

Injury, Recovery and Death in Relation t
Conductivity and Permeability

By W. J. V. Osterhout

Harvard University
96 Tlustrations. 259 Pages. $3.00

The Physical Basis of Heredity

By Thomas Hunt Morgan

Professcr Experimental Zoology in Columbia
University
117 Illustrations. 305 Pages.

LIPPINCOTT

$3.00

The Biology of Death

By Raymond Pearl
Johns Hopkins University
64 Illustrations. 275 Pages. $3.00

Labyrinth and Equilibrium
By Samuel Steen Maxwell, M.S., Ph.D

University of California
11 Illustrations. 163 Pages. $3.00

The Nature of Animal Light
By E. Newton Harvey, Ph.D

Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

36 Figures. 14 Tables. 182 Pages. $3.00
Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the
Vertebrates
By iG. He Parker. Sica):
Harvard University
37 Illustrations. 192 Pages. $3.00

The Elementary Nervous System
By G. H. Parker, Sc.D.
Professor of Zoology, Harvard University
53 Illustrations. 229 Pages. $3.00
Inbreeding and Outbreeding: Their Genetic and
Sociological Significance
By Edward M. East, Ph.D, and
Donald F, Jones

46 Illustrations. 285 Pages. $3.00

WASHINGTON SQUARE, PHILADELPHIA

30

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 41

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

The United States Coast Guard located at
Woods Hole leads an adventurous life in the
service of the government and the community
patrolling the waters from Old Harbor on the
outside of the Cape to the Sakonnet River.

During the past week two fishing boats went
aground off Gay Head. The Coast Guard came
to the rescue. One of them, The Constellation,
had had her bottom ripped out. The crew were
rescued and fed at the base and Mr. Cahoon
then provided them with transportation back to
3oston. The other was salvaged in spite of the
fact that there was quite a blow on, and as the
engine wouldn’t go, the Coast Guard towed her

to New Bedford where she could undergo re-
pairs.

Just at present Commander Patch has a mys-
tery to solve. Three or four days ago a Mr.
Howard Rynard reported that his boat, a green
sloop thirty-six feet long, numbered C-7076, had
been taken without permission and he asked the
Coast Guard for aid in recovering her. A little
later, a green sloop was reported off No. 2 Buoy
in Hyannis. She was full of water and when the
Coast guard finally got her off they found that
she was numbered C-7076. Maskus Seralis who
was in charge of the sloop when she went a-
ground, was arrested as a suspicious character
on Tuesday. Now the owner has disappeared,
and nobody by the name of Rynard can be
located.

Although Commander Patch is constantly
pestered by people who miss the last boat
and wish transportation, he can not, of course,
comply with such requests unless the circum-
stances are unusual. Last Fall, however, a
gentleman on Nantucket was seriously ill, and
as a final measure to save his life, two blood
donors were coming down from Boston. The
boats were not running so Commander Patch,
warned by the Doctor of the arrival of the two
3ostonians, came to the fore and _ transported
them over to the island.

The Coast Guard was also of invaluable aid
last Fall in checking the terrific forest fires
near Hatchville, and one of their men had his
eye dangerously burned.

The garden of Gladheim, the Woods Hole
home of Dr. and Mrs. James Peter Warbasse
of Brooklyn, was the scene on Sunday, June
2\st. of the marriage of their daughter, Miss
Agnes Warbasse to Mr. Harvey Willard Bur-
ger, son of Mr. and Mrs. Harvey Plumstead

3urger of Brooklyn. The Rev. Leslie Wallace
of Falmouth performed the ceremony. Miss Vera
Warbasse was her sister’s only attendant. Mr.
James Peter Warbasse Jr. was best man and the
ushers were Messrs. Richard Northrup and Eric
Price Warbasse, brothers of the bride. After a
short trip the couple will live in Brooklyn.

Swimming and life saving lessons will be given
free again this summer in Woods Hole to chil-
dren and adults under the auspices of the Ameri-
can Red Cross, with Miss Ruth Mullaney of
Hyannis as instructor. The schedule of lessons
at the Breakwater Beach is as follows:

July 1 at 10 A. M.
July 2 at 10:30 A. M.
Julys Satay Areas
July 11 at 4 P. M.
July 25 at 4 P. M.

The first half hour will be devoted to be-
ginners and the remainder of the time to ad-
vanced swimming and life saving. Registration
blanks may be obtained from Mrs. Thomas
Larkin, chairman of the Red Cross.

The Woods Hole Choral Club had its first
meeting in the M. B. L. Club Tuesday, June 23rd,
after the lecture. The Club is beginning its fifth
season under the leadership of Professor Ivan
Gorokhoff. Rehearsals are scheduled for Tues-
day and Friday evening after the lecture. All
those who like to sing are cordially invited to see
Mr. Gorokhoff before or after the rehearsal.

We took the Old Silver Beach road last week
to the University Players’ Theatre where, amid
an array of boxes and cans of paint, the Players
were beginning to get things organized for their
fourth season.

Composed primarily of men and women from
the Colleges and Universities who are striving
for the development of a more imaginative and
a more craftsmanlike American theatre, the
Players are adhering more and more rigidly to
professional standards. This year every member
of the company is specially trained in his part-
icular field, and their ambitious schedule calls
for such Broadway successes as ‘‘Paris Bound,”
“Coquette,” “Her Cardboard Lover,” “The Trial
of Mary Dugan,” “The Guardsman,” and “Juno
and the Paycock.”

ge ee EE PR I OA AONE RE IE OME

‘
¢

Jone 27,1931]

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Presents
“PARIS BOUND”
JULY 29th — JULY 4th
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

FITZGERALD, INC.
A Man’s Store
— MEN’S WEAR —
Tel. 935 Main Street
Falmouth

Colonial Buiding

MUNSON & ORDWAY
THE BRAE BURN SHOP
Fresh Killed Poultry — Fruit & Vegetables
Butter, Eggs & Groceries
Home Cooked Food and Delicatessen
Falmouth opp. Post Office Tel. 354-W

2 Deliveries Daily in Woods Hole

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Woods Hole Tel. 777

Service that Satisfies

DiiwSSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

BEXACO~ PRODUCTS

NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE

COMPANY
Opposite Station

_THE COLLECTING NET 31

“Our Wandering Book Shop”

Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays

throughout the summer

season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

Eastman’s Hardware
5 and 10c DEPARTMENT
KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Filfuel and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

Visit

Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

32 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. VI. No, 41

Church of the Messiah

(Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion

Marning Prayer

Evening Prayer ........ 7:30 p.m.

THE QUALITY SHOP
Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes and
Souvenirs
Ask for things you do not see.
Main Strect Wosds Hole

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in

FISH AND LOBSTERS
Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Wo ds Hole and Falmouth

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phon> 622

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND

HARDWARE CO.
Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER

Tel. 26)

Falmouth, opp. the Public Library

VERA’S HOME BAKERY
Party and Birthday Cakes Baked to Order
Ligkt Lunches and Soda Fountain
Service

FALMOUTH TEL. 1363

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING
Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered.

Prices Reasonable

M. DOLINSKY’S
Woods Hole, Mass.

Main St. Call 752

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

SANSOUCI’S BEAUTY PARLOR

Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and
All Branches of Beauty Culture

FALMOUTH PHONE 19-M

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth

Prone 907-M Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

When in Falmouth Stop at

ISSOKSON’S
GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait
A. ISSOKSON

The Collecting Net

Began Publication in 1926
BACK NUMBERS AND
VOLUMES

May be obtained by

addressing

The Collecting Net

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

June 27, 1931 ] |

THE C )LLECTING NET

THE PENNSYLVANIA BIOLOGICAL
SUPPLY HOUSE

412 Howard Avenue, Altoona, Pennsylvania
NATURAL HISTORY MATERIALS for

BOTANY ZOOLOGY
LIVING CULTURES of
AMOEBA HYDRA

PARAMECIUM PLANARIA

SLIDE PREPARATIONS

Entomological and Collectors Supplies
Insect Nets Riker Mounts
Spreading Boards Killing Fluids

‘GOLD

Non Corrosive Non-Corresive

MICROSCOPIC
SLIDES «« COVER GLASSES
Do Nest Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Vm y vw
Cray-ApAms Company
117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK

SEAL

The Laboratory Mouse:

Its Origin, Heredity, and
Culture

By Criype FE. KrEeLer

Extensive use of mice by scientists, medi-
cal schools, and hospitals leads to a desire
to learn as much as possible about them,
including their origin ‘and history as a
domestic animal, their uses in times past
and at present, amd the best methods of
rearing them and keeping them free from
disease. They have been of great service
in the diagnosis of disease in the prepara-
tion or standardization of serums to com-
bat disease, and in the study of heredity.
All this and much more, Dr. Keeler dis-
cusses in this timely and well-illustrated
volume.
$1.50 a copy postpaid

Harvard University Press
51 RANDALL HALL,

Cambridge, Mass.

Books in Biology

are on sale at

tere OLEEETING NET Office

We are also prepared to obtain any available book.

Each time a book is sold, all of the agent’s commission will be

turned over to

THE COLLECTING NET Scholarship Fund

34 ETA THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vo. VI. No. 41

EXHIBIT IN LECTURE HALL
JULY 5th - 21st
July 5th - 21st, under direction of J. A. (Jack) Kyle

Biclogical Life Histories

Botanical Models ‘Brendel’

| Spalteholz Preparaticns

Charts: Anatomical, Neurological, etc.
Skeletal Material, Human and Zoological
Models, Anatomical and Zoological

“PROMI” and “PROMAR” Microsccpic Drawing and Projection Apparatus

Crav-A\pAms ;

117-119 East 24th Street

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Vvlumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
EST. 1887
29 EAST 2ist STREET

NEW YORK

ie ee,
PHOTOELECT RIG
METER

To determine the transmission of light
through different materials.

Shows degree of turbidity, concentration
(blue and yellow) and opacity of translu-
cent materials, e.g., paper.

Write for A.P.C. Bulletin No. 103, and
give details of your problem.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
New York, N. Y.

New York

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC

13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

Marine Biological
Laboratory

Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

Catalogues and information Furnished by

Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

THE COLLECTING NET

JUNE 27, 1931 ]

; Important | New Books in Biology

HEGNER
College Zoology: Third Edition

This is the text which, by its outstanding merit,
Revision
has not changed its original successful plan, but has
added the important features of a new chapter on
Heredity and Genetics; more material on several of
the types, and on the histery of zoology, the evolution
of man, vertebrate structure and vertebrate embry-
ology; over a hundred new and revised illustrations; a
glossary of zoological terms; and a durable, water-

won 3-6 adoptions f«r the year 1929-1930.

proof, fabrikoid binding.
At the old price, $3.50

With an accompanying

LABORATORY GUIDE

This GUIDE, long awaited by zcology
teachers, parallels the text in the
types studied and in the order of!
their presentation. The exercises are
sufficient for a year’s work.
Matching the text in size
and binding, $1.00

LINDSEY
The Problems

of Evolution

A critical survey of the existing theories of
organic evolution; a re-weighing of the avail-
able evidence in all fields; a startling new in-
terpretation of the facts; and constructive
suggestions fcr experimental study.

Read this book as a scholarly summary of
present-day thought on evolution, and as a
distinct contribution toward the thinking of
the future.

Cloth, 236 pages, 12mo, $2.00

ESSIG

A History
of Entomology

The American chapter in the development
of the science cf entomology, containing illus-
trated biographies of 114 eminent entomolo-
gists; a 141 page chronological table of en-
tomological events; valuable material on pal-
ecntology, insect control, entomological insti-
tutions and legislation; a complete study of
the history of orchard mites and insects in
California; and other valuable features. Ful-
ly illustrated. Handsome fabrikoid binding.

1029 pages, Cr. 8vo, $10.00

JAMES GRAY, M. A., F. R. S.
A Textbook of Experimental Cytology

The application of physice-chemical methods to the study of
living matter has led to a conception of cell-structure which is of

fundamental significance.

In this book an account is given of recent

516 pp.,

Cloth, experimental research and an attempt is made to correlate the physi-
8vo cal structure of the living cell with its biological prcperties. A sum- $7.59
marized acc~unt of protoplasmic structure and of the relationship be-
tweer the cell and its environment should be of use to workers in
many fields of biology.
60 FIFTH T NEW
AvENUE LHE MACMILLAN COMPANY Yor

36 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 41

“Tt saved us the cost of 5 microscopes”

Quoting remark of a school superintendent
who bought the
“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-

Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye

ously.
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the
Promi but is more heavily constructed and
has the following additional features as
standard equipment :
More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light.
Revolving stage.
Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Cray-ApAms Company

117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

THE MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY
Dr. Hersert V. NEAL
Director of the Laboratory
The Mt. Desert Island Biological Laboratory The
was founded at South Harpswell, Maine, in 1898
by John Sterling Kingsley, who was one of the

first to appreciate the need of
a marine biological station
month or Cape Cod. The
Laboratory was incorporated
in 1913 and later—in 1921—
moved to Salisbury Cove on
Mt. Desert Island. At present
it has two stations, the Weir
Mitchell Station at Salisbury
Cove and the Dorr Station at
3ar Harbor. Research work-
ers only are admitted to the
former, while field courses as
well as opportunities for re-
search are offered at the latter.

The facilities of the Labora-
tory are adequate for thirty
research workers. The prop-
erty of the Laboratory includes
over one hundred acres of
land, five small wooden labora-

tory buildings with wharf, runway and float, a
social center and dining hall, two cottages, tents
with wooden platforms, three motor boats, etc
The laboratories are (Continued on Page 40)

SATURDAY, JULY 4, 1931

ANNUAL SuBscriPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Copies, 25 Crs.

OSTEOCLASTS AND CHONDROCLASTS
Dr. G. S. Dopps

Professor of Embryology, School of Medicine,

large

M. B. LG. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 7, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Seminar. Dr. A. C. Redfield,

“Tiffect of Hydrogen Ion Conecen-
tration and Salt Concentration on
the Oxygen Dissociation Constant
of Hemoeyanin,”

Dr. Laurence Irving, “The Co, Dis-
sociation Curve of Living Mam-
malian Musele.”

Dr. E. N. Harvey, “Photo-electric
Reeords of Animal Luminescence.”

FRIDAY, JULY 10, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Lecture. Dr. G. H. Parker,

professor of zoology, Harvard
University, “Humoral Agents in
Nervous Activities with Special
Reference to Chromatophores.”

walls between

TABLE OF CONTENTS

West Virginia University

multinucleate cells, known as
osteoclasts, which are so common in red bone
marrow are commonly believed to be the agents

in the destruction of bone
tissue during the development
and growth of bones. ‘There
has also been a belief on the
part of some students that
these same cells have an im-
portant part in the destruction
of preliminary cartilage which
precedes the bone in the pro-
cess of endochondral ossifica-
tion, though this view has not
been widely accepted. The
following observations upon
growing bones of dogs and
cats have a bearing on this
question.

It was observed in the de-
veloping bone, where the
marrow is encroaching upon
the cartilage and the cartilage
cells are arranged in longi-

tudinal rows, that the calcification of the cartilage
matrix does not effect the transverse walls be-
tween the cells of a row, but only the longitudinal
rows in the invasion of the

The Mt. Desert Island Biological Laboratory The Course in Invertebrate Zoology

Dr: Herbert V. Neal .. 37 Dr. James A. Dawson P 42
Osteoclasts and Chondroclasts ie The Chemical Room

Dr. G. S. Dodds Ber aleiAters Sie 37 Dr. Osear W. Richards ay 47
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Dodds : retin ile q

: : es : aa Morphology and Physiology of the Algae

Dr. Arthur W. Ham : 38 ie, WHlikema If, dibs 48
Passage of Sperms and Eggs Through the . ae soni Neen ae Gs ; ;

Mammalian Oviduct; Seminar Report of Book Review .. @ 49

Dr. G. H. Parker Directory Additions and Corrections 59

Summarized by Dr. Alfred M. Lucas 39 Items of Interest Shee . a1
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Parker The ABC of Woods Hole 57

Dr. Alfred. M. Lucas’....... ae. 40 Woods Hole Log 60

$$ mt

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 42

marrow into this tissue are broken down
and the cartilage cells liberated, apparently

under the influence of the smaller cells of the
marrow (the primitive connective tissues cells or
the vascular tissue). No osteoclasts are present
in the tongues of marrow which advance along
the rows of cells. On the other hand, it was
constantly observed that where the longitudinal
walls of calcified matrix are undergoing des-
truction, osteoclasts are very abundant ,and are
commonly seen wrapped about free edges of such
spicules. Thus the calcified part of the tissue is
destroyed by a different agency than the non-
calcified portions. This same relation was also

seen in the nests of cells found in epiphyseal
centers and in the earliest beginning of the center
of ossification, when the marrow first enters the
cartilage from the periosteum. In each case the
uncalcified portions of the matrix are removed
without the presence of osteoclasts, while calci-
fied material is destroyed, apparently only under
the influence of osteoclasts.

The studies indicate that there is no one type
of cell to which the name chondroclast can be
given, and that osteoclasts do not confine their
activity to bone tissue, but rather to calcified
matrix, whether of cartilage or bone.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. DODDS
Dr. ArtHur W. Ham

Instructor in Cytology,

Dr. Dodds has made an excellent point in in-
dicating that there is no one type of cell to which
the name chondroclast can be given. His work
shows that in the developing bone the multinu-
cleate cells arise as the osteogenic cells and blood
vessels invade the calcified cartilage, and that
the osteoclasts only form about the calcified
matrix. It is interesting to compare this process
with that seen in the healing fracture. In the
latter the osteogenic cells of the periosteum and
endosteum are found to differentiate into both
cartilage and bone, and as healing progresses the
cartilage is replaced by bone in much the same
manner as that seen in developing and growing
bone, except that there is no arrangement of
the cartilage cells in columns. The cartilage
is not replaced until the cells have become mature
and the matrix calcified. When this occurs, signs
of degeneration make their appearance in the
cartilage cells, and on occasion, lacunae coalesce
before the invasion of blood vessels and osteo-
genic tissue. Soon, however, through the pass-
ages created by the breaking down of the rather
thin walls of the lacunae, the tissue is invaded
by osteogenic cells and blood vessels. The former
differentiate into osteoblasts which form bone on
the surface of the remnants of the calcified
cartilage matrix, and into osteoclasts, which
form about portions of cartilage matrix not
covered by new bone, and about portions of the
newly formed bony trabeculae. There is no
evidence to show that the osteoclasts are
instrumental in opening up the cartilage lacunae
as a previous step to the invasion of osteo-
genic cells and blood vessels. On the other hand,
it is quite evident in a study of healing fractures
that the formation of osteoclasts is somewhat
secondary to the invasion of the cartilage.

Washington University

It is significant, as Dr. Dodds has noted, that
the calcified material calls forth the formation ef
osteoclasts. On the other hand, it is very evident
that calcified material is a profound stimulus to
new bone formation, a point which is well illus-
trated by the formation of metaplastic bone about
areas of pathological calcification. It therefore
appears that calcified material incites two types
of responses, one Ww hich results in osteoclasts and
the other in osteogenesis. It is not unreasonable
to conclude that the osteoclast response is in the
nature of a foreign body type of reaction. The
osteoclasts are not strongly phagocytic and they
refuse to take up vital stains. Hofmeister indi-
cated that they, because of their non-specific pro-
perty of elaborating carbon dioxide in the course
of their metabolism, caused solution of the calcium
salts in the calcified material adjacent to them.
It is obvious that resorption of bone is often ac-
complished without their assistance, as in creep-
ing replacement, tumor invasion and under the
influence of pressure. Furthermore, in instances
of hypercalcaemia induced by either hyperpara-
thyroidism or hypervitiminosis (D), the calcium
salts may be removed from bone matrix in whole-
sale fashion. In these conditions, however, it is
not uncommon to find conditions similar to giant
cell tumor and osteitis fibrosa cystica developing,
an observation which on the surface appears to
indicate again that the osteoclasts in these condi-
tions are formed as a result of calcium removal
rather than as the primary cause of it.

Although it seems definite that osteoclasts are
called forth by the presence. of dead calcified
matrix, and that the histological evidence is in-
dicative of their playing some part in its removal
by liberating some substance causing a solution
of the calcium salts, their importance in bone and

“2

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 39

calcified cartilage destruction should not be over-
estimated because the process often occurs with-
out their assistance. Their powers are not unique
as other cells on occasion advance readily into
calcified matrix. Although they arise from osteo-
genic cells, they tend to form about almost any
type of calcified material if it is placed in contact
with the osteogenic tissue, so that although they

are called osteoclasts they are really not specific
for bone. Consequently in view of the lack of
specificity on the part of the osteoclast, it is
obvious that there is less evidence to support the
hypothesis that presumes the existence of a specific
destroyer of cartilage, and that the use of the term
chondroclast only aggravates an already compli-
cated situation.

PASSAGE OF SPERMS AND EGGS THROUGH THE MAMMALIAN OVIDUCT

SEMINAR Report or Dr. G. H. PARKER
Director of the Zoological Laboratory, Harvard University

SuMManrizED By Dr. AtFreD M. Lucas
Assistant Professor of Cytology, Washington University

The vertebrate oviduct performs the interest-
ing mechanical feat of conducting objects in two
directions: the sperms toward the ovary and the
ova toward the uterus. The oviducts of certain
reptiles and birds possess a ciliary organization
particularly adapted to perform this function, in
that there exists in these animals a narrow pro-
ovarian tract for the conduction of sperms up-
ward and an extensive abovarian tract for the
propulsion of ova downward. In mammals,
however, the effective stroke of all cilia is toward
the uterus.

The interval of time required for the comple-
tion of various phases related to reproduction are
quite constant in the rabbit, which makes this
animal well suited for studies on the mechanism
of sperm and egg movement. The passage of
sperms from the vagina to the uterus is more
rapid than could possibly be accomplished alone
by their swimming movements. It is apparent
that muscular contractions of the region concerned
must aid in the propulsion of sperms toward the
oviduct. This conclusion is supported by the
experiments of Lim and Chao (1927), in which

_a segment of rabbit uterus was reversed, and yet

fertilization and implantation was obtained. The
passage of sperms upward through the oviduct
has generally been conceived as a_rheotactic
response to the ciliary current which is directed
downward. This opinion is supported by the
experiment of Adolphi (1905), in which sperms
placed between slide and cover-glass oriented
themselves to a current of fluid passed over them.
It has been observed, however, that the heads of
the sperms are somewhat sticky and the tendency
to adhere causes them to be orientated against a
stream in a fashion similar to that of a weather-
vane. Sections of the rabbit’s oviduct were re-
moved and slit open longitudinally. Sperms,
suspended in Ringer’s solution, which were added
to the preparation, were carried downward
with the current produced by the cilia. They

remained unoriented. This evidence of rheotaxis
is lacking.

Small quantities of ink injected into the lumen
about mid-way between the two ends of the
uterine tube ultimately appeared both in the
uterus and on the fimbriae. When introduced
into the tube near either end the ink appeared
at the opposite end. The ink particles have no
motility of their own, yet some of them arrive at
the ovarian end of the tube against the ciliary
current.

Muscular movements of a tpye similar to the
segmentation in the intestine are known to take
place and have been observed in the uterine tube.
The several contractions occurring simultaneously
divide the lumen temporarily into a series of
compartments. The numerous branched ribbon-
like folds which form the walls of the tube pre-
sent surfaces largely covered by cilia. The cur-
rent produced passes downward between the
opposed faces of the folds. Since the lower end
of the compartment is closed a return current is
initiated which passes upward through the center
of the lumen. Sperms, ink particles or other
objects which may lie in this central stream are
carried upward by it toward the upper end of
the segment. The next succeeding rhythmic con-
traction cuts the compartment in two parts, the
upper half of which together with the lower half
of the segment above forms a new closed com-
partment. The same process being repeated, it is
only a matter of a sufficient number of contrac-
tions before material which floats in the axial
stream is carried to the upper end of the tube.
Likewise, objects which lie close to the walls and
come under the direct influence of the ciliary beat
will by the same muscular mechanism reach the
uterine end of the tube. The motility of the
sperms, therefore, has no direct relation to its
conduction through the uterine tube.

The egg of the rabbit has a diameter of about

40

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 42

0.18 mm. and this size is such in relation to the
size of lumen and folds of the tube that the cilia
may most effectively propel the ovum toward the
uterus. The egg lying between two adjoining
folds presses against their surfaces and it is well
known that mechanical stimulation increases the
effectiveness of ciliary movement.

Sobotta, as well as others, regards the absence
of ciliated cells from the uterine end of the
mouse oviduct as indicating that peristaltic con-
tractions of the muscular layers are responsible
for the propulsion of the ovum. The experiments

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR

of Lode, Grosser, and others led them to regard
the cilia as the motile agents.

This study is of particular interest to the
gynecologist in his interpretation of hemorrhagic
cysts of endometrical type. The histological ex-
amination of so-called chocolate cysts led Samp-
son (1922) to conclude that they are derived from
fragments of uterine epithelium which somehow
have been carried through the tube into the body
cavity. The present work would indicate that
the uterine cells follow the same course as the
ink particles and the sperm.

REPORT OF DR. PARKER

Dr. ALFRED M. Lucas

Assistant Professor of Cytology, Washington University

The extensive studies which have been made
upon the muscular movements in the uterus and
oviduct of mammals have resulted in a tendency
to minimize the importance of the function of
the ciliated epithelium lining the Fallopian tube.
Conclusions based upon recent studies might lead
to the belief that cilia serve no other function
within the mammalian tube than that of a
“sweeper” for the purpose of removing cellular
fragments and debris from the walls of the tube.
Some regard the antiperistaltic contractions as
adequate for the upward conduction of sperms.
Earlier investigations, however, such as those of
KKehrer, Pinner, Heil, Lode, Grosser, and others
represent cilia as important agents in the pro-
pulsion of sexual products.

The interesting experiments and deductions

made by Dr. Parker suggest a correlation between
ciliary and muscular movements in the oviduct
of the rabbit. The muscular contractions in this
case render the ciliary movement effective in the
upward conduction of sperms. Dr. Parker
has shown how it is possible for sperms to be
conducted upward through the system and ova
to be carried downward toward the uterus with-
out a change in direction of ciliary movement.

The controversial question can only be solved
when direct observations are made upon the
mammalian tube im situ. Since it has been
possible to observe ciliary movement through the
oviduct wall in sitw in rats and guinea pigs it is
reasonable to anticipate possible direct observation
upon the movement through the oviduct of larger
objects such as sperms and ova.

THE MOUNT DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

(Continued from Page 37)

supplied with running fresh and salt water,
electricity for light, heat and power, and the
usual apparatus for biological research. The
library contains most of the American journals.

Mount Desert Island is situated on the coast
of Maine, one hundred miles east of Portland.
Its cold waters are extraordinarily rich in ma-
rine life, including forms found on rocky surf-
beaten shores, in muddy coves, on the sea
bottom at a multitude of depths and con-
ditions, and floating on the surface of bays,
inlets, and open sea. Depths of over a hun-
dred fathoms are found within twenty miles,
where Salpa, Staurophora, Tomopteris, Siph-
onophores, and hundreds of other pelagic
forms are found on the surface in their season.
The deep bottoms furnish brachiopods, huge
actinians, basket stars, Boltenias, and many
other rare forms. Cerebratulus and the echin-
oderm Echinarachnius are abundant and fur-

nish ripe eggs for study in the summer. The
large holothurian, Pentacta, sea-urchins, and
several starfish are extremely abundant and
of large size.

In addition to its marine fauna, the island
has a range of bold, deeply divided, ice-erod-
ed mountains that form a belt across its south-
ern half. Their lower sides are clothed by
forests, and between their peaks, rising at
highest over 1500 feet, are lakes, streams, and
marshes with a rich fresh-water fauna. Sev-
eral of these lakes are large and deep; one of
lesser size is 1100 feet above the sea. Brooks
are abundant and of cold water, containing
trout and a great variety of northern fresh-
water invertebrates.

Besides being situated in a region of great
beauty, unspoiled by commercial exploitation
or nearness to large cities, the Laboratory
has the advantage of being placed in close

—n

pat eng

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 41

contact with the wild-life Sanctuary of Acadia
National Park, created recently on Mount
Desert Island by the United States through the
efforts of a group of its public-spirited sum-
mer residents. ‘This is the only National Park
in the eastern portion of the continent and
the only one in the country in direct contact
with the sea. This secures for all time a
permanent and singularly rich area for bi-
ologic study in every field, vertebrate and in-
vertebrate.

For the season of 1981 thirty research
workers have engaged rooms at the Weir
Mitchell Station and ten students are enrolled
in field courses at the Dorr Station. Among
the research workers are: Professor William
H. Cole of Rutgers University, Professor Ulric
Dahlgren of Princeton, Professor Defrise of
the University of Milan, Dr. Allan Grafflin of
Harvard University, Dr. Perey L. Johnson of
Johns Hopkins University, Professor Margaret
L. Hoskins of New York University, Professor
Abram ‘IT. Kerr of Cornell University, Dr. and
Mrs. Warren H. Lewis of the Carnegie Institu-
tion, Dr. C. C. Little of the Jackson Memorial
Laboratory, Professor E. K. Marshall, Jr. of
Johns Hopkins University, Professor Samuel
O. Mast of Johns Hopkins University, Frank
J. Myers of the American Museum, Dr. D. M.
Pace of Duke University, Professor Herbert
V. Neal ofTufts College, Professor E. A.
Park of Johns Hopkins University, Professor
C. C, Plitt of the University of Maryland, Pro-
fessor Harold R. Senior of New York Uni-
versity, Dr. Homer W. Smith of New York
University, Professor William Wherry of Cin-
cinnati University.

During the present season public lectures
will be given by Ulric Dahlgren, Warren H.
Lewis, C. C. Little, E. K. Marshall, Jr., Kirt-
ley F. Mather and Herbert V. Neal.

A seminar on the researches carried on at
the Laboratory is held weekly during the
season.

At the Dorr Station work on problems of
college undergraduates or graduate grade is
open to a limited number of students. Mt.
Desert Island is peculiarly fitted for work
of this sort. Forms for study among the in-
sects, arachnids, fishes, amphibians, birds, and
mammals are plentiful and varied. The work
is conducted under supervision of a general
rather than of a detailed nature, aiming to de-
velop in the student individuality and an ap-
preciation of the value of field work in natural
history. While not neglecting laboratory
methods, it attempts to focus major interest

on problems of behavior or ecology in the
field. The large number of species of bird
life on or near Mt. Desert Island makes pos-
sible unusual opportunities for field study.
Work in the field includes investigation of the
distribution, resting habits, and other interest-
ing phases. Opportunity for a limited number
of advanced undergraduates or graduate
students to take up personal problems under
the direction of the staff of the Roscoe B.
Jackson Memorial Laboratory at Bar Harbor
is also offered. The problems center about
the work of cancer research being carried on
at that laboratory.

Those wishing to come to the Mt. Desert
Island Biological Laboratory may come by
rail from New York or Boston by the Bar
Harbor express which brings them directly to
Ellsworth on the mainland where they will be
met by the Laboratory car. The connections
by water from Boston are excellent and les-
expensive the Boston and Bangor Steamship
line leaving Boston every evening and connect-
ing at Rockland in the early morning with a
Bar Harbor boat, which passes through the
beautiful Fox Island Thoroughfare, among the
spruce-clad islands of the Maine coast, and ar-
rives at Bar Harbor about noon. Or it is
permitted to remain on the Bangor steamer
until the boat reaches Bucksport, Maine, from
which a steamer bus runs to Bar Harbor.
Those coming to the Laboratory should notify
the Director in advance, so that they may be
met on arrival by the Laboratory car.

Board for those connected with the Labora-
tory and their families is provided at the Lab-
oratory dining hall in Salisbury Cove at $10.00
per weeek. Rooms at reasonable prices may
be found in the village of Salisbury Cove, or
tents may be rented for the summer from the
Laboratory.

Applications for rooms in the Weir Mitchell
Station should be addressed to Herbert V.
Neal, Salisbury Cove, Maine. Inquiries in re-
gard to admission to courses in Field Natural
History should be sent to Clarence Cook Little,
Jackson Memorial Laboratory, Bar Harbor,
Maine.

George Sylvester Viereck, novelist, is staying
at The Breakwater for the summer. His many
interesting volumes include:— “My First Two
Thousand Years—The Wandering Jew”, “Salome
—My First Two Thousand Years of Love’, and
“Flesh and Blood”. He has traveled extensively
and during the World War became noted for the
stirring articles he wrote.

42 ; THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. VI. No. 42

THE COURSE IN INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY AT THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Dr. JAmes A. Dawson
Assistant Professor of Zoology, College of the City of New York
Director of the Course

The course in Invertebrate Zoology at the
Marine Biological Laboratory has been in
existence now for over forty years. During
this time a few accounts of the work of this
course have been published. The account
given by Allee! gives a resume of its history
and development up to the year 1922. The
writer, who at present is in charge of the
course, has been a teaching member of the
staff since 1919 and has thus been actively
connected with the course for the last twelve
years. From 1922 to 1925, inclusive, Dr.
R. H. Bowen was the instructor in charge
and the present writer has held that position
from 1926 to the present time. The staff
who have collaborated in the writing of this
account have all served at least three years
of this five year period. While the general
organization of the course has remained
practically the same as it was during 1922,
a number of changes in the nature of the
work have been made and it is proposed to
deal briefly with these in this account.

Applications for admission to this course
during the period under consideration have
been each year from 60 to 100% in excess of
the number (54) which could be accepted.
Selections have been made in accordance
with the policy of the Laboratory which is
clearly outlined each year in the Announce-
ment. Thus young graduate students and
seniors who have the announced intention
of doing investigation in Zoology have made
up the greater part of the student body in
the course during the last few years. With
such a large application list and with nearly
every applicant at least technically qualified
for admission the task of selection has be-
come increasingly difficult. It is felt, how-
ever, that the class selected each year drawn
largely from the eastern half of the United
States is representative of the students
showing most research promise.

The presentation of the subject material
includes as in the past the various phyla of
invertebrate animals from the Protozoa to
the Chordata exclusive of the Vertebrata.
The modifications and new developments in
the course will be given in this order. Spe-
cial developments in certain groups and
features dealing with the work of the class
as a whole will be presented at the end of the
treatment of the phyla.

Protozoa: As usual two days are spent
on this phylum and in addition the first field
trip of the course is taken on the Saturday
of the opening week. For this trip the class
is divided into two groups of four teams
each. Each of these groups collects from at
least four different habitats. The collec-
tions made by the whole class are then as-
aeued and studied as will be described
ater.

In the laboratory work on protozoa the
aim has been to present to the students spec-
imens of the chief classes or sub-phyla of this
phylum. The protozoan fauna of the Woods
Hole region is peculiarly rich since great va-
riation in protozoan habitats, including
fresh, brackish and salt water, can be had
in the space of a relatively short work. For
the sake of completeness and to obtain as
much contrast as possible the first day’s
work is devoted to a study of fresh and
brackish water species while the second day
is given over exclusively to marine species.
During the past three years students have
studied, chiefly with the aid of the low pow-
er of the compound microscope, subcultures
of two species of common, large, free-living
amebae. These cultures are prepared in
Syracuse Watch Glasses a few days previous
to the time they are to be studied in accord-
ance with a method worked out by the
writer? and thus contain organisms in a nor-
mal active growing condition. Optimum
conditions are thus afforded for the study of
the activities, e.g., locomotion, food capture
and ingestion and even fission of the pre-
sumably best known protozoans. Students
are asked to record their observations so
that they can later identify each species
when referred to accurate descriptions. Re-
sults recorded for the past few years show
that a relatively small number of the class
make sufficiently thorough diagnoses to en-
able them to identify correctly the organ-
isms. It is felt that time so spent is fully
justified when it is realized that the common,
free-living amebae have specific differences
which are generally not known by the ma-
jority of zoologists due largely to the lack
of opportunity for comparison. Cultures of
the. representative but somewhat rare ciliate
Blepharisma undulans and of the heliozoan,
Actinosphaerium, are also studied in the

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 43

same way. A number of other representa-
tive forms, all obtained from the vicinity of
Woods Hole, are invariably present in the
laboratory for students who wish to increase
their knowledge of well known species which
are not usually studied in college laborator-
ies. During the second day marine species
are studied. Students are taught the method
of finding and studying not only such free
living forms as the Suctoria of the region
but also the less well known parasitic species
such as Haplozoon clymenellae, the parasitic
dinoflagellate from the annelid, Clymenella
torquata, and the gregarine, Schizocystis
sipunculi from the gephyrean worm, Phasco-
losoma gouldii.

Field work with the protozoa is carried on
during the first Saturday of the course. All
species taken at a given habitat during the
morning field trip are kept together in clean
glass dishes. The entire afternoon is spent
in identifying such species as the combined
efforts of the class and instructors can ac-
complish. Determinations of the pH of the
water from each habitat have been made
during the last three years and the motile
phase of different protozoans has been stud-
ied. The list of protozoa which have been
identified is on record and gives an interest-
ing and valuable picture of the protozoan
fauna of this region.

Porifera: There has been no change
worthy of comment in the work on Porifera
during the years under consideration.

Coelenterata and Ctenophora: In gener-
al, treatment of these phyla varies slightly
from year to year due to the variation in sea-
sonal growth of the coelenterates and cteno-
phores of the region. Representatives of the
genera mentioned in Allee’s account are
available for study by the class. Living
Aurelia are obtainable about every other
year. Unfortunately the typical ctenophore
of the region, Mnemiopsis leidyi, has in the
past been present only during the closing
part of the course. Living specimens of this
species are studied after field trips at that
time. Since 1929 the course has begun in
August and as a result all of the previous
difficulties in regard to living ctenophores
have been removed. Unfortunately some of
the better known hydroids such as Tubularia
are no longer available at this time; this is
compensated for by the fact that Pennaria,
usually very scarce early in July, is at its
period of greatest abundance during August.

Platyhelminthes, Nemertinea, Nemathel-
minthes and Trochelminthes:

The treatment of these phyla has under-
gone extensive modification since 1922. As
in the previous groups the schedule of study
is rather elastic. Due to the diverse prep-
aration of the class, consisting as it does of
selected advanced students, every opportu-
nity is given for individual work; only very
general directions are made and students are
advised to select their material in such a
way as to gain the most extensive acquaint-
ance possible with the functions, structures
and habits of these animals.

In the laboratory work on Platyhelminthes
the following studies are suggested. (1)
The study of the role of cilia and muscles in
locomotion using the fresh-water triclads,
Planaria maculata, Phagocata gracilis and
Dendrocoelum lacteum; the marine triclads,
Bdelloura candida or Syncoelidium peiluci-
dum (both from the gill books of Limulus)
and Procerodes wheatlandi, also the marine
acoele Polychoerus caudatus. (2) The me-
chanics of proboscis action; the single
pharynx of Planaria and the multiple pha-

. rynges of Phagocata are observed as they

are extruded under the influence of 7% ether
water. (5) Feeding experiments. (4) Mor-
phology of living specimens of Bdellowra or
Syncoelidium including observation of the
flame cells. (5) Regeneration experiments.
If, as frequently happens, the student has al-
ready performed such experiments on Pla-
naria, he is advised to do more extensive ex-
periments in regeneration or to carry on a
comparative study of this in several species.
Planaria foremanni is especially favorable
for this work, its dark color contrasting
sharply with that of the unpigmented regen-
erating tissue. (6) Demonstrations of egg
capsules and newly hatched young of vari-
ous species.

Laboratory work on the Trematodes in-
cludes (1) Morphology of living Pneumone-
ces vibex, a fluke found commonly in the
pharynx of the puffer, Spheroides maculosa.
(2) Sporocysts of different ages are obtained
by stirring vigorously the crushed bodies of
50 or more mud-snails (Alectrion obsoleta)
in sea water, decanting off half the liquid
and examining the material which settles out
of it. The older stages contain Cercarium
lintoni which has apparently no redia stage.
(38) Rediae are obtained in quantity from the
liver of the European periwinkle (Litorina
littorea) in certain regions, particularly
those most frequented by gulls around
Woods Hole; these contain developing cer-
cariae. (4) For cercariae, the tailless Cer-

44 THE COLLECTING NET

| Vor. VI. No. 42

carium lintoni may be used or the more typ-
ical and active cercaria from Litorina lit-
torea.

Laboratory work on the Cestoda is essen-
tially as described by Allee (1922, pp. 105-
107). (1) In addition, however, to the
study of the scolices of the living Rhyncho-
bothrium bulbifer and Calliobothrium ver-
ticillatum from the spiral valve of the
smooth dogfish, study is made of preserved
scolices of Taenia, Moniezia, etc., as well as
of Thysanocephalum and other marine tape-
worms. (2) The mature proglottids of Rhyn-
chobothrium, a parasite of the dogfish as
sand sharks are no longer sufficiently com-
mon about Woods Hole to provide a depend-
able source of living Crossobothrium. (3)
The eggs, discharged when a “ripe” proglot-
tid is placed in a dish of sea water. (4) Em-
bryos of Rhynchobothrium following the
plan instituted by Bowen in 1921 (Allee.
1922, p. 106).

Nemertinea: Prior to 1927 the little ne-
mertean Tetrastemma, commonly found in
pile scrapings, was studied each year for
about half a day. In 1927 this exercise was
discontinued in favor of a study of the free-
living nematodes of the region although a
few students each year have studied Tetra-
stemma.

Nemathelminthes: Laboratory work in-
volves the study of various free-living ma-
rine genera, especially Oncholaimum, from
beach sand a short distance below tide level.
The sand is washed in pans under a swift
stream of seawater whereupon the lighter
organic material consisting of varied assort-
ments of protozoa, worms, crustaceans, etc.,
is decanted off and concentrated. These ne-
matodes because of their abundance, trans-
parency and resistance to the pressure of a
cover glass are most satisfactory objects for
study, even under oil immersion. They pos-
sess, moreover, extensive structural modifi-
cations not seen in the parasitic forms which
are the only nematodes familiar to most of
the class. Through the courtesy of Dr. N.
A. Cobb, senior nematologist of the U. S.
Department of Agriculture, and his staff,
living and fixed specimens of many other
common nematodes of the Woods Hole re-
gion have been demonstrated. In 1927 and
1928 the class has been fortunate in hearing
a special illustrated lecture on the Nematoda
by Dr. Cobb

Echinodermata: The Echinoderms, with
no fresh water representatives, present ma-
terial which can be studied satisfactorily

only in a marine laboratory. The first day
of laboratory work on living starfish in-
cludes in addition to dissection, a study of
the details of locomotion, righting reactions
and movements of isolated arms. By class
discussion these studies are correlated with
the work of Jennings’, Cole’, and Hopkins®.
Class observations confirm and question
many points made by these workers. Com-
parative studies of methods of locomotion
are also made upon members of the Ophiu-
roidea, Echinoidea and Holothuroidea. These
studies are suggestive of the different fac-
tors upon which the evolution of the differ-
ent classes may have turned. The experi-
ments of Parker® on the movements of the
sand-dollar, Echinarachnius are repeated and
help to bring into discussion the theory of a
return of bilateral symmetry upon a second-
arily imposed asymmetry. Experiments to
test the nature of the adhesive power of the
tube feet (Cf. Paine’) are carried out. Mem-
bers of different classes of echinoderms are
used for a comparative study of the cell con-

- tent of the perivisceral fluid. The work of

Kindred’ is followed in some detail. The
phagocytic nature of the coelomic cells is ob-
served by microscopic study of the coelomic
fluid 12 hours after injection of 10 ce. of a
carmine suspension. Coelomic fluid is ob-
tained according to the method given by
Allee, 1922, page 107.

During the second day and part of the
third the study of Arbacia includes the spe-
cial study of Aristotle’s lantern as an in-
strument of mastication, respiration and
locomotion (Gemmill, 1912°). The study of
the embryology of the starfish is deferred
until the third day since experience has
shown that the problem of the unique meta-
morphosis with changes of symmetry, polar-
ity and body axis becomes clearer to the stu-
dent after a study of the adult structure.
The embryological material is obtained by
following Dr. C. Smith’s schedule”. In order
to prepare the cultures it is necessary to
have a large supply of mature male and fe-
male starfish. At this time, July 15, (ac-
cording to the class schedule for the years
preceding 1929) the average number of such
starfish is about 1 to 2 in 30 animals. This
difficulty has been overcome by having the
laboratory assistant select and save mature
specimens for two weeks beforehand. Con-
dition of the gonad is determined by remov-
ing an arm and making a microscopic study
to determine percentage of fertility of the
eggs. From such mature specimens cul-

——

eS

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 45

tures are started and maintained. Mature
females thus tested and kept in an aquarium
have been seen to take the umbrella position
and to extrude clouds of mature eggs. This
process may be stimulated to occur by intro-
ducing strong sperm suspensions into the
aquarium. Such a starfish if removed to a
crystallizing dish will continue to give off
mature eggs for about half an hour and from
these eggs the best cultures are obtained.
Normal shedding of eggs does not frequently
occur under laboratory conditions but fac-
tors which favor this process are at a max-
imum when selected females are stimulated.

On the last day of laboratory, students
study Leptosynapta and Thyone independ-
ently. The technique for securing anaesthe-
tized Thyone has been improved by using a
carefully prepared and specially kept chlore-
tone solution. A chloretone solution made
saturated by heating and kept in a bottle
filled to capacity to prevent volatilization re-
tains the concentration of chloretone. If
15ce of such a solution is inoculated into a
living fresh Thyone the animal relaxes in
half an hour and the tentacles may be forced
out by gentle manipulation. In work on the
echinoderms experience has shown that the
interest of the class is best secured by the
discussion and repetition of recent investiga-
tion of animals of this phylum.

Annelida: Since this group illustrates
how a simple body plan may be highly mod-
ified in various habitats, the laboratory work
is introduced by a comparative study of the
external features and activities of a series
of living worms. For this purpose the fol-
lowing were selected: Nereis Virens, Gly-
cera, Lepidonotus, Diopatra, Amphitrite and
Hydroides. The specimens are placed in
large crystallizing dishes containing fresh
sea water and the students are asked to
make a study of variations in cephalization,
modifications in the parapodia, various types
of movements and to correlate their obser-
vations with the habitats in which the worms
live. The method used by Copeland" with
Nereis is employed in the study of these an-
nelids. Each student is furnished with short
pieces of glass tubing of suitable size and
asked to find out which of the specimens will
enter the tubes. It is found that both Nereis
and Diopatra will usually enter the tubes and
remain there. When the worm is in the
tubes students can easily distinguish be-
tween respiratory and locomotor movements.
In the case of Diopatra the method of tube
building is easily seen. Shortly after Dio-

patra enters a glass tube it secretes a layer
of mucus around the body, attaches this to
one end of the glass tube and then rotates.
In this manner a mucus tube is produced
which immediately invests the body. Par-
ticles of seaweed, shells, etc., are taken by
the worm and cemented to the end of the
glass tubing. In a number of instances
worms built an extension of an inch or more
on the end of the glass tubing in the course
of a day.

In addition to a study of the structure of
typical annelids of the region, e.g., Nereis,
Glycera, Arenicola, etc., a comparative study
of the parapodia of Nephythys, Nereis vi-
rens, Glycera dibranchiata, Arabella opalina
and Diopatra cuprea is made. Thus a series
ranging from the uniramous to the com-
pletely biramous condition is studied and at
the same time the modification of parapodia
in different parts of the body is noted. (Ma-
terial for this study is prepared in accord-
ance with instructions left by Dr. R. H.
Bowen.) The worms are hardened and seg-
ments are cut off with a sharp scissors.
These are dehydrated in alcohol and cleared
with oil of wintergreen.

A concluding study of development is
made of the larvae of Hydroides and Nereis
limbata as well as of the brood pouch of
Spirorbis.

Bryozoa: Live polypides, cystids, ovicells,
avicularia and spines of Bugula flabellata are
compared with those of Bugula turrita. Cili-
ary action and feeding reactions are also
studied on these animals as types of endo-
proct Bryozoa. Barentsia sp., a typical en-
doproct is obtained by suspending glass
slides in racks from the eel pond float for
about three weeks. An especial effort is
made during the day to have students fa-
miliarize themselves, by study of zooarial
features, with such erect or stolonate forms
as Aetea, Crisia, Bowerbankia and with en-
crusting forms, as Lepralia, Schizoporella,
Membranipora and Flustrella, all of which
are common to the district and are met with
over and over again by students.

Arthropoda (Crustacea only): The study
of Arthropoda comprises only a considera-
tion of crustacea and of Limulus. One after-:
noon is given over to study of tow which in-'
cludes many crustaceans. The lobster and’
crab, including either the blue crab, Calli-.
nectes, or the rock crab, Cancer, are used for
a complete dissection study. 3

A comparative study is made of crusta-
cean appendages but this has been consider-'

46 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. VI. No. 42

ably modified during recent years. It has
been felt that it was unnecessary to stress
too heavily the principles of homology and
serial homology as these are usually well
taught in every college in the land.
Accordingly this exercise was modified to
form a comparative study of the external
features of representative malacostraca. In
this modified exercise the nature of the ap-
pendage and homology are taken into con-

sideration and also such aspects as body .

form, body regions, presence or absence of
carapace, nature of abdominal segments, etc.
Points stressed in this study are also of defi-
nite diagnostic value. Thus they are feat-
ures which, since they may be used as a basis
of identification in the field, serve to coérdi-
nate in this respect the work of laboratory
and field.

Study of Tow: This takes place in the lab-
oratory although members of the class have
the opportunity of observing methods of
taking tow. Materials from Woods Hole
passage and from the Fish Commission dock
on both east and west tides have given con-
sistently good material. That this serves as
a good introduction to the study of plankton
forms of the region is seen by the classified
records of forms studied. To _ provide
against the possibility of not having good,
characteristic, living tow it has always been
the practice to secure and preserve in forma-
lin several batches on days previous to that
of the exercise. It has rarely been neces-
sary to use this preserved material.

Study of Lepas: An excellent method for
this study has been worked out. The carina
is carefully removed and, using a sharp sec-
tioning razor, median sagittal sections of
each animal are cut. Specimens prepared in
this way make excellent material for the
study of the structure of Lepas. Not infre-
quently the sections show the greater part
of the nerve cord and in practically every
case the arrangement and relations of the
internal organs are obvious. Further dis-
section can also readily be made. In 1927
large Lapas anatifera were brought from the
whistling buoy near the south shoal. Such
individuals on account of the extra large size
are rather more favorable for study, and
exceptionally good sections are preserved for
demonstration and study on_ succeeding
years.

The activities of Balanus eburneus are
studied regularly. Usually, shortly after
placing adult specimens in finger bowls the
metanauplius larbae are shed. Unless these

are removed as soon as possible after shed-
ding is completed the larvae are captured by
the long raking movements of the thoracic
appendages of the adult and devoured.

Living Heteromysis have been used in re-
cent years for comparison with the ‘Mysis”
stage of the lobster. (Michtheimysis is not
found in July in the Woods Hole region al-
though its larger size would make it a more
satisfactory form for study.) In addition
to living Heteromysis, preserved specimens,
dehydrated by the usual method and cleared
in synthetic oil of wintergreen (methyl sali-
cylate) are available for study. Mysis
stages of the lobster are somewhat infre-
quently obtained alive; preserved specimens
are used when living ones are not available.

Limulus: Well advanced embryos of Li-
mulus are secured during the last week in
June. Several hundred are placed in a
fingerbowl and exposed to sunlight and air.
These usually develop so that they are at or
near the hatching point some four or five
weeks later and are used to illustrate the so-
called “trilobite” larval stage of Limulus.

The Dissection of Limulus: An entirely
new method of preparing Limulus for dis-
section has been worked out by Dr. E. C.
Cole and has proved so satisfactory that it
has entirely superseded the method former-
ly used in the course. By means of saw cuts
the entire dorsal part of the carapace can be
separated from the rest of the animal with-
out difficulty and removed without injurying
the softer parts of the animal. If the eyes
are carefully cut around it is possible to
trace the optic nerves to their endings in the
eyes by this method. Animals may be pre-
pared for dissection in a little over one min-
ute using a small saw.

Mollusca: The trend which in recent
years the work on the Mollusca has followed
can be briefly stated. Lankester has said of
the mollusca: ‘However diversified the ex-
ternal configuration of the molluscan body,
the internal organization, at least in its main
features and in young forms, preserves a re-
markable uniformity.” The group is homo-
geneous, sharply defined and its members
are easily recognized. The mollusca also af-
ford a very good instance of progressive
modification and evolution of organic struc-
ture. It would be difficult to name a group
of the animal kingdom in which relation-
ships can be more clearly determined and
the pedigree of the sub-groups more cer-
tainly traced; and for this reason no phy-
lum in recent years has yielded such fruit-

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 47

ful results to the investigator. Under Dr.
A. E. Severinghaus the molluscan work has
gone on, with a singleness of purpose; it.has
been a serious attempt to justify, the above
statements both through the lectures and the
laboratory. .To accomplish this end within
five. days it was imperative to. make the
lectures and the laboratory largely comple-
mentary. . In the former it was the pur-
pose to discuss as many of the important
researches related tothe molluscs as time
permitted, especially those concerned with a
better understanding of the coelom and the
haemocoele, with their related organ-sys-
tems. A discussion: of the origin of these
important body cavities opened up some of
the most interesting literature in inverte-
brate morphology, and gave the opportunity
of introducing to the students in a related
way the lives and work of such men as
Haeckel, Gegenbaur, Leuckart, Kowalevsky,
Hatschek, the Hertwigs, Lankester, Sedge-
wick and others. It was necessary in such a
discussion to emphasize the primitive condi-
tion of the circulatory, nephridial and repro-
ductive systems, and this happily formed the
basis for a clearer conception of modified
molluscan structure as seen in the several
classes. These modifications were left largely
for the student to discover from his dissec-
tions in the laboratory. Each year there is
in the class a group of students who have
very little knowledge of molluscan anatomy.
It is therefore necessary to furnish mollus-
can type forms for dissection. For this pur-
pose Chaetopleura, Busycon and squid are
used. In order to stress the progressive
modification and evolution of organic struc-
tures emphasis was withdrawn from
such interesting but specialized struc-
1, W. C. Allee, The Invertebrate Course in the Marine
Biological Laboratory. Biol. Bul’. 41:99-131, 1922.
2. J. A. Dawson, The Cultivation of Large Free-living Ame-
bae, Amer, Nat. 62 :453-466, 1928.
3. H. S. Jennings, Behavior of the Starfish, Asterias for-
reri de Lorial Univ. Cal. Pub. Zool, 4, 1907.

L. J. Cole, Direction of Locomotion in the Starfish,
Asterias forbesi. J. Exper. Zoo!. 14, 1913.
>. A. KE. Hopkins, On the Physiology of the Central
Neryous System in the Starfish, Asterias tenuispina. J.
Exper. Zool. 14, 1926.

6 G. H. Parker, The Locomotion of the
BUehinarachnius. Anat. Ree, 31:332, 1925.

Sand-dollar,

tures as the odontophore, radula and its
muscles or the male reproductive apparatus
of the squid and the student was urged to
spend instead more time on the primitive
Amphineuran structures and then proceed to
the comparative study of such constant mol-
luscan features as the mantle, food, gills,
muscles and shell. By using this method
it was hoped that the student would get,
through his laboratory work, a thorough un-
derstanding of the primitive type of mollusc
and some insight into the origin and devel-
opment of structures discussed in the lect-
ures. It is believed that there is little merit
in acquiring by daily dissections an accumu-
lation of knowledge concerning the varied
structures of molluscan types or any other
types for that matter if this knowledge is
to be an end in itself. It is to be hoped that
the student caught this attitude and that
molluscs and members of other phyla will be
remembered solely as illustrations in the fas-
cinating story of invertebrate development.

Chordata: This work does not differ ma-
terially from that of previous years al-
though in the last two years the study of
living Dolichoglossus has been supplemented
by the use of cross sections of proboscis, col-
lar, gill and gonad regions serving to bring
out the relations of the proboscis organs, of
the gill mechanism and of the gonads. The
slides formerly used for the study of the
Bryozoa are kept over in aquaria and are
again available for study of early stages of
Botryllus and not infrequently Ciona and
other ascidians. Such slides represent the
development taking place in six weeks. As
usual the last afternoon is spent in the inde-
pendent study of Botryllus or Amaroucium.

(To be concluded in the July 11th issue)

7. V. L. Paine, Adhesion of the Tube Feet in Starfish J.
Exper. Zool. 46:361-366, 1926.

8. J. E. Kindred, The Cellular Elements in the Perivisceral
Fluid of Echinoderms. Biol. Bull. 46:228-251, 1924.

9. J. F. Gemmill, The Locomotor Function of the Lantern
in Echinus, with Observations on other Allied Activities.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Lon. Ser. B. 85:84, 1912.

10. ©. Smith, Approximate Schedule for Stages in Echino-
derm Development, ete. Biol. Bull. 4j1:120-121, 1922.

11. M. Copeland and H. L. Wieman, The Chemical Sense
and Feeding Behavior of Nereis virens Sars. Biol. Bull, 47;
231-238, 1924. ‘

CHEMICAL ROOM
Dr. Oscar W. RICHARDS
Instructor in Biology, Yale University

The Chemical Room supplies chemicals
glass ware, clamps and support stands for use
only at the Marine Biological Laboratory. Spe-
cial Apparatus, batteries, gauges and reducing
valves for gas cylinders are issued at the Ap-
paratus Room (Brick Bldg. room 216). Sup-
plies that are to be used by investigators else-

where, such as microscope slides, cover glass-
es, shell vials, ete., may be obtained at the
Supply Department (Frame Bldg. back of
Brick Bldg.)

The following standardized solutions will be
furnished in limited quantities during the sea-
son of 1931. Special solutions, buffers, glass

48 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 42

distilled water, and pH standards should be

ordered at least two days before they are

needed.

N 1.000 (with factor in the 4th place)
Acetic acid Sulphuric acid
Hydrochloric acid Sodium Hydroxide

N_ 0.100
Hydrochloric acid

Buffer mixtures
Acetate pH 3.6-5.6
Phosphaté pH 5.4-8.0

Acetate-citrate pH 2.2-8.0 (Mcellvaine)

Indicators—Clark and Lubs series.

Color tube standards—on special order.

Glass distilled water—on special order.

For other standards inquire of the person
in charge at the Chemical Room.

Sodium hydroxide

Borate pH 7.6-10.0

Attention is invited to the Formulae and
Methods published by the Chemical Room in
Tur CoLttectinGc Net (1980) for the composi-
tion of solutions and stain solubilities. Copies
may be obtained at THE CoLtectinG Ner
office.

Certain common tools are available at the
Chemical Room for temporary loan to inves-
tigators. In order that maximum use be made

of these, it is requested that they be returned
within 24 hours. When needed by other inves-
tigators they are subject to recall and will
then be collected by the janitors.

Supplies no longer needed will be collected
if word is left at the Chemical room.

Investigators are urged to co-operate with
the Chemical Room by cleaning their glass-
ware before returning it at the completion of
their work. If the investigator will place his
name on the Bulletin Board of the Chemical
Room the janitors will return his supplies on
the date indicated.

When the investigator is continuing the
same work in the same room during the next
season his supplies may be retained in the
room if they are listed on a Kept Out card
(furnished at the Chemical Room window)
and the card left with the supplies. All sup-
plies not so listed will be returned by the jani-
tors. Should the investigator be unable to re-
turn the following summer the supplies will be
returned to the Chemical Room stocks if they
or the room is needed by other investigators.

Small amounts of special solutions will be
kept during the winter for investigators in the
Chemical Room on request. Supplies that may
be injured by freezing should not be left in
the woeden buildings.

MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF THE ALGAE

Dr. WILLIAM RANDOLPH TAYLOR
Director of the Course in Botany, Professor of Botany, University of Michigan

The plant group known as the Algae holds
particular scientific interest in that it is a central
one from which most, quite possibly all, other
plant groups have been derived. At the same
time it merges with the lines from which holozoic
flagellates have come. Most algal groups by con-
trast have also established highly specialized
evolutionary lines, contrasting in their advanced
types with the generalized ones still extant. With
this very great morphological diversity there is
associated a wide range of physiological adapta-
tion, and most extraordinary ecological associa-
tion and distribution. As the algae are of an-
cient lineage there is a considerable paleobotanical
history known in several groups, though for most
there is, from the soft character of the organisms,
no record. Their activity in laying down vast
siliceous strata and as dominant influences in
forming tropical reefs is continuing today.
Economically their significance as the prime
aquatic food source is obvious, and becoming in-
creasingly exploited. Other more direct services,
as for chemicals recovered by treatment, are
also available, and slowly advancing in importance

with us.

In America the number of persons sufficiently
well informed respecting the algae, marine or
freshwater, has never been high enough to ac-
complish even the pioneer cataloging of these
plants over the country as a whole, let alone much
monographic work of importance. Ten to five
years ago the number of active investigators
reached its low point, and there is now an in-
creasing group developing and publishing in al-
gal distribution, ecology and limnology. Some
of these are former students in the Woods Hole
course, and with the stimulus of association, com-
petition and the training of more investigators, a
much improved situation may be expected by the
close of the next decade. Physiological studies
involving algae have been rather limited in scope,
principally due to the lack of information as to
availability and individual characteristics of de-
sirable types. Such intensive investigations as
have used Spirogyra, Nitella, Valonia and Volvox
will be matched with other algae and with dif-
ferent problems.

The course on algae at Woods Hole aims to
give a general survey of the group first of all, for
nowhere else in this country is it possible to do

Jury 4, 1931 ]

so as effectively and with living material of fresh-
water and marine types. There is but one other
laboratory known to the writer which (under
severe climatic limitations) attempts this task.
This is an unescapable duty, for until someone
lays the foundation there is no advanced training
possible. In this general survey there is incor-
porated a study of the morphology and evolution
of the groups based on a skeleton of the systemat-
ic classification. The striking physiological pe-
culiarities of the various types are outlined, but
no detailed general physiological exposition is
practicable. This is due first to the fact that as
yet we have only scattered observations, preclud-
ing generalization, and to the fact that the stu-
dents have yet to secure that morphological back-

THE COLLECTING NET 49

ground which would enable physiological dis-
cussions to be applied to the material. Enough
of the fossil history of the groups is given to in-
troduce the student to the topic. The ecological
aspect is mainly approached in the field trips,
which likewise introduce the student to the in-
volved problem of recognition, collection and
conservation of the living material. Since this
country is yet in the pioneering stage where col-
lection, identification and cataloging are desper-
ately needed, the class is introduced to the tech-
nique and literature involved. During designated
periods each week and at the end of the course
opportunity and encouragement are offered for
the initiation and prosecution of investigations in
the various ramifications of this study.

BOOK REVIEW

Fundamentals of Health. (The Human Organ-
ism, Its Development and Conservation.) By
T. Bruce Kirkpatrick and Alfred F. Huettner.
567 pp. (illustrated). Ginn & Co., $3.80.

In the homes of all intelligent people, there is
frequent demand for a compact, well-expressed
and clearly written statement concerning the
human body and its functions. Not only does
the younger generation need to have such
reference material at its disposal, but most adults
have at least occasional calls to refresh their
minds and bring their own knowledge up to date.
Fundamentals of Health, written as a college
text-book of hygiene, serves this purpose in a
most admirable manner. It is intended to give
a “more substantial amount of scientific informa-
tion concerning the origin, the development, and
the functional characteristics of the human body,
a basis for the formation of appropriate habits
and attitudes concerning health.”

In a direct and simple manner, T. Bruce Kirk-
patrick, associate professor of physical education
at Columbia University, and Alfred F. Huettner,
associate professor of biology at New York Uni-
versity, review the basic principles of evolution
and trace the development of the, individual
through the embryonic stages of growth, which
they correctly regard as an important period in
the life span of the individual. A well-balanced
discussion of genetics and human inheritance
gives information concerning chromosomes, genes,
sex linkage and inheritance, environment and
heredity, inherited defects and susceptibility to
disease.

In order to present intelligently the subject of
foods and nutrition, the authors give a per-
liminary description of the chemical and physical
properties of human protoplasm, the structure
and functions of the alimentary system, the

nutritive requirements of the body and the
measurement of food values. An important sec-
tion of this part of the book deals with the factors
which determine food requirements and includes
interesting height and weight tables for children
and adults. The vitamins receive their due share
of consideration, and their uses in prolonging a
healthy life span are cited.

As “health is fundamentally the state of an
organism which enables it most successfully to
make appropriate adjustments to its environ-
ment,” a consideration of the role of the muscles
and their activity is necessary to appraise the
importance of motor activity in relation to health.
The heart and its circulation are also described
from this same point of view; various disorders
of the arteries and veins are discussed, together
with an explanation of the effects on the heart of
focal infections, drugs and tobacco.

Chapters on respiration and excretion are fol-
lowed by an equally interesting section on nervous
and emotional adjustments. The two succeeding
chapters, dealing with the glands of internal
secretion and with sex and reproduction, form
one of the most important portions of the book.
The directness and completeness of the treatment
of these topics, grossly neglected in many books
in hygiene, places Fundamentals of Health in the
category of modern scientific literature which
recognizes no need for undue reticence regarding
these vital subjects. A consideration of immunity,
immunization and public health problems brings
the reader in contact with the social aspects of
hygiene, and concludes this excellent treatise.

(Signed) ArtHur H. Compton
Epwin G. ConxKLIn
Krrttey F. MatHER
Haran T. Stetson
Epwarp L, THORNDIKE

(Copyright by the
Scientific Book Club.
Reprinted with Spec-
ial Permission.)

50 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 42

THE COLLECTING NET
A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell Editor
: Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida 8. Cattell

The Beach Question

Recently there has been much discussion con-
cerning the curtailment of the bathing privileges
at the Breakwater beach. A fence has been
erected which runs down into the water exclud-
ing from use the finer and larger portion of the
beach which has been for so long enjoyed by
laboratory people and residents of Woods Hole.
The post farthest from the shore extends well
below mean high water. Many people claim that
the land below the mean high water mark is
public property and that formal permission must
be obtained from the State of Massachusetts
before placing any permanent structure below
that point. We understand that this has not
been done.

However, whether or not the action that has
been taken is legal, it is not courteous. The
owners of the property bordering the beach state
that swarms of children in the day time and
boisterous parties at night made conditions in-
tolerable. Why could not the disagreeable
features be eliminated without amputating a large
portion of the beach solely for private use. We
respectfully submit the following suggestion to
the property owners north of the fence on the
Breakwater beach:

We recommend that the courtesy of the
northern portion of the beach be extended to
adult members of the three scientific institutions
between the hours of sunrise and sunset.

This arrangement would seem to eliminate ali
the objections that have been advanced by the
property owners. Their scientific colleagues
would be grateful for these privileges, and as
guests, would respect every wish of their hosts.

A Book Service

This year the office of THe Cottectinc Ner
is prepared to obtain books for members of the
scientific institutions at Woods Hole. We will
confine ourselves primarily to books in the
field of science, but we are ready to order
any book which may be required during
the summer. Soon we will have assembled in our
library all the important books that have been
published in the field of biology in the United
States since last September which especially
concern the Woods Hole group. Our library will

be open all day and we hopé that members of the
laboratories will feel freé to: examine the books
and use the comfortable couch and chairs.

Each time a book is sold a sum of money equal
to the agent’s discount will be turned over to
Tue Cotzrectinc Ner Scholarship Fund. .The
magazine will pay every cost involved in the
transaction. Long ago someone reniarkéd that it
would he desirable to usé any profits that might
result from publishing THe CottecrinG Net im
the improvement of the journal rather than
diverting it to the Fund: ‘and then wusé the
magazine as an agency to obtain the scholarship
money in other ways. We have décided that this
policy is the wisest one to adopt.

_ Directory Additions and Corrections

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Anderson, R. S. res. assoe. Princeton.

Atlas, M. asst. emb. Columbia. Br 314. Dr 14.

Austin, Mary L. asst. prof. zool. Br 217B. Nickerson,
Quissett. j

Bakwin, H. asst. prof. pathol. New York, OM 38.

Tinkham, Gardiner.

Bakwin, Ruth instr. New
Gardiner. :

Ball, E. G. instr. phys. chem. Hopkins Med, Br 110.
Veeder, West.

Butt, C. res. asst. Princeton. Br 116. Sylvia, Millfield.

Carabelli, A. A. med. stud. Pennsylvania. Br 114.

Castle, W. A. instr. biol. Brown. Br 233. Kittila; Bar
Neck.

Dunbar, F. F. grad. asst. zool. Columbia.
lace’ (Falmouth).

Einarson, L. res. fel. Harvard Med. Br 108. A 107.

Eyre, Sara W. res. asst: Long Island. OM 45.'D 209.

Favilli, G. asst. Inst. of Gen. Pathology, Royal (Flor-
ence, Italy) Br 208. Elliot, Center. ’

Graham, C. H: nat. res. fel. Pennsylvania. Br
Hilton, Main. Z

Green, Arda A. res. fel. phys. chem. Harvard Med. Br
108. Grinnell, West. -

Hartline, H. K. fel. med. physics Pennsylvania. Br 231.
MeLeish, Millfield.

York. OM 38. Tinkham,

Br 333. Wal-

231.

Johnson, H. H. Col. City of N. Y. Br 315. White,
Millfield. =
Loebel, R. O. Russell Sage fel. Cornell Med. Br 340,
Nickerson, Church. , 4
Margolin, S. grad. proto. Columbia. Br 314. Avery,

Main. ;
Morris, Helen grad. Columbia. Bot. MeInnis, Millfield.
Nelsen, O. E. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. OM 21. K 9.
Oltmann, Clara Columbia. OM 34. W h.
Reznikoff, P. instr. med. Cornell Med.

Kenzie, Pleasant.

Rugh, R. instr. zool. Hunter. Br 217M. D 303.
Schuett, J. F. zool. Chicago. Br 382. North. gn
Scott, Florence M. asst. prof. biol. Seton Hill. Br 217D:

Nickerson, Millfield.

Sickles, Grace asst. bacteriol. N. Y. State Dept. Health.

Br 122. Young, West.

Turner, J. P. instr. zool. Minnesota.
nell, West.
OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION
Bigelow, Elizabeth 109. Luscombe, Main.
Lambert, Anne 105. Young, West.
Redfield, A. C. prof. phys. Harvard: 103
Church,

Br 340. Me-

Br 217N. Grin-

Price,

THE COLLECTING NET 51

Jury 4, 1931 |

ITEMS OF INTEREST

De and’ Mrs. John M. Fogg, Jr. sailed from
New. York City on Saturday, June 27, to spend
the summer in Italy. Dr, Fogg has published
recently in Rhodora on “The Flora of the Eliz-
abeth Islands, Massachusetts.” In pursuing his
studies of these islands, Dr: Fogg spent a number
of summers at Woods Hole, and for. part of the
time was collector for the Botany course: To
those who are unacquainted with the story of thé
islands, Dr. Fogg’s publication provides a very
interesting description of their locations and éarly
history which is well worth reading.

; On Monday morning the statue of Confucius
which ordinarily stands in the foyer of the
laboratory was found in. front. of the bulletin
board at the Mess Hall. During the night two
young men ‘had transported it in a wheelbarrow
and left it with a bunch of daisies in its hands to
erect those coming in to breakfast. After break-
fast the statue was returned to its usual post.

Research workers, teachers, students and their
friends are invited by Dr. and Mrs. Warbasse to
the grounds of Gladheim, to walk the paths and
to visit the gardens and the Point at all times.
There are miles of winding foot paths about the
grounds which offer views and vistas of the water
and the foliage in fascinating variety and beauty.
The sign at the entrance of the property, which
proclainis, “Visitors Welcome,” means precisely
what it says. ‘

In order that “scientists visiting Woods Hole
might have the advantages of prompt service and
an opportunity to compare microscopes of dif-
erent types, the firm of Carl Zeiss, Inc. has
established an office and exhibition room at
Woods Hole. It is located on- Main Street
opposite the Oceanographic . Institution, and
visitors are always welcome.-:» Charles’ P. Titus,
former president of the New York Microscopical
Society and of the New Jersey Chemical Society
is in charge. Mr. Titus conducted a School of
Microscopy in New York for’ several years,
where students received. assistance in their special
problems and difficulties. Facilities are also
available for advice and help in the field of
photomicrography, and during the summer it is
expected that demonstrations of procedure will
be made.

Mr. Victor M. E. Koch, vice-president of Carl
Zeiss, Inc. will also be at the Zeiss office until the
end of July. He and his wife and daughter, Miss
Jimmie Koch, are staying at The Breakwater
Hotel.

The Mount Desert Island Biological Laboratory

A number of research workers from the Labor
atory went over to the Roscoe .B, Jackson
Memorial Laboratory, Wednesday evening,’ June
24th to attend the first of a series of seminars on
cancer research. Miss Fekete was the speaker of
the evening. She has been studying the histology
of mammary glands in cancerous and non-can-
cerous strains of mice and gave a very interesting
paper on the subject, which was followed by a
lively discussion. After the seminar, Dr; €, C.
Little took the members of this Laboratory. on a
personally conducted tour of the Jackson -Memo-
rial Laboratory.

The Laboratory will hold its annual Fourth of
July picnic on Saturday afternoon at three o’clock
on the shore in front of Dr.» Lewis’s cottage.
Research workers and their families are cordially
invited. ;

A limited amount of property called “The Mc-

- Cagg Tract” is owned by the Laboratory in Salis-

bury Cove. This land has been divided up into
lots which are suitable for building and which
are for sale to research workers on the condition
that they will build a private dwelling thereon
within a year. Within the last two years Dr.
Esther F. Byrnes of Brooklyn, N. Y., Dr. Robert
W. Hegner, Baltimore, Md., Dr. Margaret M.
Hoskins, New York City, and Dr. Warren H.
Lewis, Baltimore, Md., have purchased lots and
built summer cottages. Dr. E. K. Marshall, Jr.,
Baltimore, Md., has just applied for Lot No. 6
which is adjacent to Dr. Lewis’s property. |,
Dr. Duncan S. Johnson of Johns Hopkins
University, and son, David, paid the Laboratory a
brief visit last week. Dr. Johnson is spending the
summer at Woods Hole as a member of: the
National Research Council. .
Frances R. Snow, Laboratory Secretary
Dr. Albert Russell Mann, dean of the New
York State Colleges of Agriculture and Home
Economics at Cornell, has been elected provost
of the university, an office newly created by the
board of trustees. He has been at the head of the
College of Agriculture for the last frfteen years.

Correction

The last two paragraphs at the end of Br:
Amberson’s article on the physiology course
belonged to the article by Dr. Goodrich on the
embryology course. In paging our printer mixed,
the type and our proof reader failed to notice this
unfortunate error. Dr. Amberson wishes em-
phasis placed upon the fact that a course in the
embryology of the chick is not one of the entrance
requirements for the physiology course!

Spalteholz
Transparent
Preparations

Tiuman
and

Zoological

52 THE COLLECTING NET

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, e'c. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate
catalog.

Visit our New and Greatly En-

larged Display Rooms and Museum ‘fe History

of Chick

MPANY
; — 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK
Model of Human Heart

ECOLOGY

All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
oe 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the (TESTED PURITY)
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes E & A CHEMICALS
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as avail-

able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign
postage; 20 cents.

GENETICS _— Represent the highest quality c. p. chemicals
ee en wt investigations Beerinz!on obtainable. They have been carefully checked
eredity and Variation -
Established 1916. Bimonthly. i i
Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to in our testing laboratory and bear labels
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate. showing the results of their analyses.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents. Many are of American origin, but we draw
AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY j
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science from the best puoetens at the world) usunine:
Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep- the user the highest purity at a reasonable
tember, Official Publication of the Botanical Society of i
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes price.

(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes

on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents. Yor analytical chemicals, P grade.
BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS specify E. & A.

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage,

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.

The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor. EIMER & AMEND
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Il: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine, EST. 1851 INC. 1897

and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor- P 7
man ‘Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus
Orders should be placed with and Chemical Reagents.

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Third Ave., 18th to 19th St., New York, N. Y.
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

Jury 4, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 53

STRENGTH!
PRECISION!
BALANCE!

The stand of Microscope GS, the latest
B & L laboratory model, is heavily
constructed, finely balanced and beau-
tifully proportioned. It adds to the
Bausch & Lomb line an instrument to
suit the personal preference of those
who like a somewhat sturdier micro-
scope that can be easily manipulated
and moved about.

The arm, which forms a graceful,
sweeping arc, joins the base just at
the correct point of balance for max-
imum stability. The microscope is in proper balance at any angle between
the vertical tnd horizontal. The long, straight toes of the base furnish a
foundation upon which the instrument sets firmly and squarely. Every
detail of design calls attention to its stability and sturdiness.

The optical equipment is the same as that of other B & L
Laboratory microscopes.

PAWSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. Z
Gfovot. Paulistreet - = Rochester, N. Y. LG

s cc}
GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH

BAUSCHéLOME

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

54 THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vor. VI. No. 42

No. 2 Aquatic
Life

—)
'S No. ees
O

No. 3 Plants

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Ab sol

lide Tray

The Wistar Institute S

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 114,-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each. one forms a dust-proof c*ver for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACtI
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
‘ Philadelphia, Pa.

COLLECTCSETS were designed by experienced teachers for the use of
students in field courses. ; ik

For a descriptive circular, illustrating and describing each Collectoset
in detail, write to the

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

Incorporated

CHICAGO

STEAL

Non-Corrosive

COLD

Non Corrosive

MICROSCOPIC

SLIDES «« COVER GLASSES
Do Net Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Cray-ApAms Company
117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

B. LOGIN & SON, Inco
EST. 1887
29 EAST 21st STREET

NEW YORK

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.

Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

Jury 4, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 55

friiZ

Originated The INCLINED BINOCULAR

TUBE

In constructing the Inclined Binocular Tube, the Leitz
Works were guided by the desire to lend even

more comfort and convenience to
continued microscope observation

than was offered with previous microscope models.

The Binocular Body with its inclined oculai
tubes permits the observer to sit at the micro-
scope in a natural upright position. The micro-
scope docs not need to be inclined and conse-
quently the stage retains its horizontal position
which is of paricular advantage when using oil
immersion objectives, when observing material wi
solution, in darkfield work, when using the micro-
manipulator, etc.

The Inclined Binocular Tube is available for
any Leitz Binocular Microscope and can be
used with every one of the three series of
Leitz Micro-Objectives (achromatic, fluorite
and apochromatic) as well as with the Huy-
ghenian and Periplanatic Oculars. This body
tube is readily interchangeable with every
other tube offered for use with Leitz Binocular
Combination Microscopes.

No. 22850. Inclined Binocular Tube, - - $75.00

When ordering any Leitz Binocular
Microscope with the

Ernst Leik

une 2 Inclined Binscular Tube

; “ in place of the regular

Convenience and Comfort vertical binocular body—

For Continued Observations add to list price of such
microscopes. .... . . . $25.00

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET No. 1187 (CN)

| IT MAY BE IN ORDER TO MENTION THAT
the Leitz Works are credited with originating the majority of
important developments in micro-constructions.
Those developments as relate to research microscopes alone are:.
Handle Arm Stend - Dustproof Nosepiece - Binccular Body Tube
Interchangeable Feature of Tubes - Ball-Bearing Fine Adjustment
Combination Condenser for Bright and Darkfield, etc.

LEITZ WILL CONTINUE TO CREATE AND ORIGINATE AND THUS CONTRIBUTE TO
THE DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE

FF. LEGGZ. INC.

60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK, N. Y.

56 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 42

EXHIBIT IN LECTURE HALL
JULY 5th - 21st
July 5th - 21st, under direction of J. A. Kyle

Bislogical Life Histories

Botanical Models ‘Brendel’

Spalteholz Preparations

Charts: Anatomical, Neurological, etc.
Skeletal Material, Human and Zoological
Models, Anatomical and Zoological

“PROMI” and “PROMAR” Microscepic Drawing and Projection Apparatus

Cuav-Apams Company

117-119 East 24th Street New York

LADIES’ 2nd GENTS’ TAILORING

N. TSIKNAS Cleaning, Dyeing and Ropairing
Fruits and Vegetables Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonab’e
Woods Hole Falmouth M. DOLINSKY’S
Main St. Woods H le, Mass. Call 752

Books in Biology

are on sale at

The Collecting Net
Office

We are also prepared to obtain any

The Whaler on Wheels

Oe |
hk hs y Mime A
Z a

F available book.
“Our Wandering Book Shop”
Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays
throughout the summer
season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

Each time a book is sold, all of the agent's

commission will be turned over to

THE COLLECTING NET
Scholarship Fund.

Jury 4, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET ee 57

The A. B. C. of Woods Hole for 1931

All Schedules Set to Daylight Saving Time — Bold Type Indicates P. M.

RELIGIOUS SERVICES

Church of the Messiah—Episcopal

Communion 8:00
Morning Prayer 11:00
Evening Prayer : 7:30

Methodist Episcopal Church

Morning 10:30
Evening 7:30
Thursday Prayer Meeting 8:00

St. Joseph’s Roman Catholic Church
Mass 8:00 and 10:00

Currents in the Hole

ut

At the following hours (Daylight Savings Time)
‘he current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards

Bay to Vineyard Sound. A.M. P.M.
July 6 . 95 10:10
ele LORSZ 18:03
Wtihy ~ GB sescocend Alo) hl sss
July 9 ; 12 :06
July 10 » LZ AA 2 D7,
July 11 f Sil 1:40
ily eel Zrrerate ne ZEA 2rail
July 13 : a 3:07 3:19
July 14 3:58 4:08

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the Bay.
It must be remembered that the schedule printed
above is dependent upon the wind. Prolonged
winds sometimes cause the turning of the current
to occur a half an hour earlier or later than the
times given above.

The average speed of the current in the hole
at its maximum is five knots per hour.

Library Hours

Wednesdays and Saturdays

_ 3:00 - 5:00
7:00 - 9:00

Telegraph Office Hours

Week-days 8:00 - 10:00
Sundays 10:00 - 12:00
5:00 - 7:00

Station Ticket Office Hours

Week-days 7:00 - 6:00
closed from 10:30 - 11:30
Sundays 3:10 - 10:10

Station Baggage Office Hours

Week-days 7:00 - 7:00
Sundays Around train time only

Express Office Hours
Week-days only 8:00 - 5:30

Post Office and Mail Hours

The Post Office opens at 7.00 and closes
at 7.50.

Week-days

Outgoing Mail closes
6:45 12:25 5:25
Incoming Mail
6:50 10:30 3:35 6:09

Sundays
Outgoing Mail closes
5:55 6:25

Incoming Mail 10:40

Laboratory Mail

Outgoing Incoming
9:15 11:30
3:15 4:15

“Trains leave the station with mail a half hour
after mails close at the Post Office.

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 42

BUS
Woods Hole — Falmouth
Lic. Sunday
Lv. Woods Hole 8:30 9:55 11:00 1:40 2:55 4:05 5:25 6:35 7:15 8:00 9:30
Due Falmouth 8:45 10:10 11:15 1:55 3:10 4:20 5:40 6:50 7:30 8:15 9:45
Ly. Falmouth 7:55 9:15 10:30 11:35 2:20 3:30 4:50 6:00 6:55 7:30 9:00 11:00
Due Woods Hole 8:10 9:30 10:45 11:50 2:35 3:45 5:05 6:15 7:05 7:45 9:15 11:15

Bus waits for Picture Shows and leaving times of 9:00 P.M. and 11:00 P. M. are approximate.

BOAT SCHEDULE
For New Bedford, Woods Hole, Oak Bluffs, Vineyard Haven and Nantucket

Leave Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily
New Bedford 7:00 9:30 12:05 2:30 5:00 7:45
Woods Hole 8:20 10:50 1:20 3:50 6:20 9:05
Oak Bluffs 9:10 11:40 2:10 4:40 7:10

Due Vineyard H. ; ar 9:55
Due Nantucket 11:30 2:00 4:30 7:00 9:30

Leave Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Only Daily

ex. Sun. Sun.

Nantucket 6:30 9:00 12:00 2:30 3:00 5:00
Vineyard H. 6:10 eH rye brs, hee — ae
Oak Bluffs 9:00 11:30 2:00 4:30 5:00 7:00
Woods Hole 6:55 9:50 12:20 2:50 5:20 5:50 7:50
Due New Bedford 8:20 11:30 2:00 4:30 7:00 7:30 9:30

TRAIN

Woods Hole to

SCHEDULE

Boston — Week-days

Boston to Woods Hole — Week-days

Mon. only
Woods Hole 7:05 7:15 10:10 12:55 3:20 5:55
Falmouth ele pees 10:17 1:02 3:27 6:02
Boston 9:05 9:10 12:30 3:00 5:40 8:00
Sundays Only
Woods Hole 6:25 8:20 Boston 8:30
Falmouth 6:32 8:27 Falmouth 10:3
Boston 8:35 10:27 Woods Hole 10:40

Sat. only
Boston 7:35 8:30 1:06 1:25 4:03 4:47
Falmouth 10:20 10:32 3:08 Ber re 6:02 6:47
Woods Hole 10:30 10:40 3:15 3:35 : :

Jury 4, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 59

SPENCER RESEARCH MICRO-
SCOPE No. 7

Has met a demand that has no parallel
in research microscope history.

There is now scarcely a college, uni-
versity or research laboratory in Amer-
ic2, that does not possess at least one.

It is now fitted with

SPENCER
INCLINOCULAR
BODY AS ONE OF

Three Types Supplied

This Inclinocular Body has been
designed for comfort and efficiency
in binocular work, where the stage
of the microscope must be horizon-
tal, for example in examination of
liquids, ete. It is an inclined eye-
piece binocular body taking the
place of regular binocular body or

Designed under direc-
tion of Professor
C. F. McClung,

University of

Pennsylvania

the combination body.

The oculars are at the ordinary
distance from the table.

The angle of inclination is suited
to the comfort of the observer at
the ordinary height.

The superior optical qualities of
Spencer optics are preserved when
the new Inclinocular is used.

NO COMPENSATING LENSES

ARE NECESSARY BECAUSE OF
SPENCER No.7LH RESEARCH MICROSCOPE ADDED TUBE LENGTH

Equipped with new Inclinocular body, mecknnical stage, 3
complete fork-type substage, achromatic condenser
N.A. 1.30, triple nosepiece, achromatic objectives 16
mm and 4 mm dry and 1.8 mm immersion, paired
eyepiece 6x and 10x, complete in mahogany

The size of the field is the same ary
with ordinary binocular body.

The Spencer converging oculars, ex-
clusive on Spencer microscopes, are in-
corporated in the new Inclinocular

EEL Cine Gop Sain 6 GOO ODO e ODEO a ECD eCE eI $368.00 The incli tachi jemninced
. . e inclinocular 1S aS easl aced on
Single body tube (if wanted) extra........... DRO: Ge vemovedttiare thes aileroecaue Tami
10, discount to Schools and Colleges. the ordinary binocular cr single tube.
Ask for new Bulletin M-45
poe ew = ae

BUFFALO-

60 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 42

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

The Junior Laboratory and Children’s School
of Science opened its doors to beginning investi-
gators Monday, June 29th. All children over
seven years of age are eligible to begin or to
continue their scientific training during the sum-
mer in the School House. Older boys and girls
who have completed the work previously offered
at the Children’s School of Science or who wish
to supplement their high school biology are
registered as students in the Junior Laboratory.

This newest branch in summer laboratory work
at Woods Hole has proved highly successful dur-
ing its previous seasons and is now well started
on what would seem to be an even more profit-
able summer. The enrollment is not yet com-
plete. The school is in charge of Mr. George A.
Hutchinson of the Fieldston School in New York.
He is assisted by a teaching staff of four; Miss
Katharine A. Clarke of the Friends’ School in
Baltimore, Miss Elizabeth Kinney of Barnard,
Mrs. Alice Clarke Mullen of the University of
Virginia and Mr. Clifford C. Kilian of the Mc-
Burney School in New York.

The school session is from 8:45 to 11:30 every
day and the courses include Nature Study for
the seven and eight year olds; Advanced Nature
Study and courses on the Forest and the Animals
of Woods Hole for those eight to ten; General
Science and an advanced course on the Animals of
Woods Hole for those ten to twelve; and for
those twelve to fourteen and over, Biology, Ad-
vanced Zoology and Biological Technique. In
the latter course the pupils prepare and make
slides for microscopical work.

The school has no connection with the Marine
Biological Laboratory. Its management is in
charge of a Science Committee headed by Mrs.
Compton. The Marine Biological Laboratory of
the future, however, may very well rest in some
of these beginning young investigators’ hands.

The Disabled Ex-Service Men’s Exchange Sale
will be held on Saturday, July 11th on the grounds
of the estate of Mrs. Geoffrey G. Whitney on
Nobska Road.

The worst forest fire which Cape Cod has had
in years raged near Hatchville last Fall. The
fire area covered forty-five square miles and ex-
tended as far as Bourne. Five or six cottages
were burned. All the fire departments of the
region were present including even one truck
from Plymouth. Woods Hole was represented by
the Fire Department and the Coast Guard. For
a week the territory was ablaze and the firemen

worked continually in day and night shifts.
Direction of the fire-fighting was controlled from
a plane and dispatches were dropped to the fire
marshal.

Since that time there have been nothing but
small house fires for the Woods Hole department
to handle.

The Woods Hole Department is a branch of
the Falmouth system, which now has five stations :
one each at West Falmouth, East Falmouth,
North Falmouth, Falmouth and Woods Hole.
The system now has ten pieces of apparatus
counting the new ladder truck which was added
to the apparatus at its headquarters June 27th.
The region is controlled from a look-out tower
in West Falmouth. The Woods Hole depart-
ment has two permanent men and a force of
volunteers.

Bishop Sherrill of the Episcopal diocese of
Massachusetts will pay his first visit to the Church
of the Messiah on Sunday, July 12th. The Bishop
will perform confirmation and preach at a special
service at four o’clock in the afternoon. The
regular evening service will be omitted.

This is the first year that movies have been
shown in Falmouth on Sundays.

The University Players Inc. opened their sea-
son Monday, June 29th, with Philip Barry's
recent Broadway success, “Paris Bound.” With
sophisticated, fast-moving dialogue, Barry has
assayed the solution of some of the problems of

modern marriage against a smart society back-

ground. The staging was excellent, the directing

-on the whole satisfactory, although the play would

have been more brilliant if the tempo throughout
had been slightly faster. Barry’s plays are
“talky”” and depend somewhat for their success
on a speedy bombardment of the sparkling lines
on the audience. Christine Ramsey’s character
study of Fanny Shippan pleased the more, not
only because her impersonation was viv-d and
amusing but because the tempo of her speech and
actions was faster than the other characters. The
entire cast was highly satisfactory and displayed a
rare talent for acting.

The Players have been busy making improve-
ments at Old Silver Beach as well as rehearsing,
and this year a brick terrace was built at the
entrance by members of the company and the
lobby is hung with new draperies. There was
dancing between the acts in the tea room.

Whe Se (G-

I > i ta a hee

eS

Jury 4, 1931 J] THE COLLECTING NET 61

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.

Presents

“INTERFERENCE” y]
JULY 6th — JULY 11th EASTMAN S HARDWARE
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
5 AND 10¢c DEPARTMENT

Cape Ced Distributors for

Draper Maynard Sporting Goods

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Weods Hole Tel. 177 Fa'mouth Tel. 407

Service that Satisfies

SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS

Saris oie TEXACO PRODUCTS

MEN’S WEAR ——

Colonial Buiding Tel. 935 Main Stroct NORGE REFRIGERATORS

Falmouth

WOODS HOLE GARAGE

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles COMPANY
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley Opposite Station

Chcice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH
IDEAL RESTAURANT Church of the Messiah
Main Street Woods Hole (Episcopal)
Tel. 1243 The Rey. James Bancroft, Rector
Holy Communion 8:00 a.m.
FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND Morning Prayer 11:00 a.m.
HARDWARE CO. 5 Saale ao
Agency for Confirmation and Sermon by

LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER Bishop Sherrill = 4:00 p.m.
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 26)

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in

e eo
Visit
FISH AND LOBSTERS ‘
Tel. Falmouth 660-661 M l h
Wo ds Hole and Falmouth a Cc man S

THE
WALTER O. LUSCOMBE LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
REAL ESTATE AND ON CAPE COD

INSURANCE
Woods Hole Phone 622

Falmouth Phone 116

62 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. VI. No, 42

Recently Published

Biology
in Human Affairs

Edited by Epwarp M. East
399 pages, 6 x 9, $3.50
A WHITTLESEY HOUSE PUBLICATION

Was book is a survey of the outposts of
biological knowledge. In it, twelve leading
scientists tell what has been accomplished in
the fields of heredity, genetics, medicine,
zoology, public health, psychology—even in
the preservation and development of fiood re-
sources. What has been achieved in these
fields and the problems which at present con-
front the research worker are clearly and
strikingly set forth. It is a serious book in
tended for people who find satisfaction in the
disentanglement of the riddles of the universe
in which we live.

Send for a copy on approval

—— aS McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc.
PHYSICIAN’S 370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK
AND LABORATORY

MICROSCOPE

fee ea 16 500% BLAKISTON’S

Fixed Stage, 12cm. square
Illuminating Apparatus with Rack and

Re ee Recent Advances Series

Triple Revolving Nosepiece.

Tine adjustment with graduated drum. Among the 25 titles now available
Achromatic Objectives: pais ; 5
8 n.a. 0.20 in this series are:
= n.a. ass Fe ENTOMOLOGY BIOCHEMISTRY
n.a. 1.25 cil im. I pend
Huygens Oculars: 7X and 10X MICROSCOPY Anatom
Price: f.c.b. New York, $128 Piney etc. Wootlaed
A good dark field outfit is obtained by adding: PLANT
Cardioid ape $22, ia for iris Se 5 PHYSIOLOGY NEUROLOGY
oil im. $4. Compensating ccular 15X: $8.50. Barton Wight Brain & Strauss
A satchel type of carrying case can €
be supplied instead cf the standard PSYCHONEUROSES PSYCHIATRY
cabinet at an additional cost of $4.00. Culpin IE
CARL ZEISS, Inc. a rire od Pe
485 Fifth Avenue we vans
New sor Sold separately. Each $3.50

Pacific Coast Branch
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles, Calif.

P. Blakiston’s Son & Co., Inc.

1012 Walnut Street
Philadelphia

$e

Jury 4, 1931 |

Revised and Reset

The Science of
Biology

An Introductory Study
by GEORGE G: SCOTT, Ph. .D:
Professor of Biology in the College
of the City of New York

653 Pages. 390 Illustrations

Amherst College

Antioch College

Bethany College
Birmingham-Southern College
Bradford Academy

Brooklyn Colleve

Buckrell University

Carnegie Institute of Vechnology
College of the City of New York
Conception College

Cornell University

East Carolina Teachers College
Franklin and Marshall College
Iurmarm University

Georgia Industrial College
Good Counsel College
Haverford College

lamestown College

Johnson C. Smith University
Juniata College

Kalamazoo College

Kent State College

Loyola University

THE COLLECTING NET 63

534 v 834 List Price, $3.75.

RECENT ADOPTIONS

Marywood College

Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Mount St. Joseph College

Occidertal College

Phillips University

Rosemont College

St. Francis College

St. John Kanty College

Salem College

San Diego State College

Shenandoah College

Southwestern College

Southwestern Louisiana Institute

State ‘Teachers College, larmville
Virginia

Temple University

Tennessee Agricultural and Industrial
State College

University of Pittsburgh

University of Rochester

Western Maryland College

Western Reserve University

Westmoorland College

THOMAS Y. CROWELL CO. new yorx

64 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. VI. No. 42

“Tt saved us the cost of 5 microscopes”

Quoting remark of a school superintendent
who bought the
“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION: APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS

A new instrument which has been brought
out in response to a demand for a simple
apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification, The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the
Promi but is more heavily constructed and
has the following additional features as
standard equipment :

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light.
Revolving stage.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Crav-ApAms Company

117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

Vol. VI. No. 3

COMMENTS ON THE LECTURE OF
PROFESSOR E. B. WILSON ON

SATURDAY, JULY 11, 1931

“THE CENTRAL BODIES”

Dr. C. E. McCiune
Professor of Zoology, University of Pennsylvania
In an admirable discussion of recent studies of
Huettrer upon the cleavage of Drosophila, of
Sturdivant upon Ascaris spermatogenesis, and of

his own restudy of Chaetop-
terus and Cerebratulus eggs,
Professor Wilson presented
his matured views upon the
nature and structure of the
central bodies in these objects.
The lecture was illustrated by
a series of his own beautiful
photomicrographs, some of
which were from the original
preparations of Mead and Coe.
Only incidental reference was
made to the central bodies of
other objects, Professor Wil-
son’s endeavor being to show
the uniformity, constancy and
genetic continuity of these
bodies in the taxonomically
varied forms studied. Because
of the difficulties arising in

Echinoderm eggs from the close association be-
tween the central bodies and astral radiat‘ons, Pro-
fessor Wilson was careful to point out the pres- into such sea-side activities as
sence of central bodies in (Ccntinued on Page 71)

Comments on the Lecture of Professor E. B.

Age. On the s

RM. B. L. Calendar
TUESDAY, JULY 14, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar. Dr. H. H. Plough, “Some

Observations cn Self Sterility in
Styela.”

Dr. R. Chambers: ‘Evidence of
a Direct Action of the Nucleus
on the Cytoplasm in Tissue Cul-
tures.”

Dr. A. F. Huettner, ‘Genetic
Continuity of the Central
Bodies.”

FRIDAY, JULY 17, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture. Dr. Eliot R. Clark, Pro-

fessor of Anatomy, University of
Pennsylvania, ‘‘The Microscopic
Study of Cells and Tissues in the
Living Mammal.”

TABLE OF CONTENTS

flints and the c

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

THE HOPKINS MARINE STATION AT
STANFORD UNIVERSITY

Dr. W. K. FIsHER
Director of the Station
Marine stations were popular in the Stone

nores of Europe and America a
multitude of ancient shell deposits or middens

bear mute witness to the
immemorial lure of clams,
oysters, and crawling things
of low degree. Because the
sea has always been a reliable
source of food, early man
may have first become acutely
ocean-conscious by reason of
his stomach. We may im-
agine these ancient camps as
a primitive economic-social
gesture which probably pro-
vided an agreeable means for
the exchange of gossip, whilst
clams ,and perchance a head or
two, were being cracked.
Since those rather informal
beginnings man’s contact with
the sea has become as complex
as civilization itself; and in-

stead of the crumbling shell mounds mixed with
harcoal dust we have blossomed

New York,

Gloucester, Deauville and Woods Hole.

Review of the Seminar Rep-rt of Dr. Red-

Wilson on ‘“‘The Central Bodies”, held Dri he Gta eemciamiencien oniseete 74
Iie, OF 1D, RACV 5 coogoesbe cos vounGOE 65 The Course in
The Hopkins Marine Station at Stanford Marine BiGIEIe a ered Be Lhe
University, Dr. W. K. Fisher............ 65 ible, diame JL iDeaeon..,... pe 15
The Architecture of the Henatic Cells of SET ETD RCT ON Rak sete ca ee
Amphiuma, Dr. Arthur W. Pollister...... 71 Sat eS Bob rondagwoeainounEsonoG (ie
Review cf the Seminar Report of Dr. Pol- CurrentshingthiesHoleperernermeriteicnc cea: 78
WNGTgre. Die Jak, Wye TEs nI5 gama ec oaio ooa oe 73 Notes from the Scripps Institution of Ocean-
Effects of Hydrogen Ion Concentration and CET ADL Yh a raeratewemus ier hed Rtn ei evaneliaracesa ee 79
Salt Concentration on the Oxygen Disso- itemsPotntenestar tere ween ese as. 81

ciation Constant of Hemocyanin,
Dre Altred@ sec iel dine. a) lec. <6) <heye) ane. ere 74

IW GOGSTEIOLe EOS rane ue ccisieis aie ee.sel eo chs 88

66 . THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 43

THE HOPKINS MARINE STATION OF STANFORD UNIVERSITY AT PACIFIC GROVE ON

THE

SHORE OF MONTEREY BAY, 130 MILES SOUTH OF SAN FRANCISCO

The Woods Hole Marine Biological Laboratory
is the largest in the world, as the Stazione
Zoologica of Naples is probably the most
famous. Woods Hole is a dream of Agassiz
developed by the energy of Whitman and Lillie.
The Stazione Zoologica is Anton Dohrn’s—in
the land of Virgil on the sunny shore of “Mare
Nostrum.” With impeccable biological method
we have now traced an idea from the Paleolithic
to 1891, when four men at Stanford got their
heads together.

These conspirators were Timothy Hopkins
David Starr Jordan, Oliver P. Jenkins and
Charles H. Gilbert. Dohrn’s laboratory at
Naples had greatly impressed Mr. Hopkins while
Dr. Jordan had played a part in Louis Agassiz’s
Penikese experiment—the idea ultimately res-
ponsible for the great laboratory now at Woods
Hole. The combination of these four men was
a peculiarly happy one—all young, enthusiastic,
each playing an essential part. So the idea
started and so it happens that the Hopkins Marine
Station is linked with two distinct biological
enterprises on far separated shores. After forty
years it is significant perhaps that the Hopkins
Marine Station more nearly resembles the Naples
Station than it does any of its other predecessors
—hut with features essential to its organization as
part of a university. One of its buildings bears
the name of Agassiz’s son, Alexander, the great
oceanographer. It is to be hoped that those
responsible for leading the younger generation
will remain mindful of the Penikese idea, which

has been so ably interpreted in years past by Dr.
Jordan and w hich gives biology its main value as
a discipline in education. “Study nature not
books,” Agassiz insisted.

The first Station, known as the Hopkins Sea-
side Laboratory, consisting ultimately of two
roomy wooden buildings, was planned by Jenkins
and Gilbert and erected early in 1892 at Pacific
Grove, on Monterey Bay, with money provided
by Timothy Hopkins, on a small parcel of land
donated by the Pacific Improvement Company—
a syndicate which constructed the Southern
Pacific Railroad and in which Stanford was thei
financially interested. The laboratory was only
nominally a part of the University. It was sup-
ported by student fees and the deficits were
patiently met by Mr. Hopkins.

Here gathered, during a six-weeks’ summer
session, men and women who investigated life as
it is found in the ocean which is an avowed
purpose for which marine laboratories are estab-
lished. Just that—life in the ocean; and the
ocean which harbors the life. In addition, others
crossed the continent and came from overseas,
lured by the richness and accessibility of plants
and animals. Animals were new and _ strange.
Undergraduates were perforce investigators—a
very fortunate circumstance since real education
thrives in an atmosphere of research—be it ever
so humble. So long as the ocean can provide
problems which grip one firmly and demand to be
solved, so long is the world safe for biological
education !

Ee iT, 1937 || THE

COLLECTING

NET 67

The Seaside Laboratory was only one phase of
Stanford’s work in marine biology. Prior to the
opening of the University Dr. Jordan, in col-
laboration with Dr. Gilbert, had spent consider-
able time studying marine fishes of the coast, and
Dr. Gilbert had been an assistant naturalist on the
famous U. S. Fisheries steamer, Albatross. After
the establishment of the Hopkins Seaside Labor-
atory there were a number of extensive marine
projects, among which may be noted: Expedition
to Panama (Gilbert, Starks) ; to Mazattan (Jor-
dan, Culver, Scofield, Williams); Fur seal in-
vestigation (Jordan, Adams, Greeley, Snodgrass ) ;
Hopkins Galapagos Expedition (Heller, Snod-
grass); to Japan (Jordan, Snyder); Albatross
Hawaiian Expedition (Gilbert, Snyder, Fisher) ;
Samoan Expedition (Jordan, Kellogg) ; Albatross
Alaskan Expedition (Jordan, Heath) ; Albatross
Survey of California Coast (Gilbert, Heath,
Fisher, Spaulding) ; Albatross Japanese Expedi-
tion (Gilbert, Heath, Snyder, Burke).

The preseat activity of the Hopkins Marine
Station in the field of oceanic biology is therefore
in line with what is essentially a Stanford tradi+
tion. The leaven was brought to the new Uni-
versity by the youthful and eager Jordan; perhaps
it is a legacy from Louis Agassiz.

The new Station dates from 1916 and is due
to the vision and energy of President Ray Lyman
Wilbur who was himself a student at the old
Seaside Laboratory. Another nearby site was
chosen which by subsequent purchases was aug-
mented to about eleven acres, comprising all of
what was formerly krown as China Point, from
the presence of an old and picturesque Chinese
fishing village wiped out by fire in 1903. This
bit of China was dear to students of those days.
One of its citizens, Ah Tak, was a skilled collector
whose industry provided material for embryo-
logical monographs of importance.

The present name was adopted in 1917 when
our first building was under construction. This
unit, recently designated the Alexander Agassiz
Laboratory, contains the general laboratories in
which most of the undergraduate classes are held
during the spring and summer, and houses mem-
bers of the permanent staff occupied with the
oceanological survey of the region and with the
more established lines of research in biology.

In the summer of 1928 a second unit known as
the Jacques Loeb Laboratory was completed
from funds donated by the Rockefeller Founda-
tion. This, like the Agassiz Laboratory, is of
reinforced concrete. It consists of a central
portion of two stories flanked by two wings of
one story enclosing three sides of a front court,
the over-all dimensions being ninety-five by one
hundred and fifty-two feet. The building is
intended for research in experimental biology,
with more limited facilities for physical and

chemical work. As a general principle, larger
specialized laboratories are equipped rather than
individual work rooms, although seven private
rooms are available. Sea-water is conducted
through pure lead pipes to a reservoir of 10,000
gallon capacity situated on an elevation of rocks
whence it is fed by gravity to the aquarium tables.
The principal laboratories and work rooms are
equipped with hoods and are supplied with sea-
water, hot and cold fresh water, distilled water,
gas, pressure and suction air, and alternating and
direct current.

Since 1918 the station has been open during
the entire year. It now maintains a resident staff
of seven specialists in addition to four assistants,
a secretary, and a mechanician. This permanent
staff is augmented during the summer by other
members of the school of biological sciences of
Stanford, and by a few visiting biologists. For
instance, during the summer quarter there will
be two additional members from Stanford, two
from the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Re-
search*, and onet from the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology.

Graduate students are welcomed during any of
the four quarters, but undergraduate work is
offered only during the spring and summer. We
have come to view teaching as an incident of a
yearly program! Climatically and otherwise, the
best period for research is between October 15
and June 15.

If the Hopkins Marine Station were concerned
solely with instruction of students in those phases
of biology most advantageously undertaken at the
seashore, its work would be simple and inexpen-
sive. But it is quite otherwise, for no institution
is content to use knowledge already acquired
without adding a considerable quota of new
material through original investigation.

Looking at the matter very broadly there are
two attitudes of the biologist toward the ocean.
He may use oceanic animals and plants simply as
material for the investigation of general problems
without reference to their ‘‘marineness’’, because
in experimental work, for instance, there is great
advantage in being able to control precisely the
environment of an animal. Sea animals are in-
timately surrounded by water which can be
minutely modified as to temperature and chemical
composition in comparison with the normal sea-
water in which the animal is found in nature.
This is, roughly speaking, the attitude of the
general biologist. He is interested in the ocean
as a most valuable source of material for certain
fundamental lines of research. By far the larger
number of investigators who visit marine biolo-
gical laboratories belong to this category what-
ever prefix they may fasten to their “logy.”

*Lawrence R. Blinks, Leonor Michaelis
yElisabeth Deichmann

68

A rapidly increasing number, however, are
interested in that extraordinary complex known as
the ocean, of which water is merely the obvious,
visible part. These people approach the ocean
as an environment of life and consider its living
contents with due reference to the multifarious
aspects of this environment. Oceanologists’ rtm
the gamut from mathematicians concerned with
hydrodynamics—through physicists and chemists
interested in the behavior of an extraordinarily
variable solution of earth—to biochemists and
biophysicists working with the operation of
physical laws upon aquatic life; to physiologists
occupied with the responses of animals occasioned
by the environment; to a multitude of specialists
in zoology and botany who must work out the in-
numerable technical aspects of their subject with
reference to development, life habits, and applica-
tion ta the needs of mankind. Just here is where
marine biology and scommerce meet. The re-
sources of the sea are usually exploited with a
porcine greediness that takes for granted an un-
ending supply. When’ ruin is in sight the
Exploitation seeks a miracle from-Science to save

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 43
it from its own folly. Too often the long suffer-
ing biologist, called in like a physician when the
patient is dying, can do little more than give
advice, which often goes unheeded in the absence
of drastic laws.

An enumeration of projects under way at the
Hopkins Marine Station would suggest the
scattered blocks of a mosaic rather than an easily
discerned picture. This is occasioned by the
magnitude of the material and the scarcity of
furds and investigators

Under the general supervision of Dr. Tage
Skogsberg in cooperation with the California
State Fish and Game Commission, an oceanolo-
gical study of Monterey Bay is being prosecuted.
This work involves frequent trips aboard the
State Fisheries patrol boats, Steelhead and Alba-
iross, for the painstaking collection of data of
various sorts. Water samples from different
stations are being analyzed for temperature and
chemical changes in order to understand the
movements of water and for correlation with the
migrations of open sea fishes, especially of: the
sardine and mackerel.

a
Seat
ae

THE RESIDENT STAFF OF THE HOPKINS MARINE STATION

From left to right they are: Harold Mestre, B. E. MacGinitie, W. K. Fisher, the Director, C. B.

van Nicl,

Tage Skogsberg and Harold Heath.

Jury 11, 1931 ] THE

COLLECTING

By means of tow-nets hosts of minute floating
organisms, the ultimate food supply of oceanic
animals from sardines to whales, are being taken
at various depths. Several graduate students are
working on different groups of these “plankton”
organisms, as they are called, since they are as
economically important as they are intrinsically
interesting. Their absence creates an ocean
desert, and there are plenty such. From the un-
lighted m/d-region between the surface and
bottom many bizarre and unusual forms continu
to thrill the dyed-in-the-wool zoologist. Dr.
Heath has recently exhaustively studied a small,
transparent worm-like creature, a link between
two major groups heretofore believed safely
separated.

It has been amply demonstrated that the
methods of science yield good returns when
applied to problems of economic importance as to
those removed from the concerns of life. Eugene
C. Scofield of the State Fish and Game Comm's-
sion is a liaison member of our oceanological
project, working now in the field on the sardine
problem, and he has recently covered not less
than 8,000 miles of cruising off the California
coast. Joseph H. Wales is investigating the rock
cods, a fishery greatly depleted; and W. A. D.Il,
the group of fishes which contains the flounders
and halibuts. Rolf L. Bolin is investigating the
open sea floating eggs and larvae of various fishes.
Dr, D. S. Cope is in charge of the chemical side
of the Survey.

Nor is the bottom being nevlected, for, bes'd*s
yielding fascinating material for students and the
zoologists of the staff, its deposits are keeping
TE. Wayne Galliher busy. As a matter of fact
the material of the bottom differs greatly in con-
tent and weight from place to place, with varying
mixtures of organic material, both living and
dead. It is the seat of physical and chemical
changes and is preparing to become the solid rock
of some future land, in its turn to be reso-ved
into soil again and washed back to sea.

When one visits the seashore, he has little op-
portunity to see, much less study, the complex
life of the open water. But the crowded
assemblage of plants and animals which make
their homes between high and low tide is acces-
sible to anyone. The very fact that they are able
to survive long exposure to air, even to partial
dssication, sets them apart as different from
creatures which are always submerged. If life
originated in the ocean, as many biologists are
convinced it did, then it is obvious that the
ancestors of all land animals and plants must at
one time or another have accustomed themselves
to life outside of water. But most of the inter-
tidal animals have simply been immigrants from
shallow water forced through competition to take
a desperate chance in a very unfavorable environ-

NET 69
ment. The result has been thousands of new
forms, new communities, new responses—a dis-
tinct world of life obviously neither terrestrial
nor yet entirely marine.

The extraordinary rich fauna and flora of the
Monterey Bay region offer exceptional opportuni-
ties to the investigator and beginning student
alike. There is a surprisingly large number of
marine animals and plants readily accessible. Such
include not only the species found between tide
levels, but also those which dwell in the open
ocean, and those which are secured by dredging
at various depths. The student of land forms will
find an equally interesting and in some ways
peculiar assemblage of material. This is in part
due to an unusual variety of physiographic and
climatic conditions within a relatively small area,
and in part to the presence of a number of
characteristic and dominant types such as the
Monterey Cypress and Monterey Pine. The
particular advantage of work at the Station is the
pessib'lity of observing and studying a large num-
ber of living animals while these are still fulfilling
their role in the general scheme of marine and ter-
restrial life. Investigators in the fields of general
experimental work, taxonomy, anatomy, and em-
bryology, will find a wealth of material to choose
from, while those concerned with a study of
animals from the special standpoint of their
“marineness” will naturally be exceptionally
favored.

The wealth of marine forms is in part due to
the diversity of environment, which ranges from
a rugged granite coast, broken by beaches, to
sheltered estuaries alive with mud-loving species.

The groups which especially give character to
the fauna are the coelenterates, polyclads, nemer-
teans, bryozoans, echinoderms, chitons, gastro-
pods, polychaets, the higher crustacea, and the
tunicates. Among actinians, Evactis, Epiactis,
Urticina,.and Corynactis are the high lights. The
solitary coral, Balanophyllia, is abundant. There
are about ninety species of hydroids, and Seypho-
zoa are represented by Aurelia, Chrysaora, and
Pelagia. Siphonophores and ctenophores are
oceasionally common but of uncertain occurrence.

For experimental biology an abundance of sea
urchins (Strongylocentrotus purpuratus and fran-
ciscanus) is available. The sea star, Patiria
miniata, is equally good. Leptasterias aequalis and
Henricia leviuscula brood their eggs. The same is
true of the small holothurians, Cucumaria curata
and Thyoncpsolus nutriens.

There are upward of fifty species of chitons,
the largest, Cryptochiton stelleri, reaching a length
of twelve or fifteen inches. Urosobranch and
nudibranch gastropods abound. The large abalone
(Haliotis) is the outstanding mollusc of the coast.
Dorid nudibranchs are conspicuous for their size
and brilliant coloring. The bay teems with squid

70

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. VI. No. 43

in spring and summer, and octopus, which is
common but not easy to procure, reaches a weight
of forty pounds.

Among the polychaets are numerous representa-
tives of Halosydna, Polynot, Nereis, Leodice,
Lumbrinereis, Glycera and Amphitrite. A showy
sabellid Eudistylia, is abundant, while every rock
pool is alive with serpulids. Arenicola is less
easily procured. A big echiuroid, Urechis caupo,
is an almost perfect type for experimentation, and
its large clear eggs can be procured without injury
to the animal. Sipunculids are abundant and
large. Conditions appear to be ideal for flat-
worms and nemerteans. Bryozoa, especially the
encrusting forms, are conspicuous and complete
for available surface with sponges and very
thrifty compound ascidians.

Among the crustacea the crabs are most con-
spicuous, but of more interest are the primitive
burrowing shrimps, Callianassa and Upogebia.
Emerita is abundant as are also pagurids and
several mysids. Barnacles of several species are
very abundant on the granite and, of course,
swarms of isopods and amphipods.

Mention should be made of the hag-fish, Polis-
totrema, of the chimaeroid, Chimaera colliei, and
of the midshipman, Porichthys notatus, which is
equally interesting for its conveniently deposited
eggs and numerous photogenic organs.

The plankton of the bay is rich in larval forms
and protozoa.

Bringing students in contact with this world
is a major concern of the Station, as is a more
formal study of the interrelationships of the
plants, animals, and physical environment under-
taken by Prof. George E. MacGinitie. No better
introduction to biology has been found than
scientific natural history (ecology). Yet no one
man is equipped to cover the whole field in its
technical aspects. There is work here for every-
one. The extreme richness of shore life in the
Monterey region as well as the great diversity in
the shore itself are among the principal assets of
the Station.

Dr. Harold Mestre is attacking the complex
problem of photosynthesis from the photo-
chemical standpoint. Abundant marine algae,
some growing in thin sheets like sea lettuce
(Ulva), and some of the minute single-celled
forms, furnish ideal material for this work.

Light does not pass through water as it does
through air, but is rapidly absorbed. The red
Tays can penetrate only a few fathoms, while the
blue and violet go farthest—to about one-fourth
of a mile in very clear water with the sun directly
over head to avoid loss by reflection. This pene-
tration of light is being studied by Dr. Mestre
with a submarine spectrograph in order to deter-
mine the effects of the energy supply on the

abundance of sea life.

Still another interesting problem is that of the
effect of ultra-violet light upon the organism
itself. For instance, it has already been found
that the unfertilized eggs of a marine worm
Urechis caupo, can be made to develop and grow
for several days when irradiated. This fact offers
a new approach to the old question of partheno-
genesis made so famous by the work of Jacques
Loeb which was done on this very spot.

Investigations into the nature of photosynthesis
have been confined to this process in green plants,
because until recently it had not been elsewhere
recognized. But a group of bacteria, known as
purple bacteria, can build up living matter out of
inorganic constituents under the influence of light.
This type of photosynthesis has been intensively
studied by Dr. C. B. van Niel. It is of especial
interest in this connection that the “purples” have
probably acquired their photosynthetic power in-
dependently of the green plants and that they do
it differently. Ordinary plants use carbon dioxide
and water in the presence of light; the “purples”
substitute hydrogen sulphide for water—a very
remarkable difference.

The ultimate aim of studies on photosynthesis
is to understand the mechanism of the process to
the end that we may be enabled to carry out this
reaction without the aid of living plants. Our
concepts of this mechanism have already under-
gone some changes as a result of the investigation
of bacterial photosynthesis, and the time does
not seem too far off, in Dr. van Niel’s opinion,
when we will be able in the laboratory to repro-
duce the conditions under which it occurs in
plants.

Since 1919 the California State Fish and Gam>
Commission has made the Agassiz Laboratory its
headquarters for the study of the sardine. This
work is quite independent of its cooperation in
the Oceanological Survey.

Some long-continued work by Dr. Heath on
the embryonic development of marine organisms
and by Dr. Fisher on the classification and ana-

:

:
-

tomy of marine animals has more technical than —

popular appeal. For over thirty years Dr. F. M.
McFarland has studied the delicat> nud’branch
molluscs of the coast and Mrs. McFarland has
painted their portraits. Space is not available to
catalog the research done by biologists of other
institutions who have availed themselves of the
Station’s facilities. They include, among others,
such old friends as J. H. Ashworth, H. B. Bige-
low, Calvin Bridges, W. R. Coe, E. G, Conklin,
B. M. Davis, P. S. Galtsoff, Torsten Gislén, Ber-
til Hanstrom, Libbie Hyman, J. S. Kingsley,
Harold Kylin, F. R. Lillie, Albert Mann, Otto L.
Mohr, A. R. Moore, T. H. Morgan, Joseph
Needham, H. H. Newman, A. C. Redfield, A. H.
Sturtevant, David Tennent.

as

JuLy 11, 1931 ]

The permanent staff consists of W. K. Fisher,
‘Professor of Zoology; Harold Heath, Professor
‘of Embryology; George E. MacGinitie, Assistant
Professor of Zoology; Harold Mestre, Assistant
Professor of Biophysics; Tage Skogsberg, Asso-

|

1

Ascaris and Drosophila when astral rays are
lacking. The various stages in the move-
ment of the large and clearly defined cen-
trosomes about the nucleus, until they reach
Upposite poles, were clearly shown in Ascaris sper-
matocytes. ‘(he presence of hundreds of mitoses,
all in about the same stage, in the egg of Droso-
phila affords an excellent opportunity to study
the mitotic figure. Here Professor Wilson was
able to demonstrate the successive stages in the
division and movements of the centrosome and
its derivatives, and to show the variations which
appear in the process The preparations of Droso-
phila were made by Dr. Huettner and will serve
him as the basis of a report to be given later this
summer.

Professor Wilson pointed out in the beginnine
that there is nothing new in the major features of
centrosome phenomena reported and that these
were beautifully worked out by the early masters
of cytology—Boveri, van Beneden, Flemming and
others. Because of the minute size of the central
bodies and the difficulty of observing them, there
have always been doubts as to their reality, and
these persist to the present day. It was Profes-
sor Wilson’s desire to remove any uncertainty
in his own mind that led him to take up once

The tissues of Amphiuma are exceptionally fine
material for cytological studies; first, because this
animal has the largest cells of any Vertebrate ;
and second, because, like most Amphibia, it seems
to be especially suitable for successful application
of technical methods for study of the tissues.

In the present study the material was prepared
by standard technical methods for the general
histological picture, by the special methods of
Benda and Kull for demonstration of mitochon-
dria, and by the Kolatchef process for blackening
the Golgi apparatus with osmic acid.

The liver of Amphiuma has large, irregularly
polyhedral glandular cells, the relationship of
which to one another is much like that of the cells
of the mammalian liver. Most of the bile canali-
culi are tubes formed by the apposit‘on of parallel
grooves in the surfaces of two contiguous cells.
The ducts are all of practically the same diamet>r.
They anastomose extensively to form a complex

THE COLLECTING NET 7

71
ciate Professor of Marine Biology and Oceano-
graphy; C. V. Taylor, Herstein Professor of
Biology; C. B. van Niel, Associate Professor of
Microbiology; Tadaichi Hashimoto and Danella
Straup Cope, Research Chemists.

COMMENTS ON THE LECTURE OF PROFESSOR E. B. WILSON
(C -ntinued from Page 65 )

more a subject which has been of great interest
to him from the time when he contributed to the
overthrow of Fol’s theory of the “quadrille of the
centers.” No one is better qualified by experi-
ence and ability to discuss this subject, and Pro-
fessor Wilson presented a demonstration of un-
questionable clearness that in the forms studied
the central bodies are realities, with a well defined
and constant cycle of mitotic changes. So far as
conditions in the spermatocyte of Ascaris are con-
cerned, I can confirm them by observations upon
Orthopteran cells. Except for relative sizes there
is practically no difference in the two widely re-
moved species. One familiar with such material
can have no doubt of the reality and constancy
of the central bodies in the male germ cells of
animals. If, however, there are still those who
doubt the existence of such relatively large bodies
as the chromosomes, despite their demonstration
in the living condition by various means, it will
doubtless be long before there is agreement re-
garding the nature of the minute certral bodies.
Their demonstration in the living condition would
do something to lessen uncertainty regarding them
and it is to be hoped that Professor Wilson may
be able to add this bit of evidence to the large
mass which he has already accumulated.

THE ARCHITECTURE OF THE HEPATIC CELLS OF AMPHIUMA
Dr. Artuur W. PoLvistTeR

Instructor in Zoology,

Columbia Univers:ty

network, from which project many short side
branches that end blindly. The canaliculi may
occur or any part of the cell, except that they
are pever on a surface that is adjacent to a blood
capillary. At places the network of canaliculi is
continuous with the smaller ducts of the liver and
through this duct system the secretory product
ultimately reaches the hepatic duct. In addition
to these intercellular canaliculi bounded by two
hepatic cells, there are ducts that are intracellular,
actually penetrating the cytoplasm of the liver
cell. These are of the same inside diameter as
the intercellular canaliculi and are always con-
nected with them. The most frequent condition
is for the intracellular duct to extend through the
cell and oper into the intercellular canaliculi at
opposite sides of the cell. Not infrequently this
intracellular tube has a short side branch, and ex-
ceptionally a rather extensively branched system
is seen. That the duct is actually intracellular,

72

THE COLEECIING NET

[Vot. VI. No. 43

and not merely an intercellular duct seen at the
upper surface of a cell, is evident from the oc-
currence of sections of cells in which the nucleus
is seen at the same level as the intracellular duct,
since the nucleus is never at the surface of the
hepatic cell.

A study of the details of structure shows that
the two types of canaliculi are somewhat dif-
ferent. The material prepared by the Benda
method is most useful for this study, al-
though it can also be made out in material fixed
in Helly’s fluid and stained with iron hematoxy-
lin, or in that prepared by the Kull process. In
Benda material the cell boundary shows a double
layer, an outer very thin line that stains heavily
with the crystal violet and an inner thicker zone
stained with the alizarin. The walls of the inter-
cellular ducts are composed of both these layers,
as would be expected from the fact that they
are morphologically only spaces between two cells.
The intracellular ducts, however, have walls com-
posed of the purple-staining membrane only. An-
other feature characteristic of the intracellular
ducts is the presence, a short distance outside the
margin of the wall, of a row of small grarules
that stain faintly with the crystal violet. These
must certainly surround the entire circumference
of the duct, but I have rot been able to see them
when focussing above or below it, probably be-
cause they are so small and so faintly stained.

This duct system is peculiar to liver cells. In
most glands there are tubules or acini in which
several cells surround the lumen into which the
secretion is passed, ard in such a case only the
tip of each cell is in contact with the lumen. In
these cells we find the Golgi apparatus always ly-
ing adjacent to the lumen, in the region where the
secretion is being formed, a relationship that has
been held to be circumstantial evidence that this
cell component is in some way concerned with
the synthesis of the secretory product. This topo-
graphical relationship is very much more striking
in the liver cells of Amphiuma. Here the region
where the visible evidence of the synthesis of the
secretory product first appears is not merely at
one point in the cell, but is a zone adjacent to
the bile canaliculi. The Golgi apparatus in these
liver cells always lies along these complex secre-
tory zones, and is never found in any other part
of the cell. It seems to be an irregular network
a short distance inward from the surface grooves
and surrounding the intracellular canaliculi.

Another constant feature of the structure of
these hepatic cells of Amphiuma is the preserce
of one or more clusters of fat droplets. These
are gray after treatment with two per cent osm‘c
acid in the Kolatchef method. The blackening
is removed by the standard treatment with rect*-
fied turpentine, which leaves the intense black of
the Golgi apparatus unaffected. The fat drep-
lets have a very definite orientation in the cell.
They are apparently never found at any place

except that part of the cell adjacent to a blood
capillary. This relationship of the fat droplets
to the capillaries is especially emphasized by the
fact that all the cells adjacent to a capillary show
fat droplets in the part near it. Only a small
percentage of the cells are found with a cluster of
fat droplets and ro capillary visible in the imme-
diate vicinity, and these are easily explained by
the vagaries of sectioning.

The mitochondria of the hepatic cells of
Amphiuma, when properly fixed, are all of the
filamentous type generally characteristic of ver-
tebrate glandular tissues. The filaments are all
of the same diameter, but there are a long and
a short type that are clearly distinct in their dis-
tribution. In the general cytoplasm, away from
the nucleus, adjacent to the blood capillaries and
to contiguous liver cells, there are very long
chondrioconts that are relatively few in number.
In the zone around the nucleus and frequently in
another region around the intracellular canaliculi
are dense clusters of very much shorter mito-
chondria. Those in the vicinity of the intercellu-
lar ducts are also mostly of the short type, but
they are not concentrated as in the other two
localities.

Some of those who have worked on the Golgi
apparatus of liver cells have found it to be lo-
cated as I have just described in Amphiuma,
while others have found it to be a juxta-nuclear
mass, as it is so frequently in other gland cells.
It appears to me possible that the following may
explain this discrepancy. It is well known that
the mitochondria are often blackened by methods
used for the demonstration of the Golgi appara-
tus. Indeed, in Amphiuma, in which the Golgi
apparatus reaction to osmic acid is the most posi-
tive I have ever seen, cells are occasionally found
in which the mitochondria also are blackened. If
it happened that this reaction occurred very
strongly in the dense juxta-nuclear zone of chon-
driosomes, rather than in what I have described
as the real Golgi substance along the bile canali-
culi, the result would be a demonstration of a
blackened mass which could be easily interpreted
as a Golgi apparatus adjacent to the nucleus.

I wish to point out also what may possibly be
a wider significance of studies on liver cells.
Some workers on gland cell structure have come
to the conclusion that the typical pictures of the
Golgi apparatus are due to the impregnation of
mitochondria in the so-called secretogenous zone
of the cell, and they have produced as evidence
examples of perfect impregnation of mitochon-
dria in this region. Now in such cells the sec-
retogenous zone, between the nucleus and the
lumen, really has two topographical relationships.
It is a region where secretory products first be-
come visible, and it is also a region close to the
nucleus. In the hepatic cells of Amphiuma these
two regions are obviously quite separate and it
seems clear that the juxta-nuclear region is

1 te Rea IP pli inn RRe Re

avee

JuLy 11, 1931 J

THE COLLECTING NET

73

characterized especially by the presence of a dense
mass of mitochondria, while the secretogenous
zone is primarily the location of the Golgi ap-
paratus. It seems to me possible that this point

of view may offer an approach to resolving the
confusion that exists today with regard to the
true structure of the secretogenous zone of typi-
cal glandular epithelial cells.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. POLLISTER

Dr. H. W. Beams

Assistant Professor of Zoology, University of Iowa

Dr. Pollister’s interesting paper on the archi-
tecture of the hepatic cells of Amphiuma sheds
considerable light upon the long existing contro-
versy as to whether or not there really exists in
the hepatic cells a definite system of intracellular
bile canaliculi. It was long ago suggested by
students of: the liver cell that a system of intra-
cellular bile canaliculi could be demonstrated by
the application of the impregnation methods of sil-
ver nitrate, ard the administration through the
hepatic duct of a variety of injection fluids. How-
ever, the conception of intracellular bile canaliculi
has not been widely accepted and recent his-
tologists have seriously questioned this interpreta-
tion. Maximow (’30), for instance, states that
the view of intracellular bile canaliculi is incor-
rect and what has been described as intracellular
canals is probably part of the Golgi network.
Others have suggested that the so-called intra-
cellular bile capillaries demonstrated by the injec-
tion methods are simply artifacts, in the sense
that the cell has been ruptured by the pressure
developed in the process of administering the in-
jection fluid. While still other histologists seem
to interpret the intracellular bile canaliculi as tem-
porary phases of functional activity, accompany-
ing the discharge of secretion.

The findings of Dr. Pollister in the hepatic cells
of Amphiuma demonstrate clearly, and beyond
doubt, the presence of a permanert system of
intracellular bile canaliculi. His observations are
indeed important. They should go a long way
to help clear up the present controversy corcern-
ing the presence of intracellular bile canaliculi, at
least to the extent that they do exist in certain
types of liver cells. Just how general this cor-
dition may be found to exist in the hepatic cells
of other animals remains to be proved.

It was of particular interest to the reviewer to
note that Dr. Pollister did not observe a network
of fine intracellular blood capillaries in the liver
cells of Amphiuma, as described by Schafer for
the liver cells of the rabbit. There has always
been much skepticism expressed as regards the
interpretation of Schafer; notwithstanding the
apparent ease with which he and his students have
been able to inject these capillaries, even to the
extent of demonstrating them within the nucleus.
Inasmuch as the liver cell of Amphiuma has
proved such excellent material for the demonstra-
tion of the intracellular bile canaliculi it might
likewise be assumed to prove favorable material
upon which to repeat the methods, and test the

theory of Schafer. It would also be of particu-
lar interest to some to know just what relation-
ship, if any, the intracellular bile canaliculi bear
to the “trophospongium” (nutritive canals) of
Holmgren.

The distribution of the Golgi apparatus in the
hepatic cells of Amphiuma, in juxtaposition to
the intercellular and intracellular bile canaliculi,
which marks the secretogerous zone for bile at
least, is of great interest in view of the current
conceptions of secretion. The striking topo-
graphical relationship of the Golgi apparatus to
the intercellular and intracellular bile canaliculi
seems to offer strong support to the current
theory that the Golgi apparatus plays an im-
portant role in secretion. However, since the
liver cells perform so many diverse functions, and
since any one of the cells is presumably capable
of performing all of the functions, it becomes
difficult to correlate the presumed formation of
the synthetic products of the liver, on the basis of
the Golgi apparatus theory of secretion. If the
Golgi apparatus constitutes the secretory route of
the cell, one should expect to find some such ar-
rangement as that described in the thyroid gland
by Cowdry where the Golgi apparatus shows a
reversal in polarity. Unless some cytological ex-
planation is given to account for the presumed
erdocrine-like function of the liver, it seems that
we are not justified, for the present at least, in
concluding that the Golgi apparatus is the single
synthetic center of the cell. Furthermore, it is of
interest to note that the Golgi apparatus in the
salivary glands of the Chironomus larva show
apparertly no relationship to the intracellular,
secretory ducts (Krjukowa). It would seem
therefore, as Dr. Pollister has clearly pointed out,
that the relationship of the Golgi apparatus to the
formation of secretion (bile) in the liver is at
present circumstantial. However, it is very prob-
able that the relationship of the Golgi apparatus
to the intercellular and intracellular bile canaliculi
actually signifies a definite physiological associa-
tion rather than a chance position. But just how
general this condition may be found in other se-
creting cells remains to be proved.

The observations of Dr. Pollister on the
mitochondria in the liver cells show quite clear-
ly that they are discrete structures and do not be-
come hypertrophied to form the Golgi apparatus
as claimed by Parat. As a matter of fact the
mitochondria in the ‘‘zone of Golgi” are composed
mostly of short rods, a condition quite different
from the “active” chondriosomes of Parat.

74

THE COLLECTING

NET [Vot. VI. No. 43

An interesting phase of the study of the Golgi
apparatus upon which Dr. Pollister did not report,
and which might profitably be investigated in the
liver cells, especially in view of the recent findings
of Dornesco, is whether or not the Golgi appar-
atus is the same as the neutral-red-staining vacu-

ome of Parat. Also, if not identical, what is the
topographical relationship which exists between
the Golgi apparatus and the neutral red bodies of
Makarov and of Ludford, who assume that the
neutral red bodies are formed by the influence of
the Golgi apparatus.

EFFECTS OF HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION AND SALT CONCENTRATION ON
THE OXYGEN DISSOCIATION CONSTANT OF HEMOCYANIN
Dr. ALFRED C, REDFIELD
Professor of Physiology, Harvard University

One of the incentives for the study of hemo-
cyanins has been the hope that in this group of
pigmerts conditions would be found which are
sufficiently at variance with those characterizing
hemoglobin and also sufficiently simple, to enable
further light to be thrown on the mechanism by
which oxygen is transported in the blood.

In the case of three hemocyarins, that of
Helix, Busycon and Limulus, a system is obtained
when the pigments are purified which has a
rather simple behavior in its relation to oxygen.
The equilibrium proceeds as though the hemo-
cyanin unites with one atom of oxygen to form
oxy-hemocyanin in accordance with the mass law.
One may consequently deal with the factors in-
fluercing the oxygen equilibrium in a very defi-
nite way, because one can state their effect in
terms of the oxygen dissociation constant.

The change in the oxygen dissociation constant

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR

of Busycon hemocyanin with varying hydrogen
ion concentration may be explained on the as-
sumption that the neutralization of certain acid
or base binding groups produces a hemocyanin
salt with an oxygen dissociation constant differ-
ent from that characterizing the acidic (or basic)
form of the hemocyanin. The relation between
hydrogen ion concentration and the value of the
oxygen dissociation constant may be described by
the equation developed by Ferry and Green in
connection with an analagous treatment of the
problem in the case of hemoglobin. The presence
of NaCl at 0.5 molar concentration does not in-
fluence the form of the oxygen dissociation curve
and has little or no effect upon the value of the
oxygen dissociation constant of the hemocyanin
or its salt, but changes by about one and a half
pH units the reaction at which occurs the forma-
tion of the supposed hemocyanin salt.

REPORT OF DR. REDFIELD

Dr. F. G. Hart
Professor of Zoology, Duke University

It has been said that hemoglobin is the most
interesting substance im the world. Hemocyanin
now shares some of that interest. Dr. Red4eld,
more than anyone else, has contributed to our
knowledge of the function of hemocyanin in ma-
rine organisms. He hos shown that the same
general physico-chemical principles which apply
to the function of hemoglobin are likewise ap-
plicable to the function of hemocyanin.

There are several points that come to one’s mind
in comparing the function of hemocyanin with
hemoglobin. Does hemocyanin behave quantita-
tively in the same manner when isolated from
the blood and purified as it does in its natural
environment? It is well known that the dissocia-
tion of oxygen from purified hemoglobin is quite
unlike that of hemoglobin within the intact cor-
puscle in whole blood. Since hemocyanin is car-
ried in the plasma one would not expect such a
great difference as in the case of hemoglobin. Dr.
Redfield’s data indicate such a condition to obtain,
and it is very likely that his studies give us a
true picture of the function of hemocyanin in
nature. :

To one interested in marine problems a com-
parison of the function of hemocyanin and hemo-
globin is of interest because each makes use of a
metal, copper and iron respectively, which are rel-
atively very rare elements in sea water. In most

analyses they are only reported as traces. Yet in
the blood of Molluscs, Arthropods, and Verte-
brates one or the other of these two metals are
the essential element of the respiratory pigment
and organisms seem well supplied with them. A
study of the copper and iron cycle in sea water
would perhaps be worth while.

The problem of the influence of temperature on
the function of hemocyanin, alluded to by Dr.
Redfield, is still an open one. It is in about
the same state of solution as in the case of hemo-
globin. We do not yet know the mechanism by
which oxygen is unloaded from either hemocya-
nin or hemoglobin at the low temperature at
which many marine animals live. Dr. Redfield
has shown in a previous study that squid. for ex-
ample, are dependent upon hemocyanin for their
oxygen supply. They carnot maintain themselves
on the oxygen physically dissolved in the blood
plasma. Thus in animals living in an environ-
ment low in temperature it would appear that the
respiratory pigment has some special way of giv-
ing up its oxygen to the tissues. The fact that
salts have very little effect on the oxygen dis-
sociation of hemocyanin is advantageous to ani-
mals that live in the sea.

Finally, one is led to conclude that Dr. Redfield
has made significant contributions to both general
and comparative physiology.

Jie Ln, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING

NET 75

THE COURSE IN INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY AT THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY*

Dr. JAmes A. DAwson
Assistant Professor of Zoology, College of the City of New York
Director of the Course

Field Work: This has always been em-
phasized in this course and, it is felt, rightly
so. In the field the student sees the animal
in its normal surroundings and the greatest
freedom is given for the study of any phase
of the activities of marine littoral animals.
The organization of the field work has so
far as the equipment, method of division of
the class under instructors and localities
visited, been continued largely as described
in Allee’s account. In 1926 Crane’s wharf
was removed and field trips to Nobska or
Quissett have been substituted.

As an illustration of the schedule of field
trips that of 1928 is given. Those of the
other years are essentially similar, the only
differences being the different dates and oc-
easionally somewhat different localities, both
occasioned by local conditions of tide or
weather.

Field Trip Schedule for 1928

June 30, Saturday — Protozoa Collecting
Trip—Fresh, Brackish and Salt Water.
Start 9.00 A. M.; Return 11.00 A.M.

July 5, Thursday—Quissett Harbor — Flats
and Rocks—Digging, etc. Low tide—3.37
P.M. Start 1.30 P.M.; Return 4.30 P. M.

July 7, Saturday—Vineyard Haven Wharf
Piles—Pile Scraping. Low tide—8.50 A.
M. Start 8.15 A. M.; Return 11.30 A. M.

July 11, Wednesday— (omitted)

July 14, Saturday—Hadley Harbor Flats—
Digging, ete. Low tide—3.01 P. M. Start
12.30 P.M.; Return 4.30 P.M.

July 21, Saturday—Dredging in Vineyard
Sound. Group I—Start 9.30 A. M. Group
Ii—Start 2.00 P. M.

July 25, Wednesday—Study of Tow in the
Laboratory. Start 2.00 P.M.

July 28, Saturday—North Falmouth—Rocks,
Flats—Digging, ete. Low tide—12.04 P.
M. Start 9.30 A. M.; Return 4.00 P. M.

August 1, Wednesday—Nobska—Rocks, ete.
Wow tide—3.10 P.M. Start 1.45 P.M.
Return 4.45 P. M.

August 4, Saturday—Class picnic.

Special attention has of late years been
paid to the collection and identification of
protozoan species from the varied fresh,
brackish and salt water habitats at Woods
Hole. The summarized account of results
of field work has been kept for the last four

years. This is a list showing the protozoa
identified from eight ponds ranging, from
fresh water (nos. 1, 2, 3), brackish (nos. 4,
5, 7, 8) to salt (no. 8). On each trip for
the past four years the class has been di-
vided into two groups of four teams each.
Each group made collections from four of
the sources listed. A very representative
sampling was made as each team collected
from a different region of the pond in ques-
tion. Upon the return to the laboratory all
samples made by each group from any given
pond were put in a large clean crystallizing
dish which was carefully labelled as to
source of material for identification. Dur-
ing the study of collected protozoa all in-
structors were present and for each year
except 1930 Dr. Mary S. MacDougall, for
several years instructor in charge of the
laboratory work in the Protozoology course,
very kindly aided in the identification of the
rarer or more difficult species. As there is
not a published check list of protozoan
species from these sources for the Woods
Hole Region it is hoped that this list will
have a definite value. The ponds are men-
tioned by names used by both the members
of the Invertebrate Zoology and the Proto-
zoology courses and are well known locally.
Representative samples in separate clean
bottles were taken by instructors from each
pond during all of the years in question and
pH readings were made colorime: trically
immediately upon return from the trip.
These readings are also given in the list.
The classification used follows Calkins
(1926). This list is available for consul-
tation by workers at Woods Hole and it is
proposed to leave copies of it in the Library
for reference at any time.

The check list of Invertebrate species has
been revised three times since 1922. The
second of these revisions in 1927 was made
for the purpose of bringing the nomencla-
ture up to date and the staff was fortunate
in securing for the checking of this work
the services of authorities in the systemat-
ics of nearly all the phyla represented. The
number of spécies in the present check list
is 318. In the report of Sumner, Osburn
and Cole!’ the total listed number of inver-
tebrate species for the Woods Hole region is
1286. Since in the extensive work of that

* Continued from last number.

76 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 43

report much greater areas were covered and
most of the collecting was done by dredging
it is felt that in making the acquaintance of
25% of the fauna recorded in the 1911 re-
port the members of the Invertebrate Zo-
ology class get a fairly complete picture of
the entire littoral fauna of the region. As
has been emphasized before (Allee, 1922) oc-
casionally new records for the Woods Hole
region are added. What is much more val-
uable is the constant checking over of abund-
ance of forms useful to the research worker.
For instance, it was found during the sum-
mer of 1928 that the aberrant and interest-
ing cirratulid worm, Dodecaceria concharum,
was present in large numbers. This species
is relatively little known at Woods Hole and
had never before been identified in the work
of the course. It is at present being used
as research material by one of the members
of the staff. Other instances similar to this
can easily be cited.

The custom of providing each student
with a revised check list of the species which
have been taken in other years by members
of the course at Woods Hole has been con-
tinued but the procedure after field trips has
been considerably modified during the last
eight years. Instead of writing a list on the
blackboard each instructor checks over the
record sheet of the day with members of his
team. During this checking process any un-

identified or provisionally identified speci-
mens deemed sufficiently interesting or im-
portant to bring into the laboratory are
looked at again for more complete study or
final identification. Immediately after all
final identifications are made the composite
field record for the trip is compiled from the
individual team records and posted in the
laboratory. This has been done for every
field trip since 1922. As a result, a check
list showing at a glance the relative abund-
ance of common littoral forms from seven
different but representative localities at
Woods Hole for the years 1922 to 1930, in-
clusive, has been compiled and covies of this
list are available at any time. This list sup-
plements the annotated catalogue made by
Allee (’23a) and placed by him in several
institutions. The data of this list have also
furnished interesting comparisons of the
distribution from year to year and have fur-
nished some evidence as to the effect of tem-
perature on the abundance of littoral forms
in this region.

As a result of past exnerience with the
so-called “question-mark” bottle which fre-
quently dropped entirely out of sight, or,
having been filled with animals more or less
mutually antagonistic was often found upon

examination to contain only animal debris,
the device of providing one set of bottles and
vials of suitable sizes to fit into a specially
constructed carrying case has been used
since 1927. In such a convenient set car-
ried by one member of the team a suitable
receptacle for one or more of each species
studies was provided. As a result, without
waste of time, there was immediately avail-
able for further study representatives of the
entire list checked in the field by any team.
During 1928 for example, following the
North Falmouth field trip a special demon-
stration of representative species, about 150
in number, was made in the entrance hall of
the new main building. This representative
collection of species from the richest collect-
ing area in the vicinity of Woods Hole re-
ceived a very careful inspection and several
requests were made by research workers for
the use of extra specimens.

Two important modifications closely re-
lated to the field work have been made in re-
cent years. Beginning in the year 1923
members of the class made individual studies
of selected areas of Quissett Harbor. This
region was surveyed and an outline map
drawn to scale by Drs. D. B. Young and J.
A. Dawson. On this map the areas were
outlined and assigned to small groups of
members of the class. A selected list of 50
to 60 representative species taken in previ-
ous field trips at this locality was made and
students were required to check quantita-
tively the distribution of these within the
given area. The combined reports were kept
as a matter of record. This ecological field
work was done during the latter half of the
course at which time each student was fa-
miliar, from previous field trins and from
study in the laboratory with all the species
on the list. No supervision on the part of
the instructors was practised but the entire
work lasting usually about two weeks, was
left to the initiative of individual members
of each team. It was felt that this independ-
ent work on the part of students formed a
valuable part of a course in which initiative
on the part of the students is encouraged in
all aspects of class work.

During the years 1927 and 1928 a modifi-
cation of this type of work was made. A
list of species, one for each member of the
class was chosen from the field check list.
Forms occurring relatively rarely were
avoided but from those found fairly fre-
quently a careful selection was made.
Especiallv inclusions of snecies which offer
sperial difficulties in field identification were
made. One species was assigned to each
member of the class after the second week

iets

GLY IT, 1937 |

THE COLLECTING

NET

NI
on

THE COURSE IN INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY AT THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY*
Dr. James A. DAwson
Assistant Professor of Zoology, College of the City of New York
Director of the Course

Field Work: This has always been em-
phasized in this course and, it is felt, rightly
so. In the field the student sees the animal
in its normal surroundings and the greatest
freedom is given for the study of any phase
of the activities of marine littoral animals.
The organization of the field work has so
far as the equipment, method of division of
the class under instructors and localities
visited, been continued largely as described
in Allee’s account. In 1926 Crane’s wharf
was removed and field trips to Nobska or
Quissett have been substituted.

As an illustration of the schedule of field
trips that of 1928 is given. Those of the
other years are essentially similar, the only
differences being the different dates and oc-
casionally somewhat different localities, both
oceasioned by local conditions of tide or
weather.

Field Trip Schedule for 1928

June 30, Saturday — Protozoa Collecting
Trip—Fresh, Brackish and Salt Water.
Start 9.00 A. M.; Return 11.00 A. M.

July 5, Thursday—Quissett Harbor — Flats
and Rocks—Digging, etc. Low tide—3.37
P.M. Start 1.30 P. M.; Return 4.30 P. M.

July 7, Saturday—Vineyard Haven Wharf
Piles—Pile Scraping. Low tide—8.50 A.
M. Start 8.15 A. M.; Return 11.30 A. M.

July 11, Wednesday— (omitted)

July 14, Saturday—Hadley Harbor Flats—
Digging, ete. Low tide—3.01 P. M. Start
12.30 P.M.; Return 4.30 P.M.

July 21, Saturday—Dredging in Vineyard
Sound. Group I—Start 9.30 A. M. Group
Il—Start 2.00 P. M.

July 25, Wednesday—Study of Tow in the
Laboratory. Start 2.00 P. M.

July 28, Saturday—North Falmouth—Rocks,
Flats—Digging, ete. Low tide—12.04 P.
M. Start 9.30 A. M.; Return 4.00 P. M.

August 1, Wednesday—Nobska—Rocks, et-.
Low tide—3.10 P.M. Start 1.45 P.M.
Return 4.45 P. M.

August 4, Saturday—Class picnic.

Special attention has of late years been
paid to the collection and identification of
protozoan species from the varied fresh,
brackish and salt water habitats at Woods
Hole. The summarized account of results
of field work has been kept for the last four

years. This is a list showing the protozoa
identified from eight ponds ranging, from
fresh water (nos. 1, 2, 3), brackish (nos. 4,
5, 7, 8) to salt (no. 8). On each trip for
the past four years the class has been di-
vided into two groups of four teams each.
Each group made collections from four of
the sources listed. A very representative
sampling was made as each team collected
from a different region of the pond in ques-
tion. Upon the return to the laboratory all
samples made by each group from any given
pond were put in a large clean crystallizing
dish which was carefully labelled as to
source of material for identification. Dur-
ing the study of collected protozoa all in-
structors were present and for each year
except 1930 Dr. Mary S. MacDougall, for
several years instructor in charge of the
laboratory work in the Protozoology course,
very kindly aided in the identification of the
rarer or more difficult species. As there is
not a published check list of protozoan
species from these sources for the Woods
Hole Region it is hoped that this list will
have a definite value. The ponds are men-
tioned by names used by both the members
of the Invertebrate Zoology and the Proto-
zoology courses and are well known locally.
Representative samples in separate clean
bottles were taken by instructors from each
pond during all of the years in question and
pH readings were made colorime: trically
immediately upon return from the trip.
These readings are also given in the list.
The classification used follows Calkins
(1926). This list is available for consul-
tation by workers at Woods Hole and it is
proposed to leave copies of it in the Library
for reference at any time.

The check list of Invertebrate snecies has
been revised three times since 1922. The
second of these revisions in 1927 was made
for the purpose of bringing the nomencla-
ture up to date and the staff was fortunate
in securing for the checking of this work
the services of authorities in the systemat-
ics of nearly all the phyla represented. The
number of spécies in the present check list
is 318. In the report of Sumner, Osburn
and Cole!’ the total listed number of inver-
tebrate species for the Woods Hole region is
1286. Since in the extensive work of that

* Continued from last number.

76 THE COLLECTING

NET [Vot. VI. No. 43

report much greater areas were covered and
most of the collecting was done by dredging
it is felt that in making the acquaintance of
25% of the fauna recorded in the 1911 re-
port the members of the Invertebrate Zo-
ology class get a fairly complete picture of
the entire littoral fauna of the region. As
has been emphasized before (Allee, 1922) oc-
casionally new records for the Woods Hole
region are added. What is much more val-
uable is the constant checking over of abund-
ance of forms useful to the research worker.
For instance, it was found during the sum-
mer of 1928 that the aberrant and interest-
ing cirratulid worm, Dodecaceria concharum,
was present in large numbers. This species
is relatively little known at Woods Hole and
had never before been identified in the work
of the course. It is at present being used
as research material by one of the members
of the staff. Other instances similar to this
can easily be cited.

The custom of providing each student
with a revised check list of the species which
have been taken in other years by members
of the course at Woods Hole has been con-
tinued but the procedure after field trips has
been considerably modified during the last
eight years. Instead of writing a list on the
blackboard each instructor checks over the
record sheet of the day with members of his
team. During this checking process any un-
identified or provisionally identified speci-
mens deemed sufficiently interesting or im-
portant to bring into the laboratory are
looked at again for more complete study or
final identification. Immediately after all
final identifications are made the composite
field record for the trip is compiled from the
individual team records and posted in the
laboratory. This has been done for every
field trip since 1922. As a result, a check
list showing at a glance the relative abund-
ance of common littoral forms from seven
different but representative localities at
Woods Hole for the years 1922 to 1930, in-
clusive, has been compiled and covies of this
list are available at any time. This list sup-
plements the annotated catalogue made by
Allee™ (’23a) and placed by him in several
institutions. The data of this list have also
furnished interesting comparisons of the
distribution from year to year and have fur-
nished some evidence as to the effect of tem-
perature on the abundance of littoral forms
in this region.

As a result of past experience with the
so-called “‘question-mark” bottle which fre-
quently dropped entirely out of sight, or,
having been filled with animals more or less
mutually antagonistic was often found upon

examination to contain only animal debris,
the device of providing one set of bottles and
vials of suitable sizes to fit into a specially
constructed carrying case has been used
since 1927. In such a convenient set car-
ried by one member of the team a suitable
receptacle for one or more of each species
studies was provided. As a result, without
waste of time, there was immediately avail-
able for further study representatives of the
entire list checked in the field by any team.
During 1928 for example, following the
North Falmouth field trip a special demon-
stration of representative species, about 150
in number, was made in the entrance hall of
the new main building. This representative
collection of species from the richest collect-
ing area in the vicinity of Woods Hole re-
ceived a very careful inspection and several
requests were made by research workers for
the use of extra specimens.

Two important modifications closely re-
lated to the field work have been made in re-
cent years. Beginning in the year 1923
members of the class made individual studies
of selected areas of Quissett Harbor. This
region was surveyed and an outline map
drawn to scale by Drs. D. B. Young and J.
A. Dawson. On this map the areas were
outlined and assigned to small groups of
members of the class. A selected list of 50
to 60 representative species taken in previ-
ous field trips at this locality was made and
students were required to check quantita-
tively the distribution of these within the
given area. The combined reports were kept
as a matter of record. This ecological field
work was done during the latter half of the
course at which time each student was fa-
miliar, from previous field trips and from
study in the laboratory with all the species
on the list. No supervision on the part of
the instructors was practised but the entire
work lasting usually about two weeks, was
left to the initiative of individual members
of each team. It was felt that this indenend-
ent work on the part of students formed a
valuable part of a course in which initiative
on the part of the students is encouraged in
all aspects of class work.

During the years 1927 and 1928 a modifi-
cation of this type of work was made.
list of species, one for each member of the
class was chosen from the field check list.
Forms occurring relatively rarely were
avoided but from those found fairly fre-
quently a careful selection was made.
Especiallv inclusions of species which offer
special difficulties in field identification were
made. One species was assigned to each
member of the class after the second week

JULY I1, 1931 J

THE COLLECTING NET 81

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Some of the students in the Course in Embry-
ology will be interested in opportunities to remain
as assistants during August. If any investiga-
tors desire to make such an arrangement they
may communicate with Dr. H. B. Goodrich,
Room 210 Br. 210. The course closes Saturday
July 25 and arrangements should be made as
soon as possible.

Catalogs of chemicals and apparatus may be
obtained from the Apparatus Room of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory which is in Room 216
of the Brick Building. The Chemical Room can
not loan its catalogs, because it needs them con-
tinually for reference work.

Miss Jeannette Hegner has been awarded a fel-
lowship to study history in Rome. She is going
this Fall and will be abroad a whole year.

Dr. Hettie Chute has been promoted from in-
structor to assistant professor of botany at the
New Jersey College for Women.

Mr. Herbert H. Harris, who took the course
in physiology at the Laboratory in 1928, and
Walter Garrey, visited Woods Hole for several
days. They are spending their brief vacation in
their boat, taking various cruises to the south of
the Cape and up around the north shore. Both
men graduated from Harvard Medical School
(Mr. Garrey, cwm laude) and they will begin
their internships next year. Mr. Harris goes to
Presbyterian Hospital in New York, and Mr.
Garrey to the Massachusetts General Hospital.

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

The annual Laboratory picnic was held at the
home of Dr, and Mrs. Warrea H. Lewis on the
Fourth of July.

The first lecture in the Popular Lecture Course
will be given on July 16th, by Professor Ulric
Dahlgren of Princeton University. His subject
is “Electric Fishes”. The second lecture will be
on “Inflammation” and will be given by Dr.
Joseph McFarland of the University of Pennsyl-
vania.

The first seminar of the season will be held on
Monday, July 13th. Dr. Homer W. Smith of
New York University will describe his experi-
ences in Siam and Malaysia. Lantern slides will
be used.

Dr. James Murray of the Jackson Memorial
Laboratory, Bar Harbor, gave the second seminar
in the Jackson Memorial Laboratory series. July
Ist. Dr. Murray spoke on “The Effects of In-

breeding Mice.”
FRANCES R. SNOW,

Laboratory Secretary,

The Zoological Field Laboratory, conducted by
the University of Kentucky, will not be in opera-
tion for the next two years, owing to absences on
leave of members of the staff who conduct the
station.

On his return from Nantucket, where he at-
tended a meeting of the Social Science Research
Council, Dr. Adolf Meyer, professor of psychi-
atry at Johns Hopkins University spent a day
visiting several members of the Laboratory.

Father P. H. Yancey, who was an investigator
at the Marine Biological Laboratory last summer,
received his doctor’s degree at St. Louis Uni-
versity in June, He has been appointed professor
of biology and director of the department at
Spring Hill College, Mobile, Alabama.

The group of workers from the Johns Hopkins
University gathered for a picnic on one of the
beaches in West Falmouth on the evening of
Saturday, July 4th.

Visitors to Woods Hole with out-of-state cars
who expect to remain for a period of more than
thirty days are required to secure a special permit,
according to a new law in Massachusetts. The
permit is free but each operator of a car is re-
quired to give evidence of holding a personal lia-
bility insurance. Blanks to be used in applying
for the special permit will be available at the
Administration Office in the laboratory.

CORNELL UNIVERSITY BIOLOGICAL STATION

Dr. Helen R. Murphy (Cornell ’20) is in resi-
dence for a few weeks while finishing two papers:
“Observations and Morphology of the Horned
Toad” and “Notes on the Salpugids.” The work
for these was carried on in Albuquerque, New
Mexico. Dr. Murphy leaves the last of July for
China where she is going for a three year period
to teach at Ling-nan College, Canton.

Mr. F. R. Petherbridge, entomologist of Cam-
bridge, England, has been visiting the Depart-
ments of Entomology and Plant Pathology.

Dr. Gordon F. Ferris, Professor of Zoology
at Stanford University, called at the Entomology
Department when in Ithaca recently for the re-
union of the Telluride Association.

Prof. A. H. Wright who is conducting the
West Virginia Traveling Summer School in
Zoology has returned for the opening of the
Cornell Summer Session. Mrs. Wright and Dr.
W. J. Hamilton, Jr. will lead the group in Dr.
Wright’s absence.

ELSIE BROUGHTON KLOTS,
Instructor in Limnology.

82 THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. VI. No. 43

@ No. 1 Insects

O No. 2 Aquatic
Life

No. 3 Plants

COLLECTOSETS were designed by experienced teachers for the use of
students in field courses.
For a descriptive circular, illustrating and describing each Collectoset
in detail, write to the

The Si F thel tare incorporated

me ee & eles 761-163 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
edges solute Satisfaction
CHICAGO

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable

Spalteholz us to send the appropriate
catalog.
Transparent
Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- z A
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum ee Fee!
and
: = eee) ee ey aie =
PS alam Cray-AvAms CompANy

= 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK
Model of Human tieart

' the Cape and up around the north shore.

JULY I1, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 81

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Some of the students in the Course in Embry-
ology will be interested in opportunities to remain
as assistants during August. If any investiga-
tors desire to make such an arrangement they
may communicate with Dr. H. B. Goodrich,
Room 210 Br. 210. The course closes Saturday
July 25 and arrangements should be made as
soon as possible.

Catalogs of chemicals and apparatus may be
obtained from the Apparatus Room of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory which is in Room 216
of the Brick Building. The Chemical Room can
not loan its catalogs, because it needs them con-
tinually for reference work.

Miss Jeannette Hegner has beer awarded a fel-
lowship to study history in Rome. She is going
this Fall and will be abroad a whole year.

Dr. Hettie Chute has been promoted from in-
structor to assistant professor of botany at the
New Jersey College for Women.

Mr. Herbert H. Harris, who took the course
in physiology at the Laboratory in 1928, and
Walter Garrey, visited Woods Hole for several
days. They are spending their brief vacation in
their boat, taking various cruises to the south of
Both
men graduated from Harvard Medical School
(Mr. Garrey, cum laude) and they will begin
their internships next year. Mr. Harris goes to
Presbyterian Hospital in New York, and Mr.
Garrey to the Massachusetts General Hospital.

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

The annual Laboratory picnic was held at the
home of Dr, and Mrs. Warrei H. Lewis on the
Fourth of July.

The first lecture in the Popular Lecture Course
will be given on July 16th, by Professor Ulric
Dahlgren of Princeton University. His subject
is “Electric Fishes”. The second lecture will be
on “Inflammation” and will be given by Dr.
Joseph McFarland of the University of Pennsyl-
vania.

The first seminar of the season will be held on
Monday, July 13th. Dr. Homer W. Smith of
New York University will describe his experi-
ences in Siam ard Malaysia. Lantern slides will
be used.

Dr. James Murray of the Jackson Memorial
Laboratory, Bar Harbor, gave the second seminar
in the Jackson Memorial Laboratory series. July
Ist. Dr. Murray spoke on “The Effects of In-

breeding Mice.”
FRANCES R. SNOW,

Laboratory Secretary.

The Zoological Field Laboratory, conducted by
the University of Kentucky, will not be ir opera-
tion for the next two years, owing to absences on
leave of members of the staff who conduct the
station.

On his return from Nantucket, where he at-
tended a meeting of the Social Science Research
Council, Dr. Adolf Meyer, professor of psychi-
atry at Johns Hopkins University spent a day
visiting several members of the Laboratory.

Father P. H. Yancey, who was an investigator
at the Marine Biological Laboratory last summer,
received his doctor’s degree at St. Louis Uni-
versity in June, He has been appointed professor
of biology and director of the department at
Spring Hill College, Mobile, Alabama.

The group of workers from the Johns Hopkins
University gathered for a picnic on one of the
beaches in West Falmouth on the evening of
Saturday, July 4th.

Visitors to Woods Hole with out-of-state cars
who expect to remain for a period of more than
thirty days are required to secure a special permit,
according to a new law in Massachusetts. The
permit is free but each operator of a car is re-
quired to give evidence of holding a personal lia-
bility insurance. Blanks to be used in applying
for the special permit will be available at the
Administration Office in the laboratory.

CORNELL UNIVERSITY BIOLOGICAL STATION

Dr. Helen R. Murphy (Cornell ’20) is in resi-
dence for a few weeks while finishing two papers :
“Observations and Morphology of the Horned
Toad” and “Notes on the Salpugids.” The work
for these was carried on in Albuquerque, New
Mexico. Dr. Murphy leaves the last of July for
China where she is going for a three year period
to teach at Ling-nan College, Canton.

Mr. F. R. Petherbridge, entomologist of Cam-
bridge, England, has been visiting the Depart-
ments of Entomology and Plant Pathology.

Dr. Gordon F. Ferris, Professor of Zoology
at Stanford University, called at the Entomology
Department when in Ithaca recently for the re-
union of the Telluride Association.

Prof. A. H. Wright who is conducting the
West Virginia Traveling Summer School in
Zoolegy has returned for the opening of the
Cornell Summer Session. Mrs. Wright and Dr.
W. J. Hamilton, Jr. will lead the group in Dr.
Wright’s absence.

ELSIE BROUGHTON KLOTS,
Instructor in Limnology.

82 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 43

TURTOX. COLLECTOSETS
te S ee

WY for
GC) No. 1 Insects
e) No. 2 Aquatic
Life
No. 3 Plants

COLLECTOSETS were designed by experienced teachers for the use of
students in field courses.

For a descriptive circular, illustrating and describing each Collectoset
in detail, write to the

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated
é a pri 4 ee 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
e es solute Satisfaction
. ‘ CHICAGO

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, etc. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate

Spalteholz
Transparent Cee:
Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- ; ;
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum i panel
and
cy p — rTaArnAea (As ATDA RTS
Sega Cray-ApAms CompANy

117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW York
Model of Human Heart

JuLy 11, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 83

LEITZ
Combination Projector “Vh”

Unequalled Light Intensity
with

Ventilator-Cooling-System

The ideal projector equipment for opaque objects, lantern slides
film slides and micro slides, etc.

% (ee

The four parabolic mirrors which act as concentration medium for the light rays lend
the projector “Vh’’ a most effective mode of light concentration resulting in an exceedingly
brilant and white image at the screen. The four mirrors cast the light upon the opaque
object in an evenly distributed manner, eliminating the possibility of shadows and uneven
objects. The ventilator-cooling-system continuously blows cool air upon the object and thus
specimens can be handled conveniently and injury to them through overheating is eliminated.
The projection objectives are of utmost correction, giving crisp and clear-cut images.

A comparison wil! prove that purchase according to quality, not to price, means
economy and satisfaction with projection equipment.

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET No. 1177 (CN)

E. LEQZ. Inc.

60 EAST 10th STREET } NEW YORK, N. Y.
BRANCHES:
Pacific Coast States: SPINDLER & SAUPPE, INC., Offices San Francisco and Los Angeles, Calif.
Washington District: E. LEITZ, INC., 927 Investment Bldg., Washington, D. C.
Chicago District: E. LEITZ, INC., 122 S. Michigan Ave., Chicago, Ill.

84 THE COLLECTING NET [Vor. VI. No. 43

EINTHOVEN STRING GALVANOMETERS

This well-known instrument pos-
sesses the advantages of extreme
sensitivity, short period and negli-
gible self induction or capacity. It
is largely used for physical and
physiological investigation. Several

types are furnished.

Full information on request.

es CAMBRIDGE
Type “B” shown above has a readily
interchangeable string suspension INSTRUMENT. CoO [Nc

which makes possible quick replace-
ment of strings of different charac- Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

teristics. 3512 Grand Central Terminal, New York |

INTERNATIONAL
CENTRIFUGES

Many types offering a large variety
of equipment of tubes and a wide
range of speed and consequent
relative centrifugal force,

International Equipment Co.
3852 WESTERN AVENUE
BOSTON, MASS.

Higavert, 193r] | THE COLLECTING NET 85

Stability and Dependability

CHARACTERIZE

SPENCER MICROSCOPE

No. 64

The Ideal Standard Microscope
FOR

COLLEGE AND HIGH SCHOOL
GENERAL LABORATORY WORK

Among its many advantageous features
are these:

I. Objective lenses mounted directly into
the metal mount, avoiding the use of
Canada Balsam to hold them.

Ii. Fine adjustment so constructed as to
avoid breakage of cover glass when
focused down upon it.

Ii. A fool-proof fine adjustment, with 34
threads of the screw always engaged
instead of but one or two.

IV. Its ruggedness in design makes it
abundantly able to stand the rough and
tumble of student usage.

It has fcund its way to more than
3000 of the best high schools
and colleges in the United States.
What better recommendation?

SPENCER Microscope No. 64B
equipped as shown with 10x ocular,
double nose piece, two achromatic ob-
jectives 16 mm and 4 mn, iris dia-
phragm complete in wooden cabinet.

$71.75

Allowance for cabinet $3.50, objective
boxes each $0.35 if not wanted.

10% Discount to Schools and Colleges
Samples submitted for tests

Catalog and Quotations Sent on Request
S

86 THE COLLECTING NET

ZEISS

MAGNIFIERS

There is a marked difference in
performance between the best and
ordinary magnifiers. The price of
the best is within the reach of every-
one.

The following are particularly

popular —

APLANATIC
FOLDING MAGNIFIERS

6x, 8x, 10x $6.50 each

ANASTIGMATIC
FOLDING MAGNIFIERS

16x, 20x, 27x $11.00 each

Prices f.0.b. New York

All of the above magnifiers
have excellent definition to the
edge of the field of view and
the image is free from color
defects. Descriptive literature,
also listing other types of mag-
nifiers, will he sent on request.

CARL ZEISS, INc.

485 Fifth Avenue
New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles, Calif.

FeARLZETSS}
JENA

[ Vo. VI. No. 43

SEAL

Non-Corrosive

Non-Corrosive ee aie
MICROSCOPIC
SLIDES «« COVER GLASSES
Do Net For
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Crav-AvAms Company
V17-119 ast Z4th Street NEW 1OnK

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale
B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.

EST. 1887
29 EAST 21st STREET

NEW YORK

en nn EEE SEES

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC

13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Seientific Books in F reign Languages

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROECOPIC SLIDES

LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and infcrmation furnished by
applying at Suvply Department Office
Wocds Hole, Mass.

Jury 2n, L9Zt |

THE COLLECTING NET

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign

postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd yolumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor.
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 114-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
Slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE

Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

BIOLOID
Embedding Paraffine

BIOLOID* Paraffin has been specially pre
pared for embedding and it will be found
far superior to the quality ordinarily offered.
It is processed from the best domestic wax;
it is pure white in color, free from excess
oil, and practically neutral in reaction. The
melting points have been carefully checked
in accordance with the methods of the
American Society for Testing Materials.
Each cake is individually wrapped in glas-
sine paper and packaged in a substantial
carton.

It is available with the following melting
points :

47-49°C (118-120° F.)
50-52°C (123-125° F.)
53-55°C (128-130°. F.)
56-58°C (133-135° F.)

Price
UU MiEeENKGY AangoucadanacGoCUlD Nance & $ .25
10—1 1b. cakes 2.40
25—1 Ib. cakes 5.50
100—1 1b. cakes 20.00

“Bioloid” is the registered trade-name for Will
Corporation staining, mounting, embedding
clearing, and fixing media.

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER, NY.

88 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 43

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

In the June 27th issue of Tue CoLLectinG Net
the account of the Coast Guard included the story
of a green sloop reported stolen by Howard Ry-
nard and found by the Coast Guard off Hyannis.
Maskus Seralis, who wa: in charge of the sloop
when she went aground and was arrested as a
suspicious character, was released when it was
discovered that he had been granted permission
to take the boat by one of Rynard’s friends,

Seralis’ affair with the Coast Guard is prot
yet over for on July 4th he claims that he was
insulted, that his clothing was torn, and that he
was thrown into the water by a memier of the
Cuttyhunk Coast Guard Station, probably as a
result of a quarrel over his earlier trouble with
the Coast Guard. Commander Patch he.e has rv-
ceived the following letter, which seems of suf-
ficient interest to reprint:

July 6, 1931.

My Dear Commander: I respzee.iully ap-
peal to you by mail as I have taken th. pleas-
ure and courage to write all my complaints
and true st-ry as it is and as tol.ows. On
Saturday, July 4 at the Cuttyhunk bathing
beach I was insulted by a member of tcc

Coast Guard in the pr:sence of Lis mate and

civilians. However his name can be traced

through his captain, Mr. Sanborn who is in
charge. Besides names and threats my per-
sonal damage in clothes torn besides throwing
me Overboard I estimate and claim $39 from
Lis pay. I wish to state also that I personally
did my very best to avoid this and firt'cr
trouble but my main and only cause is to give
this man still another chance to make gcod
for he may be young and foolish as he is.
Though we cught young and old, be
proud of our fathers and mothers, it makes
no difference what nationality we may be brt
the mighty and respectable nation of the
United States of America with its old glory
and eagle flying should at all times be re-
spected by its citizens or aliens. As I am

n°w doing my duty and living the life of a

civilian.

Thanking you in advance Mr. Command-
er. as I am in hopes you will take care of
this case in time for correction and mv rights.

Respectfully and sincerely I remain

Vours trulv,
MASKUS D. SERALIS Mate
Schooner Ada Shvll,
Nantucket, Mass.

Commander Patch is turning over the case to

District Commander James S. Phillips to be in-
vestigated.

Miss Charlotte Griffin of Woods Hole, a Junior
at Pembroke College, Brown University. has re-
sumed for the summer her position in the tele-
greph office.

The Woods Hole Yacht Club held its first race
of the season on Wednesday, July sth, starting
fro m the Frost boat house at five o'clock in tue
afternoon.

The schedule of the races was as follows:
Baby Knock-Abouts

Entries Time
“Adios”—Morris Frost ......ccs:::00 Pee ss
“Porpoise’’—Comstock Glaser . 1:59

“Yyro”—Mrs. Crossley ................. £259
“Scuttlebutt —Preston Copeland . 2730
“Menidia ’—l'1ed Copeland
“Charlog’—Ogden Woodruff...
Dories
No one finished in this race on account of fog.
“Dorine’—Gcoige Clowes
“Aunt Addie’—Art Meigs
“lack Cat’—Vera Warbasse
“Dunky”—Kenncth Cole
Catboats, Ete.

44
..did not finisa

“Lurline’—Philip Woolworth .........................1 43
“Squido—Henry Kidder ....... 12> esa
“Saity Dog’’—'1 om Ratcliffe 0.000... 2:51
“H. C.’’—Lewis Perrine .............. did not finisiz

The Club plars to hold races each Monday
afternoon throughout the summer.

This week the University Players at S.lver
Beach have beea featuring the well-known melo-
drama, “Interference” by Rolarid Pertwee and
Harold Dearden. ‘The play tells the story of
Lady Marley whose happy second marriage veers
toward destruction when her first husband, whom
she believed dead, reappears, and the only woman
who knows of the situation seeks vengeance
through blackmailing. Around this frayed plot,
the authors have built a structure which includes -
all the tricks of the stage; a take-off of rcportcrs;
a variety of the eternal triangle; a murder; and
the process of crime detection.

Although the play dragged at the start and
moved too slowly i in parts, notably when Sir John
Marley held the stage, it gave excellent opportun-
ity for delightful bits of character portrayal.
Particularly outstanding were the acting of Fricda
Altman as Lady Marley; the clever work of
Peter Wayne, dashing young hero of “Paris —
Bound” last weeb, whose excellent portrayal cf
the returned first husband left nothing to be d~-
sired; and such minor bits as Fred the hall boy
and Dr. Puttock, ably acted by Myron McCo~
mick and Alfred Dalrymple respectively.

Next week the Players are putting om Milne’s-
comedy “Mr. Pim Passes By.” —M. SiG:

JuLy 11, 1931 | ANBBS (Ol )LLECTING NET

89

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.

Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 26%

The Whaler on Wheels

THE UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, INC.
Present
“MR. PIM PASSES BY”
A Comedy by A. A. Milne
July 13 — July 18
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

MUNSON & ORDWAY

THE BRAE BURN SHOP “Our Wandering Bock Shop”
Fresh Kille It — Fruit & Vegetables
ae Batson, tate & ees aan ‘Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Home Cooked Food and Delicatessen Mr. John Francis
Falmouth opp. Post Office Tel. 354-W ay é
2 Deliveries Daily in Woods Hole Will be at Woods Hole Mondays
= throughout the summer
season,
DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
apo eames aly 106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Chcice Bits from Pekin Telephone Clifford 110
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

Visit
Malchman’s

TEXACO PRODUCTS

NORGE REFRIGERATORS
THE
WOODS HOLE GARAGE LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
COMPANY ON CAPE COD
Opposite Station Falmouth Phone 116

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

Church of the Messiah

(Episcopal)

Eastman’s Hardware
5 AND toc DEPARTMENT

The Rey. James Bancroft, Rector,
KITCHEN FURNISHINGS

Holy Communion 8:00 a.m.
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges Morning Prayer |. 11:00 a.m.
Evening Prayer 565 FPRSRO) {Ds ae

Falmouth Yel. 407

V—_—_———————— ss

90

THE COLEECRING NEG

[ Vor. VI. No. 43

West Published 2-2 (ee ©

The revised, up-to-date
SECOND EDITION of

HEREDITY

By A. FRANKLIN SHULL,
Professor of Zoology in the University
of Michigan
McGRAW HILL PUBLICATIONS

in the
ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES

HIS is a sound and thorough treat-
ment of the principles of biologi-
cal inheritance. The purpose of the
book primarily is to cover those phases
of the subject of especial interest to
mankind. Beside this chief emphasis
on human heredity, however, the book
also covers enough of the phenomena
of heredity in plants and animals to
serve as necessary foundation study.
In this edition all of the many recent
advances in the field are covered that
are valuable in connection with the aim
of the book,

Important among the changes are:

—The discussion of immigration has been
altered to fit the present laws and ad-
ministrative procedure.

—the analysis of the population problem
has been revised to accord with the new
census and other recent statistical results

—the chapters on heredity in man have
been greatly enlarged owing to the in-
crease of readily accessible material

—in the more fundamental parts of the
book new phenomena, such as multiple
allelomorphism and lethal homozygotes,
have been introduced because of the cer-
tainty or increased probability that they
are exhibited in man

—important new experimental results bear-
ing on the evolution question are included

—the history of knowledge of heredity has
been entirely newritten

—problems for drill are introduced into
the fundamental divisions of the work.

345 pages, 6 x 9,
143 illustrations, $3.00

Send for a copy on approval

McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc.

370 SEVENTH AVENUE, i-2

NEW YORK

KOSTYCHEV-LYON

CHEMICAL PLANT
PHYSIQOLEOGH

46 Illustrations. Cloth, $6.00 Postpaid

This book emphasizes all of the important
chemical aspects of the physiological pro-
cesses of plants. It is the authorized edition
in English, with editorial notes written and
revised by Dr. Kostychev, Member of the
Russian Academy of Science; Professor in
the University of Leningrad. The transla-
tion and editing into English was done by
Charles J. Lyon, Ph. D., Assistant Pro-
fessor of Botany at Dartmouth College.

P. BLAKISTON’S: S@
S COminge

PUBLISHERS -:- -:- PHILADELPHIA

VAN SELYKE
CONSTANT VOLUME
BLOOD GAS
ABPBPARATUS

For the Determination of CO2, CO
and ©O2, in Blood and Other Solu-
tions, Micro-Kjeldahl Determination
of Nitrogen, Urea, Ete.

Requires no permanent installation,
and is mounted in one unit ready for
operation.

Write for Bulletin No. 378

EFIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorpcratzd 1897

HEADQUARTEFS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Jury 11, 1931 ] _THE COLLECTING NET _ oI

ee ee

~The Added
Touch

GSE, the new B & L Laboratory
| microscope, embodies features that
make it finer than the average instru-
ment. Its handsome design gives it
graceful lines—a design which sug-
gests and accentuates its increased sta-
bility and balance. It is a laboratory
microscope with the weight and rig-
idity of a research instrument, yet its

price remains well within the range of
laboratory models.

The GSE is a binocular microscope, thus affording the user relief from eyestrain.
The eyepieces can be manipulated so as to give a decided stereoscopic effect.
The binocular body is removable for the substitution of a monccular tube when
the instrument is to be used for photography, projection or drawing.

This model is an instrument of historic associations, for its design is a direct evo-
luticn and refinement of a stand developed by Bausch & Lomb in the early days
of microscopy.

Write for descriptive literature.

baAwscH S LOMB OPTICAL CO. YE
675 St.Paul Street - - Rochester, N. Y. LY \4

GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
% LOMB

BAUSCH &LC

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

THE COLLECTING NET .. [Vor. VI. No. 43

“Tt saved us the cost of 5 microscopes”

Quoting remark of a school superintendent
who bought the
“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS

A new instrument which has been brought
out in response to a demand for a simple
apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the
Promi but is more heavily constructed and
has the following additional features as
standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light.
Revolving stage.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Crav-Apams Company
N

117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK,

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

Vol. VI. No. 4 SATURDAY, JULY 18, 1931

HUMORAL AGENTS IN NERVOUS AC- THE BIOLOGICAL FIELD STATION AT
TIVITIES WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE CORNELL UNIVERSITY
TO THE CHROMATOPHORES
Dr. G. H. PARKER
Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

Dr. JAmMes G. NEEDHAM
Professor of Entomology and Limnology

I am sure it was a great pleasure to us to hear Times have changed. For many years we at
Dr. Wilson at the first lecture. He is far and Cornell University tried to maintain a biological
away the senior zoologist of us all, and it is al- field station like the others in this country, with
Ways a matter of delight when a well equipped laboratory by
he is willing to talk to us from : toe 7 | the waterside. Then the build-
his rich store of knowledge. In M. H. LY. Calendar ing burned down; and before
this series of lectures I am his TUESDAY, JULY 21, 8 P.M. we could get another we be-
unworthy successor. Seminar. Dr. S. Morgulis, “The gan to realize that the auto-

You all know that the nerv- Chemistry of Bone Ash.” mobile had changed conditions
ous system of higher animals Dr. J. M. Johlin, ‘The Enoliza- for us; that we could now get

tion of Gelatin by Neutral Salts.”

; St te x Dr. E. S. rron, “Oxi- ale OF
parts; the receptors, or organs BARGE SaTieosea GomnGocel . grounds to the University in a

which have to do with recep- DE Shito Tashiro and Mx. L,. H. few minutes; that there was

tion of impulses from the en- Schmidt, “Bile Salts.” no need to try to duplicate our

virenment ; the central nervous regular laboratories, which
ie z r Qe . M. = an

system, which is an adjustor ; eee Bo would always be _ better

- ORT eR : Lecture. Dr. T. H. Morgan, pro- a mn aa a
anc z Ss. : 5 J an -
and finally, the effectors, the fescen ori blolGey .Calitomia Tn: equipped and more comfort

is commonly divded into three from our best collecting

organs whereby the animal can stitute of Technology, “The | able; and that by using the
respond to the environment. | Marine Laboratories of the automobile freely we could
wish to talk to you about a World and their Work.” (Illus- | hetter draw upon the variously
particular group of effectors. tated:) distributed resources of our

First I might recall briefly => ae : rich environment. So our pres-
that there are numerous animal effectors. The ent plans contemplate keeping in the field orly the
elementary ones are, first, the urticaters. or stine- eauipment needed for field work, and keeping it
ing cells, which occur in (Continued on page 96) not in one place only, but im several places.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Humoral Agents in Nervous Activities he Beachw@uesvionteansrirretaeereieeets 102
ith § i : =
Ae oe Reference to the Chro The Report of the Special Meeting of the
Dr an Parker 93 Corporation cf the Marine Biological
OS Se a as aaa CEN ENOVAY oo ocmeo ood openoosoeceono 102
The Biol-sical Field Station at Cornell
University, Etems' Of Imterestaarcsaserteiete weyers « earn are 103
Dry James GG. Needham. . <. 06.5002 5 3 Itemsiiof Imberesty. seca +(e syeteein es) nis ev aie.e are 104

94 THE COLLECTING

NET

DOPHINA PROPAGATING POOLS AT THE EXPERIMENTAL HATCHING STATION

These po ls are fertilized and planted in succession and the crop of dophinas when
grown is flusned at intervais of a few days into a lower bass fry pool.

Our plans have in part been realized. Our
campus is traversed by two clear-flowing perma-
nent streams. On one of these, Cascadilla Creek,
there is located the Fish Cultural Experiment Sta-
tion that Dr. G. C. Embody has developed. The
ponds of this station are an inexhaustible source
of biological materials. On the other stream, Fall
Creek, and not far from our laboratories, is lo-
cated a pump house and rearing station. Here
are troughs of running water and rearing cages
for lotic organisms, and here is the electric pump
that supplies untreated water to our insectary on
the hill above. In the insectary also are facil-
ities for our work with aquatic insects. These
places are the chief repositories of living material
brought in from more remote collecting places in
the field. In these much of our research is done.

We have as yet no permanent field station on
Cayuga Lake for general biological use, though
one is contemplated ; but for work with birds we
have a Fuertes Memorial Bird Sanctuary in
charge of Dr. A. A. Allen; and adjacent thereto
is the Cayuga Bird Park maintained by the City
of Ithaca in a 50 acre tract of rich bottom land
Wot yds. ;

Another Field Station that is, by the courtesy
of the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries, available for
research work in aquiculture, is the federal fish
hatchery, located on some very large springs
(Gyrinophilus Springs) tributary to Upper Fall
Creek, some fifteen miles north east of Ithaca.

This is in purpose a research station, rather than
an ordinary fish hatchery.

We have three nearby wild life preserves that
have been presented by the heirs of Mr. C. G.
Lloyd to the University on terms that provide for
their maintenance in a state of nature. One ot
these near McLean, N. Y., is a wooded tract of
81 acres, containing a number of cold sphagnum
bogs whose fauna and flora are largely Canadian.
Another is a wild flower preserve near Slater-
ville Springs. It is a tract of 436 acres of rocky
hills covered with maple and beech woods, and
intersected by beautiful trout streams. The third
is a wooded morainal tract of 110 acres of rolling
hills with kettle holes holding shady pools having
varying degrees of permanence. These supply
some very interesting Phyllopods and other Crus-
taceans.

All these preserves, and three state parks as
well, are within walking distance of the Uni-
versity (though nowadays robody walks). All
being on good roads they are easily and quickly
reached and their biological resources are there-
fore very accessible. The three parks all con-
tain high waterfalls of singular beauty, and the
deep gorges below the falls have a rich and very
interesting fauna and flora. And, happily, the
Finger Lakes Park Commission, that has them in
charge, has been unusually successful in its efforts
to preserve the life in them from destruction by
careless visitors.

Jury 18, 1931 ]

With this sort of environment, with all the
variety of unspoiled nature at our very doors, we
would surely be neglectful of our opportunities
if we did not lay some emphasis on field work at
Cornell University. Especially is this true of
work with aquatic animals; for we have nearby
us bodies of water varying im size from a deep
lake (Cayuga having a maximum depth of 435
ft.) to transient pools ; we have both head water
bogs and flocd plain marshes; we have perma-
nent streams of every degree of swiftness with
half a dozen fine water falls on the campus itself ;
and we have springs both fresh and salt. Since
these waters have suffered very little from pollu-
tion of any sort, their fauna and flora are rich
and varicd.

So at Co-ncll University we are able to live
at home during the summer while working in the
field. There is no distinction between the wo-k
cf the summer and that of the acedemic year; for
at runs the year rcund continuously. In order to
help more effectively with field work Professor
J. G. Necdham continues in residexce during the
summer, teaching no classes, but giving his time
to directing the research wo-k of graduate stu-
dents. Professors Johannsen, Matheson, Allen
and Claassen also give time to graduate work
while teaching in the summer session.

During the summer of 1931 half a dozen grad-
uate students will he absent, eneaged in the hio-
lomical werk of various stream surveys. <A par-
tal list of the workers in residence and of their
seasonal problems is as follows:

.

Wills, (COMMITTING, Naar 95

Professor J. G. Needham: Mayfly ecology.

Professor O. A. Johannsen: Biology of
Chironomidae.

Professor P. W. Claassen: Life Histories of
Plecoptera.

Professor R. Matheson: Biology of the Culi-
cidae and Simuitidae.

Professor A. A. Allen: Propagation of the
Kuffled Grouse, and Life Histories of N.
A. birds.

Mr. Wm. ©. Sadler: Quantity Production of
Chironomus.

Miss J. b. Traver: Taxonomy of the Eph-
emeridae.

Mrs. A. B. Klots: Deep water Crustacea of
Cayuga Lake.

Mr. G. T. Lew: The Topography of the
Head in Odonata.

Mr. Y. C. Hsu: The Biology of the Mayfly
Ceaus Heptagenia.

Mr. M. T. Cheo; The Coleopterous family,
Gyrinidae.

Min i Henes ihe Biolosy, of the
Dytiscidae.

Mr. Geo. B. Saunders: A Biological Study
of the Meadow Lark.

Mir. W. A. Walter: A Biological Study of
Marsh Wrens.

Miss Emma Davis: A Biological Study of
the Killdeer.

Mr. Paul Kellogg: A Distributional Study of
the Virds of the Cayuga Lake Basin.

ae
AOR

ONE CF THE BASS PONDS AT THE EXPERIMENTAL HATCHING STATION

96 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 44

HUMORAL AGENTS IN NERVOUS ACTIVITIES WITH SPECIAL
REFERENCE TO THE CHROMATOPHORES
(Continued from page 93)

the jelly-fishes and the like; and next, the
glands; the luminous organs; the chromato-
phores, or cells which change the color of ani-
mals: the cilia, organs of movement; muscles,
the typical effectors of the animal kingdom; elec-
tric organs, etc. No animal has a full range of
such effectors. The frog, as you see here on the
first slide, has glands, chromatophores, cilia, mus-
cles; human beings have glands, cilia, muscles.
It is a strange coincidence that the earthworm and
human being have the same sets.

Our full response to the environment is car-
ried out by these three sets of effectors. Glands
are concerned with secretions for the most part.
They play no obvious role in our external re-
lations, save, for example, as tears express emo-
tion. Our cilia are mainly concerned with keep-
ing the chambers of the body clear. We depend
chiefly on the muscles for our responses. Prac-
ticaly everything we do in response to our en-
vironment depends upor the muscles. As I am
talking to you I am making use of muscular re-
sponses. My voice comes to you by reason of my
breath passing over my vocal cords and my lips
form words which are supposed to excite in your
mind something of the ideas I am trying to ex-
press. These are all muscular operations. Mus-
cles do everything; they enable us to dig trenches ;
to carve statues; they run the whole gamut of our
activities. Even our expressions are due to the
play of muscles. Perhaps you have what is known
as a “poker face.’’ Tihat means that im an un-
conscious way you are able to control your facial
muscles. We learn to read such manifestations
with a skill we scarcely understand. We pay
big prices to go to the theatre to see people play
with their muscles in this way and we shed tears
in response to the actor’s artificial play with these
effectors.

The particular group of effectors I want to talk
about is the chromatophores. They are found in
the Cephalopods, in Crustacea, and in the water
inhabiting vertebrates. The squids have a won-
derful play of color; their external color is due
to chromatophores.

The next slide which we shall see is of an
ordinary devil fish. The differences of light and
dark color are due to the contraction or expansion
of the chromatophores. The next figure shows
the resting stage, the light condition where the
chromatophore is a sphere with a great number
of muscle fibers running out from it. They pull
the sphere out into a flat disk and spread it over
a large area. The chromatophores are really or-
gans, in the technical sense. They have a system
of innervated muscle fibers. The simplified

types of chromatophores are single cells and are
capable of changing color. Most fishes are cap-
able of color change in this way.

This figure shows the chromatophores of Fun-
dulus both in the contracted and the expanded
states. The next will show you some sketches
from Pouchet, who, back in the 70’s studied these
chromatophores in fishes. Along in the go’s Bal-
Icwitz demonstrated that there were really nerve
fibers which control the activities cf these organs.
The next figure shows you a flat fish in two po-
sitions ; in the first instance it is on a dark back-
ground; in the second case the fish reproduces
not only the lightness or darkness of the sur-
roundings, but it reproduces the pattern of its
surroundings likewise. Like its background, it
is more or less mottled. These animals have a
control over the chromataphores which is not a
common control over the whole body, but some-
thing like our muscular control. They can ex-
pand their spots or contract them in such a way
as to bring about an imitation of their surround-
ings.

The next slide shows you an experiment with
a checkerboard pattern. The fish could not quite
accomplish that, but nevertheless gives a spotting
that is fairly accurate. The next shows you
other patterns, coarse and fine checkerboards.
The animal also can not imitate these exactly but
it conforms fairly well to its background. It
seems impossible to regard this as due to anything
else but nerve control of the elements concerned.
I believe, therefore, that fishes possess this cap-
acity as a result of nerve control of their chro-
matophores.

Colors may likewise be controlled by injecting
various materials into a fish. If, for example,
adrenalin is injected, the chromatophores contract
and the fish goes into the light stage. We know
that humoral influences likewise affect these or-
gans. In general, however, we see that these
changes in the fishes are essentially nervous
changes.

Wher we consider frogs and other Amphibia,
but particularly frogs, we find a remarkable and
disturbing condition. Many experimenters were
convinced that the nerves act on the chromato-
phores of the frog, but they never brought forth
any real evidence. It is chiefly due to Hogber
and his co-workers that we are now convinced
that color change in the frog is quite different
from that in the fish.

The next slide will show vou the two conditions
—light and dark,—and the following will demon-
strate the chromatophores in the skin. The three
conditions, contracted, intermediate, and expanded
are shown. Nerves may be cut, and no difference

Sr

Juty 18, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

97

whatever can be noted. This condition does not,
therefore, depend upon the nerves. Hogben point-
ed out that the dark condition in the frog was
probably brought about by pituitary secretion.
When the pituitary glands were removed the trog
went into the light state and remained light per-
manently. Pituitary secretions poured into the
blood causes the darkening and its absence the
light coloration. This state, therefore, is one in
which the animal as a whole changes and cannot
change in pattern.

Two years ago I experimented with tree toads
by putting them on checkerboard patterns, but
could get no evidence of change of color other
than that of the whole pattern of the animal. IJt
therefore appears that the Amphibia are humoral
in their response.

Another group which shows color chances is
the lizards, of which the chameleon is a typical
animal. Hogben used the African Chameleon and
cut the animal’s spinal cord at different levels.
These cuts induced an expanded condition of the
chromatophores, and the animal, when electrically
stimulated, became light or dark colored only in
front of the cut. He concluded, therefore, that
in the chameleon the system was under nerve

control as in the fishes. The fishes, then, are pre-

dominantly nervous, Amphibia humoral, and the
reptiles nervous. I think no zoologist can look
upon this with complacency—there is something
queer about it.

I set one of my students, Dr. Perkins, to work
on Crustaceans and his studies on chromatophores
proved to be extremely interesting and illuminat-
ing. The next slides show you three Crustacears,
one light and two dark; and chromatophores in
various stages, expansion, contraction, and he~e
they are contracted almost to a dot. The fully
contracted condition produces the light cond tion
in the animal. Expansion is apparently within
limits. Perkins started to find out whether the
control was humoral or nervous. He found it ad-

-vantageous to work upon the abdomen of the

animal. He made cuts on the side and from
above and sets of cuts uvon different animals. but

the only cut that was effective was the one which

severed the dorsal blood vessel. This prevented
any further ch>nge in the abdomen. Perkins then
epened the arimal in the back, lapped over
the dorsal blood vessel, and, catching it on the
skin, stopped the circulation of the blood, where-
upon the chromatophores ceased to change. When
circulation was restored the capacity to change
was recovered. There seems to be every reason
to believe that in these forms something carried
in the blood is responsible for changing the ani-
mal from the light to the dark condition.

What is this disturbance and where does it
come from? Perkins worked on the organs in
the animal’s body, making extracts and injecting
them into animals to see whether he could get

light and dark changes. He finally fell upon the
eye stalk, ground it up with seawater and then
injected the material into the blood of another
animal. The animal becomes light if it was dark;
if it was light colored it remains light. So Per-
kins concluded that some substance produced in
the eye stalk was effective in bringing about
changes in the chromatophores. He could not
find a substance which produced the dark con-
dition.

The eye is absolutely necessary for this change.
If the eye is removed the charges cease. The
same is true of fishes and amphibians and lizards.
If you blind an animal on one side, color changes
are still possible. If you make it totally blind
the color changes cease.

Koller found that if blood from one Crangon
was injected into one of another color, there was
a change. He succeeded in finding an organ
which he claimed worked upon expansion as well
as contraction. He found that eye stalks brought
about contraction, as did Perkins. The next slide
shows the eye stalks which produce one change,
that is the light change. Here is also the organ
which produces the dark change. It is a small
area behind the rostrum in the head region, Its
secretion, injected into the blood of an animal,
will bring about the dark condition,

The next figure shows a shrimp in which the
dark organ has been destroyed and one in which
it has not been destroyed. When both animals are
put on a background one responds to the dark and
the other fails to do so. The process probably
proceeds like this: we have light falling upon the
eye; consequently there are nerve activitics here;
and somewhere perhaps in the ganglia, secretion is
produced At any rate there is nerve action to start
with. This produces a substance which is carried
by the blood until it comes into contact with
chromatophores. There is a double action here.
It is not a simple question of nervous or humoral
action; it is both. The first part of the action is
nervous, the last part is humoral. Neuro-humoral
is therefore a term that can be applied perfectly
well to Crustaceans.

In Amphibia you see exactly the same thing.
The eye is necessary for the operation. The!
light falls on the eye from a light or dark en-
vironment. Nervous activities are started ; some-
thing in the central nervous system gives off a
substance which is carried in the blood and sets
off a change in the chromatophores. The action
here may also be said to be neuro-humoral.

Is it possible that there is a neuro-humoral state
of affairs in fishes and in reptiles? If so we can
call the whole system as neuro-humoral. If you
think of the condition in the fish you will see at
once that it is entirely possible to consider the
process in these terms. The light falls on the
eye of the fish; it is stimulated to nervous activity
through the central apparatus, and the active sym-

98 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 44

pathetic fibers eventually reach the neighborhood
of the chromatophores. At this point I believe
there is humoral activity. That condition, so far
as I know, holds for the fishes and reptiles. If
we accept that view, then we can see that neuro-
humoral activity is sufficient to make all of these
devices work on one plan. This would clarify
the situation so far as the vertebrates are con-
cerned,

In the fishes and reptiles the nervous compon-
ent is long and the humoral short ; in the Amphib-
ia there is a short nervous condition, with an ex-
tended humoral one. In a specialized animal like
the flatfish the stimulation is local in character.
Fraulein Mayer has found exactly that state of
affairs. She drew the blood from a dark flatfish,
injected it into a light flatfish and found that
that spot became dark. Reciprocally a spot on
the black flat fish turned light when injected with
blood from a light flatfish. This shows that these
samples of blood are active in the fish’s body, and
active locally. It is entirely possible that we may
explain local color changes in this way even if
they are humoral.

This neuro-humoral hypothesis assumes that
the fine endings of the nerves secrete substanc-
es. That perhaps is a considerable assumption.
Dr. Speidel some years ago described cells in the
spinal cord of the skate which were bel‘eved to
be secretory. The gland of the body which is
most concerned with such changes is the adrenal
and is one which secretes substances. The me-
dulla, which secretes the edrenal fluid, is embryo-
logically derived from the sympathetic system.
What difference does it make whether we have to
deal with a cell which may secrete on its own sur-
face, or whether we are dealing with a cell which
has a long process which secretes at its end? I
have no difficulty in believing that nerves are se-
cretory. I believe also that the whole nervous
system may work in this way, and that such be-
havior is not confined to the nerves which con-
trol the chromatophores.

Other receptors may also be controlled in a
neuro-humoral way.

Urticators, the netling cells of sea anemones,
are non-nervous. We do not know much about
the nervous cortrol of cilia, luminous organs, and
electric organs, so we have to pass these over.
When we turn to the glands we find that certain
ones are regularly excited by humoral influences,
e. g. the pancreas. This is a straight out-and-out
humoral organ. The salivary glands are particr
larly interesting in this respect and have been des-
cribed as the typical nerve-excited glands. In
1913 Demoor carried om an experiment on these
glands. He excited the salivary gland of a dog,
drew off the secretion, and injected it into a
quiescent dog. The second dog secreted saliva.
It looks as though there were a substance there
which passed into the saliva and incited resporse

when it was secondarily injected. I believe that
the nerves of the salivary gland produced a sub-
stance which excited the gland to action and some
of this substance, escaping in the spittle, was
capable of exciting the second dog.

A striking example among the effectors is the
vertebrate heart. It can be slowed in its action
by stimulation of the vagus nerve. In 1921
Loewi began a remarkable series of papers on the
stimulation of the heart. He took a frog’s heart
and cleaned it of blood, then filled it with a ver-
tain amount of Ringer’s solution. The solution
was then withdrawn and set aside. He filled the
heart again with Ringer’s solution and when the
heart again began to beat normally he stimulated
the vagus nerve. The action gradually slowed
He again draired off the fluid and set it aside, and
restored the original Ringer’s, whereupon the beat
returned to normal. The second fluid was thea
intreduced and he found that the beating of the
heart was slowed.

This experiment has been repeated in many
ways. It is ordinarily performed with two hearts,
and the same result is obtained. There is good
reason to suppose that the vagus nerve produces
a substance which is carried in the blood, which
will influence other organs than the heart in the
same way.

An interesting case has been described in the
smooth muscles affecting the hair on the tail of
the cat. When the smooth muscles are excited
the hairs stand up. If you arrange a cat with
denervated heart. so that the adrenals and liver
have no part in the circulation, and then stimulate
the sympathetic fibers going to the tail, the hairs
will stand up. For a few minutes after, the heart
changes its beat. This is due to something which
has been secreted and poured into the blood. Can-
non and Bacq believe that there is a substance
produced in the smooth muscles of the tail which
escapes into the circulation and affects the end
organ. This they have called sympathin. I asked
Cannon why it might not be a secretion from the
nerve endings, and he said that he had nevey
thought of it in that way. I am inclined to be-
lieve that the nerve endings are the secretory or-
oans

In 1924 experiments were carried out on the
skeletal muscles of the frog. Here substances pro-
duced in the skeletal muscle of one frog were
passed over in the blood injected into the rectum
of another frog, and produced a change in the
smooth muscle.

Years and years ago Botezat put forth a theory
which was the neuro-humoral idea, potentially,
as applied to the ordinary secondary sense cells
of the vertebrate body. In the ordinary organs of
taste we have this condition revealed: the nerve
fiber comes down and branches in the immediate
vicinity of the taste buds on the surface of the
tongue. How do these cells excite the nerve

ee sr

—— eo

20k mee oe WO: hes

~

deieethtechetinias stinitiniasi cenadetntinesemataenaiemmeeael

atin

Jury 18, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 99

fibers which lie immediately behind them? He
said “I think they act as glands. They secrete
a substance.’ He proposed to call these cells
“Sinnesdrusenzellen.”” That was in 1910 and no
one paid much attention to the work, so it was
lost sight of.

These fibers have very remarkable influences
of another kind on their end organs. If nerves
going to the tongue are cut, the taste buds degen-
erate. If it is not a part of the fiber, why doze
it degenerate? Some of the influence passes
across from the nerve ending to the taste bud and
maintains its integrity. That is a trophic influ-
ence. I don’t think that there is such a thing as
a tropic nerve, but I think practically all nerves
have a tropic influence. | When the nerves of
which we are speaking regenerate, the taste buds
regenerate. Some of you have heard me lecture
about neurofibrils. I expressed the view that the
neurofibrils were concerned with the transmissioi
of these trophic impulses. Here, in the case of
the taste buds, we have conditions occasioned by
a neuro-humoral activity, nerve impulses to the
interior and trophic impulses to the exterior, and
all probably neuro-humoral.

The disease known as “shingles” apears in the
form of bands around the body breaking out in
inflammation. It was formerly thought to be a
skin disease. It is ncw known to be due to an
inflammation of the spinal ganglia of a particuls!
region and these bands are in exact correspond-
ence with the distribution of the sensory nerves
of that particular area. The disease is probably
due to abnormal secretion of nerves in that par-
ticular section. If we think of these fibers as
ordinarily secreting something which keeps the
skin in a normal condition, then we can under-
stand how such an abnormal secretion will pro-
duce the disease.

In the central apparatus the main problem is
the interrelation of neurones. They come to-
gether, at the synapses and impulses pass across
in these regions. The remarkable fact about this
is that the impulse will pass in only one direction
at the synapse. It cannot be sent in a reverse di-
rection. It appears that the synapse is polarized
It takes more time for impulses to pass across a
series of breaks of this kind than it would to pass
along a single fiber. How does this polarization
come ahout and how is retardation of the opera-
tion effected? Dr. Gerard has gore over this mat-
ter in a recent survey and has stated that “either
the same kind of ion migration and chemical re-
sponse which represents successive activation of
one region of the nerve fibre by another must
also take place at the synapse, or it is conceivable
that the end of the axon acts as a minute gland
and, when stimulated, produces some chemical
which is able to excite an adjacent or neighboring
dendrite.” The second alternative is exactly the
view I have been talking about. Time is con-

sumed in secretion. I believe that central physi-
ology favors this idea that the neurones are inter-
related through secretion and that polarization of
neurones and retardation across a synapse is due
to secretion,

Dr. Bartelmez a few years ago studied gigantic
synapses in the Mauthner cells of the fish but his
work was largely histological. In the worms and
Crustacea there are giant fibers which run the
whole length of the animal’s body and are sup-
posed to be continuous. The earthworm has
three of these giant fibers the shrimp four.

In 1924 Dr. Johnson of the Harvard laboratory
demonstrated for the first time that these fibers
are not continuous. One segment of a giant fiber
overlaps the next segment, and there are as many
of these overlappings as there are segments in the
animal’s body. They are not continuous fibers
then, but are segmentally atranged. Synapses
here are really gigantic and I feel justfied, there-
fore, in giving them a special name—macro-sy-
napses—as contrasted with the ordinary synapses
which are so small that they can scarcely be seen.

The next slide shows a cross section of the
nervous system of the earth-worm. The three
giant fibers are enormous. The next slide will
show you a series of sections taken from a region
where the overlaps occur. If you study these
fibers histologically you will see first of all that
they are polarized. The two ends are not alike.
If you stain them in osmic acid you will find that
the lateral fiber is always deeply stained. If you
study their action you will find that it is that of
the direction of the worm as a whole. If you
stimulate the worm on the head it pulls together ;
if you stimulate it on the tail it pulls together.
That is a continuous action of the individual. Ti
you cut the lateral fibers and then stimulate the
tail the action will run only to the cut. Corres-
ponding experiments show the direction of the
transmission in the median fiber. It is a double
system of transmission. The conditions are such
that the discharging portion of the neurone is
dark colored, the receptive, light. The same thing
is found in the shrimp. The lateral fibers are
deeply colored and transmission is toward the
head. The receptive portion is light and the dis-
charging portion is stained. That shows us that
these macrosynapses are chemically different on
the two sides. I think this is the first time we
have found evidence of such a difference. It does
not prove the existence of a secretion, but IT be-
lieve that a secretion is present. It does show
that these giant nerve fibers have a remarkable
physiological and histological polarization which
is quite open to the interpretation that I have sug-
gested.

This neuro-humoral condition is quite hypo-
thetical, as you see, but the hypothesis seems to
me suggestive and provocative of many questions.
I think it likely that further study will reveal that

100

THE COLLECTING

NET - [ Vor. VI. No. 44

it is an activity of considerable importance. The
French materialistic physiologists of a century
and a half ago were impelled to make many radi-
cal statements. Cabanis said “The brain secretes
thought as the liver secretes bile.” No one be-

lieves this literally but I suspect that the nerve
activity of the body is much more influenced by —
secretions than the modern physiologist has sus-
pected.

REVIEWS OF THREE BOTANICAL BOOKS

Bacteriology—A Textbook on Fundamentals
Stanley Thomas. Second Edition, 1931 xv plus
301 pp. McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York.

This book is rot as inclusive a document as the
first part of its title would suggest, nor does it
limit itself to the field of bacteriology. It is a
book quite evidently designed for a class of
students which will not enter upon laboratory bac-
teriology without separate and further training.
The sanitary engineer, the hygienist and the food
technician will find here the information which
newcomers in their fields will be expected to as-
similate as the foundation for more specialized
training. The professional bacteriologist in train-
ing, particularly the medical student, will find
that the familiar environment of isolation and cul-
ture methods, of description of numerous patho-
genic organisms with the methods for their de-
tection, are absent or treated in generalized form,
with avoidance of specific techniques. This raises
in the mind of the reviewer the question of the
fundamertal character of the technique of a
branch of science; changing tool that it is, ts it
not as fundamental to a proper understanding of
science as the anciert history of the science.

The history of the various phases of pure and
applied bacteriology receives extensive and read-
able exposition by the author. The discussion of
classification of bacteria is adjusted to the revised
understanding of that confused field now ir
vogue. This is as it should be, but it is unfortu1-
ate that the author should state in generalization
that the genus name is usually a Latin word (p.
18), for it is generally (when not based on a per-
sonal or geographic name) of Greek origin,
sometime latinized, as one may confirm in any
botanical manual (such as Gray’s 7th ed.) where
the roots are given. Bacteriological morphology
is treated in the light of the renewed acceptation
of possible pleomorphic changes in the develop-
mer'tal course of the organism, and consequently
bears a quite different and secondary relation to
classification than it did for an earlier generation,
and much more specific relation to life histories.
It seems unnecessary to state, when discussing the
size of bacteria, that (p. 59) the micron is equiva-

lent to 1-2g,000 of an inch wher it would have:,

cost no more to print the correct figure. The dis-
cussion of the structure of the bacterial cell is
full and helpful. The chapter on the physiology
of these organisms likewise is well elaborated,
although it attains a somewhat highly technical
vocabulary in discussing the newer interpretations

of bacterial heredity. The chapter on cultivation
of bacteria is a generalized one, including, with
the general features of growth conditions, mention
of palaeobotanical records of bacterial growths
and bacterial ecology, rather than culture media,
isolations and such techniques. Much of the
physiological distinctiveness of bacteria shows in
the chapter on bacterial enzymes, and this is a
particularly useful portion of the book to the
worker in allied lines. Bacterial relations to the
n'trogen, carbon, phosphorus and sulphur cycles
in nature are elaborated here. The following
chapter, ostensibly dealing with micro-organisms
other than bacteria, is less fortunately presented.
After short mention of viruses and Spirochaetes,
attention is turned to the last four orders of the
class Schizomycetes! Then follow some four
pages of reference to fungi, and about three to
algae. The latter portion, probably introduced
out of courtesy to the student of water supplies,
might better have been omitted. The author has
unfortunately adopted archaic information or mis-
information as if from elementary botanical text-
books. For example, he states that there are four
major algal groups (p. 130) wher there are nine
or ten (depending on interpretation) independent
groups recognized He also claims that the chloro-
phyll in Cyanophyceae is diffused throughout the
cell (p. 120) ; that the genera of the Protococcales
(miscalled a family) which occur in water are
Pleurococcus and Volvox (p. 131) when there
are dozens of others in like situations; that Lam-
inaria reaches the phenomenal length of 800 feet
or more (p. 132)—probably ten times the maxi-
mum in this genus; that the diatoms (p. 132) are
members of the so-called “Brown Algae” (Phaeo-
phyceae) ; and he has alco taken various liberties
with spelling: Oscillaria for Oscillatoria (p. 130),
Coelspaerium (p. 130) and Caelosphaerium (p.
164) for Coelosphaerium, Aphanzomenon (p.
164) for Aphanizomenon, and so forth. There
follow chapters on bacteria in the so‘l, in water,
sewage, the air, foods, and in disease production,
which appear to be adequately and helpfully done,
as are those on immunity, sanitation, and bacteria
in industry.

Lastly, the introductory chapter may receive
some attention. It is designed, apparently, for
those students who lack preliminary training in
biology. In some parts it seems hardly quite
sound, as in the description of mitosis (miscalled
karyokenisis (p. 12) for karyokinesis), where an
elaborate mechanism of centrosomes and asters

Juty 18, 1931 ]

ii COLLECTING) NEG

IOI

is involved in this generalized plan, though these
structures are known in only a very few plants
indeed, and where (p. 13) the longitudinal divis-
ion of each chromosome involving the splitting of
each chromatic granule is said to occur on “a
plane perpendicular to a line drawn between the
two centrosomes’’when it occurred long before this
period. Conjugation (p. 13) by confusion of a
sexual reproduction with undifferentiated sexual
reproduction is made a subdivision of the former,
and the cytological history as given bears little
resemblance to what is known of this process in
plants. The statement on p. 16 that “Maturation
or reduction division is a mitotic division with
‘subsequent fission” likewise does not hit very
near our present state of knowledge.

Yortunately the features to which the reviewer
takes exception are not such as will appear im-
portant to the normal user of this book, and its
obvious acceptability (as evidenced by its appear-
ance in a second edition) for teaching purposes
will outweigh these weaknesses, so long as the
central material is soundly presented.

—Wwm. R. TAYtLor.
82 Sy ED

Plant Physiology. (With reference to the green
plant.) Edwin C. Miller. 900 pp. McGraw-Hill
Book Co., $7.00.

Dr. Miller has attempted to fill the need for a
text-book in plant physiology which summarizes
and brings to date work done in Europe and
America.

The result is a carefully written discussion of
the following topics: plant cells, absorption of
water and dissolved material, water loss, photo-
syithesis, nitrogen metabolism, fat metabolism,
digestion, translocation, respiration and growth.
No discussion of reproduction or responses is in-
cluded. Good literature lists accompany each dis-
cussion. At the end of each chapter is a set of
questions on the material covered. These ques-
tions, together with the treatment of physiology
entirely from the standpoint of green plants, seem
odd in a book designed for advanced students.

The text is an excellent reference book for any
one interested in physiology and, with the use of
carefully selected references, supplementary lec-
tures, and class discussions, should be well adapt-
ed for use as an advanced text in plant physiology.

—J. R. Jackson.
fe 8) $2 25 S3

The Lower Fungi— Phycomycetes. Harry
Morton Fitzpatrick. 331 pp. (Illustrated). Mc-
Graw-Hill Book Co. $4.00.

This book will be heartily welcomed by students
and research workers in mycology and plant path-
ology. The author has recognized and attempt-
ed to fill the need of a complete and detailed
treatment of the taxonomy and morphology of

the phycomycetes. In his classification of the
Phycomycetes into the eight orders, namely;
Chytridiales, Ancylistales, Blastocladiales, Mon-
oblepharidales, Saprolegniales, Peronosporales,
Mucorales, and Entomophthorales, the author
does not depart far from the older classifications.
Where changes are made, adequate explanation is
given for the reason of the change. The inclusion
of the Plasmodiophoracae in the Chytridiales and
the establishment of the order Blastocladiales are
examples of this. Keys are provided for all gen-
era. A complete discussion of the work done on
various species of a genus follows with citations
to literature. Doubtful or excluded genera of an
order are treated at the end of the order. In con-
clusion a brief and concise survey of the various
views of the origin of the Phycomycetes as well
as Hemiascomycetous affinities is given by the
author.

Technical terms are printed in boldface type
in the text at the point at which they are defined
or explained. Especially desirable is the bibli-
ography found at the end of each chapter.

—Ruta I. WALKER.

One of the two Research Corporation prizes
for 1931 has been awarded to Dr. Andrew Eilli-
cott Douglass who is director of the Steward Ob-
servatory of the University of Arizona. Besides
a bronze placque he receives $2,500. Dr. Doug-
lass has received the award for his researches on
the rings marking the annual growth of trees
which hhave thrown light on the past climate of
the earth, and shown a correspondence hetweer
weather and solar activity.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
tal yet Oh mcr ee clea Tile 74-20)
IN AO, meena oe 8:00 8:22
ulys20S eer 8:47. 9:19
ulys2is eer 9:44 10:18
cl pert eerie fPeainerci oe 10:40 11:17
uly 23s oes eh sae PDQ be (tes tee
Taly: 24% tae se a ere 12:21 12:34
Wet Agomcremocna es oop 3 Wg) GL AS
Iuly-26.-5-see eee 2EIQ) 21:27,
July 27008 250 2 oko 2b: OMENS LO
Tully vei ceccrmet: eae 4:01 4:06

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay. It must be remembered that the schedule
printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro-
longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the
current to occur a half an hour earlier or later
than the times given above.

102 THE

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 44

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific wcrk
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Wate @aClell Perereicrelelotelelstalctetel-icteletteiet-tetencial nate Editor

Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Cattell

THE BEACH QUESTION

Our note on the beach question has brought
forth a good deal of discussion. In conversation
with one of the property owners bordering the
beach we have learned more fully the reasons for
the erection of the fence on the beach. We shall
try and state them as they were understood by us:

They very much regret the necessity of closing
their property to bathers. This is occasioned by the
increased number of people who now come to Wo. ds
Hole. Last year they found conditions intolerable
because of the noise which inevitably accompanies
bathing so near the ecttages and the entire loss of
privacy which ensues.

They do not feel that our suggestion about per-
mitting the adult members of the laboratories to
use the beach in the day time is practical, because
of the undesirability of limiting its use to them, and
because even then the disturbance would be too
great.

There is not the slightest desire to be discourteous
nor to prevent bathing and swimming on the long
stretch of beach in front of the bathhouses. The
moral right lies in the desire of every person for a
reasonable amount of privacy in his home and the
preperty owners express their great appreciation
for the universal observance of that this summer.
The legal right is defined in the following statement,
contained in a letter from the Commissioner of
Public Works of the State cf Massachusetts:

“Under the laws and court rulings of Mass-
achusetts the right of the general public t®
use flats privately owned is strictly limited.
Persons may enter upon such flats to exercise
the right of fishing, which may include the
digging of clams, and may pass over the beach
for the purpose of fowling. No right of the
public has been established to walk upon the
beach fcr bathing, or to remain there for play,
for rest or for any other than the two pur- .,
poses of fishing and fowling, and of naviga-
tion.”

Our limited space makes it necessary to post-
pone any comment that we may have to make
until the following number.

Five CottectinG Net scholarships of $100.09
each will be available for award this summez.
Any student in attendance this summer at the
Marine Biological Laboratory is eligible for the
award. The money is appropriated to meet a
part of the expenses of the recipients at Woods
Hole during the summer of 1932. Application
blanks will be made available soon.

THE REPORT OF THE SPECIAL COMMITTEE
OF THE CORPORATION OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

In connection with the corporation meeting of
the Marine Biological Laboratory which convenes
on August II, it is of interest to reproduce the
following report of its special committee which
was mailed to members during the wirter:

At the Annual Meeting of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory held on August 12,
1930, a committee was appointed to study the mat-
ter of nominations of Officers and Trustees.

At the request of the Committee the following re-
port is distributed fcr the information of members
of the Corporation. Gary N. Calkins, Clerk.

To Members of the Corporation of the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory :—

At the Annual Meeting of the C-rporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory of August 12, 1930,
it was voted that the entire matter of methods in
nominating Officers and Trustees be referred for
study to a Special Committee consisting of two n_n-
Trustee members of the Corporation and two Trus-
tees.

‘he existing method of selecting Officers and
Trustees is based on a vote of the Corpcration at
the Annual Meeting in 1911, requesting the Trus-
tees each year to submit to the Corporation at the
Annual Meeting, nominations for vacancies on the
Board. Trustees hold office f=r a term of four years
normally eight such vacancies are filled by election
each year. The practice has been for the Trustees
to submit one name for each vacancy and until this
year these nominations have been elected by the
Corporation unanimously.

After careful consideraticn and discussion with
the Executive Committee of the Trustees your Com-
mittee is prepared to make the following recom-
mendations. In advance of the next Annual Meet-
ing at which the final report will be made, it seems
desirable to submit these recommendations to eacn
member cf the Corporation with the hop2 that those
interested will transmit to the Chairman of the Com-
mittee, possible criticisms or suggestions for ad-
ditional recommendations. The final report of the
Committee will be prepared after the consideration
of any such c-mments. The recommendations fol-
low:

1. That the By-Laws be changed in such a manner
that the individuals in charge of courses shall be
Trustees ex-officio.

2. That the Committee of the Corporation for
nomination of Trustees consist «f five members, of
wom not less than two shall be non-Trustee mem-
bers of the Corporation.

3. That on or about July first of each year, the
Clerk cf the Corporation send a circular letter to
each member giving the names of the Nominating
Committee and stating that the nominating com-
mittee will be glad to regeive suggestions regardiny
nominations.

4. That the members of the Corporation be en-
couraged to avail themselves cf the opportunity,
which has always existed but which her:tofore has
been little used, of bringing to the attention of the
Executive Committee at any time matters which
they consider to be of importance to the Laboratcry.

Hubert B. Goodrich

Harold H. Plough

Ivey F. Lewis

Winerton C. Curtis, Chairman

Juty 18, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

103

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Douglas M. Whittaker, formerly assistant
professor of zoology at Columbia University, has
accepted the position of associate professor of zo-
ology at Stanford University.

Dr. E. Alfred Wolf, assistant professor of
zoology at the University of Pittsburgh, has been
appointed associate professor for next year.

Dr. Ruth I. Walker, instructor in botany at the
University of Wisconsin, has been placed in
charge of the work in botany at the Milwaukee
center of the University of Wisconsin Extension
Division. Dr. Walker is carrying out her work
in botanical research this summer at Woods Hole.
At this same institution Dr. Donald C. Broughton
has been appointed assistant professor of zoology.

Dr. T. Thomas Flynn, who is now Ralston pro-
fessor of biology in the University of Tasmania,
has been recently appointed to the chair of zoology
in the University of Belfast.

Professor Charles W. Dodge has been made
emeritus professor of biolegy. He has held the
position as head of the Department of biology at
the University of Rochester for forty-one years.

Dr. Warren S. P. Lombard, professor emeritus
of physiology in the medical school of the Uni-
vers‘ty of Michigan has been awarded an honor-
ary degree of doctor of science by that institu-
tion.

At the commencement exercises of Purdue Uni-
versity, the honorary degree of doctor of science
was conferred on Dr. J. C. Arthur, professor em-
eritus of hotany; and on Dr. Stanley Coulter who
is professor emeritus of biology.

Dr. A. B. Keyes went abroad early in Septem-
ber of last year as a National Research Fellow.
He worked with Dr. A. Krogh at the University
of Copenhigen. Dr. Keys has been reappointed
a fellow of the National Research Council and
will spend the coming year at Plymouth and
Cambridge, England.

Dr. William Crocker, director of the Boyce
Thompson Institute for Plant Research, his been
elected acting director and general manager of
the Tropical Plant Research Foundation Dr.
Crocker spent the summer of 1927 at the Marire
Biological Laboratory as Chairman of the Divis-
lon of biology and Agriculture of the National
Research Council.

Dr. L. G, Barth has just returned from a year
in Europe, where he worked at the Zoological
Station in Naples and at the Kaiser-Wilhelm In-
stitute in Berlin. He is the holder of a National
Research Fellowship. Next year Dr, Barth wiil
be ar instructor at Columbia University.

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

The second seminar of the season will be given
Monday night, July 2oth, in the Dining Hall, by
Dr. William H. Cole, of Rutgers University. He
will tall on “Chemical Stimulation in Animals.”

Miss Miriam Slack entertained the young
people of the Laboratory at a picnic supper ‘held
at her summer residence on Wednesday, July 8th.

Sunday afternoon, July r2th, the young people
of the Laboratory climbed the ladder trail up
Newport Mountain as the guests of Miss Eliza-
beth Mast. The climb was followed by supper
at Miss Mast’s house.

The first Laboratory dance will be held in the
Dining Hall, Saturday night, July 18th.

On Thursday, Tuly 23rd, Dr. Joseph Mac-Far-
land, Professor of Pathology in the University of
Pennsylvania Medical School, will give the 2nd
lecture in the Popular Lecture Course. His sub-
ject is: “Inflammation.”

Dr. Feng cf the University of Ohio arrived
Saturday, July 11th, to assist Dr. W. H. Cole in
his work. Dr. Feng is one of the Chinese Fel-
lows sent to this country by the Chinese Govern-
ment and supported by the Boxer Indemnity
Fund.

Dr. Warren H. Lewis of Johns Hopkins Med-
ical School spoke on tissue cultures of cancer at
the Jackson Memorial Laboratory, Wednesday,
evening, July 8th.

Dr. Harold D. Senior visited the Harvard:
Medical School in Boston last week. He went
especially to examine the embryos in the Harvard
Medical School collection for information rela-
tive to the development of the ulnar artery.

Frances R. Snow, Secretary.

Dr. Carl F. Cori, a member of the State In-
stitute for the Study of Malignant Diseases ( Buf-
falo), has beer appointed professor of pharma-
cology at the Washington University School of
Medicine. i

Dr. L. J. Cole, Professor of genetics at the
University of Wisconsin has recently been elected
a corresponding member of the Czechoslovak Ac-
ademy of Agriculture. (Continued on Next Page)

104

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 44

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Tue CottectinG Net will be glad to keep on
file in its office a list of names of individuals who
are interested in obtaining a position for the ap-
proaching academic year. Their names and any
information that they would like to leave would
be made available only to those persons who;
might be concerned with their appointment.

Mr. Alfred L. Loomis of Tuxedo Park, New
York, accompanied by Dr. Donald Christie of
McGill University, has been cruising the waters
around Woods Hole in his yacht in search of
sharks for his experimental work on their glands.
Mr. Loomis carries on experimentation at his
physical laboratory in Tuxedo Park. He is visit-
ing Dr. E. Newton Harvey.

Miss Mary L. Austin will sail for Lucknow,
India, in June of 1932. She will take the place
of Miss Evangeline Thillayampalam as head of
the zoology department at the Isabella Thoburn
College. Miss Thillayampalam will come to this
country during that year to take Miss Austin’s
place in the zoology department at Wellesley.

Dr. M. A. Graubard, who received his degree
this year at Columbia University, has beer award-
ed a National Research Fellowship for the com-
ing year. He sails for England the beginning of
August to take up work at the University of
Manchester.

Miss Molly Hassler, daughter of Mrs. Francis
A. Wilson, and Dr. Thomas P. Hughes were
married in New York City on July 7. Mrs.
Hughes has just graduated from Cornell Uni-
versity, and Dr. Hughes has recently been ap-
pointed an associate member of the Rockefeller
Institute.

Raymond B. Montgomery is sailing on the “At-
lantis” this summer. He is helping to take water
densities and doing general work in physics. He
will be a senior at Harvard next year.

Dr. Cornelius M. Clapp has returned to Woods
Hole from Mount Dora, Florida, where she
spent the winter months.

Brooklyn College has appointed Dr. Ralph C.
Benedict as associate professor of biology. He
has been chairman of the department of sciences
at the Haaren High Schol.

Dr. C. H Kauffman, emeritus professor of
hotany and emeritus director of the herbarium of
the University of Michigan, died at his home in
Ann Arbor on June 14.

Mr. R. L. Dufus, of the editorial staff of the
New York Times, and recently appointed editor
for the Committee on the Cost of Medical Care,
will arrive in Wods Hole during the week of July
20 to spend several weeks with his family who
are living in the Jennings cottage on Gansett
Road, Mr. Dufus has written some successful
novels, the most recent of which was “Tomor-
row Never Comes.” He is the author of “The
Santa Fe Trail” and of a volume entitled “Books,
Their Place in a Democracy.”

Dr. Charles J. Fish, director of the Buffalo
Museum of Science, has accepted charge of an
international survey to determine the effect on the
herring industry of the proposed power dam at
Passamaquoddy Bay, Maine. Dr. Fish has re-
ceived a leave of absence from the board of man-
agers of the museum and went on July 1o to the
Canadian biological laboratory at St. Andrews,
N.B., the seat of the two-year investigation. He
has spent several summers at Woods Hole as d'-
rector of the local branch of the United States
3ureau of Fisheries. Other members of the com-
mission are: Dr. A. G. Huntsman, director of the
Atlantic Botanical Station, Canada; O. E. Sette,
in charge of North Atlantic investigations for the
United States Bureau of Fisheries; W. A. Found,
deputy minister of fisheries. Canada. and Dr. H.
B. Bigelow, director of the Woods Hole Oceano-
graphic Institution. Dr. Fish will be executive
secretary of the commission and will have charge
of the work in the field. :

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Furniture for Ritter Hall (the new laboratory
building, is arriving by the car load and part of it
is already being installed. There will probably
be three carloads of it especially constructed in
Michigan. :

Dr. T. D. Stewart of the Department of Chem:
istry of the University of California at Berkeley
visited the Institution on Monday of this week.

Mr. M. L. Natland of Long Beach, California,
who for several years has been making a compar-
ative study of fossil and recent foraminifera vis-
ited the Institution on Monday of this week to
consult Director T. W. Vaughan about a special
program of investigations which he is undertak-
ing this summer. The plans, concerning which he
wished to get most advice, involve the dredging
of approximately two hundred samples of sea
hottom from shallow to deep waters between
Long Beach and Catalina Island. For this part
of his program he has been granted a special aid
fund by the National Research Council.

eee

Juty 18, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 105

SPENCER SuhtEee,

OUTFITS

SUPERIOR MODELS

UNIVERSAL BINOCULAR
MICROSCOPES

Nos. 55 and 56

Convertible:
No. 55-~as illustrated with horseshoe base.
No. 56---the stage and above that omitting base

Equipped with
MULTIPLE
NOSEPIECE

A new, original, patented objective
changer which carries three pairs of

stantly and others substituted.

The objectives on the nosepiece are dust proof and the worker can easily get to them to
clean them. ,
These microscopes have a very large stage 100 msm x 100 myjm. Objects in the center

_ of a dish 50 mym high and 130 m,m in diameter may be brought into the lines of vision.
The rack and pinion movement together with the adjustability of the arm on the slide per-
mit the focusing on very thick objects. The large mirror (62 mym diameter) is sufficient
to illuminate the large fields of the lower power objectives.

SPENCER EXHIBIT
Old Lecture Hall, M. B. L.
July 23 to Aug. 4

-- You are cordially invited to call -:-

See SNS St Raed

low power objectives and which re-
volves like an ordinary triple nosepiece,
The objectives may be removed in-

106 THE COLLECTING NET [ VoL. VI. No. 44

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name of school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate

Spalteholz catalog.
Transparent eee es ee ee eee
Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- . .
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum a pee!
and
Zoological

ween {hu moe

Model of Human

NEW YORK

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray The Recent Advances

rere Each Volume $3.50 Postpaid

| Physiology, 4th Edition. By C. Lovatt Evans,
| University College, Londen.

The research of notable physiologists is sum-
marized and the practical features empha-
sized. 113 Illustrations. 446 Pages.

Biochemistry, 3rd Edition. By John Pryde, M.
Se., Welsh National School of Medicine.
Includes a diverse selection of topics in which
recent progress has been most striking. 42
illustrations. 393 Pages.

Preventive Medicine. By J. F.C. Haslam, M.D.,
Asst. Dir., Bureau of Hygiene and Tropical
Diseases, London. 30 Illustrations. 328 Pages.

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.

It carries forty-eight 1l-inch, thirty-two 1%-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof ccver for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

Psychoneuroses. By Millais Culpin,M.D.(Lond.)
Lecturer, London Hospital Medical College.
A survey of psychoneuroses in industry, war,
childhood, clinical, etc., amplified by many
permanent advances of today.

4 Illustrations. 348 Pages.

Bacteriology and Infection. By J. Henry Dible,
M.R.C.P., Welsh National Medical School.
The author takes a broad view, keeping the
balance between extreme technicality and
what is common knowledge. It includes a
study of infections 22 Illustrations. 363 Pages

P. BLAKISTON’S SONS & CO., Inc.
1012 WALNUT ST. PHILADELPHIA

Jury 18, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 107

AN
EFFICIENT
MICRO-PROJECTOR

--compact and
permanently aligned

Bausch & Lomb 4354-AA Micro-Projector is a time and trouble saver
The illuminating unit and optical parts are permanently aligned—always
ready for use without excessive, time-wasting manipulation. The ef-
ficient condenser system insures sharp, clear images.

Illumination, is furnished ordinarily by our mechanical-feed arc lamp,
which is adjustable by two centering screws. A 108 watt bulb can be
substituted if desired. The microscope is conveniently designed, allow-
ing the use of regular objectives or Micro-Tessars for wide-field pro-
jection. The body tube swings aside for projection with Micro-Tessars.

Write us for literature completely describing the 4354-AA and other
B & L Micro Projectors.

MPANY {gaa
BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO lg

675 5t. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York

GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
@LOMB |

BAUSCH é LOMB.

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

108 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. VI. No. 44

~eiElave you seen —____ (Fas
MILLER’S COLD ey, SEAL

Non-Corrosive Sage Non-Corrosive

Plant Physiolo gy MICROSCOPIC

with reference to the green plant SLIDES »“ COVER GLASSES

= Do Net F
By Epwin C. MILLER ire ees . = oe ioe
Professor of Plant Physiology, Kansas State di ei ea LE SCE TNS
Agricultural College, and Plant Physiologist Se ee
ves arg c en vate - Aye/ MS WOW AN
Kansas Agricultural Experiment Station CLAY-ADAMS ComMPANY
: 117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK

McGRAW-HILL PUBLICATIONS IN THE
AGRICULTURAL and BOTANICAL
SCIENCES

900 pages, 6 x 9, 38 illustrations, $7.09

THE QUALITY SHOP

AG Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shocs and
HIS book gives a complete survey of the field of Souvenirs

plant physiology in a comprehensive and minutely
detailed treatment that makes it suitable both as a
text for advanced college students and as a reference
work for investigators. The work is confined entire-
ly to the physiology of the green plant; the findings
of the leading American, English and continental in-
vestigators are summarized. Review questions and
unusually complete bibliographies follow each chap-
ter.

Ask for things you do not see.
Main Street Woods Hole

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc. ee

‘Send for a copy on approval.

EST. 1887

370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK 29 EAST 2ist STREET NEW YORK

Books in Biology

are on sale at

THE COLLECTING NEY @iigs

We are also prepared to obtain any available book.

Each time a book is sold, all of the agent’s commission will be

turned over to

THE COLLECTING NET Scholarship Fund

Jury 18, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROSCOPIC SLIDES

LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and information furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
Woods Hole, Mass.

N. E. TSIKNAS
FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in

FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660 661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

PHYSICIAN'S
AND LABORATORY
MICROSCOPE

ESA-105
Magnifications: 56x to 900x
Simplified Mechanical Stage, 12 cm. dia.
Illuminating apparatus with Rack and
Pinicn. Condenser 1.2 with Iris. Quad-
ruple Revolving Nosepiece. Fine Adjust-

ment with Graduated Drum.
Achromatic Objectives :
8 n.a. 0.20
40 n.a. 0.65
90 n.a. 1.25 oil im.
Huygens Oculars:
7X and 10X

Price: $132 f.0.b. New York

A good dark field outfit is obtained by
adding: Cardioid condenser $22, extra for
oil im. with iris $4. Compensating ocular
15x: $8.50.

A satchel type of carrying case can

be supplied instead of the standard

cabinet at an additional ccst of $4.00

CARL ZEISS, INc.

435 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
723 South Hill St., Los Angeles, Calif.

TIO THE

COLLECTING

NET [ VoL. VI. No. 44_

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

The Woods Hole Library has recently been
the recipient of seven books presented by Dr. and
Mrs. Alfred Meyer in memory of their brother
Harry Harvey Meyer, on his birthday, June 2oth.
The books are:

The Autobiography of Lincoln Steffens, 2 vols.

Charles W. Elliot, by Henry James, 2 vols.

America’s Way Out, by Norman Thomas.

This New York of Mine, by Charles Towne.

Retrospect, by Arthur Balfour.

The Romance of Leonardo da Vinci, by Mer-
ejkowski.

The Story of San Michele, by Axel Munthe.

The Coast Guard have announced the following
regulation concerning row boats:

Rowing boats whether under oars or sail shall
have ready at hand a lantern showing a white
light which shall be temporarily exhibited in suf-
ficient time to prevent collision.

On Monday, July 13th, the Woods Hole Yacht

Club held its second race of the season. The re-
sults were as follows:
Baby Knock-Abouts
Entries Time
“Porpoise”—Comstock Glaser Asa Ole
“Tyro”—Mrs. Crossley Agi set
“Scuttlebutt—Fred Copeland AS Sa1Qe
“Adios” —Morris Frost Aceon
“Menidia’”’—Preston Copeland AQu Si
“Charlog’—Oegden Woodruff SOmmLon
Dories
“Aunt Addie’—Arthur Meigs 47
“Dorine”—George Clowes 49°
“Hunky’’—Kenneth Cole 5
“Black Cat’—Vera Warbasse a
Catboats
“Lurline’—Phillip Woolworth 44
“Dinny’—Janet Blume 48
“Salty Dog’—Tom Ratcliffe 50’

“Squido”—Henry Kidder 56

“Lady Luck”—Mary Love c

The Dories held a race, postponed from the pre-
vious week, on Tuesday, with the following
results :

“Dorine”—George Clowes 1:10
“Black Cat’”—Vera Warbasse 1:16
“Hunky”—Kenneth Cole I :29
“Aunt Addie’”—Arthur Meigs disqualified

The handicap for the catboats has not yet been
figured out. The results as stated above are how
they crossed the finish line.

Or Thursday, July 16, Mr. and Mrs. W. H.
Woodford of Bridgeport, Connecticut, stopped at
Woods Hole to have their houseboat overhauled
at Hilton’s. They are on a two months trip and
have just come down from cruising along the
Maine coast. Their passengers, a dog and two
cats, were interested spectators of the overhaul-
ing process.

On Friday evening, July 17th, Mr. William W.
Swan gave an illustrated lecture on “Yacht Rac-
ing” in the Woods Hole Gelf Club under the
auspices of the Quissett Yacht Club and the
Woods Hole Yacht Club.

One of the Forbes’ boats from Naushon was
at Hilton’s Shop on Monday, July 13th. The
new motor boat, “The Dolphin,” is to be used
for swordishing. She had a piece of cast i701
in the keel for balance and was having the metal
removed and wood substituted in the hope that
the lighter weight would increase her specd.

Cape Cod is now busy driving mosquitoes from
its territory. Last year, a three year project
was started to rid the Cape of its summer pests
and already a great deal of work has been done.

Salt water mosquitoes are the big problein of
this region so work has been concentrated on the
salt marshes. Seventy-five percent of the salt
marsh breeding areas have now been ditched. To
date 3000 gallons of fuel oil have been sprayed
or both salt and fresh water breeding places. Up
to June 2oth, the total expenditure was $113,476.Co
and fifty-two local men are on the payroll.

Mrs. Henry H. Fay is opening her estate
“Nobska” fer a garden party on Tuesday, July —
2ist, for the benefit of the Church Home Society
for the care of children and young people. From
three to six there will be bridge and Mah Jong,
movies will be shown for the children, afternoon
tea will be served and ice cream cones, lemonade
and lollypops will be on sale. Admission to the
grounds is twenty-five cents for adults and ten
cents for children.

Or Tuesday afternoon, July 21st at 2:30, The
Tatterman Marionettes will pay a visit to the
University Players Theatre at Silver Beach. They
will present a special matinee performance ot
“The Glowing Bird,” a felk fairy tale of old
Russia.

(Continued on Page 112)

Jury 18, 1931 ] THE

COLLECTING

NET

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Wiods Hole Tel. 777

Service that Satisfies

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

SCIENTIFIC DRAWINGS
CHARTS and GRAPHS

NORRIS JONES

Room 211 — M. B. L.

IDEAL RESTAURANT
Bk. Bldg. —

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.
Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 26)

MRS. H. M. BRADFORD
Dresses, Millinery, Hosiery and Gift Shop
Souvenirs and Jewelry

Depot Avenuc Woods Hole

When in Falmouth Stop at

ISSOKSON’S
GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait

A. ISSOKSON

The Whaler on Wheels

co

“Our Wandering Bock Shop”

Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Miss Imogene Weeks

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays
throughout the summer
season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

TEXACO PRODUCES

NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING
Cleaning, Dyeing and R2pairing

Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods H_-le, Mass. Call 752

IIt

Ii2

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 44

THE WOODS HOLE LOG
Continued from Page 110)

The University Players are showing the result
of having worked together for the past few!
weeks. “Mr. Pim Passes By,” this week’s play,
was consequently the most finished production
they have put on this year, well cast, well acted
and well staged. This does not mean necessarily
that it was the most enjoyable performance of
the season, for A. A. Milne has let his fancy run
rampant and caused a terrific lot of pother about
nothing. It was charming, as A. A. Milne always
is, if you like that sort of thing.

Outstanding in the cast was Miss Elizabeth
Fenner who has beer with the Players since their
very first production and is a favorite with her
audiences. As Olivia Marden, she set the tone
of the play. When that passer-by, Mr. Pim, very
excellently acted by Charles E. Arnt, Jr., cast his
thunderbolt of proof that Olivia’s impossible first
husband was still alive, it was Miss Ferner’s
superb restraint in acting that warned the audi-
ence not to take life too seriously. Throughout
the play she managed to put across her meaning
by the slightest lift of the eyebrow or shrug of
the shoulder.

Miss Katherine Hastings, as Dinah, deserved
special commendation also. On Monday it be-
came evident that Miss Margaret Sullavan, who
was to have played the part and who unfortunate-
ly was suffering from a strained back, would be
unable to appear. Miss Hastings stepped in, ably
filling the role even on such short notice.

Next week Miss Sullavan, who has just been
starring or Broadway in “A Modern Virgin” will
play the lead in “Coquette,” the drama by Ann
Preston Bridgers and George Abbott in which
Helen Hayes played the title role in New York.

—M. S.G.

The Spencer Lens Company of Buffa'o will
hold an exhibit in the Old Lecture Hall from July
23rd to August 4th.

The Marine Experimental station of the Re-
search Institute of the Lankenau Hospital, Phila-
delphia, has again opened for the season at North
Truro, under the direction of Dr. Frederick S
Hammett. The station stands on land granted
by the Capt. L. D. Baker estate of Wellfleet
Financial support is provided by a number of
friends of the institution.

A student, who was asked to compose ore
verse of poetry including the words “analyze” and
“anatomy,” promptly produced the following :

My analyze over the ocean,
My analyze over the sea,

Oh, who will go over the ocean
And bring back my anatomy.

On Thursday evening, July 16th, the first Vie-
trola concert of the season was presented in the
M. B. L. Club House. Bilbert and Sullivan’s
comic opera, ‘Pinafore’? was played and about a
hundred members of the laboratory were present
to enjoy the perennial favorite. The records were
lent by Mr. R. C. MecGoun, and whether it was
because of the superior quality of the records or
the fact that the phonograph has been repaired,
at any rate the reproduction was excellent.

The second victrola concert of the season will
be held at the M. B. L. Club House on Thursday,
July 23rd. The program will be:

Mozart .. Kleine Nacht Musik
rams). are _ Symphony No. 4
Mozart .. German Dance

The program for the following week, July goth
is as follows:

Rachie of .. Prelude in E Flat
3ach ........ Brandenburg Concerto No. 2
S(S SIMONE 6 joc concseeoee 2 Symphony No. 7

The Falmouth Publishing Company is publish-
ing a weekly magazine to be distributed free of
charge in hotels, tea rooms, drug stores and other
public places, called “What's Fun in Falmouth.”
This is what the July 4th issue says about Woods
Hole:

This village, four miles south of the shopping
center of the tcwn, besides being the terminal for
the railroad and the steamers to Nantucket, Marthas
Vineyard and New Bedford, is the home of famed
scientific institutions;—the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory; the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries station; and
the new Woods Hole Oceancgraphic institution. A
fascinating aquarium filled with colorful fish of the
neighboring waters is at the U. S. Bureau of Fish-
eries, open to the public. Also at Woods Hole is
Section Base 18 of the U. S. Ccast Guard, with a
fleet of 20 patrol boats for guarding ships at sea;
and the U. S. Lighthouse Service depot and buoy
yard. At Nobska Light, on the point, is a weather
obscrvatory and lighthouse, and here is obtained the
m st magnificent view in Falmouth, particularly at
sunset, overlooking Vineyard sound, Buzzards Bay,
Martha’s Vineyard and the Elizabeth Islands.

On Monday, July 20th, the physiology class is
having a picnic. They leave in the morning on
the Cayad2tta going by way of Robinson’s Hole
to Tarpaulin Cove for dinner,

On Tuesday the Caycdetta is taking the botany
class to Black Rock.

Posts have been erected at either side of the
drawbridge on Main street to support new gates
which are to take the place of the wooden horses
which now prevent traffic when the draw is open.
The gates are due to arrive shortly.

Jury 18, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 113

Church of the Messiah FITZGERALD, INC.

A Man’s Store

(Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector —— MEN’S WEAR —
Holy Commun:on 8:00 a.m.
: - Colon‘: idi Tel. ai
Morning Prayer 11:00 a.m. ooo Burin el: B88 MainStreet

5 Falmouth
Evening Prayer So saa PREKOY (Dp ite

THE TWIN DOOR Visit

RESTAURANT AND BAKERY

G. M. GRANT, Prop. Mal chman’ Ss

Chicken and Lobster Dinners THE
Waffles LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD
Main Strect Woods Hole, Mass.

Falmouth Phone 116

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Presents
“COQUETTE” KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

een saan || EASTMAN'S HARDWARE

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES

Fine Toilet Articles Cape Cod Distributors for
Elizabeth Arden, Coty Draper Maynard Sporting Goods
Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS Falmouth Tel. 407
FALMOUTH

PARK TAILORING AND

CLEANSING SHOP FOLLOW THE CROWD TO
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Pkone 907-M Free Delivery DAN i Fi°s
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members) for

HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,

DELICIOUS SANDWICHES

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

COFFEE

PICNIC LUNCHES

TI4

Mala, (CO

LECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 44

Each net has a conical bag of Dufour

having thirty-erght (very coarse) to one ht
The hag is suspended on a rim of non-corr
inches in diameter. Three braided copper
the net is drawn through the water.

GI C4y

Wr
ing net

Aside from their
use as plankton gath-
erers these nets are
found valuable for
collecting diatoms, mi-
nute crustacea, small
aquatic insects and
many other semi-
microscopic forms.

standard silk bolting cloth. thirty-“ve inches deep,
indred seventy-three (fine) meshes to the inch.
oding phosphor-bronze wire, nine and one-half
wire leaders suspend this from a swivel by which

ite for a catalog describing over forty collect-
s for every purnose and a complete line of

TU ATOX WROD UCTS other collecting equipment.
Se 2
6 GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

Incorporated
761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
CHICAGO

Laboratory Crushers
Grinders and

Mills

ABBE BALL MILLS AND CUTTING
MILLS

Bulletin No. 462 on Request

LABORATORY COLLOID MILL

Bulletins on Request

For information in regards to crush-
ers, other grinders and pulverizers or
other forms of laboratory apparatus,
advise requirements.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents
Third Avenue, 18th to toth Street
New York, N. Y.

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Env‘ronment
Established 1920. Quar‘erly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each, Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign
postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Hered:ty and Variation
Es‘ablished 1916. Bimonthly.
Subscription, $5 a year for complete vclumes (Jan. to

Dec.) Parts of vlumes at the single number rate
Single numbers, $1.25 post free Sack volumes, as avail-
abl $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to Ail Branches of Botanical Sc’ence

Established 1914. Mon‘hly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publica‘ion of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS
Volume I: 33 contributions by various au hors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.
Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
The vegetation of Montauk, ete. By Norman Taylor.

Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man ‘Taylor 151 pp., ‘27 text-figs., vegetation map in

colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

Jury 18, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 115

CAMENKAS IN ONE GOMPACT - = ; “ACCURATE

cs

Weighs only 15 ozs.
Focal Plane Shutter

Uses 35 mm film
Takes 8 pictures per foot

36 pictures at one loading

Interchangeable lenses

No one interested in science can aftord to be

without a LEICA

With a LEICA Camera Model C you really have many cameras in one,—a micro camera, a
copying camera, a stereo camera, a telephoto camera, a camera for speed phot graphy in bad
lighting conditions, a wide angle lens camera for including larger areas, a clinical camera, a
camera for portrait photography or for general use, an aerial camera and a camera making 1x1%
in. negatives which are even superior in quality to many larger size cameras.

With this camera the educator or the student can make his cwn pictures from original lab-
oratory specimens, field trips, library research work or frcm many other sources where pictures
are the vital factors in presenting any subjects.

LEICA negatives produce beautiful detailed enlargements and film slide or glass slide posi-
tives. LEICA contact prints measuring 1 x 1% in. furnish excellent pictures for illustrating
special reports, letters, maps and for all types of indexing work.

With the LEICA Camera you never have an obsolete instrument. The first LEICA made
can be adapted to be just as modern as the very latest camera from our factory. The LEICA
is really a unit camera which can be applied to many photographic demands in every pr fes-
sion. Today with the recent discoveries in fine grain developers and with the new fine grain mo-
tion picture film now available, there is no obstacle in the way of completely accepting the LEICA
as the universal camera.

For the recording or progress picture™.....exploraticn work in all sciences...... a camera
which is plastic enough to make general viev7s or minute close ups.

The complete story of the LEICA Cameras and accessories is told in our new LEICA CATA-
LOG No. 1190 which will be mailed upon request.

ley Mele ee bare:

Dept. CN/ 60 E. 10th St. New York, N. Y.

116 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vo. VI. No. 44

9) Quoting remark of a school super-

« . ;
It saved us the cost of 5 microscopes” 2xotine remark of a scho

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
urawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
geni.us yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bacteri-logy, Boiany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-

ously. Invaluable
microscope. Eliminates the eye

not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cu--
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional features as

standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.

Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.

Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.

Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.

Screw centering adjustment for light Revolving stage.
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,

Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.
Cu

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to
Dw= Ol am pe A may
Ciav-ApAms Company
117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK.N Y.

Vol. VI. No. 5.

THE LIVING NUCLEUS AND EVIDENCE
ACTION ON THE
CYTOPLASM IN TISSUE CULTURES
Dr. Roperr CHAMBERS
Professor of Biology, Washington Square College,
New York Unsversity

3efore entering into a discussion on the action
of the nucleus upon the cytoplasm, I wish to pre-
sent a few observations on the effect of microdis-

OF ITS DIRECT

different
nucleus

secting nuclei in
types of cells. The
of the fresh-water amoeba
appears to have the con-
sistency of a stiff jelly. One
can stretch and tear it within
the body of the amoeba and no
ill effects are produced. The
deformed nucleus is simply
carried about by the normal
streaming movements of the
amoeba and an hour or so
later may resume its original
shape.

The nucleus of the Metazo-
an cells studied behaves quite
differently. Nuclei of eggs, of
connective tissue cells, of gut
and gland epithelia, nerve cells,
etc., are extremely susceptible
to injury. When punctured,
the nucleus of any one of
these cells tends to collapse
and to be converted into a co-

agulum. The membrane wrinkles and the nucleus
(Continued on Pag? 210)

diminishes in size

phibian Egg.”

SATURDAY, JULY 25, 1931

THE IOWA

I. B. L. Calendar
MONDAY, JULY 27, 7:30 P.M.

Seminar. Dr. John P. Turner, ‘‘Fib-

rillar System in Euplotes.”
Dr. Daniel Raffel, “Types of

Variation prcduced by Conjuga-

tion in Paramecium aurelia.”’
Dr. Ruth S. Lynch, “Effects of
Conjugation in a Number of
Clones of Paramecium aurelia.”
Dr. Tracey M. _ Sonneborn,
“Cressinge Diverse Clones of Par
amecium aurelia.”

WEDNESDAY, JULY 29, 7:30 P.M.
| Scientific Meeting. Under the aus-

pices of the Society of Cellular
Biology. Detailed program on
page 127.

FRIDAY, JULY 31, 8 P.M.

Lecture. Dr. H_ Spemann, professor

of zoology, University of Frei-
berg, ‘Experiments on the Am-

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

LAKESIDE LABORATORY
OPERATED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF
THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA
Dr. Geo. W. Martin
Director of the Laboratory, Professor of Agri-
culture, Washington and Jefferson College

The Iowa Lakeside Laboratory was founded in
1909 by Professor Thomas H. Macbride, at that
time head of the Botany Department of the State

University of lowa, later
President of the University,
and now President Emeritus.
For several years previous to
that time Dr. Macbride ard
Professor Shimek had _ con-
ducted summer field worl:
in the Iowa lake country,
and beth felt that it would be
desirable to have a permanent
location. Since the Universi-
ty, as such, is prevented by
law from establishine branches
outside of Iowa City, it was
necessary to secure private
support, and a group of alum-
ni organized, purchased land
end buildings, and_ still hold
the laboratory property, mere-
ly placing the facilities at the
disposal of the graduate col-
lege and summer session of
the university, under whose
auspices it is operated.

The lowa lake region is situated in northwest-
ern lowa near the western edge of the Wisconsin

The Living Nucleus and Its Action cn

(CKO ASI 5 ooS5.6 iio claro Oe OO ene 117
The Iowa Lakeside Laboratorv.......... 117
Genetic Continuity of the Central Bodies,

Dre Alimed Why IMO GE Mei ye a.peccce es cun nr 121
Review of the Seminar Renort of Dr.

Huettner—Dr. Henry J. Fry.......... 122

Photo-electric Cell Records of Animal
I uminescence—Dr. E. Newton Harvey. 124
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr.
Harvey—Dr. William R. Amberson.... 125

The Carbon Dioxide Combining Power of
Mammalian Muscle,

IDI, IUEK ne! Ibanblers ea acon ooonanoOs 125
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr.

Irvine—Dr. Walter S. Root............ 126
Some Observations of Self-sterility in

Stvela—Dr. H. H. Plough............. 126
Reviews of Scientific Bocks:............ 127
|OSliic(ovevieil! TERED son an ecncanonsooonccnoDe 128
Ttemistotelnterestirsy- sie seamen sielaiers 129, 130
Wroods: Plolet Tomy coh crecvenieiceye ereuels coe 138, 140

IIS THE

COLLECTING

NED [ Vor. VI. No. 45

IOWA LAKESIDE LABORATORY
THE LABORATORY BUILDING ON WEST
OKOBOJI LAKE

drift sheet, not far from the Minnesota birder,
and owes its existence to the blocking of the
original drainage systems at the time of the Wis-
consin glaciation and the diversion of the
drainage channels from the Mississippi to the
Missouri River. There are three large lakes,
Spirit Lake and East and West Okoboii
Lakes. Spirit Lake is the largest and extends
into Minnesota ter-itory. West Okoboji Lake,
upon the western shore of which the laboratory is
situated, is next in size, being about six miles
long and three miles wide, with an irregular
shore line, and attains a depth of a hundred and
forty feet, being by far the deepest of the group.
East Okoboji, connected with it by a narrow
opering, is lone and narrow. and for the most
part qu'te shallow. Scores of smaller bodies of
water—lakes, ponds, and kettle holes—occur in
the vicinity and afford a wide rarge of habitats
for aquatic organisms. While many of these
have been drained since the laboratory was found-
ed, the multiplication of automobiles and the
rapid develpment of giid roads have made many
others easily available. Fortunately, drainage has
ceased and it seems unlikely that it will be re-
sumed on any extensive scale for mary years to
come, if at all.

The region about the laboratory was originally
mostly prairie. It is now largely farmed, but ex-
tensive patches of prairie still remain. The lake
shores and the valley of the Little Sioux River
were for the most part forested and nearly all of
this forest remains near the lakes, and much of
it along the river. Numerous seeps and hanging
hogs occur both in prairie and forest. The lab-
oratory campus, of about a hundred acres, in-
cludes a small tract of mesophytic forest, a lare-
er bit of xerophytic bur oak forest and prairie,
hanging bog and marsh areas, surrounding a

shallow bay rich in aquatic phanerogams and the
associated animals and lower plants.

The laboratory building is merely a frame
shelter for workers. It has recently been repaired
so that it is adequate if not beautiful. It is sup-
plied with running water and electricity, and a
small amount of glassware and apparatus. Pend-
ing the erection of a fireproof structure, it has
seemed advisable to ship needed supplies from the
University for the summer only. There is a large
headquarters cottage, with roomy, enclosed porci
and public rooms, and a number of other build-
ings, including mess-hall, dormitories and small
cottages. All are located om a wooded bluff,
thirty to fifty feet above the level of the lake.

The laboratory is normally open for ten weeks,
but in recent years arrangements have frequently
been made for special work before and after the
regular sesion. For purposes of instruction the
session is divided into two terms of five weeks
each, and one ciurse in botany and one in zoology
are offered exch term. These courses are open to
both undergraduates and graduates, the accomp-
lishment expected of the latter being, of ciurse,
greater. Students register for but a single course
at a time, hence there are no schedule complica-
tions The coarst work is very definitely d‘rected
toward meeting the needs of teachers of biology
in the interior of the country, by emphasizing the
availability for study of the familiar plants and
animals of that region, many of which can be se-
cured almost anywhere. There is, of course, no
thought of disparaging the work of marine sta-
tions and all students who are not familiar with
marine conditions are urged to make every effort
to spend some time at Woods Hole or some other
seaside laboratory.

Research material available is of necessity more
limited than at a marine laboratory, but is suf-
ficiently varied to supply a wide range of prob-
lems. As examples of the type of problems stud-
ied at the laboratory in recent years may be cited
taxonomic studies on vascular plants, fish, Clado-
cera, rotifers, phyto-plankton, filamentous algae

THE LABORATORY
LOOKING WESTWARD ACROSS THE LAKE

JuLy 25, 1931 ]

HE COLLEGRING

NET 119

and Myxomycetes; development studies on am-
phibians; studies on the temperature and oxygen
changes in the lake; investigations of mycorhiza;
the ecology of the prairie with reference to water
relations,

The phytoplankton of the Okoboji region has
_ been stated by competent observers to be one of
the richest in the world, except for desmids, and
the animal life of the lakes, while less completely
known, is certainly rich and varied. Frogs and
salamanders are abundant. Fish nests line the
lake frontage of the laboratory.

Situated as it is in the tersion zone between

forest and prairie, the region in the vicinity of
the laboratory offers many advantages for the
study of ecological problems. Much has been ac-
complished, but much more remains to be done.

The resident staff this summer, in addition to the
director, is composed of Professor H. S. Conrad,
of Grinnell College, and Dr. Arthur P. Kelley,
in botany, and Professor Ira T. Wilson, of Heid-
elberg College, in zoology. In addition to these
men and their classes there are several research
students carrying on investigations on the fungi
and algae either independently or under super-
vision,

THE LIVING NUCLEUS..... ITS DIRECT ACTION ON THE CYTOPLASM
IN TISSUE CULTURES

(Centinued from Page 117)

possibly because of an escape of fluid. It
has been claimed that the nucleus of the Am-
phibian red blood cell is an elastic body which, on
stretching, will tend partially to return to the
form it possessed before stretching. I am
convinced that this property of elasticity appears
only after the nucleus is dead and has become
coagulated. When the nucleus within an intact
red cell in blood serum is punctured, the nucleus
swells appreciably and the haemoglobin-colored
cytoplasm fades. Only then is the nucleus con-
verted into a semi-elastic coagulum.

The nucleus of, a plant cell such as that of
onion bulb-scales is also highly reactive to punc-
ture. Sometimes it disappears completely; at
other times it collapses and then coagulates. When
plasmolyzed plant cells are examined (e. g. orion
cells plasmolyzed with potassium salts), the nu-
cleus is often seen to be a swollen hyaline sphere.
A puncture of such a nucleus causes it to disap-
pear completely, the cytoplasm at the same time
undergoing degeneration.

I shall rot go into any detail here in discussing
the considerable evidence thus far obtained in de-
termining the alkalinity of the nucleus with re-
spect to the cytoplasm surrounding it. Probably
the first person who showed this is Paul Reiss of
Strassburg. Reiss placed immature Echinoderm
eggs between a cover slip and slide in sea-water
colored with a pH indicator. On crushing the
eggs, their nuclei took on the alkoline color of the
indicator, while the cytcplasm assumed the acid
color. I have repeated this experiment on stir-
fish eggs with the same result. The first thing
that one notices. after crushing, is the disappear-
ance of the nucleolus and a change in volume of
the nucleus. The nucleus shrirks and persists fo~
some time as a hyaline nuclear remaant within
the cytolizing debris of the cytoplasm. With
phenol red in the sea-water the debris for a short
time is bright yellow (acid), and the nuclear rem-
nant is rose red (alkaline).

‘Evidence from carefully conducted m‘cro-injec-

tion experiments have shown that the nucleus ex-
hibits a distinctly alkaline reaction (a pH of
about 7.6) while still within a healthy appearing,
intact cell. It is interesting to note that, upon cy-
tolysis, the cytoplasm becomes more acid than be-
fore (acid of injury). The nuclear remnant, on
the other hand, maintains the same alkaline re-
action possessed by the nucleus within the intact
cell. It is for this reason that Reiss was able to
note an appreciable difference in the reaction
when the cells were crushed.

I wish to present here new evidence for the
greater alkaline reaction of the nucleus in con-
trast to that of the cytoplasm. When reutral red
is injected into the nucleus, the dye quickly passes
out into the cytoplasm. On the other hand, when
methyl red is introduced into the cytoplasm, the
dye passes into the nucleus. Methyl red is the
only indicator I have found which behaves in this
way in the living cell.

The possible explanation is of interest in re-
lation to the question of vital staining. Neutral
red, in an aqueous medium on the alkaline side of
pH 7.0, tends to be present in the form of its
slightly soluble, undissociated free base. On the
acid side of pH 7.0 it is far more soluble as a
dissociated salt. The tendency is for the dye to
pass from a medium in which it is less soluble to
that in which it is more soluble. Probably this is
what makes it an almost ideal vital stain, since
physiological fluids which bathe cells are on the
alkaline side of pH 7.0, while the internal proto-
plasm of the cells is on the acid side. Eges in
sea-water are readily stained with neutral red, al-
most too readily, for its tendency is progressively
to accumulate in the cytoplasm until the eggs are
overstained. When conditions are reversed, i. ¢.,
by acidifying the sea-water so that the latter is
made distinctly more acid than the cytoplasm of
the eggs, no staining occurs and colored eggs
auickly become destained. When we study the
distribution of neutral red between the nucleus and
the cytoplasm of the egg we find that the dis-

120

THE COLLECTING

NET { Vor. VI. No. 45

tribution is such as can most easily be explained
by the differences in their acid reactions, viz.,
neutral red in the cytoplasm never passes into the
living nucleus and, conversely, when the dye is
injected into the nucleus the dye rapidly diffuses
out into the cytoplasm.

Methyl red is amphoteric and its basic proper-
ties are manifested only in a distinctly acid medi-
um. At about pH 5 it tends to form a free base.
In sea-water at the normal pH of 8.2 it exists
almost entirely as the sodium salt of its acidic
radical and as such is not a vital stain. In sea-
water, acidified to a pH of 6 the methyl red readi-
ly diffuses into the cytoplasm and stains it. The
eggs are viable at a still lower pH. The differ-
ence between this dye and neutral red is that the
methyl red does not merely stain the cytoplasm
but also diffuses into the nucleus. In methyl red
and neutral red we have two dyes, one with a ten-
dency to diffuse from a more alkaline medium
and the other with a tendency in the reverse direc-
tion. Their behavior in regard to the nucleus and
cytoplasm of the starfish egg is of the same order.

Puncturing the nucleus of the Metazoan cell
preduces an extraordinary effect. Owing to the
plasticity and extensibility of the nuclear mem-
brane the nucleus can be pinched almost in two
with no dire results; but if the needle scratches
the membrane so as to tear it, the nucleus breaks
dowr and cytolysis occurs.

During this last Spring I have beer working
with Dr. Fell in Cambridge, England, on tissue-
cultures under darkground illumination. The
condenser we used was a recently improved
special form with a wide angular aperture. It is
constructed to permit the insertion of micro-
reedles beneath the hollow cone of light for oper-
ating upon cells in a hanging drop. The illumina-
tion is such that we were able to use oil immer-
sion objectives, and to observe, in beautiful de-
tail, the delicate cytoplasmic structures character-
istic of tissue culture cells. On puncturing the
nuclei of the cells we obtained a very beautiful
darkfield picture of the changes which ‘took place.
The slightest puncture of the nucleus preduces
almost instantly a stoppage of all movement with-
in the cell. This came out strikingly in the iris
pigment cells in which the small pigmest-rodlets
scurry about in groups and singly, very much like
guinea- pigs in a pen. The next thing one ob-
serves is the appearance, immediately around the
collapsed and shrunken nuclear remnant, of very
fine granules observable only with the darkfield.
The granules progressively increase and the re-
sulting opacity of the cytoplasm around the pru-
cleus spreads until it invades the entire ce'l. An-
other change is in the mitochondria. This shows
up heoutifully i in the fibroblasts, where long, sinu-
ous mitochondria can he seen moving about in the
evtoplasm. You can dig about in the cytopfasm
w'th the needle and nothing happens; the mito-
chondria keep on moving and they maintain their

long, sinuous shapes. But if the nucleus is punc-
tured one notices, as the fine degeneration gran-
ules appear in the cytoplasm, that the mitochon-
dria begin to be transformed into pale outlined
spherules quite different from the highly refrac-
tive fat droplets which normally occur in relative-
ly small numbers in these cells. The extended
pseudopodia slowly lose their peripheral attach-
ments and are withdrawn as the cell becomes con-
verted into a shriveled, coagulated mass with
regions here and there in which active Brownian
movement can be seen. These progressive
changes following the nuclear puncture occur gen-
erally within a period of five to eight minutes,

An extraordinary phenomenon occurs when one
of the nuclei of a binucleate cell is punctured,
Binucleate cells are frequently found in cultures
of a variety of cells. They appear to be quite
normal in all other respects. Those experimented
upon were phagocytes, fibroblasts, gut and pig-
mented epithelial cells. With a very fine-tipped
micro-needle one nucleus of a binucleate cell was
slightly punctured. There occurred the same se-
quence of events as previously described, but in
this case restricted to the immediate region of the
injured nucleus, viz., an immediate cessation of
movement, the gradual appearance of degenera-
tion granules, the conversion of mitochondria into
spherules and a retraction of the pseudopodia in
the vicinity of the injured and shriveling nucleus.
However, after a few minutes the degeneration
granules began to fade from view, the mitochon-
drial spherules disappeared, normal mitochondria
invaded this region, pseudopodia extended again,
and the cell then appeared as a normal mono-
nucleated cell, containing the shriveled remnant
of the one nucleus which had been punctured.
This is a striking demonstration to show that the
presence of one healthy nucleus can overcome the
degenerative action produced by the injury of the
other nucleus. Recover y did not always occur. In
several cases the degenerative effect ‘of injuring
one nucleus involved the other nucleus, which, in
its turn, also degenerated, resulting in the death
of the cell.

The essentialness of the nucleus to the contin-
ued life of a cell is, of course, undisputed. More
directly it is well recognized that the elimination
of a nucleus causes the cell from which it has
been removed to lose the ability of reproducing
itself. The evidence presented in this paper still
more directly demonstrates the importance of the
nucleus by showing that the presence of a healthy
nucleus can keep a cell from destruction even
after a certain degree of cytolysis has once set in.

We know nothing of the nature of the material
which must emanate from the living nucleus to
maintain or to restore normal conditions in the
surriunding cytoplasm nor do we have an inkling
of what escapes from a punctured nucleus to in-
duce cytolysis. All that we know is the fact of
the occurrence. Concerning the chemistry of

aw te ow ent ee ~

See ne dae ap ee ee ge tet»

JuLy 25, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET I2I

the living nucleus and cytoplasm the pronounced
alkalinity of the nucleus in contrast to that of the
cytoplasm is at present of no assistance in help-
ing us to arrive at any conclusion.

DiscussIon

Question: What conception do you have of the
motility of the mitochondria? Do you get the im-
pression that they are self-motile, or that they
move by virtue of cytoplasmic currents?

Dr. Chambers: The sinuous movement of the
long slender mitochondria in fibroblasts is at times
much more active than at others. As far as I
have been able to notice, the variation in their ac-
tivity seems to correspond closely with the stream-
ing movements of the cytoplasm of the cell. My
impression is that the mitochondria are carried
about passively.

Question: Have you formed any conceptions
as to the time factor in death? Do you consider
it instantaneous or is time involved? You have
used the term intra vitam: might we use the term’
intra mortem?

Dr. Chambers: There are definite successive
degenerative changes, nore of which are necessar-
ily mortal, because in the case of a binucleated
cell you get all these visible changes, but the pres-
ence of the other nucleus may result in apparent
complete recovery.

Question: What happens if you puncture the
second nucleus?

Dr. Chambers: On puncturing the second nu-
cleus the same degenerative chanves occur, w't
death of the cell. I am sperking of the Metazorn
nucleus ; the Protozoan nucleus behaves quite dif-

- ferently.

Question: You said that if you cut off a piece
of the fibroblast it continued normal for some
time. ;

Dr. Chambers: Yes. That suggests that it is
not the mere presence of the nucleus, but of some-
thing emanating from the injured nucleus which
stops movemert and results in degeneration of the
cell.

’ Question: Does Brownian movement occur in
the degeneration process?

Dr. Chambers: These degeneration particles
show very active Brownian movement in some
cases and not in others. When the cell is very

much flattened the membrane apparently stiffens
with death and the degeneration granules adhere
to the inner surface so that no Brownian move-
ment is appreciable.

Question: Have you been able to inject the
nuclear contents of one cell into another ?

Dr. Chambers: The difficulty lies in working
fast enough. I have done so with the fluid con-
tents of the germinal vesicle in the starfish egg.
When removed and immediately injected into an-
other egg I have obtained degenerative changes
in the second egg but such material cannot be kept
in a pipette more than a few seconds, after which
the injected material will cause no cytotytic
change.

Question: Do you get some degenerative stages
from ordinary penetration of a needle into a cell?

Dr. Chambers: Ordinarily, when a sufficiently
fine-tipped needle or pipette is used, no observable
cytolytic change occurs. With blunt tipped needles
it is very difficult to puncture many cells because
of the extreme plasticity of the membrane of the
cell and of its contents. With such instrumerts
penetration is accomplished only with distinct dis-
ruption as the needle tears its way into the cell.
Possibly the chief difficulty of many who attempt
micro-manipulation of living cells, is due to their
not appreciating the necessity of using the proper
kind of micro-needles. That the mere penetration
of a needle into a living cell produces some in-
jurious reaction there is probably little doubt. In
the starfish ege we have been able to demonstrate
that an evanescent, injurious action does occur
even when the operation is done so as to produce
no appreciable morphological change. This has
been shown by inserting a needle into an eg¢
which previously had been colored blue by the
injection of brom cresol purple. At the site of
penetration a distinct minute trace of yellow oc-
curs, indicating an acid of injury. Within a sec-
ond, however, the color reverts to blue, indicating
ja neutralization of the acid. This reaction of
acidity is more pronounced the more rapidly the
needle is thrust into the egg.

In the case of tissue culture cells, the cytoplasm
could be repeatedly punctured without producing
any noticeable effect. It is only when the nucleus
is punctured that cytolysis occurs,

GENETIC CONTINUITY OF THE CENTRAL BODIES
Dr. AtrreD F. HuETTNER
Professor of Biology, Washington, College, New York University

The egg of Drosophila melanogaster is ap-
proximately one tenth of a millimeter in thick-
ness and slightly less than half a millimeter long.
It is centrolecithal, normally polyspermic and
with the first polar body spindle in metaphase at
the time of fertilization. Within ten minutes
after the spermatozoa have entered the egg the
second polar body is formed and the two pro-

nuclei are ready to fuse. All early cleavages are
simply divisions of nuclei within this large egg,
and only at a much later stage are cell walls
formed and still later the tissues differentiated.
The first cleavage results in two nuclei which
are imbedded in clear and separate protoplasmic
patches. These nucleated, separated protoplasmic
islands are characteristic of the cleaving insect

122 THE COLLECTING NET { Vor. VI. No. 45
egg. As far as the thirteenth cleavage all nu- ous. In Drosophila the evidence indicates strong-

clear divisions with the exception of the primor-
dial germ cells, are synchronous so that the same
mitotic stage cam be studied on hundreds and
sometimes on thousands of nuclei in the same egg.

The Drosophila egg has to be punctured while
it is immersed in the fixing fluid to insure rapid:
and proper fixation. However, when the punc-
ture is very minute so that the fixing agent will:
enter slowly, the mitotic figures will be seen to
vary from the point of puncture to the opposite
parts of the egg. For instance, if one should
puncture an egg in which the nuclei are all in
metaphase, those nearest the puncture will be fixed
in metaphase, but the further the figures are away,
the later they are reached ard arrested in their
activity by the fixing agent, and the mitotic fig-
ures will show a gradation from metaphase into
anaphase. One may therefore observe the cen-
trioles actually elongate and divide and take up
position at opposite sides of the interkinetic nu-
cleus. One may also observe that the centrioles
are dynamic, moving about and changing position
in the protoplasmic islands as the cytomechanical
processes are im progress.

I do not wish it to be understood that the cen-
tral bodies as seen in the photographs, which were
projected on the screen, conform precisely to the
condition existing in the living egg. I would
hold only that they are definite entities of some
kind that conform to the principle of genetic con-
tinuity. It is possible, even probable. that in the
coagulated cell they may have undergone ma-
terial changes. | Whatever their morphologic
nature in the living cell, there seems to be no
doubt that they are definitely organized parts of
the animal cell which, at least in the more favor-
able cases in the animal and also in some of the
lower plants, can be demonstrated to be continu-

ly that this cortinuity is perfect, since it seems
that the spermatozoan carries the first centriole
into the egg, and from this first one are derived
every succeeding centriole, including those of the
germ cells.

This leads to another aspect of this question
since Dr. Fry has denied the existence of the
centrioles in somatic mitoses in members of
several phyla with a strong implication that they
do not exist in any somatic mitosis. However, he
does admit their existence in the maturation diy-
isions of the oocyte and spermatocyte because in
the latter they act as blepharoblasts. The photo-
graphs shown prove that in Drosophila the cen-
trioles of the somatic mitoses are the same as
those of the germ cells. Nor is it possible there
to uphold that these definite bodies with their reg-
ular appearance, location and precise movement
are random granules or staining artifacts or focal
points of astral rays wher no astral rays are pres-
ent in interkinesis. I wish to emphasize that the
photographs, which were submitted, are by no
means exceptional or specially selected for their
beauty. When photographing at such high pow-
ers one is definitely limited to one narrow focal
plane and the best evidence cannot be photo-
graphed because parts of the picture may be
slightly out of focus.

Since all the evidence gathered in Drosophila
is in full accord with that worked out by Van
Beneden, Boveri, Brauer, Flemming, Heidenain,
Wilson, Griffin, McFarland, Mead, Coe and many
others who worked on other phyla and in diversi-
fied classes of such phyla, it appears that Droso-
phila is by no means exceptional and represents
merely the most complete and most evident his-
tory of the central bodies thus far observed.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. HUETTNER
Dr. Henry S. Fry
Profoessor of Biology, Washington Squ are College, New York University

Dr. Huettner’s description of central body be-
havior in cleaving Drosophila eggs is a most im-
portant contribution to the central bedy problem.
In this species we are apparently dealing with a
typical centriole which persists as am individual-
ized structure from one cell division to the next.
In this persistence, which is independent of the
astral condition, lies the significance of the Droso-
phila material, and herein it differs from cleaving
eggs of most species, where central bodies do not
persist during the interkinetic period when asters
are absent. The question therefore arises, is
central body behavior in Drosophila different
from that of many other forms, or will future
study bring the phenomena under one category ?

Obviously we are not dealing here with random
granules; this point needs no further discussion.
It also seems equally apparent that the central

bodies are not just the coagulated focal area of
astral rays, since they can be clearly demonstrat-
ed in fixed material when rays are absent, but
this conclusion needs further examination. In
this connection the results I am now obtaining in
cleaving eggs of other forms (Pennaria, Cum-
ingia, Chaetopterus, Asterias, Cerebratulus, and
dogfish) may be significant for Drosophila. In
them an orderly central body is present only
when distinctly organized rays reach the astral
center: in some species the rays must be coarse;
in others, a few delicate rays are sufficient; in
some cases a spindle without asters may have
such bodies, provided the fibers are sharply
focused. This body does not exist before the
aster arises; it disappears simultaneously with
the breakdown of the inner ends of rays, regard-
less of their clarity in the outer parts—hence such

Juty 25, 1931 ]

bodies are not presert in these species from late
anaphase onwards. It is probable, therefore, that
these bodies are actually nothing but the coagula-
tion product of the area where the rays come to
a focus, an area which differs chemically and
physically from the surrounding region where
there is more or less inter-ray material. These
bodies may be large and diffuse as in Echinoderms,
or minute and period-like as in Cerebratulus and
Chaetopterus.

May the central bodies of Drosophila also be
only the coagulation product of the focal area of
rays? Dr. Huettner presented two arguments
that apparently disprove this possibility: first,
central bodies car be demonstrated during mitosis
whether the rays of the living aster are fixed or
not; second, they persist during the interkinetic
period when asters are absent. These facts, how-
ever, cannot be accepted as conclusive until cer-
tain points have been cleared up which make the
study of central bodies in Drosophila peculiarly
difficult.

Fixation of Drosophila eggs is unusually pre-
carious and undependable. It is well known
among cytologists that in the eggs of most spec-
ies a given type of fixation at a giver mitotic
phase in a certain stage of development usually
yields results that are repeatable; for example,
variations in the structure of asters, under such
conditions, among different eggs of the same fe-
male or of different females, are negligible.
Furthermore, the use of a proper reagent reveals
dependably on the fixed slide the gross condition
of the living aster, i. e., large or small, distinct or
faint. Drosophila eggs, however, present a very
different situation. As Dr. Huettner stated, they
are so impervious to reagerts that each one must
be pricked individually to permit entrance of the
fluid. The results in different eggs at the same,
stage are quite variable, due probably to differ-
ences in the size of the puncture with consequent
differences in the amount of fluid entering the egg
and the speed diffusion. Not only are such
differences apparent between different eggs fixed
‘at the same stage, but in some they exist at differ-
ent distances from the point of pricking, as pointed
out by Professor Wilson in his recent lecture. For
example, the lantern slides of anaphase figures
showed clear rays in some cases, whereas others,
in identically the same stage, as ind‘cated by the
position of the chromosomes, showed ro rays at
all. All astral stages exhibit variability of ray
fixation. A given mitotic stage, which undoubt-
edly has rays in the living condition, may or may
not show them after coagulation. It is at least
possible that ray material may be coagulated more
readily at the aster’s focal region where it is more
abundant than elsewhere where there is inter-ray
material. Were such the case, it is possible that
under one condition of fixation both the focal
area (central body) and the peripheral portion
are fixed, the latter showing clear rays; whereas

THE COLLECTING NET

123

under a slightly different condition of fixation, al-
though the center is coagulated as previously, the
rest is left non-radial, even though both figures
were radial in the living condition.

It would have added important information to
the discussion if Dr. Huettner had given some in-
formation concerning the fixatives used—whether
more than one reagent was employed, and if so
whether or not there are variations in the coagu-
lation products. Until fixation of Drosophila
eggs can be made so dependable that the mitotic
figures at a given stage fix in a similar manner
and adequately preserve the gross living con-
dition, conclusions concerning the presence or
absence of central bodies in relation to the pres-
ence or absence of rays are necessarily uncertain.

The second difficulty lies in the unusual short-
ness of the interkinetic period when asters are
absent. In most species twenty to thirty minutes
elapse from one metaphase to another, and the
interkinetic period is about eight to ten minutes.
In Dresophila from metaphase to metaphase re-
quires only about eight minutes and the inter-
kinetic period covers at most two minutes. Such
a brief period might be overlooked if certain’
classes of cells are regarded as well fixed and
others, put up at the same stage under similar
conditions, are dismissed as poorly fixed.

I recently studied forty Drosophila eggs (fixed
by a formol-alcohol-acetic mixture) having re-
formed nuclei, and showing no asters. Less than
half of the eggs showed central bodies ; whether
or not these eggs actually had asters in life which
were not preserved by the fixation is unknown.
The important point is that more tham half had
no central bodies. Two of the latter, photo-
graphed with ultra-violet light by Dr. F. F. Lucas
of the Bell Telephone Laboratories, showed no
central bodies. The evidence from these very pre-
liminary studies is of course not conclusive, but
it raises the possibility that in the very brief inter-
kinetic period central bodies may actually be ab-
sent. Assuming that the presence of central bod-
ies is related somehow to the presence of rays, it
would be easy to pass from the latest telophase
stage having rays in the living condition to the
earliest prophase stage having rays, unconsciously
skipping the brief interkinetic period. The whole
situation is further aggravated by the vagaries of
fixation, since the rays may or may not be fixed.

All Drosophila eggs fixed with a giver reagent
at a given interkinetic period and treated in the
same manner, as far as technique permits, should
be reported. If the great majority show central
bodies at all stages, including the interkinetic per-
iod, that is one-result; if, however, as I found in
the sample of forty eggs mentioned above, a large
percentage does not show central bodies, at least
the percentage of each class should be reported.
If certain groups are dismissed as non-significant,
the reason for such action should be made clear,
in view of the brevity of the interkinetic period

124 THE

COLLECTING

NET [ Vot. VI. No. 45

and the uncertainties of fixation. Possibly Dr.
Huettner has considered all this, but no informa-
tion was given on this point.

Unfortunately, space forbids discussion of the
division of the central body during metaphase. In
some of the forms I am now studying this occurs
also, and is associated with the widening of the
spindle-end which renders the aster bifocal.
Whether the body is a dynamic center playing
some role in effecting these changes, or whether
the centriole’s change from a single to a
double condition is a passive result of the unifocal
astral area becoming bifocal due to the widening

of the spindle-end, remains to be proved.

Should further study show the central bodies
of Drosophila actually to be absent during the
interkinetic period, this would be in harmony with
the condition during maturation of Drosophila
eggs, where there are no asters and no central
bodies. It would also harmonize with the results

in the other forms previously noted, where order-
ly bodies are absent during interkinesis when as-
ters are absert. If, on the other hand, further
study confirms the conclusion that we are dealing
with typical centrioles, then it must be ascertain-
ed whether or not the behavior of Drosophila cen-
trioles is in a different category from that of the
other forms mentioned. In this connection it
may be noted that the centriole-blepharoplasts of
sperm-forming cells show diverse behavior: in
some species arising in late spermatogonia ; in
others, in the primary spermatocytes; in yet oth-
ers, in the spermatids. If such variability of this
structure is manifest during spermatogenesis in
different species, may not central bodies show di-
verse behavior during cleavage?

Dr. Huettner’s study is a stimulating contribu-
tion to the subject, which will call forth further
research and contribute to the evertual solution of
this important cytological problem.

PHOTO-ELECTRIC CELL RECORDS OF ANIMAL LUMINESCENCE
Dr. E. Newton Harvey

Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

Determination of the absolute intensity of weak
luminescence is a difficult undertaking, since the
quality of the light is far different from that of
a comparison source. Relative intensities of
luminescences may be determined by various types
of photometers, provided the light lasts long
enough to make an eye comparison. For rapid
flashes of luminescence such as those of many
luminous organisms some sort of recording mech-
anism becomes absolutely necessary. The photo-
cell with amplification and a string galvanometer
is a convenient means of recording such flashes
of light.

The pioneer work in analysing luminescences
was carried out by Dr. W. R. “Ambersor, who
studied the decay of luminescence when solutions
of luciferin and luciferase, the light-giving sub-
stance of animals, are mixed in a test tube. His
method of recording was to revolve photographic
film on a kymograph drum past a narrow slit in
the blackened test tube in which the solutions were
mixed. After development, light intensity could
be measured in terms of the blackening of the
film. These decay curves were logarithmic, the
slope (velocity constant) proportional to luciferase
concentration, varying with luciferin concentra-
tion, increasing 2 to 3 times for a 10° rise in
temperature and independent of stirring the so-
lutions. The time for decay was absent about 8
seconds.

The photo-electric recording method allows
very rapid decays to be measured in which the
time for half decay is of the order of 1% to 1
second, Even such short flashes of luminescence
behave in the same manner as the longer ones

studied by Amberson, giving logarithmic decay
curves. A long series of records of velocity con-
stants shows that with constant luciferase con-
centration these are inversely proportional to the
square root of the concentration of luciferin plus
oxyluciferin, its oxidation product. This can be
explained by assuming the velocity constant as
measured by luminescence to depend on the luci-
ferin plus oxyluciferin adsorbed on luciferase,
the luciferin and the oxyluciferin having the same
adsorption isotherm.

A long series of studies of the flash of the
fire-fly obtained by Mr. P. A. Snell in different
oxygen concentrations show that the normal reflex
flash in the male is perfectly symmetrical and
looks like a oe distribution curve. The
duration 1 is about 14 second at room temperature.

3rown and King find the female to give an un-
symmetrical flash with a secondary maximum.

The West Indian elaterid beetle, Pyrophorus,
gives a long lasting luminescence on stimulation.
This rises to a maximum in 0.8 to 1 second and
remains there with rhythmic 5% changes in light
intensity, having a period of 0.2 to 0.3 second,
which gradually becomes longer and _ finally
merges into a rhythmic pulsation of light of about
t second period, detectable by the eye. These are
ascribed to rhythmic volleys of impulses sent out
from the nerve ganglions controlling the light
organ.

Rapidly changing intensities of luminescence in
a suspension of luminous bacteria can be record-
ed: for example, the flash of “excess lumines-
cence’ which appears when these bacteria are de-
prived of oxygen. The intensity of this flash is

Jury 25, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 125

about twice that of the normal light. It falls off
rapidly in intensity and lasts some 12 seconds.
These records have not been published but were
illustrated by lantern slides. The method will
prove as valuable in the analysis of luminescence
as the optical lever in muscle physiology.

Literature
Amberson, W. R., Jour. Gen. Physiol. 4, 517, 1922.
Stevens, K. P., Jour. Gen. Physiol. 10, 859, 1927.
Harvey, E. N. and Snell, P. H., Jour. Gen. Physiol.
14, 529, 1931.
Snell, P. A., Science, 73, 372, 1931.
See Heat E. S. and King, C. V., Physiol. Jool. 4,

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. HARVEY
Dr. Witt1aAm R. AMBERSON
Professor of Physiology, University of Tennessee

The application of the photo-electric cell to the
study of animal luminescence registers another
success for the use of modern physical apparatus
in biological research. The results described by
Dr. Harvey present us-with a very accurate p‘c-
ture of the time relations of these rapidly chang-
ing luminescences. Although it is true that I was
able, some years ago, to discern the main re-

lationships now confirmed in the present study,
as Dr. Harvey has kindly indicated, it is also true
that my old method was exceedingly laborious,
and relatively inaccurate, in comparison with the
quick and easy study now made possible. The
new method represents an important technical ad-
vance which may now be extended to other prob-
lems in this field.

THE CARBON DIOXIDE COMBINING POWER OF MAMMALIAN MUSCLE
Dr. LAURENCE IRVING
Associate Professor of Physiology, University of Toronto

Although muscle contains only about half as
much CQO2 as blood in each gram, the total re-
serves of muscle CO2 in the body are about five
times greater. This quantity of reserve CO2 is
subject to alteration by changes in the CO2 ten-
sion of circulating blood. The relation between
CO2 content and tension may also be used to re-
present the condition of the acid-base equilibrium
and the buffering power. But it is much more
difficult to deal with an active and sensitive soli
tissue like muscle than with the fluid and rela-
tively stable blood.

The two variable factors to be determined are
(1) COz2 content and (2) CO2 tension. The
first may be accurately determined by a method
developed from Van Slyke’s principles of blood
analysis. There is no direct method for determin-
ing CQO2 tension in a living solid tissue. But it
is evident that the CO2 tension of a tissue must
always be greater than that of the venous blood
in order to maintain the escape of CO2 as it is
produced The circulation of mammalian muscle
is so elaborate and the diffusion of CO2 is so
easy that Krogh has figured that the difference in
tension between muscle and its venous blood
cannot be perceptible. The sampling of venous
blood from a muscle and subsequent analysis of
it in the quantity available have required the de-
velopment of special operative and analytical
technique.

The gastrocnemii of spinal dogs were dissected
so that the only blood passing out through the pop-
liteal veins came from the gastrocnemii alone.
Blood samples were then drawn from one vein
for the determination of CO2 tension, and the
muscle was removed for analysis. These two
results showed the CO2 content of the muscle at
about a normal CO2 tension. The dogs were

then either overventilated to reduce the CO2 ten-
sion or ventilated with a CO2 rich mixture to
raise the CO2 tension. After this treatment had
become effective, blood samples were drawn from
the second muscle and the muscle itself was an-
alyzed.

When the results are plotted as CO2 content
against tension, there is a definite trend that re-
sembles the curve for blood, but at a lower level
of CO2 content. The most suitable curve will be
one which fits the points ranging from P CO2(20
to 200 mm. Hg), is reproducible, and shows the
derivatives in reasonable form. One expression
for such a curve is CO2 in cc. per 100 grams
is equal to 3.4 VV P COz2.

The curve summarizing the data can be modi-
fied to show the amount of combined CO2. This
requires the assumption of a value for the ab-
sorption coefficient of CO2 in muscle. The value
selected is k88° is equal to 0.41, representing the
dissolved CO2 as if it were that which would be
dissolved in the water of the muscle. The curve
is most useful when applied to the estimation of
hydrogen ion concentration, and in this form the
pH calculated at P CO2 is equal to 50 mm. is near
7.0. and at 200 mm. near 6.6,

The slope of the combining power curve may
also be used to estimate the buffering power of
muscle. The figures show that the carbonates of
muscle are only about 14 as effective as the other
buffers. Further, the buffering due to CO2 es-
cape is about as large as that of the other buffers
beside COz2. It also appears that the muscle
buffers are nearly as effective as those of blood,
in spite of the lower CO2 capacity.

The analytical results are quite satisfactory in
agreement, but the constants used in determining
the acid-base equilibrium are only reasonable as-

126

THE COLLECTING

NET { Vor. VI. No. 45

sumptions. But allowing for their subsequent
modification to give more correct absolute values,
it is clear that the carbonate system in muscle

can be compared in general character with any
carborate system, and can be used for the deriva-
tion of the condition of the acid-base equilibrium.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. IRVING
Dr. WALTER S. Root
Assistant Professor of Physiology, School of Medicine, Syracuse University

The report of Dr. Irving is an interesting con-
tribution to our knowledge of the acid-base equi-
librium in living tissue. Unlike similar studies
upon other tissues, gaseous equilibrium was at-
tained in vivo.

The use of the carbon dioxide tension of the
venous blood as the carbon dioxide of muscle
probably gives values lower than these actually
present. The stud’es of J. A. Campbell upou
tissue gas tensions seem to indicate that carbon
dioxide diffuses from the tissues under a percept-
ible head of pressure.

The shape of the carbon dioxide dissociation
curve of mammalian muscle and the pH values
calculated from this are similar to the results ob-
taincd by Fenn, Stella, and Brody upon frog tis-

sues. All investigators agree that the carbon di-
oxide capacity of muscle is less than that of the
blood. Apparently the carbonates of frog muscle
are more effective compared with the other buf-
fers present than is the case in mammalian
muscle.

Fiske and Subbarow ,have demonstrated the
presence of a substance in mammalian muscle
which the Egglestons have called “phosphagen.”’
Recently Meyerhof and Lipmann, working with
frog muscle, have shown that in the presence of
carbon dioxide “phosphagen” splits yielding base.
It is probable that the absence of a complete plat-
eiu in the carbon d‘oxide dissociation curve is
due to this reaction..

SOME OBSERVATIONS ON SELF-STERILITY IN STYELA
Dr. H. H. PLloucu
Professor of Biology, Amherst College

Genetic self-sterility is the inability of sperm
to fertilize eggs of the same individual even
though both sorts of gametes are capable of fer-
tilization as shown by crosses. Although common
among plants, such a condition has been demon-
strated with certainty in animals only in the Tuni-
cate, Ciona. This was first shown by Castle, and
the situation has been investigated by Morgan
over a long period of years. Conklin long ago
suggested that the common sea-squirt, Styela par-
tita, showed self-sterility, and I have demonstrated
this fact for a number of years to the Embry-
ology students here at Woods Hole. Last sum-
mer I attempted to analyse the situation in this
species in detail and the results disclose an inter-
esting situation, especially by comparison with
Ciona. in the latter, self-sterility is complete and
has been supposed by Morgan to be genetically
determined. In addition, the physiological nature
of the block to self-fertility has been considered
My data bear on both these problems in Styela.

With Styela it is impossible to excise the
gonads or ducts in such a way as to get eggs free
of possible contamination by sperm, I therefore
set up the experiments in such a way as to make
use of eggs which had been exposed to an eve1
suspension of their own sperm before being
crossed. Single animals were allowed to shed
eggs and sperm normally in separate fingerbowls
of sea-water. From each, a thick sperm suspen-
sion was withdrawn with a fine pipette, and the
eggs and remaining sperm stirred. Equal sam-

ples of from 100 to 200 eggs were ther picked
up and placed in to ce. of fresh sea-water, in as
many Syracuse dishes as there were crosses to be
made. The sperm suspensions were then diluted
and equal amounts used in making every possible
cross fertilization. The success of the self or
cross fertilizations was shown by the number of
tadpoles in the dishes on the following morning.

A number of such crosses showed quite clearly
that in Styela, self-fertile, partially self-sterile,
and completely self-sterile individuals exist side
by side. Duplicate tests indicated that the re-
sults were self-consistent when egg samples of
this size were taken, and the same sperm suspen-
ion used. Fuchs, working with Ciona, reported
an increase in the percentage of fertilization with
a more corcentrated sperm suspension, thus rais-
ing the question as to whether samples taken at
different times might be expected to give consis-
tent results. My tests on this point are not con-
clusive as yet, because of the difficulty of getting
animals to shed more than once. A small number
of animals which shed on four different occasions
gave counts which were somewhat variable in the
actual percentage of fertilization from one test to
another, but the relation of self ard cross-fertility
remained constant in every case. It appears,
therefore, that the self and cross fertility shown
by one series of adequate tests is in general a con-
sistent index of certain inherent differences in the
animals themselves.

This conclusion is made much stronger by ex-

Juty 25, 1931 ] THE

COLLECTING

NET 127

periments involving a large number of crosses
simultaneously. One such series shows all recip-
rocal crosses between nine different individuals.
The percentages of fertilization show all possible
steps from complete self-sterility to complete sel f-
fertility, with quite marked variability in the
cross-fertility from one individual to another. In
general, the lower the percentage of self-fertility,
the greater is the number of sperm suspensions
which increase the fertilitv of the eggs in crosses.
The most striking fact which such a series of
tests shows, however, is that there is a negative
correlation between the fertility of eggs by sperm
of other individuals, and the ability of the sperm
of the same individual to produce increased fer-
tility in other eggs. Stated more simply this
means that self-sterile individuals shed sperm
which are less likely to give increased fertility in
crosses than partially self-sterile individuals, and
the latter than self-fertile individuals. Such a
relation is in no sense inherent in the data, and
can be accounted for only bv the inherent, or
genetic nature of the animals themselves.

The simplest genetic hypothesis which appears
to fit the facts described is that certain individuals
carry a mutant gene S, for self-sterility. which is
allelomorphic to the normal F, for self-fertility.
SS individuals are self-sterile, and will not fer-
tilize any animal bearing S genes. SF animals
may show partial self-sterility. Such an hypothe-

sis may be tested by rearing one generation of
hybrids, as I hope to do in the future. The genetic
determination of self-sterility in Styela thus ap-
pears to be far simpler than that in Ciona, where
all animals are self-sterile, and for which a com-
plex multiple factor situation has been suggested
by Morgan. It may be that Styela shows how
the Ciona situation has originated.

A few words may be added with respect to
the physiological nature of the block to self-fer-
tilization. In Ciona, Morgan believed that the
test cells or their secretions within the membrane
prevented sperms of similar genetic constitution
from reaching the egg. This seemed justified by
his observation that removal of the membrane
mechanically made self-fertilization possible. I
have already reported that fertilization of Styela
eggs in sea water with a few drops of weak
NH4OH or NaOH (pH 8.5-8.7) made all sperm
suspensions of approximately equal fertilizing
power. By similar treatment Loeb long ago
brought about species cross fertilization, and Ten-
nent family cross fertilization in Echinoderms.
In such experiments it has been supposed that the
change in the pH of the sea-water produced an
effect on the egg cortex. If this is the correct ex-
planation then we must look at the egg cortex as
furnishing the block to self-fertilization rather
than the egg membrane or its inclusions.

REVIEWS OF SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

The Use of the Microscope. By John Belling
(Cytologist, Carnegie Institution of Washington)
McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1930.

This excellent treatise, written by a skilled cy-
tologist and microscopist, is one that should be
in the hands of everyone who makes use of the
microscope, whether in research or in teaching.
It is written with commendable brevity and ab-
sence of needless technicality, and in the course
of its twerty-four short chapters deals with al-
most every aspect of microscopical research in
biclogy. To the reviewer its strongest poirt
seems to be the numerous practical suggest'ons,
evidently the product of long personal experience
in the laboratory, with which its pages are every-
where crowded. It is difficult to select specific
examples of this, since it is characteristic of all
the chapters; but especial mention may be made
of those dealing with the routine microscope, il-
lumination, light filters and screens, the condens-
er, the cover-glass problem, photography, testing
and care of the microscope, and rules for high-
power microscopy. The work contains also chap-
ters or the past and future of the microscope, its

literature, discoveries due to its use, and practi-

cal exercises, including brief directions for cyto-
logical work. Novel features are a list of “prac-
tical points” at the end of each chapter and a
final list of two hundred “questions” for a search-
ing of the souls of those addicted to the practice

of microscopic research. A useful glossary, liter-
ature list and index are appended. The book is
cordially recommended. E. B. WItson.

Invertebrate Zoology. Harley. Jones. Van
Cleave. 1931. xiv- 282 pp. McGraw-Hill Book
Company.

In writing and revising this textbook of in-
vertebrate zoology the author has successfully
avoided the mistake of writing for the sake of
impressing his colleagues in the field. In the re-
vision, stress has been taken from the taxonomic
organization originally employed, while general
material has been introduced such as was former-
ly found in textbooks of general zoology. The
index reveals one brief reference to the entoderm ;
the ectoderm is referred to the same page while
the mesoderm has a paragraph on the following
page. Nematocysts are called exclusively “ret-
tling” cells; cnidoblasts are not mentioned ; neith-
er for that matter is the coelom given a place in
the index although it is mentioned at different
places in the text. The echinoderms are dis-
cussed between the Molluscoidea and the Mol-
lusca, and one finds scarcely a hint of the pos-
sibility of constructing a diphyletic organization
of the animal kingdom. This text must have
beer found useful, otherwise a second edition
would not have been called for, and a hasty suv-
vey indicates that the revised book is an improve-
ment. —W.C. ALLEE.

128 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vot. VI. No. 45

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific werk
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell) 275.0 « wcheinisolelel(sielateta/elatelaleialninle] sin Editor

Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Cattell

THE BEACH QUESTION

One of the property owners on the Bayshore
beach has objected to our editorial note in which
we said that their action in blocking off a portion
of the beach was not courteous. Nothing has
taken place to change our opinion. Furthermore,
we believe that most of the people in Woods
Hole agree with us. In appropriating the north-
ern section of the beach for private use each
property owner is assigning himself about sixty-
five feet of the beach. Together they have left
comewhat less than half of the beach for the
rest of the people in Woods Hole. If all of
Woods Hole contained only five more families
the beach would be equitably divided. One day
last week there were three hundred people on
one side of the barrier and only one individual on
the other. This arrangement is not a democratic
one, and some change ought to be made to relieve
the crowded conditions that have prevailed since
the erection of the fence.

BOOKS AND OUR SCHOLARSHIP FUND

We have received recently as a gift from The
Scientific Monthly a large number of books which
are now on sale for the benefit of THE CoLtect-
inc Net Scholarship Fund. A substantial dis-
count has been made from the publishers list
price, because we wish to sell as many as we can
during the summer. The hooks are of many
kinds. Some of them are technical books in the
various fields of science, but most of them are
more general in character. Everyone will find
books that are of especial interest, and a cordial
welcome is extended to members of the scientific
institutions in Woods Hole to examine them. Our
office on Main Street is always open and we hope
that investigators and students will avail them-
selves of this opportunity. They are welcome at
any time, but we expect most of our visitors in
the evening when our typewriters have ceased
their noisy chatter.

THE NOMINATION OF TRUSTEES

Following out the suggestions contained in the
preliminary report of the special committee of the
Corporation of the Marine Biological Laboratory
(printed in THe Cottectine Net for July 18,
1931), the following memorandum has recently
been distributed to the members of the Corpora-
tion:

At the annual meeting of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory held on August 12.
1930, a special committee was appointed to work out
a representative method of making nominations for
officers and trustees to be elected by the Corpora-'
tion at the annual meeting in August. The report
of this Committee was printed during the fall of
1930 and a copy was sent to each member of the:
Corporation.

Although the provisions of this report cannot be
approved and adopted prior to the annual meeting
in August, one of them—viz. that concerning sug-
gestions and recommendations from the Corporation
at large for nominations of Officers and Trustees ot
the appropriate class, to be sent to the Chairman of
the Nominating Committee,—was sanctioned by the
Executive Committee as not inconsistent with the
present practice. The opportunity is given herewith
to carry it out.

Officers and Trustees are elected by the Corpora-
tion; members of the Corporation are elected only by
the Trustees. The new officers—viz. Treasurer and
the Clerk of the Corporation, are elected annually,—
Trustees are elected for a term of four years. The
oresent officers and Trustees of the Class of 1931,
any one or all of whom may be reelected, are as
follows:

1. Treasurer of the Corporation Lawrason Riggs, Jr.
2. Clerk of the Corporation........ Gary N. Calkins
8 Trustees of the Class of 1931

7. W. J. V. Osterhout

8. J. R. Schramn

9. William M. Wheeler
10. Lorande L. Woodruff

3. H. C. Bumpus
4, W. C. Curtis

5. B. M. Duggar
6. George T. Moore

If you wish to make suggestions for nominations,
please fill in the blank below and mail prior to July
831 to the Chairman of the Nominating Committee
for 1931, Dr. A. C. Redfield, Marine Biological Lab-
oratory, Woods Hole, Mass.

Gary N. Calkins,
Clerk of the Corporation.

SUGGESTIONS FOR THE NOMINATING

COMMITTEE 1931

N. B. The numbers below correspond with those
given in the list above. Nominees must be members
of the Corporation.

1, Wor Treasurer..«.-..=. 2. For Clerk:... ..osrsteisi
For Trustees of the Class of 1935

SU ESaeororacsucodtes (COE Sood Cos:

(Ea bamneranes tna. dis.c acho Si. Gate «elon epereteteenmne

Stet saomi panne osc 4600 ENIAC ac.

Cis vo micachind secs yoo TOs ic. 5 visreversie a dete ee

Signature’. «oo... wi cc eie sieves «1s nese) ahsp aia

ire

Jury 25, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING

NET 129

ITEMS OF INTEREST

On Thursday evening, July 23, Mrs. C. E. Mc-
Clung gave a picnic to the Woods Hole members
of the zoology department of the University of

Miss Evelyn Howard, who has just received
her doctor’s degree from the University of Penn-
sylvania, has been appointed assistant in physi-

Pennsylvania and their families.

scheduled to be held at Sippi-
wissett, but rain interfered and
Mrs. McClung entertained in
her apartment.

Dr. L. O. Howard, who re-
cently received the Capper
Awara, consisting of $5,000.00
and a gold medal, sailed on the
S. S. Virginia on July 11 for
Honolulu via the Panama
Canal. He will stop over a
few weeks in Honolulu, after
which he will sail for Paris
by the way of the Indian
Ocean and the Mediterranean.

Miss Agnes Addison, the
daughter of Dr. and Mrs. W.
H. F. Addison is correspond-
ent for The Falmouth Enter-

The party was

M. B. VU. Calendar

WEDNESDAY, JULY 29, 7:30 P.M.
Seminar. Dr. B. Lucke, ‘The Mech- |

anism of Bacteriotropin Action.” |

Dr. M. H. Jacobs and Dr. A. K.
Parpart, “Is the Permeability of
the Erthrocyte to Water De-
creased by Narcotics?”

Dr. L. V. Heilbrunn, “The Action |

of the Common Cations on the
Protoplasmic Viscosity of Amo-
eba.”’

Dr. R. Chambers, “The Forma-

tion of Ice Crystals in the Pro-
toplasm of Various Cells.”

A variety of research apparatus in-

cluding some devices cf entirely
new design are now being ex-
hibited by Mr. J. H. Emerson of
Cambridge in the Old Lecture

ology at the Johns Hopkins Medical School.

Dr. Selman A. Waksman
gave an address on marine bi-
ology at the staff meeting of
the Oceanographic Institution
held on Thursday, July 23.

The Spencer Lens Company
opened their annual exhibit at
Woods Hole in the Old Lec-
ture Hall on July 23rd. They
are showing a number of new
instruments, pre-eminent a-
mong which are two new re-
search microscopes in which
are incorporated several orig-
inal and improved features.
They are exhibiting a binocu-
lar microscope with adjustable
inclined eye-pieces. The two
new types of fine adjustments

prise during her trip through Hall.

for microscopes are being dis-

Europe.

Dr. David I. Hitchcock from the department of
physiology of the Yale University School of Med-
icine is coming to the laboratcry on the first of
August. He and his family will occupy the Bud-
ington cottage on Orchard Street, Crow Hill.

played as well as a new Delin-
eascope for color slides as used by Mr. Craske in
his lecture last Thursday evening. Mr. C. H.
Ash of the Boston office and Mr. L. M. Potter
from the Buffalo headquarters are in-charge of
the exhibit, and will be here until August 4th.

APPLICATION FOR MEMBERSHIP IN THE
CORPORATION OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

At the annual meeting of the Board of Trustees
of the Marine Biological Laboratory on August
II new members will be elected to the Corpora-
tion of the laboratory. “Professional biologists
and persons who have rendered conspicuous ser-
vice to the Marine Biological Laboratory, may
upon written application to the Clerk of the
Corporation and upon recommesdation of the
Nominating Committee be elected by the Trustees
to membership in the Corporation.” Applications
for membership in the Corporation must be en-
dorsed by two members of the Corporation.
Forms on which to make formal application may
be obtained from the business office of the lab-
oratory.

At their meeting last August the Trustees elect-
ed the following persons to membership in the
Corporation :

Dr. D. W. Brenk, Dr. Edouard Chatton, Dr.
A. B. Dawson, Dr. L. C. Dunn, Dr. Helen M
Miller, Dr. A. W. Pollister, Dr. Danial Raffel,
Dr. W. S. Root, Dr. T. M. Sonneborn, Dr.
Margaret Sumwalt.

Mi. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Dr. Samuel O. Mast gave a lecture on July
14th at the Maine Marine Station, LaMoine,
Maine. His subject was “Function of the Eye
Spots in Unicellular Forms.”

The third seminar of the season will be given
by Dr. Mast on Monday evening, July 27th, at
the Dining Hall.

Dr. E. M. East of the Bussey Institution visit-
ed the Laboratory on Monday, July 2oth.

Dr. Esther F. Byrnes arrived at the Laboratory
July 17th to continue her researches. Dr. Byrnes
is accompanied by her sister.

The Fourth Popular Lecture will be given by
Dr. E. Kk. Marshall, Jr., on Thursday afterroon,
July 30th.

The young people of the Laboratory gave the
first dance of the season at the Grange Hall on
Saturday night, July 18th, in honor of the older
people. Music was imported from Bar Harbor
and refreshments from Leslie Dunton’s, in Salis-
bury Cove.

Miss Kitty Marshall entertained the young
people of the Laboratory at supper on Sunday,
July roth. —Loutse R. Mast.

130

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 45

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Mr. Seymour M. Farber, who was awarded
one of Tur Cortectinc Net scholarships of
$100.00 for work at the laboratory this season,
plans to begin work at the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory early in August.

Dr. Henry W. Scherp, a student in the physi-
ology course this summer, has been appointed as-
sistant at the Rockefeller Institute for Medical
Research. He will go to New York about
September 1.

The S. S. Olympic recently reported that the
“Atlants” was 530 miles west of Plymouth, Eng-
land.

Dr.E. J. Lund, professor of physiology at the
University of Texas, and Mrs. Lund, have arrived
in Woods Hole for the rest of the summer. They
have taken one of the laboratory apartments.

Miss Elizabeth Ross Shaw of Winthrop, Mass-
achusetts, who has been biological prooof-reader
for the Boston office of Ginn and Company, spent
a few days this week in Woods Hole. She ex-
pects to return to Woods Hole next year to do
some work in marine biology and microscopy.

On Sunday, July 26th, Gilbert and Sullivan's
operetta, “The Pirates of Penzance,” will be giv-
en in the M. B. L. Club at 8 P. M. Librettos of
the opera will be for sale at $.25 apiece.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
July s25es- <== TetOm ele2!
July 26 21 Ome 27,
July 27 B07 Sans)
July 28.. 4:01 4:00
July 209... 4:47. 4:54
July 30 5 3On a5
July 31 6:09 66:23
OE \Sa cs i anaes 6:51 7:09
Aug. 2 Ge Gti
HATES (Bere cexess Berar es .34
INDE, Ponronsancmneyes sole Oi

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay. It must be remembered that the schedule
printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro-
longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the
current to occur a half an hour earlier or later
than the times given above.

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Mr. E. H. Quayle has returned to this institu-
tion after spending three weeks on a collecting,
trip in the Chiricahua Mountains of South East-
ern Arizona. This trip was organized and
financed by Mr. Joseph Sefton and the party
obtained large numbers of specimens for the Sau
Diego Society of Natural History. Since his re-
turn Mr. Quayle announces that he has received
from Arthur Wrigley, London, England eighty
specimens of European corals for comparison
with those of Southern California which are be-
ing studied by him.

Mr. A. E. Longley, botanist in the U. S. De-
partment of Agriculture, is making his residence
at this institution for several months while he is
engaged in special investigations at the U. S. De-
partment of Agriculture Acclimatization Station
near Torrey Pines.

Mr. H. R. Byers of Massachusetts Institute of
Technology and Mr. G. B. Armstrong of Pomona
Collge are serving as Graduate Assistants in
Metecrology under Dr. G. F. McEwen for the
summer.

The following dates for elctures at the Institu-
tion have been arranged and others will be an-
nounced as soon as possible. Evening lectures
will be popular or semipopular in character while
afternoon lectures will tend to be more technical.
All persons interested are cordially invited to at-
tend either.

.

Evening Lectures. (8 p. m.)

Monday, July 20: “The Meaning aud Causes of
Cancer” Dr. Leo Loeb.

Friday, July 24: “Japanese Gardens” (Illustrated
by Colored Lantern Slides). Director T. Way-
land Vaughan.

Monday, July 27: ,Denths of Penetrat‘or of
Light in Sea Water in its Relation to Distribu-
tion of Organisms.’”’ Dr. Burt Richardson.

Afternoon Lectures. (4 p. m.)
Friday, July 17: “The Buffer Mechanism of Sea

Water.” Dr. E. G. Moberg, Dr. D. M. Green-
berg, and Miss E. Allen.

Friday, July 24: “Five Recent Papers on Evap-
oration.’’ Dr. Burt Richardson.

Friday, July 31: “Notes on Recent and Current
Oceanographic Activities.” Director T. Way-
land Vaughan.

Jury 25, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 13

al

| Carefully
oe Constructed
as a fine watch

Every detail, each adjustment of the 3000 Microtome is precise......
is properly designed to perform its function perfectly. This instrument
is sturdy, too, to insure you long service. The working parts are com-
pletely enclosed.

This Microtome is excellent for rapid serial sectioning, cutting sections
with accuracy down to one micron in thickness. The feeding mechanism
operates automatically. The heavy knife holder holds the knife rigidly
in place. A scale provides for recording the proper cutting angle, once
it is determined. The 25 mm object disc is actuated by a balance wheel,
grooved for a belt where a motor is to be used.

Write for catalog D-21 for complete description of.this and other B & L
Microtomes.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL COMPANY

6755St. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York

GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
LOMB

BAUSCH ELOMB.

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

132 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 45

Church of the Messiah

N. E. TSIKNAS (Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Holy Commun‘on ... 8:00 a.m.
ENTESETIETGS CCS LTS Morning Prayer . 1200%aaims
MB Vening Prayer wee aiee 7:30 p.m.

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

HEADQUARTERS FOR
STEEL FILING CABINETS, SAFES Src Sheree
AND OFFICE FURNITURE

LOOSE LEAF BOOKS AND FIGURING BOOKS
FOR ANY KIND OF BUSINESS INSURANCE

Callanan & Archer Co., Inc.

WHOLESALE STATIONERS Woods Hole Phone 622

10-14 So. Second St. New Bedford, Mass.

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING

FOLLOW THE CROWD TO Cleaning, Dyeing and R pairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonab‘e
DAREIEL’S M. DOLINSKY’S
f Main St. Woods H le, Mass. Cali 752
or
HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,
DELICIOUS SANDWICHES IDEAL RESTAURANT
vp Main Strect Woods Hole
PICNIC LUNCHES Tel. 1243

THE QUALITY SHO?
Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes and

TEXACO” PRODUECHS Souvenirs

Ask for things you do not see.

NORGE REFRIGERATORS Main Strect Woods Hole

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
SANSOUCI’S BEAUTY PARLOR

COMPANY Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and
Opposite Station All Branches of Beauty Culture

FALMOUTH PHONE 19-M

JuLy 25, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 133

INTERNATIONAL
CENTRIFWGES

Many types offering a large variety
of equipment of tubes and a wide
range of speed ‘and consequent
relative centrifugal force.

& International Equipment Co.
352 WESTERN AVENUE
BOSTON, MASS.

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,

harts
for physiology, zoology, botany,
anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-
logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate

Spalteholz

catalog.
Transparent
' Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- Life Hist
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum Gace y
and Z \ r=}
Zootogical Cray-AnAms Company

ese See.

ae 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK
- Model of Human Heart

134 THE COLLECTING NET { Vor. VI. No. 45

| COMPTON ELECTROMETER

HE Quadrant Electrometer shown is primarily
W,xIx 9 due to Profs. Arthur H. and Karl T. Comp-
ton. It embodies the scund detail design and

inches precision of construction necessary to fully real-
weight ize the advantages of the Compton Modifications.
6 pounds The needle and quadrant adjustments are en-

tirely free from backlash or “wobble” and are
provided with accurate micrcmeter heads. A
small movement in the height of either changes
the sensitivity considerably. The Electrometer
has a stable zero and extremely high sensitivity.
Once set up, it can immediately be brought to
any required state of sensitivity since the differ-
ent movements can be accurately repeated from
time to time.

Send for electrometer list C 169

CAMBRIDGE

Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

3732 Grand Central Terminal, New York

Dependable Microscope Slides

It is surprising how much better a student understands
the structure of the various stages in the development of
the starfish egg if he can see the eggs in section as well
as in toto. This is outstandingly true for the gastrula and
blastula stages as well as for the earlier segmentation
stages. Incidentally, sections of segmenting eggs show
fair numbers of mitotic figures in which chromatin is
scarce but achromatic structures prominent.

Two good slides for demonstrating the above are:

E4.32 Asterias, thin sections of early and late cleavage,
showing nuclei and occasional mitosis. Hach....... 15

E4.43 Asterias, sections of blastula and gastrula. Each.. .75
Slides will be sent for examination on request.

E4.43 Asterias, aooklbninnt gastrula
SE. Ask for the TURTOX MICROSCOPE SLIDE CATALOG
Wi, % ae

TURTEXTRGUCTS listing over 2,000 preparations

SP GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

(eS Incorporated
ihe Sienlofithe Ayrton 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

Pledges Absolute Satisfaction CHICAGO

JuLy 25, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET

LEITZ
“ULTROPAK” EQUIPMENT

Demonstration and Lecture
at Main Laboratory

Marine Biological Laboratory
July 27th - 28th - 29th

LEITZ again leads in the developmert of new Microscopical Equipment. The Leitz
“ULTROPAK” Microscope Equipment is destined to completely revolutionize microscopi-
cal technique and through its application, features and details of specimen will be disclosed
which so far have been urknown. It permits observation of specimens under conditions
which were so far impossible to accomplish.

The Leitz “ULTROPAK” Micrcscope provides the following outstanding features:

Ist:— The specimen needs no preparation and can be observed in its natural
state. (Such observations were impossible up to now.)

2nd:— The image discloses characteristics of the specimen which could never
be detected heretofore for reasons that structural elements of the same
color may still show differences in their refractive, reflective and absorb-
ing properties.

3rd:— The illumination may be so adjusted that layers below the surface can

be observed without any disturbing effects being caused by intermediate
layers.

4th:— The “ULTROPAK” permits observations from the lowest to the highest
magnifications.

5th:— Due to the special construction of the optical units these observations can
be made under highest numerical apertures, consequently the highest de-
gree of definition is rendered.

6th:— The image is not always one of darkfield character since it depends upon
the properties of the specimen as well as the aperture of illumination.
This aperture can be adjusted at will to suit each special condition to the
preparation.

EMEEREZ, Ine

60 East 10th Street New. York, N. Y.

130 , THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 45

MINOT
SLIDE CABINET

Designed by the late Dr. Charles S.
Minot; entirely of metal construction;
very compact, occupying much less space
than wooden cabinet, strongly made
throughout and neatly finished on out-
side in maroon-colored japan with bronze
stripes, inside being finished in black
japan; contains 30 japanned metal trays,
each holding 24 glass slides, 75 x 25 mm.
Trays are provided with convenient
knobs and card holders. New and im-
proved construction of trays holds each
slide independently in place, preventing
shaking or slipping when trays are re-
moved. Cabinet is furnished with brass
lock. Outside dimensions: height, 1414
inches; depth, 13 inches; width 7 inches;
capacity, 720 slides; furnished complete
with 30 trays.

11882 MINOT SLIDE CABINET
as described apove.............. $35.00

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER, N.Y.

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and infcrmation furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
Wocds Hole, Mass.

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

MRS. H. M. BRADFORD

Dresses, Millinery, Hosiery and Gift Shop
Souvenirs and Jewelry

Depot Avenue Woods Hole

SAMUEL CAHOON
Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS
Tel. Falmouth 660 661

Woacds Hole and Falmouth

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitcries
Weods Hole Tel. 7i7
Service that Satisfies

JuLy 25, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET 13

INT

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

rs = eS}

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 1%-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
Slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

SEAL

Non-Corrosive

GOLD

Non. Corrosive Pinar
“MICROSCOPIC
SLIDES =* COVER GLASSES

Do Not Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Cray-ApAms Company

117-119 Kast 24th Street NEW YORK

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
EST. 1887

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC

13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

BINOCULAR MONOBJECTIVE
RESEARCH STANDS
MODELS F
With interchangeable monocular
and binocular tubes and complete

Abbe Illuminating Apparatus.

MICROSCOPE FCE-6
with optics to meet exacting requirements
Magnifications: 70 to 1800 X
Large Mechanical Stage
Aplanatic Condenser n.a.1.4
Quadruple Nosepiece

Apochromatic Objectives:
10 n.a.0.30,
20 n.a.0.65
60 n.a.1.4 (Oil Immersion)

90 n.a.1.3 (Oil Immersion)
Paired Compensating Oculars:
7X, 10X, 15X, 20X
Price, complete in case, $590
f.0.b., New York
Other Outfits, ranging in price frcm
$294.50 to $1085, are listed in Micro
catalogue 418, a copy of which will be

sent upon request.

CARL ZEISS, INc.
485 Fifth Avenue New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
723 South Hill St., Los Angeles, Calif.

H
be

8 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 45

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

The Southern Massachusetts Yacht Racing As-
sociation held its second arnual meeting on Fri-
day, July 17, in the reading room of the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution. Delegates were
in attendance from the yacht clubs at Nantucket,
Edeartown, Vineyard Haver. Wianno, Waquoit
Bay, Quissett, New Bedford, Mattapoisett,
Ducksbury and Marion.

Vice-commodore Frank J. Frost and Edward
A. Norman, chairman of the race committee, rep-
resented the Woods Hole Yacht Club. A com-
mittee reported considerable progress on the de-
velopment of uniform classes among the member
yacht clubs, with a view to permitting inter-club
racing.

_A three-day cruise to include the Edgartown
Regatta on August 1 was planned, and a number
of matters of routine business were transacted.

The new officers elected are: president, H. Nel-
son Emmons, Beverly Yacht Club at Marion;
vice president, C. Gardener Aikin, New Bedford
Yacht Club; secretary, L. W. Sargent, Edgartown
Yacht Club; and treasurer, Franklin King, Quis-
set Yacht Club.

Before the meeting, the delegates attended a
luncheon at the Breakwater Hotel and were ad-
dressed by Gardner Emmons of the Oceano-
graphic Institution in the work and plans of that
institution.

The results of the races of the Woods Hole
Yacht Club on Monday, July 20th, were as fol-
lows:

Baby Knock-Abouts
“Adios’—Morris Frost
‘“Porpoise”—C,. Glaser Thar.
“Tyro’—Mrs. Crossley thr. 2 min. 45 sec.
“Charleg’”—Ogden Woodruff 1 hr. 2 min. 50 sec.
“Scuttlebutt”—P. Copeland 1 hr. 14 min. 05 sec
“Menidia”—Fred Copeland 1 hr. 14 min. 10 sec.

59 min. 25 sec.
2 min. 40 sec.

Dories

“Dorine”’—George Clowes 69 min. 15 sec.

“Aunt Addie’—A. Meigs 1 hr. 3 min. 30 sec

“Hurky’—Kenneth Cole 1 hr. 18 min.
Catboats

“Lurline”—Philip Woolwo:th 59 min. 55 sec

1 hr. 21 min.

“Dinny’—Janet Blume
“Squido”— Marjorie Kidder 1 hr. 27 min.
“Lady Luck”—Mary Love 1 hr. 31 min.

The handicap for the catboats is still undecided
and the time given is consequently how they
crossed the finish line.

Application blanks for permission to drive out-
of-state cars may be obtained from Tue Cot-
LECTING Net office.

A serious accident occurred on Wednesday,
July 22nd, when two cars crashed on the main
road just below Nobska Road. Mr. William
Hemenway of the Carpenter Shop was driving
his own truck towards Woods Hole and Mr.
Lawrason Riggs III, son of the treasurer of the
M. B. L. driving a Chrysler, was going towards
Falmouth. Mr. Hemmenway’s car skidded on the
wet pavement, the two cars crashed, the truck
heing jammed against the brick wall. Mr. Hem-
menway was thrown from his car and badly cut
and bruised. He was taken directly to the doctor’s
in Falmouth where twelve stitches had to be
taken om his forehead. According to latest re-
ports, he is doing as well as can be expected. Mr.
Hemmenway’s car was so badly damaged that it
had to be towed. Mr. Riggs was not injured.

The stage at Silver Beach this week was the
scene of a stirring emotional drama of youth in
a small Southern town. We had a confidential
tip as we entered from one of the members of
the company that Peggy Sullavan’s fine acting
had wrung tears from the Players’ group who
were the audience at dress rehearsal; and even
with so much to anticipate, we were not disap-
pointed.

“Coquette,” by Arn Preston Bridgers and
George Abbott is emotional; it is heavy tragedy
effectively contrasted with a bright, Southern so-
ciety first act and farcical comedy in certain of
the minor characters. For the sake of comparison
we wish we had seen Helen Hayes as Norma on
Broadway. We do not hesitate, however, to com-
mend Miss Sullavar very highly. The role is a
difficult one., demanding great versatility in act-
ing. As the flirtatious Southern belle whose love
for one outside her Social pale brings ruin to her
father, her lover, and herself, she was at one
moment utterly charming and trivial and the next,
she reached the depths of real emotion with her
interpretation. A native Virginian, she, too, was
most perfect in her Southern accent.

The entire cast was thoroughly satisfactory al-
though not all of the accents would convince a true
Southerner. Kent Smith as the father was par-
ticularly fine. Also, we have been hoping for the
opportunity of seeing. Henry Fonda play a leading
role ever since his successful acting of the com-
paratively minor part in “Paris Bound,” and so
we welcomed him in the part of the lover. Mary
Lee Logan in her first role of the season also
deserves praise for her able acting of the girl in
her awkward ‘teens.

The Players did a difficult play surpassingly
well, ard it is with interest that we are looking
forward to the production of the light French
comedy, “Her Cardboard Lover,” which is sched-
uled for next week. —M. S. G.

’

Jury 25, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 139

Adopted by the Scientific
Book Club as the book for July

Kirkpatrick and Huettner’s
FUNDAMENTALS of HEALTH

An outstanding new book presenting in interesting, readable form materials
dealing with genetics, embryology, immunology, and endocrinology assembled by
two well-known authorities—Professor Kirkpatrick of Columbia University and
Professor Huettner of New York University. It is a book of unusual interest,
dedicated to the presentation of such knowledge of human life and human adjust-
merts as may aid each person in reaching opinions of his own on the importance
of keeping fit. Price $3.80 postpaid. A liberal discount for class use.

GINN and COMPANY
15 Ashburton Place, Boston, Mass.

We icement cee

We have taken over the entire department of Scientific Equipment of the Kny-
Scheerer Corporation.

The showrooms, stock and offices are now located at 10-14 West 25th Street,
New York City.
We are now ina position to offer excellent service, and carry a complete line of
Biological, Bacteriological and Chemical Apparatus, Naturalists’ Supplies,
Specimens, Skeletons, Anatomical Models, Wall Charts, Glass Jars, Microscopes
and Accesories.
Mr. William G. Lebowitz formerly manager of this departmert of the Kny-
Scheerer Corporation, is now associated with the Standard Scientific Supply
Corporation.
We cordially invite you to visit our large showrooms and solicit your enquiries
on apparatus and supplies.

Standard Scientific Supply Corporation
10-14 West 25th Street New York City

140

DHE COLEECLIING NED

[ Vor. VI. No. 45

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

At 7:26 on the evening of Tuesday, the twenty-
first, the fire siren sounded and all the cars in
Woods Hole turned out to follow the fire engine.
After a mad dash around Crow Hill and the
Gansett section, the fire engine came to a halt,
the chief’s car from Falmouth drove up, the
parade of cars stopped and as the crowd thronged
around, the Chief was heard to ask where the
fire was. The reply came from the hook and
ladder, “We don’t know; we're trying to find it.”
‘Another wild rush for cars and the procession
circled around some more and out on the point.
There the fire had been, in the oil stove in a room
adjoining the garage on Mrs. T. H. West’s place.
Though the fire was small and the damage slight,
the chase was as exciting as if the conflagration
had been terrific.

The rockets seen from the M. B. L. Club on
Saturday the eighteenth were sent up by a Coast
Guard boat that had become disabled near Gay
Head. It drifted as far as the Woods Hole end
of Naushon, where it was carried by the tide to-
wards Vineyard Haven. Before it had gone very
far one of its sister ships towed it back to the
Base.

On Thursday, July 16th. the Boston auxiliarv
schooner, the Olive M. Williams, ran aground
early in the morning. She was discovered by
two Coast Guard boats: a line was made fast
to the mainmast, another line attached to the
side and by hard pulling the vessel was finally
dislodged at 7:30 in the evening.

Reports had been current that the boat was a
rum runner, but upon investigation it was found
that instead of being loaded with liquor, she bore
a heavy cargo of ice, having discharged her hoat-
load of fish in New Bedford. She is owned by
Tibbetts fisheries in Boston and carried a crew
of seven men.

The A. & P. Stores send over to Nantucket
eight tons of sugar every Wednesday to supply
the eight stores on the island. On July 22nd the
supply would have been ruined had the sudden
downpour in the morning occurred a few min-
utes earlier. As it was the rain held off until the
sugar was safely loaded on the steamer.

The results of the races of the Woods Hole
Yacht Club on Monday, July 20th, were as fol-
lows:

On Thursday, July 23rd, Leonard Craske,
sculptor and artist, gave a lecture in the audi-
torium of the Laboratory on “The Art and Uses
of Color Phitography.” The lecture was illus-
trated.

The U. S. S. Constitution “Old Tronsides” will
make New Bedford her port from July 31st to
August 6th. The city is planning a series of
entertainments for a gala reception to the old
frigate. Friday, the day of arrival, is reception
day; Sunday, an old time ship service will be
held in the Seamen’s Church; Monday, there will
be a clambake for officers and crew of the ship,
followed by a sightseeing trip and a dinner for
the officers; Tuesday is the gala day when all
New Bedford is expected to turn out in a street
parade; Wednesday, whaleboat races; and Thurs-
day, “Old Ironsides” departs.

The Church Work Association of the Church
of the Messiah holds weekly meetings every
Thursday afternoon in the parish house. Summer
residents are cordially invited to attend.

Mrs. R. S. Thayer and family of Lancaster
have taken the Sargent Cottage on Nobska Road
for the summer.

Mr. and Mrs. West and family from Philadel-
phia have taken Mrs Frank Handy’s house on
3uzzards Bay Avenue for the summer.

On Friday, July 31st, the Walter Main Circus
will put on a show in Falmouth for one day oniy.

The board of Governors of the Woods Hole
Yacht Club has called the Annual Meeting for
Saturday, August 8th, at 8:15 P. M. at the Club
Station.

On Wednesday afternoon, July 22nd, the Meth-
odist Episcopal Church held its annual sale of
flowers, aprons, home-cooked food, candy and ice
cream in the vestry of the Church.

TIDE TABLE AT BREAKWATER, BEACH

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
it is high water at the Breakwater Beach:

Date P.M.
uly 22 Se ees. eee eee 5:22
Manly AG) ee acessce 6:13
Vitaly 27a este: 7:10
July 28 7:54
July 29 8:40
July 30 9:20
July 3 10:03
DN oleae eer Ptr: 10:48
Aus 2= II :30
AIO IR. eee ee
Aug. 4 12:40

Approximately six hours later, the tide is low.

Jury 25, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 141

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Presents
“HER CARDBOARD LOVER”
JULY 27— AUG. 1
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

FALMOUTH PLUMBING. AND
HARDWARE CO.
Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library

Tel. 260

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

MUNSON & ORDWAY
THE BRAE BURN SHOP
Fresh Killed Poultry — Fruit & Vegetables
Butter, Eggs & Groceries
Home Cooked Food and Delicatessen
Falmouth opp. Post Office Tel. 354-W

2 Deliveries Daily in Woods Hole

The Whaler on Wheels

“Our Wandering Book Shop”

Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays

throughout the summer
season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

FITZGERALD, INC.
A Man’s Store
— MEN’S WEAR —
Tel. 935
Falmouth

Colonial Buiding Main Street

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth

Pkone 907-M Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait

(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

Visit
Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

Main Street
near A & P

Queen’s Byway
near Filene’s
JAX
FEMININE FOOTWEAR
$4.45 to $7.45
Two Falmouth Shops

AFTER THE MOVIES

LAWRENCE’S SANDWICH SHOP
FALMOUTH HEIGHTS

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10¢e DEPARTMENT
Cape Cod Distributors for ,
Draper Maynard Sporting Goods
SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS

Falmouth Tel. 407

142 THE COLEECTING NET

Whittlesey House _

[ Vor. VI. No. 45

LEIBOFF UREA

The Scientific Book Club
Selection for May

| BIOLOGY
in

~ HUMAN AFFAIRS

Edited by Epwarp M. East
Professor of Genetics, Harvard University

| brings to your attention
|

A series cf twelve relatively non-technical dis-
cussions, by twelve leading scientists, of the
present conditions of several of the more im-
portant sub-divisions of biology, emphasizing
recent advances and expressing a few con-
servative predictions as to probable future
trends.

The Scientific Book Club reviewer says of
East’s BIOLOGY IN
HUMAN AFFAIRS

“This composite book, like so many others
of the kind that have been appearing of late,
is an admirable illustration of what the sci-
entist means when he speaks of progress........
The present volume deals with some of the
most important applications of the newer
knowledge of biology, psychology and
sociology to human affairs Much of the
material included here is not generally
known, except to specialists, and demon-
strates the ingenuity and sportsmanship of
scientists in the face of difficulties... the
reader may rest confident that the total
effects of his reading will lead unerringly to-
| ward a trugr appreciation of what the bio-
logical sciences have done and can do for
human welfare.”

399 pages, 0 x 9, $3.50

— WHITTLESEY HOUSE

Trade Division of

McGRAW-HILL BOOK Co., Inc.
370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK

APPARATUS

FOR DETERMINATION OF UREA
IN BLOOD

Ref.: Journal of Biological Chemistry, Vol.
LXXXIII, No. 2, August, 1929. “A Rapid and
Accurate Method for the Determination of
Urea in Blood.” By S. L. Leiboff and Bernard
S. Kahn. Our reprint forwarded on request.
DESCRIPTION
Consists of Leiboff Pressure Tubes and a
Compact Oil Bath for heating the tubes.
The urea is hydrolized in the presence of
sulfuric acid, without the use of urease,
under the pressure generated in the Lei-
boff Tubes at 150 degrees C.
Direct Nesslerization is possible and the
process of distillation or aeration is elim-
inated.
Determination requires only 10 minutes.

Write for further particulars

FiIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897
HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign

postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various au.hors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor.
Pub, 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. III: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Darrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

Forging to New Heights of Leadership

in

MICROTOME
CONSIRUGHON

Uszenneaaneysatiss

New ene
SPENCER oe

Medium Sliding MICROTOME No. 850

A new Microtome—Spencer quality—to meet the need of a moderate priced high
grade sliding microtome, built low and compact for comfortable operatian.

In this microtome is incorporated the great features which have accounted for the unusual success
of all Spencer Sliding Microtomes: i.e., the sturdy main frame, the inflexibility of the knife and
knife block, and the accuracy and rigidity of the feed mechanism.
The main body of the instrument is 1414” long. 5%” high, and 7144" wide at the base. As on all
sliding microtomes the knife block, which is 514" long, 3” wide and 1%” high, rides on a horizontal
surface at the top of the main casting. The cohesion of nearly 12 square inches (three times as
much as on any ordinary microtome) of oil contact on the accurately scraped surfaces holds the
block very firmly to the main frame. An additicnal fortification against any possible jumping of the
knife block is provided by opposing bearings.
This combination, which is on all Spencer microtomes cnly, insures accuracy in the movement of the
knife block. which can be attained in no other way. The smooth even draw is a delight to the touch.
A rigid and free moving object block accurately fitted and carefully scraped surfaces insures feeding
and Folding the object, however hard it may be, detinitely to the knife edge for accurate cutting cf
thin sections. The feed screw is 1%” in diameter. The notched wheel of this feed mechanism provides
for cutting sections in steps of 2 microns up to 40 microns. The feed is operated by hand or auto-
matically. There is n= back lash or spring. The specimen must move up the distance for which the
section thickness is set. The total upward excursion is much greater than on other makes of micro-
tomes which are priced higker. On No. 850 this distance is 33 millimeters.
It is provided with the standard Spencer ball and flange object clamp which has been so popular. It is
easily riented by means of three screws. One reason for the accuracy of these microtomes is the
fact that no split nut is involved. The nut is heavy and thick enough to cover twenty threads. When
the upper limit is reached the object clamp is quickly lowered by means of a crank at the back of the
microt me. This crank also provides a quick means for bringing the object into the desired relation
to the knife edge before cutting.

No. 850 Microtome complete with knife, knife clamp, handle and back for

sharpening—now ready tor shipment—$200.00

ON DISPLAY AT OUR EXHIBIT IN OLD LECTURE HALL
M.B.L. JULY 23rd to AUG. 4th.

144 Mss, COMILIRCINUNG, NIG [ Vor. VI. No. 45

99 Quoting remark of a school super-

(¢ °
It saved us the cost of 5 microscopes” Satine femark of 2 seta

EX = WE : : » “PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
RES : PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryclogy, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important featuzes, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects oz microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matte: of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $10900 complete appazatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional feattires as

standard equipment :

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light. Revolving stage.
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,
Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Cray-/ Ams Company
117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK.N Y.

Vol. VI. No. 6.

SATURDAY, AUGUST 1, 1931

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

A SCIENTIST’S IMPRESSIONS OF THE
PROGRESS OF EDUCATION AND

SCIENCE IN RUSSIA

Dr. SELMAN A. WAKSMAN
Professor of Microbiology, Rutgers University
It is very difficult in a brief space to give any
fair idea of the nature and extent of the experi-
ments which are being carried out at present in

Russia and which are, no
doubt, bound to prove oi
the greatest consequence in
history. These experiments
are a result of a revolution,
not only political but social,
economic and intellectual in
nature; they affect every
phase of human life. In order
to understand the full signifi-
cance of the Russian Revolu-
tion, it is not sufficient mere-
ly to describe certain observa-
tions or to draw certain con-
clusions, for any conclusions
are bound to be superficial,
unless one is able to compare
conditions in Soviet Russia,
not with those in Western
Europe and in America, but
with those in Russia before

the Revolution. I shall attempt to limit myself here
only to the conditions under which the student
(Continued on Page 149)

and professor live

THE DESERT LABORATORY OF THE
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF

WASHINGTON

Lecture.

RW. B. VY. Calendar

TUESDAY. AUGUST 4, 7:30 PM.
Seminar.

Dr. Eugene F. DuBois,
“Surface Temperature and the
radiation of Heat from the Hu-
man Body.”

Dr. Pierre Rijlant, ‘““Oscillograph-
ic Study of the Cardiac Ganglion
of Limulus Polyphemus.”

Dr. D. M. Whitaker, ‘‘The Change
in Rate of Oxygen Consumption
at Fertilization of the Eggs of
Chaetopterus, Cummingia, Ner-
eis, Arbacia and Fucus.”

Dr. R. W. Gerard, ‘‘Phospho-
creatin in Nerve in Relation to
Activity.”

FRIDAY, AUGUST 7, 8 P. M.
The Reynold A. Spaeth
Memorial Lecture. Dr. R. G.
Harrison, professor of compara-
tive anatomy, Osborn Zoological

Laboratory, Yale University.

characteristics.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dr. Forrest SHREVE
Director of the Laboratory
The word “desert” commonly brings to mind a
picture of vast expanses of drifting sand almost
whelly devoid of plant and animal life.

Areas
of this character may be found
in the Sahara and the Desert
of Gobi, but they are the
mort extreme manifestations
of the desert. The arid and
semi-arid regions comprise
nearly one third of the land
surface of the earth and they
exhibit contrasts and variety
to even a greater extent than
do the forested portions ot the
earth. The deserts of the
United States and Mexico are
of the less extreme type, for
the most part, supporting veg-
etation and animal life of sur-
prising abundance.

The definition of “desert” is
not simple. Like a good spe-
cies it can be delimited only,
on the basis of a group of

Deficiency of rainfall is the most
important, but an amount of precipitation found
in a desert at low latitudes will support forests

A Scientist’s Impressions of the Progress
of Mducation and Science in Russia
Dr) Selman cA Waksman © yes. ee 5 - ae

The Desert Laboratory of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington,

Dr SHOGFESt SOME VEl saci ecic sicleveceieve ele che =

The Composition of Bene Ash,

DPA SELP IMS OMOLSUlIS! 25...) ee ole em oe

Bile Salts,

Dr. Shiro Tashiro and L. H. Schmidt...

The Enolization of Gelatin by Neutral

Salts,

IDM, V5 Wi, HOA seaoscsacancnoaaoancd 154
Oxidations Produced by Gonococci,

Dr bh. Ss Guzman Barron... elec 154
BOOKS REVICW Starlet neat neretiettei iene netsiarere 155
ocitonial Meare cy ec nin dae scorer rereren ners 156
Currents) inthe) Oley eyrayeera cantare aye ee) «ras 156
Mpemstof ein terestyrarr-trarkedstae einen 157

WroodsiHole og vai rie miei) 166, 168

146 THE

COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 46

THE DESERT LABORATORY OF THE CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

at higher latitudes. High temperatures are prev-
alent in deserts, but extremely low ones also oc-
cur. Each of the great desert regions of the
world has its own group of climatic conditions.
They have many features in common, notably
rainfall which is insufficient in amount or irregu-
lar in distribution, great range of daily tempera-
tures, low relative humidity, high total wind
movement, and high percentage of sunshine. As
a direct or indirect result of these characteristics
the streams of the desert are intermittent, the
soils are highly charged with soluble salts and
are poor in organic matter, the surface of the soil
is gravelly or stony, and erosion by water and
wind is active. The vegetation of the desert 1s
composed of a relatively small number of domi-
nant plants; their stature is low and communities
which they form are sparse and open. It is cus
tomary to regard the plants of the desert as highly
specialized, but the structures and activities which
fit them for a successful existence in the desert
are no more unusual than those feund in the
plants of rain-forest, salt marsh or pond, albeit
they are familiar to a small number of biologists.

The Desert Laboratory of the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington is located in one of the rich-
est and most diversified desert areas in North
America, at Tucson, Arizona, within 65 miles of
the Mexican border. The laboratory buildings
are situated two miles from Tucson in the midst
of a tract of 840 acres of virgin desert at an alti-
tude of 2,663 feet. The laboratory grounds have
heen protected from grazing and trespass for
twenty-four years, and afford a variety of types of
surface, soil and vegetation for observation, col-

lecting, and instrumental or experimental work.
Desert plains extend from Tucson to lower and
higher altitudes, and several mountain ranges are
accessible which reach 8,000 to 9,000 ft., as well
as numerous hills and small mountain ranges of
varied mineralogical composition.

The rainfall at Tucson, chiefly in midwinter
and midsummer, averages 10.5 inches for the
year. The winters are variable in temperature,
but minima of 25° F. are usually registered from
two or three to 10 or 15 times. The summers are
warm, with the daily maximum sometimes above
100° for 20 or 30 days in succession, but the tem-
perature rarely rises above 108°. The low at-
mospheric humidity does much to counterbal-
ance the high temperatures, as far as human com-
fort is concerned.

Tucson is a very ancient town, with Indian,
Mexican and American traditions, and a popula-
tion of 40,000 persons, in which these ele-
ments are rather equally mixed. Its location
on the main line of the Southern Pacific Railway
and on the Borderland Highway gives easy ac-
cess to it from the East and the West. Tucson is
the seat of the University of Arizona, the Arizona
Experiment Station, the Southwestern Forest and
Range Experiment Station of the U. S. Forest
Service, the Magnetic Station of the U. S. Coast
and Geodetic Survey, and of the Desert Sanator-
ium and Research Institute of Southern Arizona.
Important work is also maintained there by the
U. S. Biological Survey. These organizations
bring together a group of over 80 persons inter-
ested in various phases of biological work in its
scientific and practical aspects.

AUGUST 1, 1931 ]

The Desert Laboratory is open throughout the
year. At present there are four resident investi-
gators, and every year there are generally four or
five visiting investigators who remain from two
or three months to a year. No lectures or courses
are given, and there is no way in which university
credit can be secured for work done there. The
facilities of the laboratory are open to accredited
investigators who make application three months
in advance, and present plans for their work on
which approval of their prospective residence can
be based. Preference is given to those whose
work is most closely related to the current in-
vestigations of the laboratory staff. The numba
of persons that can be accommodated is deperdent
on the character of their work and needs. Those
whose work is chiefly in the field can almost in-
variably he accommodated and given a table.

There are no living or dining facilities at the
Desert Laboratory, but houses or rooms can eas'ly
be secured in Tucson. From the office of the lab-
oratory a regular bus line is operated to the busi-
ness district. The long distances which are in-
volved in living arrangements, field work or con-
tacts with other institutions lead most of the in-
vestigators to purchase cars, thereby saving much
time and energy. Excellent stores make it un-
necessary for the visitor to bring with him any-
thing but the most unusual items needed.

The equipment includes two stone laboratory
buildings with 12 rooms, a small frame labora-
tory, a shop, a greenhouse, a number of lath and
screen shelters, and a “cave” with nearly con-
stant temperature conditions. All of the ap-
pliances and supplies commonly needed in morph-

THE COLLECTING

47

NET 147

ological and physiological work are on hand, but
unusual pieces of equipment are secured only
when needed in a particular investigation. A
small library is maintained with files of the prin-
cipal botanical, physiological and ecological jour-
nals, as well as those of general scientific inter-
est. There is also a small collection of texts, hand-
hooks, reference works, floras and books relating
to the desert regions of the world.

The work of the Desert Laboratory centers
around the ecology and physiology of desett
plants with the chief emphasis on their water re-
lations. The importance of water to the living
organism, vital as it is throughout nature, as-
sumes a new emphasis when those parts of the
world’s surface are considered in which it is so
scarce. Its importance in connection with growth,
respiration, photosynthesis, movements and other
physiological phenomena becomes more critical.
The availability of water to the plant is seen to
affect its germination, its success in giving new in-
dividuals a start in life, its distributional move-
ments, its genetical behavior, its response to path-
ogenic organisms, its intricate relations with in-
sects and other animal life, and the whole trend
of evolutionary development. The flora of the
southwestern states and of northwestern Mexico
comprises a very high percentage of plants re-
stricted to that region, a considerable number of
genera not found elsewhere, and even some six
families of plants which have come about in this
relatively small area. The great majority of
plants confined to the desert region are so intri-
cately adjusted to its conditions that they have
not spread into adjacent, more moist, regions,

VEGETATION IN THE VICINITY OF THE LABORATORY

148

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 46

and none of them, except certain tropical cacti,
have become spontaneous weeds in other places.
The consideration of the desert flora not only em-
phasizes the deep-seated influence of the scarcity
of water, but also indicates that Arizona, Sonora
and the adjacent regions have been desert for a
very long time.

Broadly conceived biological work must keep
in view the larger procession of nature, and the
complex relations between the various groups of
organisms and the multifarious physical con-
ditions, as well as the intimate physiological pro-
cesses of the individual organism. An effort to
understand the life of the desert, like that of the
ocean, is an extremely complex task. William
Keith Brooks used to say to his students, “My
hand is related to everything in the universe.” In
studying the life of desert or ocean it becomes
obvious that no feature of them is without po-
tential influence upon the particular problem that
is being investigated.

Two of the most striking features of the veze-
tation in the Tucson region are the gradual
changes encountered in climbing any of the larg-
er mountains, and the abrupt changes that wll
be noted in going from one type of soil to another
on the floor of the desert. The mountains present
a panorama of plant life extending from the
cacti, diminutive trees and thorny shrubs of the
desert, through the region of yuccas and century
plants, the open groves of evergreen oaks, and
the forests of yellow pine, to the heavy stands of
spruce, Douglas fir and aspen. The desert dis-
plays a simple pattern of vegetation in which a
relatively small number of species form a still
smaller number of communities, each distinctive
and each occupying areas of different physio-
graphic history and different soil characteristics.

Some of the earlier work of the laboratory was
concerned with the mountain panorama and the
relation existing between the vertical distribu-
tion of the vegetation and the gradients of con-
ditions. At present, attention is being given to
the desert floor, the distribution of some of its
commonest plants, and the investigation of the
conditions which appear to be concerned in the
limitation of these plants to certain habitats. The
perennial plants of the Tucson region fall into
two groups which are very sharply marked.
These are the succulent plants, represented almost
solely by the cacti, and the non-succulents, rep-
resented by plants of a wide range of relation-
ships. There are a number of very marked dif-
ferences between these groups, not only in their
structure and anatomy, but in their relation to
environment and in their physiological behavior.
The cactus is shallow-rooted, presents a transpir-
ing surface which is very small with respect to its
volume, thereby reducing its chlorophyll-bearing
surface as well, and by every feature which con-
serves water also retarding the gas exchanges be-

tween its tissues and the atmosphere. Through
its capacity for the rapid and considerable storage
of water, it is enabled to meet its needs by util-
ization of the moisture that is available in the
surface levels of the soil for a very brief time
after every rain. The non-succulent plants have
not the uniformity of structure and behavior of
the cacti, but they are alike in their dependence
on the more deep-seated water of the soil. They
differ among themselves in the extent of their
leaf surface, in the seasonal duration of their
foliage, in the location of their chlorophyll-bear-
ing tissues, as well as in the character of their
root systems. Experience has shown the great
plasticity of these plants with respect to water
supply. Many of them are able to live for weeks
ina soil which has fallen below the moisture con-
tent that is theoretically presumed to cause wilt-
ing, at the same time that they are exposed to hot
dry air which is in almost constant motion. Under
such conditions all growth is in abeyance, many
leaves fall and even twigs and branches may die.
‘Lhe water content of the leaves and stems falls
to a low level, and the plant is in a state of dor-
mancy which in many ways resembles that of a
seed, except that there is the small but inevitable
loss of water day by day. On the other hand, if
an abundant and constant supply of water is given
to one of these hardy plants, it will grow rapidly,
soon exceed its normal size, present a larger leaf
surface and produce vastly greater crops of seed.
It must, however, have a well drained soil, with
favorable conditions for oxygen supply to the
roots.

One of the commonest plants in southern Ari-
zona is the creosote bush, which ranges from
southern Nevada to central Mexico, growing in
extensive pure stands in some of the most un-
favorable parts of this great desert domain. As
a plant which has successfully solved the difficul-
ties of a low and uncertain water supply and a soil
highly charged with salts or impregnated with
calcareous hardpan, the creosote bush is calculated
to elicit the admiration of the plant student. Much
of the work at the Desert Laboratory is concen-
trated at the present time in an attack on the eco-
logical and physiological behavior of this ever-
green bush. While the cactus is drawing water
from its succulent tissues for its current needs,
the creosote bush, like all of its non-succulent fel-
lows, is making a struggle each day to maintain
a balance between its water income and its water
expenditure. The progress that is being made in
this work leads to the hope that some of its re-
sults may serve as a key to a better understanding
of the non-succulent plants in general. The sap
of the foliage of the creosote bush has, much of the
time, a very high osmotic value as compared with
that of other plants. An extended study is being
made of the differences in the osmotic value of
the sap of plants in different habitats, favorable

AUGUST I, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

149

and unfavorable, and this work is being carried
through several seasons, coupled with an investi-
gation of the moisture and salt content of the soil
in which the bushes are growing. At the same
time an investigation is under way that will be-
tray the manner in which the shrub handles its
water, the course of the daily fluctuations of
water in stem and leaf, and the influence of ex-
perimental conditions on the ability of the plant
to maintain its water solvency.

Another plant of the desert which is under ob-
servation and investigation is the ocotillo, a large
member of a very small family, which Dr. W. T.
Hornaday aptly described as looking like a “bunch
of loosely held wands.” Its branches have little
green color, and beneath their bark is a horn-like
layer which serves as insulation against loss of
water. The leaves appear shortly after every rainy
period, and are thin, soft and well provided with
stomata. A few days after the soil begins to dry
out at a depth of 15 cm., the leaves turn yellow
and fall. If it rains again, two weeks later there
will be another crop of leaves, perhaps there will
be a dozen crops of them in a year. When it is
in leaf the ocotillo uses large quantities of water
and is in fact a moist-country plant. When the
leaves fall it becomes an ideal desert plant. Sev-
eral pieces of work have been done on the ocotillo
at the Desert Laboratory, notably on its trans-
piration and stomatal movements. Work now
under way is furnishing a much more precise
basis for our understanding of the habits of both
phases in the life of this plant.

As a background for all of the investigations on
plants, continuous records are being kept of the
principal climatic and environmental conditions.
The importance*of the seasonal distribution of
rainfall and its effects on the great reservoir of
water in the soil has led to detailed instrumenta-
tion in these fields. In addition to an electric
recording rain gage in the laboratory garden,
there is a series of thirty six gages in different
parts of the laboratory grounds, sixteen of them
arranged in a 300-meter square for the determina-
tion of the local variability of the rainfall and
eight of them at 100-meter intervals on the slopes
of Tumamoc Hill, for the recording of vertical
differences in each shower. In addition, two lines
of long-period gages extend west and southwest
from Tucson, to Yuma and the Gulf of Califor-
nia, by which semi-annual readings are secured

from these very arid and thinly settled regions.
A percolimeter is in operation for the measure-
ment of the run-off and penetration in each
shower, and fortnightly readings of soil moisture
are taken at eight depths to two meters, and oc-
casionally to four meters. The temperature of
the soil is also being followed at depths of one
and two meters in connection with this work.
Records have been taken over long periods of the
temperature of the air and soil, humidity, evap-
oration, wind and sunshine, as well as many rec-
ords designed to show in what manner and de-
gree the conditions in certain habitats differ from
the climatic conditions of the region,

Records are being kept of the fluctuations in
plant life as well as in the climatic conditions.
Several small areas on the laboratory grounds
were carefully charted in 1906, and are perma-
nently marked so as to make possible for many
years a study of the changes taking place. Other
areas on several types of soil are used for a cen-
sus of the short-lived plants which appear after
the summer and winter rainy periods. Areas are
also under observation on which the creosote
bushes have been charted, and the rate and man-
ner of reproduction and establishment are being
followed from year to year. On some of these
areas the old bushes have been removed, and vari-
ous modifications of the natural surface have been
made, as by raking, spading, or covering with soil,
with a view to shedding light on the very poor
natural reproduction of this plant. Soil cultures
of the creosote bush are also being carried on, with
soils differing in texture and in the amounts of
calcium, these being designed to give data on
comparative growth, and also to supply material
for a study of their water behavior under the dif-
ferent soil conditions.

Visitors who are seriously interested in the
work of the Desert Laboratory are always wel-
come. The time given to them is amply repaid
by the fact that they are able thereafter to vis-
ualize much better the work that is going on, and
are able to read more understandingly the publica-
tions from the laboratory. Those who are inter-
ested in the work, but who are unable to see it
in person, should apply for copies of the annual
report, reprinted from the Yearbook of the Car-
negie Institution, for an illustrated booklet on
the laboratory, or for such separates of journal
articles as may be available for distribution.

A SCIENTIST’S IMPRESSIONS OF THE PROGRESS OF EDUCATION AND
SCIENCE IN RUSSIA
( Continued from Page 145 )

and work in Soviet Russia. On the portals of
the First University of Moscow, the oldest uni-
versity of Russia, there is written the following
motto: Nauka Trudiastchimsia, or “Knowledge
jor Those that Labor.” The university which,

less than fifteen years ago, admitted only the very
rich, with very few exceptions, and where a labor-
ing man or a peasant had little chance indeed of
ever being admitted, unless special circumstances
favored him, has now a sine qua non requirement

150

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 46

for admission that the candidate be one who
labors, with his hands or with his brains. This
motto can serve as a device for the whole Russian
situation at the present time.

Following the World War and the Revolution,
many Russian scientists left their country and
went to seek a home on other shores. This, as
well as the fact that numerous new institutions of
higher learning have been opened, accounts for
the great shortage of professors and scientists in
Soviet Russia, as a result of which one professor
usually occupies more than one position. A well
known physiologist enumerated to me seven po-
sitions which he holds and to which he has to
devote a certain amount of his time. In most
cases these duties are limited to attending con-
ferences once a week or once a month. However,
he has to supervise the work of several assistants
in at least four institutions, each of which would
well require the service of his full time.

The younger generation of scientists has not
arrived yet, at least not in sufficient numbers.
This is due largely to the ravages of the War, the
Revolution and the Famine, which led not only to
a direct destruction of many promising youths,
but also to the crippling of the institutions of
higher learning, for a few years. However, one
encounters everywhere enthusiastic groups of
young men and young women, recently graduated
from the universities, eager for knowledge and
for new ideas and willing to sacrifice all material
comfort for an opportunity to devote their life
to scientific work.

The term University or Polytechnicum has dis-
appeared from the Russian vocabulary and has
been replaced by the term uz, which desigiaates
merely an institution of higher learning. To be
admitted to one of these now numerous institu-
tions one must be a graduate of a gymnasium,
with a seven-year course, only little less vigorous
in its training than formerly, or of a technical
school, with a five year course, or of a rabfak, or
workers’ faculty, with a three or four year course.
The latter is especially interesting, because this
type of school originated since the Revolution. It
is an attempt to give workers and peasants a pre-
paratory education, in concentrated form, ena-
bling them to enter a vuz as soon as possible.
There are now in Russia nearly one hundred such
schools or workers’ faculties with about 50,000
students ; while few of the students in the other
two types of schools, especially in the first, re-
ceive stipends, practically all of the students in
the latter school receive stipends of forty rubles*
per month. This is about sufficient to cover the
cost of books, clothing and living expenses.

When a worker is taken from the factory and
is sent to the rabfak or to the vuz he is given the
full wage during his entire course of study which
he was earning at that time at the factory. He
* An equivalent of twenty dollars.

is encouraged in every way possible to continue
his training and education. Probably two-thirds
or more of all the students in the vuges hold
stipends, these ranging from forty rubles per
month and up to two hundred rubles per month
during the last one or two years of training. Out
of this the student has to pay for his meals and
books. He usually obtains a free room in one of
the dormitories and pays a nominally low price
for his meals. This enables him to devote him-
self entirely to his studies. When he graduates
from the wuz, there is no difficulty in obtaining a
position. Asa matter of fact, in many instances,
especially in the case of engineers, he has already
been engaged by some factory a year or so be-
fore he graduates. If he wants to continue fur-.
ther training, in order to devote himself to re-
search work or to teaching, opportunity is given
either at the same institution or at one of the
numerous investigational institutions.

It is interesting to note that most of the men
usually take up technical courses, engineering and
agronomy courses, while the women go into med-
icine, nursing and biology.

The courses of study in the higher institutions
are highly specialized; the students in agriculture
receive, for example, a three-year course in prac-
tical subjects with only a glimpse into the funda-
mentals; the students in engineering receive a
five-year course in some specialized branch. The
more brilliant students, however, can be left for
another three years as candidates, then receiving
a salary of two hundred rubles a month and
specializing in one particular branch of science ;
these students or candidates may later qualify as
professors.

As to the professor himself, his salary and liv-
ing conditions are favorable when compared with
those of the members of the working class, peas-
antry and intellectuals. His salary ranges from
300 to 1200 rubles per month, depending on the
number of positions that he holds and_ their
nature. He has also larger and more convenient
living quarters, and is allowed a three-months
vacation instead of the ordinary two to four
weeks. As long as he keeps away from political
activities, if he is not a communist, and devotes
himself to his duties as investigator or teacher, he
is not only left alone but even variously encour-
aged. The director of the institution is usually a
worker appointed by the government, but he inter-
feres very little with the research activities of the
faculty, as long as the members do not indulge
in underground political activities. It is interest-
ing to note that the student body has something
to say concerning the election of the professors
and the nature of the courses to be given. Strik-
ingly enough, it is this body that usually insists
that the courses be made stiffer and the students
be held more to their tasks. If a professor is
discharged, for one reason or another, the great-

AUuGUST I, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET

I51

est punishment usually consists in sending .him
out of Leningrad or Moscow to a corresponding
chair in a provincial university.

The scientific institutes are very well equipped
with apparatus and supplies. They have been
completely reorganized since the Revolution and
are actively supported, especially those institutes
which deal with natural sciences, industry and
agriculture. Some of them would do honor to
any country in Western Europe or America, es-
pecially those dealing with biological, chemical
and soil studies.

Considerable emphasis has been placed recently
in the newspapers on the fact that Russian scien-
tists are requested to keep in clese touch with the
practical and applied. This is, to a certain extent,
correct. There are, however, two justifications
for this tendency. With the large numbers of
growing industries and with the rapid develop-
ment of scientific agriculture in a’ large rural
country, in which ninety per cent of the popula-
tion was illiterate only a dozen years ago, it is
quite natural that emphasis should be laid upon
practical problems. There is a tremendous need
in Russia for practically trained men and women;
numerous new problems arise daily which require
immediate solution. Where are these problems
to be solved and where are the men to be trained
if not at these institutions? Further, the Russian
scientist has frequently been accused of lacking
direct contact with the practical and of te>ding
to be too theoretical. For a poor country, w’th
great daily needs, this is too much of a luxury,

unless certain returns to the practical can be made.

There is no doubt that the engineer, chemist
and agronomist receive primary consideration and
are accordingly free in their expressions as well.
The scientist, and especially the economist, phil-
osopher and historian, are more limited in op-
portunities and in freedom of expression. How-
ever, with all the forces driving toward the prac-
tical, there is still considerable evidence of oppor-
tunities for research in various fields. This is
shown by the numerous scientific publications ap-
pearing at present in Soviet Russia. To pass
judgment upon the merits of many of these is
beyond my scope; similar criticism could be ap-
plied to various scientific bodies in other countries
as well.

One must also call attention here to the great
progress made in lower education, with the result
that within a brief period of time, the percentage
of illiteracy has been greatly reduced. The most
pepular corner at a railway station or a club is
the bookshelf full of new books and journals, sold
at comparatively low cost, which are eagerly ex-
amined by people, most of whom could not dis-
tinguish one letter from another ten years ago.

Russia lives at present under a terrific strain
in an attempt to change completely its economic
and social structure. Everything that one needs
to satisfy ones physical and spiritual needs is
being dished out in minimum doses. The scientist
and professor are not those that suffer most from
this economic reorganization.

THE COMPOSITION OF BONE ASH

Dr. SERGIUS MoRGULIS

_Professor of Biochemistry, School of Medicin:,

The investigation of the composition of hone is
one of the earliest attempts at the study of the
chemistry of animal tissues. The great prepon-
derance of mineral matter in bony structures
made it the favorite material for chemical analy-
sis long before the other tissues of the organism
were ‘studied from this viewpoint. The o!der
chemists have found that the mineral components
of the bone contained a preponderance of basic
radicles, but, dominated by a preconceived idea
that the bone salts must be neutral, they have
spared no effort to find extra acid radicles to ac-
count for the discrepancy. The result of th’s was
rather disastrous so far as attaining a clear under-
tanding of the chemical nature of the bone is con-
cerned. Only sirice the ideas and principles, of
physical chemistry have assumed a dominant role
in the study of biochemical problems has there
heen a revival of interest in the chemistry of
bone. The physical chemist, however, has at-
tacked the fundamental problem of how a struc-
ture consisting of insoluble salts could be derived

University of Nebraska

from soluble components dissolved in the circu-
lating blood without the fundamental knowledge
of the nature of the salts which constitute the
mineral matter of bone. This and the lack of
appreciation of the biological factors involved in
hone formation such as vitamin, hormonal and
possibly also enzyme factors has had the inevit-
able consequence. The problem, instead of hav-
ing been clarified through the application of
physico-chemical principles and methods, has been
thrown into complete confusion. ~The extremely
contradictory findings from this angle have finally
forced even the physical chemist to realize that
these findings may be independently correct and
yet have nothing to do with the question of how
the insoluble bone salts were deposited from the
serum. A more recent attempt at a solution of
the problem ofthe nature of the bone ash salts
was inspired by the x-ray spectrophotometric an-
alysis of crystal structure. It is still too early to
appraise the true significance of the results of
these x-ray spectrophotometric studies. Of the

152

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 46

very few studies so far made, some think defi-
nitely to have established that the basic component
of the bone ash is of the nature of an apatite
mineral, Ca[ (Ca3(PO4)2)3]CO3, i. e. a com-
plex salt of CaCO3 and Ca3 (PO 4)2, thus ac-
cepting the view which was proposed by Hoppe
some seventy years ago.

When one considers what different calcium
salts constitute the basis of the bone ash (and
quantitatively these represent by far the largest
part), there is no doubt as to the presence of
CaCO3, but with regard to the Ca3 (PO4)2
some doubts have been raised. The chief objection
to the latter, apart from purely physico-chemical
considerations, is the fact that a pure compound
of this nature is not known to exist. One can
readily accept this as a valid objection without,
however, being obliged to resort to an hypothesis
that, instead of a tricalcium phosphate, secondary
calcium phosphate, CaHPO4, is the substance
constituting the bone ash in combination with
CaO. All the evidence, both from spectrophoto-
metric and from chemical analysis, fails to sup-
port the idea that CaHPO4 is a component of
the bone salts. Is the apatite structure of the
bone ash salts, namely, the complex calcium
phosphate-carbonate, the only other alternative ?
Does the chemical analysis of the bone ash sup-
port such a hypotheis ?

As a result of our study of the composition of
the ash from the vertebrae of a large series of
animals, from cartilaginous fish to mammals, we
came to the conclusion that the bone ash cannot
be a compound like Caf (Ca3(PO4)2)3]CO3.
Our analyses were made on the bone salts after
the organic matrix had been leached out by
means of alkaline glycerol at about 250°. The
ash so prepared and dried to constant weight was
analyzed for Ca, Mg, K, P, CO2. In addition, the
ash solution made by dissolving a weighed quanti-
ty in a definite amount of 0.1 N HCl was titrated
back with 0.1 N NaOH using methyl orange as
indicator. In this way we were able to determine
the balance of acid and basic equivalents in the
ash. We found the following outstanding facts
in our comparative analyses. The chemical com-
position of the salts of vertebrae is remarkably
uniform. The only striking difference occurs
between the vertebrae of the marine fishes and
those of all other vertebrates examined, and this
consists in the much lower CaCQO3 content
found in the marine fishes. Whereas the calcium
phosphate : calcium carbonate ratio is, on the
average, 12:1 in marine fishes, in the other ver-
tebrates it is 6.6:1. The other significant fact re-
vealed by the analyses is the excess of calcium
which cannot be accounted for either as phosphate
or as carbonate, thus indicating that a third type
of calcium compound must exist in the bone ash.

Finally, it was found that the basic equivalents
exceed the acid equivalents, the ratio between
these two being, on the average, 19 to 18. We
are therefore led to believe that the bone ash con-
tains Ca(OH )2 in addition to CaCO3 and Ca3-
(PO4)2. The fact that the residual Ca over
residual P ratios in our analyses range from 1.99
to 2.13, whereas if the residual salt were only
Ca3(PO4)2 this ratio would be 1.94, also shows
unmistakably that another calcium salt must be
present in the bone ash.

In spite of the opinion, presumably sustained
by x-ray spectrophotometric studies, that the
CaCOz and Ca3(PO4)2 are present in bone as
an apatite compound, we must decline to sub-
scribe to such a view for the following reasons.
On the assumption of an apatite crystalline struc-
ture such as Ca[ (Ca3(PO4)2)3]CO3, one would
expect that the phosphate : carbonate ratio in
bone ash would be 9.3. As a matter of fact we
have seen how in marine fishes this ratio is con-
siderably higher while in the other vertebrates
much lower than the theoretically expected ratio.
Furthermore we know that this ratio also varies
under pathological conditions as well as with age,
mode of nutrition, etc. This would hardly be ex-
pected if the CaCO3 and Ca3(PO4)2 were parts
of a definite crystalline compound. Finally, as
will be shown presently, the carbonate and phos-
phate do not stand in a definite and simple molar
ratio as would be expected from a chemical com-
pound as distinguished from a mixture. Accord-
ing to our analytical results, the average compo-
sition of the bone ash of marine fishes cor-
responds to: 82.15% Ca3(PO4)2, 7.00% CaCO3
and 3.74% Ca(OH)z2. In terms of mols these
values are 82.15 /310, 7.00/100 and 3.74y74, thus
giving a molar ratio. of 6.00:1.57:1.13. Similarly,
the average composition of the ash for all other
vertebrates examined is 77.20% Ca3(PO4)2,
11.81% CaCOz3 and 3.13% Ca(OH)2, cor-
responding to a molar ratio of 6.00 : 2.82 : 1.02.
It is interesting to observe in this connection that
similar ratios may be obtained from bone analyses
published by other investigators, and also from
analyses of so-called tricalcium phosphate. The
latter which we analysed so far may be of two dis-
tinct types, consisting of Ca3(PO4)2 either with
Ca(OH)2 or with CaHPOg, but in either case
ina molar ratio of 6.00 : 1.00. Obviously, there-
fore, a simple compound Ca3(PO4)2 does not
exist by itself but always occurs as part of a com-
plex salt, and in bone ash the evidence indicates
that the same complex salt exists. It will be
noted that between the carbonate and phosphate
neither the molar ratio demanded by the hypo-
thesis of the apatite structure nor any other defi-
nite molar ratio can be shown. The chemical
analyses suggest that the basic complex salt com-

posing bone ash is Ca[ (Ca3(PO4)2)6](OH)2.

AUGUST TI, 1931 ]

Hii COLLECTING NET

153

BILE SALTS
Dr. SuHtro TASHIRO
Professor of Biochemistry, University of Cincinnati
L. H. Scumipt
School of Medicine, University of Cincinnati

While studying the toxic action of bile salts, we
found that the administration of thyroid principle
to the guinea pig increased the toxicity of the bile
salts in much the same manner as Hunt found
some years ago that the similar treatment in-
creased the susceptibility of the rat to the toxic
action of acetonitril. This increased sensitiv-
ity which, by the way, can also be demonstrated
with arbacia and fish embryos, under limited con-
ditions, is the most pronounced in the gastric ulcer
producing action of bile salts in the guinea pig.
Some of you probably know that Sellard dis-
covered years ago that when a small amount of
bile salts is injected into a rabbit or a guinea
pig, ulcerations are produced in their stomach.
The lethal dosage for this action is quite sharp
under a given condition. In normal male guinea
pigs, an intraperitoneal injection of less than 20
mgs. per 100 gms. body weight will not produce
these ulcerations, but in the pig, fed with 0.2 mgs.
of thyroxin twice or more, even 15 mgs. per unit
weight will cause the lesion. With a greater thy-
roxin feeding and a smaller injection of bile salts,
we find interesting results. With 12 mgs. of bile
salts per unit weight, no guinea pig shows ulcer
when the thyroid principle is fed once; when fed
five times, 62% showed the lesion; and when fed
ten times, 83% showed a positive lesion. I may
add here that the thyroid administration not only
increases susceptibility of the pig to the toxic
action of bile salts, but it also produces a type of
pathological picture which is similar to that found
in the very acute gastric ulcer of man.

As to the mechanism by wh’ch the toxicity of
hile salts increases under the thyroxin treatment,
we are of an opinion that a change in lipoidal, or
I should say, lipid metabolism, must be respon-
sible. There are several lines of evidence to sup-
port this view. In the first place, it has been
found in our laboratory that certain lipids such
as lecithin, cephalin, sulpholipid (Tsuruta) and
cholesteryl oleate (Ishii) are the only compounds
which have power to protect the animal from this
toxic action of bile salts.

In the second place, any conditions, physiolog-
ical or otherwise, such as sex and seasonal varia-
tion, in which the lipid content of the body is dit-
ferent, manifest a different degree of resistance
to the toxic actions of bile salts. For instance,
sartorius muscle of a male frog requires less bile
salts to produce tetanus than that of a female.
The toxic dose required to preduce ulcer in a

male guinea pig is much smaller than in a female.
Not only are these minimum toxic doses different,
but also the amount of lipids required to neutral-
ize the toxic effect of the bile salts differs with sex.
It requires more lipids to antagonize the same
amounts of bile salts with male than with female.
The muscle of a winter frog is more resistant to
bile salts than that of a spring frog. The more
of these lipids the body contains, the more resist-
ant it is toward toxic action of bile salts.

Since phospholipids are the most outstanding of
all the antagonizers both in effectiveness as antag-
onizers and in the quantity occurring naturally in
the body, we have attempted to discover whether
or not the decrease in phospholipid alone can be
responsible for the increased susceptibility of thy-
roid-fed animals to bile salts. The normal male
guinea pig requires 18 mgs. of lecithin to antag-
onize 20 mgs. of bile salts, and the pig, fed with
the effective amounts of thyroxin, requires 44
mgs. of lecithin to neutralize the same amount of
bile salts. Therefore thyroxin treatment must
have decreased antagonizers which correspond to
26 mgs. of lecithin in each 100 gms. of body
weight, or 1 mg. of lecithin phosphorus. But the
guinea pig contains only 8 mgs. of lipid phos-
phorus per 100 cc. of blood and consequently only
0.6 mgs. of blood lipid phosphorus per 100 gms.
of body weight. In other words, the thyroid-fed
animal must have lost about twice as much phos-
pholid as contained in whole blood before treat-
ment.

As a matter of fact, we found in rabbits that
the decrease in blood phospholipid under similar
thyroxin treatment is about 22%. Although it is
highly probable that a rabbit and a guinea pig
may not act in exactly the same manner, we are
inclined to believe these data suggest very strong-
ly that the decrease in phospholipid alone could
not be responsible for this increased susceptibility.
And certainly the thyroid administration must
also diminish other antagonizers such as choles-
tryl oleate, but how much has not yet been de-
termined. At any event we are certain that the
phospholipid content of the body is a correct in-
dex of its resistance against bile salts. From
these and other evidences, that I can not go into
now, we wish to conclude that the gastric ulcer in
the human is a metabolic disease involving lipids,
and that hyperthyroidism is one of the most ag-
gravating conditions for the gastric ulcer, par-
ticularly in the male.

154 THE

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 46

THE ENOLIZATION OF GELATIN BY NEUTRAL SALTS
Dr. J. M. JouLin
Assoc. Professor of Biochemistry, School of Medicine, Vanderbilt Umversity

Loeb’s well known studies show that the action
of neutral salts on gelatin can be accounted for
on the basis of Donnan’s theory of membrane
equilibria and can be predicted and quantitatively
expressed by a mathematical equation. These
explanations, however, do not hold in the case of
gelatin which contains neither acid nor base. The
writer has found, for instance, that a neutral salt
added to a solution of gelatin, which is entirely
free of acid and base, or contains but very small
amounts of these reagents, increases rather than
decreases the viscosity of such a solution. Loeb
found that a neutral salt added to a solution of
gelatin at a pH of 3.0 did not affect the hydrogen
ion concentration. The writer has found that
when no acid, or when but small amounts are
present, a neutral salt increases the hydrogen ion
concentration of such a solution.

Aside from any consideration of the probable
effect of a neutral salt on the hydrogen ion activ-

ity of gelatin it seemed possible that this increased
acidity might be due to the enolization of the gel-
atin by the neutral salt. Such an effect had, so
far as is known, not been observed before. Pauli
and his co-workers had, on the contrary, found
that neutral salts do not affect the optical activity
of proteins. The writer found in his experiments
that a considerable number of neutral salts great-
ly affected the optical rotation of solutions of ash-
free gelatin and that small amounts of acid pro-
duced no similar effect.

This action of neutral salts, which is assumed
to be that of a tautomeric displacement involving
the equilibrium between the keto and the enol
forms of the protein, is proportionate to the salt
concentration. The explanation given for this ef-
fect does not exclude Hardy’s postulation of a
union between the neutral salt and the nitrogen of
the protein.

OXIDATIONS PRODUCED BY GONOCOCCI

Dr. E. S. GuzMANn Barron
Assistant Professor of Biochemistry, University of Chicago

It is well known that many bacteria possess the
power of oxidizing not only the simple carbohy-
drates but also their fermentation products, since
aerobic growth is known to occur on lactate,
acetate, succinate, glycerol, etc., when these form
the only source of carbon. During the last years
those investigators concerned with the problem
of cellular oxidations, have studied some bacterial
oxidations with great detail. It seems obvious
that for a comprehensive study of cell oxidations
we ought to look for those cells possessing an oxi-
dation mechanism as simple as possible, uncompli-
cated by oxidation processes beyond the investiga-
tor’s control, such as endogenous oxidations.

A suspension of gonococci washed twice in sa-
line solution (0.154 M NaCl), and buffered at
different pH’s from 4 to 10, does not show any
appreciable oxygen consumption when the proper
aseptic precautions have been taken. This ab-
sence of endogenous respiration renders the ma-
terial an excellent one for the study of cell oxida-
tions. The following substrates have been used:
glucose, Na lactate, pyruvate, acetate, formate,
succinate; glycoccoll, d-alanine, all of which are
oxidized by B. Coli according to Cook and
Stephenson. Gonococci are able to oxidize only
the first three substrates. None of them is oxi-
dized to completion. One mole of glucose takes
up two moles of oxygen; one mole of lactate
takes up one mole of oxygen, and one mole of
pyruvate requires one atom of oxygen. The ve-
locity of oxidation of these substrates is as fol-

lows: lactate < glucose x pyruvate. The effect
of pH on the activity of oxidation of these sub-
strates has been studied. Glucose and lactate
show an optimum activity from pH 6.3 to 6.9:
Pyruvate from 6.5 to 7.0. From this optimum
plateau the velocity of oxidation falls asymptoti-
cally. Glucose and pyruvate are not oxidized at
pH’s 5 and 9. Lactate is oxidized within wider
limits: from pH 4.6 to pH 10. At pH’s 5 and 9
lactate is oxidized to pyruvic acid. By changing
the pH of the bacterial suspension it is possible
to dissociate the process of lactic acid oxidation 11
two steps: first step, lactic to pyruvic; second
step, pyruvic to acetic. We can therefore picture
the chain of reactions taking place when one mole
of glucose is oxidized by gonococci, as follows:

CH 20,4 gives 2CH3;CHOHOHCOOH (Hy-
drolysis )

2CH3;CHOHCOOH plus Os

gives 2CH3COCOOH plus 2H2O0
2CH,COCOOH plus Og gives
2CH3COOH plus 2CO2

KCN at 0.001 M concentration inhibits the ox-
idation of these three substrates, although at dif-
ferent levels. The oxidation of glucose and py-
ruvic acid are inhibited about 80 per cent. The
oxidation of lactate is almost completely inhibited.

Reversible dyes act in the same manner as in
normal tissues; they increase the oxygen con-
sumption only when the oxidizing enzymes have
been inhibited by cyanide.

ee i eel it ee

a

————

AUGUST I, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 15

un

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Aldventures in Biophysics. A. V. Hill. 162 pp.
University of Pennsylvania Press. $3.00.

This book contains five lectures given by Pro-
fessor Hill during the autumn of 1930 in Phila-
delphia under the auspices of the Johnson Foun-
dation for Medical Physics. Not all of Hill’s un-
usual appeal as a lecturer, his magnetic persor-
ality, his sense of the value of “human interest,”
has been lost in the fixation of these lectures on
the printed pages. Both the general physiologist
and the biochemist will read the book with a fas-
cination that makes its title, “Adventures,” seem
well chosen.

The five lectures are entitled: I. Some Ad-
ventures with Vapor Pressure; II. The State of
Water in Tissues; III. The Conception of the
Steady State; IV. The Time Relations of the
Events in Muscular Contraction and V. The Me-
chanics of Muscular Contraction and Other Mat-
ters.

In the first lecture, he explains how some an-
omolous results in experiments or the heat pro-
duction of muscle, measured with a delicate ther-
mopile, proved to be due to the change in vapor
pressure of muscle flu'd as its osmotic pressure
rises during activity. This apparent defeat was
turned into victory and the very delicate instru-
ment ‘‘made to expiate its crimes” by using it as
a convenient and surprisingly accurate means for
measurement of small differences in osmotic pres-
sure. Applications of this method are the chief
subject material of the second lecture which
brings out the idea that, contrary to much of the
recent tendency of adsorption theories, nearly all
of the water of muscle and other tissues appears
to be “free” in the sense that it can act as a
solvent.

The third lecture develops the thesis that the
steady state in living things must be regarded as
dynamic, as due to sustained expenditure of en-
ergy, not as equilibrium. The experiments chosen
to prove and illustrate this idea are mostly those
dealing with osmotic pressure differences and ad-
justments but they cover a wide range of biologi-
cal material. The varied mechanisms of these ad-
justments “will provide an excuse for many of
us, for some time yet, to work in laboratories by
the sea.”

In the fourth lecture, Hill presents interesting
and suggestive new ideas concerning the problems
of muscular contraction, while pointing out how
far we are from an understanding of either its
chemistry or its mechanics. He pays considerable
attention to the relative significance of phos-
phagen breakdown and lactic acid production both

in this and in the last lecture which is chiefly
concerned with the relations between total energy
liberation and the heat production during muscu-
lar contraction.

To research workers, the book should be useful
practically, because of descriptions of special in-
strumets and an excellent bibliography ; inspira-
tionally, because of its unbiased presentation of the
present unsatisfactoriness of theories of muscu-
lar contraction and of dynamic equilibrium, while
clearly pointing out for these mysteries some of
the clues which hold promise for immediate in-
vestigation. —Puivie H. MrrcHet.

Heredity. A. Franklin Shull. 2nd ed. xv-345
pp. McGraw-Hill. $3.00.

The new edition of “Heredity” by Dr. A.
Franklin Shull shows several points of improve-
ment over the first, excellent as that was.
Designed as a text for a lecture course for be-
ginners, it fulfills its purpose admirably. The
chapters are concise, unified and clearly written,
the illustrations well chosen and not too numer-
ous, the subject matter up-to-date and critically
selected. The introduction of material on chro-
mosomes and sex in plants and especally the ad-
dition of problems at the end of each chapter are
to be highly commended. Other changes, all for
the better, are the expansion of the first chapter
on Rise of Knowledge of Heredity, the revision of
chapters on Immigration, Population Problems,
Evolution and Heredity in Man, the addition of
sections on multiple allelomorphs and _ lethal
homozygotes. The discussion of human heredity
and of engenics is critical and restrained.

Two impressions given are questioned : one, the
restriction of the use of the term Fr to genera-
tions or individuals derived from homozygous par-
ents and of F2 to progeny of such heterozygous!
Fi individuals: the other, the statement in the
chapter on linkage that “several instances of link-
age in man are known.” The reviewer has
supposed that although sex linkage has been
proved in man, not even the various sex-linked
factors have been proved to be linked with each
other. The reviewer has also found #t more
satisfactory in teaching to introduce multiple al-
lelomorphism and sex-linkage after monohybrid
crosses and to postpone a discussion of evidence
for location of genes in chromosomes until after
the preentation of linkage and sex-linkage, since
these phenomena strengthen the discussion.
These are, however, merely points of order and
in no way lessen the value of the book for the
purpose for which it is intended

ANNA R. WHITING,

156 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 46

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Wane Oa GUCR Merce. crayarst aceholayeraieinieketersicietetetereltats eis Editor

Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Catt<ll

THE COLLECTING NET SCHOLARSHIPS

Each summer for the last three years THE
CottectinG Ner has been successful in accumu-
lating the sum of five hundred dollars for its
scholarship fund. In the Fall the money is
awarded in the form of five one hundred dollar
scholarships to assist promising students financial-
ly at Woods Hole during the following summer.

These five scholarships will be available again
this year for work at one of the local scientific
institutions in 1932. They will be assigned in
September by a committee of senior investigators.
Any student taking a course at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory and having the following
qualifications is eligible for the award:

The student must show evidence of ability to
engage in research work. Judgment of this
ability will in part be based on a written report
of problem work done at Woods Hole during the
summer. Such work need not necessarily be
done in connection with the course. Preference
will be given to students who without such
financial assistance would be unable to attend the
1932 session of the laboratory. The student must
engage in a full-time research problem at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory for a period of at least
six weeks during the summer of 1932.

Application blanks may be obtained from the
director of any course or from the office of THE
CottectinG Net. A summary of work accom-
plished during the period in which the scholar-
ship is held will be printed in our magazine.

Professor Hans Spemann, who is now visiting
the Marine Biological Laboratory, comes to us
with no need of an introduction. He is an out-
standing student of the physiology of develop-
ment. Trained by Boveri at Wurzburg, he spent
his earlier years instructing in the laboratory of
his teacher. Later he accepted an appointment at
the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute fur Biologie at
Berlin-Dahlem, where he shared in the director-
ship of the laboratories. From Dahlem Professor
Spemann went to Freiburg in Breisgau where he
is director of the Zoological Institute. There he

and his students are continuing his studies of de-
velopmental phenomena in the newt, Triton. In
a series of experiments extending over a thirty-
year period, he has tested the relationships be-
tween the parts of the developing amphibian
germ. The results have demonstrated the wide
application of the principle of induction as a
fundamental process in development and the value
of certain units as centers of organization. Pro-
fessor Spemann’s contributions are among the
most stimulating to all students of developmental
problems.

Tue Cotrectinc Net is indebted to Mr.
Charles P. Titus of Carl Zeiss, Inc. for the use
of his telephone. Through his accommodation,
Tue Cottectinc Net may be reached by calling
Falmouth 993-M.

Dr. Helen Miller of Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, has had her National Research Fel-
lowship in zoology renewed and will spend the
coming year in the department of Professor L.
L. Woodruff at Yale. Dr. Daniel Raffel, a
National Research Fellow in the department of
genetics, Johns Hopkins University, has been re-
appointed and will continue his work in Profes-
sor Woodruft’s laboratory at Yale.

Mr. John A. Kyle, manager of the Natural
Science Department of the Clay-Adams Company,
is now vacationing at Woods Hole. He is staying
at the Column Terrace, Falmouth.

Dr. A. K. Parpart, who received his doctor’s
degree from the University of Pennsylvania this
Spring, has accepted an appointment as instruc-
tor in the department of physiology at Princeton.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE
At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
ANUS » eile rsa 6:51 ~-709
INDE, PAL 7335) eae
Aug. 3 8:13 8:34
Aug. 4 8:50 Oe2i
Aug. 5 9:45 10:14
Aug. 6 10532) 0007,
IENb RE 7 TL20> Sea
Aug. 8 12:OL pn2sn6
Aug. 9 12:55 1:10
Aug. 10 T5220
Aug. II 2:43 - [2:50

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay. It must be remembered that the schedule |
printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro-
longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the
current to occur a half an hour earlier or later
than the times given above. }

yt:

a

- ) =~

a

AUGUST I, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET_ 1

on
N

ITEMS OF INTEREST

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Admiral Byrd was present at a picnic supper
held on the shore by Dr. and Mrs. Warren H.
Lewis, Tuesday, July 21, 1931.

Dr. and Mrs. Homer W. Smith of New York
University have applied for the Laboratory lot
adjacent to that of Dr. Robert Hegner. Dr. and
Mrs. Smith expect to build a summer cottage in
the near future.

On Thursday, August 6th, Dr. Warren H.
Lewis will give the fourth lecture in the Popular
Lecture Course. His subject is “Cancer Prob-
lems” and he will show motion pictures.

Dr. and Mrs. William Wherry of Cincinnati,
Ohio, are entertaining the Laboratory at a barn
dance, Saturday, August Ist.

Dr. and Mrs. E. K. Marshall, Jr. invited the
older members of the Laboratory to tea Sunday
afternoon, July 27th

The Monday evening seminar will be given on
August 3rd by Dr. Harold D. Senior of New
York University and Dr. A. Defrise of the Uni-
versity of Milano, Italy.

Frances R. Snow, Secretary.

Mr. and Mrs. Henry Finch announce the en-
gagement of their daughter, Kathleen May, to
Dr. Lester G. Barth. The marriage will take
place the latter» part of August at the Finch’s
home in Boston. After a motor trip to Detroit
and Chicago, the couple will return to New York
City where Dr. Barth will be an instructor in
zoology at Columbia University.

Miss Cornelia L. Carey, professor of bacteri-
ology at Barnard College, after having been West
for several weeks, has arrived at her home in
Quissett to spend the rest of the summer.

Dr. Florence Peebles, professor of biology at
the California Christian College, Los Angeles, has
returned to the laboratory after two years ab-
sence. She is planning to work on the trans-
planting of organizers in Fundulus eggs. Dr.
Peebles is living at Charles Grinnell Jr.’s house,
having recently sold her cottage, “The Lantern,”
on Gardiner Road, to Dr. May Wilson of the
Medical School of Cornell University.

Miss Jean Henderson, a lecturer in the depart-
ment of zoology, McGill University, is spending
the summer as an investigator at the Bermuda
Biclogical Station for Research.

CORNELL UNIVERSITY BIOLOGICAL FIELD
STATION

Dr. Umma Shuma Sharga has recently arrived
from the University of Edinburgh to study en-
tomological control methcds in this country be-
fore returning to India. He will remain in
Ithaca about a year. At present he is making a
study of the aquatic populat’on of our waterfalls.

Dr. Elizabeth Genung of Smith College ad-
dressed a meeting of Sigma Delta Epsilon, Grad-
uate Women in Science, on July 20th, on her
African travels.

Mr. Alexander B. Klots has accepted a position
with Wards Natural Science Establishment as
head of the Entomological Department. He will
also be an Associate in Entomology at the Uni-
versity of Rochester.

Dr. Clyde Fisher of the American Museum of
Natural History is teaching in the University
Summer Session, in the absence of Prof. E. L.
Palmer who is at the University of Hawaii.

Prof. J. C. Bradley left this week for a few
weeks of Entomological collecting in Florida.

Prof. and Mrs. Needham are receiving con-
gratulations on the birth of a second grandchild.
James George Needham II is the son of Mr. and
Mrs. William R. Needham.

Este BrouGuton Ktors.

On Tuesday, July 28th, Miss Ida T. Genther
was married to Mr. L. Herbert Schmidt at 10:30
in the Church of the Messiah. Miss Genther will
be remembered as one of the investigators at the
Laboratory last summer. She has been doing re-
search work in Cincinnati this past year. Mr.
Schmidt, who is a research fellow in biochemistry
at the Medical School at the University of Cin-
cinnati, is working with Dr Tashiro at the Lab-
oratory this summer. Miss Sybil Street was the
bride’s only attendant and Mr. E. M. Adams was
the best man. The ceremony was performed by
the Rev. James Bancroft.

Dr. Eugene DuBois will be the speaker of the
afternoon at the weekly forum on Sunday after-
noon, August 2nd at Dr. Warbasse’s estate on
Penzance Point. His talk will be on “Some Phys-
iological Aspects of Submarines and Deep Div-
ing.”

On Sunday, August 2nd, Gilbert and Sullivan’s
operetta, “The Mikado,” will be given in the M.
B. L. Club at 8 P. M.

On Thursday evening, August 6th, at 8 p.m.
there will be a victrola concert in the M. B. L.
Club. Sibelius’ Symphony No. 1 and Stravinsky's
Fire-Bird will be presented.

158 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 46

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign

postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part L
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor.
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,

PHYSICIAN’S 1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.
AND LABORATORY
MICROSCOPE

ESC-106

Magnification: 56-900X
Fixed Stage, 12cm. square
Illuminating Apparatus with Rack and
Pinion.
Condenser 1.2 with Iris.
Triple Revolving Nosepiece.

Fine adjustment with graduated drum. SLIDES =< COVER GLASSES

Achromatic Objectives:
8 n.a. 0.20 Do Net Fog

40 n.a. 0.65 At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to
90 n.a. 1.25 cil im.

Huygens Oculars: 7X and 10X tAy-ApAMS Company
Price: f.o.b. New York, $128 117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK

A good dark field outfit is obtained by adding:
Cardioid condenser, $22, extra for iris for
oil im. $4. Compensating ocular 15X: $8.50.
A satchel type of carrying case can

b lied instead of the standard = :
anda
i ee i Visit
CARL ZEISS, INc.
485 Fifth Avenue Malchman’s

New York
Pacific Coast Branch: THE

728 South Hill St., Los Angeles, Calif. LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE

CARL ZEISS) ON CAPE COD
L JENA |

SEAL

Non-Corrosive

GOLD

Non-Corrosive

Falmouth Phone 116

AUGUST T, 1931 | THE COLLECTING NET 159

WEAL SPENCER MICROSCOPE

No. oe M-H
Medical onda
Laboratory

Increased size and new beauty
has been added to outstanding
performance without increase
in price.

Appreciating the varied and precise
needs of the medical student, his
desire to carry his microscope back
and forth between laboratory and
home, we have built a new micro-
scope which will perfectly meet his
needs. It’s not so large as to be
cumbersome and heavy to transport
and yet it is slightly larger, slightly
heavier and a bit more rugged than
most instruments previously offered.

It has all the advantageous features :

I. Chromium plated objectives and
adjustment buttons.

II. Long distance (95 m.m.) from
arm to optical axis.

III. Fork-type substage with divis-
ible condenser N.A. 1.20.

IV. Fixed mechanical stage suitable
to handle large micro slides.

= = V. Solidarity exemplified and grace-
SPENCER MICROSCOPE No. 34 M-H ful men characteristic cf all
Equipped with mechanical stage, oculars 6X and Spencer Microscopes are fea-
10X, triple revolving nosepiece, achromatic objec- tured.
tives 16 mm. 4 mm. dry and 1.8 mm. immersion, VI. New SPENCER INCLINOCU-
fork-type substage with condenser NA 1.20, iris dia- LAR. Inclined eyepiece built for
phragm. Complete in mahogany cabinet... .$135.00 this microscope to provide great-
In leatherette carrying case, extra............ $2.00 est possible comfort in use.

eo

(2B UE FA LO

160

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 46

Spaltehoiz

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate

catalog.
Transparent
Preparations Jisi 4 2 - . .
sane trope were pee ae pee y
and ry a
Zoological : cLAy-ApAms ComPANY
= = 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK

Model of Human Heart

Juscabiblished 2 ee es

Revised, up-to-date SECOND EDITION

HEREDITY

By A. FRANKLIN SHULL,
| Professor of Zoology in the University
of Michigan

McGraw-Hill Publications in the
Zoological Sciences

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

| THIS is a sound and thorough treatment FOR THE BEST
| of the principles of biological inherit-
ance. The purpose of the book primarily is
| to cover those phases of the subject of es-
|pecial interest to mankind. Besides this
chief emphasis on human heredity, however,
the book also covers enough of the phenom-
ena of heredity in plants and animals to
serve as necessary foundation study.

In this edition all of the many recent
advances in the field are covered that are
valuable in connection with the aim of the

| book.

|| 345 pages, 6 x 9, 143 illustrations, $3.00
iH
\

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MICROSCOPIC SLIDES

LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and information furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
Woods Hole, Mass.

Send for a copy on approval

McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc.

370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK

=a oo ee ree

i he

AUGUST I, 1931 | THE COLLECTING NET 161

When you
make
Photomicrographs

Wea ene

The Model K Camera has been developed for
routine photomicrography. It is simply con-
structed for use with any standard microscope
and light source. An observation eyepiece per-
mits the specimen to be examined and photo-
graphed without altering the position of either
the microscope or the camera, and the specimen
may be observed while the exposure is being
made.

The camera body is supported entirely inde-
pendently of the microscope and its weight does
not rest on the fine adjustment.

Model K is an all metal camera. It is adjustable
upon a steel rod, which is mounted upon a cast
iron base. The camera back is of standard form,
and takes a 314 x 414 double plate holder, a cut
firm holder, a film pack adapter or a roll film
holder.

Write for complete information.

MPANY (gg
BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO Gt}

6755St. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York GREATER RIGN/ THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
© LOMB .

BAUSCH & LOMB

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

162 AMEE, (COMILIECIIN(C

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 46

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

The Woods Hole Choral Club gives its fifth
Annual Concert Saturday evening, August 8, at
eight-thirty in the Auditorium. Most of the fifty
singers who have been practicing during July are
biologists, but membership is not limited to Lab-
oratory workers; the club is open to all who like
to sing and who are willing to practice for an
hour after the Tvesday and Friday lectures.

Mr. Ivan Gorokhoff, director of choral music
at Smith College, is again the conductor. He is
remembered by the older laboratory workers as
the leader of the Russian Cathedral Choir which
gave a concert at Mr. Crane's residence some
years ago.

The program consists of two parts; sacred
music, mainly from the service of the Russian
Church, and secular songs. The German com-
poser Handel is represented by four choruses
from some of his less known operas and oratorios.
Here is the complete program.

Cherubim Song _Musitcheskoo

Only Begotten Son Gretchanino ff
O praise ye the Name of the Lord Kastalsky
Then round about the starry throne ..... Handel
The heart that’s contented Handel
May no rash intruder Handel
The foolish lover squanders Handel
Wassail Song Williams
3ylinka Kastalsky
The Brook ...... Arkhangelsky
Dusk of Night Arkhangelsky

Tickets for the concert will be on sale soon for
$.50 and $1.00.

On Thursday, August 6th, Falmouth wi'l be
gay with the annual fete for the benefit of the
Nursing Association. From three until eleven
thirty p.m., the town will he busy raising money
to support the organization during the coming
year. 300ths will be installed on the Village
Green and, as a special attraction, there will be
block dancing with the 13th Regiment Bard of
Whitman supplying the music.

Early Tuesday evening the fire siren summoned
most of Woods Hole to a spectacular boat fire at
the wharf beside the Penzance Garage. A speed
boat, owned by Mr. Aranaze of Falmouth, caught
on fire when the engine backfired over by Ca-
hoon’s wharf. The boat could have been saved
by efficient handling, but instead they took her
out in the breeze and managed to get her over to
the dock behind the Fire House. The insignifi-
cant blaze became serious when the gasoline tank
exploded and by the time the fire was put out,
the boat was a total ruin. The two occupants of

the boat were uninjured although Mr. Aranaze’s
hair was singed and his companion was blown
out of the boat. The present owners carried no
insurance.

The laurels of this week’s production at the
University Plavers’ Theatre go to Peter Wayne,
“the cardboard lover” himself, in Jacques Duval’s
clever little skit of that name. The adaptation by
Valerie Wyngate and P. G. Wodehouse is very
witty and although the plot is a totally trivial
love intrigue, the play affords a delightful even-
ing in the true French manner.

Simone divorced her husband, Tony, for his
infidelity, though she still loved him. When he
comes back to seek her again for his wife, she
hires the young Andre to be her lover only in
name, as a protection to save herself from giving
in to Tony. Andre, the cardboard lover, is only
too faithful in carrying out his duty of inter-
rupting her tete-a-tetes with Tony and the comedy
revolves in a whirl around these three; Simone
who wants Tony and regrets the day she hired
Andre to be her “shadow ;” Tony, the egotist, who
wants Simone and is used to being irresistible to
women; and Andre, poor, in love with Simone,
who is forced by his contract into an unusual and
false position.

Simone, as played by Katherine Hastings, was
delightful, though a little too much the young,
impetuous, American college girl to be truly con-
vincing as a French madame. Henry Fonda as
Andre was thoroughly satisfactory and looked the
part of a French monsieur. Freida Altman, who
played one of the leads in “Interference,”’ made a
superb French maid.

Peter Wayne as Andre played an unconvincing
role in a convincing manner. Though the part
did not enable him to reach tne heights of char-
acter-acting that he attained as Philip Voaze in
“Interference,” he, nevertheless, made the most
of his role.

The sets were very effective but there is one
complaint to be made against all the scenery of
the season and that is the poor construction of
the doors. They are amateurish and do not close
and open with facility and without causing a
trembling of the adjoining walls.

The Players are busy now rehearsing ‘“The
Trial of Mary Dugan” with Cynthia Rogers in
the title role. The cast required is so large that
practically the entire group will have to take
parts and the stage will be enlarged. The busi-
ness in the court room will begin at 8:15 next
week, althouch the action of the play itself will
not start until the usual time of 8:30. —M. S. G.

cid “Ris icons

bie *

AUGUST TI, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET 163

FITZGERALD, INC.
A Man’s Store

— MEN’S WEAR —
Colonial Buiding Tel. 935 Main Street
Falmouth

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Presents
“THE TRIAL OF MARY DUGAN”
AUG. 3 AUG: 8
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

Main Street
near A & P

Queen’s Byway
near Filene’s

FEMININE FOOTWEAR
$4.45 to $7.45
Two Falmouth Shops

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Woods Hole Tel. 777
Service that Satisfies

THE TWIN DOOR

RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

SAMUEL CAHOON
Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS
Tel. Falmouth 660-661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

The Whaler on Wheels

“Our Wandering Book Shop”

Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays
throughout the summer
season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

TEXACO FRODUEIS

NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION ~
9
Eastman’s Hardware
5 AND toc DEPARTMENT
KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

164 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 46

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

A protest against the present prices of gasoline
on the Cape has been filed by the Cape Cod
Chamber of Commerce, which contends that the
higher prices prevailing here are harmful to trade
in general.

Gasoline prices on the Cape average about 1714
cents a gallon, which is from four to five cents
higher than other parts of the state. The retail
price is based on the firms’ prices to filling sta-
tions. Gasoline officials claim that prices on the
Cape are normal but that prices in New Bedford,
3oston and other cities are abnormal at the pres-
ent time because of a price war between rival
companies.

H. S. Dowden, secretary of the Cape Cod
Chamber of Commerce sent the following’ tele-
gram to the Federal Trade Commission :

The Cape Cod Chamber of Commerce calls
your attention to the price of gasoline on Cape
Cod, four and five cents higher per gallon than
all other points in the state. This is harmful
to all trade here and it gives the impression
that other commodities are in the same pro-
portion.

Following the telegram, a letter was dispatched,
as follows:

Confirming our telegram, the Cape Cod
Chamber of Commerce urges your assistance in
adjustment of the price of gasoline on Cape Cod,
which is four and five cents higher than in all
other points in the state.

I am enclosing a map showing the towns af-
fected. In the town of Bourne, the price is 13%
cents and 14%. Other points on the Cape
range from 17.4 cents to 17.6. In New Bed-
ford gasoline is selling for 1214 cents to 13% in
company owned stations.

This is very harmful to all trade here as it
gives the impression, especially to our summer
visitors, that all other commodities are in the
same proportion.

Last October the Cape Cod Chamber of Com-
merce and the Selectmen's Association launched
a drive against the high price of gasoline and
within a week the price fell between two and
four cents.

The Cygnet, a two masted auxiliary schooner
yacht, seventy-five feet long, bound on a sword-
fishing trip, ran aground at Chilmark early Wed-
nesday morning, July 23rd. Captained by John
Carr of New York City, the vessel was headed
for Vineyard Sound when she ran ashore in a
dense fog. Captain Carr and his crew of four
were forced to swim about twenty-five feet to
shore; and in the dash for safety one of the
crew sprained an ankle and was removed to the
Vineyard Haven Marine hospital. Two patrol
boats from the base here at Woods Hole went
to the rescue and finally towed her in to New
Bedford, arriving about nine o’clock at_night.

On Monday evening, July 27th, the Coast Guard
received a call from H. W. Morse whose yawl,
“Onawa,” went aground at the entrance of Ed-
gartown harbor. In less than an hour after the
call was received, the yawl was pulled off, un-
damaged, by the patrol boat, C. G. 286.

Recently two members of the Marine Biological
Laboratory sailed to Martha’s Vineyard. On
their return trip, the boat was incapacitated and
they were picked up by a fishing vessel. The
young man amused himself by taking pictures of
the girl with the members of the crew. One of
the fishermen asked to have a picture sent to him,
leaving his name and address with the girl.

When the pictures were developed, the girl sent
one to the fisherman. A few days later, the ad-
ministration office opened a letter addressed to
“The Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole,
Mass.,” and were surprised to find the following :

Whoever opens this letter will you please
place the letter and the picture in the hands of
the lady whose face appears in this snapshot.

I admire your nerve in addressing my husband

with such affectionate terms as ‘‘“My Dear Mr.—”

and telling him you had nct forgotten him but
my advice to you is to forget him and not to
correspond any further with him. Maybe you

did not know he was married but I am telling

you ncw that he is. I am sorry I can’t address

you by name but my husband tore ycur sig-
nature from the letter, thinking I would not be
able to write you. (Signed) Mrs. George P. —,

Provincetown, Mass.

On Sunday, August 2nd the Rev. Mr. Herman
R. Page, rector of St. Paul’s Church, Dayton,
Ohio, will preach at the 11 o'clock service at the
Church of the Messiah. He is spending the sum-
mer at Vineyard Haven.

TIDE TABLE AT BREAKWATER BEACH
At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
it is high water at the Breakwater Beach:
Date AciMi» — BiMe
Aug. I 10:39 10:48
Aug. 2 Thstei) lUROg
ATIg ss TLESO) | eee
MBE. AN I2:10 L240
ENCE, Gy 12350) E25
Aug. 6 0:46 250
Aug. 7 23 BOO
Aug. 8 2°40), Besa
Aug. 9 4:34 4:47
Aug. 10 : 533i ho
Aug. II : ~ (6:28 16540
Approximately six hours later, the tide is low.

AUGUST TI, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET

165

Church of the Messiah

(Episcopal)
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

8:00 a.m.
11:00" atime

Holy Communion

Morning Prayer

Evening Prayer ...

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.
Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 269

FOLLOW THE CROWD TO

DANIELS

HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,
DELICIOUS SANDWICHES

COFFEE PICNIC LUNCHES

MRS. H. M. BRADFORD

Dresses, Millinery, Hosiery and Gift Shop
Souvenirs and Jewelry

Depot Avenue Woods Hole

N. E. TSIKNAS
FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Wcods Hole

Zoologist, Ph. D. Nine years teaching experi-
ence which has included administrative respcnsi-
bilities; especially trained in General Biology, Cy-

tology, Invertebrate Physiology, Embryology,
Genetics and Anatomy; desires position in an
accredited college. For further details inquire
at the Collecting Net office.

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
EST. 1887

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

The °*ASTA*?
PARAFFIN OVEN

Desk Type

For the Critical Scientist or the Beginning Student
—A Dependable Embedding Oven in which the tem-
perature does not have to be constantly watched.
This is a great advantage over any other oven manu-
factured today and has been thoroughly tested.
This oven is built on the same principles as all other
Asta ovens. It has been designed by Prof. Alfred F.
Huettner, Washington Square Ccllege, New York
University, where this oven is now used in the cy-
tology laboratory.

The following new features are incorporated in this
oven:

1. Automatic heat control by means cf thermo-
stat, ranging from room temperature to
80’C. Pilot Light indicating when heat is on

2. Removable tank for filtered paraffin attached
to the rear wall. Filtered paraffin always ob-
tainable from this tank threugh a small tap.

3. Solid paraffin automatically filtered to supply
tank.

4. Paraffin glasses rest cn a grid over a drain
board, eliminating untidy appearance of heat-
ing chamber. Imbedding dishes never stick
when oven is cold.

5. Large heating chamber unobstructed by heat-
ing lamps or utensils.

6. Cylindrical Heating Unit is attached to the
upper part of the front wall of the heating
chamber, allowing the maximum of space for
manipulation within the heating chamber.

7. Heating unit can be pulled out cf the oven in-
stantly to be used in keeping paraffin in
liquid condition while imbedding outside of
the heating chamber.

8. Drying Chamber, accommodating two slide
boxes (50 slides), attached to the right.

Catalogue No. 3000... . . $30.00

These are some cf the major features in which this
oven differs from others; there are other minor ad-
vantages which will be appreciated by cytologists
and histologists. Investigators who employ the
Feulgen reaction will be able to use this cven in
place of an incubator by simply changing the tem-
perature control temporarily to 40’C.

STANDARD SCIENTIFIC SUPPLY CORP.
16-14 W. 25 ST. NEW YORK CITY

106

DAB COLLECRING SINE

{ Vou. VI. No. 46

TURTOX NEWS

MAILED WITHOUT CHARGE TO OVER 20,000 BIOLOGISTS IN THE UNITED STATES
AND FOREIGN COUNTRIES

The principal purpose of Turtox News is to announce new Turtox products and new

developments in the Turtox laboratories.

It is not, however, our policy to make this publica-

tion a purely advertising medium, and in every issue are published short articles and notes

of interest to biologists. | These articles are all of a Iiological nature, but cover a wide range,

including ecology, pedagogy, nature study, travel, laboratory methods, etc. They are written

in some cases by members of our staff, in other cases by teaching Biologists.
i) 3 5 5

Say If you are not receiving Turtox News regularly, just

TU RTOX PR

G
©

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

xh abucts

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

A ——_$e

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 11'%-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

send us a postal, asking us to place your name on
the mailing list.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated

761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

CHICAGO

HYDROGEN TON
APPAINATEWs

Colorimetric and Electrometric
Hellige—LaM otte—Pitschner

Hellige Colorimetric Comparators employ
Permanent Non-Fading Glass Standards.
The regular outfit includes the Comparator
proper with special Prism, one Color Scale,
one bottle of Indicator Solution, Mixing
Pipette, Graduated Test Tubes and Frosted
Glass Plates.

Write for Bulletin No. 440 which gives de-
tails, and also for Bulletin No. 442 which
gives details of apparatus for water testing.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents

Third Avenue, 18th to roth Street
New York, N. Y.

AUGUST I, 1931 |]

THE COLLECTING NET 167

WIDE FIELD MICROSCODE

A New Model with
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE
OBJECTIVE NOSERIECE

In connection with Wide Field Binocular Microscopes
of other make, the one or other method of interchang-
ing objectives has been offered.. These were found to
have shortcomings in being either restricted to the use
of special objectives or to a limited number of them.

The Leitz Works have succeeded in providing an

AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE OBJECTIVE NOSEPIECE
WHICH PERMITS THE USE OF THE STANDARD
PAIRED OBJECTIVES

This multiple Objective Nosepiece provides an auto-
matic interchange of three pairs of objectives at one time.
The prism body, resembling in its general construction
the bedy of the well-known series of Leitz Wide Field
Binocular Microscopes, is provided with oculars of large
diameter. To this body is atttached the Automatic
Multiple Objective Nosepiece. A pair cf objectives IX is
permanently mounted to the nosepiece while two dove-
tailed tracks serve to accommodate any two pairs of ob-
jectives of the available series..

The track on which the objective carriage glides is provided with three steps. When sliding
the carriage back and forth to change from one objective to another, the carriage spring engages
these stops. The right hand side of the objective carriage is equipped with a spring handle. Upon
releasing this handle, the carriage automatically moves forward to be arrested at the next stop,
thus placing the second objective into the optical center. The same procedure is repeated for
placing the third objective in position. The backward motion of the objective carriage is ac-
complished in.an identical manner; each of the three objectives can successively be located within
the optical field. j

An important feature is offered by the rapid and exceedingly simple manner in which the
change from one objective to another is accomplished, this by means of a spring arrestine the
objective automatically within the optical center. The convenience of this device can readily be
appreciated through actual use of the microscope.

A permanent alignment of the optical system is assured by means of the rigid mounting by
which the objectives are attached to the carriage and furthermcre, the fact that, when shifting
the objectives, they are not touched by hand and not the least pressure is exerted upon them or
upon the optical axis, respectively.

We believe that with the introduction of this Automatic Nose- |
piece, we have contributed materially towards enhancing the use-
fulness of wide Field Binocular Microscopes.

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET NO. 1183 (CN) in which five different microscope models equipped
with the Automatic Multiple Objective Nosepiece are listed.

Eee 2: ine:

60 East 10th Street New York, N. Y.

168 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. VI. No. 46

9) Quoting remark of a school super-

¢ .
It saved us the cost of 5 microscopes” Sucting remark of 2 scho

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional features as

standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light. Revolving stage.
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,
Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Cray-Apam MS s Co MPANY

| 117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

Annual Subscription, $2.00

Vol. VI. No. 7. SATURDAY, AUGUST 8, 1931 Single Copies, 25 Cts.
EXPERIMENTS ON THE AMPHIBIAN THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
EGG BIOLOGICAL STATION
Dr. HANS SPEMANN Grorce R. LARuE
Director of the Zoological Institute at Freiburg Director of the Laboratory
It gives me great pleasure, and | consider it a The University of Michigan Biological Station

high honor, that I may speak to you of my ex- had its origin in 1909 when Professor Reighard,
periments. I see amongst you some of those men now Professor Emeritus of Zoology in the Uni-
who, from the earliest days of my scientific versity of Michigan, and Professor Burns, now
career, I always looked upon Professor of Botany in the
as upon heroes of our science; | University of Vermont, with

I see young scientists whom I | MM. B. L. Calendar a group of 13 students be-
wish to fill with enthusiasm TUESDAY, AUG. 11, 7:30 P.M. came interested in making an
for the experimental embry- Seminar. Dr. W. H. F. Addison, intensive study of the animals
ology. We ipeeoustic) Mammals Descrip- and plants of Michigan in their

First, before entering on my i eaten eae Saye natural surroundings. It was
lecture, I wish to acquaint you | Dr. ©. GC. Speidel, “Living Nerve | desirable to establish a station
with a good old friend of mine Sprouts.” | within a region as little dis-
—the newt’s egg—which has Dr. J. E. Kindred, “Histologic | turbed by man as possible and
accompanied me for the great- | Effects of Ligation of the Vasa | at the same time readily acces-

of the Spleen of the Albino Rat.” sible for transportation of

ae See eM “The ara! supplies and equipment.
adium Irradiation upon the Ov- wie : pi Aten ae

BAGS OE ALOU Rat? During the twenty-three

er part of my life. These
eggs of the newt may always
be found during spring and

early summer in the aquaria consecutive years of its exis-
where the adult animals are FRIDAY, AUG. 14, 8:00 P. M. tence the Biological Station as
kept, attached by the female Hsu beeen Oia Mo to Sees Male a physical plant has grown
s - sor of zoology, University of = eles Lalas
to leaves of water plants. The Wisconsin, “The Corpus Luteum from a few tents to 125 build-
egg is covered by a thin vitel- and Anterior Lobe Hormones ings of wood, concrete and
line membrane and by an out- and their Physiological Interre- steel construction. The faculty
er shell of elliptical shape, very | LEIEORS NSE 2 eee _| has been increased from two
soft immediately after the egg to fifteen members and the

has been laid, but soon becoming rather hard and — student body from 13 to 107 students. The mem-
elastic. In order to (Continued on Page 173) bership of the Station including students, faculty,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dxveriments on the Amphibian Egg, Scientific Book Reviews ©. 2.0.5.0... 0666 179
Dr. Hans Spemann ........-.--++-++:: 169 hel Dinectorystons 1931s eerie 180
The University of Michigan Biological Station, Picnic Parties on Naushon and Nonamesset 182

George R. LaRue .......-.--+--+++5+5 169 Dr. Fry and the Forty Drosophila Eggs,
IDYe, JNbieeol INL TBH NMI oo no oaoOoTSCKOn 182

The Formation of Ice Crvstals in the Pro-
toplasm of Various Cells,
Dr. Robert Chambers ............-.--. 177 IRHSVURSH xe AGMA, ong consobdousoonapaogoo 183

(Chobacsrorsibel Wee Ie osocncouce6 coo aon OC 182

ee TEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEE

THE

COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 47

LABORATORY BUILDINGS OVERLOOKING DOUGLAS LAKE

A VIEW OF THE MICHIGAN BIOLOGICAL
investigators, and the various staff members and
families now numbers more than 1g0 people.

The Station is situated on the shores of Doug-
las Lake on the tip of the Lower Peninsula of
Michigan and is almost equidistant from Cheboy-
gan, Mackinaw City and Petoskey. It is located
on the Bogardus Tract, an area of more than
3,300 acres of land which extends from Douglas
Lake to Burt Lake on the south, and has a com-
bined frontage on the two lakes of more than six
miles. The Bogardus Tract is the property of
the University of Michigan and is occupied ex-
clusively by, and devoted to, the Biological Sta-
tion. Except for two small summer resorts on
Douglas Lake, the region for miles about is al-
most uninhabited.

The Douglas Lake region is peculiarly well
adapted for biological studies. This part of
Michigan is diversified by hills and valleys, and
was formerly covered by virgin forests of hard-

STATION

FROM THE HILLSIDE BACK OF THE CAMPUS
woods and conifers. Small tracts of the former
remain. Over most of the area second growth
forests are becoming well established. The region
contains many lakes of clear water, unsurpassed
in the State for size, depth, and beauty of setting.
Douglas Lake is of irregular outline, two and one-
half miles wide and four miles long. Its wooded
shores are in some places iow and receding; in
others they rise in terraced bluffs seventy feet
high. The beach is of clean sand or stony, and
the lake bottom, except for occasional abrupt
drops, slopes gradually into deep water. This
great variety of conditions ranging through a
complete series of situations from lakes to hills
and in the transitional zone supports a large num-
ber of species of plants. For these reasons, also,
the region is equally well supplied with a varied
animal population, being particularly rich in its
invertebrate fauna.

The Station is located on a narrow strip of

LN

SS

THE DINING ROOM AND THE BOTANY LABORATORY

THE HEALTH SERVICE COTTAGES MAY

TWO BUILDINGS

SEEN BETWEEN THI

IN THE DISTANCE
FOREGROUND

BE
IN

eee a a em: ves

Avucust 8, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET I7I

level ground along the south shore of the east
end of Douglas Lake. The plan consists of two
streets paralleling the shore and connected by
cross streets. There are three main divisions of
the Station, the central portion or campus, the
west end or residence areas’ for men and married
students, and the east end or residence areas for
women students, faculty, other staff members, in-
vestigators and health service. The entire Station
is adequately supplied with a sanitary system and
a water system. The campus and the west resi-
dential area are equipped with electric lights and
it is hoped that in the near future the lighting
system can be extended to the east residential
areas as well.

The residence cottages are of two types, wood-
sheathed with metal covering, or wood-sheathed
and covered with slate-surfaced roofing felt.
All have concrete floors, screened windows,
screened doors, and stoves. They are equipped
with beds, tables, chairs, and other necessary fur-
niture. The cottages occupied by the men and
married students are of the wood and metal type,
I4 X 14 feet square in floor dimensions, and
equipped with electric lights. All other cottages
have the slate-surfaced roofing felt covering.
Those occupied by the women students and the
investigators are 14 x 16 feet, and those occu-
pied by the faculty families are 14 x 34 feet in
floor dimensions.

On the campus proper are located the build-
ings used in common by all members of the Sta-
tion. The largest of these is a two-story adminis-
tration building of steel and concrete construc-
tion, housing the administration offices, photo-
graphic rooms, stock rooms, store, post-office and
kitchen storagé below, and a kitchen and dining
room above. There are nine laboratory buildings
housing 13 laboratories, a library building, an
aquarium, an insectary, an animal house, a club
house, shop, tool room, garage, and keeper's house.
Near the campus to the east are the hospital,
physician’s residence and office, and to the west
a boathouse with a covered harbor.

The Station is adequately equipped to care for
the demands of students and investigators. For
transportation of classes and supplies the Station
owns three trucks, several launches, outboard
motors, and rowboats. Other equipment for class
use includes nets, seines, traps, cameras, field
glasses, microscopes and accessories, microtomes,
aquaria, pens, cages, a large supply of minor
equipment and a good working library. The zo-
ological laboratories have large collections of
bird skins, mammal skins, and skulls and many
preserved specimens of reptiles, amphibians, fish
and parasite worms. The herbarium includes
nearly all of the flowering plants of the region.

At the Station class work is conducted in six
courses in botany and seven courses in zoology,
and in addition many students and faculty mem-
bers are engaged in special problems of investi-
gation in both botany and zoology.

The botanical faculty consists of four mem-
bers; Dr. John H. Ehlers, assistant professor of
botany, in charge of systematic botany, Dr. Carl
D. LaRue, assistant professor of botany, in charge
of work in plant anatomy, both from the Uni-
versity of Michigan; Dr. Frank C. Gates, profes-
sor of botany in the Kansas State Agricultural
College, in charge of work in plant ecology, and
Dr. Hempstead Castle, assistant professor of
botany in Yale University, in charge of the work
in lower plants. Professor Castle is new at the
Station this summer, having been called to take
over the work of Professor George E. Nichols,
also of Yale, who was unable to return to the
Station this year on account of ill health.

The zoological faculty is made up of eight
members whose fields of interest follow their
names. From the University of Michigan are:

PLAN OF THE BIOLOGICAL STATION

Dr. George R. LaRue, professor of zoology, Di-
rector of the Station and directing research in
animal parasitology; Dr. Paul S. Welch, profes-
sor of zoology, directing class and research work
in limnology; Dr. Frank N. Blanchard, assistant
professor of zoology, ornithology ; and Dr. Frank
E. Eggleton, instructor in zoology, limnological
methods. Those from other universities are: Dr.
Herbert B. Hungerford, professor of entomology
in the University of Kansas, entomology; Dr.
William W. Cort, professor of helminthology
in Johns Hopkins University, parasitic worms;
Dr. Charles W. Creaser, associate professor of
zoology in the College of the City of Detroit,
vertebrates other than birds; and Dr. Lyell J.
Thomas, assistant professor of zoolegy in the
University of Illinois, working with Professors
LaRue and Cort in helminthology.

Other new members of the staff are Alfred H.
Stockard, instructor in zoology in the University
of Michigan, Secretary of the Station; Jewel F.
Stockard, dean of women, substituting for Grace
Walker Nichols, who was unable to be present

172

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 47

at the Station this year; and Dr. Maurice R. Me-
Garvey, physician at the Health Service in the
University of Michigan, Station Physician.

With a teaching staff composed of men of rec-
ognized authority in their fields and drawn from
several leading universities, the Station is given
the advantages both of excellent teaching and
direction of research, and of broader contacts
with scientific spirit and progress over the coun-
try than could be had from a staff drawn from
any one university. The coming together each
summer of the staff from the several parts of the
country brings something of the spirit of a scien-
tific meeting in that thought and discussion for
the entire summer are centered on the various
phases of biology. :

The courses taught at the Biological Station
deal with those phases of biology which can best
be learned by close contact with the undisturbed
plants and animals in their natural habitats ; or by
the study of those plants and animals in the lab-
oratory in relation to their natural habits and
habitats. All courses essentially systematic in
nature, as systematic botany of the flowering
plants, ferns, mosses and algae, entomology, ich-
thyology, herpetology, ornithology and mammial-
ogy, as well as plant anatomy, are conducted with
considerable emphasis placed on living appear-
ances, habitats, and natural histories of these
forms. The Station is particularly suitable for
the ecological studies—plant ecology, limnology
and parasitology.

The student population of the Biological Sta-
tion is an inspiring study within itself. Of the
107 students enrolled this summer eighty-four, or
77%, are graduate students, and twenty-three
are undergraduates. Thirty-six of them, or one
third, claim Michigan as their home state. Of
the remaining seventy-one, fourteen come from II-
linois, nine from Ohio, nine from Pennsylvania,
six from Minnesota, five from Indiana, four from
Wisconsin, three from Iowa, three from Massa-
chusetts, two each from Connecticut, Mississippi,
Oklahoma and West Virginia, and one each from
California, Georgia, Kansas, Missouri, North
Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, and Utah, and one
from China.

While the large number of out-of-state students
at the Biological Station entails considerable ad-
ditional expense to the State of Michigan, the
contributions of these students are worthy of
consideration. In the same way that the faculty
members from various parts of the country bring
contacts and ideas of the progress of the country
with them, the students make the Station a cos-
mopolitan institution. Many of the graduate
students as well as the faculty and visiting in-
vestigators, both while here and back at their
winter residences, are engaged in working out

problems concerning animals and plants of this
part of Michigan, and as a result the biological
situation of the Douglas Lake region is perhaps
better known than that of any other region in
North America, excepting that of Woods Hole.

Many productive botanical investigations are
being carried out at the Station. The situation
and equipment are best adapted to work in plant
ecology, taxonomy, and physiological and eco-
logical anatomy, and many contributions in these
phases of the subject have been produced. At
present twelve investigators are working in bot-
any with very encouraging results.

Because of its large variety of plant habitats
the Douglas Lake region is particularly suitable
for work in fresh-water algae and bryophytes.
Over one hundred genera with 450 species of
algae and 282 species of bryophytes are found
there. Of these bryophytes 115 have not been
recorded from other parts of Michigan.

With the great variety of habitats, the richness
of the plant life and the abundance of ecologically
related invertebrate fauna always on hand, work
of an ecological nature is pursued to excellent ad-
vantage. These conditions also provide an
abundance of material for investigation, both in
the laboratory and in the field, in ecological and
physiological anatomy.

General entomology is receiving a good share
of the attention of investigators. Contributions
from the Station in this field have been numer-
ous, and the solution of each problem unearths
new problems for solution. This summer five
investigators are conducting research in ento-
mology.

The opportunities for investigations in limnol-
ogy are very favorable. At the present time eight
people at the Station are pursuing problems in
this field, five in general limnology and three in
aquatic entomology. The limnological situation
and equipment are quite adequate for the de-
termination of life-histories and ecological re-
lationships.

Researches in parasitology have been particu-
larly productive, and at present fourteen people
are carrying on investigations in parasitology. The
subjects under investigation by this group are
quite varied. The largest number on any one
phase of the subject are working on the life cycles
of the digenetic trematodes, including studies on
the further development of holostome, schisto-
some and stylet cercariae. Another group is
studying the life cycles of tetraphyllidean ces-
todes. Other problems on the helminths are con-
cerned with cestcede and nematode morphology
and with the life cycles of several nematodes in
aquatic hosts. An interesting investigation on a
blood-inhabiting protozcon, Leucocytozcon, is be-
ing carried out. Life history studies seem to

ee ee ee

Aucust 8, 1931 ] THE

COLLECTING

NET 173

be best suited to the location and equipment of the
Biological Station. The life cycles of a con-
siderable number of parasitic forms have already
been worked out and others are in the process of
solution.

Attendance at the Station is a distinct advan-
tage to the student. Students are constantly
searching for appropriate problems for investiga-
tion, and many problems are being discovered at
the Station as the biological situation there is
more and more completely analyzed. The teach-
ers of biology in the public schools are find’ng
the Station to be a particularly valuable source of
training for their work. A first hand knowledge
of a large number of living things, both plant and
animal, in their natural habitats and under nor-
mal conditions is of prime importance for doing
the type of teaching required in the public
schools. The usual college courses in biological
subjects do not give this type of training. Two
or three summers of attendance at the Biological
Station give the desired training, and it stimu-
lates an invaluable enthusiasm for biological
work.

While the predominating spirit of the Station
is one of work, the play side of life is by no
means neglected. The entire Station population
is brought together for meals in the large dining
hall. Positions are reassigned by chance once
each week so that the student population is con-
stantly being shifted and new acquaintances are
being formed. With the excellent water and an
ideal sand beach and lake bottom, swimming is
an attraction in the late afternoon. On the
Fourth of July the annual picnic is held on top
of a large hill overlooking the Station and lake.
Here games and contests of various sorts are
held, followed by a picnic supper, an initiation
parade for the new students and a party or dance
in the clubhouse in the evening.

On each Saturday night of the session an en-
tertainment of some sort is given at the club-
house. Bridge, stunt parties, “dress-up” parties,
community singing, and dancing all have their
turns. These attractions are very popular with
the entire Station population, the only problem
being that of room to accommodate the attend-
ance,

During the summer several Sunday excursions
are conducted to points of interest in this region.
This summer on July 19 a group journeyed over
the Michigan Inland Water Route starting at
Conway and passing through Crooked Lake,
Crooked River, Burt Lake, Indian River, and
Mullet Lake to Topinabee, and return. On Aug-
ust 9 an excursion will visit historic Mackinac Is-
land and Les Cheneaux Islands in Lake Huron.
On August 16 the annual photographic exhibit is
held at the Station. This is a display of any
pictures of general interest which may have been
taken by members of the Station, and oppor-
tunity is given for exchanges or purchases of
prints.

Perhaps the feature event of the summer is
the annual Visitors Day, which was held this
year on the afternoon of August 2. On this date
the Station held open house for the benefit of
any visitors who wished to become acquainted
with the Station and its work. The various build-
ings and laboratories are thrown open and sam-
ples of the class work and research are placed on
display and qualified persons are present to ex-
plain or demonstrate each exhibit. This has come
to be an interesting and enlightening attraction
for people in this portion of the State, and th2
types of work are so varied and the number of
workers is so great that, indeed, the members of
the Station look upon this day as an opportun-
ity to make themselves acquainted with the work
done at the Station. ;

EXPERIMENTS ON THE AMPHIBIAN EGG
(Continued from Page 169)

operate on the egg, this shell must be taken
off before cleavage begins; then the eggs are kept
in the vitelline membrane up to the time of the
operation.

When I began my experimental work, the sci-
entific world was roused by that famous contro-
versy between W. Roux on the one side, and H.
Driesch and O. Hertwig on the other. W. Roux,
in his classical pricking experiments on the frog’s
egg, had found that after killing one of the first
two blastomeres with a hot needle, the other sur-

_ viving cell would form half an embryo; from this
he derived his conception of self-differentiation.
H. Driesch; on the other hand, had stated that
each of the first two blastomercs of the sea-urch-

in’s egg, when separated, would form a whole
embryo, half-sized, but normally proportioned.
From this he derived his notion of the harmonic-
equipotential system. O. Hertwig tried to separate
the two first blastomeres of an amphibian egg,
the egg of Triton taematus. He was not success-
ful in this, but his method turned out to be of
great importance.

My first experiment was to test Roux’s results
on the amphibian egg. Instead of killing one of
the first two blastomeres, I tried to retain its de-
velopment by means of low temperature. - To do
this I first constricted the eggs of Triton with a
fine hair loop. I soon found that, in case of con-
striction along the median plane, either twins or

174

THE COLLECTING NET

double monsters may be produced. Endres and
Herlitzka had done the same thing a short time
before me.

These experiments occupied me for several
years. Their results did not at first go far be-
yond those which Driesch had found in the egg
of the sea-urchin. I followed this author in test-
ing the critical period of determination.

When an embryo of a somewhat later stage,
for instance, with the tail bud just visible, is cut
in two along the median plane, two half embryos
will be formed; when the same is done in the
two-cell stage, two whole embryos will develop.
Between these two stages, there must be
a critical point or a critical period in which
the one way of development is turned into
the other. I found that this period coin-
cides with the period of gastrulation. The
left and right halves of a very young gastrula will
form whole embryos, more or less symmetrical.
The more gastrulation proceeds, the greater is the
defect on the inner side of the embryos; when
gastrulation is finished, the axial organs can no
longer be doubled. Later on, this experience led
me to choose the early gastrula stage for my
transplantation experiments.

Another series of experiments, those on the
lens of the vertebrate eye, led me to the concept
of induction. The single parts of the vertebrate
eye develop, as you know, in close relation of
space and time to one another. Just at the spot
where the anlage of the retina, the primary eye-
ball, touches the epidermis, and just in the mo-
ment it does do so, the lens is formed. Both pro-
cesses seem to be connected as cause and effect.
This may be tested by experiment. If the forma-
tion of the lens depends on some influence from
the eye-ball, destruction of the latter should pre-
vent formation of the former. In consequence
the anlage of the eye-ball was eliminated, either
early in the neurula stage, or later, after closure
of the medullary folds. The effect is different in
different amphibian genera. Nay even in differ-
ent amphibian species. In Rana temporaria, a
European frog, no lens was formed; Bombinator
behaves in the same way. On the other hand, H.
D. King found in an American frog, that lens
formation may occur after destruction of the eve-
ball; I could later confirm this in another Euro-
pean species of frog, Rana esculenta. The dif-
ference seems to he only a gradual one. Even
Bombinator shows slight indication of lens for-
mation. The same was observed by v. Ubisch in
Rana temporaria.

Instead of elimination of the eye-ball, I sug-
gested settling the question by bringing the eye-
ball in contact with alien epidermis from other
parts of the embryo. F. W. Lewis made this ex-
periment by transplanting the eye-ball under the

skin of the trunk. I later transplanted the skin
on the eye-ball. These experiments, and many
others performed since then, proved that the eye-
ball may induce formation of a lens in parts of
the epidermis that would normally not have
formed one.

It is a fact of great theoretical importance that
this faculty of inducing a lens in alien epidermis
may be possessed by the eye-ball even of those
species in which the lens may develop independ-
ently. Filatow showed this in the case of the
epidermis of Bufo, brought in contact with the
eye-ball of Rana esculenta. In this frog, as [
showed, the lens may be formed after destruction
of the eye-ball; yet this same eye-ball of R. escu-
lenta was shown by Filatow to have the power
of inducing a lens in the trunk epidermis of a
toad’s embryo. This was one of the first cases
of what was called “principle of double insur-
ance” by W. Rhumbler and H. Braus, a principle
that has since turned out to be of great import-
ance in development, and even in physiology. This
concept means that there is a double factor of
safety; as, for instance, when a bridge which is
intended to carry one thousand people is built to
carry two thousand. So, the lens might be formed
without the eye-ball out of the proper region of
the skin, yet the eye-ball has the faculty of form-
ing lens out of perfectly indifferent skin. We will
encounter this principle again in the normal for-
mation and the experimental induction of the
medullary plate.

The combination of these two series of experi-
ments led me to the discovery of the “center of
organization” and the “organizer.’’ To make this
quite clear, we must consider the first steps in the
development of the amphibian egg.

The fertilized egg, as you know, is trans-
formed, by segmentation into the blastula; the
blastula, by invagination, into the gastrula. The
outer layer of the gastrula, the ectoderm, is go-
ing to form in its dorsal part the medullary plate,
the anlage of the central nervous system and of
the eye-balls. If one marks a point of the ecto-
derm, near the animal pole, by staining it vitally,
as W. Vogt did, one may find the mark just in the
fore end of the medullary plate; the marked re-
gion has developed into medullary plate, it has
been presumptive medullary plate. A second re-
gion of the gastrula, a little more in front, will
form epidermis; it may be called presumptive
epidermis.

Now the median constrictions proved that in
the early gastrula stage the single regions can-
not be determined, at least not irrevocably, as to
their later fate; thev must be able, at least to a

certain degree, to fill out each other’s place. It

should be possible to test this by actually putting
one in the other's place, that is by transplantation.

[ Vot. VI. No. 47

-

ead

ci et ale RI

coh yea or.) O- Gagan te Sosy

Aucust 8, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET

175

This may be done by means of fine instruments
made of glass, namely by micropipettes, by glass
rods drawn out to very fine points or by hair
loops mounted on the capillary tip of glass tubes.

In this way presumptive medullary plate and
presumptive epidermis of the early gastrula may
be exchanged. They develop, not according to
the old region they come from, but according to
the new region into which they are brought; that
is, presumptive medullary plate will form epider-
mis; presumptive epidermis, medullary plate.
This may be seen clearly when the germs used
for the experiment were of somewhat different
color either by nature or by vital staining.

It is an important fact that such transplanta-
tions may be performed not only between germs
of the same species (homoeoplastically ) ; but also
between those of different species (heteroplasti-
cally) ; for instance, between Triton taeniatus and
T. cristatus. The eggs of the former species are
more or less pigmented, while those of the latter
are of a greenish white and almost free of pig-
ment. In consequence, the transplanted pieces
may be clearly distinguished, even in sections,
throughout the early development. Here, too, the
transplanted piece will adapt itself to its new sur-
roundings; but in doing so, it will still retain its
specific characteristics. Presumptive medullary
plate of 7. taematus, for instance, will form epi-
dermis of the gills, when brought into the region
of the presumptive gills in a gastrula of cristatus ;
but it will preserve the specific characters of the
taemiatus epidermis of the gill region; the gills
covered by it have the form of taentatus gills of
that early stage.

O. Mangold showed that presumptive epider-
mis may not only form medullary plate but al-
most anything else; somites, nephridia, intestine,
etc.

However there is one region in the early gas-
trula the parts of which behave in a totally dif-
ferent way. If a piece of the upper lip of the
blastopore or of its immediate surroundings is
transplanted into the ventral side of a gastrula,
it does not follow its new neighborhocd in its
development, but sticks to its own way. More
than that, it forces its neighboring cells to follow
it; it organizes its new surroundings and gives
origin to a secondary embryo, partly built up by
the cells of the implant, partly induced by them
in the host’s tissues. The chimaerical condition
of such induced secondary embryos may be clear-
ly demonstrated by heteroplastic transplantation,
as Hilde Mangold has done in her beautiful ex-
periments.

Because of this organizing faculty the region
of the upper lip of the blastopore was called
“center of organization,” and the cells composing
it, “organizers.”

The next step in analyzing this center was to
determine exactly its limits. This was done by
H. Bautzmann. He found that all material of
the dorsal and lateral lips of the blastopore will
induce a medullary plate, which is invaginated dur-
ing gastrulation to form the notochord and the
mesoderm of the embryo. This was in full ac-
cord with a statement made a short time before
in my laboratory by A. Marx, that the mesoderm-
al roof of the archenteron has the power of induc-
tion. In both series of experiments the pieces of
mesoderm were inserted into the coelom of a
young gastrula through a slit in its upper part,
and so came to lie, from the beginning, under the
ectoderm of the embryo. This method was used
in many of our later experiments.

These experiments were a starting-point for
several lines of investigation which I have fol-
lowed, together with an increasing number of
young friends, during the last ten years. As the
time is passing, I must restrict myself here to
outlining briefly the most important results.

The first, almost perfect embryo induced by
Hilde Mangold had a medullary tube without
eyes, but with two ear vesicles, a notochord and
two rows of somites. The secondary ear vesicles
lay almost exactly in the same level with
the primary ones. This suggested the question of
the regional determination of the induced em-
bryo. There might be a gradient of some sort,
a head region and a trunk region either in the
ectoderm or in the underlying mesoderm. If the
latter were true, we might speak for the moment
of a head organizer and a trunk organizer, words
to which no deeper meaning is attributed. The
head organizer would pass first around the upper
lip of the blastopore, to be pushed forward to the
region of the later brain, with its eyes in front
and its ear vesicles on the posterior end. After
this the trunk organizer would be invaginated, in-
cluding that material that comes to lie under the
medullary tube. In consequence, the upper lip
of the blastopore of the gastrula just beginning
to invaginate, consists of the head organizer, at
the end of the gastrulation of the trunk organizer.

In view of this four series of experiments were
made: (1) The head organizer was made to work
on the head region, (2) The trunk organizer on
the trunk region, (3) The head organizer on the
trunk region, and (4) The trunk organizer on the
head region. The result was that the head or-
ganizer always induces brain, with normal or with
cyclopical eyes, either in the head or in the trunk
region; the trunk organizer induces spinal chord
without eyes and ear-vesicles in the trunk region,
but it induces brain with eyes and ear-vesicles in
the head region. From this the conclusion may
be drawn that there is a gradient of some sort,
or rather, as I think, some brain-forming factor

170

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vou. VI. No. 47

in the ectoderm as well as in the underlying meso-
derm. Each of them is sufficient to warrant the
formation of a brain; in normal development both
work together to the same end. The fact that
their effects are not cumulative seems to show
that they are qualitative rather than quantitative.

One might feel inclined to assume that the
whole development of the newt’s egg is composed
of single processes, one inducing the other. A
good example would be the induction of the eye-
anlage by the mesoderm, followed by the induc-
tion of the lens by the eye-ball. The latter, itself
induced, goes on to induce; it might therefore be
called a “secondary organizer” or an “organizer
of second grade.” Such a secondary organizer
could be produced experimentally in the follow-
ing way. A piece of ectoderm, presumptive epi-
dermis or medullary plate was transplanted in
the upper lip of the blastopore. It was invagi-
nated together with the surrounding material and
would have formed notochord. After invagina-
tion it was taken out again and transferred into
the blastocele of another gastrula. Originally it
would not have had the power of inducing a me-
dullary plate; but in its new mesodermal sur-
roundings it had apparently acquired this faculty ;
it induced a very beautiful medullary plate. It
had become a “secondary organizer.”

If this were of general occurrence, one might
conclude that the whole development were purely
epigenetical. But there are certain facts which
will make us cautious. The lens, for instance,
may be induced by the eye-ball; yet, in some
species, at least, a lens may also originate without
an eye-ball. The medullary plate might behave
in the same way; though it can be induced by the
underlying mesoderm, it might besides be able to
originate without it. Recent experiments of
Goerttler and especially of Holtfreter point in
this direction; they show that presumptive me-
dullary plate of the early gastrula, when isolated,
may form nervous tissue. As it develops by sel f-
differentiation, it must have been determined ; but
as the same material might have been induced to
form epidermis, this determination cannot have
been an irrevocable one. This case and other sim-
ilar ones seem to justify the concept of “labile
determination.”

In normal development, presumptive medullary
plate capable of self-differentiation, is in contact
with mesoderm capable of induction—again a
striking example of double insurance. One might
speak of a “synergetical principle of develop-
ment.”

Little is known as yet about the structure of
the center of organization and its means of induc-
ing new structures. A rather radical way to test
both is to destroy its structure and see what sort
of an effect is left. Pieces of presumptive meso-

derm were boiled, frozen, dried out, cut in very
small pieces or pressed between a slide and cover
glass. Only the mechanical methods have yielded
positive results as yet. Organizers, finely chopped
and mixed, or squeezed between glass slides, may
induce a medullary plate. Besides that, they may.
exhibit a most wonderful power of self-regula-
tion, which reminds one of the sponge experi-
ments of H. V. Wilson. In two cases almost per-
fect embryos resulted, with medullary tube, noto-
chord and two rows of somites. The medullary
tubes were certainly induced. The mesodermal
parts might have been induced ; but most probably
they were formed out of the implanted material
itself.

Let me now, in conclusion, hint at some ex-
periments which are just now going on in my
laboratory. You remember the effect of hetero-
plastic transplantation: ectoderm of Triton
taeniatus, transplanted into Triton cristatus, will
adapt itself to its new surroundings and will form
just the organs that are wanted in its new place;
but it will form them in its own way, as taeniatus,
not as cristatus. Now, if it were possible to com-
bine in this way germs of different genera or
even of different orders, as of an urodelan and an
anuran amphibium, very interesting results might
be expected. The larva of Triton has little teeth
in its mouth, of a structure like other vertebrate
teeth, while the tadpole has horny jaws. Triton
has balancers below the eyes while the tadpole
has suckers. Now, if ectoderm of a frog’s gas-
trula is transplanted in the presumptive mouth
region of the gastrula of a newt, what will be
formed later? Will there be formed any part of
the head armature at all and if so what sort?
Teeth and balancers, or horny jaws and suckers?
I can answer the question only for the latter or-
gans, and even there only with a certain reserve.
But I may say that just in the last days before
my departure I saw beautiful suckers, in living
specimens, in one case in sections, in the operated
larvae of Dr. Schotté, with whom I am working
on this problem. When these results have been
worked out, they may throw some light on the
nature of the stimulus that effects induction of
organs. It is as if some key word were given:
“mouth armature’; the response depends on the
quality of the reacting material. But this way
of looking at the things surpasses, at least for
the moment, the limits of exact knowledge. It
is my personal conviction that the processes go-
ing on in the living matter may be compared with
nothing else so well as with the workings of our
own mind. To deal with the living organism as
if it were animated unto its last fibers, seems to
me the best way to understand it and to help it.

That is all that I wish to tell you about my
own experiments. But perhaps you will allow

,

Sa et.

Te te

Aucust 8, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

177

me as a foreign guest to add a few personal words
in conclusion. You will realize that a German
who loves his country could not leave it light-
heartedly just at the present moment. I would not
have done it simply for my own pleasure. But I
knew I was going to friends, and the welcome
you have given my wife and myself has shown
me that I was not mistaken. But I was welcomed
by America even before I came to her shores, in
a most wonderful way. In the reading room of
our steamer, the “Europa,” I saw in the four
corners, four heroes of spirit, two German and
two American, placed fraternally together: Kant

and Goethe; Emerson and Walt Whitman. Few
of us have studied Kant, but his spirit still per-
vades our life. Goethe is not dead amongst us;
many of his works I know by heart. But besides
Goethe, no authors of world literature have in-
fluenced me as much as Emerson and Whitman.
If you were to look in my library, you would see
that there are no books so well-thumbed as Emer-
son’s Essays and the good grey poet’s Leaves of
Grass. When I think of them, I see two stars
shining over your country; their names are free-
dom and comradeship. I wish to say to you that
I feel happy under your stars.

THE FORMATION OF ICE CRYSTALS IN THE PROTOPLASM OF
VARIOUS CELLS
Dr. RoBerT CHAMBERS
Professor of Biology, Washington Square College, New York University

This past spring I had occasion to visit the
Low Temperatures Station in Cambridge, Eng-
land. The station, under the directorship of Sir
William Hardy, has splendidly equipped labora-
tories, and in the basement are a dozen or more
large rooms which can be maintained at various
constant low temperatures. There I became inter-
ested in the question of what happens to proto-
plasm on freezing. At what temperature does
freezing occur and what form do the ice crystals
take within the cell? Do they form in such a
way as to give one an inkling as to the existence
of internal structure? In collaboration with one
of the members of the Station, Mr. H. P. Hale,
I started a series af experiments on muscle,
amebae, and the epidermal cells of the red onion.
These experiments were performed as follows:
A muscle fiber of the sartorius of the frog was
removed and placed in a dish of liquid paraffin,
where it was passed back and forth several times
to rid it of interstitial fluids. The fiber was then
placed on a coverslip and inverted over the moist
chamber of the micromanipulator which had been
placed in a rcom of the desired temperature the
night before. Fire thermocouples were used for
determining the temperature of the hanging drop
and the experiments were always performed in a
room the temperature of which was several de-
grees lower than desired. By means of cold filters
and by using a low power substage condenser, we
were able to maintain fairly constant conditions
in the drop. We worked mostly in a room the
temperature of which was about—6°C. The drop
could be warmed when desired by a fine loop of
heated platinum. For the purpose of inoculating
supercooled material we used a micropipette filled
with water which was frozen so that a micro-
column of ice protruded through its tip. After
the muscle fiber had been allowed to over-cool as

it lay in the oil surrounded by a thin film of
serum, the ice-tipped pipette was brought against
the fiber, whereupon freezing took place. Fine
flakes of ice spread over the surface of the fiber
until the cut ends were reached. The ice at the
cut ends initiated the formation of slender ice
columns which ran in parallel linear lines along
the interior of the fiber. The tips of the columns
were pointed and they advanced regularly and
progressively.

These experiments bring out two interesting
points: (1) the ease with which the internal ice
forms as slender columns running lengthwise
within the muscle fiber. Apparently there is some-
thing which resists the formation of ice in the
transverse but not in the longitudinal direction.
This argues for the interior of the muscle fiber to
consist of linearly arranged solid and liquid areas.
The lower the temperature at which this internal
freezing is brought about, the more rapidly grow
these columns and the more slender and numer-
ous they are. We also froze some fibers over the
open top of a bottle containing liquid air. A
photograph of such a fiber which had been ac-
cidentally broken across the middle, showed tiny
columns projecting from the broken ends in the
space caused by the break.

(2) The other interesting point about these ex-
periments is the difference in temperature at
which surface and internal freezing occurred. We
obtained external freezing at about—1.8°C., but it
was not until the temperature was lowered still
more that we secured internal freezing. This is
interesting because Mr. T. Moran of the Low
Temperature Station, has found that muscle is
irreversibly affected when frozen below a tem-
perature of —1.5° to —2.0°. As the muscle was
thawed, those fibers which had had columns of ice
formed inside, contracted irreversibly, while the

178

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 47

fibers which had been frozen at the surface only,
would be contractile at a temperature as low as
—I0°,

Our other experiments Wwere on the ameba.
Several organisms were placed ina drop of water
ona coverslip. The drop was ringed with oil and
as much water as possible drawn off, leaving the
amebae flattened against the coverslip. A drop of
oil was then deposited so as to touch the ring, and
to enclose the amebae in a thin film of water. The
coverslip was then inverted and brought to the
low temperature. When the over-cooled water
around the amebae was touched with the ice-
tipped pipette, ice spread in several sheets from
the site of seeding. On approaching the amebae
the ice sheets grouped about them and spread un-
til all of the water was frozen except for a nar-
row zone around the organisms. Freezing con-
tinued until finally this also was frozen. Oc-
casionally the resulting compression was so great
as to burst the amebae, whereupon they froze.
Amebae which were not compressed sufficiently to
cause bursting remained quiescent, with their
pseudopodia extended and firmly embedded in ice.
By raising a microneedle from below and pushing
against the ameba, the granules within could be
moved about. The temperature at which the cul-
ture-medium froze was in the neighborhood of
—o0.3°C. We had to drop the temperature consid-
erably below this before we secured internal freez-
ing of an intact ameba. This was done by in-
serting an ice-tipped pipette into the ameba,
whereupon fine, feathery ice crystals would grow
through the interior and stop inside the mem-
brane. After a few minutes the crystals ran to-
gether into blocks of ice, squeezing the cytoplas-
mic granules into spaces between the blocks. It
made a striking picture to observe amebae, as one
after another was punctured. The unpunctured
amebae were translucent and one could see the
nucleus and contractile vacuole. Upon punctur-
ing, the entire amebae at once became opaque.
The ice crystals as they formed, could be seen to
run around the contractile vacuole, and then after
a bit this, too, would freeze.

We obtained analogous results with plant cells.
Strips of the epidermis of the common red onion
were placed in liquid paraffin and frozen by touch-
ing with an ice-tipped pipette. Freezing of the es-
caped sap first occurred over the surface of the
strip and then in the cavities of the dead cells.
Ice crystals would form under the cellulose wall
of normal appearing cells, resulting in a dimin-
ution of the vacuole. The protoplasm progressive-
ly shrank as the color of the contained sap be-
came intensified, suggesting the extraction of
water. On thawing, the water was reabsorbed.
In other words, with freezing it is possible to ob-
tain reversible plasmolysis. At temperatures be-

tween —8° C, and —10° C. spontaneous freezing
of the sap within the vacuole may occur, but
above —8° C. freezing of the sap occurred only
when the protoplasm had ruptured. This suggests
that plant cells, as well as the ameba and the mus-
cle fiber, possess a membrane which can prevent
external freezing from inoculating the interior.
In the case of the ameba and of the muscle fiber,
it is of interest to note that the type of crystal
formation within the former denotes a lack of
definite structure, while the reverse is true for the
latter.
Discussion

Ouestion: | wonder if these results are not sim-
ilar to what you get in fine capillaries where there
is supercooling and then a small crystal of ice is
added? At 5° or 6° below zero the whole thing
solidifies.

Dr. Chambers: It is true that the capillary di-
mensions of the droplets I used made it far
easier to induce supercooling than if the fluids
used had been in greater amounts.

Question: As I understand it, the ice crystals
did not form, at least in muscle cells, unless they
came in from the outside. You had no formation
of ice crystals inside when the membrane was in-
tact ?

Dr. Chambers: Occasionally we obtained spon-
taneous freezing of a cell but that was only when
the temperature was considerably below the freez-
ing point of the interior. However, at a temper-
ature at which external freezing occurred no in-
ternal freezing could be induced even when a
piece of ice was inserted into the interior. At a
temperature still lower, seeding the interior in-
duced internal freezing.

Question: When you had actually penetrated
the membrane, did the ice columns proceed strict-
ly longitudinally, or did they ever extend trans-
versely?

Dr. Chambers: If the seeding occurred at the
cut end of a fiber, the ice columns started at that
spot and advanced in parallel, longitudinal lines
along the interior of the fiber. If the seeding oc-
curred at a tear in the sarcolemma on the side of
the fiber, the columns started at this spot and
sprayed out in curves from there, then running
along in the two longitudinal directions to the
two ends of the fiber.

Question: Would you draw the conclusion that
outside freezing does not extend through to the
inside? How would you interpret this as relating
to the pore theory?

Dr. Chambers: The surface of the cell appar-
ently serves as a barrier against seeding of the
interior from the outside. I do not know wheth-
er a pored membrane would act in a similar man-
ner.

Question: Is anything known about the he-

a a oe

— —

——

Aucust 8, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 179

havior of artificial membranes?
pass through them?

Dr. Chambers: Blocks of gelatin will freeze if
the temperature is lowered sufficiently. At a rel-
atively high temperature there will be surface
freezing, extraction of water, and shrinking of
the gelatin. By lowering the temperature the
freezing will spread into the gelatin block.

Comment: It seems to me that it would he a
good thing to make experiments with membranes
having pores of known sizes. I do not believe
the gelatin membrane would help much because
we know that that is mostly water. A dried col-
lodion membrane, for instance, is extremely pevr-
mealne. If it should turn out that freezing would
or would not go through a collodion membrane,
it might throw a great deal of light on the ques-
tion.

Will freezing

Question: How do you interpret the longitudin-
al spread of freezing with reference to the in-
ternal structure of the fiber?

Dr. Chambers: The myofibrils are longitudinal-
ly arranged, solid elements, immersed in a more
fluid medium; and the whole is surrounded by a
membrane which resists the inoculation of freez-
ing from without.

Question: Did the ameba show reversal, and
the muscle fiber also ?

Dr. Chambers: None of the amebae we ob-
served showed recovery from internal freezing.
They were irreversibly coagulated. Unfrozen am-
ebae, kept in solid ice at—3°C. for 3 hours, may
recover on thawing. When an internally frozen
muscle-fiber was thawed an irreversible shorten-
ing always took place.

SCIENTIFIC BOOK REVIEWS

The Laboratory Mouse. Its Origin, Heredity
and Culture. Clyde E. Keeler, 81 pp. Harvard
University Press. 1931.

A brief statement of the geographical distribu-
tion of the mouse is followed by an informing
account of the antiquity of the fancy mouse. It
appears that dominant spotting, albinism, and
waltzing were all recorded before the present era.
The other breeds were distinguished much later.
Since in the classical literature the same word
Mns was used for both the mouse and the rat, it
is only possible to determine which is meant by
the help of indirect evidence.

Some twenty-four breeds of mice are briefly
described and these descriptions followed by a
useful table, listing for twenty-seven varieties the
fanciers’ term, the scientific term and the genetic
formula.

The genetics of normal and abnormal inherit-
ance are then considered, and the book closes with
a chapter on the laboratory breeding and care of
these animals.

Twenty-one life-size figures, in black and white,
indicate the habit and coat color in the several
breeds. —H. H. Donarpson.

Laboratory Studies in Zoology. H. D Reed and
B. P. Young. 1930. viii plus 121 pp. McGraw-Hill
Book Company.

This laboratory manual has grown out of the
elementary course in zoology at Cornell. Approx-
imately half the book is devoted to outlines for
the study of the frog. Keys are given for student
identification of Protozoa and for “the larger
groups of animals.” This adds another to the
distinctly teachable laboratory outlines in ele-
mentary zooloev for the incressing number of
teachers who dislike to “roll-their-own ”

—W.C. ALLeE.

The Genetics of Domestic Rabbits. A Manual
for Students of Mammalian Genetics and an Aid
to Rabbit Breeders and Fur Farmers. W. E.
Castle. 31 pp. 39 figs. Harvard University
Press. 1930.

This brochure is a pendant to Castle’s larger
book on genetics. It deals only with the rabbit
and its immediate purpose is indicated in the
subtitle.

Twelve mutations are precisely described in
four groups under: “Color Mutation,” “Spotted
Coat,” “Structure of Coat” and “Color of Fat.”
The genetic constitution of each of the various
breeds is given in detail. There follows a chap-
ter on body size and ear length The figures are
ercellent and the book forms a handy compendium
for those concerned with the rabbit in any way.

—H. H. Donatpson.

Textbook of Histology. Eugene C. Piette, M. D.
450 pp. 1931. F. A. Davis Company.

This elementary text is made short and simple
to meet needs of medical and dental classes, but
merits wider usage. The style is crisp, the 277
illustrations are admirably chosen and spaced.
Key words and phrases on every page are set in
bold face type to save the student time in re-
viewing. There is more material of general bio-
logical interest than in many medical texts, and
an effort has been made to include recent work in
the various fields. Histological techniques are
briefly and neatly described in an introductory
chapter. Forty pages are given over to cytology,
a hundred and fifteen to general histology, and
the rest to special histology. ,

In common with so many American scie 1tific
books, this text is printed on glossy paper. Glossy
paper was invented by the devil to blind the eyes
of those who read at night. —W. W. BALtarp.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 47

THE DIRECTORY FOR 1931

( ADDITIONS )

This list contains the names of the workers at the
laboratories in Woods Hole which were not included
in the first number of THE COLLECTING NET.

KEY
Laboratories Residence
Botany Building ..... Bot Apartment .......... A
Brick Building ....... Br Dormitory .......... D
Drew House ........ Dr

Fisheries Laboratory. .FL
Lecture Hall L

Fisheries Residence...F

Main Room in Fisheries Homestead .........Ho

Laboratory ........-. Witt Vs hbio)oehdel soy apo boo H
Old Main Building ...OM Kidder .............. K
Rockefeller Building, Rock Whitman ........... WwW

In the case of those individuals not living on”
laboratory property, the name of the landlord and
the street are given. In the case of individuals living
outside of Woods Hole, the place of residence is in
parentheses.

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Investigators

Alderman, Evangeline grad. asst. Wellesley. Br 204.
W a.

Anderson, R. S. res. assoc. Princeton. Br 110. Mc-
Innes, Millfield.

Ashkenaz, D. M. asst. biol. New York. Br 328. Cav-
anaugh, High.

Atlas, M. asst. emb. Columbia. Br 314. Dr 14.

Austin, Mary L. asst. prof. zool. Br 217B. Nickerson,
Quissett.

Bakwin, H. asst. prof. pediatrics New York. OM 38.
Tinkham, Gardiner.

Bakwin, Ruth instr. pediatrics New York. OM 38.
Tinkham, Gardiner.

Ball, E. G. instr. phys. chem. Hopkins Med. Br 110.
Veeder, West.

Beck, L. V. grad. asst. phys. New York. Phys. Lab.
McLeish, Millfield.

Beutner, R. prof. pharmacology, Louisville Med. Br
325. Lewis, Buzzards Bay.

Biddle, R. asst. gen. Col. Inst. Tech.

Borodin, D. N. invest. plant phys. Yonkers, N. Y.
Bot. Hilton, Millfield.

Buck, Louise H. asst. cytol. New York. Br 343. D 105

Butt, C. res. asst. Princeton. Br 116. Sylvia, Millfield.

Carabelli, A. A. med. stud. Pennsylvania. Br 114.
Addison, Gosnold.

Carlson, J. G. instr. biol. Bryn Mawr. OM 33. KT.

Castle, W. A. instr. biol. Brown. Br 233. Kittila, Bar
Neck.

Chor, H. neurol. Washington Med. (St. Louis) Br
223. (Falmouth).

Clark, Frances M. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 328B. Howes,
Main.

Coldwater, G. instr. zool. Missouri. Br 335.

Corey, H. Irene res. asst. Pennsylvania. Br 219.
Purdham, Main.

Cowles, R. P. prof. zool. Hopkins. Br 336. D 101.

Curtis, W. C. prof. zool. Missouri. Br 335. Dr 211.

Dearing, W. H. grad. cytol. Pennsylvania Med. Br
220. Elliot, Center.

Dunbar, F. F. grad. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 333.
Wallace (Falmouth).

Eastlick, H. L. grad. asst. zool. Washington (St.
Louis) OM Base. Dr. 7.

Einarson, L. res. fel. Harvard Med. Br 108. A 107.

Eyre, Sara W. res. asst. Long Island. OM 45. D 209.

Favilli, G. asst. Inst. of Gen. Pathology, Royal (Flor-
ence, Italy) Br 208. Elliot, Center.

Francis, Dorothy res. asst. Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.)
Br 329. W f.

Fraser, Doris A. asst. anat. Pennsylvania Med. Br
114. Addison, Gosnold.

Gayet, D. dir. Lab. Physiologie Pathologique (Paris)
Br 109. Broderick, North.

Graham, C. H. Nat. Res. fel. Pennsylvania Br 231.
Hilton, Main.

Green, Arda A. res. fel. phys. chem. Harvard Med.
Br 108. Grinnell, West.

Greenwood, A. W. lect. Inst. Genetics (Edinburgh)
Br 123.

Hartline, H. K. fel. med. physics Pennsylvania. Br
231. McLeish, Millfield.

Hitschler, W. J. grad. Pennsylvania. Br 117. Wilde,
Gardiner.

Hodge, C. Jr. instr. zool. Virginia. Rock. Rohmeling,
Pleasant.

Hodge, Ruth P. grad. bot. Virginia. Bot. Rohmeling,
Pleasant.

Heiss, Elizabeth M. grad. asst. biol. Purdue. Phys.
Lab. W g.

Jackson, J. P. grad. asst. bot. Missouri. Bot. Dr 2.

Johnson, H. H. Col. City N. Y. Br 315. White, Mill-
field.

Jones, N. scientific artist. Br. 211. A 201.

Kille, F. R. assoc. prof. biol. Birmingham Southern.
OM Base. D 307.

Kostir, W. J. asst. prof. zool. Ohio State. Bot 6.
Gifford, Juniper Point.

Lambert, Elizabeth F. tech, phys. Harvard Med. Br
107. Young, West.

Lewis, I. prof. bot. Bot. Virginia, Hubbard, East.

Loebel, R. O. Russell Sage fel. Cornell Med. Br 340.
Nickerson, Church.

Margolin, S. grad. proto. Columbia. Br 314. Avery,
Main.

Metealf, M. M. res. assoc. zool. Johns Hopkins, High.

Moor, Carmen, Sec. to Dr. Bronfenbrenner. Gifford,
Juniper Point.

Moor, W. A. tech. bact. Washington (St. Louis) Br 2
Gifford, Juniper Point.

Morris, Helen grad. Columbia. Bot. McInnis. Millfield.

Nelsen, O. E. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. OM 21. K 9.

Nicoll, P. A. grad. zool. Washington (St. Louis) OM
Base. Dr. 7.

Oltmann, Clara Columbia. OM 34. W h.

Reznikoff, P. instr. med. Cornell Med. Br 340, Mc-
Kenzie, Pleasant.

Risley, P. L. instr. zool. Michigan. L 21. Gifford,
Juniper Point.

Rugh, R. instr. zool. Hunter. Br 217M. D 303.

Schauffler, W. G. physician. Princeton. L 24. Fish,
Woods Hole.

Schmidt, Ida Genther jr. res. fel. Children’s Hosp.
(Cincinnati) Br 110. Neal, Woods Hole.

Schmuck, Louise grad. cytol. Johns Hopkins. Br
343. H 2.

on el th CN

Aucust 8, 1931 |

THE COLLECTING

NET 181

Schuett, J. F. zool. Chicago. Br 332. North.

Scott, Florence M. asst. prof. biol. Seton Hall. Br
217D. Nickerson, Millfield.

Shore, Agnes instr. chem. Bellevue Med.
York) Br 310. A 206.

Sickles, Grace asst. bact. N. Y. State Dept. Health.
Br 122. Young, West.

Smith, Suzanne Instr. zool. Missouri. Br 335. Erskine.
Woods Hole.

Snyder, C. D. prof. phys. Hopkins Med. Library, Mc-
Kenzie, Pleasant.

Spemann, H. dir. Zool. Inst. (Freiburg) Br 306.

Steinbach, H. B. grad. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 220.
Elliot, Center.

Stewart, Dorothy R. asst. prof. biol. Skidmore. Br
222. White, Millfield.

Stokes, Julia C. res. asst. Washington Med.
Louis) Br 2. Hamilton, Main.

Taft, C. H. Jr. assoc. prof. pharmacology Texas Med.
L 32. Whitman.

Tocker, A. J. res. asst. bacteriol. Washington Med.
(St. Louis) Br 2. Dinsmore, School.

Tohyama, G. asst. prof. Tokio Imperial. L 31. Ca-
hoon, Main.

Turner, J. P. instr. zool. Minnesota. Br 217n. Grin-
nell, West.

Tyler, A. instr. emb. California Inst. Tech. Br 315.
Goffin, Millfield.

Tyler, Betty S. res. asst. emb. California Inst. Tech.
Br 315. Goffin, Millfield.

Walker, P. A. grad. Bowdoin. OM 41. Thompson,
Main.

White, Edna tech. Hopkins. Br 343. Moses, Agassiz.

Wolf, E. A. asst. prof. zool. Pittsburgh. OM 43.
Elliot, Center.

(New

(St.

U. S. BUREAU OF FISHERIES
Investigators

Cobb, Margaret V. res. assoc. Education. Harvard.
M. Howes, Main.

Hooker, C. W. grad. zool. Duke. FL 54. F 149.

Long, Margaret E. tech. Duke. FL 149. Lewis, High.

Parr, A. E. asst. prof. zool. Yale. FL 141. F 2.

OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION

Bigelow, Elizabeth 109. Luscombe, Main.

Borodin, N. A. Museum Comp. Zool. (Cambridge)
107. Lewis, Buzzards Bay.

Lambert, Anne 105. Young, West.

Redfield, A. C. prof. phys. Harvard. 103. Price,
Church.

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
Instruction Staff

Bissonnette, T. H. prof. biol. Trinity. OM 26. D 108-
109.

Cole, E. C. assoc. prof. biol. Williams. OMB 24. D 304.

Coonfield, B. R. instr. zool. Brooklyn. OM 29 D 306.

Dawson, J. A. asst. prof. biol. Col. City N. Y. OM
28. A 302.

Hadley, C. E. asst. prof. biol. N. J. State Teachers’
(Montclair) OM 32. Hilton, Main.

Nelson, O. E. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. OM 21. K 9.

Parks, Elizabeth K. grad. asst. Oberlin. OM. W d.

Pollister, A. W. instr. zool. Columbia. OM 44. D 314.

Sayles, L. P. instr. biol. Col. City N. Y. OM 25. D 214.

Severinghaus, A. E. asst. prof. anat. Columbia. OM
31. K 12.

‘Students

Aguayo, C. G. asst. prof. biol. Havana. Clough, Mill-
field.

Anthony, Elizabeth S. grad. Brown. H 7a.

ERachrach, Josephine E. Vassar. Grinnell, West.

Baker, E. G. S. stud. asst. anat. and emb, De Pauw.
K 6.

Barron, D. H. asst. Yale. Cowey, Depot.

Belcher, Jane C. Colby. Cowey, Depot.

Brewster, J. R. ed. Univ. Film Found. Avery, Main.

Chase, H. Y. grad. Howard. Dr 8.

Chen, H. Harvard. Dr 9.

Chinn, M. Priscilla grad. Goucher. Cowey, Depot.

Clark, Adele F. Tufts. Kittila, Bar Neck.

Clark, Jean MeN. Wilson. Hilton, Main.

Clausen, R. G. instr. biol. Union. Smith, Glendon,

Cohen, B. M. asst zool. Johns Hopkins, Nickerson,
Millfield. 5

Corey, H. Irene res. asst. Pennsylvania, Purdham,
Main.

Croley, J. T. Dartmouth. Dr.

Dimick, Helen Wellesley. H 7.

Drew, R. W. Wesleyan. K 5.

Drugg, Helen Vermont. Sanderson, High.

Eastlick, H. L. grad. asst. zool. Washington (St.
Louis) Dr 7.

Ellis, Lolz, M. asst. biol. Southwestern. W c.

Fish, H. S. grad. Harvard. Crowell, Main.

Forhan, Laura Montana, Broderick, North.

Fuchs, B. American (Washington, D. C.) Dr attic.

Gerstell, R. Dartmouth. Dr 1.

Glidden, Dorothy P. grad. Smith. W e.

Hegner, Isabel Radcliffe. Conklin, High.

Hetrick, L. A. Jr. asst. biol. American (Washington,
D. C.) Dr. 3.

Howard, J. W. Hamilton. K 8.

Hussey, Kathleen L. fel. zool. Ohio Wesleyan. W c.

Jefferson, Margaret D. Pennsylvania Col. for Women
Broderick, North.

Johnson, Arlene C. Wheaton. H 6.

Jones, E. R. lect. biol. Dalhousie. (Halifax) K 8.

Kilgore, B. Butler. Robinson, Quissett.

Kramer, T. C. res. asst. biol. Western Reserve. K 7.

Lengstroth, Muriel A. Dalhousie (Halifax) Gray,
Buzzards Bay.

Mann, D. R. grad. asst. zool. Duke. Hall, Millfield.

Melvin, G. grad. De Pauw. K 7.

Metzner, J. fel. zool. Col. City N. Y. Young, West.

Moment, G. B. fel. zool. Yale. Cowey, Depot.

Nicoll, P. A. Washington (St. Louis) Dr 7.

Pomerat, C. A. asst. biol. Clark (Worcester) Hig-
gins, Depot.

Raye, W. H. Jr. Amherst. Dr 6.

Rosenbaum, Louise lab. asst. zool.
Sanderson, High.

Rountree, Katherine E. instr. biol. Wesleyan. W b.
Sanders, R. grad. Yale. White, Millfield.
Smith, O. R. grad. Cornell. Supply House.

Solberg, A. N. instr. zool. North Dakota Agricultur-
al. Avery, Main.

Stewart, P. A. Rochester, K 6.
Thomas, T. B. grad. asst. Oberlin K 5.

Warters, Mary asst. prof. biol. Centenary (Shreve-
port, La.) K 2.

Westkaemper, Remberta instr. biol. St. Benedict.
Nickerson, Millfield.

Willard, W. R. Yale Med. Dr 2.

Wismer, Virginia asst. bot. Pennsylvania. Sander-
son, High.

Young, D. G. Acadia. McLeish, Millfield.

Pennsylvania.

182

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 47

The Collecting Net
A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Cattell

EDITORIAL NOTES
Three more numbers of THE CoLtectinG Net
will be published this season, the last one being
issued on Saturday, August 29. Material for pub-
lication in this issue cannot be accepted after
Monday, August 24.

The plan of selling books to obtain money for
Tue CottectinG Net Scholarship Fund has been
a successful one. A sum of over one hundred
dollars has already been realized from this source.
We still have a large collection of books for sale
at reduced prices. Books on Cape Cod and a few
of the current magazines can be purchased at the
publisher’s list price. We are under obligations
to Miss Ruth Ann Johlin for the poster of the
darky holding the announcement of our sale.

Several young biologists who would like to ob-
tain positions this winter have placed informa-
tion about themselves on file in our office. This
is available for consultation by individuals who
might be concerned with their appointment.

PICNIC PARTIES ON NAUSHON AND
NONAMESSET

The following statement has recently been re-
ceived by the Marine Biological Laboratory from
Mr. Ralph E. Forbes, Managing Trustee of the
Forbes Estate:

The Trustees of Naushon have had under con-
sideration the matter of permitting the landing of
picnic parties at different parts of their property
and they have decided to modify the regulations
which have been in force for some years.

On account of the building of two new houses by
members of the family, one on Nonamesset over-
looking Inner Hadley Harbor and one on Goat's
Neck, it has been decided to cancel the general per-
mission given to the public to land on the so-called
Wild Duck Wharf on Goat’s Neck and in the stead
thereof, to authorize the landing of picnic parties
on the white sand beach on the North side of No-
namesset near the old Nonamesset House; and the
other point where picnic parties may land is the
small Cove which faces South on the Sound at the
extreme Eastern point of Nonamesset; and on the
island of Naushon, permission is given the public to
land on the white sand beach at Tarpaulin Cove,
but with this proviso in both cases,—that picnic

parties of more than twenty-five persons are re-
quested to notify Mr. Allan the foreman at Naushon
Farm and obtain from him the permission of the
trustees for landing such large parties. .

The lighting of fires without permission, on any
land of the Naushon Trustees, is prohibited.

We wish at this time to express our appreciation
of the consideration which has been shown by the
members and students of your school, in clearing up
the traces of their picnic parties in the past. Other
picnic parties have frequently been less considerate
and we find it important to make more strict rules
than in the past.

Will you kindly inform those who wish to land
and make use of the privileges of Naushon and
Nonamesset, of the new regulations which we are
putting in force?

DR. FRY AND THE FORTY DROSO-
PHILA EGGS
Dr. ALFRED F, HUETTNER
Professor of Biology, Washington Square Col-
lege, New York University
In his review of my recent seminar report Dr.

Fry criticized my observations on the Drosophila

egg by comparing my data with his own which
he obtained from forty Drosophila eggs. He
found that only half of this number of segment-
ing eggs showed centrioles during interkinesis,
and the reader is left with the impression that I
must have had similar results and that I must
have withheld such negative evidence in my re-
cent report.

I have studied thousands of Drosophila eggs,
and I have coagulated them with a large variety
of fixing agents, beginning with Weismann’s heat
coagulation and ending with the specialized tech-
niques of Mottier and Kopsch. Invariably all
segmenting Drosophila eggs show centrioles dur-
ing interkinesis when coagulated with the stand-
ard fixing agents commonly used in cytologic
technique, and I am willing to demonstrate this
fact to anyone who is interested in this problem.

—ALFreD F, HUETTNER.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
AS GONG ee eee 12:55) 7 eto
TENUUC VO et ace Seer eae 1iS2) sa2e08
PAUGE PIMs teen eer rote 2:43; 92550
veN beg el betas ee Serene oe 23335 maine
AUS. 187 Loe mene ee oer
AAG NS ice aie Bee nee ees Silom S524
AUS OSTIG Ree eee. ene 6:0n (6219
AUG 16) se. oc he LOLA OS
ANI 7, aii 3k Re eS On ROR OO

AES SUS Racers 8:23

ar

ee eee a ee

Aucust 8, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ITEMS OF INTEREST

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Mr. R. D. Norton, Palaeontologist of the Texas
Company, Shreveport, Louisiana, visited the In-
stitution last week to consult Director T. Way-
land Vaughan concerning certain problems of for-
aminifera and marine sediments.

Dr. F. S. Brackett, Chief of the new Division
of Radiation and Organisms of the Smithsonian
Institution of Washington, delivered a lecture at
tht Scripps Institution on Wednesday afternoon
of last week. His subject was “Study of the
effect of radiation on plants,” and he devoted con-
siderable time to explanation of methods of in-
vestigation being developed by his Division. He
showed that already they have obtained remark-
ably accurate measurements of the use of light by
a plant both in respect to the common rays of
“white light” and in respect to the color com-
ponents (red, blue, ultra violet, etc.) of such rays.
He was accompanied by Prof. A. R. Davis of the
Department of Plant Physiology of the Uni-
versity of California at Berkeley.

Mr. H. B. Foster, Engineer of the Comptrol-
ler’s office of the University of California at Ber-
keley, visited the Institution on University busi-
ness from Saturday of last week to Tuesday of
this week.

On Wednesday evening of this week Prof. W.
P. Kelley of the Department of Agricultural
Chemistry in*the Citrus Experiment Station at
Riverside delivered a lecture on “Base exchange
in soils.”’ This lecture was especially interesting
to members of the scientific staff of the Institu-
tion because a number of the problems discussed
are similar to those encountered in study of ma-
rine sediments.

Mr. and Mrs. James Leach, Teaching Fellows
in the Departments of Zoology and Palaeontol-
ogy, respectively, of the University of California
at Berkeley, were week-end guests of Mr. and
Mrs. E. H. Myers.

On Saturday of last week Mr. Harry Reddick,
City Engineer of Santa Paula, arrived by aero-
plane to spend the week end with h’s cousin, Mr.
L. D. Barber, Superintendent of Construction at
the Institution.

On Monday evening, August 3, at 8:00 p.m.,
Dr. F. B. Sumner will deliver a lecture in the In-
stitution library entitled “Some results of seven-
teen years study of geographic races of mice.”

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Dr. and Mrs. C. C. Plitt of the University of
Maryland arrived August 4th, 1931. They will
be at the Laboratory for the rest of the summer.

Mrs. William H. Cole arrived August 1st. Dr.
Cole is working at the Laboratory this summer,

Dr. and Mrs. A. Mansfield Clarke of The
Johns Hopkins Medical School visited Dr. and
Mrs. Warren H. Lewis over the week-end.

The Monday evening seminar on August 3rd
will be in charge of Dr. H. D. Senior of New
York University who will speak on “The radical
difference between the arterial anomalies of the
human upper and lower extremities.”, and Dr. A.
Defrise of the University of Milan, whose sub-
ject is “Sytophysiology of Kidney.”

Miss Miriam F. Clarke who is now a student
in the Department of Biochemistry at Yale Medi-
cal School, has been visiting her brother, Mr.
Robert Clarke for a few days.

Dr. and Mrs. William Wherry entertained the
members of the Laboratory at a barn dance on
August Ist. Prizes for the best costumes were
won by Dr. Esther F. Byrnes arid her sister, Miss
3yrnes, who appeared as bugs; Mrs. W. L. Holt,
Jr., who dressed as a mummy; Dr. Homer W.
Smith, as an organ-grinder; Miss Frances Snow,
as an old-fashioned lady; Mr. William L. Doyle
as a pirate; Mrs. E. K: Marshall, Jr., as a little
girl. Miss Louise Mast and Mr. Heinz Specht
were given a prize for the dirtiest costumes.
Prizes were also given to the Misses Louise and
Elizabeth Mast and Mr. Robert F. Mathews for
stunts. —Loutse R. Mast.

Miss Louise Schmuck and Dr. Helen Smith
have returned to work in Dr. Metz’s laboratory
after a month’s vacation. They were guests of
the Right Reverend Mr. and Mrs. Schmuck in
Laramie, Wyoming, and motored with them to
Yellowstone National Park and other western
points of interest.

The M. B. L. Club has announced the two fol-
lowing programs for this week’s victrola con-
certs: Sunday, August 9:—8:o00 P. M. Egmont
Overture, Beethoven; Rosamunde Ballet Music,
Schubert; L’Apres-midi d’un Faune, Debussy;
Symphony No. 5, Beethoven.

Thursday August 13—8:00 P.M. Clarinet
Quintet, Brahms; Passacaglia, Bach; Quartet,
opus 135, Beethoven.

The music begins promptly at 8:00 P. M.

184 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 47

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable

Spalteholz us to send the appropriate

catalog.
Transparent
Preparations Visit our New and Greatly En- . :
Human larged Display Rooms and Museum “ rari
and
(Ee, Cy een «eee
Zoological Cray-ApAms CompANy

SS 117-119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK
Model of Human Heart’

ASTA
PARAFFIN
OVEN

We cordially invite you to a dem-
onstration of this oven designed by
Dr. Huettner at the Collecting Net
office on August 13 to 15th.

Our Mr. W. Lebowitz will be
in charge of this demonstration.

STANDARD SCIENTIFIC SUPPLY CORE

Biological, Bacteriological and Chemical Apparatus, Naturalists’ Supplies, Specimens,
Skeletons, Anatomical Models, Wall Charts, Glass Jars, Microscopes
and Accessories.

10-14 WEST 25th STREET NEW YORK CITY

—

Aucust 8, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 185

BEGG sf ssa. Camera

Attachable to any Standard Microscope

THIS CAMERA USES
STANDARD
CINEMA FILM

Specimen of image produced
with Roll Film Micro At-
tachment Camera. The
characteristics under which
this photograph was taken
are as follows:

. Standard type microscope;

. Achromatic objective 16mm;
“Periplan” ocular 8X;

. Magnification 27X;

. Low voltage lamp as illuminant;
“Lifa’”’ filter No. 200b;

Exposure 1-10 second;

. Condenser diaphragm closed one-half;
. Film used: Leitz special cinema film.

This Camera is inserted into
the Microscope Tube after the
ocular has been withdrawn.

menArAanrrwone

Heretofore, the demonstration of microscopical specimens through projection was solely con-
fined to the use of lantern slides. Aside from lantern slides being costly to produce, they are
easily broken-and represent a bulky collection while transporting them from one lecture room to
another. This obstacle is quickly recognized amongst scientists who have to do with lecture work
and the reason for an ever-increasing use of film slides (film rolls) for projection is therefore
readily conceived. So far, no camera has been available for taking pictures of microscopical speci-
mens upon film slides, and with 'the introduction of the Leitz Roll Film Micro Attachment Cam-
era, a long felt demand has been complied with.

This new camera consists principally of a m2tal housing and within its chamber, the film is
carried by magazines made of brass. Each magazine contains standard perforated cinema film in
lengths of approximately 5% ft., for 36 pictures each measuring 36 x 24 mm (double cinema frame
size). The magazine, however, may be loaded with any strips of shorter lengths. The exception-
ally fine grain of the cinema film and the favorable size of the picture produced by the camera
render the negatives available for extensive enlargements.

The magazines are loaded in daylight by using film supplied by us in daylight packing. A
counter tally disc is provided at one side of the camera housing and this disc registers auto-
matically the number of exposures made. The conical adapter attached to the camera contains a
lens combination to render the magnification at ts» #!rm one-third in value of the magnitication
obtained with the microscope.

Attached to the conical adapter are a side telescope and shutter. This side telescope permits
constant observation of the object while taking photographs. “Periplan” Ocular 8X is best adapt-
ed for photographs with this camera and is included in the standard equipment. Focusing the
camera is accomplished in a very simple manner and the photographs it obtains are exceedingly
sharp and brilliant.

The negative film slides, prepared through the use of the camera, can readily be copied upon
positive film for protection. For this purpose, we offer a simple model of contact printer. For
projecting the positive film slides, we recommend our Film Slide Projector “Uleja’’.

Write for Pamphlet No. 1142 (CN)

be Z. Ine.

60 East 10th Street New York, N. Y.

186 THE COLLECTING NET ~ [ Vot. VI. No. 47

INTERNATIONAL
CENTRIFUGES

Many types offering a large variety
of equipment of tubes and a wide
range of speed and consequent
relative centrifugal force.

International Equipment Co.
352 WESTERN AVENUE
BOSTON, MASS.

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

cf Marine Biological
8 Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 114-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every CLASSROOM MATERIAL
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the

nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so

that each one forms a dust-proof cover for MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-

sure protection to high mounts. Made en-

tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and LIVE MATERIAL
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-

age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may

be filed in a space fourteen inches square by Catalogues and information furnished by
eee 75 agent a ie Rhee tr Pa ES ou applying at Supply Department Office
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE Woods Hole, Mass.

Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

Aucust 8, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 187

Setting the Pace in
Research Microscope Design

When Bausch & Lomb designed the DDE,* placing the arm at the front, an instru-
ment was made available tc the research scientist that was truly revolutionary. This
construction brought greater convenience by allowing free access to the stage, ob-
jectives, substage and mirror. It brought comfort, because the inclined binocular
body tube gives relief from neck and eye strain. The specimen is always viewed
with the stage horizontal.

The DDE is complete in every respect. It is possible to direct all light into the
right eyepiece by a quarter turn of an adjustment button. It can be quickly trans-
formed into a monocular instrument for photomicrography by changing body tubes.
The complete substage is equipped with a supplementary condenser which can be
swung into position when changing from high to low power, eliminating the necessity
of changing the focus of the con- Write for catalog D-164, which
denser. will give you a complete descrip-

; ll De ticn of the DDE.
You are cordially invited to at-

tend an exhibit of Bausch &
Lomb Instruments from August
6 - 15 in the Old Lecture Hall.

*Suggestions of Drs. L. W. Sharp
and L. F. Randolph of Cornell

University.

BAUSCH & LOMB

671 St. Paul Street Z Z 2 2 2 2 Rockester, N. Y-

188 THE COLLECTING NET

{ VoL. VI. No. 47

“BITUKNI”

HE Bitukni tube attachment
serves for stereoscopically
viewing microscopic objects with
the aid of a single objective. It
enables the observer to look
obliquely into the microscope
without inclining it about its
hinge, thus retaining the conven-
ience of a horizontal stage for
manipulation of the specimen.

Price $86 f.o.b. N. Y.

including one pair of compen-
sating eyepieces. (7x, IOX, or
15x.)

Additional compensating eye-
pieces, $18 a pair.

CARL ZEISS, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue
New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
723 South Hill St., Los Angeles, Calif.

BINOCULAR ATTACHMENT

GOLD

Non-Corrosive

SEAL

MICROSCOPIC

SLIDES «: COVER GLASSES
Do Net Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Cray-ApAms Company

117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale
B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.

EST. 1887

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC

13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Fcreign Languages

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

Available: as research assistant after August

first. Have A.B. and M. A. degrees in zoological
sciences and wish to continue in Woods Hole.
Willing to act as assistant in any capacity. Local
references as to qualifications if desired. For
further information inquire at

THE COLLECTING NET —Jane Carpenter

HEADQUARTERS FOR

STEEL FILING CABINETS, SAFES
AND OFFICE FURNITURE

LOOSE LEAF BOOKS AND FIGURING BOOKS
FOR ANY KIND OF BUSINESS

Callanan & Archer Co., Inc.

WHOLESALE STATIONERS

10-14 So. Second St. New Bedford, Mass.

Aucust 8

» 1931 |

THE COLLECTING NET

——

APPARATUS FOR BIOLOGY
BOTANICAL MATERIAL
CHARTS
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT
CULTURES
DISSECTIONS
EMBRYOLOGICAL MATERIAL
ENTOMOLOGICAL SPECIMENS
INJECTED MATERIAL

For Comparative Anatomy
JEWELL MODELS
LANTERN SLIDES
LIFE HISTORIES
LIVING SPECIMENS
MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
MUSEUM PREPARATIONS
PARASITOLOGY MATERIAL

RESEARCH SERVICE
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
SKELETONS

STAINS AND REAGENTS
TAXIDERMY
ZOOLOGICAL MATERIAL

Dependable Quality ::

The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction :

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated
761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

CHICAGO

ae Publications

Supplied free of charge to teachers of Biology. Yours
| will be mailed to your teaching address on request.

Turtox News. Published monthly and mailed to over
20,000 Biologists. |
Turtox Service Leaflets. Offering suggestions and in-
formation on laboratory and field work in Biology.
Turtox Biological Red Book. A 232 page, illustrated,
book listing dissection and demonstration specimens for
Biology, Zoology, Comparative Anatomy, Entomology,
Embryology and Parasitology.

Turtox High School Biology Catalog and Teachers’
Manual. 1931 edition. A 300-page, illustrated book
| prepared primarily for the use of High School teachers.
Lists dissection and demonstration specimens, micro-
scope slides, lantern slides, charts, models and ap-
| paratus.

Turtox Microscope Slide Catalog. 1931 edition. Lists
over two thousand different prepared slides for Bac-
teriology, Botany, Plant Pathology, Zoology, Histology
and Neurology. Many illustrations from original photo- |
micrographs. |
Turtox Visual Education Catalog.
ber.)

(Ready in Septem- |
This book will not only list lantern slides and |
film strips for Botany, Zoology, Bacteriology, Histology |
and related subjects but will also catalog sources from |
which visual aids may be obtained on a loan or rental
basis. |
Jewell Model Catalog. We are the sole manufacturers
of these famous Biological models. This catalog is il- |
lustrated in color.

Turtox Apparatus Catalog. Instruments, equipment |

| and apparatus for the Biology sciences. (New edition
ready in September.) |

Prompt Service

06
ur Hs i,

TU mae yy

en

6

—

DUCTS

190

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 47

STAINING DISH

15059

This staining dish consists of a rectangular
glass jar measuring 414 by 314 by 2%
inches over all. The cover is provided with
a slight flange which sets inside the dish.

The removable glass tray has provision for
taking 20 slides back to back and a nickel
spring wire holder is provided for lifting the
jar out of the staining solution. This dish
accommodates slides 3 inches in length and
any width up to 2 inches.

This type of staining dish is economical of
reagents and by having extra glass trays
available, a very great number of slides may
be stained with convenience and economy,
and further washed and counter-stained in
different dishes.

15652 STAINING DISH. Complete with glass
dish, removable tray and wire holder. .$2.00

15657 GLASS DISH only. For above.... 1.00
15658 GLASS TRAY only. For above... .90
15659 WIRE HOLDER only. For above.. .25

BBGSe

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER, NY.

Church of the Messiah

(Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion ........ 8:00 a.m.
Morning “Prayer a. sesame 11:00 a.m.
Evening Prayer .......... 7:30 p.m.

IDEAL RESTAURANT
Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing

Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonab!e

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods H:le, Mass. Call 752

TEXACO PRODUCTS
NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

Aucust 8, 1931 ]

THE TEOLLECTING

NET

SPEN CER RESEARCH MICRO-

Designed under direc-
tion of Professor
C. F. McClung,

University of

Pennsylvania

SPENCER No.7LH RESEARCH MICROSCOPE
Equipped with new Inclinocular body, meckanical stage,
complete fork-type substage, achromatic condenser
N.A. 1.30, triple nosepiece, achromatic objectives 16
mm and 4 mm dry and 1.8 mm immersion, paired
eyepiece 6x and 10x, complete in mahogany

BIDE ae occa gepneoocooPodaEodD COOReaRene $368-90
Single body tube (if wanted) extra........... 15.00

10% discount to Schools and Colleges.

SCOPE No. 7

Has met a demand that has no parallel
in research microscope history.

There is now scarcely a college, uni
versity or research laboratory in Amer-
ica, that does not possess at least one.

It is now fitted with

SPENCER
INCLINOCULAR
BODY AS ONE OF

Three Types Supplied

This Inclinocular Body has been
designed for comfort and efficiency
in binocular work, where the stage
of the microscope must be horizon-
tal, for example in examination of
liquids, ete. It is an inclined eye-
piece binocular body taking the
place of regular binocular body or
the combination body.

The oculars are at the ordinary
distance from the table.

The angle of inclination is suited
to the comfort of the observer at
the ordinary height.

The superior optical qualities of
Spencer optics are preserved when
the new Inclinocular is used.

NO COMPENSATING LENSES
ARE NECESSARY BECAUSE OF
ADDED TUBE LENGTH.

The size of the field is the same as
with ordinary binocular body.

The Spencer converging oculars, ex-
clusive on Spencer microscopes, are in-
corporated in the new Inclinocular

The inclinocular is as easily placed on
or removed from the microscope as is
the ordinary binocular cr single tube.

Ask for new Bulletin M-45

“* BUFFALO.

NEW YORK.

192

THE, COLLECDING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 47

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

On Tuesday, August 4th Coast Guard Base 18
at Woods Hole celebrated its 143rd birthday. The
Base was open to the public during the day and
many members of the Laboratory, as well as oth-
ers, visited the Base and were shown over the
patrol boats by a member of the Coast Guard.
The boats were gaily decorated with flags. A
water sports program was held in the morning;
in the afternoon the Base 18 baseball team played
a team from the Coast Guard cutter, “The Acush-
net ;”’ and in the evening a dance was held in the
Community House.

Traffic must be slow both under and over the
drawbridge on Main Street. Captain John J.
Veeder, harbor master, has had signs placed at
the entrance to the Eel Pond limiting the speed
of boats to five miles per hour. The wash of
swift boats is threatening to undermine the bridge
while heavy trucks rolling over it cause a vibra-
tion that is also weakening it. The word “slow”
has been painted in large yellow letters on the
surface of Main Street at the approach to the
bridge and signs have been posted setting the
speed limit for cars at ten miles per hour.

Heavy frosts this past winter have also weak-
ened the bridge, cracking pieces of the counter
balance weight and making it lighter, necessitating
the addition of two thousand pounds of pig iron
to the balance weight. This, and the gates for
keeping back traffic when the draw is open, rep-
resent part of the improvements provided by the
$3100 sppropriation voted for the bridge in town
meeting this year.

On Friday afternoon, July 31st, Old Ironsides
passed by in full view of Woods Hole harbor.
From then until Thursday of this week, she has
made New Bedford her port and people have
poured from all over the Cape to see the historic
old frigate. On Sunday 11,906 people visited her
and several hundred were turned away from the
gangplank as the crew closed the ship for the day.

On July 31st, Mr. Inglis Moore Uppercu of
New York City president of the Uppercu Cadil-
lac Corporation, sailed into Great Harbor in his
square-rigged sailing vessel, “The Seven Seas.”
He anchored for the night and sailed the follow-
ing morning for New York.

The Y. P. L. Girls of the Methodist Episcopal
Church are giving a picnic to the children of the
Sunday School and their parents at Old Silver
Beach next Wednesday afternoon.

The annual flower show of the Cape Cod Horti-
cultural Society will be held this year in Falmouth
on August 12, 13 and 14th on the Village Green.

The University Players Theatre this week was
turned into a courtroom when the case of the
People against Mary Dugan came up for trial.
At 8:15 the cleaning women and the court at-
tendants began to get ready for the big case and
at 8:30 the court convened.

Bayard Veiller’s dramatic recording of “The
Trial of Mary Dugan” is good theatre. The
cast is very large and yet each person in the cast
is a distinct character. There are fine chances
for dramatic interpretation even in the most
minor parts. The Players did a good piece of
work. Notably Bretaigne Windust, as District
Attorney Galway, left nothing to be desired.
From the moment when he presented the case to
the jury-audience he was lawyer through and
through and, in a way, he it was who held the
whole play together and was responsible in large
measure for its success. Two other parts were
completely satisfying. Elizabeth Fenner as the
murdered man’s wife and Christine Ramsey as
Marie, her voluble French maid.

The Players were attempting a tremendous feat
this week. They played under a handicap in fol-
lowing so closely on the heels of a Broadway pro-
duction which was pretty nearly perfect and they
must pay the penalty for this by having the
audience, of necessity, make comparisons. Cyn-
thia Rogers as Mary Dugan was good but there
was something lacking in her rendition. You
could forget, as she sat quietly listening to the
testimony of witnesses, that she was a kept-
woman on trial for her life for the murder of
her lover. Even on the witness stand the mo-
ments were rare when she made the audience
feel her struggle as a girl of fourteen to bring
up a young brother and her solution of financial
worry by becoming mistress to a wealthy man.
There were times when she succeeded in project-
ing this stage personality across the footlights
but her character was not sustained throughout
the performance. Henry Fonda as her younger
brother, Jimmy, who took over h’s sister’s case
as lawyer, was more satisfactory, though he didn’t
look as boyish as the role requires.

The minor parts were excellently characterized
throughout. The stage was much enlarged and
the set effective.

Next week Elizabeth Fenner and: Kent Smith
will take the parts played in New York by Lynn
Fontanne and Alfred Lunt in the production of
Ferenc Molnar’s satire on the home life of an
actor, “The Guardsman.” ——MaSaGe

pte g tae i a ei eel bl eant~~

ae

Aucust 8, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 193

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Presents
“THE GUARDSMAN”
Aug. 10 — Aug. 15
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
For Reservations Call Falmouth 1250

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.

Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 260

GEORGE A. GRIFFIN
CIVIL ENGINEER

(Massachusetts Institute of Technology, ’07)

High Street Woods Hole
Tel. 774-W

Main Street
near A & P

Queen’s Byway
near Filene’s

FEMININE FOOTWEAR
$4.45 to $7.45
Two Falmouth Shops

FITZGERALD, INC.

A Man’s Store
— MEN’S WEAR —

Colonial Buiding Tel. 935

Falmouth

Main Street

MRS. H. M. BRADFORD

Dresses, Millinery, Hosiery and Gift Shop
Souvenirs and Jewelry

Depot Avenue Woods Hole

physiology or general zoology for the academic
year 1931-32. Have M.S. degree in zoology from
the University of Pennsylvania. Refer to Dr.
L. V. Heilbrunn, Br. 221

—S. A. CORSON.

Available as instructor or research assistant in

Compliments of
PENZANCE GARAGE
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Day or Night ALL. A.
Phone 652 Towing

The Whaler on Wheels

“Our Wandering Book Shop”

Miss Imogene Weeks Miss Helen E. Ellis
Mr. John Francis

Will be at Woods Hole Mondays
throughout the summer
season.

THE WHALER BOOK SHOP
106 SCHOOL STREET NEW BEDFORD
Telephone Clifford 110

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

Cape Cod Distributors for
Draper Maynard Sporting Goods

SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS

Falmouth Tel. 407

Visit
Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
‘ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vot. VI. No. 47

194

~ Alawe yo you seen

MILLER’S

Plant Physiology

with reference to
the green plant.

3y Epwin C. MILLER

Professor of Plant Physiology, Kansas State
Agricultural College, and Plant Physiologist,
Kansas Agricultural Experiment Station

McGRAW-HILL PUBLICATIONS IN THE
AGRICULTURAL and BOTANICAL
SCIENCES

900 pages, 6 x 9, 38 illustrations, $7.00

We book is planned to bridge the gap in the

literature of plant physiology left by books
which summarize the work that has been done on
the continent, but which fail to cover adaquately the
contributions of American and English plant physi-
ologists. These contributions during the past two
decades have been outstanding and dominate in
many cases the work along certain lines.

In this book the field of plant physiology is com-
pletely surveyed in a comprehensive and minutely
detailed treatment that makes it suitable both as a
text for advanced college students and as a refer-
ence work for investigators. The work is confined
entirely to the physiology of the green plant; the
findings of the leading American, English and con-
tinental investigators are summarized.

The tables are numerous and complete; illustra-
tions are original with but few exceptions. Each
chapter is followed by extensive bibliographies giv-
ing the full citation of each reference, including sub-
ject, date, volume and pages.

Send for a copy on approval.

McGRAW-HILL BOOK CoO., Inc.

370 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920, Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign

postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II:
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By
Pub, 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. II: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27. text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
Norman Taylor.

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave.

Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

FREAS
LOW TEMPERATURE
INCUBATOR

WITH CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
CONTROL

Operates from 10° to 60° C.

Similar to improved Freas Incubators and
Ovens, see bulletin No. 446, but in ad-
dition has electric refrigerator.

Entire operation is automatic.

Write for new bulletin No. 466 which gives
full information.

In ordering, give complete details of your
electric current.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
New York, N. Y.

a

Aucust 8, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET

Ready in
September

OUTLIN
of COMPARATIVE
EMBRYOLOGY

By AUTE RICHARDS

Professor of Zoology and Head of Dept.
Director of Biological Survey, University
of Oklahoma

This textbook presents an extensive summary of the types of cleavage,
blastulae, germ layer formation, and mesoderm formation for the entire
animal kingdom, as does no other book written in English. It is intended
chiefly for college-of-Arts courses in embryology as distinguished from
medical courses. Also as a preparation for medical courses, and for pro-
fessors of medical embryology the book will be extremely valuable.

The first part of the book discusses the principles of early development
for the entire animal kingdom and the relation of different types to each
other is brought out. The second part discusses topics of embryological
interest about which every embryologist and zoologist knows something but
most of which has never been brought together in a form available for
English speaking students. Tables are included which contain a great
amount of information summarized and condensed into consultation form.
They include: events of importance in the history o fembryology; tables
showing cell lineage; types of invertebrate larvae; chart summarizing em-
bryological conditions found in various phyla of animals; table of animal
classification showing the systematic positions of forms of embryologic im-
portance; tables showing occurrence of embryonic membranes of mammals.

There are two glossaries and a comprehensive bibliography, and 22
figures illustrate the text. As a reference book in addition to its class room
use it will be found of great use.

Probable Price $5.00

JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
440 Fourth Avenue New Yor

Vv Vv v Vv Vv v Vv Vv Vv Vv

196 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 47

9) Quoting remark of a school super-

¢ °
It saved us the cost of 5 microscopes” Secting remark of a scho

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination. :

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: [F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional feattires as

standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, maxing higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.
Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser,
Screw centering adjustment for light. Revolving stage
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,
Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

: cc ee on ee
Crav-Apams Company

| 117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

Vol. VI. No. 8.

SATURDAY. AUGUST 15, 1930

IS THE PERMEABILITY OF THE ERYTH-

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

THE MARINE ZOOLOGICAL LABORA-

ROCYTE TO WATER DECREASED
BY NARCOTICS?

Drs. M. H. JAcors anp A. K. PARPART

TORY AT THE ISLES OF SHOALS
Dr. C. F. JAckson
Director of the Laboratory

University of Pennsylvania
Among the evidence commonly cited in support
of the theory that narcosis is associated with a
decreased cellular permeability is the fact ob-

served by Arrhenius and Bu-
banovic, Jarisch and_ others,
that narcotic agents, such as
ether, chloroform, various al-
cohols and urethanes, etc. tend
in certain concentrations to
oppose osmotic hemolysis.
This result has been interpret-
ed as indicating a lowered per-
meability of the cell to water
in the presence of narcotic
agents. An examination of
the data published by the
workers in question, however,
shows that no clear distinction
was made by them between
the degree of hemolysis ulti-
mately attained, which prob-
ably has little to do with per-
meability to water, and the
rate at which the final equi-
librium position of the system

was reached, which conceivably may have some
(Continued on Page 201)

such connection.

RM. HB. L. Calendar

| TUESDAY, AUGUST 18, 8:00 P.M.
Seminar. Dr. Helen B. Smith, ‘‘Gen-

etic Studies on Selective Segre-
gation of Chrosomes in Sciara.”’

Dr. C. B. Bridges, ‘Specific Mod-
ifiers in Drosophila Melanogas-
1S) ele

Dr. P. W. Whiting, “Local and

Correlative Gene Effects in Mo-
saics of Habrobracon.”

FRIDAY. AUGUST 24, 8:00 P.M.
Lecture. Dr. C. R. Stockard, Pro-

fessor of Anatomy, Cornell Med-
ical School, “An Experimental
Dog Farm for the Study of Form
and Type.”

no lot for

TABLE OF CONTENTS

me but
many of barren rocks, the most overgrowne with
Er

The Isles of Shoals are a group of eight rocky
islands lying about ten miles out from Ports-
mouth, New Hampshire.
size, the largest being about a mile in length while

They are of varying

the smallest is scarcely a few
hundred yards across.

Very little is known of the
early history of the Isles of
Shoals. Before the appear-
ance of the white settlers, it
is quite possible that the In-
dians may have used the is-
lands as a fishing place; com-
ing thither in canoes and
camping until the season’s
catch was sufficient to meet
their needs. Champlain and
de Monts may have seen the
islands in 1605 during their
exploration of the New Eng-
land coast. Captain John
Smith gave them his name in
1614, and when members of
his expedition proposed to di-
vide his discoveries, he des-
cribes the islands thus: “But
Smith’s Isles which are a

Is the Permeability of the Erythrocyte to
Water Decreased by Narcotics?
Drs. M. H. Jacobs and A. K. Parpart....197
The Marine Zoological Laboratory at the
Isles of Shoals,

Dye, (Oh 1M, ARG" 6 oc oon OO CormO moO dig 197
The Fibrillar System of Euplotes,
1Dyy Alevay 125 Mibeeat=se- aan poem olor Ueno or 202

Types of Variation Produced by Conjuga-
tion in Paramecium Aurelia,
Dr. Daniel Raffel

Effects of Conjugation in a number of
Clones of Paramecium Aurelia,
Drs. T. M. Sonneborn and Ruth S. Lynch 205
Cross-Conjugation in Paramecium Aurelia,
Drs. T. M.,Sonneborn and Ruth S. Lynch 208
Scientific Book Reviews ............--.-- 211
Meals of Corporation Members
Review of the Seminar Reports of Drs.
Lynch and Sonneborn, Dr. J.. A. Dawson 212

Directory Additions ................-.+-. 212
Eiemsrofminterestercr sts eccnrietaierclenerstens) nen 213

198 THE

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 48

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT COLD
SPRING HARBOR

HUGO FRICKE, DIRECTOR OF THE BIOPHYSICS
LABORATORY, IN HIS RESEARCH ROOM.

DR.

such shrubs and sharp whins you can hardly pass
them, without either grass or wood, but three or
four short shrubby old cedars.”

The first impression of these islands is their
barrenness,—rough, irregular rocks jutting up out
of the sea. Low shrubs cover the islands with a
sparse carpet, the bayberry, poison ivy, and blue-
berry being perhaps the most common, while in
the crevices of the bare rocks, the tiny blossom
of the scarlet pimernel adds a touch of color.

In his “American Note-books,’ Mr. Nathaniel
Hawthorne describes these islands as he says: “It
is quite impossible to give an idea of these rocky
shores,—how confusedly they are bound together,

On the east side a bay is
where floating seaweeds collect and fill
the water with color as they are moved about by
the tide. The rocks are smoother and less broken
up than on the other islands, and the few pools
which do occur are at the low tide level. Animal
life is abundant around the island. The rocks are
covered with colonies of Coclenterates of several
species and the waters abound in the common
species of fish. From the rocky cliffs on the
south side, the bottom drops rapidly to a depth of
nearly two hundred feet. Here are found had-
dock, hake, codfish, and occasionally one or an-
other species of deep sea sculpin.

Londoner's is the next island and is somewhat
larger than White Island. There are two high
sections separated by a lower narrow strip of
sandy beach formed largely of small pebbles and
broken shells. This is one of the few islands
where summer residents live. There is one small
cottage on the north section of Londoner’s, occu-
pied for a few weeks during the summer.

Hundreds of terns nest yearly on Londoner’s

Island in the heavy brush which covers the island,
or in depressions of the bare rocks which form a
generous border of shore. This colony is com-
posed largely of the common tern, Sterno hirundo,
but there are also found a few pairs of the more
uncommon roseate terns. Before the advent ot
the summer residents, this was a very large and
interesting colony composed of sev eral thousand
individuals. The number is rapidly decreasing
under continuous persecution aa will undoubted-
ly be driven from the island within two or three
years. Aside from the terns, this island holds
little of interest for the biologist.

Star Island boasts the Oceanic

slopes on ne Shee
formed,

Hotel where

lying in all directions: what solid ledges, what
great fragments thrown out from the rest !—But

it is vain to try to express this confusion. As
much as anything else, it seems as if some of the
massive materials of the world remained super-
fluous after the Creator had finished, and were
carelessly thrown down here, where the millionth
part of them emerge from the sea, and in the
course of thousands of years have become par-
tially bestrewn with a little soil.

It is impossible to describe the real beauty of
the place. The barren wilderness surrounded on
all sides by the gray sea gives it a charm that is
peculiar to no other spot. Mrs. Celia Thaxter,
the island poetess, has written: “There is a
strange charm about them, an indescribable in-
fluence in their atmosphere, hardly to be ex-
plained but universally acknowledged.”

Of the eight islands belonging to this group,
White Island lies farthest out to sea and is the
most barren of the group. Indeed, is little
more than a rock cliff, rising sheer twenty-five
feet out of water on one side, with more gradual

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT COLD
SPRING HARBOR

THE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY IN THE

BIOPHYSICS BUILDING.

NEW

i ea

Pr pee.

Aueust 15, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 199

summer conferences of the Unitarian Association
are held. The island itself is composed almost en-
tirely of bare rock with very little soil or vegeta-
tion. There are a few small swampy areas of
fresh water on the island to which a lusty colony
of frogs claim first rights. The shore drops off
rapidly into deep water except on the east side
where a breakwater and the neighboring islands
make a friendly harbor for fishing ships. Gos-
port Harbor is a splendid collecting ground. At
the upper end of the harbor nearest the break-
water, depths of only a few feet occur, the bottom
gradually sloping into depths of one hundred feet
or more near the mouth of the harbor. This is a
large sedimentation bay and numerous species of
an‘mals are found here which do not occur at any
other point at the Isles of Shoals. Within the
sheltered waters of the harbor, flounders, skate,
wolf-fish, and many species of invertebrates can
usually be secured for laboratory purposes.

Cedar is connected with Star Island by a break-

water. It is a small round island with no out-
standing characteristic. Two families of lobster
fishermen make their home but they apparently
disturb very little the animal life which is of
interest to the biologist.

Smuttynose, so named because the long ridge
of rock which runs out into the ocean appears
black to passing ships, is flatter and has a more
regular surface than any of the other islands.
About a third of the island is taken up by a rocky
shore. In the center of the island is a fresh
water swamp. The transition from the shore in-
to deep water is more gradual heve than on Star,
White, or Lozdoner’s Island and huge patches of
Fucus break the force of the waves which pile
up on its shores.

This island is a paradise to the biologist. Its
interior is inaccessible to the average tourist and
it pre ents more nearly unspoiled conditions than
any of the other islands. Birds of numerous
species nest here in abundance, particularly the
song sparrow and the spotted sandpiper, and dur-
ing the migration season, many unexpected vis-
itors are found. In the rocky crevices along the
shore, Leucos!enia, the finger sponge, and Coe-
lenterates occur in abundance. Great colonies of
hydroids, Metridium, and associations of starfish,
and sea urchins may be found in the tidepools.
Just offshore is a variety of sea bottom rangiig
from Cedar Island Ledge, which is exposed at
low tide, to depths of nearly fifty fathoms. The
bottom is of various types: sand, ‘mud, bare rocks,
and dense beds of Fucus. Off the shore of
Smuttynose may be found colonies of sea cu-
cumbers, blood stars, Ascidians, and many species
of interesting deep-sea molluscs. A great variety
of Crustaceans also occur both in the deep water
and along the shore. These include, in addition

to lobsters and the common rock crab, the inter-
esting spider crab, deep water hermit crabs, and
a great host of pelagic forms.

Duck Island lies about a mile northeast from
the rest of the group. It is composed of broken
rocks between which are narrow channels or pas-
sages. The largest of these rocks is only a few
hundred yards in extent. The entire group is
drenched from time to time during periods of
heavy storm. This group of rocks is the home of
thousands of herring gulls. Their nests and
young cover the rocks so that one must walk with
care in order not to crush them. When an in-
truder lands on the island, during the breeding
season the air is filled with thousands of adults.
Their screams can be heard almost continuously
day and night at the laboratory, a mile distant.
There is little in the way of vegetation on Duck
Island. During the migrating season, thousands
of ducks of various species collect in the vicinity
of these broken rocks, where they find an abund-
ance of food in the sheltered bays and channels.
Duck Island is a wonderful collecting ground for
invertebrates, especially those inhabiting compar-
atively shallow waters. An abundance of fish
common to the shallow waters of the Shoals is
found here. Cunners occur in enormous num-
bers and pollack, herring, and mackerel are fre-
quently found in the surface waters around Duck
Island.

Appledore Island is the largest of the Isles of
Shoals group. It is about a mile long and a half
mile wide. It is very roughly triangular in shape,
with the apex towards the mainland. The nar-
rowest part aa also the lowest, is near the north-
ern end, and during bad winter storms, is some-
times completely submerged, dividing the island
into two portions. Appledore is higher than most
of the other islands, the highest elevation being
about sixty-seven feet above mean tide-level. The
shoreline on Appledore Island is very irregular.
On the west side the rocks are less broken and
they slope off gradually into deep water towards
Portsmouth Harbor. On the north and east
shores the rocks are very irregularly scattered and
high cliffs drop off precipitously into deep water
of narrow ravines or into the open sea.

Along the shore, numerous tidepools of great
beauty and interest are found. They range in
size from tiny crevices that hold the water from
one tide until the next, to large pools where
abundant plant and animal life remain permanent-
ly, probably finding better protection than in the
surf, yet gaining ihe benefits of the shallow water.
These pools are filled with an abundance of Coel-
enterates, Molluscs, and other littoral forms.

Vegetation is relatively abundant on Appledore
Island and many species of shrubs find it an ex-
cellent environment. A fresh water pond on the

200

LEE COLEEGRING SNE

[ Vor. VI. No. 48

higher portion of the island and a fresh water
swamp at the opposite end give variety to the life
that exists here. All of the different forms of
invertebrates already mentioned are found in the
vicinity of Appledore. Within five minutes walk
the student from the laboratory may find a suf-
ficient amount of material to employ his time for
the remainder of the day.

The Marine Laboratory at the Isles of Shoals
is an outgrowth of the regular summer school
work at the University of New Hampshire. The
Laboratory was established four years ago by a
group of advanced students in zoology who felt
that advantage should be taken of our proximity
to salt water. We were particularly fortunate in
securing a set of well built, although somewhat
neglected, buildings formerly connected with the
Appledore Hotel. These buildings have been
thoroughly renovated and painted, and have been
equipped with electric lights, running water, and
modern improvements. Since the equipment of
the zoology department on the university campus
is only a few minutes from tide water, it is pos-
sible to secure any emergency supplies directly by
boat from the University.

Owing to the generous support of the Uni-
versity authorities, and together with the coopera-
tion of the Star Island Corporation, who had
control of Appledore Island, practically the en-
tire island was leased and is now constituted into
a large field laboratory. Unhampered by any out-
side diversions, students are able to carry on eight
weeks of study under ideal conditions.

The Laboratory is devoted primarily to the
work of the undergraduate and first year gradu-
ate student. In this field there is little competi-
tion since most of the great marine laboratories
are centers of advanced research work. The
number at the Laboratory is limited to about
thirty, although it is hoped in the near future to
increase the ‘facilities to accommodate a larger
number of students.

The work is divided roughly
One is for the premedical student and includes
comparative anatomy, histology, and embryology.
It might seem that a marine laboratory is ill
adapted to pre-medical work. However, the
students find here an abundance of fresh material
for the study of comparative embryology, com-
parative histology, and comparative anatomy.
Furthermore, work in a research laboratory in
contrast to a vocational environment, is of great
value to the pre-medical student.

The second field covered is that of ecology and
oceanography. Although this is of a very ele-
mentary nature, seniors and first year graduates
are enabled to carry through many independent
lines of investigation.

Some of the problems which are now in pro-

into two fields. .

gress are as follows:

1. Ecological associations of deep sea areas in
the vicinity of the Isles of Shoals. Apparently
very little work has been done on deep sea ecology.
The general oceanography of the Gulf of Maine
has been thoroughly investigated. Animal com-
munities, however, in water of more than two
fathoms in depth are difficult to investigate. It
is hoped that some interesting information may
be secured along this line.

2. Ecological Studies of high tide pools. A
paper on the physical, chemical, and biotic as-
sociations of high tide pools is nearing comple-
tion. Some interesting differences in the biota of
certain of these pools have been found.

Ecological studies of marine sponges. A
systematic and ecological study of the marine
sponges of the Isles of Shoals has been carried
on for the past four years. It is hoped that this
will be extended to include all of the sponges of
the Gulf of Maine.

4. Ecological studies of the fish of the Isles of
Shoals. The Shoals were at one time noted as
the center of the fishing industry for the south-
ern portion of the Gulf of Maine. A consider-
able change has taken place in the relative abund-
ance of certain species of fish: some having dis-
appeared entirely, while others have apparently
become more abundant. The entire problem of
the fish population of the Isles of Shoals is being
investigated.

5. Ecological survey of the birds of the
Isles of Shoals. The Isles of Shoals are
most favorably situated for the study of

the bird population. This is especially true of
those forms which follow the coast line in their
migratory flight. By glancing at the map, it will
be seen that these islands lie within the Gulf of
Maine, having land to the northeast and to the
southeast. Birds flying in a direct line from
Cape Elizabeth to Cape Ann pass within a com-
paratively short distance from the Isles of Shoals
and great numbers make this a resting place.
Owing to the sparse vegetation, bird study is
rendered comparatively easy and a census of the
relative abundance at any given time may be
readily taken. Preliminary papers on bird mi-
gration and the general ecology of the resident
ee are now practically ready for the press.

Embryological studies of the herring gull
ne been carried on for the past two years. The
abundance of material on Duck Island has made
this a profitable line of work.

7. A study of the fresh water Protozoa of Ap-
pledore Island has heen carried on, revealing,
however, little unexpected material.

8. An attempt is being made to determine the
possible effect on the embryological development
of the albino rat when carbon monoxide is ad-

EO

——-

Aucust 15, 1931 ]

DHE, ‘COLLECTING NET

201

ministered to the mother during the period of
gestation. This is a problem connected with the
pre-medical work and will be continued on the
campus. Preliminary experiments seem to show
that death or weakening of the offspring occurs
when the mother has been submitted to sufficient
quantities of this gas.

g. Studies on parasitic protozoa are in pro-
gress. Dr. Swan of Trinity College is renderiny:
valuable assistance in this work.

Minor problems in the taxonomy of various
groups, histology, and experimental embryology
are being carried out by undergraduate students.

An experiment which has been in progress
during the past three years is an attempt to es-
tablish a tern colony on north head of Appledore
Island. Young birds have been brought over
from Londoner’s ard raised to maturity. We are
still uncertain whether or not the colony will be
permanent.

A complete biological and ecological survey of
the Isles of Shoals is contemplatcd in the near

future. Much of the material from the above
problems will ultimately be incorporated in this
survey. With this in view a set of problems of
strictly oceanographic nature have been outlined
including the determination of depths and bottom
within a three mile radius, water analysis, cur-
rents, temperatures, and the relation of these fac-
tors to the distribution and migration of fish and
certain of the invertebrates. Plancton studies will
also accompany this work.

Nothing of originality is claimed for the work
of this laboratory. It is hoped that it will be
primarily a stimulus to the young investigator
who may go on in productive research. The time
may come when our facilities can be increased
to accommodate the seasoned biologist. Until
that time, it is felt that the Laboratory is per-
forming a real service in an attempt to stimulate
interest in research work both in those planning
to enter the medical profession and in those
students interested in the purely scientific phase
of zoology.

IS TEE PERMEABILITY OF THE ERYTHROCYTE TO WATER
DECREASED BY NARCOTICS?
(Continued from Page 197)

In the absence of this necessary information,
hemolysis experiments are entirely useless for
the purpose of measuring cell permeability.

In the work here reported, advantage was taken
of a method previously described by one of the
authors (Biological Bulletin, 1930) which per-
mits the entire course of the hemolytic process in
such experiments to be followed and recorded
over a period of several hours. Inspection of the
records so obtained in the presence and absence
of several narcotics shows immediately that what
was observed by Arrhenius and Bubanovic and
other workers as a result of the presence of such
substances was not a change in the rate of hemo-
lysis, and, therefore, by implication, a change in
the rate of penetration of water, but rather a
rere change in the degree of hemolysis ultimate-
ly attained; that is, in the osmotic resistance of
the cells. Experiments of the type previously re-
ported, therefore, give no clear evideace either
for or against the “permeability” theory of nar-
ccsis.

That a decreased permeability of the cell may
be produced by narcosis is, however, suggested
by results obtained with very strongly hypotonic
selutions in which true rates of hemolysis may be
measured with considerable accuracy by a modifi-
cation of the method already described. In such
experiments the presence of phenyl or iso-amyl
urethane in concentrations lying within the phys-
iological narcotic range produce a slowing of
hemclysis which, though comparatively slight, is
nevertheless easily measurable. It is entirely pos-

sible, therefore, that such narcotics may slow the
rate of entrance of water into, or the escape of
hemoglobin from the erythrocyte, or both, in the
manner demanded by the permeability theory of
narcosis. It should be emphasized, however, that
such results by no means prove that a condition
of narcosis is generally, or even sometimes, pro-
duced by a decreased cellular permeability ; it is
possible merely to state that the facts here re-
ported are not incompatible with such a theory.
A provisional, though purely hypothetical ex-
planation of the effect of narcotics, both on the
rate of hemolysis and on the position of final
equilibrium of the system, may be given in terms
of the so-called “pore” theory of permeability, if
it be assumed that molecules of the narcotics are
adsorbed by the erythrocyte in such a way as to
diminish the effective diameter of the “pores’’.
The effect of such a change, in the pathways by
which water might be assumed to enter the cells,
on the rate of hemolysis is obvious. An explan-
ation of its effect on the degree of hemolysis ul-
timately attained could similarly be furnished by
imagining a sufficient degree of blocking of the
enlarged “pores” in a swollen erythrocyte, to
maintain their normal impermeability to hemo-
globin molecules. In the absence of conclusive
evidence of the’ presence of such “‘pores’’ in the
surface of the erythrocyte, such an explanation
is, of course, to be treated merely as a conven‘ent,
though rather crude, working hypothesis, which
might recdily be abandoned without in any way
changing the significance of the observed facts.

THE COLEECIING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 48

THE FIBRILLAR SYSTEM OF EUPLOTES
Joun P. TuRNER
Instructor of Zoology, University of Minnesota

ihe neuromotor apparatus of the ciliate
fsitploles is probably better known than that cf
any other protozoan—which, after all, is not say-
ing a great deal.

Following the original description by Sharp in
1914 of the neuromotor apparatus of the ciliate
Diplodinium, an inhabitant of the stomach of the
cow, Yocum in 1918 described the neuromotor
system of Euplotes patella, which is similar to
that of Diplodinium in that it consists chiefly of
fibers extending from a coordinating center, the
motorium, to the motor organelles.

Taylor, in 1920, demonstrated the co-ordinat-
ing nature of this system by cutting various fibers
and observing the subsequent lack of coordination
between the cirri and membranelles to which the
fibers had extended. Rees, MacDougall and
others have followed with descriptions of neuro-
motor systems of various degrees of complexity,
some with and some without a definite motorium.

Klein has recently called our attention to the
delicate system of fibrils near the surface of cili-
ates which he calls the “silver line system’? from
his methed of demonstrating it with silver im-
pregnation. He pictures the lines following the
basal bodies in the rows of cilia. These ciliary
rows have been known, of course, for many years,
and partly described.

One of the forms which Klein studied was
Euplotes karpa.

In applying his method to Euplotes patella I
have heen unable to obtain satisfactory prepara-
tions. However, by modifying his technique sut-
ficiently I have obtained some striking prepara-
tions.

Bear in mind that Euplotes has no cilia 01 the
dorsal surface. Nevertheless, the lincs are pres-
ent. Furthermore, they connect up rows of gran-
ules, arranged in rosettes, which some helieve to
be basal bodies of ancestral cilia. If th's as-
sumption is correct, they have changed their size,
arrangement, function and affinity for stains. Data
regarding these points will be discussed in a
future publication,

There are nine longitudinal rows of these
rosettes, each row containing about twenty-five
rosettes. The rosettes in turn are each composed
of from six to twelve large granules.

Griffin, in 1910, described sensory bristles pro-
truding from the rosettes in Euplotes worcesteri.
Klein, with his silver method, shows only single
blots for the rosettes in Euplotes harpa.

As can be clearly seen even in photomicro-
graphs, the dorsal surface of Euplotes patella

shows nine longitudinal fibrils which connect up
the rosettes. These I have called the primary
fibrils. There are also less regular but quite dis-
tinct secondary fibrils which are between and par-
allel to the primaries. In addition, there are com-
missural fibrils extending across from the pri-
maries to the secondaries, creating a_ veritable
network or latticework which varies from one
organism to another remarkably little.

In every case, the rosettes are located between
the intersections of the commissural with the pri-
mary fibrils, which indicates that they are not
merely nodes of attachment. The entire network
is connected anteriorly with the membranelle fiber
of the neuromotor system.

The network of the ventral surface of Euplotes
patella is much more complicated than that of the
dorsal side. Instead of the fibrils forming
squares and rectangles in parallel rows, they are
arranged in an irregular fashion, forming long,
slender rectangles, pentagors, hexagons, etc., ac-
cording to their location. This gives somewhat
the appearance of badly treated chicken wire.
The pattern, however, is constant and character-
istic. The basal plates of the adoral membranelles,
the slender rectangles formed by the fibrils pos-
terior to the peristome, and the more regular pat-
tern in the region of the oral lip are particularly
noticeable.

Now questions naturally arise as to the mean-
ing of all this fibrillar network. Is it an artifact ?
If not, what is its function? Is it a part of the
neuromotor apparatus ?

I believe it is not merely an artifact, for three
reasons:

(1) Because of its constant and regular ap-
pearance when impregnated with silver in either
unfixed, dried material, according to Klein’s
method, or in material fixed with osmic vapor.

(2) The entire system appears clearly in ma-
terial stained only with thionin.

(3) Ihave seen the primary fibrils in living ma-
terial stained with neutral red. They appear as
delicate threads extending through the rows of
rosettes. The rosettes show beautifully in neu-
tral red stained material.

If we accept these facts as evidence of the
reality of the network, what can we say of its
function?

Klein believes it is a primitive nervous system
with both motor and sensory functions, and he
interprets Taylor’s results as the effect of cutting
the network. He also states that it, in some way,
initiates division of the cell (1 believe I can show

Aveust 15, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

203

this is not true.) He assigns various other func-
tions to the network, but, in all cases, what little
evidence he presents is not convincing.

There is, however, a suggestion as to its pos-
sible function. Yocum and Taylor describe one
row of fibrillar hexagons in the oral lip of
Euplotes patella which arises from the neuro-
motor apparatus. This they believe to have a
sensory function and Taylor demonstrated that
the oral lip is the most sensitive part of the ani-
mal. Now these hexagons are only a small,
though easily demonstrable, part of the fibrillar
network. We see then that the network is inti-
mately connected with the neuromotor system and

that at least a part of it seems to have a sensory
function.

As I have already pointed out, Griffin states
that sensory bristles protrude from the rosettes in
Euplotes worcesteri.

So it may be that the fibrillar network in Eu-
plotes is sensory in function and supplements the
neuromotor system as a sensory apparatus. It is
just under the pellicle where one would expect
to find such a system.

This possibility needs testing, of course, and I
hope to find methods which will yield further evi-
dence.

TYPES OF VARIATION PRODUCED BY CONJUGATION IN
PARAMECIUM AURELIA
Dr. DANIEL RAFFEL
National Research Council Fellow in Biology, Johns Hopkins University

The object of this paper is to give a general
account of the types of variation which were pro-
duced by conjugation in a clone of Paramecium
aurelia in an investigation which Professor Jen-
nings, Drs. Lynch and Sonneborn, Mrs. Raffel
and I began here last summer.

The members of a clone of Paramecium, i. e.
the individuals descended from a single organism
in the absence of conjugation are remarkably uni-
form in their characteristics. However, Jennings
found in 1913 that after conjugation occurred in
such a clone this uniformity is destroyed. He
found that the variability of the fission rates in
such a population is much greater than in a popu-
lation composed of individuals of the original
clone which had not been allowed to conjugate. I
recently undertook a reinvestigation of this prob-
lem, using such methods of cultivation as to elim-
inate the possibility of environmental factors in-
fluencing the results obtained, and my results en-
tirely confirmed those of Jennings. Therefore it
seemed of great interest to ascertain what types
of variation are produced by conjugation, i. e.,
what kinds of characteristics are inherited by
Paramecium.

A single individual of P. aurelia was isolated
from a mass culture in the laboratory and its pro-
geny were allowed to multiply until a great num-
ber had been obtained. Then conjugation was in-
duced in this clone and 258 pairs were obtained.
After the members of the pairs had separated,
they were isolated and from each of the 516 or-
ganisms a single line of descent was kept. These
516 lines were cultivated for ten days and records
were kept of their fission rates and any obvious
peculiarities of any of the lines which were ob-
served. At the end of the ten days, all but 49 of
the lines were discarded. Further intensive study
was devoted to the 49 lines which were retained.

I made an intensive study of 11 of these clones
and it is with the results which these clones
yielded that this paper will treat. In general 24
lines of each clone were carried for the next 40
days. The results are based almost entirely on
the data which I collected on these clones. These
data are typical of the results which all of us ob-
tained.

The clones differed in many respects: namely in
their (1) general vitality, (2) fission rates, (3)
reactions to endomixis, (4) sizes and shapes, (5)
uniformity (6) the production of abnormalities,
(7) the effect of conjugation on them, and (8)
reactions to different changes in their environ-
ments.

In the first place, striking diversities were
shown in the general vitalities of the different
clones. After conjugation there were 510 ex-
conjugants. Of these, 96, or nearly 20%, died
in a short time without dividing. In addition to
these, 179 lines of ex-conjugants died out within
g days of the time they conjugated. Some of
these latter lines were, from the beginning, weak
and sickly —they divided slowly and produced
weak and often abnormal offspring; others of
these clones appeared vigorous for a few days
and divided frequently, only to die in a short
time. Other clones lived for longer periods, de-
clined in vigor and died. Still others of appar-
ently low vitality lived for long periods but di-
vided very slowly during the ten months that they
were studied. Finally, other clones were ex-
tremely healthy and vigorous and the one such
clone which was kept lived for more than 300
days without showing any decrease in vigor.

Some idea as to the diversities in vitality of
the group which lived for longer periods of time
is given by the diversities in the rates of repro-
duction among the different clones. The eleven

204

THE COLERCTING INET

[ Vor. VI. No. 48

clones varied in their daily fission rates from 1.08
fissions per day to 2.19 fissions per day for a per-
iod of 60 days during the greater part of which
time 24 lines of each were carried. There was a
rather complete series of fission rates between
these two extremes. The differences in fission
rates persisted and the clones with the higher fis-
ion rates reproduced more rapidly during the suc-
cessive periods than the clones with the lower
mean fission rates. Thus we see that conjugation
certainly produces clones which differ in their
rates of reproduction.

Another interesting difference between the
clones was found in their reactions to endomixis.
Some of the clones showed no indication of any
depression during endomixis. Their fission rates
fell off but slightly for a day or two and then
rapidly recovered. These produced few if any
abnormalities and on the whole were relatively
unaffected by endomixis. Other clones were
seriously depressed for several days and produced
many abnormalties while they were undergoing
this process. In some of these, endomixis was
such a serious process that it was at times doubt-
ful whether they would survive. In one clone
which had manifested the highest degree of vital-
ity of any, endomixis proved fatal.

The clones varied greatly in their tendencies to
produce abnormal individuals; some produced
many such individuals, others produced some per-
iodically, while still other clones produced very
few abnormal individuals or none at all.

There were also differences in size and form
apparent among the different clones. Most of
these differences were small and they were not
studied intensively. However, one clone differed
greatly from all of the others. This was only
about one half as long as the others and had a
spindle-like shape. A comparison of this clone
with any of the others shows great diversity 1
size and form which conjugation can produce.

A very unexpected and interesting difference
which was found between the clones was the di-
versity in their uniformity. Jennings found in
1908 that they were very uniform in their char-
acteristics. In these clones this was generally
true. A clone called 128a, however, occasionally
produced lines which differed from the other lines
of the same clone in their size, shape and rate of
reproduction. These aberrant lines were in every
case similar and never were known to revert.
This type of variation is quite different from that
produced by conjugation. Conjugation produces
a number of clones which differ from each other
in varying degrees while in this case all the des-
cendants of the clone 128a are of one of the two
kinds. One other clone which I studied also pro-
duced aberrant branches from time to time. How-
ever, in most of cur work we obtained the same

kinds of results that Jennings had earlier—clones
are uniform and selection is ineffective.

Clones vary in the effects that conjugation
have on them. Dr. Ruth S. Lynch is giving a
full report of this type of variation so I shall say
nothing about it here.

Jennings in 1913 came to the conclusion that
conjugation within a clone produces a varied
population containing many diverse clones some
of which will thrive under one set of conditions
and others under different sets of conditions. In
order to test this hypothesis I made a study of the
reactions of a few clones to different environ-
mental conditions. The first comparison which
was made was with respect to a general differ-
ence. I cultivated my organisms in a salt solu-
tion to which cultures of known bacteria and al-
gae were added. The details of this medium
have been published.* The others working in this
investigation used an oat infusion to which the
same algae were added. Unfortunately we de-
voted our attentions to different clones so that,

when we came to make the comparison, there _

were only two clones on which we both had suf-
ficient data to compare. These two, however,

showed a marked difference in their reaction to —

the two media. In the oat infusion they made
records which were practically identical. In the
salt solution, on the other hand, one clone repro-
duced much more rapidly than in the oat infusion
and the other reproduced much more slowly. Ob-
viously then, conjugation produces clones which
react diversely to different media.

i performed a series of experiments to deter-
mine the reactions of the different clones to small,
known differences in the environment. The first
of these experiments was designed to test whether
the different clones would react diversely to a

decrease in the quantity of bacteria which was -

supplied in the medium. In carrying out this in-
vestigation two sets of media were prepared daily.
Each set was made in a tube containing about 15ce.
of the sterile culture solution. To these were
added approximately the same quantity of Stich-
ococcus bacillaris. To the tube of control medium
a pipette (approx. 1 cc.) of a rich suspension of
Achromobacter candicans was added while to the
tube containing the experimental medium only a
single drop was added. Sister individuals of the
24 lines of each clone to be tested were transfer-
red into this medium. Then both sets were cul-
tivated for 15 days using the necessary precau-
tions to exclude bacteria. In calculating the re-
sults, this 15 day period was divided into two of
7 and 8 days each. The clones differed greatly
in the extent to which their rates of reproduction
were depressed by this decrease in the quantity

*Raffel, D.. The effects of conjugation within a clone
of Paramecium aurelia. Biol Bull. 58: 293.312, 1939.

Aucust 15, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

205

of bacteria in the medium. The extent of the de-
pression in the two periods was very similar in
the case of most of the clones. There was, how-
ever, some variation in the extent of the depres-
sion in the two periods in some of them. This
was due probably to the occurrence of endomixis
and was not sufficient to obscure the variation
which was apparent in the reactions of most of
the clones to this change in environment. The
evidence is clear that some of the clones do differ
in their reactions to a decrease in the quantity of
bacteria supplied to them.

Another environmental agent tested was a de-
crease in temperature. The control group was
cultivated at a temperature varying from 25° to
279 while sister animals were cultivated in the
identical medium at 18.5 to 20.0°. Three experi-
ments were performed to test the reactions of 5
clones to this decrease in temperature. The re-
sults which were obtained were similar to those
obtained from a decrease in the quantity of bac-
teria. The five clones which were tested varied
greatly with respect to the degree to which this de-
crease in temperature depressed their fission rates.
The three experiments showed the same differ-
ences between the clones. The one which was
most depressed during the first experiment was
most depressed during the second and third. In
the same way the one which was least depressed
during the first experiment was depressed least
in the others. The other three were also de-
pressed in proportional amounts during the three
experiments except that two were interchanged
during one period. Thus conjugation produces
clones which vary in the extent to which this de-
crease in temperature will depress them.

The third environmental difference which was
studied was a decrease in the pH of the medium.

In the three experiments which were then per-
formed on this difference, 24 lines of each clone
were cultivated in the usual medium which had
a pH of 7.2, and in a medium which was the
same in every respect except that it had a pH of
6.8. The results of these three experiments
showed that the clones differed greatly in their
reactions to this decrease in pH. One of the
clones was not depressed in any of the three ex-
periments, one was very slightly depressed in all
three, others were more depressed in varying de-
grees. A few of the clones showed different re-
actions in the three different experiments, prob-
ably due to the effects of endomixis which oc-
curred during the progress of these experiments.
These experiments demonstrated that the clones
produced by conjugation differ in their reactions
to a decrease in pH.

The study of these eleven clones demonstrates
beyond a doubt that conjugation produces varia-
tion in vitality, rate of reproduction, reaction to
endomixis, size and form, uniformity, production
of abnormalities and reactions to various differ-
ences in the environment. These differences are
independent of one another and are not all
phases of differences in vitality. Clones which
were of high vitality and reproduced rapidly were
often depressed more by endomixis or various
environmental agents than were others of lower
vitality.

It is obvious that conjugation within a clone of
Paramecium aurelia produces many clones which
differ in numerous respects. Each of these eleven
clones is different from each of the others in one
or more ways It seems probable that, by using
a sufficiently large number of criteria, each ex-
conjugant could be shown to give rise to a unique
biotype.

EFFECTS OF CONJUGATION IN A NUMBER OF CLONES OF
PARAMECIUM AURELIA
Dr. T. M. SONNEBORN,
Research Associate in Genetics, Johns Hopkins University
AND Dr. RutH STock1nG LYNCH,
Instructor in Genetics, Johns Hopkins University

(Reported by

Dr. Raffel has described the types of varia-
tion brought about in Paramecium aurelia as a
result of conjugation. I shall attempt to show
how some of these types of variation (diverse
fission rates, variabilities, and mortality percent-
agés) are manifested in closely related clones of
the same species.

Conjugation effects have generally been con-
sidered identical for all species of ciliate Proto-
zoa, although it has been suggested that the vari-
ous species might differ in this regard. But the
idea that conjugation might affect various stocks

Dr. Lynch)

of the same species differently has been little con-
sidered. However, certain results obtained by
Calkins on Uroleptus; by Woodruff and Spencer
on Spathidium; by McDougall on Chilodon; and
by our own group in work still unpublished,
strongly support the idea that such a diversity in
effects of conjugation may occur even within a
single species. Such diversity, particularly if it
is found to be wide-spread, might account for
the conflicting results obtained by various in-
vestigators and the consequent diversity of their
theories of conjugation.

206

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 48

For this reason, among others, the variability
of conjugation effects in closely related clones
was studied by Dr. Sonneborn and myself during
the past winter. The problem was attacked in
three ways. A study was made, (1) of repeated
conjugations within one clone; (2) of simultane-
ous conjugations in six closely related clones; (3)
of repeated simultaneous conjugations in two
closely related clones.

Clone 247a, one of the forty-eight clones used
in the investigation described by Dr. Raffel, was
the parent of all the clones studied. It was kept
under examination during the entire course of the
investigation. Three successive conjugations
were induced in a portion of this clone on October
1 and 16, and on December 9, 1930. In each
case, after fourteen or more days of examina-
tion, all the resulting daughter clones were dis-
carded, with the exception of six from the last
conjugation which were kept for use in the sec-
ond set of experiments.

This second set of experiments consisted of the
induction and study of simultaneous conjugations
in these six sister clones. All of the resulting
288 daughter clones were discarded at the end
of the experiment, and all but two of the parent
clones. Two of the parent clones, E4oa and
E8ta, were kept and studied throughout the rest
of the investigation.

The third and last set of experiments consist-
ed of a series of three more simultaneous conju-
gations, induced in these two sister clones.

The rest of this report is a consideration of the
results of these fifteen conjugations.

In the first conjugation induced in a part
of cone 247a, 116 lines, one from each member
of the 58 pairs isolated, were studied. Their
mean total number of fissions was 15.70t0.16*;
the mean total number of fissions in the
co-existing non-conjugant lines was 15.78t
0.29, almost exactly the same; their ratio is 1.00.
In the second experiment, the mean total number
of fissions for 100 conjugant lines was 13.87
0.27; that for the co-existing non-conjugant lines
was 13.7410.21; their ratio is 1.01. In the third
experiment the mean total number of fissions for
the 194 conjugant lines was 19.26t0.23; for the
non-conjugant lines, 18.32+0.17 their ratio is 1.05.
It is quite clear that the mean fission rate of the
clone 247a is unaffected by conjugation.

The second method, the study of simultaneous
conjugations in a number of sister clones, was ap-
plied to the descendants of six conjugants from
the last experiment. Conjugation was induced in
all six on January 12 to 14, and the descendants
of 48 pairs of each group of conjugants, together
with non-conjugants of each parent clone, were
studied for fourteen days.

* This symbol ‘i’? indicates “plus or minus.”

In mean total number of fissions the six groups
of conjugants fall into two classes; Class 1 con-
tains five of the groups: Class 2 contain only the
E81a group. The five members of Class 1 show
but slight differences. For the members (E41a
and E8o0b) showing the highest and lowest mean
total number of fissions in Class 1 the means for
the first five-day period were 16.69{0.19 and
16.38t0.19. In the E81a group (Class 2) the
mean total number of fissions was 7.46{0.42; less
than half that of every member of Class 1, For
the two representatives of Class 1 in the second
five-day period, the mean total number of fissions
was 13.06t0.18; and 13.26f0.24. In the E81a
group the total number was 5.39{0.59; again less
than half those of Class 1. For the total time,
the mean for the highest member of Class 1 was
30.4610.34; for the lowest member, 29.76t0.40.
For the one member of Class 2, it was 15.00
1.04; again half as high. These two classes of
conjugants from sister cloncs show a difference
of 100% in their mean fissions rates.

This difference between the groups of conju-
gants is paralleled by the difference between their
relations to their groups of non-conjugants.
These relations are expressed by the. ratios of
conjugant total number of fissions over non-con-
jugant total number of fissions. The ratios for
the group E4ta are 1.00, 1.01, 1.01; its mean
fission rate has been unchanged by coajugation.
It is similar in this respect to clone 247a, the
first clone studied. The corresponding ratios for
the group E8ob are 1.12, 1.02, and 1.07; its fis-
sion rate has been slightly but corsistently raised
by conjugation. The rat‘os for E8ra, on the other
hand, are 0.54, 0.61, and 0.70. Its mean fission
rate has been consistently and markedly lowered
by conjugation.

This simultaneous comparison of the effects of
conjugation in six sister clones demonstrate that
conjugation does not have the same effect on
mean fission rate in all clones; in some clones,
conjugation raises the mean fission rate (re-
juvenescence ) ; in other clones, conjugation low-
ers the mean fission rate (depression) ; in still
others it leaves the mean fission rate ab-
solutely unaltered. Some groups of conjugants
may have a fission rate twice as high as the rate
in other groups. It is apparent that each of the
different results obtained by different investiga-
tors can be attained by studying the appropriate
race; the effects of conjugation on mean fission
rate depend on the nature of the race which con-
jugates.

In variability these six groups again fall into
three distinct classes: (Class 1) those whose vari-
ability is low; (Class 3) those whose variability
is high; (Class 2) those with an intermediate
variability.

ee ee ee ae ee

To

Avueust 15, 1931 ]

iri COLEBeLING INET

207

In Class 3 are the conjugants of E8la; their
standard deviations of 3.98to0.30 for the first
period, 3.86t0.41 for the second, and 6.56t0.74
for the total time, show a variability distinctly
higher than that of any other group. In Class 1
are the conjugants of E4oa, with standard devia-
tions most unlike those of E81a; they were the
lowest found (1.44{0.07, 1.60{0.08, and 2.68t
0.14.) The intermediate class is represented by
E41a, its most consistent member; its values are
2.6610.14, 2.52¢0.14, and 4.63t0.24. These con-
jugant groups, derived from sister clones, show
variabilities of widely different degrees.

Difference in increase in variation is shown
most clearly by the clones E41a and E4oa. In
these two clones the ratios between the standard
deviations of the conjugant groups and the cor-
responding non-conjugant groups show that con-
jugation increased absolute variability about twice
as much in the clone E4ta as in the clone E4oa.
(The ratios for the two five-day periods and
total time are: 2.74 as compared with 1.32; 1.91
as compared with 1.04; and 2.82 as compared
with 1.23).

These results are another instance of disagree-
ment of data obtained from different clones. An
experiment on E4oa alone would have led to the
conclusion that conjugation dces not increase var-
iability ; but an experiment on 41a alone would
have led to the conclusion that conjugation great-
ly increases varialility. The present experiment
shows that neither conclusion tells the whole truth.

In percentage mortality the six groups of con-
jugants again fall into three classes. In Class 3
are the conjugants of clone E81, with a very high
mortality: 81.3%. In Class 1 are those from
E4oa and E4ta, with a very low mortality : 11.5%
and 12.5%. The other groups fall into the inter-
mediate class, with a mortality percentage ranging
from 24.2% to 37.5%. It is evident that mor-
tality, also, varies with the clone; in some clones
conjugation results in a very great mortality; in
other clones, in very little.

The differences between the mortality percent-
ages of the conjugants and the mortality percent-
ages of the non-conjugants bring out the same
type of relations. Conjugation lowered mortal-
ity in E&8ob (0.8%) ; left it absolutely unaltered
in E&8sb; slightly raised it in E46b (10.7%),
E4ta (11.5%), and E4oa (12.5%); and raised
it greatly in E8ra (43.8%). Non-conjugant
members of both E8s5b and E81a had a mortality
of 37.5% ; conjugation increased this to 81.3%
in daughter clones of E8ta, but left it unchanged
at exactly 37.5% in the daughter clones of E8sb.
In some clones conjugation increases the mor-
tality; in others, it leaves it unaffected.

The third method was carried out on the two
parent clones of the second experiment which had

shown the greatest diversity in all effects of con-
jugation studied: E4oa and E8ta. This study of
repeated simultaneous conjugations in these two
sister clones was designed to answer the question:
What difference between E4oa and E8ta in the
effects of conjugation will be found repeatedly
and at different times?

The first conjugations studied simultaneously
occurred of course in the second set of experi-
ments just described. The second were induced
February 9 to 12; 48 pairs from the E4oa clone
and 44 pairs from the E81a clone and their des-
cendants were studied. The third occurred Feb.
15 to 18, and 48 pairs of E4oa and 96 pairs of
ES8t1a and their descendants were studied. On
March 11 to 16 the fourth and last simultaneous
conjugations were induced and 20 pairs of E4oa
conjugants and 21 pairs of E8tra conjugants and
their descendants were studied.

In every period the mean total number of fis-
sions of the conjugants of E4oa is significantly
higher than the mean total number of fissions of
the conjugants of E81a: 16.260{0.10 as compared
with 7.46[0.42; 13.70t0.12 as compared with
5-3910.59; 5.51{0.10 as compared with 2.83+0.27 ;
and 10.41{0.32 as compared with 6.00f{0.30.
There can be no doubt that conjugation in the
clone E4oa yields groups of conjugants with
higher mean fission rates than does conjugation in
the clone E8ta.

The coefficients of variation also show consis-
tently significant differences. The coefficients of
the Esoa groups of conjugants are always less
than the coefficients of the E81a groups: 8.87
0.46 as compared with 53.38t4.98; 11.69{0.62 as
compared with 68.36$10.69; 38.43{2.28 as com-
pared with 77.38t9.99; 30.52{2.34 as compared
with 52.08¢4.31. Obviously, conjugants from the
clone E8t1a are relatively much more variable in
fission rate than conjugants from the clone E4oa.

A comparison of these conjugant values with
the corresponding non-conjugant values brings
out characteristic effects in each clone. The mean
total number of fissions for E4oa in the first
period of the first experiment is 14.25{0.26; for
its conjugants, 16.26t0.10—the fission rate has
been slightly raised by conjugation; the ratio be-
tween the two totals is 1.14. This is also true of
the second period in which the ratio is 1.04. In
the third experiment it has been slightly lowered :
the ratio is 0.90; in the second experiment, low-
ered still more: the ratio is 0.60. In E8la. on
the other hand, the total number of fissions for
the conjugant’ group is always considerably less
than that for the non-conjugants: the ratios in
every case are close to one half; and, in every
period, they are almost exactly half the ratios for
E4oa. They are 0.54, 0.61, 0.33, and o.a8.
It is clear that in E4oa the fission rate is usually

[ Vou. VI. No. 48

208 THE COLLECTING NET
little affected. In E8la, it is regularly about E4oa have a high fission rate similar to that of
halved. their parent clones; conjugants from E81a, a low

The same thing is true for variability. The
ratios for E8ta are in every case greater ; in three
cases, over twice as great: 4.18 as compared with
1.160; 1.69 as compared with 1.00; 10.87 as com-
pared with 5.38; and 4.16 as compared with 2.01.
Variability in E81a has been regularly increased
by conjugation to a much greater extent than in
E4oa.

The two clones show similar differences in ef-
fect of conjugation on mortality. In every ex-
periment the mortality of the E4oa group of con-
jugants is very much less than the mortality of
the E8ta group of conjugants: 12.5% as com-
pared with 81.3%; 14.3% as.compared with
40.9%; 71.9% as compared with 99.5%;
47.5% as compared with 92.9%. For the four
experiments the average mortality among the con-
jugants of the group E81a was 81.3% as com-
pared with 36.1% for the conjugants of the
clone E40a. There can be no doubt that conju-
gation results in a very much greater mortzlity in
the clone E8ta than in the clone E4oa.

A comparison of the differences between mor-
tality percentages of the non-conjugant and conju-
gant groups brings out specific effects in each
clone. In E4oa, the conjugant percentage is
greater in the first experiment by 12.5% in the
second, by 14.3% ; in the fourth, by 7.5%. In
the third experiment, the mortality of the conju-
gants ts less by 3.1%. It is evident that mor-
tality in E4oa is little affected by conjugation. In
E81a, however, the mortality percentage is regu-
larly considerably higher in the conjugants:
43.8% in the first experiment; 40.9% in the sec-
ond, 18.0% in the third, 22.1% inthe fourth. In
E81a conjugation regularly and significantly in-
creases mortality.

Thus repeated comparison of successive groups
of conjugants from the two clones E4oa and
ES8ta as well as the study of successive groups of
conjugants from 247a has fully established that
each clone shows certain characteristic effects of
conjugation. Conjugants from clones 247a and

fission rate, about half that of their parent clone.
Conjugants from E4oa have a low variability,
slightly greater than that of their parent clone;
conjugants from E8t1a a high variability, con-
siderably greater than that of their parent clone.
Conjugants from E4oa have a low mortality, like
that of their parent clone; conjugants from E8t1a
a high mortality, well above that of their parent
clone.

In conclusion it may be stated that in this in-
vestigation, fifteen conjugant groups from seven
closely related clones were found to be very di-
verse in fission rate, variability, and mortality.
Groups of conjugants obtained over a period of
three months from two sister clones differed con-
sistently in fission rate; the ratio of the slower
over the faster never exceeded 0.58. Differences
of similar degree were found in variability and
mortality, extending over the same three months
period.

The relations between conjugant groups and
parent clones were also. very diverse. Most clones
showed no effects, or very slight effects, in their
fission rates. In others, the fission rate was
raised by conjugation; in one it was strikingly
reduced. The same is true for mortality. Varia-
bility was usually increased, but to very diverse
degrees in the several clones. We found no uni-
form conjugation effects in the species Paramec-
ium aurelia,

However, within each of the three clones in
which three or more successive conjugations were
studied, certain characteristic effects of conjuga-
tion were demonstrated repeatedly. In one clone
(E81a) fission rate was halved; mortality was
greatly increased; and variability was doubled. In
two clones, (247a and E4oa) fission rate was un-
affected; in one of these two (E4oa,) mortality
and variability were also little increased.

In general, then, according to these results, con-
jugation effects are specific for certain clones of
Paramecium aurelia, but are highly diversified in
the species.

CROSS-CONJUGATION IN PARAMECIUM AURELIA
Dr. T. M. Sonnesorn AND Dr. RutH S, Lyncu,
Johns Hopkins University
(Reported by Dr. Sonneborn)

Although cross-breeding experiments are ob-
viously important for genetic analysis, only three
cases in which cross-breeding is definitely known
to have occurred are to be found in the whole of
protozoan literature. The best of these is the
cross made by Pascher between two species of
Chlamydomonas. This, however, will not be
described, as the present account will be confined
to the ciliate Protozoa, in which the phenomena
of mating are very different from those in flagel-

lates like Chlamydomonas. The first clear case
of cross-breeding in ciliate protozoa is the single
pair of cross-conjugants of Spathidium spathula
obtained by Wocdruff and Spencer in 1924. The
descendants of this one pair were compared for
25 days with the descendants of two pairs of in-
bred conjugants from each parent clone. No sig-
nificant differences in fission rate were found.
The only other case is the work of Miss Mac-
Dougall on Chilodon. Fifty pairs of cross-conju-

ii i i tl i aie a a a hi

Aueust 15, 1931 ]

tHE COLEECIING NEF

209

gants between a normal and a tailed race were
obtained, but every one of these died before
they could be studied She states, however, that
another type of cross has been more successful ;
but no account of this has yet been published.
These two cases of Woodruff and Spencer and
of Miss MacDougall exhaust the literature on
cross-breeding ciliate Protozoa.

In an attempt to help fill in this gap in the
genetics of these organisms, a method was d2-
veloped by which clones of P. aurelia, with dif-
ferent genotypes, could be cross-bred. The chief
difficulties in achieving this are due to the facts
that conjugation is ordinarily induced in mass
cultures and that, in mass cultures, the two clones
to be crossed cannot usually be distinguished
with ce-tainty. These difficulties must he over-
come either by artificially marking in different
ways the two clones to be crossed, before mixing
them in mass cultures; or by devising some meth-
od whereby conjugation can be induced in isola-
tion cultures containing only two individuals—
one from each clone. Both methods were tried
and the latter found to be far more satisfactory.

The method finally used was essentially this:
Conjugation was induced synchronously in sep-
arate mass culturcs of the two clones to be
crossed. Then, pairs consisting of one non-con-
jugating individual from each of the two clones
were isolated together in the smallest possible
amount of fluid taken from one of the conjugat-
ing cultures.

After this technique had been successfully em-
ployed, it was discovered that Woodruff and
Spencer had abtained one pair of cross-conju-
gants (the one already mentioned) by the use of
a somewhat similar method. ‘The essential dit-
ference in method is that they set up pairs in or-
dinary culture fluid instead of in fluid from the
conjugating cultures. This difference may ac-
count for their failure to get more than one pair
of cross-conjugants.

That the method here employed will probably
be found to be of wide-spread usefulness is indi-
cated by the facts that we have obtained crosses
among five genotypically different clones of P.
aurelia, and Mr. Cohen, using the same methcd,
has just succeeded in crossing different races of
a very different species: Euplotes patella.

Of the different crosses we have obtained, one
was done on a large enough scale to yield resuits
of interest. The experiment was performed on
two of the clones of which Dr. Lynch has just
given you an account: The clone E4oa, which,
when inbred, yielded groups of ex-conjugant
clones with high mean fission rate and high vir-
bility; and the clone E81a, which, when inbred,
yielded groups of ex-conjugant clones with low
mean fission rate and low viability.

During the fourth of the comparisons of the

effects of inbreeding which we made between
these two clones, we also studied twenty pairs of
crosses between the two clones. The conjugants
of the three groups were obtained at the same
time. From each ex-conjugant we ran two lines
of descent, so that we had eighty cross-bred lines
to compare with eighty inbred lines from one
parent and eighty inbred lines from the other
parent. The experiment thus consisted of 240
lines. These were compared for twenty days.
The present report will be limited to a discussion
of two characteristics: Fission rate and viability.

In mean fission rate, the three groups differed
greatly. The inbred E4oa parent yielded a group
of ex-conjugant lines with means of 10.61, 9.48,
10.77, and 12.52 fissions for the four successive
five-day periods, respectively. The inbred E81a
clone yielded a group of ex-conjugant lines with
means of 3.77 and 4.58 fissions for the first two
periods, respectively. (The means for the last
two periods for this group are not given because
the descendants of only three ex-conjugants sur-
vived there periods. and their means are obvious-
ly insignificant.) The cross-bred group yielded a
group of ex-conjugants with means of 7.73, 7.57,
7.97, and 9.28 fissions for the four successive five-
day periods, respectively. Period by period, the
means of the cross-bred group are lower than the
means of the inbred E4oa clone (by a total of
10.8 fissions for the 20 days of the experiment),
and higher than the means of the inbred E81a
clone (by a total of over 7 fissions for the first
10 days of the experiment. )

It is important to inquire into the possibility
that the intermediate results of the cross-conju-
gants are due to the fact that half of the ex-
conjugants descended from one parent have its
characteristic fission rate; and the half descend-
ed from the other parent, its characteristic fission
rate. The group as a whole would then be inter-
mediate also. The means of the means of the two
parents, 7.19 and 7.03 for the first two periods,
are indeed very close to the means of the cross-
bred group.

That this resemblance is not due to the pos-
sibility just suggested, is shown by figure 1. On
these graphs the percentage of each group is plot-
ted aeainst fission totals. The first set of curves
are for the first five-day period; the second sect,
for the second period. The Lroken curves repre-
seit the inbred E8t1a group; their curves show
thet the great majority (71% and 67%) of this
eroup fell in the class having less than 5 fissions
in five days. The dash-dot curves represent the
inbred Ez4oa group; their curves show that the
great majority (60% and 67%) fell in the class
having more than 10 fissions in five days. The
solid curves represent the cross-bred group ; their
curves show that the peaks (41% and 58%) fell
in the intermediate class having between 5 and

210

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 48

Percentage Distribution of Totel Mumber of Pisslons

March 12-17, 1931 ti March 18-22, 1951

Bele x Ele

Pereertege of ex-conjugant lines
a

&

0.0-4.5 6.0-0.5 10,0-19.5

Total Husber of Piasions

Total Mumber of Fisstons

10 fissions in five days. The dotted curves are
the means of the curves of the two inbred par-
ents; these curves are bimodal with the two modes
falling in the two extreme classes, the minimums
in the intermediate class. The curve for the
mean of the two parents and the curve for the
cross between the two parents are thus exactly
opposite in character; the low points of the cross
curves fall where the high points of the parental
curves are, and the high points of the cross curves
fall where the low points of the parental curve
are. Clearly, then, the cross-bred group resembles
neither parental group nor the sum of half of
each of the two parental groups. Its distribution
of fission rate is characteristically intermediate
between those of the parents.

The situation with respect to mortality is quite
different. The mortality of the cross-bred group
was almost exactly like the mortality of the in-
bred E4oa group at every stage of the experi-
ment, and very different from the mortality of the
inbred E81a group. At the end of 20 days, the
mortality among the inbred E4o0a group was
47.5% and among the cross-bred group, 52.6% ;
but among the inbred E81a group, 92.9%. Mor-
tality of the cross-bred group is not intermediate,
like fission rate, but is for practical purposes the
same as the mortality of the more viable parent
and very different from that of the other parent.

There is one further question of much im-
portance which the present experiment clearly
answers: Do the results of conjugation ina given
type of individual depend on the genetic constitu-
tion of its mate, as well as onits own? Dr. Lynch
reported our experiments which demonstrated
that the results of inbreeding are characteristical-
ly different in different types of individuals, such
as those of the clones Eyoa and E81a. We can
now compare what happens when an individual
of the clone E81a mates with another individual
of the same clone, with what happens when it
mates with an individual of the very different
clone E4oa.

This can be done in the following ways. Al-
though we have no way of telling which mem-

bers of the pairs of cross-conjugants came
from the clone E&8la, we know that one mem-
ber of each pair came from this clone. So. we

can find the minimum possible mean fis-
sion rate of these by averaging together
the values attained by the slower mem-

bers of all pairs. The average thus found may be
lower than the true average of the E81a descend-
ants in the cross-bred group, but it cannot be
higher. Calculation made in this way shows that
the minimum possible mean fission rate for the
cross-conjugants derived originally from the clone
E8ra is 5.1 fissions in five days. The correspond-
ing value for those derived from inbreeding the
clone E81a was 3.8 divisions in five days. Thus,
by conjugating with E4oa instead of its own
sisters, the mean fission rate of the descendants
of E8ra has been increased, at the very least, by
35%.

The difference in viability due to the same
cause can be demonstrated in the following way.
The minimum possible viability of the E8t1a
members of the cross-conjugant group can be cal-
culated by counting as survivors only those
whose mates also survived. Obviously, one
member of each of these pairs must have
been descended from the clone E81a. We thus
find that the minimum possible viability of the
descendants of E81a in the cross-bred group to
have been 25%. When E81a was inbred, only
3% survived. Thus, by conjugating with E4oa
instead of with its sisters, the viability, as meas-
ured by survival, of E81a has been increased
from 3% to 25%—an increase of 2.57%.

It is thus clear that in respect to both fission
rate and viability the results of conjugation in
any individual depend not only on the genetic
constitution of that individual, but also on the
genetic constitution of its mate. This elementary
and fundamental principle of protozoan genetics,
though often assumed, has never before been
demonstrated experimentally in ciliate Protozoa.

Note: Since the above report was made, the
experiment has been repeated on two new clones
with characteristics similar to the ones previously
studied. In the repeated experiment, it was pos-
sible to distinguish through and after conjugation
the two parents entering into the formation of
the hybrids, by a clear-cut difference in size. It
was thus possible to demonstrate, beyond doubt,
that crossing a clone characterized by low viabil-
ity and low fission rate with a clone character-
ized by high viability and high fission rate re-
sulted in increasing the viability and fission rate
of the poor clone and decreasing the viability and
fission rate of the good clone. The result pre-
viously reported (that the effect of conjugation
in a given type of individual depends not only on
its own genetic constitution, but also on the con-
stitution of its mate) has therefore been fully
corroborated.

Aueust 15, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

211

SCIENTIFIC BOOK REVIEWS

Children Who Run onall Fours. Ales Hrdlicka.
xx + 418 pp. Illustrated. $5.00. Whittlesey
House. McGraw-Hill Book Co.

The modern student of children has come to
realize that their characteristics in both structure
and behavior give at a very early period strong
indications of their future personalities.

They appear to be born with their main traits
already determined, their behavior already far
more set than many parents realize. Much time
and effort have been wasted by such adults in
trying to bend the little fixed organisms to im-
agined ideal standards entirely unsuited to their
type. Tragedies have often thus resulted.

But the key to types is not yet always easily
found since variation and intermixing of traits
often obscure their identities. Hence it is of
special interest and helpfulness when certain chil-
dren are found distinguished by an early definite-
ness of organization and habit, which can be tabu-
lated and analysed.

Dr. Ales Hrdlicka first observed with surprise
some thirty years ago in our western country a
little Indian baby running on all fours like an
animal. Since then he has seen many other cases
in the course of extensive travels throughout the
world, and has collected through correspondence
nearly four hundred records of cases apparently
well authenticated.

The attitude and behavior of these children was
so unusual as to attract attention; but though a
number of scientists are quoted as observers of
occasional cases like these and of associated ani-
mal-like habits, the book before us seems to be
the first serious attempt to bring the available,
much scattered data together in systematic form
with an effort at scientific estimation of their
meaning.

“Children Who Run on all Fours” is a
relatively small volume of about four hundred
pages with almost three hundred pages de-
voted te the data furnished by most interesting
letters and reports concerning individual children.
Three hundred and eighty-seven children have
been thus carefully recorded, 369 being of the
white race. As the author says, these detailed
first-hand accounts are found to be of much and
varied interest—not mere statistics. They form
the vital part of the book.

A reading of the letters leaves the impression
that much more extensive studies should be car-
ried on, extending the scope of this suggestive he-
ginning. The first one hundred pages give a
review of the field and discuss the cases ar-

ranged. In the second part, the relations of the
phenomena to race, sex, heredity, general health
and physical and physiological traits are dis-
cussed briefly. The variations in performance
and in its appearance, as well as other animal-like
habits which seem associated, are considered and
there is a special section on the “mentality” of the
children. Many excellent photographs are repro-
duced which add much of interest.

In the section on ‘“‘Mentality” correlations with
animal habits, musical rhythm, etc., the author
touches on a variety of topics, and suggests meth-
ods and rules of value in following up and ex-
tending his studies. There seems to be over-
whelming testimony rating children of this type
as decidedly above the average mentally as well
as physically. Dr. Hrdlicka feels we have here
retained in a few modern children (the per-
centage not yet known) a conspicuous definiteness
of neuro-motor coordination and control which
was once common property. It is not an atavistic
nor a degenerative phenomenon. It looks as if
this extraordinarily efficient motor control is ac-
complished by the development of a better than
usual mind already exceptionally adjusted at birth.
The reviewer has been lucky in knowing two
children of this type and is strongly impressed, in
addition to their motor effectiveness, by their
early precision and clarity of thought and ex-
pression which continues as they grow older.

The author is certainly right in his conviction
of the importance of this field. It should he de-
veloped much further. There is promise of new
data on inherited traits and capacities of children
for guidance in the better understanding of vari-
ous types.

It seems to me that the author’s non-technical
presentation of the cases and advice as to meth-
ods of observing should be exceptionally useful in
enabling the average person to observe and record
much useful data which is now lost. Parents will
certainly discover through this little book a new
world of interest and suggestions for dealing with
their children. —Henry McE. Knower.

An Introduction to Neurology. C. Judson Her-
rick. Fifth Edition. Revised. W. B. Saunders
Company. 1931.

All students of neurology will welcome the
fifth edition of this very excellent text. It is too
well known to need comment. The present edition
has been carefully revised and brought up to date
and maintains the high standing of the earlier
imprints. —G. H. Parker.

212

AMSA, (COMMA MUNG INVES AL

[ Vou. VI. No. 48

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific wcrk
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell! wie.c cic)s «ora mine (ors einl=)n1=/alaiiolale love =\imce Editor

Assistant Editors

Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S. Cattell

MEMBERS OF THE CORPORATION AND THE
MESS HALL

Workers at the three scientific institutions at
Woods Hole receive their board at the Mess Hail
for $7.00 a week. Members of their immediate
families (wives, husbands or children) are also
given meals at this rate.

This arrangement is held to rather rigidly, and
there are people who feel that certain exceptions
should be made. As things now stand, any mem-
ber of the Corporation of the Marine Biological
Laboratory who comes down to attend the official
annual meeting of that body in August is classed
as an “outsider” and charged for his meals at the
rate of $10.00 a week. This holds true even
though, in addition, he has come back to the lab-
oratory to write a scientific paper in the library.

Membership in the Corporation is limited to
those “professional biologists and persons who
have rende*ed conspicuous service to the Marine
Biological Laboratory.” This institution should
therefore welcome the opportunity of making its
Corporation members feel at home when they re-
turn to the laboratory, which, in the last analy sis,
they own and control. A contribution in this di-
rection would be to extend the privileges of the
“¢7.00 a week rate” to them.

In its office Tur CottectinG Net has some of
the current magazines for sale as well as a num-
ber of new books on Cape Cod, including one
entitled ‘‘Jane’s Island,” by Mrs. W. C. Allee.

Copies of the twelve-page reprint on “‘Formulae
and Methods” used in the Chemical Room of the
Marine Biological Laboratory (Edited by Dr.
Oscar W. Richards) may be obtained in our
office.

An appropriation of $750,000.00 was author-
ized recently for the work of the National In-
stitute of Health by Congress. The Institute is
under the administrative direction of the Surgeon
General of the U. S. Public Health Service. Its
purpose is defined as aiming to advance “pure
scientific research to ascertain the cause, preven-
tion and cure af diseases affecting human beings.”

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORTS
OF DRS. LYNCH AND SONNEBORN
Dr. J. A. Dawson
Assistant Professor of Biology, College of the
City of New York
Drs. Lynch and Sonneborn have re-opened, with
the aid of the improved culture technique devised
by Dr. Raffel,the question of the effect of conjuga-
tion in the ciliate protozoan, Paramecium aurelia.
Dr. Lynch’s paper in general supports the earlier
experimental findings of Dr. H. S. Jennings on
the effects of conjugation in Paramecium. The
method whereby conjugation between closely re-
lated clones of Paramecium is secured almost at
will by Dr. Sonneborn is a noteworthy contribu-
tion in protozoology as it opens the field for suc-
cessful genetic studies in the protozoa. It is to
be hoped that some method of determining ac-
curately the identity of the individual ex-conju-

gants can be devised.

DIRECTORY ADDITIONS

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Investigators

Adams, E‘izabeth prof. zool. Mt. Holyoke. Br 109.
Shore (Falmouth.)

Carver, G. L. prof. biol. Mercer. Br 315. D 316.

Henderson, Jean instr. zool. McGill. Phys. Lab. Grin-
nell, Bar Neck.

Keefe, A. M. rector and prof. biol. St. Norbert. Bot.
5. White, Millfield.

Morgan, Ann prof. zool. Mt. Holyoke. Br 109. Shore
(Falmouth. )
Sellmeyer, B L.

Mil'field.
Speicher, B. R. grad. asst. biol. Pittsburgh. Rock 7.
K 14.
Vicari, Emilia, M.
Silla cee.
Wedon. A D. prof. zool. North Dakota State. OM
39. Dr 201.

prof. biol. Loyola. Bot 5. White,

res. assoc. anat. Cornell Med. Br

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
UNL eg TES) Se tees don snoce oat 6:01 6:19
Auto Glare caer 6:44 7:05
Atutoy 70 Ser. Remeconroes 7:36 8:00
Aig. 8) Bees sere 8:23 8:58
Ate ORO fei ae 9:13 9:54
tio 920) ee were em 10:10 10:56
INCE PAL seep erties DRE alilcisfs)
Aug. 22 rot 112221100)
Anis 23).2 er ee 1:05) iG
Aigee 2A cnt eee 2:05. 2509
Aug. PA ORS elt 3:01 3207

In each case the current changes anproximately
-c hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay.

Aueust 15, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 213

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Calvin B. Bridges, who for many summers
has been carrying on investigations at Woods
Hole, has received an invitation from the Rus-
sian Soviet government to visit Russia early this
fall to work on some of the agricultural problems
with which the Stalin administration is faced.
Dr. Bridges is a member of the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington and for the past three years
has been working in the biology department of
the California Institute of Technology. He ex-
pects to sail for Russia early in October for a
four months’ stay. Officially a “learned special-
ist,” the highest post to which a scientific worker
may be appointed in the Russian institutions, he
will have his headquarters at the Academy of
Sciences in Leningrad where he will continue his
studies in theoretical genetics. He expects to de-
liver a series of lectures on genetics to the staff
of the University of Leningrad as well as consult
with workers in various agricultural stations on
specific problems of plant and animal breeding.

Dr. Helen Morris received her Ph.D. in botany
at Columbia University in June. The second
honor that came to her this Spring was election
to membership in Sigma Xi.

Mr. Seymour M. Farber, who was expecting
to begin work at the Marine Biological Labora-
tory early in August, has just written that illness
will prevent him from utilizing Tur CoLLectTiInG
Net scholarship, which was awarded to him last
year. Mr. Farber plans to continue his research
problem at the laboratory next summer.

Dr. Carl V. Smythe has completed his first
year as a National Research Fellow in the lab-
oratory of Dr.-Leonor Michaelis at the Rockefel-
ler Institute and has been appointed to a foreign
fellowship for 1931-32. He sailed for Germany
on july 2nd where he will continue his work on
ferric compounds in Warburg’s laboratory at the
Kaiser Wilhelm Institute fur Biologie at Dahlem.

Dr. Henry B. Bigelow, director of the Oceano-
graphic Institution, addressed the members of the
Kiwanis Club of Falmouth and their guests at a
lobster supper at Handy’s Tavern at the end of
July. He spoke on oceanographic work in gen-
eral as well as about the new laboratory here.

Dr. Harry H. Charlton, who in the past has
worked many summers at the Marine Biological
Laboratory, has been promoted to a full profes-
sorship in the Department of Anatomy at the
University of Missouri.

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Dr. James Murphy and Dr. E. M. East con-
ducted the seminar on August 5th at the Jackson
Memorial Laboratory.

Dr. Warren H. Lewis delivered the fourth
lecture in the M. D. I. B. L. Popular Lecture
Course on Thursday afternoon, August 6th. His
subject was “Cancer Problems” and was illus-
trated by motion pictures.

On August 7th the members of the Laboratory
were entertained at the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory at Lamoine, Me. An exhibition of spec-
imens was given by the students. The visitors
were invited to inspect the buildings and grounds.
Tea was served at the dormitory.

Dr. and Mrs. W. H. Lewis entertained the
Laboratory at a picnic on August 8th.

The Monday evening seminar on August 10th
was in charge of Dr. William Wherry who spoke
on “Biological Control of Bubonic Plague” and
Professor Ulric Dahlgren whose subject was
“Disease among Invertebrates.”

—Loutse R. Mast.

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY

From S. J. Cook, General Secretary of the
Fifth Pacific Science Congress to be held in Vic-
toria and Vancouver, B.C., in May-June, 1932,
Director T. Wayland Vaughan has just received
a letter asking him to organize the program for
a divisional meeting of the Physical Sciences
dealing with the general subject of “Recent
soundings. gravity investigations. and mapping of
sea floors.”

Last week Dr. O. T. Black, Biochemist in the
Bureau of Plant Industry of the U. S. Depart-
ment of Agriculture, arrived at the Institution
to make use of its Laboratory facilities for some
special investigations which he has in hand, in
collaboration with Dr. W. T. Swingle. The pri-
mary object of these investigations is to find plants
favorable for producing certain kinds of chemi-
cal substances (e. @., certain kinds of drugs) in
commercial quantities and to increase production
in others.

Dr. F. S. Brackett, Chief of Division of Radia-
tion and Organisms in the Smithsonian Institu-
tion at Washington, D. C., visited the Institution
last week. He was especially interested in the
work of Mr. Burt Richardson on penetration of
light into sea water and in investigations on solar
radiation. He was accompanied by Dr. W. T.
Svingle of the U. S. Experimental Date Farm
at Inyo, California.

THE COLLEECIING INERT

[ Vou. VI. No. 48

Spalteholz
Transparent
Preparations

Human
and

Zoological

Model of Human Heart

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,

harts
for physiology, zoology, botany,
anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name cf school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate
catalog.

Visit our New and Greatly En-
larged Display Rooms and Museum

117-119 EAST 24th STREET

McGraw - Hill

brings to your attention

a new second edition of

INVERTEBRATE
ZOOLOGY

By Hartey Jones VAN CLEAVE
Professor ot Zoology, University of Illinois

McGraw-Hill Publications in the Zoological
Sciences

282 pages, 6 x 9, 122 illustrations
$3.00

This is a thorough textbook on the struc-
ture, development, and relationships of in-
vertebrate animals. Greater clarity is given
this edition by the substitution of classifica-
tion summaries of classes, subclasses and
orders at the end of each phylum. instead of
specific sections on the orders in the chapters.

See a copy on approval.

McGRAW-HILL BOOK Co., Inc.

Penn Terminal Building
390 Seventh Avenue
New York

Life History

of Chick
ae A = 7) a
Cray-AnAms CompANy

NEW YORK

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROSCOPIC SLIDES

LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and information furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
Woods Hole, Mass.

Avueust 15, 1931 ] TANS, (COMAMARKC AMINES INTO AN 215

DRESENTATIORN

--- the Key to Interest

HE Overhead Projector gives an
instructor cr lecturer a new ad-
vantage. He can present his

subject, illustrated with lantern slides,
while at his desk facing his hearers.
By an arrangement of mirrors he
cperates his own Balopticon which
projects the pictures on to a screen
above his head. The slides are in-
serted right side up, so that the lec-
turer sees them exactly as he does
his audience. Features in the
picture which he wishes to
stress can be pointed out on
the slide with a pencil, in-

stead of using a pointer on the screen.

This attachment is particularly de-
signed for use with Balopticons Model
B and BDT which are slide projectors
of the highest order. Its attachment
to these models is a matter of moments.
It can be used with practically every
model Balopticon.

Write for literature giving a icomplete
description and setting forth
the many advantages of the
Overhead Projector.

BAUSCH { LOM

671 St. Paul Street 2 - - - p 2 Rochester, N. Y.

216 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 48

——<—

JEWELL MODELS FOR BIOLOGY

Jewell Models for Biology are now be-
ing used in practically every university and
college in this country. Their wide accept-
ance is proof of their scientific accuracy and
of the excellent workmanship and quality of
materials used.

The mitosis set illustrated is in use in
over 500 American high schools, universities
and colleges, as well as in many schools in

JM 320 MITOSIS

foreign countries.

end For detailed descriptions, illustrations and prices of our complete
ek line of these models write for our Jewell Models Catalog with

TurTaxercbucts 9 “mens

a GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

© Incorporated
—— 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
The Sign of the Turtox CHICAGO

Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

SEAL.

Non-Corrosive

GOLD

Non- Corrosive

MICROSCOPIC

SLIDES «: COVER GLASSES
Do Not Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Crav-ApAms

117-119 East 24th Street

NEW YORK

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 1%-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the

HEADQUARTERS FOR

nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so 2h NT an
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for STEEL FILING CABINETS, SAFES
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as- AND OFFICE FURNITURE
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and LOOSE LEAF BOOKS AND FIGURING BOOKS
easily kept clean. They form compact stor- : pees" : =
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may IOS SENS USUINSID) (OIE EUISUINIESS
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH Callanan & Archer Cog Inc.
Orders may be sent to e
3 WHOLESALE STATIONERS
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE F
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue, 10-14 So. Second St. New Bedford, Mass.

Philadelphia, Pa.

N

Aucust 15, 1931 ] IIANES (COVES OMNES ANN Ae: 21

Stability and Dependability

CHARACTERIZE

SPENCER MICROSCOPE

No. 64

The Ideal Standard Microscope
FOR

COLLEGE AND HIGH SCHOOL
GENERAL LABORATORY WORK

Among its many advantageous features
are these:

I. Objective lenses mounted directly into
the metal mount, avoiding the use of
Canada Balsam to hold them.

If. Fine adjustment so constructed as to
avoid breakage of cover glass when
focused dcwn upon it.

If. A fool-proof fine adjustment, with 34
threads of the screw always engaged
instead of but one or two.

IV. Its ruggedness in design makes it
abundantly able to stand the rough and
tumble of student usage.

It has found its way to more than
3000 of the best high schools
and colleges in the United States.

What better recommendation? |

SPENCER Microscope No. 64B
equipped as shown with 10x ocular,
double nose piece, two achromatic ob-
jectives 16 mm and 4 mn, iris dia-
phragm complete in wooden cabinet.

$71.75

Allowance for cabinet $3.50, objective
boxes each $0.35 if not wanted.

10% Discount to Schools and Celleges

Samples submitted for tests
Catalog and Quotations Sent on Request ;

218 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. VI. No. 48

A FOLLOW THE CROWD TO
Church of the Messiah
(Episcopal) DANIEL?S

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,

7 LON, wen teks 8:00 a.m.
Holy Communion DELICIOUS SANDWICHES
Morning Prayer ........ 11:00 a.m.
Evening Prayer .......... 7:30 p.m. CORBEE: PICNIC LUNCHES

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Pkone 907-M Free Delivcry
N. E. TSIKNAS We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

When in Falmouth Stop at
Falmouth and Wecods Hole ISSOKSON’S

GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait
A. ISSOKSON

Alen A C O PR ODU GTS IDEAL RESTAURANT
Main Street Woods Hole
NORGE REFRIGERATORS Tel. 1243
WOODS HOLE GARAGE
Compliments of
Os SP ; PENZANCE GARAGE
Opposite Station WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Day or Night A. L. A.
Phone 652 Towing

SEE ESSENSE nnn

H. M. HOWES & SON CO.

Choice Meats, Groceries and Vegetables
SAMUEL CAHOON WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Telephone 695
Wholesale and Retail Dealer in

FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661 CURRENT MAGAZINES
Wosds Hole and Falmouth and BOOKS ON CAPE COD are

FOR SALE AT
Tue CottectinG Net OFFICE

ee |

Aueust 15, 1931 |

Eh COLEECTING NET

219

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Woods Hole Tel. 777

Service that Satisfies

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY

G. M. GRANT, Prop.

Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

THE QUALITY SHOP
Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes and
Souvenirs
Ask for things you do not see.
Main Street Wosds Hole

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

THREE SPECIAL APOCHROMATIC
OBJECTIVES

Each of these three objectives represent an outstand-
ing achievement in the special field for whick it is
intended.

Price f.o.b. New York

Apochromat 5 na. 0.15 $ 34.00
Apochromat 60 n.a. 1.4 oil im. 108.00
Apochromat 120 n.a. 1.3 oil im. 95.00

Apochromat 5 was introduced to meet the demand
for a highly corrected objective of low magnification.
To obtain corrections of the desired high order it
was necessary to increase the length of the objective
to an extent that it cannot be made par-focal with
other objectives.

Apochromat 60 n.a. 1.4 is a homogeneous immersion
system of highest numerical aperture. It is recom-
mended for examinations calling for greatest re-
solving power in the objective. Apochromat 60 n.a.
1.4 should be included in the equipment of every high
grade research microscope. The front lens is more
firmly mounted than that of Apochromat 90 n.a. 1.4,
and its relatively great working distance provides
for comfortable use. With reasonable care it can be
safely employed in routine work.

Apochromat 120 n.a. 1.3 is of interest to those
who require an objective with exceptionally high
primary magnification. The corrections of this ob-
jective are such that, given a suitable specimen and
proper illumination, an ocular magnification of 30x
can be employed without the image showing disturb-
ing defects. A magnification up to 3600 x is useful
at times for special purposes such as counting, mak-
ing camera lucida drawings, etc. This magnification
is far in excess of the so-called “upper limit of use-
ful magnification,” and it is to be noted, finer de-
tails can be resolved with an objective having an
na. of 1.4.

A copy of Micro catalogue 367 containing detailed
data for objectives and ocutars will be
supplied upon request.

CARL ZEISS, INc.
485 Fifth Avenue

New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angetes, Calif.

220

THE COLEE CNG

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 48

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

THE CHORAL CLUB CONCERT

The program presented Saturday evening, Aug-
ust 8, was a glorious treat to the largest crowd
that has thus far attended a Choral Club Concert.
To critique such a performance is not easy.

Opening with a feeling of restraint that showed
more lack of confidence than of training, the
first number was perhaps the weakest on the
program. One could see the audience settle itself
for “another one of these programs’’ and polite
applause.

Then came a surprise. The masterly “Cheru-
bim Hymn” of Musitcheskoo, in its dramatic in-
tensity, swept the singers out of themselves and
caught up the audience as well in its enthusiasm.
Whether the rounds of applause were due to fa-
miliarity with this number and unfamiliarity with
its predecessor is an open question. To one hearer,
at least, Kastalsky has always seemed more or
less ineffectual. This is especially evident when
one compares the opening number of the program
with the stirring setting given it by Ivanoff.

The Gretchaninoff number, a sort of abbreviat-
ed “credo,” was smoothly rendered and interest-
ing by reason of its recitative quality. It was fol-
lowed by Handel’s “Then Round About the
Starry Throne,” reminiscent. in its contrapuntal
passages, of Bach, and quite as effective.

As encore for the first section of the program,
“Gospodi Pomiluy,” the hymn from the Good
Friday Service of the Russian Liturgy, won in-
stant favor. It is sometimes rendered at a less
speedy tempo, but the ritual melodies of the Or-
thodox, as well as the Latin church, are sus-
ceptible to a wide variety of interpretations—and
that is the affair of the Director, not the audience.

The second part of the program opened with
three more numbers from Handel. The first and
third were characteristic of the early attempts to
graft English words on an Italian operatic style,
and consequently pleasant to hear but, in count-
less repetitions, utterly unhappy as to sense. The
second number, a serenade, was much better and
the singers showed themselves more at ease.

Another high spot on the evening’s program
was the “Wassail Song.” Here was music which
both audience and singers understood, appreciated
and took unto themselves. A picture of Yule in
old England with carollers heard in the distance,
approaching, singing their good wishes and go-
ing on into the distant silence—and its naivete in-
creased its hold on the imagination.

The last two numbers by Arkhangelsky were
pleasing revivals from previous years. Different
alike in thought and melodic theme, they were,
in the faultless rendition by the club, characteris-

music, like Schumann’s, is noted for its descrip-
tive power.
tic examples of the great Russian genius whose

That Mr. Gorckhoff continues to return to
Woods Hole is a tribute to his public spirited
interest in our scientific colony. It is, likewise, a
tribute to the spirit of cooperation shown by the
Choral Club members. Without their regularity
at rehearsal and fine feeling for interpretation,
the efforts of any director would be wasted. Nor
can the intelligent assistance of Mrs. Moser,
Schweitzer at the piano be overlooked. She is one
of those rare accompanists who really accompany
and do not lead.

It is to be hoped that Mr. Gorokhoff will con-
tinue to make the Woods Hole Choral Club the
exponent of the choicest Russian music and that
he will continue to vary his programs with num-
bers from the old and modern English music, not
only of Vaughn Williams, Holst, and Gilbert and
Sullivan, but also from William Byrd, Orlando
Gibbons and the rest of that group which made
Elizabethan England a “nest of singing birds.”

-—Dr. A. M. KEeEre.

Qn Saturday night, August 8th, the Coast
Guard burned and sank a rum boat ten miles off
Vineyard Light, after a hard chase. The Eaglet,
an eighty-foot craft from Tiverton, R. I., had
long been under suspicion. The CG-813 sighted
and hailed her, and when she increased her speed,
fired a shot across her bow. The Coast Guard
thea cpened fire with the machine gun, wounding
three of the Eaglets crew and puncturing her
fuel tank. The seven members of the crew and
nine cases of Canadian liquor were rescued be-
fore the boat finally burned and sank. The crew,
who had on board about 1500 cases of liquor,
have been turned over to the police in New Bed-
ford for arraignment in the Federal Court.

On Monday afterncon, August 10th, the
Woods Hole Yacht Club again held races. The
winners were: Morris Frost in his baby knock-
about, ‘““Windwaid;’’ Wistar Meigs in his dory,
“Aunt Addie;” and Philip Woolworth in his ecat-
boat, ‘‘Lurline.”’

This past week, the University Players have
reached a high point in both acting and produc-
ton in Ferenc Molnar’s satiric little play, “The
Guardsman.” Elizabeth Fenner as the actress-
wife displayed an even greater versatility and
charm than usual and Kent Sm'th proved himself
both a good actor, and an adept at foreign ac-
cents. Next week the Theatre at Silver Beach
will present “Juno and the Paycock,” by the gift-
ed Irish dramatist, Sean O’Casey. —M.S.G.

. pee es

—

Aueust 15, 1931 ]

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.

Present
“JUNO AND THE PAYCOCK”
Aug. 17 — Aug. 22
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
For Reservations Call Falmouth 1250

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
EST. 1887

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

Main Street
near A & P

Queen’s Byway
near Filene’s
JAX
FEMININE FOOTWEAR
$4.45 to $7.45
Two Falmouth Shops

Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
FALMOUTH

Visit
Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

Cape Cod Distributors for
Draper Maynard Sporting Goods
SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS

Falmouth Tel. 407

Libs COLEECTING NET

EMBRYOLOGICAL
SLIDES

We present in this list choice microscopic
preparations in Frog Embryology,
prepared by a leading
embryologist :

IDLE WN VI Loy= AOE) OoenootonaSenonecs $0.75
E 2 (b) Frog ovary, young eggs with
OUTS JEN. Goocack boar 1,00
E 3 (c) Frog, fertilized ovum ........ 1.00
E 4 (d) Frog, fertilized ovum with pen-
etration path or first spindle
(Ghd) “pasoonecovonoodaGon eas 3.00
Several of these preparations should be
used for demonstration. (Marked slide.)
E 5 (e) Frog, first cleavage .......... 1.00
E 6 Frog, second cleavage ............ 1.00
E 7 Frog, third and fourth cleavages... 1.00
E 8 Frog, later cleavages ............ 1,00
HO METOP Ss OLASUUITA \atoncie exe¥n anchotaleietes anchor 1,00
E10 Frog. early gastrula, longitudinal
SECTION. temcieietteiie oto eh eee 1.00
Ell Frog, entire early gastrula, serial
lonpatndinall jae ciieieverichacie tte 2.00
E12 Frog, late gastrula, longitudinal
SECHONM reer ermit hye cencterrrier 1.00
E13 Frog, entire late gastrula, serial
longitudinal section .......... 2.00
E14 Frog, gastrula hemisected longitud-
inal (two halves)\ esis eects 1.75
E15 Frog, formation of neural folds,
CLANSVELSeEMSECLION I. seieleis siecle 1.00
E16 Frog, formation of neural folds,
serial transverse section ...... 2.00

E17 Frog, formation of neural folds,
longitudinal hemisection (two

HalVES) I" evsenyectstereiesiersetoniae 1.75
E18 Frog, formation of neural folds,
serial longitudinal section .... 2.00
E19 Frog, 4-5 mm. larva serial sections:
SEPATISVENSE|earsjevctavers cuestersctersterers 2.50
Dong itudinall 2 s2s,s.tmes sheers aesO0
orizonbaly ee sic sehasee eter 2.00
E20 Frog, 6-9 mm. larva serial sections:
TIANSVeCLseigerieks alc seieare vies 2,75
Longitudinal cas serelsivieeis « 2.00
ISlolabAayoWell Go ocosn aos concn soc 2 00

E21 Frog, 10 stages of development in
toto, in small vial.

We offer other preparations such as the
embryology of the chick, maturation di-
visions of Ascaris and the development of
the holoblaster egg of Cerebratulus. A
list of these preparations will be mailed
gladly upon request.

Standard Scientific
Supply Corp.

10-14 W. 25th ST. NEW YORK CITY

bo
bo
iss)

CAMBRIDGE ELECTROMETERS

. : The application of lElectrometers to the
Lindemann Electrometer with measurement of small electrical quantities has
Grounding Switch. increased rapidly in recent years.

Among the more prominent electrometer
uses are researches in radio-activity, spectro-
scopic investigations and many uses in conjunc-
tion with photo-electric measurements.

The Lindemann Electrometer (illus-
trated) is an exceptionally compact and
robust instrument of high sensitivity,
short period and low capacitance and
does not require levelling.

List 169 describes in detail the Lind2-
mann, Tilted Gold Leaf, String, Doleza-

lek, Recording Quadrant, and Compton Electro-
meters.

Pioneer Manufacturers CAM BRIDGI 3732 Grand Central
of Precision Instruments NSTRUMENT CO [Nc Terminal, New York

3844" x 1” High

ECOLOGY
FREAS All Forms of Life in Relation to Env’ronment
Established 8 fici

d 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
TER Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
ELECTRIC WA for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes

at the_ single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
BATH able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign
postage: 20 cents,

GENETICS
A Periodical R d of I igati i
WITH CONSTANT TEMPERATURE Seca Hapaelitge a ae ato bearing on
CONTROL Established 1916, Bimon:hly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. B: ack volumes, as avail-
Supplied ial three different Sizes. able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Ae e Devaled to All a Branches of Botanical Science =

5 2 Established 1914. onthly, except August and ep-
Accurate to 0. C. tember. Official Publication-of the Botanical Society ey
America, Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes

(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number

rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single

numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes

Write for further information and on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents,

prices BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS
<< Volume I: 33 contributions by various au.hors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.
Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
EIMER & The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor.

Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897 Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore aud Nor-
Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
Chemical Reagents colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.
aah 5 Orders should be placed with
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
New York, N. Y. The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,

1000 Washington Aye. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

THE COLLECTING NED [ Vot. VI. No. 48

ee

Aveust 15, 1931] THE COLLECTING NET

LEICA the Universal Camera in Science

COMPACT ===): ACCURATE

_IN ONE

Weighs only 15 ozs.
Focal Plane Shutter

Uses 35 mm film

Takes 8 pictures per foot
36 pictures at one loading

Interchangeable lenses

Depth of focus scale on lens
mount for quick reference.

No one interested in science can afford to be

without a LEICA

With a LEICA Camera Model C you really have many cameras in One,—a micro camera, a
copying camera, a stereo camera, a telephoto camera, a camera for speed photcgraphy in bad
lighting conditions, a wide angle lens camera for including larger areas, a clinical camera, a
camera for portrait photography or for general use, an aerial camera and a camera making 1x 1%
in. negatives which are even superior in quality to many larger size cameras.

Many new photographic thrills can now be experienced in three dimensional forms when using
the new STEREOLY attachment for the LEICA Camera and viewing the positives in the LEICA
Stereo Viewer. Here is an attachment which will greatly extend the applications of the Univer-
sal LEICA Camera which is now in constant use for every photographic purpose.

When using the STEREOLY it is possible to photograph action pictures as well as still ob-
jects, and preserve all the natural depth of the third dimension just as seen with the eyes. The
pictures are photographed in transposed positions on the LEICA double frame negatives, thus
giving two single frame pictures of the same subject. No special printer or enlarging apparatus
is required for finishing the positives. WRITE FOR NEW BOOKLET No. 1194, Stereoscopic pho-
tography with the LEICA Camera.

The complete story of the LEICA Cameras and accessories is told in our new LEICA CATA-
LOG No. 1190 which will be mailed upon request.

94,
ee

oe,

ee ee 3

A special LEICA Gamer exhibition an demonstration will be held iene 3

17, 18, and 19th in the “Old Lecture Hall” Marine Biological Laboratory. The }

new LEICA stereoscopic attachment, a new focusing copy attachment, LEICA %

film and glass slide projector, and the complete LEICA equipment will be on dis- 3

play. Willard D. Morgan, Manager Photo-Optical Dept. E. Leitz, Inc. New York, %

will personally direct the demonstration work during these three days. A special 2
lecture will also be given.

PODS ROSES SOF 8684 2008008

Bree reves ev eves eves ee ey

SEUAISIAE AERTS TSE RE RORERIRT SIRT S AIRIAI SISAL AEALALAL ape aoeoeOeoooe
Eee eee eV eee ee ee ee eres ee eres sees

EF. LEQZ. Inc.

Dept. CN 60 E. 10th St. New York, N. Y.

224 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No 48

9) Quoting remark of a school super-

¢ .
It saved us the cost of 5 microscopes” Qiocus ome ct aoa

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genious yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional features as

standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.

Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.

Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.

Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.

Screw centering adjustment for light. Revolving stage.
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,

Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.
Se

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to
| 117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

sv-ApAms CompAny

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

Vol. VI. No. 9. SATURDAY, AUGUST 22, 1931

PHYSIOLOGY OF THE CORPUS LUTEUM THE PACIFIC BIOLOGICAL STATION

AND ITS INTERGLANDULAR IN NANAIMO, B. C.

RELATIONSHIPS Dr. W. A. CLEMENS

Dr. F. L. Hisaw Director of the Station
Professor of Zoology, University of Wisconsin The Pacific Biological Station is located on De-
Three physiologically active substances, in ad- parture Bay, Vancouver Island, four miles from
dition to oestrin, are secreted by the corpus lu- the city of Nanaimo, B. C. It is one of four
teum of the sow. One, re- stations operated under the
laxin, produces relaxation of x Saal 7) 9) auspices of the Biological
the pelvic ligaments of the MW. HB. L. Calendar Board of Canada, which in
guinea pig characteristic of TUESDAY, AUG. 25, 8:00 P. M. turn is under the control of
the normal condition which (1) Dr. Paul S. Henshaw: “Re- the Minister of Fisheries of

covery from X-ray Effects as

Observed in Arbacia Eggs.” (10 the Dominion.

exists during pregnancy. A

second substance, a mucifying | minutes) The Biological Board came
factor, modifies the vaginal | (2) Mr. Ware Cattell: “The Re- | into being in the year 1898 fol-
mucosa of certain rodents, e. action of the Fundulus Ovum to lowing representations made
g. rats and mice, into a mucus Ene TOuaOn Wg e | Ca to the Government by promi
g. rats < ce, into a mucus MAOAbE Teta TeanCinimuinutes) e Government by promi-
secreting type. The third (3) Dr. BE. A. Wolf and Dr. H. H. | nent British and Canadian bi-
hormone, corporin or proges- Collins: “The Effect of Ultra- | ologists on behalf of the Brit-
tin, has a specific action on the ee Se eae Seo oa ish Association for the Ad-
Ree see ee a rene attern of Triturus, minutes AE a caine lh :
uterus, causing such uterine (4) Dr. G. H. Parker: “The Dis- vancement of Science and the
responses as the development charge of Nematocysts.” (15 Royal Society of Canada.
of decidual° tissu4, formation minutes) The first Station was es-
of the pseudopregnant con- FRIDAY, AUG. 28, 8:00 P. M. tablished on the Atlantic coast
dition in the uterus of rabbits Professor J. H. McGregor: Motion in 1899 and the Pacific Sta-
and the development of a ees eS the Helen tion in 1908. The Biological
a 5 ongo anc ne ameroon by e 3 Aon Aye “Ace ~ avin a
premenstrual. endometrium. in | lsasteasnn Expedition (1929-30) oard as at present constitut
the uterus of monkeys, Other | _ eS —__| ed consists of representatives
physiological effects . such as from practically all of the uni-
the inhibition of the oestrous cycle and the | in- versities of Canada, three representatives from
hibition of ute-ine (Continued on Page 230) the Department of Fisheries and two representa-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Physiology of the Corpus Luteum and its Surface Temperature and the Radiation of
Interolandnlar Relationships, Heat from the Human Body,
IDNey IM, 1b, TENET 6 doddu ov noon cco ten are 225 LD) pul Dib Feteyateyn See DibU Ste) nn po macwaren race o 233
The Pacific Biological Station in Nanaimo, The Action of the Common Cations on the
IDES: Wns) Pty (CUES na ENAITS AG ain. aid orc bacto icra cera 225 Proteoplasmic Viscosity of Amoeba,
The Tortueas Laboratory, Dri Le sVe ber mnmnire cama ycr fe v.'-eectnie cee 234
VWViEI Iba een ae niga t hice als, scene 1227 The Mechanism of Bacteriotropin Action,
The Murmansk Marine Biological Station. IDV IEAM LEI, 6.65 co Donn aoeee ecoar 235
Dm DmitnyeNemSOnOdine si acee ease: 229 Living Nerve Sprouts,
Oscillographic Study of the Cardiac Gang- Dr Can Caskeya Speidelepyertens cet irceiae 236
ion of Limulus Polythemus, HiditonialPale elect eecuivenis sachs roncicietehe ys 244
AD a EeOrre Ee an\ Gre. qicletiate coniac cise e strase 231 Mable of Contents Continued............. 244

C—O

COLEEEHRINGE Nin

[ Vor. VI. No. 49

THE LABORATORY BUILDINGS,
WHICH ARE EQUIPPED WITH RUNNING FRESH AND

SALT WATER AS WELL AS WITH

AND ELECTRICITY
tives from the fishing industry. Few organiza-
tions, if any, have had a greater influence in the
development of research in Canada than has the
iological Board. It has drawn to its problems
most of the best trained biologists of Canada and
in recent years, leading chemists and physiologists.
It has interested the universities in marine prob-
lems and has given them a field for study and re-
search, and undoubtedly this has contributed to
the breadth and high quality of the instruction
given in them. It has provided an opportunity
for young men and women to become acquainted
with marine biological problems, to gain expert-
ence in research and, at the same time, to obtain
a practical, as well as philosophical, outlook.

Perhaps the primary function of the Pacific
Biological Station may be said to be the supply-
ing of information which shall make possible the
intelligent conservation of the aquatic resources
of the Canadian Pacific coast. This is a wide
field in that any information concerning the ocean
or the fresh waters and their contained life is of
some value. However, there are certain problems
which can be attacked in such a way as to yield
results of more or less immediate application and
our program gives special attention to these, but
at the same time provides for investigations of a
fundamental character. Naturally, chief atten-
tion is given to fishery problems.

The work of the Station is entirely investiga-
tive, no instruction being given. The investiga-
tions are carried out by two sets of workers,
namely, by a resident staff and by members of
the staffs and post-graduate students of universi-
ties working during the summer months and com-
pleting investigations and reports after return to
university duties and studies. The permanent
Staiieeaseat present constituted consists of eight
men in addition to the Director. The number of

GAS

¢
5

voluntary investigators and temporary assistants
ranges in a season from twenty to thirty, located
at the Station and in the field. The laboratory
accommodation consists of three buildings, two
given over to biology, administrative offices,
library and museum, and the third to chemistry.
The laboratories are equipped with gas, elec-
tricity, fresh and salt water and general apparatus
and supplies for biological, chemical, physiological
and oceanographical investigations. A sixty-foot
motor boat, equipped with a winch, dredges, nets,
water hottles, etc. provides for field work. In
addition, there are two smaller motor boats and
row boats. Living accommodation is provided in
a large residence building. While the Station
serves as headquarters and a great deal of the re-
search work is carried out there, much of the
work is actually done in the field with centers
of activity scattered along the whole coast line
and even in the interior of the Province of British
Columbia.

Some of the major problems occupying our at-
tention at the present time are as follows:

Pacific Salmon. At Cultus Lake, a sub-station,
known as the Pacific Salmon Research Station,
has been established where, under the direction
of Dr. R. E. Forester, a comprehensive study of
the propagation of sockeye salmon is being carried
out. Here relative efficiencies of artificial propa-
gation with fry planting and egg planting are be-
ing determined in comparison with natural propa-
gation. The value of retention of fry in ponds
for various periods is being studied. Carefully
controlled experiments to determine the possi-
bilities of transplantetion from one area to an-
other are being carried out. Various hatchery
practices are being investigated. Special studies
of the causes of mortality during egg and fry
stages have been instituted.

On the Queen Charlotte Islands a.study is be-
ing made of the life-histories and propagation of

EXPERIMENTAL FISH PONDS

AS THE
STATION

AT A SUB-STATION KNOWN PACIFIC

SALMON RESEARCH

AML,

Aueust 22, 1931 }

pink and chum salmon by Dr. A. L. Pritchard.
The investigation involves the enumeration of
spawning adults and seaward migrating fry.

During the past five years a comprehensive sal-
mon tagging program has been carried out for
the purpose of determining the migration routes
of the various species. The results from the
tagging of spring salmon have been particularly
successful and illuminating, revealing an exten-
sive movement southeastward all along the coast
even to the Sacramento river in California.

Pilchard-Herring. he problems in connection
with these fishes are being attacked chiefly by sta-
tistical studies of catches and samplings of
catches, supplemented by certain biological re-
searches. The work is under the direction of
Dr. J. L. Hart, with Messrs. R. W. Whittaker
and A. L. Tester as assistants.

Shellfish. Various biological investigations are
5 5
being carried out on crabs, prawns, clams, and

oysters. Special attention is being given to the
propagation of oysters, of which three species
now occur in our waters, namely, the native, the
introduced eastern and the introduced Japanese.
The work in this field is in charge of Mr. C. R.
Elsey.

Trout. The trout constitute a very valuable re-
source in the Province of British Columbia. The
investigation has been initiated by a thorough
taxonomic study and has been followed by studies
of general life-histories, natural and artificial
propagation and the productivity of various lakes.
Mr. C. McC. Mottley is in charge of the investi-
gations.

Oceanography. A detailed study of the oceano-
graphical conditions existing in the Strait of
Georgia is being carried out under the general
supervision of Dr. A. H. Hutchinson, of the Uni-
versity of British Columbia. The physico- ee
ical phases are now being determined by Dr.

M. Carter, of the staff of this Station. The
Strait presents a very complex set of conditions
because of the extensive tidal movements and the
inflow of very large quantities of fresh water,
particularly from the Fraser river. It has been

COLLECTING

NET 227

found that the water from the Fraser river forms
an extensive stable surface layer which takes up
heat and as a result the waters of the Strait have
a relatively high summer temperature as com-
pared with the outside waters. High phosphate,
nitrate and silicate values have been found. Cer-
tain areas are exceedingly productive of plankton,
and the productivity of this body of water in re-
lation to the peculiar physico-chemical factors
forms a very intricate and interesting study.

General. The region in the vicinity of the
Station is exceedingly rich in plant and animal
life and offers an excellent field for investigators
in general biology, ecology, experimental zoology,
taxonomy, morphology, general physiology, bio-
chemistry, etc. While investigators coming to
the Station are expected to undertake studies of
more or less economic significance, they have not
been entirely limited in this respect, for it is real-
ized that any advance in the knowledge of the
ocean and its life is of value in the consideration
of the general economy. The following partial
list of researches now being carried out or re-
cently conducted will indicate something of the
range of activity.

Diatoms in the food of oysters; The signifi-
cance of diatoms in the food of Copepods and
Schizopods; Life-histories of Copepods; The
early stages in the life-histories of crabs; The
reactions of fishes to loud noises; The Protozoa
of British Columbia waters; The life-history of
the ling cod; The development and growth of
scales in steelhead and cutthroat trout; A study
of quantitative methods for the collection oi
plankton; The productivity of lakes; Symbiosis
among marine organisms; Systematic studies of
Polychaetes; The relation of seafowl to fishes;
Cestode parasites of Pacific fish; Creatin and
creatinine content of fish muscle and body fluids;
Nitrogenous metabolism in the dogfish; Physio-
logical and pharmacological studies of fish gut.

Each piece of research carefully and thorough-
ly carried out is a welcome contribution in a
field at once extensive and complex, and so in-
timately associated with the welfare of mankind.

THE TORTUGAS LABORATORY
W. H. LANGLEY
Executive Officer of the Laboratory

It was by authority of the Carnegie Institution
of Washington, which has since maintained it
continuously, that the Tortugas Laboratory was
established by Dr. Alfred Gillayor in 1904. It
stands on the westernmost of the Florida Keys,
far out in the Gulf of Mexico, seventy miles
west of Key West, itself one hundred and forty
miles distant from the Florida mainland.

This choice location was determined by several
factors. Among these, the richness of the local
marine fauna, which attracted the attention of
Alexander Agassiz as early as 1878, should prob-
ably be given first place. Its influence is powerful-
ly supported, however, by the purity of the ocean
water bathing the shores of its islands, and bytheir
freedom from all endemic tropical diseases.

228

225 DEE EOLES CMNG SNiras

In 1904 the fact that, in the interest of the
garrison then stationed at Fort Jefferson on
Garden Key—four miles from Loggerhead Key,
the site of the Laboratory — government boats
maintained frequent communication with Key
West, seemed an additional advantage, but when
the garrison was withdrawn, it proved an easy
matter to adjust the life of the station to the
changed condition. Enforced isolation proved a
benefit in disguise. It permits and encourages
concentration upon research unembarrassed |)
the restrictions of convention or the interrup-
tions of casual social activity.

The station is open at present each summer for
twelve weeks, beginning its season about the first
of June. Twelve to fourteen men may be com-
fortably accommodated at once in its two labora-
tories, one of which is 20 by 50 feet in length
witha wanes 20) byes O). anes
feet, housing aquaria

[ Vor. VI. No. 49

cold storage system for fresh meats, perishable
vegetables, etc. The table is in charge of an
unusually competent steward. By courtesy of
the Superintendent of Lighthouses, Seventh Dis-
trict, communication with the outside world by
telephone and telegraph is possible.

Admission to the laboratory is by invitation. In
general, place may be found only for investigators
of some experience whose problems may be
studied at Tortugas with especial advantage. A
place as assistant is sometimes open to a younger
man of unusual promise. The equivalent of
transportation from New York to Key West and
return, when the necessary costs of travel are so
great, is made available to each investigator. The
institution bears the usually moderate cost of
special apparatus for research. There are no
charges of any sort for maintenance, service or
the use of the labora-
tory’s facilities.

supplied with running
sea-water reaching
them through a lead
distribution — system.
The other is 20 by 58
feet with a_ sleeping
porch 14 feet wide
surrounding it on
three sides. One of
these buildings — in-
cludes a photographic
dark room and a larg-
er light proof room
for experimentation.
The services of eight
skilled workmen, the
resources of a rather

One advantage the

station possesses 1
greater degree than
most others is a di-

rect result of its geo-
graphical location. It
is possible to work all
day long, if necessary,
in the warm water
about it, and to use a
diving hood for hours
without discomfort in
the study of marine
animals, undisturbed
in their natural sur-
roundings. The moat
about Fort Jefferson

well-equipped machine
shop, and a fleet of

YALE AT MOUNT LAKE BIOLOGICAL STATION

and a tern rookery
within the Tortugas

boats meet the re- Fw Rian a Banat apes Voy group increase the

aan ~ f inves- - 5 alentine; r ooarull ; rs. alentine; =, ra = saa >
Guiepaenes OE Ss Mrs. Woodruff; Mrs. G. E. Hutchins; Mrs. Burns; Tan i oe possible
ugators. A. Petrunkevitch; Robert Burns, and his two studies. But, for bi-

The Anton Dohrn, | children. ology as a_ whole,
seventy feet long, em- these advantages are
inently seaworthy, with two fifty-horsepower all slight in comparison with the opportunity the

engines, and capable of nine knots per hour, main-
tains communication with Key West at fort-
nightly intervals. She is also provided with
equipment for dredging to the depth of three
hundred fathoms. The launches /’elella and Dar-
win, respectively capable of making eight an:
twelve knots per hour, provide adequate trans-
portation or for collecting expeditions within the
group and for shallow water dredging. Smaller
hoats are available as needed.

A Delco lighting plant permits night work. Cy-
press tanks with a capacity of twelve thousand
gallons store fresh water in quantities sufficient

for every reasonable need. There is an adequate

laboratory gives to northern workers to see a
marine flora and fauna very different from that
they know best. Even superficial contact with
the species of a strange region enormously en-
hances the value of the home fauna and flora as
materials for study.

During the current season the following in-
vestigators have worked or will work at the lab-
cratory: P. Bartsch, U. S. National Museum: Ex-
periments with Cerious; W. E. Bullington, Ran-
dolph-Macon College: Movements of Ciliate Pro-
tozoa; L. R. Cary, Princeton University: The
Cultivation of Invertebrate Tissues in Vitro; John
Colman, Cambridge University, England: [co-

Aucust 22, 1931 }

HE COLERCTING

NET 229

logical Studies in Marine Zoology and Investiga-
tion of Coral Reef Structure; C. Hartman, Car-
negie Institution: The Hypophysis in Fishes; W.
N. Hess, Hamilton College: Photoreceptors and
Reactions to Light in Balanogossus, etc; D. L
Hopkins, Duke University: The Life Histories
and Physiology of Marine Amebae; B. W.
Kunkel, Lafayette College: Differential Mortality
in Hermit Crabs oe to Unfavorable Con-
ditions; W. H. Langley, Goucher College: Ob-
servation in Fishes; H. W. Manter, University of
Nebraska: Systematic Study of Tortugas Trema-

tae saad

todes: H. S. Pearse: Migration of Organisms
from Sea to Land; W. L. Schmitt, U. S. National
Museum: Systematic Study of Decapods and Sub-
marine Motion Photography; R. G. Stone, Uni-
versity of Missouri: Influence of Radium on Re-
generation in Annelids; G. Tandy, British Mu-
seum Natural History: Ecological Studies upon
Marine Algae, and Studies of Coral Reef Struc-
ture; J. P. Visscher, Western Reserve University :
The Barnacles of Tortugas with Special Refer-
ence to their Larvae; S. Yamanouchi, University
of Chicago: Life Histories of Marine Algae.

THE MURMANSK MARINE BIOLOGICAL STATION

Dr. Dmitry N. Boropin
Independent Investigator, Yonkers, N. Y.

Murmansk Marine Biological Station is located
near Ekaterininskaya harbor, Alexandrovsk, a
1 town on the northern shore of the Kola peninsula,
near Norway, Russia. The geographical position
of this marine biological station is unique. Being
located at 69°15’ N. latitude and 33°30’ E. longi-
— tude Greenwich, it is the northernmost scientific
: institution in the world and the only station lo-
~ cated ahout one degree above the polar circle. The
ocean near the Station never freezes and the har-
hor is free from floating ice, like the entire Mur-
mansk cciast all the year around as far as Cape
Sviatoy Noss in the East. This is one of the
f numerous Russian paradoxes; other harbors
~ which are located farther south, like Arkhangelsk
on the White Sea, Leningrad on the Baltic, As-
trakan on the Caspian, Vladivostok on the Pacific,
as well as Odessa on the Black Sea, are frozen
and closed for different lengths of time in the
winter. Before the war it was possible to reach
the Murmansk Biological Station only by a
steamer from Arkhangelsk; but at present a rail-
_ way delivers one to Murmansk, a large port and
a vivacious town in the Kola fjord, and from

; there a steamer takes one to Alexandrovsk.
T’rom May to July there are no nights at Alex-
androvsk, and the work at the laboratory can he
y continued for twenty-four hours without arti-
ficial light. To those “white nights’? one must
become accustomed, for to keep a record of the
calendar dates and week days is entirely useless.
The economy in electricity which is thus effected

in these polar regions is only temporarily appar-
ent, for the “black days” of fall and winter, when
_ there is no sun and no daylight at all, but only
moon and an aurora borealis succeed the “white

nights”.
The Station has four buildings. One of them
hes laboratories, a library with a complete set of
— “Reports on the Scientific Results of the Ex-
ploring Voyage H. M. S. Challeger 1873-73”.
dining room, and aquaria in the basement. A sec-

ond building serves as dormitory and abode for
the staff; the third building is an electrical station,
and the fourth a dry dock and workshop.

The Station has for its use a good two-mast-
ed, gasoline motor yacht, “Alexander Kovaley-
sky” and many other boats of Norwegian “‘jolas”’
type, as well as Russian “shniakas”, which re-
semble the ancient ships of Norsemen and Vik-
ings.

From May or June, when the steamer brings
the first group of students and professors, until
the end of the season, the Station is full of ac-
tivity. Russian universities of the North are us-
ually well represented.

The ocean in the vicinity of Murmansk Station
has an exceedingly rich fauna of invertebrates
and vertebrates, whales being included in the
latter phylum. Among the Polychatea the fol-
lowing are common: Lepodonotus squammatus,
Phyllodoce maculata, Lumbrinereis fragilis, Ner-
eis pelagica, Ammotrypane aulogaster, Arenicola
marina, Spirorbis borealis, and many Sabellidae ;
and among the Chloraemidae are brada granulosa
B. granulata, Trophona plumosa and Flabelligera
affinis. Nemertines are well represented and some
of them attain a large size. Very common are
Lineus gesserensis, Amphiporus lactiflores, and
Cephalotria. Echiurus pallast and Priapalus cau-
datus are always ready for student use.

Molluses are easy to obtain, and they include Lit-
torina litorea, L.rudis, L. pallida, L. obtusata, Mya
truncata, Mytilus edulis and Pecten islandicus.

An enormous quantity of sea-urchins is usually
consumed by investigators; they belong to a local
species, viz., Strong ylocentrotus droecbachiensis,
Asterias rubens, Ophiura sarsi and Ophiopholis
aculeata are other local echinoderms.

Balanoglossus meeschkowskii, that classical ob-
ject of study, is also present.

The oceanic flora of algae consists of large Lam-
inaria sacharina and other species which may be
found in the deep fjords. When the water re-

230

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 49

cedes at low tide the algae Lithothamnion glaciale,
L. ungeri, L. soriferum, and L. nodosum form a
pretty pink and magenta border to the shore.
Other species of algae are Porphyra laciniata,
Phyllophora elongata, Hildebrantia prototypus,
Rhodomela lycopoides, Corallina officinalis, As-
cophyllum nodosum, Lithoderma, Nemolion lubri-
cum and Ficus serratus, F. vesculosus, F. filifor-
mis ano, F. inflatus, and many others.

The author remembers as his co-workers of
the summer of 1909 Professors V. A. Dogiel,

Protozoa, A. A. Zawarzin, morphology of the
nervous system of insects, K. M. Derjugin, fauna
and ecology, K. K. Kluge, director of the Sta-
tion, and a group of students from two universi-
ties. During that summer the author collected
material for comparative histology of polychaete
worms and also carried on experiments on their
physiology. Part of the written, unpublished re-
ports d'sappeared during the Russian troubles,
but some of it was saved by his colleagues and
recently discovered in Vladivostok.

PHYSIOLOGY OF THE CORPUS LUTEUM AND ITS INTER-
GLANDULAR RELATIONSHIPS

(Continued from Page 225)

contractions which are known to be due to the
corpus luteum can be demonstrated by the use
of extracts, but the specific hormone response is
not known.

Relaxin. This hormone, in addition to being
present in the corpus luteum, may also be ex-
tracted from the blood of several species of mam-
mals during pregnancy. It is also present in am-
niotic liquor and the placenta. A single subcu-
taneous injection of relaxin into a virgin guinea
pig during full oestrus produces relaxation of the
pelvic ligaments within eight to twelve hours.
Usually the amount of hormone obtained from
one gram of corpus luteum tissue of the sow is
sufficient to produce a positive result. This hor-
mone can affect changes in the pelvis only when
the animal is under the influence of oestrin. The
pelvic ligaments of a castrate female do not re-
spond to relaxin unless the animal is first put in
the proper physiological condition by the admin-
istration of oestrin. The symphysis pubis of a
normal male guinea pig cannot be relaxed due
to the fact that it differs anatomically from that
of the female. This condition can, however, be
changed to the female type through feminization
by oestrin or ovarian grafts, after which relaxa-
tion can be produced under the same conditions
as described for the female.

Relaxation is the result of a combined action of
oestrin and relaxin. It is a “one-two” reaction
in which oestrin must act first, followed by re-
laxin. The relationship between oestrin and re-
laxin is a qualitative one, that is, large doses of
oestrin do not seem to inhibit or intensify the
action of relaxin.

The mucifying hormone. The vaginal mucosa
of rats and mice is changed during pregnancy to
a mucus secreting type which apparently serves
to lubricate the birth canal at parturition. This
development can be produced in castrate animals
by corpus luteum extracts and is due to a spe-
cific hormone which, as far as known, takes part

in no other reaction. Though the complete dis-
tribution of this substance is not fully known, if
has, however, been extracted from other tissues
such as foetal membranes and also from urine.
The mucifying hormone acts in conjunction with
oestrin in producing its effect. The vaginal mu-
cosa must first be built up by oestrin before the
mucifying substance can act. This is then also
a “one-two” reaction in which oestrin must pre-
cede the mucifying factor, but the relationship
between the two hormones is a quantitative one
in that oestrin in sufficient doses to produce
oestrum prevents the action of the mucifier.

Corporin. A third hormone of the corpus lu-
teum, corporin or progestin, promotes such re-
actions of the uterus as development of decidual
tissue, formation of the pseudopregnant con-
dition in the uterus of rabbits, preservation of
young in the uterus after castration, and the for-
mation of a premenstrual endometrium in the
uterus of castrate monkeys. The physiological
factors governing these uterine reactions seem to
be the same, and so they can be illustnated by one
or two examples.

(1) The pseudopregnant or progestational con-
dition in the uterus of rabbits depends on a quan-
titative balance between oestrin and corporin.
The reaction may be thrown in either direction by
dosage, that is, a large dose of oestrin will masikc
the action of a small dose of corporin, while the
reverse is also true. (2) A subthreshold dose
of oestrin aids the action of a threshold dose of
corporin when the treatment is continued for a
long period. (3) A given dosage of oestrin may
mask the action of a given dosage of corporin, but
if the dosage of corporin is increased the same
amount of oestrin does not inhibit corporin but
enables corporin to preserve the progestational
picture longer than it otherwise could if given
alone.

(1) Neither corporin or oestrin when given
alone can produce a typical premenstrual endo-

Aucust 22, 1931 ] THE

COLLECTING

NET 231

metrium in the uterus of castrate monkeys. (2)
The follicular hormone (oestrin) must first pro-
mote growth of the endometrium and the corpus
luteum hormone (corporin) modifies this struc-
ture into the premenstrual condition. (3) It isa
“one-two” reaction in which the two hormones
must have a quantitative relationship to each
other. (4) Oéestrin inhibits menstruation, while
corporin does not. (5)Oestrin may be injected
in large doses (100 rat units or more daily) for
long periods (over 30 days) without producing
menstruation, but bleeding is precipitated if the
dosage is lowered materially or discontinued. This

bleeding, however, is not from a typical premen-
strual endometrium but is due to necrosis of an
endometrium of a follicular hormone type. (6)
Oestrin stimulates mitotic activity in the uterine
glands while corporin does not. (7) Corporin
produces swelling of the cells of the uterine
glands, contributing, we think, to their coiling.
The three hormones which have been extracted
from the corpora lutea of the sow produce spe-
cifie physiological reactions which can be used
as end points for their quantitative standardiza-
tion, and as they are chemically different it is
possible to isolate them by chemical procedures.

OSCILLOGRAPHIC STUDY OF THE CARDIAC GANGLION OF
LIMULUS POLYTHEMUS
Dr. PIERRE RIJLANT
Professor of Physiology, Solvay Institute for Physiology, University of Brussels

Indirect evidence as to the neurogenic origin
of the heart beat in Limulus polyphemus has
been brought out by Carlson (1904). Studying
the electrocardiogram of Limulus obtained with a
string galvanometer, Hoffman (1911) showed the
oscillatory character and supposed that this was
due to an oscillatory discharge of the ganglion,
tetanizing the heart muscle. Garrey (1912) veri-
fied the findings of Hoffman and studied the mod-
ification of the normal oscillatory activity under
the influence of changes in temperature and of
drugs; he does not. however, consider the con-
traction of the heart of Limulus to be of tetanic
character. But Nukada (1918), working on the
heart of Limulus longispina could not find, in
normal condition, an oscillatory discharge and
described an electrical activity similar to that of
the heart of vertebrates. Hoshin (1925) and Du-
buisson (1930) agreed with this conception and
more recently Monnier and Dubuisson, using a
cathode ray oscillograph similar to the one of
Erlanger and Gasser. They also admitted that
the origin of the heart beat was not in the car-
diac ganglion but in the muscle itself and that,
under normal conditions, no conduction could be
detected, the heart contracting simultaneously in
all its parts.

The disagreement between physiologists as
to the neurogenic or myogenic origin of the
heart beat in Limulus is due to the fact
that no direct evidence whatever has been
brought as to the spontaneous activity of
the cardiac ganglion. There is even disagree-
ment as to the nature of the electrical wave in the
heart muscle. This is due to the low value of
the action potentials in Limulus. No string gal-
vanometer can record the potentials accurately,
and the cathode ray oscillographs used were not
adapted to work on a spontaneous reacting tissue.

For these reasons I made a cathode ray oscil-

lograph outfit (autumn, 1930) giving continuous
records at constant speeds which can be adapted
between one and five hundred centimeters per
second, and having a sensitivity up to one micro-
volt for two millimeters’ deflection. For the actual
experiments a sensitivity of five microvolts per
millimeter is used with a balanced amplifier, re-
sistance coupled, amplifying 560,000 times. The
experiments on Limulus were performed either in
the Solvay Institute for Physiology in Brussels,
on Limulus sent over in the Spring of 1930 from
the Woods Hole laboratory, or in the Marine
Biological Laboratory this summer.

The records obtained show the oscillatory char-
acter of the electrocardiogram of Limulus; us-
ually a very important initial wave followed by
ten to thirty small waves are obtained, the whole
length of the complex being 1.2 seconds. When
the vessels are tied off or the heart is distended by
blood or air, this activity is superimposed on a
very slow single wave analagous to the well-
known “deformation potential” in any living sys-
tem irregularly distended. This corresponds, cor-
rections of their records being made, to the find-
ings of Hoffman and Garrey. Lack of sensitivity
in their methods prevented Nukada and Dubuis-
son from finding oscillatory oscillograms.

In some experiments on intact animals it is
possible to show an electrical activity independent
of the heart activity but of the same average
rhythm. This is probably due to the activity of
the auricle commonly called pericardium in Lim-
ulus.

To study the pace-maker in the heart two cath-
ode ray oscillographs are needed, the deflections
being registered: simultaneously on the same film.
Two pairs of independent electrodes are con-
nected to the tissue in experiment, the poten-
tials amplified through amplifiers and sent into
two cathode ray oscillographs. When one oscil-

232

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vou. VI. No. 49

lograph registers the activity of the cardiac
ganglion and the second one the activity of the
muscle, under all conditions the nervous activity
starts before the muscular activity. Nowhere is
it possible to find a muscular region active before
the corresponding part of the ganglion becomes
active.

Hoffman, Nukada,; and Garrey made unsuc-

cessful attempts to register the activity of the
ganglion. A few months ago, Heimbecker des-
cribed an action potential in the cardiac ganglion
of Limulus as “scattered volleys of low potential
which increase in frequency, number and ampli-
tude.” That description does not correspond in
any of its points to the action potential of the
cardiac ganglion of Limulus polyphemus and is
due to the fact that the method used by that au-
thor does not give objective information about
complex waves starting spontaneously.

When the cardiac ganglion is completely iso-
lated from the body and connected to the osci!-
lograph, periodic changes in potential lasting 1.2
seconds and separated by periods of quiescence of
2 seconds are observed. Each of these potential
changes is composed of a series of waves. Three
different types of activity are obtained: 100 to
200 fast waves; 10 to 30 slow waves; or s'mul-
taneously fast and slow waves. The maximum
action potential obtained is 150 to 200 microvolts
while the normal value is 100 microvolts.

Under normal conditions the activity starts in
the region corresponding to the fifth segment and
is conducted up and down the ganglion at an
average speed of 75 centimeters per second. This
agrees with the measurements of Carlson, Ed-
wards and Pond. Both rapid and slow waves
are conducted throughout the whole ganglion.
These experiments show that the ganglion activity
is not due to a reflex stimulation by distention of
the muscular part of the heart, as there is no
muscle present in these experiments, but to a
local nervous automatism.

In a further series of experiments I have
stdied the neuro muscular junction; the gang-
lion is completely dissected out with the first mus-
cular segment remaining attached, the other seg-
ments being destroyed. Electrodes are put on the
muscle and on the nerve in the second segment
and connected to two oscillographs. The records
show that the action potential appears in the nerve
50 s * before it starts in the muscle. Corrections
being made for the conduction time in the nerve
between the leading off electrodes and the neuro-
muscular junction, the delay at that junction is
about 30 s under normal conditions but can in-
crease to 200 s before complete block occurs.
Curare (1%) does not affect the junction, but

a: and ephedrin produce block. A rise
* > This symbol indicates ‘“‘sigma”’.

in temperature decreases the delay at the junction.

Stimulation of the isolated ganglion by single
induction shocks produces either single waves or
oscillatory waves. Small stimuli produce single
waves; two types are observed: either of short
duration ¢ * 10s or of long, up to 80s. The os-
cillatory waves are made by slow or fast waves
or by both. When threshold break shocks pro-
duce an oscillatory wave, the corresponding make
shocks produce either a single wave or a very
short oscillatory ecmplex. The length of the os-
cillatory complex increases with the strength of
stimulus to a limit equal to the length of a normal
spontaneous complex, but decreases when the
interval between stimulus and the preceding beat
decreases. The absolute refractory phase for the
preduction of an oscillatory discharge is about
half the normal length of a discharge, the relative
refractory phase, as regards the length of the
complex lasts about two seconds. The height of
the oscillatory wave does not change when the
strength of stimulus is modified; the height of a
single wave is proportional to the stimulus up to
a limit. The refractory phase for single waves
is very short and less than five s. At frequencies
of stimulation of 100 D. V. per second signs of
fatigue appear and the height of the single waves,
either fast or slow, diminishes.

Single waves can be obtained without disturb-
ing the normal spontaneous rhythm of the gang-
lion. Oscillatory waves delay the following spon-
taneous beat. Similar results can be obtained
when the efferent electrodes are put on the muscle
and the stimulus applied to the ganglion. These
experiments show that the ganglion has two dif-
ferent types of nerve fibers, one giving fast
waves, the other slow waves. It shows, also,
that when certain ganglionic cells are stimulated
the waves become oscillatory. This seems to in-
dicate that besides the slow and fast motor nerve
fibers the ganglion contains “‘cells of association”
responsible for the oscillatory discharge.

When conduction is impaired so that gangli-
onic cells become isolated from the central
part of the ganglion, a new automatism arises.
The rhythm is very regular. Single waves
eppear at ia constant speed varying in different
experiments from 50 to 900 per minute. ne
smaller the group of cells, the higher is
the speed obtained. When conduction changes,
these isolated beats can be gradually mixed
up with the normal slow complex. It is
possible to show progressive passage from the
normal oscillatory wave to the rapid single wave.
A single wave can determine in a group of gang-
lionic cells the start of a new impulse which will
travel in a direction opposite to the initial wave.
These reflected waves can occur either at isolated
* This symbol indicates “plus or minus.”

wore

Cele i ee eee aa ten

Set Gn POE Ae me

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 233

groups of cells in the anterior segments | or II,
or in the central segments. Any of these waves
can be conducted to the muscle and determine a
corresponding action potential in it. Slow waves
produce slow potential in the muscle, fast waves
fast potential changes in muscle. This indicates
that there are probably two distinct muscular sys-
tems in the heart of Limulus, one slow and one
fast. Nukada has described the microscopic
structure of two muscular systems in the heart of
Limulus.

In a last series of experiments I have tried to
investigate why the ganglionic activity is oscilla-
tory. When electrodes are put on the isolated
nerve in segment V (pace-maker) and in segment
II, the two waves obtained are similar. If be-
tween the two pairs of electrodes the nerve is
modified either by compression or by drugs, the
activity of segment V is not modified, iit the
waves obtained in segment II are progressively
modified. If the initial complex showed 100 fast
waves and 15 slow waves, the fast waves pro-
gressively diminish in number, the slow waves
diminish in amplitude. Conduction can be mod-
ified so that only one fast wave, the first one, is
conducted. At that moment the nerve cells in
segment I start beating spontaneously at their
own fast rhythm. This shows that the whole
normal complex arises in the center of the gang-

lion and is conducted to the periphery. It also
shows that the normal complex inhibits the fast
automatism of isolated ganglionic cells.

In one single ganglion two or more oscillatory
waves of normal shape and length can exist sim-
ultaneously without modifying one another, and
be conducted to some extent. When conduction
is slightly modified in the ganglion, different cen-
ters of automatism, elaborating a complete normal
complex, can exist simultaneously. The intricate
form of the oscillogram of the cardiac ganglion
of Limulus is not due to the ganglion as a whole
but to some of its ganglionic groups. I assume
that in the ganglion there are different systems of
association cells, each of these being able to elal-
orate a normal complex and to inhibit the funda-
mental fast automatism of the isolated ganglion
cells. By the action of drugs it is possible to iso-
late in each of these complexes the slow and fast
waves, which indicates that either the fast or slow
motor components can be inhibited without mod-
ifying the characteristics of rhythm and duration
of the association complex and corroborates our
working hypothesis. In the cardiac ganglion of
Limulus, frequency and length of the spontaneous
activity are regulated by a system of association
cells independent of the activity of the slow and
fast motor cells.

SURFACE TEMPERATURE AND THE RADIATION OF HEAT FROM
THE HUMAN BODY
Dr. Eucene F. DuBots
Professor of Medicine, Cornell University Medical College, Medical Director, Russell Sage
Institute of Pathology.

It is generally stated in the literature that the
white human skin acts almost like a perfect black-
body radiator and that the amount of heat radiat-
ed from the surface can be used as a measure ot
the surface temperature. Some work on malarial
chills performed in association with D. P. Barr
in 1917 led us to doubt both of these assumptions.
Last year Drs. W. S. McClellan, H. M. Halcro
Wardlaw and the writer investigated this subject
using the respiration calorimeter of the Russell
Sage Institute of Pathology. The calorimeter de-
termines the heat lost by vaporization by col-
lecting the water vapor in a sulphuric acid bottle.
The heat lost by radiation, convection and conduc-
tion is all collected by a stream of cool water flow-
ing through pipes in the top of the calorimeter.
Rubner has estimated that a man loses about 44
per cent. of his heat through radiation and 31
per cent. through convection. Conduction plays
a minor role. It is difficult to separate these
channels of heat loss.

According to Newton’s law of cooling the heat
loss by radiation and convection by one body to
another surrounding it is proportional to the tem-

perature difference between the two. This is
quite accurate for small temperature differences
and we need not concern ourselves with the more
complicated formulas when we are dealing with
human subjects. Our experiments were per-
formed on two normal men who lay naked in
the calorimeter at a temperature of 25°C. The
rectal temperature was measured by means of an
electrical resistance thermometer and the skin
temperatures were read in 17 spots using a resis-
tance thermometer devised by Mr. G. F. Soder-
strom.

In the first experiment the subject ““D” had an
average skin temperature of about 33°C. at the
start. During the first hour he was quiet. He
felt cool but did not shiver and he lost about 70
calories that hour by radiation and convection.
During the next short interval we measured the
surface temperature and found that it had dropped
about one degree. He then started the second
experimental period and tried to exercise just
enough to keep the surface temperature constant.
It so happened that he was successful and main-
tained the average skin temperature almost ex-

234 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 49

actly at 32°. His mild exercise had of course
increased his heat production and the heat loss
by radiation and conduction rose from 70 to 81
calories per hour. In other words the skin av-
eraged half a degree colder the second hour and
yet it eliminated 16 per cent. more heat.

The second experimental subject “W” did not
show as much drop in skin temperature and his
mild exercise in the second period warmed him
so much that the average skin temperatures were
almost exactly the same for the two hours. In
the first period he lost about 60 calories by radia-
tion and convection and in the second period with
the same temperature he lost about 78 calories.

These two experiments show that under special

conditions heat loss is not proportional to surface
temperature. A review of the large number of
calorimeter experiments that have been performed
on patients with fever supports this statement. It
is true that the calorimeter measures radiation
and convection together but there is no reason to
assume that convection is independent of surface
temperature. In the case of radiation it is quite
probable that the skin does not act as a perfect
black-body radiator but possesses the power of
changing its permeability for radiation. It is
quite possible that the true physiological surface
lies in the deeper layers of the skin or in the
subcutaneous tissue and that the outer layers of
the skin resemble a suit of clothes.

THE ACTION OF THE COMMON CATIONS ON THE PROTOPLASMIC
VISCOSITY OF AMOEBA
Dr. L. V. HEILBRUNN

Associate Professor of Zoology,

Four cations are common to living substance.
They are found in most types of living cells, and
biologists are agreed that their presence in these
cells is of great importance to the vital machin-
ery. These ions are sodium, potassium, calcium,
and magnesium. There is a huge literature con-
cerning the effect of the individual ions on vari-
ous types of living systems. Muscle physiologists,
plant physiologists, students of medicine and of
agriculture, all have contributed important ex-
perimental observations. We know that a given
cation may show pronounced antagonistic effects
toward another or other cations. It is also known
that two of the cations, magnesium and potassi-
um, may have a pronounced anaesthetic action.

For the general physiologist, it is obviously im-
portant to know what physico-chemical effect or
effects the various cations may have on the proto-
plasm. In 1923 I was able to show that sodium
and potassium ions increased the viscosity of the
protoplasm of sea-urchin eggs and of Stentor,
whereas calcium and magnesium ions had the op-
posite effect. Similar results were obtained for
plant cells by Cholodny and by Weber and these
observations found an easy interpretation on the
basis of colloid chemical theory, if one assumed
that the protoplasmic micellae were positively
charged. However, in 1926, Chambers and Rez-
nikoff, in studying the effect of the common ca-
tions on the protoplasm of Amoeba dubia, con-
cluded that sodium and potass‘um made the
protoplasm more fluid, i. e. less viscous, and that
calcium and magnesium had the opposite effect.
These opinions were based partly on evidence
gained from micro-dissection, but apparently more
on the fact that in sodium and potassium solu-
tions the granules or crystals of the amoeba were
observed to fall through the protoplasm.

University of Pennsylvania

It is of course possible that the micellae of am-
oeba protoplasm are charged differently from
those of the other types of protoplasm mentioned
previously and that sodium and potassium do ac-
tually produce a liquefaction in Amoeba dubia. In
order to test this point, a series of centrifuge
tests was planned on specimens of Amoeba dubia
immersed in solutions of sodium, potassium, mag-
nesium, iand calcium chloride. These tests were
performed by Miss Kathryn Daugherty. She
made a long series of experiments in each case,
and her results show conclusively that sodium and
potassium solutions increase the protoplasmic vis-
cosity, and that calcium and magnesium decrease
it. On the average there is a 41% increase in the
sodium chloride solution, a 21% increase in the
potassium chloride, and decreases of 35 and 32%
in calcium and magnesium chloride solutions re-
spectively. These findings are in accord with the
older work on other types of protoplasm, and
they likewise favor the view that the protoplas-
mic micellae of amoeba protoplasm bear a pos-
itive charge. During the past winter, Mr. Kat-
suma Dan has done some cataphoresis experi-
ments with amoeba which also favor this view.

The fall of crystals which Chambers and Rez-
nikoff observed in potassium chloride solutions !s
due to stoppage of movement rather than to any
change in the viscosity of the protoplasm. The
crystals of Amoeba dubia are large and they fall
readily whenever the amoeba stops moving. In
sodium chloride solutions at room temperatures,
we have never observed any fall of crystals.
However, at 30°, amceboid movement ceases in
sodium chloride solutions and the crystals fall.

The discussion so far has concerned Amoeba
dubia. \Vhen this amoeba is centrifuged at slow
speeds, practically all of the crystals move through

;
t
;
|
:
H
j
|

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET

235

the cell. On the other hand, when Amoeba pro-
teus is centrifuged at slow speeds, only the crys-
tals in the interior of the amoeba move, and those
in the outer cortex or plasmagel remain as they
were. But the crystals in the plasmagel can also be
moved if the amoeba be centrifuged for longer
times at considerably greater centrifugal speeds.
The length of time required for the crystals of
the plasmagel to move into half the cell when the
amoeba is subjected to a given centrifugal force
is called the ‘‘centrifugal value”. For reasons
which cannot be gone into here, this value is
not an exact measure of the viscosity of the
plasmagel, but it can at least be stated that high-
er centrifuge values indicate higher viscosities,
and lower centrifuge values lower viscosities.
When Amoeba proteus is immersed in dilute
solutions of potassium salts the centrifuge value
becomes markedly diminished, so that it is only
a small fraction of the normal. In these dilute
solutions of potassium salts, the amoeba is com-
pletely anaesthetized. It seems fair to conclude
that the anaesthetic action of the potassium ion is
in some way associated with this pronounced
liquefying action. The magnesium ion causes an

almost complete stoppage of movement of
Amoeba proteus; it is only by _ observing
the amoeba for minutes at a time that

any movement can be detected. In dilute so-
lutions of magnesium chloride the centrifuge val-
ue of the plasmagel is reduced to 68% of its nor-
mal value. Both magnesium and potassium an-
aesthetize and both liquefy the plasmagel. These
observations are in excellent agreement with cur-
rent theories of amoeboid movement. They also
give support to the theory that anaesthesia is as-
sociated with a Jiquefaction of the protoplasm, a
theory which I proposed some years ago.

The sodium ion has but little effect on the cen-
trifuge value of the plasmagel. Its only action is
to cause a slight decrease in the value. As might

be expected, amoebae immersed in sodium chlo-
ride solutions continue to move. The only one
of the common cations which causes an increase
in the centrifuge value is calcium, and the effect
of this ion is pronounced. The work of Pantin
and of Pollock has indicated that calcium is the
one cation which is essential for*amoeboid move-
ment and its specific action in stiffening the plas-
magel is particularly interesting in this connection.

Numerous experments have been performed on
the effect of combinations of cations on the plas-
magel of Amoeba proteus.. Indeed every possible
combination has been tried. It will not be pos-
sible to consider all these experiments, but it
should be pointed out that the liquefying action
of potassium and magnesium is antagonized by
calcium, and that a trace of this element may
exert a very powerful effect.

Our experiments have shown certain effects
of individual cations on the interior protoplasm
of Amoeba dubia, and very different effects of
the same ions on the outer protoplasm or plasma-
gel of Amoeba proteus. It is not practicable to
study the plasmagel of Amoeba dubia, nor is it
practicable to study the viscosity of the interior
protoplasm of Amoeba proteus. It seems a fair
assumption, however, that the two amoebae are
essentially similar in their behavior toward the
common cations. It is fortunate that we have the
two forms, one of which can be used for a study
of the interior, the other for a study of the cor-
tex. Our study of the interior indicates that this
protoplasm behaves toward the common cations
like a positively charged suspension, The cor-
tex is very different. Calcium tends to solidify or
stiffen it, magnesium and especially potassium
have the opposite effect. The anaesthetic action
of magnesium and potassium ions has always been
a great mystery; their behavior fitted in with no
one of the theories of anaesthesia. Perhaps our ex-
periments may throw some light on this mystery.

THE MECHANISM OF BACTERIOTROPIN ACTION
Dr. BALtpurin LUCKE
Laboratory of Pathology, University of Pennsylvania

The experiments here reported were made in
collaboration with Drs. Mudd, McCutcheon,
Strumia, who are equally responsible for the re-
sults.

Leucocytes ordinarily take up living bacteria
only to a slight degree. When, however, bacteria
are treated with specific immune serum they are
readily phagocytized. The substance or substanc-
es in serum which promote phagocytosis are
termed bacteriotropins.

We have studied the relation between phago-
cytosis and certain properties of the bacterial sur-
face, namely, cohesiveness, electric charge and

wettability. The bacteria used were various spe-
cies of living tubercle bacilli; the phagocytic cells
were exudative rabbits’ leucocytes; the immune
sera were prepared by injecting rabbits with the
micro-organisms studied. In the experiments bac-
teria were treated with serial dilutions of immune
sera and rotated in a Robertson agitator with
leucocytes; the degree of phagocytosis was de-
termined from the number of leucocytes which
had engulfed bacteria in a given time. Mean-
while, the effect of immune sera on cohesiveness
of bacteria was studied by the agglutination and
resuspension reactions; the effect on surface

236 THE COLLECTING NET

charge was calculated from the cataphoretic ve-
locity. The effect on the wetting properties was
determined by suspending bacteria in an oil-water
interface; before interaction with serum the
micro-organisms used readily pass into the oil;
after interaction they resist passing into the oil.

The results of this first series of experiments
may be summarized as follows: Sera reacting
with bacteria have increased phagocytosis, caused
agglutination and increased cohesion of bacteria,
decreased the bacterial surface charge, and altered
the surface from one readily wet by oil to one
wet by water. The changes in these surface
properties and in phagocytosis are, in general, of
corresponding degree. Alternatively stated, sera
which have reacted with bacteria so as to cause
increased cohesion, decreased surface charge, and
change in wettability, have effected a correspond-
ing increase in phagocytosis.

In the next group of experiments we studied
the alterations of surface properties of bacteria
and of phagocytosis during the course of active
immunization. Tests have been conducted peri-
odically with the sera of rabbits under active im-
munization and with different strains of tubercle
bacilli. Again a close correspondence between in-
tensities of surface reactions and of phagocytosis
Was apparent. From these experiments the con-
clusion may be drawn that both surface reactions
and tropin effects are due to the deposit of a cer-
tain substance or substances contained in im-
mune serum on the bacterial surface.

In the next group of experiments immune sera
were fractionated into their globulin and albumin
fractions. It was found that solutions of the
globulin fractions possess essentially the same

properties as bacteriotropic sera. The properties

of the globulin fractions were now further in- .

vestigated by studying the iso-electric point of

bacteria sensitized with increasing concentrations ~
of serum or of its globulin fractions. It was found .

that the iso-electric point of the bacteria so treat-

ed is shifted progressively toward a zone lying ©
between pH 5.5-5.8. This is somewhat above the ~

iso-electric point of normal serum globulin.

In the next experiments various proteins (egg-
albumin, edestin, etc.) were adsorbed on small
collodion particles, and the effect of immune sera
and their protein fractions on phagocytosis and
on surface properties of these particles, was
studied. Essentially the same results were ob-
tained as in bacteria.

In the experiments summarized above poly-
morphonuclear leucocytes were used as the phago-
cytic cells. In the higher vertebrates there exist
two main kinds of mobile phagocytic cells, the
leucocyte and the large monocyte (macrophage).
The relative tropin effect upon these two kinds of
cells was investigated. No essential differences
were observed in phagocytic properties toward the
bacteria or particles used.

The general conclusion is drawn that the vari-
ous surface changes and increased phagocytosis
effected by immune sera are all consequences of
one underlying phenomenon, namely, the depos-
ition on the surface of, and the specific chemical
combination with, the antigen of an antibody pro-
tein contained in the globulin fraction of immune

sera. This globulin appears to possess physico-
chemical differences from the normal serum
globulin.

LIVING NERVE SPROUTS

Dr. Cart CASKEY SPEIDEL

Professor of Anatomy, University of Virginia Medical School

Although nerve cells and sheath cells have been
cultivated in vitro by various investigators and
the growth of nerve fibers observed, the forma-
tion of the myelin sheath has never been obtained
in artificial media. Preliminary observations on
frog tadpoles convinced me that it might be pos-
sible to watch the process of myelination by direct
observation of the transparent fin of living ani-
mals. Accordingly, individual nerve sprouts and
sheath cells were kept under daily observation for
long periods (a few days to several months), and
their activities correlated with the development
and growth of the myelin sheath.

After early development of the frog tadpole the
nerves of the tail fin are partly of the unmyelinat-
ed type and partly of the mixed type, including
both myelinated and unmyelinated fibers. A few

may be entirely of the myelinated type for a part
of their course. In the unmyelinated type, and
in the unmyelinated portion of the mixed type,
there may be distinguished under favorable con-
ditions ‘‘myelin-emergent” fibers and “non-myelin-
emergent” fibers.

A myelin-emergent nerve sprout differs fromr
a non-myelin-emergent fiber in its greater bias
toward myelin formation. The former in combi-
nation with a primitive sheath cell leads to the
formation of a new myelin segment, the latter
ordinarily does not. An exception to this is the
formation of the initial myelin segment on each
neurone.

The transfer of a primitive sheath cell to a
myelin-emergent fiber may be effected in a variety
of ways, such as: (a) from the unmyelinated por-

[ Vor. VI. No. 49

Ci DP ete

wr

>
=
:

,

Aucust 22, 1931 ] AMS,

COLEECDING

NET 237

tion of a mixed nerve to the accompanying mye-
lin-emergent sprout; (b) from a nearby, but
separate, unmyelinated nerve, following a tem-
porary anastomosis where the two nerves cross;
(c) from one nerve to the unmyelinated portion
of an adjacent nerve by way of an anastomosis,
followed by transference to the myelin-emerge xt
fiber accompanying the second nerve. In each of
these varieties, sheath cell migration may he in ua
distal or proximal direction, and multiplication
by mitosis may take place. Transfer from a
cranial nerve branch (dorsal branch of ramus
lateralis vagi) to a spinal nerve has also beea
seen. Myelin segment formetion has been
watched following each of the migration varieties
listed above. The transfer of a primitive sheath
cell in the reverse direction, i. e, from a myelin-
emergent fiber to a non-myelin-emergent fiber, is
quite rare. Transfer from one myelin-emergent
sprout to another, however, takes place.

Myelin formation proceeds from proximal to
distal, each new unit being added at the end of
the myelin line, but occasionally gaps are left be-
tween two segments. Such intersegmental lengtiis
of nerve fiber may become myelinated by the
process of intercalation of additional myelin seg-
ments. A fiber about to be myelinated presents
a characteristic thickening and becomes somewhat
more prominent optically. The earliest myelin
is formed in the vicinity of the sheath cell nu-
cleus. It grows from this center by continuous
extension in both directions (“nucleo-fugally”’).
One adult internodal segment genetically corre-
sponds to the zone influenced by one primitive
sheath cell.

Early unmyelinated nerves serve to direct in a
general way advancing myelin-emergent nerve
sprouts, ad to furnish them with primitive sheath
cells as a preliminary step to myelination. The
acquisition of primitive sheath cells by the sprouts
is greatly expedited by their movements in ex-
tension, retraction, branching, and the formation
of temporary anastomoses with adjacent fibers.
The early unmyelinated nerves which act as di-
rectives for the developing myelin line may be
compared to the preterminal plexuses (of Har-

rison) which are the forerunners of the final end
arborizations.

Young myelin segments grow both in diameter
and in length. Complete elimination of side
sprouts occasionally occurs as the myelin segment
becomes longer. Overproduction of myelin is
also frequently to be seen at the region of the
node of Ranvier. Long myelin segments may be
formed by end-to-end anatomosis of shorter seg-
ments accompanied by complete obliteration of
the intervening node of Ranvier. This is partly
responsible for the wide variation in length of
myelin segments. It also accounts for the pres-
ence of two sheath cells on ja single myelin seg-
ment. Occasionally, a portion of one segment
fuses with the segment next to it, and a new node
then develops. The formation of perpendicular
myelin units, either at a node of Ranvier or at a
nerve terminus, is essentially like that of the for-
mation of parallel myelin units.

The process of regeneration of a single myelin
segment following traumatic degeneration has
been observed in detail. Regeneration may occur
without preliminary sheath cell multiplication or
migration. Sprouts from myelinated fibers grow
into newly regenerated regions much less rapidly
than do sprouts from unmyelinated fibers.

Primitive sheath cells appear to aid nerve
sprouts in surmounting slight obstacles in the way
of free growth. Growth and extension of nerve
sprouts seem also to be stimulated by sheath cell
mitosis near the nerve terminus. Other observa-
tions include detailed movements of primitive
sheath cells in mitosis, extremes of variability in
primitive sheath cell migration, and the shifts in
position of mature sheath cells on myelin seg-
ments.

Many years ago in tissue cultures Harrison
saw nerve fibers grow out from nerve cells. Each
active outgrowing fiber was provided with a ter-
minal ameboid growth cone. I have been able to
find active growth cones in living tadpoles and,
under favorable conditions, to watch them for
long periods of time. A number of interesting
observations have already been made which bear
directly on certain problems of neurogenesis and
nerve regeneration.

HISTOLOGIC. EFFECT OF LIGATION OF THE VASA OF THE
SPLEEN OF THE ALBINO RAT
Dr. J. E. Kinprep
Associate Pr ofe ssor of Histology and Embryology, School of Medicine,
University of Virginia

The object of this investigation was to deter-
mine the fate of small lymphocytes entrapped in
the vasa and lymphatics of granulation tissue.
Maximow (’07) describes the transformation of
smiull lymphocytes into large lymphocytes and
thence into erythroblasts in the invading

vasa of the ligated kidney of the rab-
bit The erythroblasts subsequently mature
into normoblasts which usually do not
undergo further change. Jordan ('26) has

described changes of small lymphocytes into
erythroblasts in certain lymph nodes of the rabbit

238 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vo. VI. No. 49

and dog. According to Jordan the specific stimu-
li for the modification of the lymphocytes are
slow circulation in the medullary blood vessels,
and disjunction of the efferent lymphatics with
consequent relatively high concentration of car-
bon dioxide. This condition parallels those sug-
gested by Latta (’21) for the modifications of
lymphocytes into erythroblasts in Peyer’s patches
of the rabbit. Latta emphasizes as necessary for
the changes: closeness of association of the lym-
phocytes to the blood stream, slowness of the
current in the blood vessels, and thinness of the
vascular walls. Normal erythrocytopoiesis in the
bone marrow is thought by Mieschler (93) and
Dallwig et al. (’15) to be dependent upon a defi-
nite concentration of CO» in this region. If the
COsz is increased the production of red blood cor-
puscles is speeded up.

Histologic conditions following ligation of the
kidney (Jordan, Kindred and Paine, °31) of the
rat were almost identical with those suggested by
these investigators. These conditions did not ob-
tain immediately, but only after the autolytic and
heterolytic processes characteristic of ligated or-
gans in vivo had occurred. The newly formed vasa
were thin-walled, having only an endothelial wall.
The lymphocytes were present in the vicinity of
the vessels and from what is known of the chem-
istry of autolysis and heterolysis it is probable
that there was a higher concentration of COs in
this region than is normal. Nevertheless, the lym-
phocytes differentiated only into plasma cells
(Marschalko type) or grew in size into large cells
resembling the hemocytoblasts of bone marrow.
These changes were extravascular. No intra-
vascular evidences of erythrocytopo‘esis such
as Maximow described for ligated kidney of the
rabbit were obtained. Since it is conceivable that
the products from autolysis and heterolysis of the
kidney may have contained some substances which
inhibited the action of the erythrocytogenic po-
tentiality of the lymphocyte I undertook the study
of ligated spleens.

The normal parenchyma of the spleen of the
rat has the histologic structure and cellular con-
tent characteristic of the mammalian spleen with
the addition of megakaryocytes and foci of eryth-
rocytopoiesis. T he cellular elements are support-
ed by a stroma of reticulum fibers. The capsule
is a thin fibro-elastic layer in which smooth mus-
cle cells are present in addition to lymphatics and
fibroblasts. | After twenty-four hours’ ligation the
only viable (histologic) part of the spleen is the
capsule and a narrow subjacent layer of macro-
phages and small lymphocytes evidently kept alive
by their closeness to peritoneal fluid. Occas‘onal-
ly bacteria accumulate in vast numbers in the sub-
capsular region. These hacteria resemble morpho-
logically the germ of infectious anemia (Barton,

ella muris) in rats. A devastating anemic effect
by this species of bacteria follows splenectomy.

After three days of ligation a layer of neutro-
philic granulocytes is present on the surface of the
capsule and during the next few days these gran-
ulocytes penetrate the capsule and spread over
the periphery of the central necrotic parenchyma.
Exactly similar histologic conditions are present
in ligated kidneys after the same lapse of time.

At the end of one week the capsule is much
thicker than before and is usually adherent to
some neighboring organ such as the kidney, pan-
creas or stomach. Many fibroblasts are in mitosis
and the growing tips of blood and lymphatic
capillaries are present. They are entering the
capsule at right angles to its surface. The lym-
phatics are filled with small lymphocytes and the
blood capillaries with small lymphocytes, red
blood corpuscles and neutrophilic granulocytes.
Many monocytes and macrophages are present be-
tween the capsule and the neutrophils. The pro-
ducts of heterolysis of the neutrophils are ap-
parently stimulating the fibroblasts and endotheli-
um just as they do in tissue cultures accordinz
to Carrel (22).

The critical time of the experiment is reachel
during the fifth week after ligation. At this time
the capsule is very thick. Fibr oblasts, collagenous
fibers,
numerous. Not only are the lymphatics filled
with small lymphocytes but lymphocytes of all
sizes are present external to the capillaries and
lymphatics. In addition to the lymphocytes, there
are present many so-called plasma cells of Mars-
chalko and all stages between them and small
lymphocytes. From the study of sections of
spleens ligated for two to four weeks it is con-
cluded that there is a continuous emigration of
small lymphocytes from the lymphatics into the
surrounding extravascular area. Here under the
environmental cond‘tions present these small 1ym-
phocytes are stimulated to change into large lym-
phocytes and so-called plasma cells. No such
changes of small lymphocytes have been ob-

served in the capillaries or in the lym-
phatics There observed cytologic changes
are identical in time and place with those

in ligated kidneys The so-called plasma cells are

characterized by a polarity of the nucleus. The
chromatin is arranged in radiating blocks. The
cytoplasm is relatively great in amount 2s com-

pared with the nucleus and has a homogenous has-
ophilic tinctorial reaction. No vacuoles are pres-
ent in these cells. The margin is smooth and
ve-y sharp in contour. Immediately on the side
of the nucleus toward the greatest amount of
cytoplasm there is a small area which is distinctly
eorinephilic in reaction. This area passes with-
out sharp demarcation into the surrounding in-

blood capillaries and lymphatics are very |

.

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

iit COLLECTING NET

239

tensely basophilic cytoplasm. Many of these cells
show changes which grade into the Russell body
cells. The cells of this transitional series are
characterized by the essential characteristics of
the so-called plasma cells, but contain within the
cytoplasm one or more discrete globules which
have an intense eosinophilic reaction. When these
bodies are few and small they are usually spheri-
cal, but as they get larger they assume all sorts
of bizarre shapes. When the cells are full of
these bodies the nucleus is compressed and dis-
torted, but it still retains its characteristic chro-
matin pattern. None of these cells has been ob-
served in mitosis. From these facts it is con-
cluded that the Russell body cells are the end
results of the degenerative changes in small lym-

phocytes. The changes described above are only
intensified during the next five weeks so that by
the end of the tenth week there results an adeno-
fibrous mass enclosing a very small remnant of
the originally extensive necrotic parenchyma.
From these facts the conclusion is drawn that
the sequence of histologic change in the spleen
‘following ligation of its vasa are the same as in

the kidney under similar experimental con-
ditions. In both spleen and kidney the
different ation of the ‘small lymphocytes is

limited to the formation, extravascularly, of large
lymphocytes, possible abortive hemocytoblasts and
plasma cells of the Marschalko type. There is
no evidence of change of the small lymphocytes,
intravascularly, into erythroblasts.

AQUATIC MAMMALS—A DESCRIPTION OF A SPECIAL CELL TYPE
IN THE CEREBELLUM
Dr. WititAm H. F. Appison

Professor of Normal Histology and Embryology, University of Pennsylvania

In a histologic study of the cerebellar cortex in
a series of animals, I have noticed in certain
aquatic mammals conspicuous large cells. These
mammals include the harbor porpoise (Phocaena
communis), bottle-nosed porpoise (Tursiops
truncatus), sea lion (Eumetopias stelleri), mana-
tee (Manatus americanus), common seal (Phoca
vitulina) and whale (Balaenoptera sulfurea).
Three Phocaena brains were obtained in Woods
Hole through the courtesy of the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory and the United States Fish
Commission laboratory.

These cells usually occur singly in the granu-
lar layer or in the medullary layer, or in both.
Often two or three are seen in a folium. Their
shape is varied, but in general they are of two
forms: (1) narrow elongated, and (2) stellate
multipolar. The former often lie near the boun-
dary between the granular and medullary layers.
The latter lie more frequently in the middle of

the granular layer. In size they are often larger
than the Purkinje cells. Similar large cells were
reported by Obersteiner ('13) in the elephant
and whale.

The position of these cells is shared by several
other types of cells :—Golgi cells, type II; synar-
motic cells of Landau ('29) and Kesaunaité
(730) ; and the Golgi cells with long axones, des-
cribed by Ramon y Cajal. But none of these
cells attain the conspicuous size of the large cells
here described.

These aquatic mammals all have modified limbs
and specialized caudal and trunk musculature
adapted for swimming. The vestibular apparatus
is apparently large and well developed. The
weight of the cerebellum has a high ratio to the
entire brain weight. These animals are thus
characterized by great cerebellar development, and
in them there is seen a cell type which seems to be
an addition to the usual cerebellar mechanism.

SCIENTIFIC BOOK REVIEWS

The Vitamins. H.C. Sherman and S. L. Smith.
Second Edition. 1931. Chemical Catalog Com-
pany.

The theory of the function of vitamins in nu-
trition has barely a score of years behind it, but
what a rich and fascinating story it makes! One
is hardly justified in speaking of the discovery of
vitamins, which may be traced to the early nine-
teenth or even the eighteenth century, but the
realization of the existence of vitamins as dis-
tinct entities and of their paramount significance
in the life of the animal organism is a gift of the

biochemical science of the past few years only.
Fresh as the scientific knowledge of these elusive
vitamins is, the havoc wrought by their absence is
hoary with tradition. Especially, the mariner of
the era before the motor-propelled vessels felt se-
verely the scourge of the vitamin lack. In the
days of the picturesque clipper ships and in-
terminably long ‘voyages, it was scurvy, as much
as the fury of the ocean, which was the cause of
untold suffering and added tragedy to the heavy
lot of sea-faring men. On those long voyages
fresh food was, of course, out of the question and

240

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 49

the supplies furthermore were, of necessity, of the
kind which would neither spoil nor take up too
much space. The result was that scurvy flour-
ished, occasionally decimating the ship’s crew be-
fore it could reach its destination. No wonder
that this dreaded disease of the mariner caused
much concern; and even as far back as 1720, the
value of green vegetables, and especially the juices
of citrous fruits, was discovered in preventing
the occurrence of scurvy or in curing its victims.
Scurvy, however, was not merely the dread of the
ancient mariner. Even as recently as the World
War, at least one garrison capitulated because the
men defending the fortress were laid low by
scurvy, and the disease was quite prevalent in
prisons, asylums and similar institutions. If one
cannot be certain of the original benefactor of hu-
manity who discovered vitamins, or rather vita-
min rich foods, we are well familiar with those
who have been instrumental in establishing the
vitamin theory of nutrition. Foremost among
them is Prof. H. G. Hopkins who, in 1906, clear-
ly formulated the view that the animal body re-
quires a great variety of substances other than
protein, carbohydrate, fats and salts in order to
live. It must also be acknowledged that C. Funk,
who, in 1911, coined the name for these es-
sential dietary substances, recognized that their
absence may be responsible for a variety of dis-
eases. The extent of the growth of the subject
of vitamins to which Funk has given such a tre-
mendous impetus can be judged not only by exces-
sive popularity, which it unfortunately acquired,
but by the unusual volume of work it had in-
spired in laboratories all over the world. In the
valuable monograph of Sherman and Smith, the
second and revised edition of which we gladly
welcome, the bibliography alone occup‘es 175
printed pages, which is half the space occupied
by the text of the monograph (350 pages.) The
bibliography contains approximately 3500 titles
and, assuming that this list is exhaustive of the
studies on vitamins which have been published
for the last quarter of a century, this represents
an output of a new paper perhaps every two or
three days over that entire period. Undoubtedly,
the quality of the work produced at such a pro-
lific rate did not keep pace with the quantity;
nevertheless, it signifies both an intense interest
in as well as a deep importance of the subject of
vitamins. Sherman and Smith trace the growth
of the subject in all its details and ramifications.
From an original number of three, our knowl-
edge has expanded within a very few years to a
definite recognition of six different vitamins. And
if one reads the signs correctly, the “vitamin B”’
which has only recently been split into two sep-
arate entities may, in the near future, undergo
still further fractionation. In the case of a sub-

ject as young and interesting and vigorously
growing as that of the vitamins, a monograph, no
matter how comprehensive, soon becomes out of
date, and one can only be glad to see the second
edition of the splendid book by Sherman and
Smith in which the authors have conscientiously
revised the text to conform with the latest de-
velopment of this branch of biochemistry. No
student of nutrition, nay, one is tempted to say
no student of biology, can be without the aid of
this valuable monograph. —S. Morcutts.

A Synopsis of the United States Pharmacopocia
and National Formulary Preparations. H. J. Ful-
ler. P. Blakiston’s Son & Co., Inc. Philade!phia.

This little volume is one of unusual interest
and value to all students and practitioners of
medicine. In his preface, the author states: “It
is not intended to take the place of the Pharmaco-
poeia, National Formulary, or any of the we'l-
known recognized works on pharmacy, but is
rather intended to precede or supplement thes?
works, as well as the instruction given by the
teacher of pharmacy.”

As a matter of fact, this beok gives to the busy
practitioner or medical student the salient facts
regarding the sources, preparations and dosage
of all the best known drugs. Its style is clear and
its tables and index are unusually complete and
practical.

It is invaluable for ready and reliable reference,
and should be on the desk of every up-to-date
practitioner. —W. G. ScHAuFFLER, M.D,

Genetics and Eugenics. A Text-Book for Stu-
dents of Biology and a Reference Book for Ani-
mal and Plant Breeders. W. E. Castle. 4th
edition. plus 474 pp. 14 figs. 21 plates. 36 tables.
Harvard University Press. 1930.

This fourth edition of Castle’s presentation of
the problems and results of genetics is the latest
revised form of his book, first published in 1916.
There are four parts: (1) The biological basis
of genetics, which gives the data fundamental to
the discussion that follows; (2) The historical
development, showing the order in which ideas
have developed from the earliest recognition of
the problem of genetics; (3) The essential facts
and a presentation of selected and illustrative re-
sults so far obtained on both plants and animals;
and (4) Eugenics—the relation of these results
to the question of genetics in man and race better-
ment.

Chapters on biometry and on calculating of
Mendelian expectations are introduced, the in-
heritance of acauired characters and the hypothesis
of multiple factors cons’dered, and a_ hbibli-
ography of sixty pages is added. The hook ac-
complishes its purpose. —-H. H. Donatpson.

Aucust 22, 1931 }

THE COLLECTING NET

241

Hand-book of Anatomy. J. K. Young. Revised
by G. W. Miller. 7th revised edition. 1930. F. A.
Davis Company.

This volume presents human anatomy in syn-
optic form suitable for ready reference and re-
view. It contains a number of well-chosen illus-
trations. Perhaps the most valuable features are
the comprehensive diagrams of nerves and ar-
teries, and various tables. Surgical anatomy-and
dental anatomy are treated briefly.

—C. C. SpEIDEL.

Twins: Heredity and Environment. D. M.
Hirsch. 159 pp. 1930. Harvard University Press.
$2.00

This author, a psychologist and student of
Professor William McDougall, has collected data
on 58 pairs of dissimilar twins of the same sex
and 38 pairs of similar twins living in the same
homes and on 12 pairs of similar twins living in
dissimilar environments.

The sim‘lar or identical twins were selected (a)
on the basis of similarity of appearance, voice,
gait, expression, etc,; and (b) on the basis of
similar school work and general intelligence as
judged by the teachers of the twins. The d’s-
similar twins were selected on a similar two-fold
basis.

The author concludes that heredity is about five
times as important as environment in contributing
to the intelligence of the individual; about four
times as important in contributing to head length
and height; about twice as important in contrib-
uting to weight; and probably from two to four
times as important in contributing to impulsive
and emotional processes. :

To the reviewer Dr. Hirsch’s essay seems not
to be a very profound or convincing discussion.
The most valuable portions of the little book are
perhaps quotations from Newman, Muller, and
others. —WILLIAM L. DOLLEY, Jr.

Outlines of Zoology. J. Arthur Thomson, 8th
edition. 28 + 972 pp. 528 figs. Oxford Uni-
versity Press. 1929.

This admirable survey of the animal kingdom
from Amoeba to man is remarkable for the
wealth of information systematically arranged in
a volume of handy size. It contains essentially
the information that the beginning zoologist
should have, and the skillful use of three points
of type gives a sense of perspective that is im-
portant, especially in a work of this kind. In the
present edition the author has had the help of
his son, Dr. D. L. Thomson, in adding more
physiological material, and of Mr. R. M. Neill on
the structure and development of the mud-fishes.
The first six chapters deal in a general way w'th
physiology, morphology, palaeontology, the doc-
trine of descent, ete. Then follows an account

of each of the principal phyla, including general
characters, followed by descriptions of typical
forms of special interest, then classification, struc-
ture, life-history, ecology, and other topics, such
as parasitism and relation to disease. The illus-
trations are clear and significant, and for the most
part are original. The final chapters deal with
geographical distribution and the factors in or-
ganic evolution ; then follow test questions, an ex-
cellent list of books of reference, and an index.
—R. P. BicEtow.

Protoscan Parasitism of the Alimentary Tract:
Pathology, Diagnosis and Treatment, By Kenneth
M. Lynch, pp. xvii + 256. $3.75. 1930. The
Macmillan Company.

Doctor Lynch has written a handy book for
medical students, practitioners, and others con-
nected with medicine in special ways that make
them responsible parties in the diagnosis, treat-
ment, and prevention of protozoan infections.
The author’s aim to write an eminently practical
treatise has led him to omit, insofar as possible,
all technical details iand controversial questions
that might serve to confuse the medical man who
has had little or no training in Protozoology. Pos-
sibly he has gone a bit too fiar in this regard, es-
pecially in the introductory chapters. However,
omple references to the standard treatises as well
as to special papers are given, and to some of
these the reader undoubtedly will wish to refer
when he has finished Doctor Lynch’s outline. The
book should prove, for the audience to which it
is addressed, not only thoroughly useful but also
thought-provoking. —L. L. Wooprurr.

Elements of Water Bacteriology. By S.C. Pres-
cott and C. E. A. Winslow. Fifth edition. 1931.
pp. viii + 219. $2.50 John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

For more than a quarter of a century Prescott
and Winslow’s “Elements of Water Bacteriology”
has been a standard text in the field of sanitary
water analysis, and the present revised fifth
edition insures for the work further years of use-
fullness. The authors conservatively retain the
details of the older methods of water examination,
hut also introduce a precise account of the newer
procedures. | However, it is their hope that a
somewhat radical evaluation and simplification of
the laboratory processes involved may be found
possible in the near future. —L. L. Wooprurr.

The Soil and the Microbe. By Professors Sel-
man A. Waksman and Robert L. Starkey, pp xi
+ 260. $350. 1931. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

When one recalls that our knowledge of the
role of microorganisms in soil processes and plant
growth has developed chiefly in the past half
century, it is remarkable how large a body of in-
formation has already been accumulated. And
much of the most significant of this Dr. Waksman

242 Dit TOLER CRING NEG: [ Vor. VI. No. 49
and Dr. Starkey marshall briefly in ian inter- « general significance.”

esting and instructive manner in “The Soil and
the Microscope’, so that the reader obtains a
vivid picture not only of soil organisms and their
multitudinous physiological reactions, but also of
the relation of these processes to the origin and
development of soils, to the cycle of the elements
in nature, and to plant nutrition. The present
volume affords an excellent introduction to the
somewhat encyclopzedic “Principles of Soil
Microbiography” by the senior author, a world
authority in the field. —L. L. Wooprurr.

Textbook of General Biology. Review of

Textbook of General Biology. Waldo Shum-
way, viii + 361 pp. $3.00, John Wiley & Sons.

Professor Shumway has written a very inter-
esting and attractive textbook which ought to ap-
peal strongly to the beginning student. As he
says in the preface the “book has been written be-
cause of a feeling that there is a place for a
fresh survey of modern biology especially de-
signed for those who do not plan to specialize in
hotany or zoology. Biology, as the term is used
in this book, refers to those phenomena of life
which are common to both plants and animals.
No attempt is made to cover the field of Botany
and zoology even in outline form, but rather to
select from the wealth of illustrative material
offered by each, such facts and theories as have

The book begins with an account of the struc-
ture and activites of the frog. This is followed
immediately by a similar account of the wheat
plant. The next chapters may be said to deal
largely with the principles of biology. Three
chapters on the cell discuss its metabolism, be-
havior and reproduction. Then follow chapters
on “Heredity and the Gene,” “Ecology and the
Community,” “The Evolution of Species.” The
plant and animal kingdom are then taken up sys-
tematically. The book concludes with a chapter
on “Applied Biology.” Throughout the text the
physiological point of view is emphasized, ex-
planations are given of structures, and processes
are viewed from a physical-chemical point of
view. The book is printed in clear type, excel-
lently illustrated, and generally presents an in-
viting appearance—no small factor in an ele-
mentary text. A glossary includes “‘all technical
terms used in the text.”

The author states that it is his “‘a'm to write
for these to whom laboratory facilities are not
svailable. Accordingly, illustrations have beea
used freely to take the place of demonstrative
material. These art carefully labelled, and the
use of abbreviations has been avoided.” It ought
to be possible, nevertheless, to use the book in
courses where laboratory facilities are available
and labonatory werk required. _—J. W. Mavor.

REFORT OF COMMITTEES APPOINTED TO STUDY THE MATTER
OF NOMINATIONS OF OFFICERS AND TRUSTEES

To the Corporation and the Trustees of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory :

Your committees appointed to study the matter
of Nominations of Officers and Trustees submit
the following report and recommendations for
action by Trustees and Corporations :

(1.) After considering various methods by
which those engaged in instruction might be rep-
resented upon the Board of Trustees, it is be-
lieved that the following action by the Corpora-
tion will be the best means of insuring such rep-
resentation: “The Corporation affirms its po-
sition that instruction is a fundamental part of
the work at the Laboratory and hence this work
should be adequately represented upon the Board
of Trustees.”

(2.) “That the Committee of the Corporation
for nomination of Trustees consist of five mem-
bers, of whom not less than two shall be non-
Trustee members of the Corporation, and not
less than two shall be Trustee-members of the
Corporation.”

(3.) “That on or about July first of each year,
the Clerk shall send a circular letter to each mem-
her of the Corporation giving the names of the

Nominating Committee and stating that this com-
mittee desires suggestions regarding nomina-
tions.”

(4.) “That the Nominating Committee shail
post the list of nominations at least one week in
advance of the annual meeting of the Corpora-
tion.”

(5.) “That no trustee shall be eligible for re-
election until one year after the expiration of the
term for which he was elected.”

(6.) The following changes in the By-laws
should be adopted to make the foregoing recom-
mendations effective.

Insert in Section I of the By-laws, as printed on
page 3 of the Report of the Laboratory for 1930,
after the sentence ending ‘eight Trustees to serve
four years,’’ a sentence as follows:

“No trustee shall be eligible for re-election until
one year after the expiration of the term for which
he was elected.”

Insert in Section I of the By-laws, as printed on
page 4 of the Report of the Laboratory for 1930,
after the sentence ending ‘‘as Trustee Emeritus for
life’, a sentence as follows:

“Any individual, who has served as a Trustee and
who has reached the age of seventy, may likewise
be elected a Trustee Emeritus.”

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

Hitt COLE CHING NE

243

The entire Section I, as amended, will then read:
“The annual meeting of the members shall be held
on the second Tuesday in August, at the Laboratory,
in Woods Hole, Mass., at 12 o’clock noon, in each
year, and at such meeting the members shall choose
by ballot a Treasurer and a Clerk to serve one year,
and eight Trustees to serve four years. No trustee
shall be eligible for re-election until one year after
the expiration of the term for which he was elected.
There shall be thirty-two Trustees thus chosen di-
vided into four classes, each to serve four years, and
in addition there shall be two groups of Trustees as
follows: (a) Trustees ex officio, who shall be the
President of the Corporation, the Director of the
Laboratory, the Associate Director, the Treasurer
end the Clerk; (b) Trustees Emeritus, who shall be
elected from the Trustees by the Corporation. Any
regular Trustee who has attained the age of seventy

years shall continue to serve as Trustee until the

next annual meeting of the Corporation, whereupon
his office as regular Trustee shall become vacant
and be filled by election by the Corporation and he
shall become eligible for election as Trustee Emer-
itus for life. Any individual, who has served as a

Trustee and who has reached the age of seventy,
may likewise be elected a Trustee Emeritus. The
Trustees ex officio and Emeritus shall each have the
same right to vote as the regular Trustees.

“The Trustees and officers shall hold tneir re-
spective offices until their successors are chosen and
have qualified in their stead.”

Although this matter is not strictly within the
province of the committees’ report, it is thought
desirable to call the attention of members of the
Corporation to the fact that all should avail them-
selves of the opportunity, which has always ex-
isted but which heretofore has been little used, of
bringing to the attention of the Executive Com-
mittee at any time matters which they consider of
importance to the Laboratory.

Signed W. C. Curtis, Chairman.
Committee of the Trustees:
Ivey Lewis, W. C. Curtis.
Committee of the Corporation:

Ivey Lewis, H. H. Plough, H. B. Goodrich, W,
C. Curtis.

ANNOUNCEMENT FOR THE COURSE IN PHYSIOLOGY
Dr. LAURENCE IRVING
Associate Professor of Physiology, University of Toronto

The course in physiology has been directed by
Dr. Amberson for two years. During that period
he has assembled a staff whose members are quite
in agreement as to the general plan of operation.
They look forward to a continuation of the work
together, but they realize that it may not always
he possible that one man can spare the time for
detailed plans and executive work for a number
of years. At the present time Dr. Amberson has
asked to be relieved from direction of the course
for next year in order to continue research work
in Germany.

Since the members of the teaching staff wish
to work together on the course in the future, they
have proposed that the direction might appropri-
ately rotate among them, allowing each member
to take a turn for a year. In this way the prob-
lem of organization and planning will be fresh
each year to the appointed chief and will allow
for the introduction of such new methods as he
may devise for development of the common pur-
pose.

An arrangement of this sort assumes in the staff
membership an expectation of continuity. For
next summer the five present members will re-
turn. Dr. W. R. Amberson, Dr. Philip Bard,
Dr. R. W. Gerard, Dr. Laurence Irving and Dr.
Margaret Sumwalt, with Dr. Irving as director
of the course.

It is too early to indicate the detailed program
for 1932, but the general plan will resemble that
used this summer. The following subjects will
be handled during the first four weeks of lab-
oratory work. (1) Electrical phenomena in liv-
ing and non-living systems (Dr. Amberson). (2)

The central nervous system of invertebrates and
fishes (Dr. Bard). (3) Tissue and cell respira-
tion (Dr. Gerard). (4) The acid-base equilibrium
in sea-water and tissues (Dr. Irving). (5) Per-
meability studies (Dr. Sumwalt). The subse-
quent period allows for two weeks further work
in any of the subjects which have become es-
pecially interesting to the student. If any student
develops a particular interest and aptitude in the
work and wishes to continue beyond the six
weeks formal allotment of time, he may go on
with any further investigation which is compatible
with the facilities available. The material and
equipment is quite adequate for qualified and
interested students to start with serious research,
and the members of the staff are glad to advise
and give assistance.

The first lectures will, as before, be given by
the staff in physiology to cover the subjects of
the laboratory offerings. After these lectures
special lecturers will be invited to present im-
portant physiological subjects into which their
research has given them special insight.

In making this announcement of the future
program it is important to mention our indebted-
ness to the lecturers who have given their time
and interest. We feel that it is an unusual privi-
lege to hear each physiological subject presented
with the vitality and penetration that character-
ize men dealing with their favorite subject. We
have also to acknawledge the constant support and
good advice of the director of the laboratory. It
seems that these acknowledgements properly be-
long in the announcement because we regard the
previous experience as a promise for the future.

244 AN GUE,

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 49

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Vitel) (CERN, Gano noon bab oD UOoOO dduopUeD Editor

Assistant Editors

Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown
Annaleida S, Cattell

BIOLOGICAL ABSTRACTS

Printed matter concerning Biological Abstracts
has been distributed to the workers at Woods
Hole during the past two weeks and is still avail-
able. This includes the comprehensive report of
the conference held in Washington, March 7,
1931, a review by Professor Frank R. Lillie, and
other literature. The Union of American Bio-
logical Societ’es, which is principal sponsor for
the Abstracts, is directing a program designed
to inform the biologists of America and other
countries regarding them. More subscriptions
are of prime importance at the present
time in order that abstracts already accumulated
may be printed more promptly, and in order that
the interest of biologists may be evident to those
who must be asked to provide the subsidy neces-
sary for editorial work. Under the present
scheme, the subsidy pays edito~ial costs, the sub-
scriptions pay for printing, and the Union of
American Biological Societies pays for current
advertising and similar overhead. At a cost of
$9.00 ia year to the individual and $15.00 to the
institution, no one need be without access to this
comprehensive key to biological literatu~e. While
older investigators may find most of the litera-
ture of their special fields coming to them as re-
prints, there remain many papers in correlated
fields, and other subject matter that must be cur-
rently examined. Younger investigators have no
such advantage. For them the literature of even
a special field must seem overwhelming. It was
to meet these situations and to provide an instru-
ment for. biological science comparable with
Chemical Abstracts that this great co-operative
undertaking was initiated. Only a little more
support is needed to realize the completeness and
promptness that are the goal in such an enter-
prise. If that which is almost within our grasp
can be attained, American biologists will have
created an “institution” that will be second only
to the Marine Biological Laboratory as an aid to
research. = (CAG.

eter er

INDEX TO CONTENTS
(Continued)
Histologic Effect of Ligation of the Vasa
of the Spleen of the Albino Rat,

Dr. J. E. Kindred
Aquatic Mammals—(A Description of a

Special Cell Type in the Cerebellum),

Dr. William H. F. Addison............. 239
Scientific Book ReviewS..........+.+0s0++ 239
Report of Committees on the Matter of

Nominations of Officers and Trustees. . .242
Announcement for the Course in Physiology,

N
(sc)
~]
a > ae

liane

Dr. Laurence: Irving... 2 ...4.5. 40s ee 243
Items of Interest. ... 2.0.00 605 ses ee 245
The Woods Hole Log ..........-.sseee00s 252

TO THE TRUSTEES OF NONAMESSET AND
NAUSHON

Tho’ in our ranks the lyric muse is scarce,
We must confess, it

Seems that someone ought to pen an ode
To Nonamesset.

Gay exiles once again to native heath
In joy returning

With whoops of gastronomic glee we start

Old beach fires burning!
oe. ears geese

ee SOAPS tm i a tt aN em eae Y

No sand than thine in sandwiches
Nor smoke in eye, is sweeter,

No sheep so blithe, no ticks so tame,
No shoreline ever neater.

From Barnstable to nor’ard, way
Down east to Poponesset

We've vainly sought a substitute
For ancient Nonamesset.

Steaks did not teste as steaks were wont
So sad was our condition

For in Elizabethan ground we'd
Founded our trad.:tion.

So thanks for lifted bans and
Prohibitions well rescinded!

We'll watch our fires well and keep
The brushwood to the wind’ard.

(Signed) The Society of Serious Steak Eatecés.

DIRECTORY CORRECTION

Whedon, A.D. prof. zool. North Dakota State. OM
39. Br 201.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

Date A.M. P.M.
Aug. 22. — 12:10
Aug. 23... 1:05 eG)
Aug. 2A occ: 2:05 7 2209
Aug. 25.. SHO SOHO
NUS AZO ee ee ee ae 3455 i586
Aug. 27 4:24 4:32
Aue 28 SOS) lo)
Aire 202 ee eae. Sea S56
Aug. 30 6:20) MOnoy
Aug. 31 6:55, 7a

|
|
|
|
I

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ITEMS OF INTEREST

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Recently Vice President Monroe E. Deutsch of
the University of California at Berkeley visited
the Institution. He was accompanied by Mrs.
Deutsch, Mrs. Koshland of San Francisco and
Assistant Dean of Undergraduates L. O’Brien of
the University of California at Berkeley.

Last week Prof. W. E. Allen made a trip to
Los Angeles on Institution business.

Last week Prof. G. E. F. Sherwood of the
Department of English in the University of Cal-
ifornia at Los Angeles arrived with his family
to spend a month at the Institution.

Dr, E. E. Thomas of the Citrus Experiment
Station and his family at Riverside have arrived
for a two weeks stay at the Institution.

Last week Dr. Merle Smith, Pastor of the
First M. E. Church of Pasadena, arrived with
his family to spend a month at the Institution.

Prof. Daniel Freeman of Albany College, Al-
bany, Oregon, visited the Institution last week.
He is a special student of flat worms and he col-
lected a number of specimens in this locality.

Mr. and Mrs. N. Turner of Mexico, Missouri,
parents of Mrs. Shoup, have been visiting Prof.
and Mrs. C. S. Shoup for a few days.

A number of summer residents left the Insti-
tution at the end of last week, including Dr. D.
M. Greenberg and family of the Disivion of Bio-
chemistry and Dr. and Mrs. H. F. Blum of the
Division of Physiology of the University of Cal-
ifornia at Berkeley, and Dr. R. S. Stone iand
family of the University of California Hospital in
San Francisco.

The public lecture in the Institution was given
on August 10, by Dr. W. T. Swingle of the U.S.
Experimental Date Farm in Idaho, Calif. This
lecture dealt with problems and conditions of
date culture.

At 4 p. m. on Friday, August 7, Dr. A. H.
Gee gave ia semi-public lecture on “Lime Deposi-
tion at the Florida Keys”.

On August 14, Director T. Wayland Vaughan
gave a lecture entitled ‘““Notes on Recent and
Current Oceanographic Activities”.

The position of Dr. G. W. Martin who con-
tributed the article on the lowa Lakeside Labora-
tory was incorrectly recorded in the July 25 num-
Her of THe Cottrectinec Net. Dr. Martin is
professor of botany at the State University of
Towa.

MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Dr. James Murphy and Dr. E. M. East con-
ducted the seminar on August 5th at the Jiackson
Memorial Laboratory.

Dr. Warren H. Lewis delivered the fourth
lecture in the M. D. I. B. L. Popular Lecture
Course on Thursday afternoon, August 6th. His
subject was “Cancer Problems” and was illustrat-
ed by motion pictures.

On August 7th the members of the Laboratory
were entertained at the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory at Lamoine, Me. An exhibition of speci-
mens was given by the students. The visitors
were invited to inspect the buildings and grounds.
Tea was served at the dormitory.

Dr. and Mrs. W. H. Lewis entertained the Lab-
oratory at a picnic on August 8th.

The Monday evening seminar on August 10th
was in charge of Dr. William Wherry who spoke
on “Biological Control of Bubonic Plague” and
Professor Ulric Dahlgren whose subject was
“Disease Among Invertebrates”’.

—LouiseE R. Mast.

The Rey. Dr. A. M. Keefe arrived on August
8. He has just spent several days on a collect-
ing trip in the Pine Barrens of New Jersey with
Dr. C. J. Niewlands, C. S. C. of Notre Dame
University and former editor of ‘““The Midland
Naturalist.” They visited several little known
spots in the central part of the state and secured
a number of rare floral specimens.

Dr. William R. Amberson, professor of phys-
tology, and Director of the course in physiology
at the laboratory sailed for Germany last week,
where he will carry on at the laboratory of Pro-
fessor Rudolf Hoeber in Kiel during the coming
semester.

The Gilbert and Sullivan opera “Tolanthe,”
which was scheduled for August 16, will be given
on Sunday, August 23. The postponment of this
concert without advance notice was caused by
the temperamental behavior of the victrola, and
was sincerely regretted by the officers of the Club.

On Thursday, August 27, the program will in-
clude the following selections of the Wagnerian
music: “Prize Song” from Die Meistersinger,
“Seigfried’s Funeral March” and the “Closing
Scene” of the Gotterdammerung. The “Sym-
phony in D Minor” of Cesar Franck will conclude
the program.

The concert scheduled for Sunday, August 30,,
will include Russian songs and selections from’
Russian operas arranged by Dr. Borodin. The
complete program will be announced later.

THE COLLECTING NPA

{ Vor. VI. No. 49

The

The 1931 Red Book Supplement lists reduced prices on many
commonly used preserved specimens and new forms, previous-

ly not available.

Mt
RS

bh
C)

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

Turtox
Biological Red Book

Dissection and Demonstration Specimens
for Zoology, Embryology, Entomology
and Comparative Anatomy.

QNOGICA,

S Za t

ee
TOX"RR Ob UCTS

TUR By

¥

If you have not received your copy

please ask for it at once.

Spalteholz
Transparent
Preparations

Human
and

Zoological

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Models, Specimens,
Charts

for physiology, zoology, botany,

anatomy, embryology, ete. Cata-

logs will gladly be sent on request.
Please mention name of school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate
catalog.

Visit our New and Greatly En-
larged Display Rooms and Museum

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated
761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

CHICAGO

Life History
of Chick

Cray-ApAms Co

117-119 EAST 24th STREET

Model of Human Heart

ee

Sea" =S=OOoOoqoeaeaeaeaeeeeeee

[PANY
NEW YORK

Aucust 22, 1931 ]

MONOBJECTIVE

BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE

With readily interchangeable binocular and

monocular tubes

MICROSCOPE DSA-1

Stand DSA with simplified Mechanical
Stage and Quadruple Nosepiece; Con-
denser n.a. 1.2 with Iris Diaphragm Ach-
romatic Objectives: 3, 8 n.a. 0.20, 40 n.a.
0.65, 90 n.a. 1.25 (Oil Immersion). Paired
Huygens Oculars: 10x and 15x. Mag-
nifications: 30x to 135Gx.

Price, $225 f.0.b. N. Y.

MICROSCOPE DSA-2
Same stand as DSA-1, but with apla-
natic condenser n.a. 1.4 and Apochro-
matic Objectives: 10 n.a. 0.30, 20 n.a.
0.65, 40 n.a. 0.95 and 90 n.a. 1.3 (Oil
Immersion). Paired Compensating Oc-
ulars: 7x, 10x and 15x. Magnifications:
70x to 1350x.
Price $400.00 f. 0. b. N. Y.
A satchel type of carrying case can be
supplied instead of the standard cabinet,
at an additional cost of $4.00

CARL ZEISS, Inc.

485 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles, Calif.

Cambridge

A TEXTBOOK OF

EXPERIMENTAL CYTOLOGY
By JAMES GRAY

Author of “Ciliary Movement”

An account of recent experimental
research, and a correlation of the phys-
ical structure of the cell with its bio-
logical properties.

516 pp.

THE PRINCIPLES OF

PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY
By MURIEL WHELDALE ONSLOW

The biochemistry of the sugars and
the nitrogen compounds.
328 pp. $4.75
CHEMICAL EMBRYOLOGY

By JOSEPH NEEDHAM

An exhaustive treatise dealing with
events at all
stages of embryonic life. |

the physico-chemical

Three volumes. In the press. $35.00

BIOLOGY AND MANKIND |
By S. A. McDOWALL |

The application of the theories of
evolution and heredity to the problems
of democracy.

Preparing About $2.50 |

Cambridge University
Press
‘American Agents:

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

248 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 49

ASTA
PARAFFIN
OVEN

This oven which was demonstrated,
can now be loaned for laboratory
use.

Apply to Dr. Pond at the apparatus
room. 216,

STANDARD SCIENTIFIC SUPPLY CORE

Biological, Bacteriological and Chenvcal Apparatus, Naturalists’ Supplies, Specimens,
Skeletons, Anatomical Models, Wall Charts, Glass Jars, Microscopes
and Accessories.

10-14 WEST 25th STREET

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

|
|

as te = & #3

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 114-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

NEW YORK CITY

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and infcrmation furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
Woods Hole, Mass.

Aueust 22, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 249

LEGTZ

Originated The INCLINED BINOCULAR
TUBE

In constructing the Inclined Binocular Tube, the Leitz
Works were guided by the desire to lend even

more comfort and convenience to

continued microscope observation
than was offered with previous microscope models.

The Binocular Body with its inclined ocula
tubes permits tke observer to sit at the micro-
scope in a natural upright position. The micro-
scope does not need to be inclined and conse-
quently the stage retains its horizontal position
suhich is of particular advantage when using oil
immersion objectives, when observing material in
solution, in darkfield work, when using the micro-
manipulator, etc,

The Inclined Binocular Tube is available for
any Leitz Binocular Microscope and can be
used with every one of the three series of
Leitz Micro-Objectives (achromatic, fluorite
and apochromatic) as well as with the Huy-
ghenian and Periplanatic Oculars. This body
tube is readily interchangeable with every
other tube offered for use with Leitz Binocular
Combination Microscopes.

No. 22850. Inclined Binocular Tube, - - $75.00

When ordering any Leitz Binocular
Microscope with the

Inclined Binceular Tube
‘i in place of the regular
Convemence and Comfort vertical binocular body—

P arava )bservations add to list price of such
For Continued Observations FUsGeORESE UG he ee, eS

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET No. 1187 (CN)

IT MAY BE IN ORDER TO MENTION THAT

the Leitz Works are credited with originating the majority of
important developments in micro-constructions.

Those developments as relate to research microscopes alone are:.

Handle Arm Stand - Dustproof Nosepiece - Binscular Body Tube

Interchangeable Feature of Tubes - Ball-Bearing Fine Adjustment

Combination Condenser for Bright and Darkfield, etc.

LEITZ WILL CONTINUE TO CREATE AND ORIGINATE AND THUS CONTRIBUTE TO
THE DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE

E. LEGQQZ,. Ine.

60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK, N. Y.

250

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 49

FOLLOW THE CROWD TO

DANIEL*S

HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,

DELICIOUS SANDWICHES

COFFEE PICNIC LUNCHES

THE QUALITY SHOP

Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes and
Souvenirs

Ask for things you do not see.
Main Street Woods Hole

FITZGERALD, INC.

A Man’s Store
— MEN’S WEAR —
Colonial Buiding Tel. 935 Main Street
Falmouth

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable

M. DOLINSKY’S

Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

Main St.

DONNELLY’S BEAUTY SHOPPE
Telephone 211 for Appointment

Opp. Elizabeth Theatre
Falmouth, Mass.

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.

Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER

Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 260

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Woods Hole Tel. 777
Service that Satisfies

Visit
Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Woods Hole and Falmouth

MUNSON & ORDWAY

THE BRAE BURN SHOP
Fresh Killed Poultry — Fruit & Vegetables
Butter, Eggs & Groceries
Home Cooked Food and Delicatessen
Falmouth opp. Post Office Tel. 354-W

2 Deliveries Daily in Woods Hole

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole. Mass.

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

N. E. TSIKNAS
FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Wcods Hole

CURRENT MAGAZINES
and BOOKS ON CAPE COD are
FOR SALE AT
Tne CoLttectinGc Net OFFIcE

Aucust 22, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 251

——

Cine-Photomicrography
--- The key to New Fields of Research

CINE-PHOTOMICROGRAPHY has for some time been recognized as
an extremely valuable and fascinating factor in the fields of research
in medicire, bacteriology, biology, chemistry and all of the natural
sciences. Explor&tion into these fields by this method has been much
hampered because equipment has been both expensive and difficult
to manage.

B & L has designed a Cine-Photomicrographic apparatus which is low
in price and simple in adjustment, yet it is as efficient as a much more
complicated and bulky set-up.

B & L has designed a Cine-Photomicrographic apparatus which is low
The outfit is so constructed that you can focus the microscope and ob-
serve the specimen at any time without shifting the camera or interfering
with tke photogvaphic process in any way. It can be used with any
standard microscope.

Send fcr catalcg E«25 explaining many other advantages and giving |
full details.

BAUSCH @ LOMB OPTICAL CO.

671 St. Paul Street Z z - Rochester, N. Y.

BAUSCH & LOM

mute

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 49

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

THE EIGHTIETH ANNIVERSARY OF
MR. LUSCOMBE

Mr. Walter O. L. Luscombe, a resident of
Woods Hole for fifty-four years, was host at a
celebration marking his eightieth anniversary last
Wednesday. His home was flooded with visitors
and congratulatory messages from the people of
Woods Hole and from his Cape and Boston
friends. Mr. Luscombe has been responsible in
large measure for the Woods Hole Public
Library and the new Post Office building, and has
in many other ways acted as sort of a Goa-
father to the residents of this section of Fal-
mouth.

In 1899 Mr. Luscombe was elected Senator for
the State of Massachusetts iand during his term
of office he was chairman of the Committee on
Towns and Railroads. He was an active member
of ia great many other committees, some of which
were: Committee on Constitutional Amendments,
Committee on Harbors and Public Lands, iand the
Ways and Means Committee. He is now presi-
dent of the Cape Cod Chamber of Commerce, a
position which he has held for five years, and he
has for awenty-five years been one of the Direc-
tors of the Falmouth National Bank.

We learn from The Falmouth Enterprise that
Mr. Luscombe served as deputy Collector of Cus-
toms in the days when Woods Hole was an im-
portant port along the Atlantic seaboard. He
served in this capacity until 1888 and later en-
gaged in the grocery, grain, coal and real estate
business. His business is now confined primarily
to real estate and insurance.

Since 1896 Mr. Luscombe has attended almost
all of the National Conventions of the Republican
Party. He is now director of the National Rivers
and Harbors Committee which is a Congressional
appointment. Mr. Luscombe’s many friends were
happy to find him in such good health and so
actively engaged in carrying out his varied duties
for the National, State and local organizations of
which he is a part, and in his own business.

The sum of seven hundred dollars was extrac-
ted last week from the merchants of Falmouth by
an attractive young woman who was supposed to
he collecting it for the West Falmouth Public
Jaibrary. The library knew nothing of the “cam-
paign’” and the enterprising visitor has disap-
peared. It does not seem as though it should be
so difficult to raise $500.00 for THE CoLLEecTING
Net Scholarship Fund in Falmouth.

The public schools in Falmouth will open on
Septemher 8.

The construction of a highway connecting
Providence with Buzzards Bay, designed to short-
en the driving distance between the Cape towns
and points to the West, is under construction.
The New Bedford Chamber of Commerce will
present a protest against this proposed highway
when recommendations are presented to the
Board of County Commissioners.

Mrs. C. E. L. Gifford has been elected presi-
dent of the Woods Hole Community Association
which assumes responsibility for the Community
Hall. The other officers which were elected at
the meeting are: William Chambers, treasurer;
Mrs. George M. Gray, secretary. The Board of
Trustees is made up of the following individuals:
Mrs. Thomas E. Larkin, William Chambers, Mrs.
Alfred Norris and Mrs. George M. Gray. The
Community Hall is over fifty years old and it
was first known as Liberty Hall.

During the summer months building permits
to the extent of over $95,000 have been granted by
the Town of Falmouth. The corresponding sum
of last summer was nearly half, which is an indi-
cation that residents and visitors are taking ad-
vantage of the exceptional economic conditions.

The Coast Guard patrol boat CG 285 was busy —

last week aiding boats grounded in the recent
thick fogs. The schooner yacht Alamyth, owned
by W. P. Latham, was hauled off a sandbar two
miles northeast of Menemsha Bight last Satur-
day night. The 92-foot schooner, Michado, was
towed off the Shovelful Shoals near Monomoy
Island. A fishing boat went ashore in Woods
Hole Harbor, but it was pulled off undamaged.
The patrol boat located the lost schooner, Warella
the next day. The boat was owned by Judge
Poland who was sailing from Boston to Nan-
tucket ; he was lost in the fog and they towed it
to its destination.

Two local men have been discharged from their
work of laying bricks for the new grammar
school in Falmouth owing to the fact that they
re non-union men. The choice was put up to
one of these men of joining the Union or of los-
ing his job. He wanted to become a member ct
the Union, but was unable to raise the necessary
sum of $73.00. The man in question, Samuel
Pierce, has not had a permanent position for six

months, and he finds it difficult to support his —
family. It is unfortunate that the New Bedford —

Bricklayer’s Union should have sufficient power
to prevent residents of Falmouth from building
their own schools.

tHE

Aucust 22, 1931 }

Church of the Messiah

( Episcopal}
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector
8:00 a.m.

Wit {0X0}, sen.

Holy Communion
Morning Prayer

Veni Oaeitaver we gee = ae 7:30 p.m.

TEXACO PRODUCTS
NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

COLLECTING

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Present “THE SILENT HOUSE”
Aug, 24 — Aug. 29
George G. Brandon and George Pickett
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
For Reservations Call Falmouth 1250

DRESSES — LINENS — LACES
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Phone 907-M Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

NET 25,

mn
| Ge

SEAL

Non-Corrosive

GOLD

Non-Corrosive

MICROSCOPIC

SLIDES «« COVER GLASSES
Do Not Fog

At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

ARR A a (nanan AT
Cray-ApAms Compan
117-119 East 24th Street

Y¥

NEW YORK

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale
B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.

EST. 1887

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC

13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10ce DEPARTMENT

Cape Cod Distributors for
Draper Maynard Sporting Goods
SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS

Falmouth Tel. 407

HEADQUARTERS FOR
STEEL FILING CABINETS, SAFES
AND OFFICE FURNITURE

LOOSE LEAF BOOKS AND FIGURING BOOKS
FOR ANY KIND OF BUSINESS

Callanan & Archer Co., Inc.
WHOLESALE STATIONERS

New Bedford, Mass.

10-14 So. Second St.

THE

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 49

Juse Publistied eae ee ee ae

The revised, up-to-date
SECOND EDITION of

HEREDITY

By A. FRANKLIN SHULL,
Professor of Zacloay in the University
of Michigan
McGRAW HILL PUBLICATIONS
in the
ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES

HIS is a sound and thorough treat-
ment of the principles of biologi-
cal inheritance The purpose of the
book primarily is to cover those phases
of the subject of especial interest to
mankind. Beside this chief emphasis
on human heredity, however, the book
also covers enough of the phenomena
of heredity in plants and animals to
serve as necessary foundation study.

In this edition all of the many recent
advances in the field are covered that
are valuable in connection with the aim
of the book.

Irnportant among the changes are:

—The discussion of immigraticn has been
altered to fit the present laws and ad-
ministrative procedure.

—the analysis of the population problem
has been revised to accord with the new
census and other recent statistical results

—the chapters on heredity in man have
been greatly enlarged owing to the in-
crease of readily accessible material

—in the more fundamental parts of the
book new phenomena, such as multiple
allelomorphism and lethal homozygotes,
have been introduced because of the cer-
tainty or increased probability that they
are exhibited in man

—important new experimental results bear-
ing cn the evolution question are included

—the history of knowledge cf heredity has
been entirely rewritten

—problems for drill are introduced into
the fundamental divisions of the work.

345 pages, 6 x Q,
143 illustrations, $3.00

Send for a copy on approval

McGRAW HILL BOOK CoO., Inc.

370 SEVENTH AVENUE

NEW YORK

LOUCKS

TUBING INSERTER

Prevents injuries to hand, also breakage of

tubes, thermometers, etc.

The Head
and The Carrier with handle.

Inserter consists of two parts;

Write for Bulletin No. 468 which
gives full information.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
New York, N. Y.

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment

Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign
postage: 20 cents.

GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America. Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part I.
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman Taylor.
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00.

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore aud Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

Avueust 22, 1931 | THE COLLECTING NET

bo
on
un

Forging to New Heights of Leadership

=) MICROTOME
pe CONSTRUCTION

New
SPENCER

Medium Sliding MICROTOME No. 850

A new Microtome—Spencer Saket meet the need of a moderate priced high
grade sliding microtome, built low and compact for comfortable operation.

In this microtome is incorporated the great features which have accounted for the unusual success
of all Spencer Sliding Microtomes: i.e, the sturdy main frame, the inflexibility of the knife and
knife block, and the accuracy and rigidity of the feed mechanism.

The main body of the instrument is 1414” long. 5%” high, and 714"’ wide at the base. As on all
sliding microtomes the knife block, which is 51," long, 3” wide and 1%” high, rides on a horizontal
surface at the top of the main casting. The cchesion of nearly 12 square inches (three times as
much as on any ordinary microtome) of oil contact on the accurately scraped surfaces holds the
block very firmly to the main frame. An additional fortification against any possible jumping of the
knife block is provided by opposing bearings.
This combination, which is on all Spencer microtomes cnly, insures accuracy in the movement of the
knife block, which can be attained in no other way. The smooth even draw is a delight to the touch.
A rigid and free moving object block accurately fitted and carefully scraped surfaces insures feeding
and holding the object, however hard it may be, definitely to the knife edge for accurate cutting of
thin sections. The feed screw is 14" in diameter. The notched wheel of this feed mechanism provides
for cutting sections in steps of 2 microns up to 40 microns. The feed is operated by hand or auto-
matically. There is no back lash or spring. The specimen must move up the distance for which the
section thickness is set. The total upward excursion is much greater than on other makes of micro-
tomes which are priced higher. On No. 850 this distance is 33 millimeters.
It is provided with the standard Spencer ball and flange object clamp which has been so popular. It is
easily criented by means of three screws. One reason for the accuracy of these microtomes is the
fact that no split nut is involved. The nut is heavy and thick enough to cover twenty threads. When
the upper limit is reached the object clamp is quickly lowered by means of a crank at the back of the
microtome. This crank also provides a quick means for bringing the object into the desired relation
to the knife edge before cutting.

No. 850 Microtome complete with knife, knife clamp, handle and back for

sharpening—now ready for shipment—$200.00

eee

NEW YORK

256 Wale, COMIN CMING INBAD [ Vor. VI. No. 49

9) Quoting remark of a school super-

“Tt-saved us the costeof+5. microscopes” sera: ns pes oe

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus.

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a g:oup of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives. Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: [. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional features as

standard equipment :

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.
Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.

Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser
Screw centering adjustment for light. kevolving stage.
Demonstrations will gladly be made by Mr. Robert Rugh, Room 217,
Main Bldg., M. B. L., Woods Hole.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

Crav-Amams Company

| 117-119 East 24th Strest NEW YORK, N. Y.

Vol. VI. No. 10. SATURDAY, AUGUST 29, 1931 Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 25 Cts.

AN EXPERIMENTAL DOG FARM FOR _ THE U. S. FISHERIES BIOLOGICAL STA-

THE STUDY OF FORM AND TYPE TION AT BEAUFORT
Dr. C. R. StocKARD Dr. Herpert F. PRYTHERCH
Professor of Anatomy, Cornell Medical College Director of the Station
A general survey was attempted enumerating As early as 1860 Beaufort was recognized by
the difficulties and problems of maintaining zoologists as an excellent location for studies of
a large colony of dogs. The experience of the marine fauna and flora of the South Atlantic

any one who has kept one or two dogs actually region. The natural advantages offered here for
gives no idea of the difficulties — — — the investigation of biological

arising hee ae pee is WW. B. VU. Calendar ey led to the ee es
increased to a hundred or ment of a marine biologica
“ore. araneik O aye tt TUESDAY, SEPT. 1, 8:00 P.M. | Pee: thet Sen Ra
Pi ee ee ee Alberta tyler) Artificial Par- || | S-4HON) Dy te WW 5) Suteau
dogs may be allowed to run | thenogenesis in the Eggs of the | of Fisheries in 1899, The
more or less at large without | Pacific Coast Echiuroid, Urechis | present laboratory which was
seriously contaminating the | _ caupo.” rae built in 1902 is ideally situated
eee hi Bas es aes Dr. Paul Galtsoff: “Specificity of 3 all island j “ae rah
area; while among a great | Gexual Reactions in the Genus | © a small island in Beaufor
number of dogs there are cer- Ostrea.” Harbor and separated from
tain to be infected individuals. Dr. K. B. Coldwater: “The Effect | the mainland and town by a
and these contaminate the of Sulphydryl Compounds upon | channel about 150 yards wide.
anlieses dle 2 limited Regenerative Growth. i ane “amides weRe Glesiezibi
others under any limited con- DEEN. AulGobb: “The Use of Live | us provides very desirable
finement. Dogs,are commonly Nemas in Zoological Courses in | but not inconvenient isolation
infested with intestinal para- Schools and Colleges.” and assures quiet and pleasant
sites, and when many, are THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER 3 surroundings for research
brought together in a smail | Final Scientific meeting beginning work.
region the entire ground he- | ee Bao JUe | The investigators enjoy a
comes infected with the eggs FRIDAY, SEPT. 4, 3:00 P. M. little community of their own
of these parasites and every Professor Bradley M. Patten, West- | on the island, as accommoda-
ibs (OE GUR@ (allover Hey TSC ern Reserve University. “Micro- Conch nberclennne a pere
member of the colony is very Moving Pictures Applied to the | tions in the sleeping quarters
soon also infected. On re- SIE of the Living Embryos | are furnished free in most
moving these parasites with a = —— cases and meals are provided
ordinary treatment, the dog is nik temporarily at cost in the attractive mess hall nearby.
relieved, since it (Continued on Page 262) Immediately to the north of the station is the

Vas us CONTENTS

An Experimental Dog Farm............... Recovery from X-Ray Effects in the Arbacia
The Biological Station at Beaufort......... oT PS OF RL Tue one arel errata cia cerca vee Reels rte ieee Rare 272

The Allegany School of Natural History.... 260 Artificial Parthenogenesis in the Eggs of the
Microscopic Studies of Cells and Tissues in Hehinroig, wreehiss Campari... sith a tae 273
Chem bina Mammal Sy prete scree wise s)a)s ees 264 Biological Spectrum and M-Rays .......... 274
Local and Correlative Gene Effects in Mo- The Use of Live Nemas in Zoological Courses 276

SAICST Of Ela DEODLACOMM mers n)s.c) «)<yrl-)- = sielsiere 268 Specificity of Sexual Reactions in the Genus
Genetic Studies on Selective Segregation of (ORIGKET Oincko S cuooe ob eo oom adnS como eaD 277
Chromosomes in Sciara................ 269 INAS OSI WTEI HO) BORER) GdgancecncosodoonaadDS 279
Phospho-Creatin in Relation to Nerve Activity 270 Scientific Book Reviews) .27.- 200 2<s0e6 ess 280
The Effect of Sulphydryl Compounds upon mhe Voyareror ther Ablantisna. sci. <-->: 285

PREP CUOMAEIVE MoEOWlMig® elem cece rele slam sale ire | Exhibit of Invertebrate Animals ........... 287

DHE COLLECTING NED

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

THE U. S. BUREAU OF FISHERIES STATION AT BEAUFORT

Established by the Federal Government in 1899.

It

is located on a small island in Beaufort Harbor

which is separated from the mainland by a channel 150 yards wide.

large estuary, known as Newport River, headed
by a sluggish fresh-water stream of fair size
Westward les Bogue Sound; eastward are an-
other large estuary, the North river, and Core
Sound ; the latter connects with the great Pamlico
Sound. Adjacent to the sounds and estuaries are
large stretches of marshes, and sand and mud flats.
Furthermore, the numerous good roads ot the
vicinity make it possible to reach easily by private
automobile or the station's service car yarious
fresh-water creeks. ditches, drainage canals,
swamps, ponds, and small lakes.

It is evident, therefore, that the station is so
situated that the ocean with its shore lines, bights
and fishing banks, the sounds and estuaries with
their streams, the ponds, the marshes, and the
sand and mud flats are all within easv reach from
the laboratory. This makes it possible to obtain
conveniently for study a very large variety ot
aquatic animals and plants, ranging from those
that live in the ocean in strictly salt water. to
those occupying the sounds, estuaries. and streams
with brackish and fresh water. Here may be had
fish, oysters, clams, scallops, crabs, shrimp, ter-
rapins, porpoises, water birds, seaweeds, and a
host of living things that have no names other
than the ones given them by naturalists.

An idea-of the wealth of the local fauna
flora may be formed from the f that

and

fact 291

species of fish, 153 species of decapod crusta-
ceans—that is, crabs. crayfish. shrimp, ete.—216
species of moilusks. and 132 forms of marine al-
gae or seaweeds, are found in almost the immedi-
ate yicinity of the laboratory. Furthermore, the
conditions for the study of the aquatic life in its
natural environment are exceiient, as industrial
deveiopment and the concentration of population
are not great enough seriously to disturb nature,
and the plants and animals, as already indicated,
may be studied over a very wide range ot natural
conditions.

The biological station consists of the main lab-
oratory building, the mess house and kitchen, di-
rector’s residence, pump house, boathouse, car-
penter shop, and a terrapin-rearing house. The
latter is a building 60 feet long by 25 feet wide
and is designed to house conveniently 30,000
young terrapins. Along the shores are severai
concrete ponds used in terrapin culture.

The labonatory building is a two-story frame
structure 70 feet long and 42 teet wide, with two-
story wings, each about 52 feet long and 18 fect
wide, surrounded by porches. In each wing are
six bedrooms for the accommodation of the scien-
tife staff and the investigators from colleges, uni-
versities and other institutions of learning, to
whom the facilities of the laboratory are open at

all seasons. Each bedroom is provided with both

Aucust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

hot and cold running water and the necessary fur-
niture and bedding. The central portion of the
building is devoted to investigation, instruction,
and administration. | The laboratory occupies the
entire second story, removed from the distnactions
and noises inseparable from those parts of the
buildings and grounds open to the general public.
Along the north and south walls are alcoves for
investigators, separated by half-height partitions
designed to interfere as little as possible with the
free passage of light and air. Each alcove is
provided with a table and shelving, and whatever
aquaria, dishes, apparatus, and reagents may be
required for the particular work in progress ; one
or two high windows furnish light and ventila-
tion. At each end of the laboratory are two large
tank tables with aquaria, which afford facilities
for keeping and ob-

259
whole laboratory building comfortable for oceu-
pancy throughout the entire year.

The floating equipment of the laboratory has
also been brought to a high standard of efficiency.
A comfortable, sea-going motor cruiser and a
smaller speed boat ‘have been placed in commis-
sion, and two other launches attached to the sta-
tion have been rebuilt. The larger vessel is
equipped with a laboratory, hoisting gear, nets,
dredges and the usual oceanographic apparatus.
Abcut a dozen rowboats are provided for the use
of the investigators.

The primary purpose of the Beaufort labora-
tory is to render service to the fisheries through
the knowledge gained by studies in pure and ap-
plied science. The ever increasing importance of
seafoods as a source of the essential elements in

our diet emphasizes the

serving’ live plants and
animals brought in
from local waters.
Sinks, a fume chamber,
and a photographic
dark room are situated
along the end walls of
the room.

The first floor of the
laboratory building is
occupied in part by a
museum which is open
to the public. It con-
tains many marine ani-
mals and plants repre-

need of research in a
variety of fields dealing
with the species of ~
commercial importance.
There are innumerable
problems pertaining to
the cytology, physiol-
ogy, morphology and
ecology of these organ-
isms in which biologists
may find excellent ma-
terial for studies of
fundamental _ scientific
value. The Bureau is
anxious to interest in-

sentative of Beaufort.

On the first floor, in
addition to the museum,
are a chemical laboratory, two small research lal-
oratories, the director's office, a store rcom, and
the library, which contains about 2,000 volumes.
Although small, the library has been selected with
special reference to the needs of the investigators,
who also may obtain books from the excellent
main library of the Bureau in Washington and
from the other unusually fine public libraries of
that city.

The chief purpose of this article is to acquaint
Hiologists with the fact that the laboratory at
Beaufort is thoroughly modern and up to date as
a result of recent extensive improvements and
alterations. The buildings have been thoroughly
renovated and additional equipment installed. The
salt-water and fresh-water supplies have been
modernized, the electrical system renewed and hot
and cold running water provided for the dormi-
tory rooms, which occupy the wings of the build-
ing. Compressed air and artificial gas are now
supplied to the laboratories. An equally impor-
tant improvement has heen the installation of a
central steam-heating plant, which makes the

THE MAIN LABORATORY ROOM

vestigators from other
institutions in such
phases of these prob-
lems as pertain to their respective fields, but at
the same time offers them entire freedom in the
selection of such biological studies as they de-
sire to make. Every year outside workers, de-
sirous of continuing their investigation of some
special problem, visit the laboratory. It is hoped
that the number who do so may be increased and
every courtesy and all available facilities will be
given them. ‘

The chief investigations conducted at present
by the Bureau of Fisheries at Beaufort deal with
the biology and cultivation of the oyster, the
development and distribution of the shrimp, and
the prcpagation of the diamond-back terrapin.
The research work that is being carried on at the
laboratory during the present season by Federal
investigators and those from other institutions is
as follows:

Dr. H. V. Wilson and Joseph Hyde Pratt,
Jr., Cellular Behavior in Hydroids; Dr. Bernard
Steinberg, Effect of Bacterial Toxins on
Various Marine Forms; Miss Rebecca Ward,
3ehavior of Amoebacytes in Annelids; Dr. Vera

ANISH;

COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

260
Koehring, Narcosis of Marine Mollusks ; Profes-
sor Ezda Deviney, Regeneration in Ascidians ;
Mr, Paul O. Klingensmith, Chemical Studies of
Sea Water; Dr. James S. Gutsell, Development
and Distribution of Shrimp; Mr. Blount Rodman,
Terrapin Culture: Dr. Bert Cunningham, Effect
of Temperature on Development of Terrapin
Eges; Dr. Herbert F. Prytherch, Relation of
Copper Content of the Water to Oyster Growth
and Reproduction; Chemical Warfare Service,
War Department, Value of Certain Wood Pre-
servatives for Submerged Structures.

In conclusion I wish to add to this brief des-
cription of the station and its work the comments
of an investigator who has carried on research
work here since its inauguration. Dr. Henry Van
Peters Wilson, veteran zoologist of North Caro-
lina and a regular visitor at the Beaufort station,
describes the laboratory as follows:

“The station has at its door the open ocean and
fine sea beaches. Within what may be called the

harbor, which is large and beautiful, passing east
and west into Sarena, are sand shoals, mud flats,
and salt marshes. The tide brings in an excel-
lent plankton. The whole fauna is varied and
abundant, and, what is of the first importance,
easily accessible to the individual collector. More-
over, through the work of biologists during the
past fifty years it is sufficiently known to be usable
for many sorts of investigations. The associa-
tion of Beaufort with the general growth of
American biology, as may be seen from the long
list of published investigations carried on here,
is interesting and stimulating. The laboratory is
unusually comfortable and convenient ....... the
summer climate is healthy and pleasant and the
temperature and purity of the harbor water make
collecting a pleasure. Beaufort is now easily
reached by rail and hard-surfaced highway.”

Applications for accommodations should be ad-
dressed to the station or to the U. S. Bureau of
Fisheries at Washington, D. C.

THE ALLEGANY SCHOOL OF NATURAL HISTORY

IDx& 1k, 18
Director of the

It is a far cry from the salt-washed beaches
of Woods Hole, Cold Spring Harbor, and Bar
Harbor to the thick forests and swift streams of
the Allegheny Mountains; but the field for bio-
logical and geological studies is not limited by
the wash of the tides. There are inland lakes
and streams, mountain sides and meadows that
abound in various forms of plant and animal life.
There are Crustacea, gastropods, and pelecypods
that never knew the sea and a whole class of ver-
tebrate animals marked by the most profound
distaste for mineral salts in concentrations proper
to an ocean. There is also a class of invertebrate
animals more numerous in species than all others
combined, whose members scarcely touch the sea.

It is true that Jullanar said to king Shah-
zeman: “And know, moreover, that all that is on
the land in comparison with what is in the sea is
a very small matter’; but Jullanar had more im-
agination than biological information, for, if the
textbooks are to be believed, there are many more
kinds of animals without the sea than within it.
And plants ?—but the botanist must say. Ob-
viously there is a place for the lake and desert
laboratories, the river and the forest stations, as
well as for the marine centers of research and
study. The Allegany School of Natural History
in the forest appreciates the welcome from its
more venerable and distinguished sister at Woods
Hole which comes in the form of an invitation to
give some account of itself.

COKER
School

The Allegany School, it must be said at the be-
ginning, is not primarily a biological station in
the usual sense, although it offers facilities and
abundant opportunities for zoological, botanical
and Sse research. Its primary function is
that of a school for field studies in the three
general Bent ees of botany, zoology and geology.
Its clientele comprises teachers, college students,
both undergraduate and ady anced, museum
workers , and others. It is yet young, just enter-
ing upon its fifth season.

To begin with the birth of the institution:
Some six years ago Mr. Chauncey J. Hamlin of
Buffalo, President of the Buffalo Society of Nat-
ural Sciences and member of the Allegany State
Park Commission, conceived the idea of making
the State Park perform an educational service
ereater than could be incidental to the use of the
Park as a place for recreation and the passive
enjoyment of nature. There was also the interest
of Dr. Charles C. Adams, Director of the New
York State Museum and a member of the State
Council of Parks, who, with Mr. Hamlin and
others, had been one of the prime movers for the
establishment of a great park in the Allegheny
region of New York. The original idea found
expression in a joint undertaking for which the
Allegany State Park Commission furnished ample
grounds, buildings, and fixed equipment, as well
as current transportation for classes, the Buffalo
Society of Natural Sciences furnished the moy-

Aucust 29, 1931 ] TH

COLEECDIING

NET

LUANGMUI
G. NO LEMS

THE STONE TABLETS

ON THE SCIENCE BUILDING

AT THE PENNSYLVANIA

COLLEGE FOR WOMEN

A new science building, Buhl Hall, has recently
been completed at the Pennsylvania College for
Women in Pittsburgh. The idea of placing names
of outstanding living American scientists on two
stone tablets on the building came to Dr. E. K.
Wallace, head of the Chemistry Department. He,
assisted by Dr. Anna R. Whiting, head of the
Department of Biology, and the students of the
Science Seminar group, sent questionnaires ask-
ing for suggestions to go6 scientists starred in
American Men of Science and representing fields
ordinarily taught ina Liberal Arts College. The
number chosen in each group was determined by
the proportion of starred men in that group.
About 600 replies were received. The names have
been engraved and it is hoped to hang in the

main hall of the building a photograph, auto-
graphed if possible, of each of the men on the
list. The names inscribed are:

3iologists, Drs. L. H. Bailey, E. G. Conklin,
C. B. Davenport, R. G. Harrison, H. S. Jennings,
D) S:; Jordan, FF. R. Lillie, €. EB. McClune, Ti:
H. Morgan, H. F. Osborn, G. H. Parker, W. M.
Wheeler, and E. B. Wilson.

Physicists, Drs. P. W. Bridgman, A. H. Comp-
ton, K. T. Compton, A. A. Michelson, R. A.
Millikan, R. W. Wood.

Chemists, W. D. Bancroft, E. C. Franklin, M.
Gomberg, I. Langmuir, G. N. Lewis, A. A.
Noyes, W. R. Whitney.

Astronomers, W. W. Campbell, G. E. Hale.

able equipment, operative management and a
member of the teaching staff, and the State Mu-
seum furnished the educational direction, several
instructors and an important linkage with the
well-established research program of the Museum.
Shortly afterwards, the interest of the University
of Buffalo being incited, the School was affiliated
with the University. We should not fail, too, to
mention the State Library which, although not

ostensibly one of the cooperating agencies, yet,
somewhat as a silent partner, contributes in an
indispensable way to the efficiency of the Schooi
through generous loans each summer of the books
and papers necessary to its work.

The Allegany School is located on the slopes
of a small mountain just above Quaker Run, one
of the most beautiful trout streams of the south-
western part of the state. Just at the School a

262 DEE TEOLELGRING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 50

dam built across the run by the State Park pro-
vides an artificial lake several acres in extent, and
twenty feet in depth at the dam. Here, in the
heart of an extensive forest, in a state reserva-
tion comprising nearly ten square miles, there
were constructed a number of very substantial
cabins with a campus of some thirty acres.

The School buildings proper consist of a large
cabin, 48 x 96 feet, providing laboratories for
geology, botany and advanced work or research,

» library, and an assembly room, another cabin,
» x 62 feet, housing the office and zoological lab-
oratory, and two additional single-room cabins.
Another large cabin includes the kitchen and in-
cidental storage and working space, and a dining
room capable of seating eighty or more persons.
There are also a shop with a dark room, an ice
house, recreation room, deep well and_ tank,
shower cabins, a number of cabins where staff
members and help may live, and twenty-five
three-room cabins for students, each designed for
the use of two students. At the entrance to the
grounds and overlooking the lake, there is an
open-air museum which the School conveniently
maintains both for its cwn use and for the inter-
est of the general public. Electric lights in all
the buildings and on the grounds, jand running-
water in the laboratories and at points convenient
to all cabins, provide some of the conveniences
necessary for the most efficient work.

Class work is adapted both to those coming
with little preparation in the special fields and to
those entering after a good deal of college train-
ing and teaching experience. The classes are
small, permitting individual attention, and empha-
sis is placed upon problem work or report topics
-dapted to the abilities and interest of the students.
Sach class period (except on Saturdays) lasts a
full day of eight hours, so that there is little limit
to the length of the field trip (with bus transpor-
tation) or to the inter-adiustment by the instruc-
tor of field, laboratory and lecture work. In each
department the greater part of the study is, of
course, dene outside of the class, which meets but

one day a week in addition to the Saturday con-
ference hour.

The schedule and arrangement of work is per-
haps a distinctive feature of this school, and,
after an experience of five years, during which
the plan has undergone only minor modifications,
we are, asa whole, enthusiastic as to its value for
student and instructor. Under this plan, which
virtually eliminates all necessity for watching the
clock and obviates the waste of time involved in
repeatedly putting away papers and equipment
end in passing from room to room, the maximum
of personal contact between student and instruc-
tor goes along with a maximum of continuous in-
dependent work by the student. Undergraduate
study assumes somewhat the aspect of graduate
study with most of its best features in the aqui-
sition of method and the development of a capac-
ity to “carry on” after the student leaves the
School. The instructor enjoys the advantage of
comparative freedom for research and can the
more readily concede the occasional hours for
supplemental individual conferences when they be-
come desirable.

As indicated in the beginning, the primary
function of the institution is that of a school for
field studies. No special attempt has been made
2s yet to attract independent investigators, al-
though the school welcomes those whose interests
lead them to this environment. To such it offers
comfortable living conditions, and a congenial
social and intellectual environment, as well as lab-
oratory tables and equipment for collecting and
keeping animals, plants, or geological specimens.

The present staff of the School includes: A. A.
Saunders (Yale), of Bridgeport, Conn, Schools,
for Ornithology; W. P. Alexander (Cornell and
Leipzig), of the Buffalo Museum, for Nature
Study; L. E. Hicks (Ohio State University), of.

Ohio State University, for Botany; Charles
3rewer, Jr. (Harvard and Pittsburgh), of the
University of Kansas, for Geology; and. R. E.

Coker (University of North Gardin and Johns
Hpac of the University of North Carolina,
for Zoology.

AN EXPERIMENTAL DOG FARM FOR THE STUDY OF FORM AND TYPE
(Continued from Page 257)

becomes reinfected from the
This has made it neces-

almost immediately
contaminated ground.

sary to pave all of the kennel runs. with
concrete. It is much the same sanitary
proposition which a human community faces
in srewing from a_ sparsely settled village

condition into a thickly populated town. It is
necessary that the streets and pathways be paved
and kept clean. The small number of dogs owned
by an individual are usually of one selected breed.
The person comes to understand the general habits

and behavior of this breed and has little trouble in
handling his pets, but when one undertakes to
keep a great number of pure line breeds and then
makes combinations of these, he soon has an enor-
mous number of actually different animals inso-
far as their food habits, breeding habits, and gen-
eral behavior go. All these differences must be
understood, and many of the more delicate breeds
must be carefully and individually provided for.
In addition to the internal parasites mentioned
ahove, dogs are also frequently infested with ex-

ttt iti

Aucust 29, 1931 }

THE COLLECTING NET

263

ternal parasites, such as fleas and lice, as well
as the very annoying mange mites. In order to
have favorable conditions for reproduction and
growth all these plagues must be consistently elim-
inated. Pups and delicate types of dogs are high-
ly susceptible to these infestations, while adult,
vigorous animals in the same run may be entirely
free. There is in a way a certain type of re-

‘sistance or immunity to parasites on the part of

the adult dog. All infections and irritations tend
to produce more marked nervous symptoms in
dogs than in almost any other mammal. Things
that irritate a human being to only a mild de-
gree will often produce a state of extreme nervous
agitation in a dog or actually cause fits or spasms.
In maintaining a large colony of dogs one of the
most important problems is that of proper feeding
and the careful adjustment of their complete diet.
With our animals kept in wire-fenced enclosures
on concrete pavement there is no opportunity to
cbtain any other foods or stuffs than those that
are actuclly provided by the kennel nation. We
were sor ewhat surprised to find that none of the
cemmercial and sporting kennels had a properly
developed det. All of the patent and commercial
dog foods are considerably de‘icient in many ways,
although they frequently claim to contain all
necessary vitamins and salts as well as a perfectly
balanced nutritive ration. On these accounts we
have found it necessary to use as a base a broken
up keinel food, to which we add a freshly-made
soup of vegetables and meat. Chopped lean meat
scalded by the soup is also used, and then cheap
available substances containing the separate vita-
mins ave added, as well as bone ash and the other
necessary blood salts. Unless this diet is care-
fully and properly complete, the animals develop
varicus nervous symptoms and fail to grow in the
t pical fashion. The absence of vitamin B over
any length of time very soon brings about so-
erlled “running fits” and other nervous conditions.
When this deficiency is adjusted the fits after a
few days disappear. Certain other deficiencies in
the diet disturb the whelping reactions of the
mother and 2lso completely upset her normal be-
havior towaids the pups in regard to nursing as
well as properly cleaning and caring for them.
Improperly balanced food causes failure in con-
ceptions and frequent abortions in the breeding
animals. Several years work was necessary in
order to determine and control these difficulties.
The handling of dogs on a large scale is a
very delicate performance. and the kennel men
and keepers must be carefully selected persons.
We have constantly avoided the employment of
any experienced or professional kennel men. Such
persons invariably know so much that is wrong
about the handling of dogs that it is impossible
to teach them any logical method. They also

strongly believe many absurd superstitions which
are handicaps in handling animals for scientific
purposes. We have found that ordinary farm
boys who have an interest and knack with animals
can be trained to make the most useful kennel
men, and all of our crew of kennel attendants are
such persons. The keepers sleep in living quar-
ters which are built immediately over the kennel
houses, so as to be on hand aat any time.

The kennel houses have been built in various
ways, and in winter they are heated with either
steam or hot water. We have found, however,
that simple outdoor kennel boxes or small indi-
v dual dog houses are far better than well built
and heated houses. The small short-haired house
dogs actually stand the winter very well complete-
ly out of doors in these kennel boxes. Under
such conditions there is much less trouble with
parasitic infections. It is necessary, in maintain-
ing a colony of this size, that the place be ade-
quately supplied with running water, electricity,
and a refrigeration plant. These requirements
are not always easy to obtain in isolated positions
such asa dog farm must necessarily occupy on ac-
count of the barking iand noise of the animals.

This dog colony is intended as material for a
study of the general problem of the relation of
modified internal secretions to structural develop-
ment and bodily and mental behavior. Dogs better
than any other mammals almost exactly paral-
lel the various modified and distorted growth
cond tions which are exhibited by human beings
and which are generally interpreted as being due
to modifications in their glands of internal se-
cretion. It has seemed to us most desirable to
try and analyze the genesis of such conditions.
This, of course, is impossible to do in man. Many
so-crlled glandular diseases such as achondroplasia
and acromegaly are very probably complex in
both their origin and development. They are not
simply the result of an unusual function in some
one gland, but more likely ia number of glands or
possibly all of the bodily organs are somewhat
modified. Such a condition can only be under-
stood by a study of the inheritance and develop-
ment of the conditions. In this way one might
find whether there is some one initial peculiarity
which secondarily brings about modifications in
the other secretions and organs involved. It has
eccurred to us that by properly crossing different
types of dogs which showed conditions compar-
able to the human glandular diseases we might
break up certain complexities into their more or
less elementary parts. With this in view some-
thing mere than a dozen different pure line breeds
have been crossed in various ways. By taking
animals with a given condition and crossing them
with others entirely lacking this condition, we
have followed out the genetic behavior of several

264

THE COLLECTING NEG

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

peculiar structural forms. A number of illustra-
tions of such crosses through the first and second
generations were shown during the lecture.
Supplementing these genetic studies careful his-
tological and cytological examinations of all the
glands of internal secretion from the pure line
parent stocks and the Fy, and F», hybrid descend-
ants are invariably made. Through these studies
it is hoped to determine whether the peculiar his-
tology of a certain gland is definitely and con-
stantly correlated with a given bodily structuve
or form in the adult individual. For example, if
the short achondroplasic legs of the Basset hound
are associated with a given histological peculiarity
of the pituitary panathyroid apparatus, on cross-
ing this hound with the normal long-legged Ger-
man shepherd dog, the F; pups having short lezs

should also show glandular histology compamable
to the Basset, and further, the Fs pups, some of
which are short-legged and some long-legged,
should have associated with their leg conditions
the parental glandular structures. The instincts,
reactions and nervous behavior of different parent
stocks and hybrids are being studied in association
with these bodily and structural differences.

This extensive investigation presumes that
probably the most promising prospect in an
understanding of mammalian growth is an analy-
sis and regulation of the internal secretions. Such
knowledge may actually aid in the control of re-
sistance to infectious disease, as well as regulate
physical and mental development and behavior.
At the present time, however, we have only the
slightest beginnings of this knowledge.

MICROSCOPIC STUDIES OF CELLS AND TISSUES IN THE LIVING MAMMAL
Dr. Evior R. Clark
Professor of Anatomy, School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania

In the latter part of the 17th century Leeuwen-
hoek first studied, with a simple form of micro-
scope, the vessels in the transparent tails of tad-
poles. Passing over sporadic studies on this and
other transparent regions throughout the 18th
century, which reached considerable proportions
during the first half of the 19th century, we find,
with the rise of modern microscopic anatomy or
histology, usually dated from the time of Schwann
(1830-1840), a very considerable use of natural
transparent regions in living animals for the
study of the finer make-up of the tissues. Among
the successors to Schwann may be mentioned
Kolliker (1846), Remak (1857), and Stricker
(1860-70), all of whom, among other objects,
made use of the transparent fin expansions of the
tadpole’s tail for their microscopic investigations.
Such studies reached a climax in the period from
1870-1880 when Arnold, Rouget and others made
their observations on the blood vessels in the tail
ot the tadpole, while the pathologists, Cohnheim,
Thoma, Metchnikoff and numerous others, were
using transparent living objects such as the frog's
web, the mesentery, and the tadpole’s tail for
their classical study of inflammation. Perhaps this
first period of the intensive study of cells and
tissues in the living animal may be considered to
have come to an end with the studies of S. Mayer
on the tadpole’s tail in 1884.

Following this time, and coincident with the
discovery of the anilin dyes, the attention of his-
tologists and pathologists was largely confined to
the study of fixed tissues sectioned with the
microtome and stained. This was, of course, both

natural and desirable, since such methods made
possible the acquiring of a world of information
in regard to tissues and organs which were inac-
cessible to direct observation.

It seems to the author that the late Franklin P.
Mall may be considered to have bridged the gap
at least in this country — between the earlier
period of microscopic studies of the living and the
modern one. Dr. Mall informed the author that
he had begun studies on the blood vessels in the
tadpole’s tail with a view to making photographic
records of the same vessels over long periods of
observation, with correlated studies of the circu-
lation. He had temporarily abandoned this study
because of lack of a suitable anaesthetic for keep-
ing the tadpoles immobilized. It was in Dr.
Mall’s laboratory in 1907 that Dr. Harrison de-
veloped the “tissue culture” method for studying
growing nerves outside the body. It is interesting
to note that before growing nerves in plasma, Dr.
Harrison first made observations on living nerves
in the tadpole’s tail. In 1908, the author began
his studies, also in Dr. Mall’s laboratory, on living
blood vessels in the tadpole’s tail. By the use of
chloretone anaesthesia and a specially designed
micro-aquarium for keeping the tadpole in a nor-
mal position, it proved feasible to carry out long
continued studies of the same cells and tissues for
hours, days, weeks, and months in this beautifully
transparent region in a living animal. It was
at Dr. Mall’s suggestion that the author began
the study of the growth of lymphatic capillaries,
at that time a subject of heated controversy.

Since 1908 the author has carried out a number

.

lee,

a

Auceust 29, 1931 ]

ali HE COLLECTING

NET 2065

of studies on the cells and tissues in ane living
animal using the method of direct observation on
the tadpole’s tail. Since 1916 Mrs. Clark has
collaborated in many of these studies. Observa-
tions have been made on the growth and retrac-
ion of blood capillaries and on the transformation
of capillaries into larger vessels, linking the
morphology with the physical factors of the cir-
culation. Studies were also carried out on the
formation of adventitial cells and their relation
to contractility of blood vessels. Extensive ob-
servations on the manner of growth of lymphatic
capillaries were also made. In addition the de-
velopment, morphological characteristics and be-
havior of a number of tissues have been studied
under both normal and experimental conditions.
For example, observations have been made on the
behavior of blood and lymphatic vascular endo-
thelium, connective tissue cells, and various types
of leucocytes toward minute quantities of in-
jected substances such as paraffin oil, dilute crotoa
ol, vital dyes, carmin and carbon granules, lipoid
substances, protein, starch and allied substances,
and toward killed bacteria. The development of
tissue macrophages, and their morphological char-
acteristics and behavior, have been studied in-
tensively, and the undoubted transformation of
monocytes from the blood stream into tissue
macrcphages observed. The extra and intra-vas-
cular phagocytosis of erythrocytes have been
watched. The regeneration of lymphatics and
their behavior in edema have been studied, and
a number of other observations on the growth of
nerves, muscles, and upon various blood cells,
chromatophores, and subcutaneous canalicular
cells have been made. The general result of these
studies on the living transparent tails of amphil-
ian larvae has been a more intimate knowledge of
the life history of a group of cells and tissues as
seen in the living animal, and a growing body of
knowledge supporting the specificity of cells of
this group derived from the mesoderm.

_ Using the same method and the same type of
animal, Dr. S. Culver Williams, working under
Harrison, has recently carried out studies on th:
regeneration of nerves, while Dr. Speidel, at the
University of Virginia, is engaged in studies on
the growth of nerve sheaths in the tadpole’s tail.

During this period, also, similar microscopic
studies on tissues in living animals were carried
out by Stockard on the early development of
blood vessels and blood cells in the transparent
embryos of Fundulus, and by F. R: Sabin, W. H.
and M. R. Lewis, and othe-s Ss upon early stiges of
the area vasculosa of the chick, removed from
the egg¢ to a hanging drop by the method of Mc-

Whorter and Whipple. Of course, you are all fa-
miliar with the multitude of valuable studies on
living cells made hy investigators using the tis-

sue Gilne method and the method of micro-dis-
section, although in the case of these last two
methods such observations were not made on tis-
sues and cells in the living animal.

During all this period, the author had a persis-
tent desire to extend this mode of study to the
mammal. It was realized that the results ob-
tained with regard to the growth and behavior of
tissues of the lower vertebrates would not neces-
sarily be identical with the growth and behavior
of the same cells in mammals, although the diver-
gence could scarcely be expected to be as marked
as was suggested by one investigator, *vho, at the
height of the “lymphatic controversy,” after ad-
mitting that the growth by Sears of lymphatic
vessels had been proven for the tadpole’s tail,
stated that the problem then was to discover why
the tadpole’s tail differed, in this regard, from all
other regions in all other animals!

That a similar desire has been felt by other
workers is evidenced by the use of oblique or
vertical illumination for studies such as those on
the bloed vessels of the nail bed and other semi-
Opaque objects. The name of Vonwiller of Zu-
rich should be mentioned in connection with im-
provements in the use of this method. The mes-
eatery and omentum, objects used for much ex-
perimental work in the living animal, are adapted
to short-time observation only, while the bat’s
wing is too thick to be satisfactory for high power
cytological observations.

Since there was no natural transparent region
in the mammal available for such long continued,
high power microscopic studies in the living ani-
mal, under normal conditions, it seemed desirable
to create one.

It may be of interest to record the steps which
led up to the development of the method for in-
serting transparent chambers into rabbits’ ears.
The idea of using an artificial transparent cham-
ber come from the results obtained by Ziegler and
Maximow in inserting artificial chambers under
the skin, and leaving them for varying lengths of
time. In 1875 Ziegler made studies on the new
vessels and tissues which had grown into a space
between two coverslips inserted under the skin of
mammals, ard in 1902 Maximow gave a beauti-
ful description of the new tissues present in
celloidin chambers which were inserted and re-
moved at different intervals, and then fixed and
stained. Although both of these investigators
made their studies on fixed material their results
showed conclusively that new tissue includine
blood vessels, will invade the thin artificial spaces
mentioned above In 1910 somewhat nebulous
plans were formulated for placing such chambers
in a mammal so that a thin transparent space
could be watched continuously in the living animal.
About 1912, when Mrs. Clark was making some
micro-iniections the fine tip of a glass cannula
was accidentally broken off, and remained in her

266

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

finger. Several days later, when slight irritation
was noticed, the spot was examined under the
binocular microscope and the small glass tube re-
moved. It was noticed that capillaries had grown
into the lumen of the minute piece of glass tubing.
3eing unable at the time to think of ian arrange-
ment by which a laboratory mammal could be
kept still for a sufficient length of time to permit
the type of observation desired, | toyed with the
idea of attempting the installation of such a cham-
ber in the human finger. However, this experime tt
was not attempted, and it occurred to me that it
would be more desirable in every way to try the
operation first on the rabbit’s ear. This plan was
again postponed because of the lack of a satis-
factory scheme for holding the ear still dur‘nz
long observation pericds. About 1920, while
speculating upon the feasibility of such studies,
the suggestion was made by my brother, who had
had some experience in agricultural matters, that
the rabbit’s head might be put in a “‘stock,” as is
done with cattle. With this practical suggestion
the method of inserting transparent chambers in
rabbits’ ear was ready for development, and the
problem was suggested in 1924 to Dr. J. C. Sandi-
son, then a medical student at the Univers'ty of
Georgia.

Sandison carried on a number of experiments,
both at the University of Georgia and at the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, until finally, in 1928,
chambers were obtained with a sufficiently thin
space to permit of careful long-time observation
with high magnifications. Sandison was able to
make a number of observations on blood vessels
and blood cells, some of which have been pub-
lished, and he was also able to obtain new grow-
ing bone in a thin portion of such chambers fol-
lowing a transplant of endosteum at the time of
the original operation. Dr. Sandison then de-
cided, in spite of efforts to retain him, to carry
out his original intention to complete his surgical
training, and unfortunately left us.

Since 1928, a number of workers in the depart-
ment have been carrying on studies on living cells
and tissues using different varieties of transpar-
ent chambers inserted in rabbits’ ears. It was
soon discovered that a great deal of work would
he necessary before satisfactory chambers, adapt-
ed to different types of problems, which would
remain in the ear and in which a uniform space
could be retained, could be obtained with any-
thing like uniform success. The original chambers
were none of them permanent (four and one-half
months being the longest time during which
Sandison’s chambers remained in the ear). They
were also very easily infected and susceptible to
drying due to the permeability of the thin koda-
loid covers, while neither the extent nor the depth
of the thin areas of growth could be controlled.
A number of workers enthusiastically took hold

of the various problems involved, and many m>d-
ifications were tried out and improvements de-
veloped. In 1929, a five year grant from the
Rockefeller Foundation for Medical Research was
obtained (largely through the interest of the late
Dr. Richard M. Pierce), and still more rapid pro-
gress was assured.

It would take too long to recount, at this time,
all the subsequent steps in the development of the
method, all the various modifications which have
been tried out and adopted or abandoned. Each
worker contributed one or more suggestions, and
all successful ones were immediately adopted by
the whole group. By the winter of 1930, four suc-
cessful types of chambers had been developed and
tried out in a sufficient number of animals to dem-
onstrate that they satisfactorily met the require-
ments for different types of research. These four
chambers—the “bay” chamber, the “‘round table”
chamber, the ‘preformed tissue” chamber and the
“combination” chamber— have been described
(Clark, Kirby-Smith, Rex and Williams 30). Of
these four types, the “preformed tissue” chamber
and the “round table’ chamber (the latter de-
signed for the study of new-growing vessels and
tissues) have been standardized as to construc-
tion and dimensions and over sixty of each va-
riety have been successfully inserted in rabbits’
ears and studied. Eight of the “round table”
chambers, which were inserted from twelve to
sixteen months ago, are still in the ears and are
still gcod for microscopic observations.

In addition to the types of chambers described,
a new chamber, which might be called the “‘moat”
chamber (as you notice, all of these chambers
have names) has recently been developed. The
first ones of this kind were tried out by Dr. Hou,
of Peiping University, working in our laboratory,
and the construction has recently been developed
and improved by Mr. Richard Abell. This cham-
ber is adapted to the circulation of fluids of
known chemical constitution.

Again, a number of workers in the department
have been experimenting with different methods
of gaining access to “round table’? chambers for
the purpose of injecting minute quantities of solid
and semi-solid foreign substances, for the trans-
plantation of bits of organs and tissues from
other parts of the body into vascularized cham-
bers where their cytological characteristics could
be studied in the living condition, and also for the
micro-dissection of the new cells and tissues pres-
ent in the observation areas. Dr. Kirby-Smith,
Dr. J. Howard Smith, and Mr. W. J. Hitschler
have carried out successful experiments of this
kind, having on a number of occasions unsealed
the access hole in the bottom of the chamber, in-
jected or implanted small quantities of various
substances, and resealed it without causing hem-
orrhage or other visible injury to the tissue.

Avcust 29, 1931 ]

The latest improvement has been the use of de-
tached protective celluloid collars, which are quite
separate from the chamber proper and which
serve as effective splints, protecting the thin area
of new growth from undue strain, pressure or
tension. About twenty chambers with this im-
provement have been introduced into ears and
followed for several months, and we are con-
vinced that the growth of new vessels and other
tissues in such chambers is much more uniform
and stable.

Studies on the growth of blood vessels have
been made in over sixty standard chambers of
the “round table” variety. In this group the
growing capillaries started to invade the central
table area five to nine days after the operation;
in over one-half of the chambers they appeared
on the séventh day. The new vessels, which were
continuous with circulating vessels in the pre-
formed tissue, steadily invaded the central area
from the periphery until they met and anasto-
mosed across the center. Vascularization of the
table area was complete one to three weeks after
the first appearance of the new vessels. The rate
of invasion averaged .23 mm. per diem. In the
series of daily photographic records shown in the
lantern slides, the chamber was inserted on May
27 of this year; new growing capillaries appeared
on the central table on June 2 (6 days), and vas-
cularization was complete on June 16 (14 days)
The central table area measured 6.5 mm. in di-
ameter and its radius was 3.35 mm. The average
rate of advance of the new tissue was .232 mm.
per diem. In a series of standard chambers, all
having the same dimensions, there were varia-
tions in the rate of growth of new blood vessels
ranging from .1 to .6 mm. per diem. Various
factors which were found to influence the rate of
extension were, temperature, slight injuries which
caused small hemorrhages and accumulations of
macrophages, the position of the central table in
relation to the surrounding cartilage of the ear,
and individual variations in the circulation of
different rabbits.

During the period in which the new vessels and
other tissues are invading the central space a wide
variety of observations can be made. Among the
studies which have been carried out or are still un-
der investigation, IJ may mention the following:
studies on fibrin, on fibroblasts, on erythrocytes
and leucocytes (both inside and outside the ves-
sels), or macrophages and giant cells; studies on
the new formation of blood capillaries, on the
formation of adventitial and smooth muscle cells
on the walls of newly formed vessels, and 01 the
relation between the morphology of blocd ves-
sels and haemodynamics; studies on the growth
of lymphatic vessels and on the growth of nerves.
After the table has been completely vascularized

THE COLLECTING

NET 267

a tremendous variety of problems in morphology,
physiology, pharmacology, bacteriology, pathology
and parasitology can be studied. Only a small be-
ginning has been made in such investigations.

As the chambers remain longer in the ear and
the newly formed vessels and other tissues be-
come older, it has been possible to follow the
shiftings in the circulation of the area and the
associated changes in the pattern of the vascular
network, including such phenomena as the rise
and fall of veins, the development of large ar-
teries and the formation of companion veins, the
formation of jarterial anastomoses and of arterio-
venous anastomoses, and to study vascular con-
traction in relation to the regeneration of nerves.
We have also been able to study changes in the
lymphatic vessels.

Again, the problems which can be studied by

the method of transplantation of organs from
other more inaccessible parts of the body into
vascularized chambers also cover an immense
range. Already microscopic studies have been
made upon the growth of bone and of epidermis
in the chambers, and preliminary experiments up-
on the transplantation of liver and kidney tissue
and of bone marrow have been undertaken.

Although many of the studies opened up to in-
vestigation in the living animal by these methods
have barely been started, while still more of them
have merely been planned, it has been possible
to carry out a few which are fairly complete. For
example, in addition to general studies on the
growth of blood vessels already referred to, care-
ful observations, many of them with the oil-im-
mersion lens, with daily photographic and camera
lucida records, have been made upon the growth
of blood vessels and lymphatic capillaries, fol-
lowing the same regions for several months. It
has been possible to see with great distinctness,
in the living mammal, the mode of growth and the
cytological characteristics of both of these types
of capillaries and to observe with certainty that,
in both cases, the new vessels grow by sprouting
of endothelium from that already pe in the
same manner as that described for the vessels of
living amphibian larvae. In addition many inter-
esting differences in the morphology and in the
physiological ‘behavior of mammalian vessels as
compared with those of amphibians were ob-
served.

(Lantern slides of photographic records, taken
with both low and high magnifications, of the
living cells and tissues present in the transparent
chambers inserted in rabbits’ ears were shown;
a reel of motion pictures showing the different
types of circulation in arteries, veins and capil-
laries, the back and forth movement of cells inside
lymphatic capillaries, and the shapes, positions,
and movement of the various types of cells in the

268

THE, COLLECRING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 50

blood stream was also shown. )

In conclusion, I wish to explain that, in giving
this report of studies on the rabbit’s ear cham-
bers, I am acting as spokesman for a devoted
group of collaborators, each of whom has made
important contributions to the development of
the method, and whose names are: Dr. J. C.
Sandison, Mrs. E. R. Clark, Dr. H. T. Kirby-
Smith, Dr. R. O. Rex, Dr. R. G. Williams, Dr.

E. A. Swenson (responsible for the motion pic-
tures), Mr. W. J. Hitschler, Mr. R. O. Abell,
Dr. J. Howard Smith, Mrs. D. W. Wilson, Dr.
L. P. Schenck, Mr. and Mrs. B. Varian (who
have taken the microphotographs ), Miss Legallais
(who constructs the chambers and has charge of
the operating room), and Mrs. L. Bentz whose
devoted work in raising and caring for the rabbits
is an invaluable part of the program.

LOCAL AND CORRELATIVE GENE EFFECTS IN MOSAICS OF HABROBRACON
Dr. P. W. WHITING

Associate Professor of Zoology, University of Pittsburgh

Extensive studies of gynandromorphs and
other mosaics in Drosophila have been carried
out in the past by Morgan, Mrs. Morgan, Bridges,
Dobzhansky, ete. The theory of chromosome
elimination in early development seems to fit most
of these cases. To explain gynandromorphism in
Hymenoptera various ideas have been advanced
by Morgan, Boveri, and others. These include
the theories of polyspermy and different hypo-
theses in regard to egg binuclearity. In 1927,
Goldschmidt postulated egg binuclearity in the silk
worm, Bombyx. Cytological evidence was later
found indicating fertilization of two nuclei in one
egg. Previously I had advanced a somewhat sim-
ilar theory to explain mosaicism in Habrobracon.

A female heterozygous for a certain trait, e. g.
recessive orange eye color, isolated as a virgin,
ordinarily produces eggs which develop partheno-
genetically into males of the two expected classes.
Occasionally there are found males which are
mosaics of the two traits carried by the mother.
I assume that in such a case we have post-reduc-
tion with reference to these allelomorphic factors.
The second polar body remains in the egg along
with the egg nucleus and each takes part in par-
thenogenetic cleavage. If one of these nuclei is
fertilized, a gynandromorph results, the fusion
nucleus giving rise to female parts, the unfertil-
ized to male. Female parts are therefore bipar-
ental, male parts maternal.

Morgan and Bridges in the early work on gynan-
dromorphs of Drosophila noted the striking fact
that the male and female parts and their sex-
linked characters are strictly self-determining, “no
matter how large or how small a region may be, it
is not interfered with by the aspirations of its
neighbors, nor is it overruled by the action of the
gonads.” z

The majority of mosaics that have been ob-
tained in Habrobracon are very clear cut and rep:
resent combinations of a great variety of traits.
Many of the male mosaics show mutant characters
that have been obtained in the course of X-radia-

tion experiments. I would like to take this oppor-
tunity to acknowledge support from the Com-
mittee on Effects of Radiation on Living Organ-
isms of the National Research Council which has
aided materially in the course of this work.

Despite the fact that in regard to most traits
the genetically different regions of the mosaics ap-
pear quite distinct and self-determining, a number
of instances have arisen in which the characters
tend to intergrade, in which there is apparently
modification of one part by another.

This has long been noted in eye color. Eyes
which are genetically mosaic for black (wild type)
and the mutant form ivory do not show clear cut
difference between the two regions but grade
from black through red or orange. Usually the
ivory does not appear as such but the lighter area
of the eye is suffused with red color resembling
the allelomorphic trait, orange. In several cases
the mosaicism is shown only by breeding tests;
the insect breeds as black and the eyes, although
genetically ivory, are entirely orange in appear-
ance.

Other cases of correlative gene effects may be
seen in mosaics for stumpy. This factor from an
X-ray mutation reduces the tarsi to mere vestiges
but in mosaic males from heterozygous mothers
the stumpy legs are somatically intermediate,
“semi-stumpy ”.

Another instance is that of fused. This muta-
tion has occurred independently at least three
times but in no case from X-raying. The tarsal
segments and the antennal segments are fused to-
gether, lacking joints entirely. Mosaic males
have fused regions “semi-fused”, so that seg-
mentation appears to a greater or less extent.

Exceptions to the rule of self-determination
have appeared in Drosophila, vermilion eye color
(Sturtevant), bar eye (Bonnier), ebony body
color (Stern) and recently, in gynandromorphs
of Drosophila simulans, Dobzhansky has found
modifications of form and color in gonads and
genital ducts.

Aucust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

269

GENETIC STUDIES ON SELECTIVE SEGREGATION OF CHROMOSOMES IN SCIARA
Dr. HELEN BERENICE SMITH
Research Assistant to Dr. C. W. Metz, Carnegie Institution of Washington

The genus Sciara belongs to the group of so-
called fungus gnats. These flies are small and
relatively inconspicuous because of their dark
color. About a dozen species have been studied
in the laboratory of Dr. C. W. Metz, and certain
features have proved especially interesting from
the standpoint of chromosome behavior.

Before presenting the results of recent genetic
studies, I should like to review briefly certain
features of the early work which have direct
bearing on the subject I wish to discuss this
evening. One of the peculiarities first observed
is the presence of an apparently monocentric
mitosis which occurs as a normal process at the
first spermatocyte division in all the species of
Sciana studied thus far. Although the mitotic
figure is unipolar, there is a precise segregation
of chromosomes. Some go regularly toward the
pole, while others go in the opposite direction,
ultimately coming together at a point opposite
the pole, after being deflected in their course by
the periphery of the cell. This latter group is
cast off in a bud and takes no further part in
development.

The two largest chromosomes go regularly to-
ward the pole ; these are termed “limited” chromo-
somes and will be considered presently. The
other chromosomes are present in pairs, though
not united in synapsis. These segregate in such
a way that one member of each pair goes toward
the pole and the other away from it, thus ac-
complishing an accurate segregation. All of the
chromosomes, regardless of their direction of
movement, have spindle fibers extending toward
the visible pole.

A genetic study of Sciara capraphila was
undertaken with a view to following the behavior
of all of the chromosomes of one species. This
could be done if enough mutant characters were
secured so that each pair of chromosomes could
be identified by at least one gene.

The typical chromosome group comprises ten
chromosomes, of which two are very large and
easily recognized. Formerly these were thought
to occur in males only, but more recently they
have been found to be present in the germ line
of both sexes, although absent from the soma.
Since these “limited’’ chromosomes are not pres-
ent in the soma, they cannot be identified by
means of somatic mutant characters ; consequent-
ly I shall leave them out of the present account.
Earlier work indicates that they contain relative-
ly few genes and that they are not true sex

chromosomes. Disregarding this pair, we are
left with the problem of determining the mode
of segregation of the remaining four pairs.

The first indication of the type of segregation
occurring came from a study of the recessive
character truncate wings by Dr. Metz. This
character was inherited in such a way as to indi-
cate that during the first spermatocyte division
the paternal member of that particular chromo-
some pair was regularly eliminated, while the ma-
ternal member went toward the pole and was
transmitted. In other words, the male trans-
mitted only the chromosomes derived from his
mother. This suggested that as regards the auto-
somes the difference in behavior of homologous
chromosomes in this monocentric figure might be
due in some way to influences impressed on the
chromosomes by the sex of the parents. The sub-
sequent studies along this line have been designed
to test this hypothesis.

A second chromosome pair was identified when
two characters were found which showed sex-
linked inheritance. This indicated that the sex
chromosome complex of the female was XX, and
of the male was XY. However, recently the
male soma was found to contain only seven chro-
mosomes, suggesting that possibly the male has
no Y chromosome but has a somatic constitution
of XO and a germ cell constitution of XX. If
this is the case, then segregation of the sex chro-
mosome follows the same course as the auto-
somes. If, on the other hand, the male proves
to be XY, then random segregation would have
to be assumed for this pair. Since this question
has been discussed recently in two papers (Metz
Biol. Centr.; Metz and Schmuk, Proc. Nat. Acad.
Sci.) I will not attempt to discuss it here, except
to say that at present the question must be left
open.

In each of two other species of Sciara, a char-
acter was found which was inherited in the same
way as truncate wings, suggesting that perhaps
this type of segregation was characteristic. The
task of demonstrating this, however, was very
laborious because of the difficulty in securing
satisfactory mutations. This is due in part to the
structural characteristics of the fly (which sare
such as to conceal all except the most obvious
changes) and in part to the type of inheritance
in this species; recessive characters tend to be
concealed because the progenies are essentially
unisexual (which makes sib matings rare) and
because selective segregation occurs in the male,

270 DHE COLEECTING Ning

[ Vou. VI. No. 50

which prevents transmission of paternal chanzc-
teristics.

At the time when the experiments I am re-
porting were undertaken, two pairs of autosomes
had not yet been studied. X-rays were used in an
effort to secure more characters; several new
mutants arose, all of which were wing peculiari-
ties. In analyzing each new mutation, tests were
made to determine the following points: whether
the character was dominant or recessive; sex-
linked or autosomal; and whether the male trans-
mitted maternal and paternal characteristics
equally. Three mutants were studied, viz., curly,
delta, and blister. All were dominant, autosomal
characters, and without exception the males tnans-
mitted only the characters received from their
mothers, showing clearly a selective type of seg-
regation,

Since backcrosses of heterozygous males can-
not be made as in Drosophila, the tests for link-
age were altered accordingly. In testing the re-
cessive character truncate with a dominant such
as. curly, truncate females were crossed to curly
males (sons of curly mothers). Then the heter-
ozygous daughters were mated to truncate males
from pure stock, and the progeny were counted.

In testing two dominants together, such as curly
and delta, curly females were mated to delta
males (sons of delta mothers), and the heterozy-
gous daughters were outcrossed to normal males.
The reciprocal crosses were made in both types
of tests.

Curly, delta, and blister were each tested with
truncate, and in every case, four definite classes
of progeny arose in such numbers as to indicate
that the characters probably were not linked to
truncate. Tests were made of curly and delta
with similar results, making it seem probable
that curly and delta were not linked. If such is

actually the case, then we have located genes in
three different pairs of autosomes, which are rep-
resented by the three characters truncate, curly,
and delta.

Blister was found to segregate independently
when tested with curly, but when tested with delta
only two types of progeny arose. The offspring
were of two classes, either normal and blister, or
normal and delta. The two characters have a
similar effect on the fly; their difference seems
to be one of degree only. Since no progenies
arose consisting entirely of mutant flies, it is ap-
parently impossible to get the two characters to-
gether in one fly. It may be that blister and
delta are in the same chromosome pair.

The possibility remains that truncate, curly, and
delta may be linked, but that they show such a
high rate of crossing-over as to obscure this fret.
Further tests with more characters are needed to
settle this question. But at least we know that all
four of the characters studied show the same type
of inheritance, the same selective segregation in
the male.

An additional recessive character (round) re-
cently found has not yet been tested for linkage,
but it shows the same type of inheritance as the
other autosomal characters. Likewise two other
characters in two other species behave in the same
manner. This seems particularly significant in
view of the fact that if any chromosomes exhibit-
ed random segregation they should be more readi-
ly detected by means of mutant characters. These
facts taken together indicate that all the auto-
somes segregate in the same selective fashion,
thus supporting the hypothesis that the sex of the
parent influences the behavior of homologous
chromosomes at the monocentric division. It is
possible that the same may prove true of the sex
chromosomes and of “limited” chromosomes also.

PHOSPHO-CREATIN IN RELATION TO NERVE ACTIVITY
Dr. R. W. Grrarp
Associate Professor of Physiology, University of Chicago

When ian isolated vertebrate nerve is tetanized,
it consumes an extra amount of oxygen and
liberates extra heat. The actual values agree
when calculated for the oxidation of an ordinary
food substance, so it is established that all the
energy for nerve conduction ultimately derives
from oxidations. The extra heat and respira-
tion, however, outlast the actual pericd of con-
duction by many minutes, so that some mechaa-
ism for relating the delayed energy liberation to
the actual conduction is required. Further, for
a few thousandths of a second after activity, a
nerve is rapidly changing from a non-excitable to
a fully functional state, during the refractory per-
iod. A schematic equation series was suggested

some years ago to correlate these three phases
of activity and recovery, as follows:

(1) CA + A+ X __ conduction

(2) C+A-+ ECA refractory period

(3) X + O, > CO.+E delayed recovery

Here an explosive breakdown of CA is asso-
ciated with conduction. The substance is rebuilt
during the refractory period with the aid of
energy made available by the oxidation of an in-
termediate decomposit‘on product of CA during
the late recovery stage. It wns believed at this
time that CA might represent a hexose phosphate,
which led to studies on nerve phosphates. T'ur-
ther work demonstrated, however, that carbo-
hydrate does not enter into the active metabolism

Avucust 29, 1931 ]

of nerve, and the phosphate studies showed the
presence of a fraction behaving like phospho-crea-
tin. Miss Tupikow and I, therefore, undertook
to study creatin in nerve to obtain the most direct
evidence possible as to changes in phospho-
creatin.

Nerves were extracted with iced trichloracetic
ecid, alcohol was added to the extract, and phos-
yho-creatin precipitated as a barium salt, leaving
the free creatinin solution. The two fractions
were separately determined after conversion to
creatinin by the picric acid method. The distribu-
tion of creatin in the free and bound fractions
was then determined under a variety of con-
ditions. Further, it appeared that a small amount
of creatin remained as a residual fraction in the
tissue bulk. The residual fraction is probably
hHeund to some higher molecule, since it has
proved refractory to extraction by any method
short of prolonged acid hydrolysis.

In the fresh nerve, about one-fifth of the total
creatin is residual, two-fifths are free, and two-
fifths hound. The total amount obtained by di-
rect analysis without fractionation, or as the sum
of the fractions, averages about 160 milligrams
per cent in the frog’s sciatic, though very marked
seasonal variations occur. During rest in oxygen,
the bound fraction, if anything, slightly increase:.
Under janaerobie conditions the bound fraction ‘s
decreased and free creatin liberated. In twenty-
four hours over half the bound creatin disappears,
and most of this change occurs within an hour or
two. Even in the presence of oxygen, when respi-
ratory inhibitors are present a similar breakdown
eccurs. Thus, HCN, HeS and CO all lend to a
breakdown of bound creatin similar to that of
anoxia, usually*reaching a maximum loss in half
en hour or less. The breakdown produced

by HeS is irreversible. That due to the
others, is easily reversed by removing the
substance and replacing oxygen. The CO

breakdown may also be reversed by bright light

271

even though 98 per cent CO, 2 per cent oxygen
remains present. COs, which has been shown to
interfere with metabolic reactions in nerve, also
leads to a breakdown of bound creatin.

Finally, even in an adequate oxygen supply
tetanization of the nerve also leads to a definite
breakdown of the bound fraction with restora-
tion during rest in oxygen. The changes in bound
creatin during activity or anoxia agree well with
the previously determined changes in phosphate
when both are calculated as due to changes in
phospho-creatin, so that it may be concluded that
this substance is, in fact, involved.

Muscle phospho-creatin responds to all the
ahove conditions as does nerve, though more
readily. Methylene blue, however, markedly
breaks down the phospho-creatin of muscle, while
not affecting that of nerve.

The results indicate that all conditions leading
to depressed nerve function are associated with
breakdown of phospho-creatin ; or, in other words,
a breakdown of phospho-creatin in nerve is as-
sociated with diminished irritability, prolonged
refractory period, less intense conducted impulses,
etc. It is tempting to suggest that the original
equations he retained with ia slightly altered sig-
nificance attributed to the symbols. Thus, if CA
be taken to represent phospho-creatin, which
breaks down during conduction to free creatin and
phosphate with the X indicating some unknown
coupling mechanism for setting off reaction (3),
if reaction (2) be the re-formation of phospho-
creatin during the refractory period with the aid
of energy liberated during reaction (3), and if
reaction (3) during the late recovery period re-
present the liberation of energy by oxidation of
some food stuff—quite possibly, lipin—the new
data are brought into harmony with all the earlier -
material. Numerous quantitative considerations,
however, must be experimentally met before such
a scheme becomes more than a working hypo-
thesis.

THE EFFECT OF SULPHYDRYL COMPOUNDS UPON REGENERATIVE GROWTH
Dr. K. B. CoLpDWATER
Instructor in Zoology, University of Missouri

Tn normal development the glutathione content
ef the embryos of the chick and rat has been

found by a number of investigators to be if-'
versely proportional to the age of the embryo. '

More recently Hammett has proposed the hypo-
thesis that the —SH group is an “essential stim-
ulus to cell proliferation”. If such is the case,
the sulphydryl compounds appear to be intimately
related to the development of the organism and
its constituent parts. Regenerative development
should show similar relationships.

Observations were therefore made on the nitro-
prusside test for the —SH group given by re-
generating tissues, and on the glutathione content
of normal and regenerating planarians. The ef-
fect of glutathione and other sulphydryl com-
pounds upon the rate of regeneration of plan-
arians and the annelid Tubifex was tested. ;

The nitroprusside reaction which may be inter-
preted as indicating the presence of protein fixed,
insoluble —SH groups was applied to regenerat-
ing tissues of Hydra, planarians, Tubifex, and the

272

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

regenerating tadpole’s tail, The test showed a
greater concentration of sulphydryl in regenerat-
ing tissues as compared with adjacent non-regen-
erating tissues. A single series of determination
of the glutathione content of normal and regen-
erating Planaria maculata was made by the Tun-
nicliffe iodine titration method. An increase of
the content of reduced glutathione was found
during the early period of regeneration. This in-
crease coincides with the period of active cell di-
vision. A substantial decrease was noted in the
later stages of regeneration. The determinations
also showed a progressive increase in the gluta-
thione content of normal planarians during the
period of resorption of sexual reproductive organs
and inauguration of the period of fission.

The above observations indicated that the —SH
group is in some way related to the regenerative
processes, and the effect of sulphydryl compounds
on the rate of regeneration in Planaria maculata,
Procotyla fluviatilis and Tubifex tubifex was
tested. No acceleration cf the rate of regenera-
tion of tail pieces was obtained in Planaria macu-
lata.. No head formation was observed in either
control or test regenerating tail pieces of Procotyla
fluviatilis.

The rate of regeneration of posterior segments
of the annelid Tubifex tubifex was found to be
accelerated by glutathione, cysteine and thioglycol-
lic acid in appropriate concentnations. This ac-
celeration was largely confined to the first few
days of regeneration.

The rate of regeneration of Tubifex is marked-
ly inhibited by four to five weeks’ starvation.
Treatment of such starved individuals with —SH
compounds during regeneration resulted in an
increase of about 100 to 500 per cent in the rate
of regeneration as compared to corresponding
starved controls.

The figures of comparison were averages of
counts of the regenerated segments and measure-
ments of the length of the regenerated areas of
large numbers of worms.

The capacity for regeneration in Tubifex is in-
hibited or completely destroyed by X-ray ex-
posures of sufficient intensity. Sulphydryl com-
pounds do not influence this inhibition or destruc-
tion of the capacity for regeneration by X-rays.

The acceleration of the rate of regeneration in
Tubifex might be interpreted as confirming Ham-
mett’s hypothesis. However, there are certain
other explanations which may be suggested. Since
the regenerants were kept in standing water,
—SH compounds may induce an oxidation of
toxic excretory products which would possibly
inhibit growth. Sulphur compounds are known
to be utilized in certain types of detoxications in
the organism. With prolonged starvation and the
accompanying tissue breakdown there might
plausibly be an accumulation of inhibitory sub-
stances which are eliminated only after conjuga-
tion with sulphur. Sulphydryl compounds are
considered important in this type of detoxication.

RECOVERY FROM X-RAY EFFECTS AS OBSERVED IN THE ARBACIA EGG
Dr. P. S. HENSHAW
Biophysical Laboratory, Memorial Hospital, New York City

In studying the effects of radiation on living
material one is dealing with a causative agent
that alters certain kinds of physiological activity.
Many effects produced by X-rays or gamma rays
can be described qualitatively, as morphological
or as functional changes. But in order to com-
pare such things as the effectiveness of different
wave lengths or intensities of radiation, it is
necessary to establish quantitative relationships
between the amount of effecting agent used and
the effect observed. Fortunately, it has become
possible during the past few years to determine
dosages of radiation with a fair degree of ac-
curacy by measuring the ionization that a given
beam produces in free air. Obtaining a quantita-
tively-measurable biological response to radiation
is, however, a more difficult matter. lonizing
radiations produce many biological changes, but
very few of the responses lend themselves tu ac-
curate measurement. Such things as reddening
of the human skin, stunting in growth of plantlets
and survival in Dresophila and Ascaris eggs, etc.,
have been used, but because of the indefiniteness

of end points, changes in sensitivity, etc., none
of these has been found entirely suitable as a bio-
logical test object. In search for something bet-
ter, marine invertebrate eggs were tested.

It was found that around 50,000 Roentgen
units were required to prevent the eggs of Ar-
bacia from fertilizing and undergoing cleavage.
Because of the high resistance of this material
survival was not a good end point to use. Fur-
ther investigation, however, indicated that the
onset of the first cleavage was delayed by ex-
posure of the eggs to X-rays before fertilization,
and it was found that with an increase in dosage
there was a corresponding increase in the amount
of delay. By developing methods of determining
the cleavage time accurately a quantitative meas-
ure of biological effect was at hand for the in-
stant when the eggs are fertilized.

The time that is usually required for the first
cleavage to occur in Arbacia eggs after fertiliza-
tion at room temperature is around 55 minutes.
Experiments showed that 40 to 60 minutes’ ex-
posure (25,000 to 31,000 r units) to the unfiltered

August 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 273

radiation from a Coolidge tungsten target air-
cooled tube, maintained at 130 kv. and 5 ma.,
was sufficient to double the cleavage time. Vialues
varied from day to day, so different exposures
were always made on the same collection of eggs.

Plotting the values thus obtained from the dif-
ferent experiments agjainst the dose administered
gave curves that were similar in shape, but which
varied in slope. By following suggestions ob-
tained from the experiments, samples of eggs
were fertilized at different periods after irradia-
tion. This led to the very interesting discovery
that a process of recovery began as soon as any
effect was produced. That is, the X-ray effect
was being lost.

By thoroughly developing the data obtained,
several interesting facts were disclosed: (1) By
plotting logarithmically the cleavage retardation
for different doses at different periods after ir-
radiation against the dosage on a natural scale, it
was found that the percentage relationship of the
degrees of effect was maintained after irradiation
irrespective of the recovery. (2) Accordingly, it
followed that the rate of recovery was the same
for all degrees of effect produced. (3) Plotting
a summary curve of recovery on semilogarithmic
paper indicated that the rate was governed by
the exponential law.

Although the data fit this specific relationship
very closely, the latter statement is as yet not
entirely justified. Indeed, it would be very un-
usual to find such a simple law governing the
action of radiations in any living process. It is
puzzling to think whether the observed recovery
process is a purely physical phenomenon involy-
ing the stabilization of an equilibrium, or whether
it is a process involving vital activity. In bio-
logical repair, one usually thinks of wound re-
pair which necessitates the multiplication of cells
and a modification of the nature and relationship
of the surrounding tissues. Such repair usually
requires a period of days or weeks. In this ex-
periment, however, a damage has been produced
not in a tissue but a single cell, and in such a way
that trauma is not evident. The injury is most
likely dispersed throughout the whole system in
the form of molecular and atomic injury. It is
not possible to say at present whether biological
activity as distinguished from non-biological ac-
tivity can repair such injury. Speculation is not
profitable, so at this point more concrete experi-
mental evidence regarding the nature of the re-
covery from X-ray effects must be awaited. How-
ever, from the evidence already set forth, it seems
perfectly plain that any general explanation of
the biological effects of X-rays will have to allow
also for reversibility in some effects produced.

ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS INTHE EGGS OF THE PACIFIC COAST
ECHIUROID, URECHIS CAUPO
Dr. ALBERT TYLER
Instructor in Embryology, California Institute of Technology

The eggs of the echiuroid, Urechis, may be ac-
tivated by various hypotonic solutions ranging
from 80 per cent. sea water to distilled water.
Two types of activated eggs appear as a result
of the treatment. In one type the initial changes
undergone by the egg are indistinguishable from
the corresponding changes in normally fertilized
eggs. For this type the breakdown of the germ-
inal vesicle, the rounding out of the indentation,
the elevation of the membrane, and the extrusion
of the polar bodies take place in the same manner
and on the same time schedule (allowing for the
time of treatment) as for the fertilized egg. How-
ever, practically none of the eggs of this type
divide.

The other type of egg obtained by artificial
treatment undergoes initial changes that are quite
different from those induced by the sperm. The
eggs of this type remain indented for about fif-
teen to twenty minutes after the others have given
off the second polar body. The only change that
occurs up to that time is the dissolution of the
germinal vesicle. They then begin to round up
and elevate membranes, but they extrude no polar
bodies. However, practically all the eggs of this

type cleave, and develop into swimming embryos.
A small number (less than one per cent.) of the
embryos are normal top swimmers indistinguish-
able from those produced by normally fertilized
eggs.

The results of observations on the polarity oz
fertilized and artificially activated eggs show that
the innermost point of the indentation marks the
pole of both. Thus the low percentage of normal
development of the pathenogenetic eggs cannot be
attributed to a disturbance in the polarity of the
egg. But the low percentage of normal develop-
ment can be accounted for by assuming that the
action of the sperm insures the development of
bilateral symmetry in the embryo, whereas in its
absence the establishment of bilateral symmetry
is more of a matter of chance. Observations on
the relation of the entrance point of the sperm to
the first cleavage plane show 71 per cent. of ex-
act coincidence. Since the first cleavage plane
bears a definite relation to the plane of bilateral
symmetry, it appears that the sperm is instru-
mental in determining bilateral symmetry. The
above assumption would also account for the ap-
pearance of radially symmetrical embryos among

274 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vou. VI. No. 50

the larvae of artificially activated eggs.

The relative percentages in which the two types
of artificially activated eggs occur vary in a defi-
nite manner with the length of exposure to the di-
lute sea water. For any dilution of sea water from
45 to 75 per cent. the total activation first increas-
es with the length of exposure until it reaches 100
per cent. and then returns more slowly to zero
per cent. The maximum of 100 per cent. activa-
tion is obtained more rapidly with the more
strongly hypotonic solutions. For example the
maximum is obtained in 314 minutes with 75
per cent. sea water and in one minute with 45
per cent. sea water. The variation of total activa-
tion with time of exposure thus gives a skew dis-
tribution curve, which is shifted to the left for
the more strongly hypotonic solutions. However
when the total activation is plotted against the
average volume attained at various times of ex-
posure, fairly symmetrical distribution curves are
obtained which are roughly identical for the
different hypotonic solutions.

When the eggs are exposed to the dilute sea
water for a length of time that results in 100 per
cent. activation, it is found that all of the eggs
are of the first tvpe described above. They all
give off both polar bedies, but none of the eggs
divide. However to either side of this “optimum
exposure” increasing numbers of eggs of the sec-
ond type are obtained. These eggs produce no
polar bodies, but practically all of them divide.
This leads to an inverse relation between the total
percentage of activation and the percentage of
cleavage, such that when a low percentage of «ac-
tivation is obtained practically all of the activated
eggs divide, but as the percentage of activation
increases fewer of the activated eggs divide, un-
til at 100 per cent activation none of the eggs di-
vide. Similarly to the right of the maximum
point as the percentage of activation decreases the

BICLOGICAL SPECTRUM AND

percentage of cleavage (of the activated eggs)
rises.

Due to this inverse relation between cleavage
and total activation it is impossible to find a time
of exposure to the hypotonic solution that will re-
sult in all of the eggs dividing. However since
the ability of the artificially activated egg to di-
vide was found to depend upon the failure to ex-
trude polar bodies it seemed likely that suppres-
sion of the polar bodies by means of a second
treatment should enable those eggs to di-
vide that ordinarily would not do so. At-
tempts were therefore made to suppress
the polar bodies of the artificially acti-
vated eggs that would ordinarily produce them.
These eggs are of the first type described above
and can be distinguished from the type of egg
that extrudes no polar bodies, even before the
time of the polar division. Also by using lengths
of exposure that give 100 per cent. activation,
only eggs of this type are obtained. Various
agents, such as ether, low temperature, hyper-
tonic and hypotonic sea water were used for the
second treatment, but the hypotonic solution was
found to be the most effective in suppressing the
polar bodies. It was found that when the polar
bodies are suppressed by means of a second treat-
ment, most of the eggs so treated do actually di-
vide. When the second treatment is applied after
the appearance of the polar bodies, no cleavage is
obtained. The polar bodies could be suppressed in
practically all of the eggs by a second treatment
with 55 or with 60 per cent. sea water starting
about eight minutes before the polar bodies are
due to appear and continuing until about five or
more minutes after the second polar body appears
in the controls. As high as 85 per cent. of cleav-
age has been obtained after such a second treat-
ment whereas the control eggs show no cleavage
at all.

M-RAYS

Dr. Dmitry N. Borop1n
Independent Investigator, Yonkers, New York

My work on M-rays (mitogenetic rays), dis-
covered by Gurwitsch, was directed along three
main lines: (1) the improvement of technique in
detection of M-radiation; (b) the search for the
most demonstrative evidence; and (c) the study
of the biological and physical properties of
M-rays.

So far the emanation of M-rays has been
studied from seventy different biological ob-
jects, including several bacteria, yeasts, different
plant tissues, animal tissues, blood, muscles,
nerves, embryonic tissues, chicken embryo yolk,
sea urchin eggs, Drosophila larvae and pupae,
haemolymph of a crab, ete. Two methods have

been used in the past for the detection of M-rays:
the onion root method and the yeast budding
method. Two similar yeast cultures on agar
blocks in a moist chamher comprise the neceessary
set up if the yeast budding method is used. One
culture serves as a “detector” and is exposed
through a quartz plate to some biological object
used as a “sender”; the second identical culture
serves as a control. The budding cells are count-
ed, and the percentage of budding is estimated
separately in the exposed and the unexposed cul-
tures, and the induction percentage, “Ind. %”. is
estimated by a comparison of the exposed with
the unexposed. The yeast budding method is

Aucust 29, 1931 }

THE COLLECTING NET

275

very sensitive and requires relatively few hours
for experimenting and counting. However, both
methods are not very demonstrative,

In order to obtain more demonstrative evi-
dence, I applied a ‘“‘planimetric drop culture meth-
cd.” Drep cultures of yeast were used by me
independently (1928) and by Baroa (1930).
Two hanging drops of maltose medium inoculated
with yeast are placed in a miniature moist cham-
ber, with a botiom of crystalline quartz. One
drop of each pair is exposed to the biological ob-
ject through the quartz bottom, the other serv-
ing as a control. The relative rate of growth of
the yeast colony in the exposed drop serves as
the criterion for the determination of the pres-
ence of M-rays. The drops were photographed
after 12, 24, 36, 48 and 60 hours. The area of
each maltose drop (the amount of food available)
was then measured with a planimeter. Measure-
ments were made of equally shaded areas of the
yeast colony in both drops, experiment and con-
trol. The ratio of the size of the yeast colony to
that of the mother drop was estimated. The dif-
ference between the ratios obtained was ccm-
buted with the ratio for the control, to secure a
measure of the effect of induction based on the
amount of growth in the control. The curves
characteristic of the growth of exposed and coa-
trol yeast colonies were found for two species:
Z. Pombe and S. ellipsoideus. The curves show
that the maximum stimulatory effect of M-rays
on the growth of yeast occurs at 12-48 hours.
This difference decreases after 60 hours. As
senders, the yeast, S. ellipsoideus, and the bac-
terium, Phyt. tumefaciens, were used. The plan-
imetric drop culture method was first demon-
strated at the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science meeting in Cleveland, Oh‘o,
in December, 1930. At the present time, this is
the most demonstrative biological method for the
detection of M-rays, but it is not very sensitive.

Agar cultures of three different yeast species
were used as detectors in a set of my ex-
periments on biophysical properties of M-rays.
The mercury vapor lamp, the aluminum and the
aluminum-zine spark gap were used as sources
of monochromat‘c ultra-violet radiation, or phys-
ical senders. The agar cultures of yeast were
placed against different spectrum lines. Thirteen
mercury lines from 1849 to 2804 A. U., 5 alumi-
num spark lines from 1930 to 2816 A. U. and
6 aluminum-zine lines from 1850 to 2801 A. U.
all gave a high induction percentage in the yeast
growth. Spectrum lines less than 2004 A. U. also
gave induction, but the exposure had to be longer.
No limit in the shorter wave length region has
been found. Spectrum lines from 2857 to 3650
A. U. do not give an induction effect. If the ex-
posure is short from 0.01 second to 0.1 second,

but repeated periodically at intervals of from 0.01
second to a few minutes, a given degree of induc-
tion effect is obtainable in a shorter gross as well
as a shorter net time of exposure. A yeast col-
ony used as a sender also affects another yeast
colony used as a detector in a shorter period of
time (both net and gross) if the exposure against
each other is interrupted by a revolving disc
placed between the two yeast colonies, as com-
pared with uninterrupted exposure of sim/lar
colonies. Further experiments showed that the
living cells respond to the adequate wave lengths
combined with the rhythm of the periods of ex-
posure and interruption. The ratio of the time
of ia single exposure to the time of the following
pause in this rhythm I call the ‘‘bio-quantum.”
For each biological object used as a detector there
is an optimum ratio called the individual biologi-
cal quantum, to which it responds by the greatest
increase in the tempo ef cell division.

An isolated frog heart, muscle in tetanus, or
ia colony of B. acidi-lactici, when used as senders
of M-rays through a quartz spectzograph with
interruption by a revolving disc with a slit, create
definite induction in yeast cultures placed on agar
blocks in the path of the emerging spectrum.
Such induction between 2000 and 2400 A. U. was
obtained first by Frank (1929) from the Sartorius
of a frog in tetanus as a sender and confirmed by
me the same year, and extended to a wider range
—namely, 1857 to 2700 A. U. I observed that
M-rays are not monochromatic and create a “bio-
logical spectrum” which is not the same for dif-
ferent biological objects used as senders. The
biological spectra obtained by me from the three
different objects mentioned are not identical. A
muscle, Sartorius of a bull frog, in tetanus in a
quartz chamber produced induction in the yeast
cultures between 1849 and 1942, and 2026 and
2345 A. U. An isolated heart of the same frog
produced two wider bands of induction between
1849 and 2150 A. U., and between 2262 and 2400
A. U. B. acidi-lactici gave a band from 1942 and
2026 A. U. and from 2262 to 2269, and near 2345
and 2378 A. U. The biological spectrum must be
molecular and not atomic. The first indication of
a spectral character of radiation from the three
biological objects mentioned was obtained by m2
two years before the similar results obtained and
the detailed study made by Kannegiesser and
Lydia Gurwitsch (1931) were published. The
expression “biological spectrum” for the identifi-
cation of this phenomenon was applied by me be-
fore the other terminology was created by the
afore-mentioned investigators. The term “bio-
logical spectrum” was introduced at the Inter-
national Congress of Physiology, held in Cambh-
ridge, Massachusetts, in the Fall of 1929. A hio-
logical spectrum is an analysis of non-mono-

276

THE COLEBCRING NET

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

chromatic M-rays emanating from a defnite bio-
logical object (sender) by means of a yeast bud-
ding method through a quartz spectrograph; the
intensity of bands is indicated by the induction
percentage of yeast budding.

It seems that M-rays are rot emanating con-
stantly from a living cell or tissue but in an inter-
rupted form and appear in some individual
quanta, the number and prepert es of which are
to be studied. The biological spectrum in combi-
nation with the bio-quantum may add more to
the understanding and explanation of life proces-
ses of development and functioaing, being closely

connected with the molecular structure of the
smallest units of life. My experiments on the
bicphysical effect of interrupted radiation and bio-
logical spectroscopy and spectrography were car-
ried on at the W. Kerckhoff Laboratories of th2
California Institute of Technology, Pasadena,
where I was during the summer of 1929, through
the hospitality of Dr. T. H. Morgan.

* Added to the program of the scientific meeting
held at the Auditorium of the Marine Biological
Laboratory on August 25. A movie film of yeast
cell division was demonstrated illustrating the yeast-
method of detection of M-radiation.

THE USE OF LIVE NEMAS (Metoncholaimus pristiurus) IN ZOOLOGICAL COURSES IN
SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES

Dr. N. A. Coss
Nematologist Principal, U. S Department of Agriculture

Answering numerous requests for a free- living
nema suitable for school and college laboratory
class work, attention is called to Metoncholaimus
pristiurus, a slender five-millimeter nema common
in European and North American stagnant ma-
rine mud, below low tide—e. g., in the harbors at
Woods Hole and Naples—a form suitable for
study alive with moderate, and even high, powers
of the microscope. It is a well differentiated bi-
sexual nema that can be sent by post or express
long distances in a living condition, and there
seems no reason why the already established col-
lecting agencies should not supply it alive to any
laboratory director in the country at a moderate
cost. It withstands journeys of thousands of miles.
It has been successfully shipped (both summer and
winter) from Woods Hole to a number of lab-
oratories and successfully used in class work. One
laboratory director reports a “very interesting and
exciting two-hour period — well worth while”.
This nema may be ordered from the Supply De-
partment of the Marine Biological Laboratory,
and no doubt could be supplied from Naples and
many other harbors. Laboratory instructors wll
find readiest guidance to the anatomy, etc., of
this and very similar nemas in the J. Wash. Acad.
Sc., June 19, 1930.

Experienced nematologists consider free-living
marine nemas the best teaching material for en-
trance to nematology. Metoncholaimus belongs to
a large marine group,—abundant along the shores
in all oceans, and may perhaps be considered
as nearly “‘a typical species” as one is likely to ob-
tain from such an immense and varied phylum.
It is no easier to select a “typical’’ nema than to
select a “typical” vertebrate. If the morphology
of the vertebrates be “covered” by the study of,

say four forms, fish, frog, bird and mammal, then
in order correspondingly to “‘cover’’ the morphoi-
ogy of the nemas, we should have to chcose, not
four types, but perhaps twice as many. Doubtless
there are ten times as many species of nemas as
of vertebrates, and they occur in a vastly greater
range of habitat, with a corresponding range in
morphology. With the above very important res-
ervation, MW. pristiurus may be regarded as more
or less typical.

If by chance any of you should ever care
to, you can collect this nema with the use of a
simple two liter iron waterpipe dredge, weighing
three kilos, its drag rope being linked to a single
point on its front rim, and long enough to per-
mit a cast of several meters. Casting from the
wharf just down the road your first haul is not
unlikely to contain hundreds of specimens, and,
as this nema is about the largest in its native mud,
it is readily assembled for study or shipment by
the use of these ordinary sieves, one (3 mm. mesh)
that catches the coarse debris and lets the nemas
through, and the cther (1 mm. mesh) which
catches the nemas and a little coarse mud, and
lets the silt through.

It is very important to the student that he study
living material. For examination alive, M. pris-
tiurus may be mounted in a droplet of clear sea
water (fresh water being lethal) under ia thin
coverglass with just sufficient pressure to keep
the nema from moving more than a very little.
This pressure can be applied by drawing the ex-
tra sea water from under the round coverglass
with a sliver of absorhent paper unt] the nema
can barely move, and then sealing in at once on a
turntable with a modicum of smoking hot wax

Avucust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

277

(formula, one of beeswax, three of paraffin)
best applied from the wick of an ignited 5-milli-
meter-gauge taper made of the wax,—somewhat
like a small Christmas tree candle ;—but boiling
hot wax and a No. 2 water color brush will
answer. A small amount of movement of the
nema during microscopic examination is very de-
sirable because the various nemic organs reveal
their contours more readily when sliding slightly
one on another.

The advantages in using this metoncholaim
are: (1) It is of a size suitable to student micro-
scopy and is available at any season. (2) It can
be shipped long distances alive, and be kept alive
for weeks in cool laboratory storage. (3) It pre-
sents the demanian system of organs—indicative
of the fact that nemas possess whole systems of
organs as yet comparatively unexplored. (4) It
presents all the numerous advantages that well
developed free-living forms possess over the par-
asitic forms commonly used as teaching material,
such as, among other things, (a) distinctly de-
veloped mouth parts, and salivary glands, (b)
caudal glands and spinneret (important and high-
ly characteristic), (c) well developed amphids,
(even more highly characteristic and important )
(d) sensory setae, (e) readily visible central ner-
vous system, parts of the peripheral system be-
ing easily demonstrable by using sea-water-meth-
ylene-blue (over night), (f) a more or less vis-

ible renette, (g¢) well developed longitudinal cords,
(h) visibly differentiated intestinal cells (among
them the “birefringent” cells), (i) a double
gonadic system in the male, the primitive and
normal condition, all your textbooks to the con-
trary notwithstanding, (j) growth, fertilization,
etc., of the living ova can be observed in situ; all
of these are more or less readily observable with-
out dissection all the better if the nemas are
starved first for a day or two in seawater.

Shipping. It is recommended that (1) there
be shipped in a separate container, half a liter
or so of sea water, since additional pure sea water
is necessary as a mounting medium for the living
nema and permits renewal, during lengthy labora-
tory storage, of the sea water containing the
nemas; and (2) that the mud containing the ne-
mas be cooled with ice or solid COs outside the
container, and be shipped under cool conditions.
The nema is so small that hundreds can be packed
in the small space suitable to air mail, and this
method of shipping is very desirable, especially as
air mail temperatures are not likely to be ex-
cessively warm. These nemas withstand freezing
temperatures.

If the laboratory director, on receipt of the
nemas, fixes some of them in formol-acetic-alco-
hol and then slowly (four rays) evaporates them
into glycerine, he will have valuable supplement-
ary material.

SPECIFICITY OF SEXUAL REACTIONS IN THE GENUS OSTREA
Dr. Paut S. GALTSOFF

Biologist, U. S. Bureau of Fisheries

Since 1927 the author has been engaged in a
study of the factors that control the shedding ot
eggs and sperm of the eastern oyster, Ostrea vir-
gimica. In 1929 the opportunity presented itself
to experiment with the Japanese oyster, O. gigas,
grown in Puget Sound, and during the summer
of 1930 several experiments were carried out with
the Australian oyster, O. cucullata, and O. vir-
ginica grown in the waters near Honolulu, T. H.
A complete report of these investigations, com-
prising nearly four hundred experiments, will be
published in the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fish-
eries.

The technique employed in all the experiments
consisted in placing the oyster in a tank of about
20 or 30 liter capacity, in which the water was
aenated, stirred and kept at constant temperature.
In the majority of the experiments the thermo-
regulators were set at 22.5° C and maintained at
this temperature within 0.5°. The oyster was im-

mobilized with plaster of Paris, and one of its
valves was attached to a light kymograph lever
made of a strip of celluloid. It has been shown
inja previous paper (Proc. Nat. Acad. of Sciences,
1930, 16, 555-559) that spawning of the female
oyster consists of a series of the following re-
actions: contractions of the mantle, rhythmical
contractions of the adductor muscle, and discharge
of eggs. Rhythmical contractions of the muscle
enable one to obtain a permanent record which
can be easily analyzed.

The results of the large number of experi-
ments with O. virginica carried out from 1927
to 1929 show that no spawning occurs below
20.0° C. whereas the same specimen reacts to the
same suspension of sperm as soon as the tempera-
ture has been ‘brought above 20.0°. In a few
instances it has been noticed that oysters spawned
at 27.5° without being stimulated by sperm. In-
asmuch as in those cases unfiltered water was

278 DHE (COLEECRING SNE

[ Vor, VI. No: 50

used, the possibility of its contamination with
sperm was not excluded. In the experiments
with O. gigas it has been found that a ripe fe-
male can be induced to spawn by a temperature
of 30.0° C. The question naturally arises wheth-
er the same results could not be obtained with the
other species. During the summer of 1931 ex-
periments were carried out at Woods Hole with
ripe O. virginica which were kept in aquaria at a
temperature of about 20.0°. To avoid possible
contamination the water used in the experiments
was filtered through a layer of asbestos about
three-quarters of an inch thick. The results of
the experiments indicate without any doubt that
ripe females can be induced to spawn by placing
them in water having a temperature from 24.5
to 30.0° C. At 31° the females usually close their
valves and remain closed until the temperature
drops to 30° or 29°.

The latent periods of spawning reactions, i. e.,
the time elapsed from the moment the oyster was
exposed to a given temperature until the begin-
ning of spawning, varies from 20 to 257 minutes
and apparently is not correlated with the tempe~a-
ture, the quickness of the response probably de-
pending on the condition of the organism itself.

The fact that the females can be stimulated by
a temperature of 24.5° or higher suggested the
possibility that similar effects might be obtained
by a longer exposure to temperatures between 20.0
and 24.5°. The results of a long number of ex-
periments, of which only three will be described
here, show that this is very doubtful. On July
10, three ripe females were taken from the tank,
in which the temperature during the previous
week fluctuated between 18.5 and 195° C. and
placed in an aquarium filled with filtered sea
water. The temperature was kept at 22.6°, but
eccasionally rose to 23.4°. The shell movement
cf each oyster was recorded on the kymograph.
The first oyster was kept for 5 hours and 22 min-
utes, the second for 29 hours and 53 minutes, and
the third one ier 73 hours and 1? minutes. The
water in the aquaria in which the second and
third oysters were kept was changed twice a
day. None of the oysters spawned during that
time, but each oi tiem spawned after sperm were
added to the water, the latent periods being 16,
24, and 15 minutes :espectively.

It is interesting to note that in both cases of
stimulation, either by the temperature or by the
sperm, the reaction is alike and is characterized
by a series of rhythmical contractions of the a-l-
ductor muscle and of the mantle. From that an
inference can be made that both factors release
some mechanism in the organism of the ‘female
which in turn stimulates the muscle and causes
the discharge of eggs from the ovary. In this
respect the reaction is not specific. It is, how-

ever, specific in the sense that sperm of other
mollusks (Mya, Mytilus) fail to induce spawning
of the oyster. No positive results were obtained
also when the sperm of O. cucullata was added
to the female of O. virginica and vice versa.

The spawning reaction of the male consists in
a discharge of sperm which is carried away by
the stream of water produced by the gill epithe-
lium. The reaction is much simpler than it is in
the female; it does not involve the adductor mus-
cle and therefore cannot be recorded on a kymo-
graph. The males respond to the increase in
temperature more readily than the females and
often spawn in the tanks when the temperature
reaches 24°. Similarly to the spawning of the
females, the shedding of sperm can be easily pro-
voked by the addition of a few drops of egg sus-
pension or egg water. Unlike the female, ia
which the latent period lasts for several minutes,
the latent period of the spawning reaction of the
male is of brief duration. It lasts only a few
seconds. The reaction can be repeated many
times until the male is spent.

In 1930 several experiments with the two
species of oyster, O. virginica and O. cucullata,
were performed at Honolulu. The males failed
to respond to the addition of eggs of another
species, but immediately reacted by dischargine
sperm to the addition of eggs of the same species.
These results indicate very clearly the specificity
of the response of the male to the p:esence of
eggs.

Besides being stimulated by the temperature
and egg suspension the males of O. virginica can
be stimulated also by sperm. In that case the
latent period of the reaction is approximately of
the same duration as it is in the case of the stimu-
lation of the female. A probable explanation is
that the active principle of a sperm suspension,
being insoluble in the sea water, acts on the or-
ganism through the digestive tract.

From a biological point of view stimulation of
spawning either by the temperature or by the
sperm and egg suspension is of great interest. It
provides a mechanism which insures successful
propagation of the species. Should the tempe~a-
ture of the sea water fail to reich the effective
point which would induce shedding of eggs by
the females, still the spawning of the latter could
he provoked by the sperm discharged by the males,
which are more susceptible to the increase in tem-
perature. In most of the cases obse~ved by the
author, when several oysters were kept together
the males spawned first and induced the sheddine
of eggs by the femles. The process. once started,
spreads by mutual stimulation of the two sexes
throughout the whole oyster bed and results in
simultaneous spawning of the oyster population.

EO

—_ ss Fe

a

Avcust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 279

ARTERIO-VENOUS ANASTOMOSES

Dr. E. R. CLARK AND ELEANOR LINTON CLARK

School of Medicine,

Direct coanections between arteries and veins, by
passages decidedly larger than capillaries, which
have heen called arterio-venous anastomoses, have
been described to our knowledge by Sucquet
(1862), Hyett (1864), Hoyer (1877), Pourceret
(1885), Grosser (1902) and Grant (1930).
There is general agreement that they exist nor-
mally in the erectile tissue of the sex organs, in
the balls and nail beds of fingers and toes, and
in the outer ears of various mammals. While they
have been described in other locations, their ex-
istence elsewhere has not been established.

The best descriptions of them, made upon in-
jected and fixed material, are those of Hoyer and
Grosser. According to them, arterio-venous an-
astomoses are quite definite structures, ranging in
inside diameter from 10 to 50 micra, (except for
one in the tip of the bat’s wing which may reach
a diameter of 150 micra) with a wall which great-
ly exceeds in thickness that of the arteriole whic
precedes it. The smooth muscle has, in addit’on
to the usual circular arrangement, an inner lo1g-
itudinal layer and ian outer layer of oblique cells.

Grant (1930), whose studies have paralleled
our own, has made interesting observations 02
arterio-venous anastomcses in the rabbit's ear as
seen through the intact skin, and has described
their behavior under a variety of experimental
conditions.

Our attention was called to them first in the
fall of 1929, when we saw them in the type of
transparent chambers introduced in the rabbit's
ear in which the original tissue is retained, with
the original vessels and nerves. They were made
accessible to microscopic study by the removal of
the cartilage and the skin of the inner side of the
ear, and the substitution of a thin sheet of mica.
It was found that there are arterio-venous anasto-
moses normally present in the nabbit’s ear to the
extent of from forty to fifty in an area approxt-
mately 1 cm. in diameter, and the special prepara-
tion enabled the observer to make precise observa-
tions upon their normal behavior as well as their
behavior under experimental conditions for many
hours a day, and for weeks or months. It was
found that they are definite and, certainly in most
cases, permanent structures. Some of them are
straight and some are twisted or coiled, occurring
singly or in groups of two to eight, with a thick
wall which suddenly thins to a single endotheliai,
non-contractile layer at the vencus end which re-
mains wide, giving a funnel-shaped appearance.

In behavior, it has been noted that they are

University of Pennsylvania

extmordinarily contractile, the most contractile
of all Be parts of the peripheral vascular system
in the e The arteries and arterioles of the ear
anise frequent active contnactions, usually
showing a pericdicity of two or three contractions
per minute. These general contractions usually
involve also the arterio-venous anastomcses. But
between such contnactions there may he separate
contractions of some arterio-venous anastomoses,
and it is not uncommon to see an individual ar-
terio-venous anastomosis remain contracted for
hours or even days, while a neighboring one may
be showing four to eight alternate contractions
and dilations per minute.

In addition to the study of arterio-venous an-
astomoses in the preformed tissue, it has been
possible to observe the new formation of definite
and permanent ones in new tissue which has
grown into an empty space left between the mica
and a kodaloid table in ia second type of trans-
parent chamber, which we have called the “round
table” chamber. In one such specimes installed
in July, 1930, taken to Amsterdam for demonstra-
tion and brought back to America, four arterio-
venous anastomoses were observed in October,
1930. They were watched for several months and
during that time showed no evidence of nerve-
controlled contnaction. In March, 1931, eight
months after installation, one of the four showed
definite contractions which synchronized with the
contractions of the main arteries of the ear. In
June, 1931, at eleven months, two others showed
similar synchronized contractions. At that time,
and in July, the fourth one still failed to show
sy nehronized contraction.

It was possible, with the expert assistance of
Dr. E. A. Swenson, to obtain motion pictures of
these four arterio-venous anastomoses, of one of
them in March, 1931, and of all four in June, as
well as motion pictures of similar structures in a
second “Amsterdam” rabbit inia chamber installed
and cared for by Dr. R. O. Rex in our laboratory.
(A reel of motion pictures showing both con-
tracting and non-contracting arterio-venous an-
astomoses was shown.)

Studies on these interesting structures have
only begun, but already many suggestive observa-
tions have been made, while the ‘possibilities for
the study not only of their function but also of
the factors responsible for their formation seem
to be unlimited, with the methods for bringing
them under observation in the transparent double-
walled chambers.

280 THE TOLER CRING ENE

[ Vor, VI. No. 50

SCIENTIFIC BOOK REVIEWS

Human Heredity. Erwin Baur, Eugen Fischer
and Fritz Lenz. Translated by Eden and Cedar
Paul. 734 pp. Illustrated. 1931. Macmillan Com-
pany. $8.00.

The translation from the German edition of
“Human Heredity” will be a welcome addition to
students and physicians in English-speaking
countries, since this book is the best compilation
available dealing with heredity in man. The trans-
lation is excellent, although a few terms, such as
allergies, empathy, and polyhistors, may send even
the geneticist to the dictionary. The term “mor-
bific heredity factors’ will scarcely recommend
itself as good usage when the adjective forms
“morbid” and “hereditary” are more familiar.

The first section, written by Erwin Baur, is
an elementary account of Mendelian heredity, with
emphasis laid on the joint effect of the environ-
ment as a factor in the realization of genetic
types (phaenotypes). It is not without interest
to note that Baur uses the term “‘natural selection”
only as a destructive agent in evolution, bringing
ahout the elimination of the unfit. Its effect in
evolution is regarded as entirely negative. It is
not suggested that the converse relation, namely,
the survival of new, better-fitted mutations, might
also be considered as coming under a wider defi-
nition of natural selection.

The physical, racial differences in mankind are
described in a rather general way by Eugen
Fischer. Fritz Lenz brings together a compre-
hensive list of the “morbific hereditary factors”
that are inherited in man. While his treatment is
somewhat more critical and conservative than the
treatment of this topic by other writers, never-
theless, the same tendency to reach a decision,
from inadequate data, as to whether each char-
acter is dominant or recessive is manifest. This
is especially noticeable in the considerable numbes
of cases described as dominant. It is true that
here and there an intimation is given that mul-
tiple factors are concerned in the realization of
certain types, but the more complex possibilities
are not stressed sufficiently. Human material is
quite insufficient in many cases to give a con-
vincing answer to these alternatives; but on the
whole, this is the most satisfactory and complete
account of the inheritance of human structural
defects that has yet been brought together.

The section by Lenz dealing with methodology
should be read with profit by geneticists dealing
with human characteristics. It is an excellent an-
alysis of what the statistical method can and can-
not do, and an understanding of the complica-
tions involved in this kind of analysis may avoid

errors that are not rare in medical literature. In
passing, it is curious to take note that nothing is
said here of the actual method of the experiment-
al treatment of heredity followed by all geneti-
cists, which renders the statistical treatment un-
necessary. Since critical genetic work is difficult
with human material, the next best resort may be
to use such methods as those advocated by Lenz
and other statisticians.

The last section of the book, also by Lenz,
dealing with the inheritance of intellectual gifts,
will probably be read with greater interest by the
layman. The treatment here is much in advance
of that followed by popular writers in this field,
but it will be obvious to those familiar with the
more critical treatment of genetic problems de-
manded by modern standards that only the most
superficial description of the subject matter is
possible at the present time. Not only is the ma-
terial quite inadequate, the diagnosis uncertain,
the terminology as vague as it is often pompous,
but environmental influences play so obvious a
role in mental disorders as to render a scientific
treatment entirely beyond our reach. Lenz has
probably handled his subject as well as it could
be handled at the present time, but until the dif-
ferent genetic factors can be, to some degree, sep-
arated from the environmental, it is a hopeless
task to attempt to reach even provisional conclu-
sions. While students of genetics will be inclined
to sympathize with Lenz’s valiant attempt to
ascribe as much as possible to genetics, and to
minimize the role of chance and environment in
leading to success or failure in human develop-
ment, nevertheless, it is only too obvious that, in
the absence of exact measurements and pedigreed
stock, little that is really sound is attainable.

—T. H. Morgan.

Biology in Human Affairs. Edited by Edward
M. East. xi + 399 pp. $3.50. 1931. Whittlesey
House.

Twelve able contributors have written this book
under the editorship of Professor Edward M.
Kast of Harvard University. The editor is to be
especially commended for having molded the
twelve chapters into ia continuously readable book.
This is hardly to be said of most of the recent
cooperative books.

The first chapter on “Biology and Human
Problems” is written by the editor himself. This
chapter presents in a clear jand forceful style
and with telling examples the possible effects of
modern biological science upon the remodeling of
man’s intellectual conceptions. Modern inven-
tions and comforts have recast man’s ways of

ae of

Aucust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

281

living almost completely. But science has not yet
recast his methods of thinking to anything like
the same degree.

It is pointed out that the average mind is still
fettered to myths conceived in distant eras of un-
reason, and actually scientists themselves iare
sometimes influenced by such myths. As East
points out, it is a mistake to assume that when
certain eminent physicists, for example, issue
preachments in terms of theology and meta-
physics they are speaking as scientists. They are
merely demonstrating how difficult it is to divest
one’s mind completely of the whams and whim-
seys learned in early childhood. A strong case
for the advantages of simple scientific truth is
built up in a most interesting fashion.

Eash chapter of this book is well worth read-
ing, but certain chapters are particularly well pre-
sented. Dr. L. M. Terman’s chapter on “Educa-
tional Psychology” presents this subject in a
simple and fascinatingly clear way. Professor H.
M. Parshley discusses ‘“Zoology and Human Wel-
fare” in a clearly analytical and instructive style.
The last chapter on “Diet and Nutrition,” by
Professor McCollum, forms valuable reading for
all persons. The other chapters are all very well
done, though space does not permit a particular
reference to them.

The only shortcoming which one might feel
after reading this very satisfying book is that
some form of summary or concluding statement
might have been good to round off the various
subjects for the general reader. Professor East
is to be congratulated on the success of his under-
taking. —C. R. STOcKARD.

Plant Life through the Ages. A. C. Seward.
xxi + 601 pp. 140 figs. + frontispiece. 1931.
Macmillan. $10.00.

The imperfection of the geological record is
felt more strongly by botanists than by zoologists.
The swarming shell fish of the Cambrian have no
counterpart among plants at the same level. The
record, therefore, is extremely fragmentary
among plant groups below the ferns.

The higher archegoniates and seed plants, on
the other hand, are abundantly and well preserved
at many horizons, though the lack of compact-
ness in the plant body has led to some serious
errors of interpretation. Parts belonging together
are often scattered in the process of fossiliza-
tion. Thus, one species may be considered as
Lepidodendron (stem), Stigmaria (root), or
Lepidostrobus (reproductive cone), At the same
time some unexpected associations are found, as
in a dominant group of the Carboniferous, the
Pteridosperms, where the leaf of a fern carries
seed rather than sporangial sori.

It is, therefore, not surprising that the fossil

record is complex and confusing. It has never
been possible to draw from the evidence of paleo-
hotany the sort of connected story of the grand
ascent of organisms through the ages that is fa-
miliar to the zoologist.

The writings of paleobotanists jare reflected
from their material. Much of it is properly
technical, and there have been only a few success-
ful attempts to summarize for the general reader
the rich findings of the last twenty years, in
which British and American botanists have been
leaders. Berry, in this country, and especially
Seward, in England, have done the best work
along this line. The present volume sets forth
for the first time the whole story of plant evolu-
tion so far as the fossil record has revealed it.
The geological background, the fossils themselves,
and their interpretation, are clearly presented.

The author is conservative on controversial
subjects such as Wegener’s hypothesis and the
question of past climates as revealed by plant dis-
tribution, but does not hesitate to take a firm
stand on such matters as the supposed occurrence
of Angiosperms in the Carboniferous, the ex-
istence and approximate bounds of the former
great continent, Gondwanaland, or the origin of
hoghead coal.

The book is adequately illustrated. Recon-
structions of landscapes by Edward Vulliamy
form a valuable contribution for orienting the
reader among the details of fossil forms. Fs-
pecially satisfying is the clear treatment of De-
vonian land plants, of which much has been
learned in recent years. This is a good book.
much needed. —I. F. Lewts.

Textbook of Experimental Cytology. James
Gray. 516 pp. Lllustrated. 1931. The Macmillan
Co. $7.50.

This book is an important contribution to bio-
logical literature. We have several textbooks of
cytology which are primarily morphological, but
none which gives a genenal survey of cellular
structure and function from the standpoint of the
experimentalist. Mr. Gray’s book fills this gap.

As the author states in his preface, “the present
book represents the substance of a series of lec-
tures delivered in Cambridge for some years
past.” It is an analytical study of living proces-
ses obtained by the experimental method in con-
trast with the inductive morphology of the past
century.

In the early days when the living cell was first
recognized as the functional and structural work-
ing unit of vital phenomena, investigators were
keenly interested in applying experimental meth-
ods to its study. Of historic interest is the fact
that there exists a considerable gap in time between

282

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. VI. No. 59.

the work of these earlier investigators and the
more recent contributions to the subject. The
recent renewed activity is probably due to new
methods of approach made possible not only by
the development of new technique, but also by
the advances in physical chemistry which have
rendered possible the application of these newer
principles to problems of cellular activity.

The.e exists a real danger in the present day
trend of reducing the various phases of vital
pheromena to terms of physical chemistry as we
know them today. One reason for this is that
our knowledge of many pertinent physico-chemi-
cal phenomena is still very imperfect. Another
reason lies in the extraordinary diversity in the
reaction of different types of living cells to ex-
perimental conditions. In addition, a prevailing
shortcoming is the generalization of results ob-
tained from experimentation with one or a few
types of cells to all units of living matter. This
complexity makes ian interpretation and a. well-
reasoned presentation of the subject a difficult
task,

The author of this book is well equipped for
such a task in being versed not only in modera
physical chemistry, but also in straight-forward
conventional cytology. He strikes a happy med-
ium in presenting a conception of protoplasmic
structures and behavior based on a well digested
survey of present day knowledge on the subject.
The subject of cytology treated experimentally is
full of gaps and controversial points. We there-
fore appreciate the fact that Mr. Gray has not
limited himself to a mere compilation but has,
from his first hand knowledge of many phases
of the subject, made frequent critical analyses
of the problem raised.

The numerous illustrations and tables are well
selected, the style is lucid and concise. In short,
the author is to be highly commended in having
produced a hook which is su‘ficiently detailed and
yet sufficiently non-technical to be read with in-
terest and profit alike by the biologist, physic ’st
or chemist who may desire to obtain a concep-
tion of what is known regarding cell structure a7d
the functional relation of the cell to its environ-
ment. —Ropert CHAMBERS.

Textbook of Human Embryology. Cleveland
Sylvester Simkins. xiv + 469 pp. 263 illustra-
tions, some in colors. 1931. F. A. Davis Co.

This newest textbook of human embryology is
a distinctly ambitious attempt to place all essen-
tial data of human development within the com-
pass of a single volume. It is copiously illus-
trated, and the illustrations are clear and on the
whole well chosen from recent original studies.
Some attempt is made to cover the functional as

well as the purely anatomical aspects of develop-
ment. As in all descriptions of human embry-
ology, the blanks are filled in from studies of
other mammalian material.

The chief fault of the book appears to the re-
viewer to lie in its very ambitiousness. For most
students, too detailed description is apt to lead to
confusion, and details of interest to investigators
can best be sacrificed to a concise treatment. For
instance, 55 pages devoted to the development of
the urogenital system appear to exceed the limits
of a usable textbook. Since the book cannot bz
cons dered a defhnitive reference work, so lengthy
a treatment apparently justifies the charge of ex-
cessive wordiness.

Probably the least successful section of the
Look is the brief account of maturation and fer-
tilization. It will be impossible for a student to se-
cure an accurate picture of these processes from
such gressly misleading statements as “——each
chromosome of the bivalent group is further re-
duced to a tetrad” (page 23). In view of the
conclusive work of Painter and of Evans and
Swezy, there can be little excuse for Figure 12,
in which the diploid chromosome numbers are
given as 23 and 24, in spite of the illuminating
sentence concluding the legend below, that “there
are 48 chromosomes in the eggs and sperms of
man”. It is unfortunate that before publicat‘oa
the author did not submit this chapter to some
one familiar with cytolcgy.

With so many excellent general and_ special
textbooks of embryology available, it seems dif-
ficult to justify the labor which has gone into the
preparation of Dr. Simkins’ volume. It is cer-
tain to require extensive revis‘on.

—H. H. Proveu.

Progressive Relaxation. Edmund Jacobson. xii
+ 430 pp. 69 figs. 1929. The University of Chi-
cago Press.

Following a short discussion of the status of
rest and relaxation in modern medicine, the au-
thor presents in detail the technique of his method
for general and differential relaxation. The in-
fluence of relaxation upon the reflexes and the
mental activit'es of human subjects is cited. The
physiology of the emotions, muscular contraction —
and tonus, augmentation and related phenomena
are reviewed with reference to the problem of re-_
laxation. That progressive relaxation must not he
confused with suggestion or hypnosis is indicated.
While the author does not pretend that progres-
sive relaxntion is a panacea, case histories of its
therapeutic use in diverse medical conditions, not-
ably spastic esophagus and mucous colitis, are
given. This book should be of interest to. the
physician, the psychologist, and the physiologist.

—lValter S. Root.

Aueust 29, 1931 ]

DE eCOLEECDING SNE

283

Die Sexuellen Zwischenstufen. (Sex Inter-
grades), Richard Goldschmidt. (Monographien
aus dem Gesamtgebiet der Physiologie der Pflan-
zen und der Tiere 38.) 528 pp. 214 fig. 1931.
Julius Springer.

Goldschmidt’s book is a comprehensive work
on sex intergrades in animals. The term sex-
intergrade is used in contrast to the normal con-
dition which is considered to be that of ‘“Zweige-
schlechtigkeit”, the two sexes in differeat indi-
viduals. The word “Bisexualitat’” is avoided be-
cause of ambiguity, since it sometimes suggests
two sexes in the same individual, “Doppelge-
schlechtigkeit”. All true hermaphrodites, as in
Annelids, snails, etc., are excluded from the class
“sex-intergrades”. An intersex “has in the course
of its life a male and a female phase, of which
only one or neither is functional’. There were
previously distinguished three possible types of
sex-determination, (1) progamic—before fertil-
ization; (2) syngamic—during fertilization; (3)
metagamic—after fertilization. The first type is
very questionable except possibly for the peculiar
case of Dinophilus. The last type is also much
more restricted than has been supposed. The
second type, syngamic or zygotic, does not mean
that establishment of sex is unchangeable. Pri-
mary sex may be determined at fertilization. The
animnl develops as this sex up to a certain stage;
then there comes the turning point after which
development is according to the opposite sex. All
parts of the body are genotypically similar but
differ from the point of view of developmental
physiology. The turning point may be deter-
mined either zygotically, by hormonal action, or by
external conditions. In the case of diploid zy-
gotic intersexuality there is no disturbance of the
chromosomal basis of sex-determination but in
the case of triploid zygotic intersexuality there is
considerably irregularity in chromosome number.

Four hundred and sixteen pages are devoted
to intersexuality of which 179 deal with inverte-
brates. Gynandromorphism is discussed in 46
pages of which 41 deal with insects. Gynandro-
morphs are defined as genotypic sex-mosaics in
space, while intersexes are phenotypic sex-mo-
saics in time.

All who are interested in problems of sex-de-
termination will find this book fascinating read-
ing. Professor Goldschmidt’s German is never
too involved for the English speaking reader.
The material is well classified so that it is very
easy to find discussion of the various principles
involved and of the species upon which experi-
ments have been performed. An excellent biblio-
graphy adds much to the value of the work.

—P. W. Wuitinc.

Demons of the Dust: A Study in Insect Be-
havior. William Morton Wheeler. xviii -- 378
pp. Illustrated. 1930. W. W. Morton and Co. $5.

[Structure and Behavior of Ant-Lions, and of Some
Analogous Insects (Flies) ]

Under the rather cryptic title, “Demons of the
Dust” —alleviated, however, by the sub-title, “A
Study in Insect Behavior”, Professor William
Morton Wheeler of Harvard University presents
a well illustrated and interesting book containing :
35 pages of bibliographical accounts of some
noted eighteenth century entomologists, with very
attractive portraits; 40 pages concerning the
fauna of desert sands; 60 pages of observations
on ant-lions; 134 pages on what he calls worm-
lions,—pit-building predatory dipterous larvae;
and about 100 pages embodying (a) his con-
clusion, (b) some appendices, (c) an extensive
bibliography, and (d) an excellent index.

It is the most complete book on its subject, and
the fact that it is prepared by Professor Wheeler
is a sufficient guarantee that it is interesting and
accurate. Among the most entertaining moments
are those in which the author adverts to the
foibles of the rest of us. One notes with appreci-
ation that more than the usual amount of atten-
tton is given to the internal anatomy, histology
and physiology of these insects, small though that
amount be. The title is likely to be troublesome
to the indexers, but indexers are used to trouble,
and perhaps will not mind a little more. One is
reminded of the ambitious young husbandryman,
who, anxious about his flocks, sent to the local
library for a book entitled “Sheep Folds”, and
received in return a religious work devoted to
“flocks” of a very different kind. The book is
well printed and attractive. —N. A. Coss.

A Survey of National Trends in Biology. Ed-
ward J. V. K. Menge. xi + 156 pp. $2.00. The
Bruce Publishing Company. 1930.

This is a series of lectures surveying national
trends in biology based upon replies to question-
naires sent to leading biologists of various nations.
The lectures were prepared for the National Uni-
versity of Cordoha and for the Sociedade de
Medicina e Cirurzia de Rio de Janeiro.

The author gives a very brief account of the
development of the various fields of biology,
some of the outstanding present day theories, and
their effects upon our philosophical conceptions of
living organisms. The treatise has a decided
philosophical atmosphere and emphasizes the bar-
renness of the idea that a living organism is
nothing more than a series of chemico-physical
phenomena of the various elements of protoplasm
and of the morphological units of the organism.
It reads well and in interesting.

—C. L. PARMENTER.

284 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. VI. No. 50

Starling’s Principles of Human Physiology.
5th edition. Edited and revised by C. Lovatt
Evans, and H. Hartridge. xv + 1039 pp. 543 il-
lustrations. $8.50. Lea and Febiger. 1930.

A textbook as well known as the above re-
quires no detailed review. Following the death
of Professor Starling, the present edition has
been placed in the hands of Professor Lovatt
Evans and Professor Hartridge. This is suf-
ficient guarantee that the high merit of previous
editions is maintained. While the general size
and plan of previous editions has been retained,
the book has been thoroughly revised, nearly every
page showing some alteration, and many sec-
tions being entirely rewritten. It may be safe-
ly recommended as one of the best textbooks in
this field. —F. P. Know Ton.

Jane's Island. Marjorie Hill Allee. 236 pp. 10
illustrations. $2.00. Houghton Mifflin Company.

“Jane’s Island,” by Marjorie Hill Allee, is sa
book which should interest every one in Woods
Hole, because the story centers around the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory. It is a story which
has been written for girls from twelve to sixteen
years of age, but because of its local atmosphere
it will be read by older people as well. For ex-
ample, the author has called Captain Veeder and
the Cayadetta by their actual names. Among
the ten pen and ink sketches, many people will
recognize familiar scenes, and the map of Woods
Hole and the Elizabeth Islands on the inside front
cover will be of especial interest to them.

The author has spent many summers at Woods
Hole, and her husband, Professor Warder C.
Allee, is working at the laboratory this summer.
For several years before 1922 he was in charge
of the course in invertebrate zoology.

The Nature of Living Matter. Lancelot Hog-
ben. ix + 316 pp. $3.75. Alfred A. Knopf.

This book comes as a relief to biologists who
have grown weary of hearing physicists and as-
tronomers express themselves learnedly on vari-
ous aspects of philosophical biology. Professor
Hogben is a competent biologist, and much of
what he says will appeal to workers in the field
of biology. The book is clearly and forcibly
written and it is interesting throughout.

In some of the early chapters, Hogben con-
siders the conflict between vitalism and mechan-
ism, and his points are well taken. A quotation
will show the general style of the book better
than any lengthy description.

“There is. ..no justification for a dogmatic assertion
that all the properties of living matter will eventu-
ally be reduced to the same hypotheses as are adopt-
ed in physical chemistry. But it is doubtful whether
any biologists of the mechanistic persuasion have
on any occasion explicitly committed themselves
to so rash a statement. The vitalistic Sarah Gamp
has invented a mechanistic Mrs. Harris with the
express object of giving her a piece of her mind.
As a polemical device this is most valuable, es-
pecially in political propaganda. It does not help
the mechanist to understand what vitalism can
offer as a guide to further biological enquiry. His
perplexity is increased by the circumstance that so
many vitalists of the platform behave themselves
with mechanistic propriety in the laboratory. Dog-
matism is at least as frequent among those who

call themselves vitalists as among mechanists....”
—Unsigned.
The Terpenes. J. L. Simonsen. Volume I.

XI + 420 pp. $8.50. The Macmillan Company.

This is the only English beok dealing with the
chemistry and structure of the terpenes. The
first volume for want of space deals only with
the more simple acyclic and monocyclic terpenes,

but the author promises to complete the series

with a second volume dealing with the dicyclic
terpenes and the sesquiterpenes.

The first part of the book deals with the more
simple acyclic and the second with the monocyclic
terpenes. The individual members are then fur-
ther classified with reference to the predominating
functional groups. The author gives for each
terpene the occurrence, the more common physi-
cal properties and a discussion of the chemical
properties along with the historical development
of the structural formula. The author has for
some time been an active investigator in this field
and his presentation of the development is es-
pecially interesting. A complete list of refer-
ences accompanies each discussion.

The book is hardly to be recommended to the
general reader, but to the organic chemist as a
reference book in this field and as a source of
methods used in developing this branch of chem-
istry it should prove invaluable.

—Joseru B. Hate.

An Introduction to Neurology. C. Judson Her-
rick. Fifth Edition. Revised. W. B. Saunders
Company. 1931.

All students of neurology will welcome the fifth
edition of this very excellent text. It is too well
known to need comment. The present edition has
been carefully revised and brought up to date
and maintains the high standing of the earlier
imprints. —G. H. PARKER.

au (Sta aly roe Fi

(ihe Raa

ee ee ee ee ee eee ae eee

-

Avcust 29, 1931 ]}

ie SECOrELECRING SNE

THE VOYAGE OF THE ATLANTIS

Cotumeus IsELIn, Captain

The motor ketch, Atlantis, the principal instru-
ment for research of the Woods Hole Oceano-
graphic Institution, docked at Woods Hole at
six o’clock on Monday evening, August 31, hav-
ing completcd a cruise of over four thousand
miles.. The Atlantis is a Diesel auxiliary ketch
of about 410 tons’ displacement. She is 142 feet
in length and has a beam of 2914 feet. She draws
17 feet of water. Ordinarily, sails are used to
move the vessel, and the sail area has 7,209
square feet of canvas. When the wind is too
light, there is a 280 horse power Diesel engine
which can be brought into use. During the
cruise just completed the vessel was under power
perhaps one-third of the time. This engine also
supplies the power for the main trawl winch. The
electricity for lighting and ventilation is generated
by a twenty-five horse power crude oil motor
which is located amidships in the engine room.
Electrical power is also available for hoisting
and trimming the sails. The vessel can carry
about twenty tons of fuel oil and forty tons of
fresh water. This is enough to enable her to re-
main at sea about three months.

Below decks the cabin arrangements are simple.
In the stern there is a chart room, and the cap-
tain’s cabin, and three cabins for the scientific
staff. The two laboratories are situated farther
forward, one being for the biological work and
the other for the chemical work. Amidships is
a hold for the storage of sails and rigging, and
below this is the main trawl winch, which weighs
about twenty-two tons and holds five thousand
fathoms of half-inch wire cable. Because of its
weight, the winch had to be placed low down in
the vessel. The hydrographic winch, which can
handle an equal length of lighter cable, is placed
on deck next to the mizzen mast. Over the en-
gine room are the cabins for the ship’s officers.
The mess room for the officers and scientists is
forward of these officers’ cabins. Next comes
the galley, and then the crew’s mess room and
the forecastle.

The Atlantis left Copenhagen on July 7 and
after six days reached Plymouth, England. Here
some apparatus was taken aboard and a few final
adjustments made on the rigging and machinery.
On July 16 she left Plymouth and headed for a
point in mid-ocean about opposite the coast of
n-rthern Ireland. Then she turned south, mak-
ing = tydrographic section over ore thousand
miles in length which traversed the branches of
the gulf stream and reached nearly to the equa-
torial current.

On this section, besides hydrographic work,
each day at noon a light intensity station was
made, and whenever possible in the evening the
nets were put over for collecting eel larvae. This

work on the eels was done for Professor Johannes
Schmidt of the Carlsberg Laboratory at Copen-
hagen. Kor many years he has been interested
in the migration of the young eels which are born
south of Bermuda and must spend two years
swimming eastward towards European rivers.
Dy. Franz Zorell of the Deutsche Seewarte in
Hamburg was in charge of the hydrographic and
chemical work. He collected extensive data which
will be of great help in the study of the circula-
tion of the North Atlantic. All water samples were
analyzed both for salinity and oxygen content.

After reaching thirty-seven degrees north lati-
tude, the Atlantis again turned west and crossed
the ocean in the Horse latitudes. On this sector
deep temperature stations (down to 4000 meters)
were made each day and also further experiments
with light intensity observations and simultaneous
plankton hauls. Dr. George Clarke and Mr. Ray-
mond Montgomery were in charge of this part
of the work, and an attempt was made to cor-
relate the vertical migrations of the plankton with
light intensity throughout the twenty-four hours.

After reaching a point just north of Bermuda,
the Atlantis headed northwest towards the coast
of Nova Scotia. This section traversed the gulf
stream, and further hydrographic stations were
made at thirty-mile intervals. Once inside the
gulf stream, another series of observations were
made on the vertical migrations of the plankton,
because in this region of colder water the more
abundant life made it easier to get definite re-
sults quickly.

During most of the cruise a meteorological pro-
gram was also carried out. This was aimed, first,
to secure evaporation and rain-fall measurements,
and secondly, by means of electrical resistance
thermometers situated along the mast, to study
the stability of the lower layer of the atmosphere.
On three occasions experiments were also made
with different kinds of deep sea tow nets. The
trouble with deep sea towing has been that the
catch, in general, reaches the surface in poor con-
dition. Vhe Atlantis found that, by using very
large nets and by having a metal bucket in their
small end, the specimens could be brought to the
surface in reasonable shape.

It took forty-one days to reach Boston, and al-
though the scientific program was rather varied,
the main object of the trip was achieved. The
instruments and machinery have been thoroughly
tested, and in October the ship will be ready to
put to sea for more intensive work.

Besides the four cruises planned for the study
of seasonal variations in the sector between Cape
Hatteras, Bermuda and Nova Scotia, the Atlantis
plans each year to make three other cruises, one
of which will last about two months.

286 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vou. Vis Nows0

MOTION PICTURES OF THE AFRICAN EXPEDITION

On Friday, August 28, Professor J. H. Me-
Gregor of Columbia University showed several
reels of motion pictures taken in equatorial Africa
by the recent expedition sent out by Columbia
University and the American Museum of Natural
History. The personnel of the expedition in-
cluded Mr. H. C. Raven, who in view of pre-
vious experience in African zoological collecting
was appointed director, Professors William K.
Gregory, J. H. McGregor and E. T. Engle.

The object of the expedition was to secure
well preserved material for anatomical study of
the two great African anthropoid apes, the chim-
panzee and the gorilla, but especially the gorilla,
the anatomy of which is by no means fully known.
Five adult gorillas were obtained, two of the east-
ern highland type from the volcanic mountains
near Lake Kivu in the eastern part of the Bel-

gian Congo, a variety or species first discovered
in 1903, and three of the better known West
African gorillas. The latter were killed in the
Cameroon. All these animals were embalmed by
arterial injection for anatomical study, and de-
tailed discussion and comparison with human an-
atomy have already been begun. It is hoped that
comparative studies may throw light on the inter-
relationship of the west coast and mountain
forms, and show definitely whether the moun-
tain gorilla is ia valid species or merely a local
variety.

The motion pictures taken by the expedition
show the habitat of the mountain gorilla, and
certain phnses of the preparation of the dead
bodies. Four young captive gorillas were the
subjects of one reel, and others showed various
aspects of native life, Congo scenery, etc.

FINAL SCIENTIFIC MEETING
Thursday, September 3, 1931.

(All papers limited to 10 minutes)

Part I. 9:00 A. M.

1. Dr. Charlotte Haywood and Dr. Walter S.
Root, “The Cleavage Rate of the Arbacia Egg in
the Presence of Carbon Dioxide and Bicar-
bonate.”

2. Dr.‘ Arthur K. Parpart and Dr. M. H.
Jacobs, “The Action of Acetic Acid and its Sod-
ium Salt on the Cleavage of Arbacia Eggs.”

3. Mr. K. Dan, ‘‘Cataphoretic Studies of Ma-
rine Eggs.” j

4. Dr. Kenneth Cole, “Surface Forces of the
Arbacia Egg.”

5. Dr. E. N. Harvey, “The Tension at the
Surface of Arbacia Eggs, Determined by Centri-
fugal Force.”

6. Dr. Ethel Browne Harvey, “Development of
Arbacia Half-Eggs Produced by Centrifugal
Force.”

7. Dr. Balduin Lucke, “Osmotic Properties of
‘Fragments’ of Arbacia Eggs Obtained by Centri-
fugal Force.”

8. Dr. M. H. Jacobs and Dr. Dorothy R. Stew-
art, “A Method for the Quantitative Measure-
ment of Cell Permeability.”

9, Dr. Dorothy R. Stewart and Dr. M. H.
Jacobs, “The Effect of Fertilization on the Per-
meability of the Arbacia Egg to Ethylere Glycol.”

INTERMISSION
Part II. 11:15 A. M.

1. Dr. Miriam Scott Lucas, “Recent Observa-
tions upon a Type of Fission Undescribed for
Ciliates.”

2. Dr. E. C. Cole, “Selective Intra-Vitam Stain-
ing of Specific Elements in the Integument of the
Squid.”

3. Dr. C. C. Speidel, “Types of Nerve Re=
generation, as Revealed by Prolonged Observa-
tions of Individual Fibers in Living Frog Tad-
poles.”

4. Dr. H. H. Johnson, “Centrioles and Other
Cytoplasmic Bodies in Living Cells of Gryllids.”

5. Dr. P. W. Whiting, “Genetic Results in
Habrobrachon Bearing on Maturation and Fer-
tilization.”

INTERMISSION
Part III. 2:00 P. M.

1. Mr. L. V. Beck and Mr. D: E. Green, “Oxi-
dation-reduction Potentials of Cytolyzed and In-
tact Echinoderm Eggs.”

2. Dr. Eric G. Ball, “Hemolysis of Fish Eryth-
rocytes by an Impurity in Sodium Chloride.”

3. Dr. G. H. A. Clowes, Dr. I. H. Page and
Mr. H. A. Shonle, “On the Contrasting Cytolytic
Effects Exerted by Soaps of the Type of Sodium
Ricinoleate and Sodium Oleate at Different H
Ion Concentration and the Relation of these Ef-
fects to the Oil-water Interfacial Tensions Exert-
ed by the Soaps in Question.”

4. Miss Anna Keltch, Miss Ilene Harryman
and Dr. G. H. A. Clowes, “Influence of H Ion
Concentration on the Anaesthetic Value of a Ser-
ies of General and Local Anaesthetics and Hyp-
notics.”

5. Mr. S. A. Corson, “The Action of Acid and

es

Aucust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

287

Alkali on the Protoplasmic Viscosity of Amoeba
dubia.”

6. Mr. H. B. Steinbach, “The Effect of Salts
on the Injury Current of Scallop Muscle.”

7. Dr. Robert Chambers and Mr. D, A. Mars-
land, “The Action of the Common Salts on the
Protoplasm of the. Echinoderm Ege.”

8. Mr. Morris Belkin, “Capping of Oils on
Protoplasmic Surfaces.”

DEMONSTRATIONS

Part IV. 3:45 P.M.

Mr. David M. Ashkenaz, “The Effect of Sod-
ium and Calcium Chlorides on Changes in Pen-
etrability of Neutral Red.” Physiology Lab., O.
M. B.

Dr. Eric G. Ball, “Hemolysis of Fish Erythro-
cytes by an Impurity in Sodium Chloride.” Room
110.

Mr. Morris Belkin, “The Capping Phenome-
non in Amoeba dubia.” Room 328.

Dr. C. B. Bridges, “Apparatus and Designs for
Raising Drosophila.’’ Room 324.

Ditto Glagcomvirs. Clark Dr Eh 1:
Kirby-Smith and Dr. W. J. Hitschler, “Living
Tissues as Seen in Transparent Chambers In-
troduced into the Rabbit’s Ear.” Room 117.

Dr. E. C. Cole, “Selective Intra-vitam Staining

of Specific Elements in the Integument of the
Squid.” Room 24, O. M. B.

Dr. Kenneth Cole, “An Egg Crusher.” Room
209.

Dr. E. N. Harvey and Dr. E. B. Harvey, “Ar-
bacia Half-cells (Fertilized jand Unfertilized)
Produced by Centrifugal Force.’’ Room 116.

Dr. H. H. Johnson, “Centrioles and Other
Cytoplasmic Bodies in Living Cells of Gryllids.”
Room 315.

Dr. Miriam Scott Lucas, “Demonstration of
Fission of Cyathedidinium piriforme.” Room 224.

Dr. C. W. Metz, “Demonstration of Chromo-
somes of Sciara.”’ Room 344.

Dr. A. E. Navez, “Cardiac Frequency of An-
omya as a Function of Temperature.” Room 110.

Dr. Nellie M. Payne, “The Effect of Tempera-
ture upon the Duration of “Death Feigning.”
Botany Building, 2nd flcor.

Mr. F. J. M. Sichel, “Apparatus for Studying
Tension in Isolated Muscle Cells.”” Room 337.

Dr. C. C. Speidel, “Nerve Sprouts, Sheath Cells
and Myelin Segments in Living Frog Tadpoles.”
Room 106.

Dr. Anna R. Whiting, Miss Magnhild M. Tor-
vik, Mrs. Lysbeth H. Benkert and Miss Kathryn
A. Gilmore, “Exhibit of Mutants and Mosaics in
Habrobrachon.”’ Rockefeller, Room 7,

EXHIBIT OF INVERTEBRATE ANIMALS COLLECTED BY THE INVERTEBRATE
ZOOLOGY CLASS IN THE VICINITY OF NORTH FALMOUTH
ON AUGUST 28, 1931

Dr. James A. Dawson
Director of the Course in Invertebrate Zoology

An exhibit of representative species of inverte-
brate animals *was placed in the main entrance
hall of the new Brick Building of the Marine
Biological Laboratory by the staff and members
of the invertebrate zoology class for the benefit
of those workers at the laboratory who wish to
familiarize themselves with the common species
of the region. This collection of one hundred
and sixteen different species gives ia fair picture
of the invertebrate fauna of this collecting
ground, which is the richest in species of any
place visited by the invertebrate zoology class.
Such a collection, unfortunately, gives no idea of
the relative abundance of individual animals. A
fair idea of the abundance, however, can be had
by stating the number of teams reporting any
given species. In the following list animals which
were reported by all teams, six in number, are
marked with an asterisk immediately before the
name of the animal. In the case of animals less
abundant the number of teams reporting them is
placed in brackets immediately after the name of
the animal. On this trip one hundred and forty-
five species were reported in all, individual teams

1

reporting from one hundred to one hundred ‘and
twenty species. A check list showing the ianimals
which are more or less frequently taken by the
invertebrate zoology class was placed on the
tables. It is perhaps worth while stating that
the composite list made up in the same way for
all regions visited by the invertebrate zoology
class during the years 1922 to 1931 inclusive is
to be placed on file in the Library.

In the following list of the animals placed on
exhibition. names of animals in various phyla are
given alphabetically in the different classes, sub-
classes, and in some cases, in the orders also.

PORIFERA: Class Calearea: Leucosolenia
botryoides (3). Class Demospongia : Cliona celata
(5), *Halichondria panicea, *Microciona pro-
lifera.

COELENTERATA: Class Hydrozoa: Clytia
johnstont (3), Hydractinia echinata (5), Schizo-
tricha tenella. (4), *Sertularia pumila, Class An-
thozoa: Edwardsia elegans (4), Eloactis producta
(1), *Sagartia leucolena, *Sagartia luciae.

PLATYHELMINTHES: Class Turbellaria;
Bdelloura candida (2), Eustylochus ellipticus (1).

288 THE COLEECTING NED

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

NEMERTINEA: Cerebratulus lacteus (2).

ANNELIDA: Class Chaetopoda: Subclass
Polychaeta, Order Nereidiformia: Arabella opa-
lina (5), Diopatra cuprea (5), Glycera americana
(4), Glycera dibranchiata (5), Lumbrinereis sp.
(4), *Nereis virens, Phyllodoce catenula (3),
Scoloplos fragilis (1), *Scoloplos robustus,
*Sthenelais leidyi, Order Spioniformia: Laonice
viridis (5). Order Terebelliformia; Amphitrite
ornata (2), *Cistenides gouldi, Enoplobranchus
sanguineus (4), Pista palmata (1), Polycirrus
eximius (4). Order Scoleciformia: Arenicola
cristata (3), Arenicola marina (5), *Clymenella
torquata. Order Sabelliformia: *Hydroides hexa-

gonus, *Spirorbis spirorbis. Class Gephyrea:
*Phascolosoma gouldi.
ARTHROPODA: Class Crustacea, Order

Cirripedia: *Balanus balanoides, *Balanus eburn-
eus, *Chthamalus fragilis. Order Amphipoda:
Lepidactylus dytiscus (2), *Orchestia platensis,
Talorchestia longicorms (3). Order Isopoda;
Cyathura carinata (2), Erichsonella filiformis
(2), Janera marina(5).Order Mysidacea ; Hetero-
mysis formosa (1). Order Decapoda: Callinectes
sapidus (5), *Carcinides maenas, *Crago vulgaris,
Emerita talpoida (5), *Hippolyte zostericola, Lib-
aqua dubia (5), *Neopanope texana, Ovalipes
ocellatus (5), *Pagurus longicarpus (5), Pagu-
rus pollicaris (5), *Palaemonetes vulgaris, Pelia
mutica (2), Pinnixa cylindrica (3), *Una minax,
*Uca pugnax Subclass Xiphosura: Limulus poly-
phemus (5).

MOLLUSCOIDEA: Class Bryozoa: Aetea
anguina (2), *Bugula turrita, Bugula gracilis (1),
Crisia eburnea (3), Flustralla sp. (5), *Lepralia
pertusa,

ECHINODERMATA: Class Asteroidea : *4s-
terias forbest. Class Ophiuroidea: *O phioderma
brevispina. Class Echinoidea: Arbacia punctulata
(3). Class Holothuroidea: *Leptosynapta inhae-
rens, Thyone briareus (4).

MOLLUSCA: Class Amphineuna: Chaetop-
leura apiculata (3). Class Pelecypoda: *Anomia
simplex, Arca campechiensis (2), Arca transversa
(5), Cumingia tellinoides (4), Ensis directus (5),
Gemma gemma (2), Gemma manhattensis (1),
*Laevicardium mortoni, Macoma sp. (2), Modio-
lus modiolus (4), *Mya arenaria, *Ostrea virgin-
ica, *Pecten gibbus borealis, Petricola pholadifor-
mis (3), Pholas sp. (2), *Solemya velum, Tellina
tenera (5), *Teredo nawvalis, Turtoma sp. (2),
*Venus mercenaria, Class Gastripoda, *Bittiuim
alternaiuim, Lusycon canaliculatum (5), *Colun-
bella avara, *Columbella lunata, *Crepidula forni-
cata, *Crepidula glauca convexa, *Crepidula plana,
Doris sp. (3). *Littorina obtusata palliata, *Lit-
torina rudis, *Melampus lineatus, Odostomia sp.
(5), Polinices duplicata (5), *Urosalpinx ciner=
eus,

CHORDATA: Subphylum Hemichorda: *Dol-
ichoglossus kowalevskyi. Subphylum Urochorda:
*Amaroecium constallatum, *Botryllus schlosseri,
Molgula manhattensis (4), Perophora viridis (3),
*Styela partita.

RESEARCH REPORTS OF INVESTIGATORS HOLDING SCHOLARSHIPS

Last Fall the five Cottectinc Net Scholar-
ships of $100.00 each were awarded to the fol-
lowing students :

Miss Erizasetu M. Hetss

Dr. Frank R. KILLE

Mr. Davin E. GREENE

Mr. SEYMOUR FARBER

Mr. Ropert Pitts
Messrs. Farber and Pitts were unable to come to
Woods Hole this summer.

We have the privilege of printing below a
brief outline of the work accomplished by the
three investigators who carried out their work
at the Marine Biological Laboratory during the
present summer with the assistance of the grant
from THE CoLtLectinG Net Scholarship Fund.

DISTRIBUTION OF UROSALPINEX CINEREUS
AND THAIS LAPILLUS

An experiment which had its inception in the

Invertebrate Zoology Course was conducted to

test the traveling ability of certain adult gastro-

pods. During the first week of September, 1930

about two thousand shells of Urosalpinx cinereus,

the oyster drill, living in a certain restricted area
at Nobska were marked for identification with
red lacquer and replaced in the exact location
from which they had been taken. At the same
time about five hundred individuals of another
less common species, Thais lapillus, were also coi-
lected and marked. At the end of a year, the
marking, though somewhat eroded by wave ac-
tion and weathering showed distinctly and sys-
tematic collections were made of the marked ani-
mals. Over twenty-five per cent of the experi-
mental Urosalpinx were recovered from the sur-
faces of rocks exposed at low tide within twenty
feet of the rock on which they had been placed
twelve months before. About one per cent were
found on rocks about one hundred feet away but
no marked snails were seen at a greater distance
from the experimental area although the adjacent
coastline was collected over several times. A
great many more Urosalpinx were noted early in
the summer than could be found in late August
when the chosen period of a year was over. This
may be due either to death and subsequent drop-
ping of the empty shell to the ocean floor or to

Aveust 29, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 289
submergence under large masses of algae which es a pe aR ae Variation and

- - orrelation in yone, merican Naturalist,
have grown up during the summer. Of the Vol. XLVI.

Thais lapillus only one marked specimen was
found during the entire summer.

Taking into consideration mortality and unre-
covered living snails, it seems apparent that adult
Urosalpinx has little tendency to migrate, but in
the case of Thais no conclusions can be drawn.
All of the recovered individuals iand in addition
new unmarked specimens collected in the same
restricted region were then freshly painted in
order to continue the study for another year.

A second experiment has been pursued on the
stimulating effect of crowding on the cleavage of
echinoderm eggs, and this will be continued dur-
ing the summer of 1932.

—Elizabeth M. Heiss.

ANATOMY AND REGENERATION IN THYONE

It was shown by the work of A. S. Pearse* and
J. W. Scott} that the holothurian, Thyone briar-
eus, will undergo extensive autotomy, including
tentacles, lantern, oesophagus, stomach, intestine,
water-vascular ring, Polian vesicle and nerve
ring, and may regenerate all of these organs. The
present study is concerned with (1) the stimuli
which will induce self-mutilation, (2) the origin
and description of the regenerated tissues, and
(3) the effect of restricted cloacal pumping upon
regeneration.

Immersion in dilute solutions of the hydroxides
and carbonates of potassium and sodium, and
electrical stimulation applied to the muscles of the
body wall, brought about autotomy. The best re-
sults were obtained by immersing the Thyone
in very dilute ammonia water (1 part 7N
NH,OH :800 parts sea water). Autotomy took
place within 30 seconds. The animal was then
transferred to fresh sea-water. 150 Thyone
were eviscerated by the ammonia method. In-96
per cent of the possible cases the animals lived
until killed for examination of the regenerated
parts.

Having this satisfactory method of inducing
evisceration, it has been a simple matter to obtain
Thyone in any stage of regeneration. A study
of the regenerated tissues is now in progress.

In Thyone the respiratory trees are attached
to the cloaca. These organs are supplied with
fresh water taken in through the cloaca. The
posterior ends of 12 Thyone were sewed shut
immediately following autotomy. These animals
were all dead at the end of four days. A com-
parison is being made of the rate of regenera-
tion in these animals deprived of the function of
the respiratory trees with the rate in those ani-
mals having full use of these organs.

* Pearse, A. S., ’09, Autotomy in Holothurians, Bio-
logical Bulletin, Vol. XVIII, No. 1.

—FRrRAnK R. Kite.

EFFECT OF SULFHYDRAL COMPOUNDS ON
THE RATE OF CLEAVAGE

F. S. Hammett on the basis of a considerable
body of evidence advanced the theory in 1929 that
sulfhydral compounds are chemical stimuli for
cell division.

We tried to test out this theory using the eges
of Arbacia as our material. If was first neces-
sary to perfect a technique which would permit
of measuring small differences in the rate of
cleavage. By carefully controlling the tempera-
ture and the concentration of eggs, by using eggs
from only one female and by making counts of
1000, we were able to detect ia statistically signifi-
cant difference of 5% between the percentage
cleaved in control and experimental.

One and the same concentration of a sulfhydral
compound may slightly accelerate, inhibit or
exert no effect whatsoever on the rate of cleay-
age. The variable in these experiments is the
female whose eggs are used. That is to say, eggs
from different females respond differently to these
sulfhydral compounds. This great variability in the
material has been previously pointed by Goldforb.
It is indeed very striking in our experiments.

This variability which we did not expect does
not permit us to come to any definite conclusions
as yet as to the effect of sulfhydral compounds.
However the indications are quite clear that they
are not chemical stimuli for cell division in Ar-
bacia punctulata. —Davw E, GREEN.

THE OXIDATION-REDUCTION POTENTIAL IN
__ STARFISH EGGS

~~ AS modified Thiinberg technique was devised

whereby the oxidation-reduction potential of star-
fish eggs could be measured with facility. We
confirmed completely with one exception the mi-
cro-injection experiments of Chambers, Pollack
and Cohen. The aerobic rH for pH 7 lies be-
tween 12 and 14, while the anaerobic rH lies
below 4.

The kinetics of reduction has been studied
quantitatively and the relationship between the
rH of the dye and the ease of reduction worked
out.

A very interesting result of our study is the
finding that narcotics do not interfere with the
reducing mechanisms of the cell. It is generally
assumed that they have an inhibitory action. Fur-
ther, eggs which have been cytolized are pro-
foundly affected by narcotics. This discrepancy
in behavior between intact and cytolyzed eggs is
being further investigated.

—Davin FE. GREEen.

290 EEE:

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 50

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

\WiebdeOidall sh Aacadoucuboope aoe socuuCo cho 5 Editor

Assistant Editors
Margaret S. Griffin Mary Eleanor Brown

Annaleida S. Cattell

EDITORIAL NOTES

The briefer research reports which have been
included in Tue Correctinc Net during the
summer have been based on the papers presented
in the scientific meetings at the Marine Biologica
Laboratory. Many of these articles contain the
results of unpublished work and must be con-
sidered as preliminary reports. We consider our-
selves fo-tunate in having the privilege of print-
ing this original material. The longer contribu-
tions by Drs. Michaelis, Parker, Spemann, Hisaw,
Clark and Stockard are based on the evening lec-
tures which they presented during the summer.

The cost of publishing THe Cortectinc Net
is abcut $3,000.00 each summer. This figure
is probably not much greater than the expesse
that would be entailed by the Marine Biological
Laboratory if it undertook the separate publica-
tion of the lectures and seminar reports in book
form. If the material were incorporated in the
Biological Bulletin, the cost probably would be
much less.

The income from advertising meets somewhat
more than two-thirds of the cost of publication
of our magazine. The scientific workers in
Wocds Hole should be under obligation to the
manufacturers of, and dealers in, scientific ap-
paratus and books whose advertising in THE
CottectinG Net made possible the prompt pub-
lication of the results of the research work car-
ried out in their local laboratories.

Five one-hundred dollar scholarships have been
made available through THe CoLLectinc NET
for students to return next summer as beginning
investigators. The research grants will be as-
signed by a committee composed of the follow-
ing men:

Professor E. C. McClung

Professor Alfred C. Redfield

Professor I. F. Lewis.

During the summer we have heard people re-
mark :

(1) That the fence on the Bay Shore beach
should be removed.

(2) That the Police Department should not
permit parking on both sides of Main Street in
Woods Hole.

(3) That equipment for the electrical ampli-
fication of the voice of speakers be installed in
the auditorium of the Marine Biological Labora-
tory.

(4) That the variety and quality of the food
served at the Mess Hall should be improved.

(5) That the M. B. L. Club needs a coat of
paint.

To the Editor: *

Some time ago, we understand, there was trouble
over the matter of late comers at meals, and the
serving time was accordingly lengthened by fifteen
minutes. Instead of helping the situation, it seems
merely to have aggravated it. Certain people still
persist in arriving at the tail end of the hour, expect
ing the best of service, and taking all the time they
wish with their food. This letter is not a protest
against the occasional late guest; it is not a pro-
test against the scientist who frequently has to
stand by his apparatus for a certain length of time,
meal-time or not meal-time. It is a protest, how-
ever, on the part of the waiters of the Mess, against
those who, apparently for no reason, make this a
part of their daily routine. It would seem, in due
fairness to all concerned, that these people should
remember that we are not waiters by vocation, but
biologists of a more or less embryonic nature. The
majority of us came here for work—but in the lab-
oratory, not the Mess. We feel that in most cases
this habitual tardiness is due merely to thought-
lessness or to the fact that these people do not
realize that to have late people at our tables means
a considerable delay for us.

Moreover, the salary is far from enticing as it is:
seven dollars a week (which just clears our board
for us), remuneration for some thirty-one hours’
work (1our and a half hours per day under the best
conditions), means a wage of akout 22.6 cents per
Lour.

Often it is more than necessary that some of us
work part of our way here, and this position is prac-
tically the only opportunity available at the M. B.
L. tor obtaining any financial aid. In fact, the
cuestion of whether or not we appear at Woods
Hole often hangs on the matter cf landing this
position. With these facts in mind, it would seem
luat some could be more considerate.

This communication kas been written in no spirit
of petty criticism, nor has it been prompted by any
individual's actions in particular. 1t has been writ-
ten with the hope taat in thus stating our case for
all to see, a better understanding between the
patrons of the Mess and the waiters might be at-
tained and that, in so doing, a rather needlessly un-
pleasant situation could be bettered.

PAUL A. WALKER,
E. G. STANLEY BAKER,
JOHN T. CROLY,
HERBERT L. EASTLUCK,
PAUL A. NICOLL.
* Limited space has made it necessary to omit part
of this communication.

———

er

ae

Aueust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

291

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Professor H. S. Jennings and his family sailed
for Japan in July, stopping in Hawaii en route.
He has arrived in Tokyo, where he will be a
lectu er at the Medical School of Keio University,
Yotsuya, Tokyo. His son, Burridge, will take
courses at the university there, and will return
later to Johns Hopkins University. Professor
and Mrs. Jennings expect to visit Europe before
returning to the United States in September,
1932.

Miss Edwina Morgulis, is taking the leading
part in a play entitled “Game,” which is being
staged for the benefit of the Sandwich hospital.

Dr. Thomas P. Hughes, who is now holding a
position at the Rockefeller Institute, has been
appointed to the International Health Board of
the Rockefeller Foundation.

The U. S. Bureau of Fisheries station at
Woods Hole recently had as their guests Dr. R.
W. Dodgson of the Ministry of Agriculture and
Fisheries at Conway, North Wales; Dr. C. M.
Yonge from the Marine Biological Association
Laboratory, Plymouth, England; and Dr. John
Eyre from Guy’s Hospital and the Fishmongers
Company, London. They came down with Dr.
H. D. Pease and Mr. A. S. Phillips of the Pease
Lakoratories in New York City. These men, to-
gether with Dr. Paul S. Galtsoff, had come down
from Sayville, Long Island, where they attended
the joint convention of the National Shellfisheries
Association and the Oyster Growers and Dealers
Association of North America, Inc.

Professor Charles Lawrence Bristol, professor
emeritus of biology at New York University, died
recently at his home on Long Island.

Dr. Kenneth B. Coldwater has been appointed
instructor in biology at St. Louis University. He
has held the same position at the University of
Missouri since 1928.

The officers of the M. B. L. Club wish to call
attention to the fact that their series of victrola
concerts have been mrde possible through the gen-
erosity of a few persons who have permitted the
use of their records for this purpose. They take
this opportunity of expressing sincere apprecia-
tion to Dr. Grundfest. whose records of Bach,
Beethoven, Brahms, Mozart. and Sibelius have
furnished the music for many of the concerts, and
whose suggestions and criticisms have facilitate
the planning of programs. They are indebted to
Mr. McGoun, for the Gilbert and Sullivan operas,
to Dr. deRenyi for many of the shorter record-
ings, also to Miss Wilson, Dr. Wolf and Dr.
Borodin.

THE OFFICIAL MEETING OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

At the annual meeting of the Trustees of the
Marine Biological Laboratory, Drs. E. G. Conklin
and Charles Packard were elected to serve on the
Executive Committee until 1933. They replace
Drs. G. N. Calkins and L. L. Woodruff whose
terms of office expired this year.

Two amendments were made to Article I of
the By-Laws of the Corporation. The first sen-
tence was altered to read:

I. The annual meeting of the members shall be
held on the second Tuesday in August, at the Lab-
oratory, in Woods Hole, Mass., at 11:30 A. M. day-
light saving time, in each year and at such meeting
shall choose by ballot a Treasurer and a clerk, who
shall be, ex officio, members of the Board of Tru-
tees as hereinafter provided.

The second sentence was altered to read:

“Trustees ex officio and emeritus shall have all
rights of trustees except that trustees emeritus
shall not have the right to vote”

The trustees elected the following individuals to

membership in the Corporation :

Philip Bard, Assistant Professor of Physiology, Har-
vard Medical School.

H. B. Bigelow, Director, Oceanographic Institution,
Woods Hole.

R. K. Cannan, Professor of Chemistry, University
and Bellevue Hospital Medical College.

R. W. Gerard, Associate Professor of Physiology,
University of Chicago.

Laurence Irving, Associate Professor of Physiology,
University of Toronto.

E. O. Jordan, Professor of Bacteriology, University
of Chicago.

B. P. Kaufmann, Professor of Biology, University
of Alabama.

O. W. Richards, Instructor in Biology, Yale Uni-
versity.

Dorothy R. Stewart, Assistant Professor of Biology,
Skidmore College.

Albert Tyler, Instructor in Embryology, California
Institute of Technology.

Emil Witschi, Professor of Zoology, University of
Iowa.

At the annual meeting of the Corporation the
following members of the Corporation were
elected to serve as trustees until 1935:

Drs. H. C. Bumpus, G. N. Calkins, W. C. Curits,
B. M. Duggar, L. V. Heilbrunn, W. J. V. Oster-
hout, W. M. Wheeler and L. L. Woodruff.

Dr. H. B. Goodrich was elected trustee to serve
until 1933, replacing Dr. E. P. Lyon who pre-
sented his resignation. Dr. Charles Packard was
elected Clerk of the Corporation and Mr. Law-
rason Riggs, Jr., was reelected Treasurer.

Captain Columbus Iselin of the Atlantis has
gone to his home in New York City for a few
days. He will return to Woods Hole next week.

292 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. VI. No. 50

ITEMS OF INTEREST

A PLAY ON PENZANCE POINT

“The Queen’s Husband”, a comedy by Robert
Emmet Sherwood, will be presented by the Pen-
zance Players on Friday evening, September 11,
at “Gladheim’, the residence of Dr. and Mrs. J.
P. Warbasse on Penzance Point. The perform-
ance will begin promptly at 8:15.

The play enjoyed ja very successful run 02
Broadway several years ago and since has be-
come exceedingly popular with amateurs. The
scene is laid in a mythical kingdom situated on an
island in the North Sea. The play is built up
around the efforts of the imperious Queen, who
is obviously modelled after Queen Marie of Rou-
mania, to manage her husband and the Kingdom
as well as to arrange a “perfectly marvelous
match” for her daughter.

The cast includes Margaret Kidder, Vera War-
basse, Alfred Compton, Frederick and Preston
Copeland, Thomas Ratcliffe, Arthur and Wister
Meigs, Comstock Glaser, George Clowes, William
Woglum, and John Frost. Miss S. Goldie Bal-
four is directing the production.

No admission will be charged but a collection
will be taken up to cover necessary expenses and
the surplus proceeds given to the COLLECTING
Net Scholarship Fund. It is hoped that everyone
who can will come and enjoy it as much as the
players have, at the same time helping a desery-
ing cause to which Woods Holers have not had
an opportunity to contribute before this season.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buz-
zards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date

Aug.
Aug.
Aug.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.

In each case the current changes approximately
six hours later and runs from the Sound to the
Bay. It must be remembered that the schedule
printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro-
longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the
current to occur a half an hour earlier or later

than the time given above. |

WOODS HOLE AT THE FLOWER SHOW

It is worthy of note that several of the Woods
Hole amateur gardeners carried off honors at the
annual Flower Show in Falmouth in August. In
addition to a number of awards to Mrs. C. R.
Crane for flowers and vegetables, Dr. Manton
Copeland, Miss Tinkham, and Mrs. Clowes re-
ceived special prizes for exceptional exhibits.
Miss Tinkham won the state Blue Ribbon by a
charming group to show phlox. A bee-hive was
set among a riot of phlox in a corner of fence
made of ingeniously stained and aged rails and
posts, forming a picture characteristic of the ex-
hibitor’s mastery of the garden. Mrs. Clowes also
won several first prizes for her taste and rare
deftness and skill in beautiful special arrange-
ments of flowers,

The exhibit of a miniature rock garden show-
ing the variations in Cedums revealed one zoolo-
gist as indeed worthy of his title, Professor of
Biology, a chair rapidly becoming a rarity. Be
it noted, however, that some of our greatest zo-
ologists have been constantly devoted to the study
of plants. Dr. Manton Copeland was voted a
special Bronze Medal, ‘“‘State Award”, even
though he was not down as a competitor for
prizes and exhibited merely because of interest in
helping out. This award witnessed the generous
appreciation of the professionals of the Flower
Show for the lessons so adroitly, if unconsciously,
taught by this amateur gardener but still scien-
tific thinker. Here were suggestions of how to
teach something of the scientific meaning and re-
lations of the plants shown, while at the same time
sacrificing nothing of practical value for what
might be called academic.

Indeed the method of arrangement and labeling
by inconspicuous, tasteful markers was excep-
tionally effective.

Dr. Copeland selected the single genus Cedum
and gave a surprising lesson in botany and art
by arranging its varieties among the rocks in
adaptive groups and instructive contrasts. Here
was presented an astonishing range of variation
in one genus, a scientific study which should he
seen widely abroad. In showing it the exhibitor
demonstrated a practical experience in gardening
and in artistic expression built on his scientific
studies, every whit as convincing as the very
creditable miscellaneous exhibits of his profes-
sional collengues. They might well learn from
him something of the value of scientific method.
Such is the reaction of an appreciative amateur
visitor. —H. McE. K.

ee

Avucust 29, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 293

SPENCER tQhTipns

OUTFITS

SUPERIOR MODELS

UNIVERSAL BINOCULAR
MICROSCOPES

INo@s, 55 and) 56

Convertible:
No. 55---as illustrated with horseshoe base.
No. 56---the stage and above that omitting base.

Equipped with
MULTIPLE
NOSEPIECE

A new, original, patented objective
changer which carries three pairs of

low power objectives and which re-
volves like an ordinary triple nosepiece.
The objectives may be removed in-

stantly and others substituted.

The objectives on the nosepiece are dust proof and the worker can easily get to them to
clean them.

These microscopes have a very large stage 100 m/m x 100 mjm. Objects in the center
of a dish 50 m,;m high and 130 mym in diameter may be brought into the lines of vision.

The rack and pinion movement together with the adjustability of the arm on the slide per-
mit the focusing on very thick objects. The large mirror (62 mym diameter) is sufficient
to illuminate the large fields of the lower power objectives.

——_

294

(MBaB,

COLLECTING

NET

Photo-Micrographic
Ocular “Phoku”

Attachable to any standard micro-
scope. The specimen is continually
under observation, even during ex-
posure, Optically and mechanically
correct, negatives of exact defini-
tion are obtained, which may sub-
sequently be enlarged four or five
diameters, without apparent loss of
sharpness.

By means of the Phoku Photo-
graphic records are made of speci-
mens examined, with a minimum
expenditure of time and money. It
may be used with equal facility for
photographing opaque (including
metallurgical) and transparent ob-
jects.

Price $108 f. 0. b. N. Y.

Suitsble Zeiss Microscopes for use
with the PHOKU may be had from
$132 and upward.

CARL ZEISS, INc.

485 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles, Calif.

grrr er
Fe hes a Vaan hah PSNI GEOL KARR aS Ad

COLUMBIA

PARAFFIN OVEN

This is a safe, efficient, simple and inex-
pensive paraffin oven; for individual or small
class use, admirably adapted to supply all the
necessary conditions for infiltration, embedding,
spreading and drying. This oven was designed
by Dr. C. E. Tharaldsen, of Northwestern Uni-
versity, in an endeavor to overcome the skhort-
comings of existing paraffin ovens for indi-
vidual or student use. It is compact, portable
and fool-proof from the standpoint of break-
age or fire. It is sufficiently inexpensive so
that an institution can afford to place one on
each desk, and may be used with equal ef-
ficiency for both fine cytological and larger
Listological objects and for plant or animal
tissue. It combines in one piece of apparatus
an infiltration and embedding oven, a section
spreader, and slide drier. It is heated by two
carbon lamps with temperature controlled by
the use of Dim-a-lite sockets and adjustabie
ventilator in rear. Paraffin compartments and
pipettes are maintained at a uniform tempera-
ture at all times.

1362 PARAFFIN OVEN—Columbia. As des-
cribed above; of heavy sheet metal with
black japan finish, and furnished on heavy
wooden base; complete with cord and plug,
but without glassware for 110 volts. . 20.00

13637 PARAFFIN OVEN—Co‘umbia. Similar
to above, but for 220 volts.......--. 22.09

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER, NY.

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

Avcust 29, 1931 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 295

LEGZ

WIDE FIELD MICROSCODE

A New Model with

AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE
OBJECTIVE NOSEDIECE

In connection with Wide Field Binocular Microscopes
of other make, the one or other method of interchang-
ing objectives has been offered.. These were found to
have shortcomings in being either restricted to the use
of special objectives or to a limited number of them.

The Leitz Works have succeeded in providing an

AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE OBJECTIVE NOSEPIECE
WHICH PERMITS THE USE OF THE STANDARD
PAIRED OBJECTIVES

This multiple Objective Nosepiece provides an auto-
matic interchange of three pairs of objectives at one time.
The prism body, resembling in its general construction
the bedy of the well-known series of Leitz Wide Field
Binocular Microscopes, is provided with oculars of large
diameter. To this body is atttached the Automatic
Multiple Objective Nosepiece. A pair cf objectives IX is
permanently mounted to the nosepiece while two dove-
tailed tracks serve to accommodate any two pairs of ob-
jectives of the available series..

The track on which the objective carriage glides is provided with three stops. When sliding
the carriage back and forth to change from one objective to another, the carriage spring engages
these stops. The right hand side of the objective carriage is equipped with a spring handle. Upon
releasing this handle, the carriage automatically moves forward to be arrested at the next stop,
thus placing the secend objective into the optical center. The same procedure is repeated for
placing the third objective in position. The backward motion of the objective carriage is ac-
complished in an identical manner; each of the three objectives can successively be located within
the optical field. , ; : ;

An important feature is offered by the rapid and exceedingly simple manner in which the
change from one objective to another is accomp!isked, this by means of @ spring arresting the
objective automatically within the optical center. The convenience of this device can readily be
appreciated through actual use of the microsce pe. Fis ;

A permanent alignment of the optical system is assured by means of the rigid mounting by
which the objectives are attached to the carriage and furthermcre, the fact that, when shifting
the objectives, they are not touched by hand and not the least pressure is exerted upon them or
upon the optical axis, respectively.

We believe that with the intreduction of this Automatic Nose-
piece, we have contributed materially towards enhancing the use-
fulness of wide Field Binocular Microscopes.

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET NO. 1183 (CN) in which five different microscope models equipped
with the Automatic Multiple Objective Nosepiece are listed:

evel ii Z, hac

60 East 10th Street New York, N. Y.

THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vor. VI. No.

STANDARD S@IEN TIFIC

ASTA
PARAFFIN
OVEN

This oven which was demonstrated,
can now be loaned for laboratory
use.

Apply to Dr. Pond at the apparatus
room. 2106,

SUPPLY CORE

Biological, Bacteriological and Chemical Apparatus, Naturalists’ Supplies, Specimens,

Skeletons, Anatomical Models, Wall Charts,

Glass

Jars, Microscopes

and Accessories.

10-14 WEST 25th STREET

Recently Published

Biology
in Human Affairs

Edited by Epwarp M. East
399 pages, 6 + 9, $3.50

A WHITTLESEY HOUSE PUBLICATION

Ai HIS book is a survey of the outposts of
biological knowledge. In it, twelve leading
scientists tell what has been accomplished in
the fields of heredity, genetics, medicine,
zcology, public health, psychology—even in
the preservation and development of food re-
sources. What has been achieved in these
fields and the problems which at present con-
front the research worker are clearly and
strikingly set forth. It is a serious book in
tended for people who find satisfaction in the
disentanglement of the riddles of the universe
in which we live.

Send for a copy on approval

McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc.
870 SEVENTH AVENUE NEW YORK

NEW YORK CITY

ECOLOGY
All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920. Quarterly. Official Publication of the
Ecological Society of America. Subscription, $4 a year
for complete volumes (Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes
at the single number rate. Back volumes, as_avyail-
able, $5 each. Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Foreign

postage: 20 cents.
GENETICS
A Periodical Record of Investigations bearing on
Heredity and Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly. :

Subscription, $6 a year for complete volumes (Jan. to
Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number rate.
Single numbers, $1.25 post free. Back volumes, as avail-
able, $7.00 each. Foreign postage: 50 cents.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY
Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science

Established 1914. Monthly, except August and Sep-
tember. Official Publication of the Botanical Society of
America, Subscription, $7 a year for complete volumes
(Jan. to Dec.) Parts of volumes at the single number
rate. Volumes 1-18 complete, as available, $146. Single
numbers, $1.00 each, post free. Prices of odd volumes
on request. Foreign postage: 40 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume I: 33 contributions by various authors on
genetics, pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant
geography, and systematic botany. Price, $3.50 plus
postage.

Volume II: The vegetation of Long Island. Part 1.
The vegetation of Montauk, etc. By Norman ‘Taylor.
Pub. 1923. 108 pp. Price, $1.00. .

Vol. Ill: The vegetation of Mt. Desert Island, Maine,
and its environment. By Barrington Moore and Nor-
man Taylor. 151 pp., 27 text-figs., vegetation map in
colors. June 10, 1927. Price, $1.60.

Orders should be placed with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
1000 Washington Ave. Brooklyn, N. Y., U. S. A.

50

Lee eA

|
|

ptm Pe mange gt

_

Aucust 29, 1931 ] THE COLLECTING NET 297

This well-known instrument
posesses the advantages of ex-
treme sensitivity, short period
and negligible self induction or
capacity. It is largely used for
physical and physiological in-
vestigation. Several typts are

furnished.

Full information
on request.

Type “BR”
Type “B” shown above has a readily ( AMBRIDGE
interchangeable string —_ suspension
which makes possible “quick replace- INSTRUMENT. C9 IN¢

ment of strings of different charac-

teristics Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments
“eed 3512 Grand Central Terminal, New York

Turtox Products

for
Biolog
APPARATUS FOR BIOLOGY LIFE HISTORIES
BOTANICAL MATERIAL LIVING SPECIMENS
CHARTS MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT MUSEUM PREPARATIONS
CULTURES PARASITOLOGY MATERIAL
DISSECTIONS RESEARCH SERVICE
EMBRYOLOGICAL SPECIMENS SERVICE DEPARTMENT
ENTOMOLOGICAL SPECIMENS SKELETONS
INJECTED MATERIAL STAINS AND REAGENTS
For Comparative Anatomy TAXIDERMY
JEWELL MODELS ZOOLOGICAL MATERIAL

LANTERN SLIDES

New Catalogs Ready in September

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated
761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

The Sign of the Turtox CHICAGO
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

298

THE COLLECTING NET

Church of the Messiah

(Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion . 8:00 a.m.
Morning Prayer . 11:00 a.m.
Hvenines Prayer... 30)... 4. 7:30 p.m.

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

Cape Ced Distributors for
Draper Maynard Sporting Goods

SPECIAL PRICES TO CLUBS
Falmouth Tel. 407

GOLD X

Non-Corrosive

* Non-Corrosive
MICROSCOPIC
SLIDES *« COVER GLASSES
Do Not Fog
At your dealer’s, or write (giving dealer’s name) to

Crax-ApAms Company

117-119 Mast 24th Street NeW x,ORK

HEADQUARTERS FOR

STEEL FILING CABINETS, SAFES
AND OFFICE FURNITURE

LOOSE LEAF BOOKS AND FIGURING BOOKS
FOR ANY KIND OF BUSINESS

Callanan & Archer Co., Inc.
WHOLESALE STATIONERS

10-14 So. Second St. New Bedford, Mass.

SEAL

Visit
Malchman’s

THE
LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE
ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

TEXACO PRODUCTS
NORGE REFRIGERATORS

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

Marine Biological
Laboratory
Supply Department

FOR THE BEST
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
LIVE MATERIAL

Catalogues and information furnished by
applying at Supply Department Office
oods Hole, Mass.

[ Vor. VI. No. 50

Avucust 29, 1931 ]

EE ES SS

Hk COLLECTING

NET

299

A Strong Group
OF

Textbooks in Biology

TEXTBOOK OF GENERAL ZOOLOGY
By Winterton C. Curtis
and Mary J. Guthrie
Both of the University of Missouri
“"...delightfully clear and up-to-date, and the
first notable example of modern educational de-
velopments effectively applied in Biology text-
making. It is a valuable contribution to the
pedagogics of Zoology.”
585 pages 6 by 9 Price, $3.75
+
LABORATORY DIRECTIONS IN
GENERAL ZOOLOGY

By W. C. Curtis and M. J. Guthrie

These directions are intended to accompany the
“Text of General Zoology”. The book presents a
“principles’”’ course rather than a phylum course,
following the same method used in the General
Zoology.
194 Pages 6 by 9 Paper Cover. Price, $1.50

+

HISTOLOGICAL TECHNIQUE
By B. F. Kingsbury and O. A. Johannsen
Both of Cornell University

This is a guide for use in a laboratory course
in Histology. It presents a refined method of
analysis from the chemico-physical as well as
the morphological aspect, and the interpretation
of morphology in terms of physiology.

142 pages 6 by 9 Price, $2.25
aa

INTRODUCTION TO VERTEBRATE
EMBRYOLOGY
By Waldo Shumway
University of Illinois

SECOND EDITION

The distinctive feature of this text is the use
of two methods, of presentation—the comparative
method, employed in lectures and reading, and
the sequential method utilized in the laboratory
work. This combination has produced a text
which is both practical and teachable.

311 pages 6 by 9 Price, $3.75

TEXTBOOK OF GENERAL BIOLOGY
By Waldo ‘Shumway

“_...a fresh survey of modern Biology es-
pecially designed for those who do not plan to
specialize in Botany or Zoology.” The book is
designed for a course of one semester or two
terms.

361 pages

6 by 9 Price, $3.00

+

ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN EMBRYOLOGY
By Gideon S. Dodd
School of Medicine, West Virginia University

This is a complete and scientific textbook spe-
cifically adapted to the needs of medical students
and premedical students. It is essentially a hu-
man rather than a comparative embryology.

316 pages 534 x 9 Price, $4.00
+
HOMOIOTHERMISM

By A. S. Pearse and F. G. Hall
Both of Duke University

This book treats thoroughly and in a most
interesting manner that branch of biology which
deals with the origin and the evolution of ther-
mal adjustment of warm-blooded animals. A
valuable bibliography is included at the end of
the book.

119 pages

6 by 9 Price, $2.00

+
OUTLINE OF COMPARATIVE EMBRYOLOGY
By Aute Richards
University of Oklahoma
To be published October Ist.

This is the only book in English to present the
principles of early development and the relations
of different types to each other for the entire
anime) kingdom. It will be particularly valu-
able for College-of-Arts courses and as a prepara-
tion for medical courses.

Probable Price, $5.00

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 FOURTH AVENUE, NEW YORK, N. Y.

Spalteholz
Transparent
Preparations

Human

and
Zoological -
sal Bl DA

Model of Human Heart

E & A MODEL

Yandell Henderson
Syringe Gas Analyser

Used in the Oxygen tent treatment of pneu-
monia, but useful for other rapid approxi-
mate gas analyses also.

Degree of Accuracy 1% for Oxygen and

0.5% for Carkon Dioxide.

This Apparatus, as described in Journal A.
M.A. May 2, 1931, “Gas Analysis with an
All-Glass Syringe for Pneumonia Tests” by
Yandell Henderson, Ph.D. and L. A. Green-
here, New Haven, Conn. ..12.00

Write for further information.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and
Chemical Reagents

Incorporated 1897

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
New York, N. Y.

$$

THE COLLECTING

Models, Specimens,

for
anatomy, embryology, ete.
logs will gladly be sent on request.

Visit our New and Greatly
larged Display Rooms and Museum

NET [ Vor. VI. No.

50

Skeleton of Fish in Case

Charts

physiology, zoology, botany,

Cata-

Please mention name of school
and subjects taught, to enable
us to send the appropriate
catalog.

En-

Life History
of Chick

Cray-ApAms CompANy
117-119 EAST 24th STREET

Sane

The Wistar Institute Slide Tray

— Pe

= ——

The ideal tray for displaying or storing slides.
It carries forty-eight 1-inch, thirty-two 11.-
inch, or twenty-four 2-inch slides, and every
slide is visible at a glance. Owing to the
nesting feature, the trays may be stacked so
that each one forms a dust-proof cover for
the one beneath it, while the center ridges as-
sure protection to high mounts. Made en-
tirely of metal, they are unbreakable and
easily kept clean. They form compact stor-
age units. Twelve hundred 1-inch slides may
be filed in a space fourteen inches square by
eight inches high. PRICE, $1.00 EACH
Orders may be sent to
THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-sixth Street and Woodland Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.

NEW YORK

Aucust 29, 1931 ]

The UNIVERSITY PLAYERS, Inc.
Present “THE STRAW HAT”
AUG. 31 — SEPT. 5
LABOR DAY MATINEE and EVENING
“THE SILENT HOUSE”
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
For Reservations Call Falmouth 1250

FITZGERALD, INC.

A Man’s Store
— MEN’S WEAR —

Colonial Buiding Tel. 935 Main Street
Falmouth
DRESSES — LINENS — LACES

Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden, Coty
Yardley
Chcice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

The MRS. G. L. NOYES LAUNDRY
Collections Daily

Two Collections Daily in the Dormitories

Woods Hole Tel. 777
Service that Satisfies

FOLLOW THE CROWD TO

DANIEL’S

HOME-MADE ICE CREAM,
DELICIOUS SANDWICHES
COFFEE PICNIC LUNCHES

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE
REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

—_—

SAMUEL CAHOON
Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Woods Hole and Falmouth

FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND
HARDWARE CO.

Agency for
LYNN OIL RANGE BURNER
Falmouth, opp. the Public Library Tel. 260

ri COMEC CIN GIN Ea 301

COMPLETE SETS OF

The Collecting Net

FOR LAST YEAR
ARE FOR SALE AT $2.00

THE COLLECTING NET
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

BIOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL, MEDICAL
AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC MAGAZINES
IN COMPLETE SETS
Volumes and Back Date Copies For Sale
EST. 1887
B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.

29 EAST 21st STREET NEW YORK

Compliments of

PENZANCE GARAGE
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Day or Night
Phone 652

A. L. A.
Towing

N. E. TSIKNAS
FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

LADIES’ and GENTS’ TAILORING
Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY

G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass

302 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No. 50

INTERNATIONAL
CENTRIFUGES

Many types offering a large variety
of equipment of tubes and a wide
range of speed and consequent
relative centrifugal force.

International Equipment Co.
352 WESTERN AVENUE
BOSTON, MASS.

Books in Biology

are on sale at

THESCOLLECTING NEV “@ines

We are also prepared to obtain any available book

Each time a book is sold, all of the agent’s commission will be
turned over to

THE COLLECTING NET Scholarship Fund

Avcust 29, 1931 ] Eb COLLECTING NET 303

Accuracy
Where it
Counts

The unvaryingly high quality of B & L
Biological Colorimeters is not a matter of
chance. Starting in Bausch & Lomb’s own
optical glass plant, the largest in America,
every operation is controlled by experts
working to the most exacting standards of

precision. Every part is inspected and
tested many times. Optical and mechanical
2500 Biological Colorimeter perfection is the natural result.

The 2500 Biological Colorimeter is equipped with an optical system which
transmits a maximum amount of light and provides a dividing line that is
practically invisible. The separable cups are both adjustable, cne being
actuated by rack and pinion. The instrument is an embodiment throughout
of characteristic B & L Quality and precision.

Write for catalog H-23 for a description of this and other B & L Colorimeters.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL COMPANY lg

675St. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York

GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
@LOMB ,

BAUSCH EéLOMB

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

304 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. VI. No: 50

99 Quoting remark of a school super-

“le-saved us the cost of 5 microscopes sic sani Ge

“PROMI” MICROSCOPIC DRAWING and
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Takes the place of numerous microscopes
and gives the instructor the opportunity of
teaching with greatest efficiency and least
confusion.

Projects microscopic slides and living or-
ganisms and insects on table or wall for
drawing and demonstration. Also used as
a microscope and a micro-photographic ap-
paratus,

The Promi, recently perfected by a prom-
inent German microscope works, is an in-
genicus yet simple apparatus which fills a
long felt want in scientific instruction and
research in Bactericlogy, Botany, Zoology,
Pathology, Anatomy, Embryology, Histol-
ogy, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many leading
scientists and instructors.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or
screen, microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and
instruction. Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultane-
ously. Invaluable for instructors in focusing students’ attention on important features, which can-
not be demonstrated with equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye
strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is pro-
jected in actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise de-
tail in black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Ad-
justment of the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is
projected. Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and our high power ob-
jectives, Charts can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting
the apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of
standard microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living or-
ganisms and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: IF. O. B. New York $100.09 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. In-
cludes bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC cur-
rent, 11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices
on request. Prospectus gladly sent on request

THE “PROMAR” MICROSCOPIC DRAW-
ING and PROJECTION APPARATUS
A new instrument which has been brought

out in response to a demand for a simple

apparatus like the Promi for more advanced
work which requires more powerful illumi-
nation and higher magnification. The Pro-
mar operates in the same manner as the

Promi but is more heavily constructed and

has the following additional features as

standard equipment:

More brilliant lighting, making higher magnification possible.
Triple nose piece, facilitating use of three objectives.

Fine and coarse adjustment for focusing.

Screw, rack and pinion adjustment for light and condenser.
Screw centering adjustment for light. Revolving stage.

ht aie, eee ere
CuAyv-A\pAms CompANy

117-119 East 24th Street NEW YORK, N. Y.

Prospectus Gladly Sent on Request. Write to

va

ee
ne aastge

SaIpTsStgiy Me leiel4|
HH ah i
ele tel .

232)
a ny

wo

nti ATT eats”
i rT bare Taree lt,
the ; i

} tek
shee

Soesbhosanronacates Ta i
nen ig saree erh ‘4 i i i
4 afhi

ses

-)% et

Te hereehidve te)
Neha ae

pig ey Tea

rast
ie ay

Hin
n?
ts

oe,

Seat eee. ‘
4 ew PSS, ~
Sesser

¥
res

SS

i
$
Te hate
WIL
ipa? si
reatele ls
PU

wiepretone”
mire aes
reas

S

Deyaterts
ESSN

ests

a3
‘see
=

Sratgiaeeeene®
} seed eons
eee

=
ee a
=

~

_

eee ry rr

ari

so